Map Ug
Uploaded by
marius1979Map Ug
Uploaded by
marius1979Autodesk Map® 3D 2007
User's Guide
April 2006
Copyright© 2006 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES
SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE
MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.
Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this
product at the time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.
Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,
3December.com, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, AEC-X, Alias, Alias (swirl
design/logo), Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk
Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP,
AutoSketch, Backdraft, Bringing information down to earth, Buzzsaw, CAD Overlay, Can You Imagine, Character Studio,
Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Civil 3D, Cleaner, Combustion, Create>what's>Next (design/logo), DesignStudio, Design|Studio
(design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), EditDV, Education by Design, FBX, Filmbox, Gmax, Heidi,
HOOPS, i-drop, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, ObjectARX, Open Reality,
PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), ProjectPoint, RadioRay, Reactor, Revit, SketchBook, Visual, Visual
Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat,
Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo).
The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD
Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, CAiCE,
Cinestream, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design
Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWFit, DWG Linking, DWG
TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, Gmax (logo), Gmax ready (logo), Heads-up
Design, HumanIK, Incinerator, jobnet, LocationLogic, MotionBuilder, ObjectDBX, Plasma, PolarSnap, Productstream, RealDWG,
Real-time Roto, Render Queue, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Wiretap.
Autodesk Canada Co.Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Discreet,
Fire, Flame, Flint, Flint RT, Frost, Glass, Inferno, MountStone, Riot, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Stream, Vapour, Wire.
The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: Backburner, Multi-Master
Editing.
Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc.
HLM is a trademark of D-Cubed Ltd. HLM (c) Copyright D-Cubed Ltd. 1996-2004.
AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2005 Vantage Software Technologies, Inc.. All rights reserved.
Portions Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
Libpng is copyright (c) 2004 Glenn Randers-Pehrson.
Libtiff is Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler And Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Active Delivery™ 2.0. (c) 1999-2004 Inner Media, Inc. All rights reserved.
Produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide ® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright ©
Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink
and Chemicals, Inc.
International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.
InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved.
Macromedia ® and Flash ® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States or
other countries.
PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified
standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color.
PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002
Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use
only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto
another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product.
Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.
Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung
e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin."
Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992.
Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.
Printed and Help produced with Idiom WorldServer™
Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2006 Macrovision Corporation. All rights reserved.
Stingray is Copyright 1995-2005, Quovadx, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Protected by copyright and licenses restricting use,
copying, distribution and decompilation. The Rogue Wave name and logo and the Stingray name and logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Quovadx, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
Xerces is Copyright © 1999-2005, The Apache Software Foundation. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0; you
may not use this file except in compliance with the license. You may obtain a copy of the license at the following web address:
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered
TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute,
to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).
MrSID image compression format is Copyright © 2005, LizardTech, a division of Celartem,Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID
technology is protected by U.S. Patent No 5,710,835 and patents pending.
Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc.
The OSTN97 coordinate transformation is © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved.
The OSTN02 coordinate transformation is © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved.
The OSGM02 coordinate transformation is © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002.
FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.
Libcurl is Copyright (c) 1996 - 2006, Daniel Stenberg, <[email protected]>. All rights reserved.
The Redland RDF Application Framework is Copyright (C) 2000-2005 Institute for Learning and Research Technology, University
of Bristol. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0; you may not use this file except in compliance with the license.
You may obtain a copy of the license at the following web address: http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
GDAL is Copyright (c) 2000, Frank Warmerdam.
Portions of sample data provided by NAVTEQ. ©NAVTEQ 2001-2006, All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial
Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contents
Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Getting Started with Autodesk Map 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Create, Edit, and Share Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Integrate GIS and CAD Data from Many Sources . . . . . . . . . . 6
Drawing Objects and Geospatial Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Edit Data In Its Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Theme and Analyze Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Send Maps to the Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Post Maps on a Web Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
What's In a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Exploring the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Menus and Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Viewing Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
The Task Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
The Command Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Switching Between Work Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Finding the Information You Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Using the Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Sample Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Viewing the AutoCAD Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
v
Viewing the Readme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Other Sources of Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Printing this Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Copyrights and Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Chapter 2 Workflows for Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Start to Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Create a Map Containing Styled Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . 48
Edit a Map in a Multi-User Feature Source Environment . . . . . . 50
Setting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Setting Up Your Work Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Set Up a Drawing Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Setting Up a Feature Source Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Managing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Move a SHP File to Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, or
Oracle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Transform the Coordinate System of a SHP File . . . . . . . . . . 53
Add a Property to a File-Based Feature Schema . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Adding Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Create a Map from Other Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Import a Map from Another Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Import a Paper Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Combine Maps with Different Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . 57
Attach Data to a Drawing Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Creating and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Find and Edit Geospatial Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Update Your Feature Source with an Object from a
Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Edit Objects in Attached Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Styling and Analyzing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Analyzing Feature Source and Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Creating a Theme To Reveal Patterns in Your Data . . . . . . . . . 63
Display and Analyze Maps with 3D Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Find and Select Features By Attribute and Location . . . . . . . . 65
Users Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Setting Up Your Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Creating New Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Setting Up Object Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Setting Up for Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
vi | Contents
Setting Up Your Map File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Logging Into Autodesk Map 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Assigning Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Attaching Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Setting Up a Query Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Setting Up Annotation Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Setting Up Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Setting Task Pane Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Setting Drawing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Setting Multi-user Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Setting System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Setting Coordinate System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Setting Coordinate Geometry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Setting Data View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Associating Database Versions with File Extensions . . . . . . . 186
Setting Query Options (DWG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Using Associative Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Saving Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Setting Raster Image Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Using Profiles and .ini Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Chapter 4 Accessing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Overview of Accessing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Before You Access Your Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Creating a Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Organizing Layers in Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Accessing Geospatial Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Overview of Feature Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source . . . . . . . . . . 226
Using Features from an ArcSDE Feature Source . . . . . . . . . . 229
Using Features from a SQL Server Feature Source . . . . . . . . . 231
Using Features from a MySQL Feature Source . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Using Features from a SHP Feature Source . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Using Features from an SDF Feature Source . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Using Features from an ODBC Feature Source . . . . . . . . . . 239
Using Features from a WFS Feature Source . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Filtering a Feature Source Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Accessing Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Overview of Selecting Objects for Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Selecting Objects by Drawing Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Selecting Objects by Object Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Selecting Objects by Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Selecting Objects by Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Contents | vii
Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Selecting Objects by Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Combining Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Accessing Raster Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Overview of Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Using Raster-Based Surfaces in Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Using 2D Rasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Using an image from a WMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Image Insertion Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Using Other Raster Image Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Accessing Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Viewing Attribute Data for Spatial Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Using Attribute Data with Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Importing Maps from Other Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Overview of Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Accessing Data vs. Importing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Supported Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Specifying an Area to Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Specifying an AutoCAD Layer During Import . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Assigning an Object Class During Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Performing a Coordinate Conversion During Import . . . . . . . 361
Importing Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Specifying How to Import Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Importing Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Creating Centroids for Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Importing Objects with Links to an External Database . . . . . . 370
Displaying Attribute Data as Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Importing a DXF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Importing Maps from SDF 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Chapter 5 Managing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Overview of Managing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Creating a New Feature Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Creating a New Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Importing and Exporting a Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Viewing a Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Editing a Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Deleting Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Undoing Schema Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Copying Data from One Feature Source to Another . . . . . . . . . . 393
Setting Up Database Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Overview of Visualization and Styling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
viii | Contents
Working With the Display Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Styling Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Understanding Scale Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Defining Scale Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Styling Point Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Styling Line Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Styling Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Adding Labels to Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Allowing Labels to Obscure Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Displaying Fixed Labels at Point Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Saving Styled Feature Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Loading Styled Feature Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Styling Drawing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Overview of Styling Drawing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Styling a Drawing Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Creating a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Combining Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Modifying a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Saving a Display Style in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Referencing a Library Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Defining Scale Thresholds for Drawing Layers . . . . . . . . . . 424
Controlling Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Adding a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Setting Map Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Viewing Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Working with Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Displaying Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Creating New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Checking In Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Checking Out Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Cancelling Check Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Editing in a Multiuser Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Updating Edits Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Working Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Managing Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Working with Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Editing Data in Attached Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Cleaning Up Drawing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Using Map Editing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Digitizing Points Using Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Working with Polygon Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Contents | ix
Adding and Deleting Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Using Object Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Entering Coordinate Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Using Transparent Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Using Angle and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Using Bearing and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . . 681
Using Deflection and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . 682
Using Azimuth and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . 684
Attribute Data and Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
Viewing a Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
Entering and Editing Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
Digitizing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Overview of Digitizing Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Overview of Digitizing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Digitizing Using MAPDIGITIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Attaching Object Data As You Digitize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize . . . . . . . . . 717
Chapter 8 Analyzing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
Overview of Analyzing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
Getting Information About Features and Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
Getting Information about Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Getting Information About Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Measuring and Tracking Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Tracking Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Measuring Geodetic Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Measuring Coordinate Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Creating Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Overview of Creating Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Theming Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
Theming Drawing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Overview of Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Adding and Modifying Contour Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Draping Map Data Over 3D Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
Viewing Surfaces in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
Using Hillshading and Vertical Exaggeration . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect . . . . . 771
Changing Colors in a Themed Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Finding and Selecting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Finding and Selecting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
Analyzing Drawing Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . 855
Performing a Shortest Path Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
Performing a Best Route Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
x | Contents
Performing a Flood Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
Overlaying Two Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
Dissolving a Composite Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
Buffering a Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Querying a Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
Saving a Temporary Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
Overview of Publishing and Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Publishing Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Publish a Map to a Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
Publish to DWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
Publish to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
Publish to a Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
Using eTransmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
Publish to MapGuide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
Publish Map Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Overview of Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
Supported Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Supported Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Exporting Text Enclosed in a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Exporting Polygons from a Polygon Topology . . . . . . . . . . 923
Saving Drawing Objects to a DXF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
Exporting DWG Data as Autodesk MapGuide SDF 2 . . . . . . . 925
Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer . . . . . . . . . . . 927
Sharing Styled Maps with Non Autodesk Map 3D Users . . . . . . . . 928
Exporting and Printing Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
Overview of Exporting Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
Exporting from the Data Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
Printing from the Data View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
Reference Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
Chapter 10 Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Mapping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
Discontinued Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
Wildcard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Improving Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Chapter 11 Expression Evaluator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Arithmetic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Contents | xi
String-Handling Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Equality and Conditional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
Symbol-Handling Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
Conversion Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
Dot Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
Object Data Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
Block Attribute Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
SQL Variables and Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
Object Classification Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
AutoLISP Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
EED Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Using Color in Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Tips and Suggestions for the Expression Evaluator . . . . . . . . . . . 977
Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
Chapter 12 Annotation Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
Annotation Delete Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
Annotation Refresh Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
Annotation Text dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
Annotation Update dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
Define Annotation Template dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
Edit Expression dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
Insert Annotation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
New Annotation Template Name dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986
Chapter 13 Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
Publish to MapGuide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
Expression dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
Define New Object Data Field dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
New Layer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990
SDF Import dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Chapter 14 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
Cleanup Methods Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Error Markers Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Select Actions Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
Drawing Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Select Objects Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
xii | Contents
Chapter 15 Coordinate Systems Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
MAPDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate System dialog box . . . . . . . 1009
Chapter 16 Data Grid Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
Data Grid dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
Chapter 17 Digitizing Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
Data to Attach dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
Digitize Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
Link Template Data Entry dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
Link Template Key Column Entry dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
Chapter 18 Display Manager Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY (Display Library command) . . . . . . . . . . 1023
MAPDISPLAYMANAGER (Display Manager command) . . . . . . . . 1023
Alter Block Insertion dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
Alter Line Format dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
Alter Linetype dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
Alter Lineweight dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
Alter Plotstyle dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
Autodesk Map Contour dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
Copy Scale dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
Define Hatch dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
Define Text dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
Filter (for theming) dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028
Import Old Theme dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
New Scale dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
Number Expression dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
Range of Values dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Select Display Element dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
Source Drawing Scope dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
Style Band dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
Style Label dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
Style Line dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036
Style Point dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
Style Area dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
Text Expression dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
Thematic Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040
Thematic Values dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
Theme dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042
Contents | xiii
Chapter 19 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
ADEFILLPOLYG (Fill Closed Polyline command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
ADERSHEET (Rubber Sheet command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
ADETRANSFORM (Transform command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
MAPLINESTRINGCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053
MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
MAPPOINTCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
MAPPOLYGONCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056
MAPPOLYGONEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
Break Objects at Boundary dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058
Trim Objects at Boundary dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
Chapter 20 External Databases Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
Associate Database Versions dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
Column dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
Column Values dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
Configure Data Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
Connect Data Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1068
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPOD2ASE) . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT) . . . . . . . . . . 1071
Detach Data Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
Disconnect Data Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
Header/Footer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
Link Template Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
Page Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
Select Database Version dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
Select Existing Link Template dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
Select Link Template dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
Select Link Templates dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
Select Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
Sort dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
Table Filter dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
Table Filter History dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
Table Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
Zoom Scale dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082
xiv | Contents
Chapter 21 Object Classification Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects command) . . . . 1085
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (Select Unclassified Objects
command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (Select Undefined Objects command) . . . 1086
Attach Object Class Definition File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
Classified Property List dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
Classify dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
Classify Objects dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087
Color Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
Define Object Classification dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
Layer Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
Linetype Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
Lineweight Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
New Object Class Definition File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
New Property dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
Plotstyle Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
Chapter 22 Data Connect Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
Feature Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
Feature Source Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
Feature Source Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
Feature Source Connection dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
Feature Source Query / Search dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
Filter Condition dialog box (Feature Sources) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Location Condition dialog box (Feature Source Query) . . . . . . . . 1107
Property Condition dialog box (Feature Source Query) . . . . . . . . 1109
Property Values dialog box (Feature Source Query) . . . . . . . . . . 1111
Save Features dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
Save Version dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
View Query Statement dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
Chapter 23 Import Export Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
Attribute Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
Block Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117
Conflict Resolution dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117
Coordinate System Translation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
Feature Class Attribute Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
Import dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124
Import Data Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
Layer Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
Layer Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
Contents | xv
Layers to DGN Levels dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129
Link Template to Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129
Map Data Elements to Block Name dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
Map Data Elements to Layers dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
Map Data Elements to SQL dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
Map Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
Map Export Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
Map Import dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
New Layer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
Object Data Table dialog box (Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
Object Data Table dialog box (Import) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
Object Data/External Database Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1135
Point Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
Select dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
Select Feature Classes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
Select Table Dialog Box (MAPIMPORT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
Select Table Dialog Box (MAPIMPORT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
Chapter 24 Map Book Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140
Identify Map Book Template Placeholders dialog box . . . . . . . . . 1142
Map Book Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
Tile Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
Select Plot Set to Convert dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143
Map Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143
Publish to Autodesk MapGuide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
Plot Map Set dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
Chapter 25 Object Data Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
Attach Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
Attach/Detach Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
Edit Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
Rename Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
Select Link Template Key dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149
Chapter 26 Old Oracle Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151
Chapter 27 OSE Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159
Attribute Value Condition dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
Column Values dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162
Discard Edit Information and Locks dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . 1162
Discard Edit Information dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163
Export Autodesk Map Objects to Oracle dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . 1163
Import Oracle Records Into Map dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . 1164
xvi | Contents
Location Condition dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
Lock Management dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
Oracle Spatial Connection dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
Save Settings dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167
Schema Adminstration dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167
Select Feature Tables dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169
Select Features dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169
Select Features to Create Indexes dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . 1169
Select Features to Drop Indexes dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
Select Features to Update Extents dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . 1170
Select Layers dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
Select Schema for Connection dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
SQL Condition dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
Unsaved Feature Definitions dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
View SQL Statement dialog box (OSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
Chapter 29 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON (Convert Polylines to Polygons
command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
MAPUSEMPOLYGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
MPEDIT (Edit Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193
Create Polygons From Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
Polygon Fill Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
Alternate Font dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
Change Category dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
Data Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
Define New Category dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
Define Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
Define Range Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208
Define Text dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210
Hatch Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
Load Internal Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213
Location Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213
New Range Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216
Output Report Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216
Property Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218
Query Library Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
Rename Category dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
Rename Range Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
Run Library Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224
Save Current Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224
Set Property Alterations dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226
Contents | xvii
SQL Condition History dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
SQL Link Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
Type SQL Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
Chapter 31 Raster Image Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
MAPIFRAME (Image Frame command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
Image Correlation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
Image Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
Image Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
Image Management Layout dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
Image Select dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
Insert Image dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
Raster Extension Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240
Transparency Color dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
Chapter 32 Saving Objects Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
ADEREMOBJS (Remove Objects from Save Set command) . . . . . . 1246
ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command) . . . . . . . . 1246
ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command) . . . . . . . . 1247
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
Who Has It Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
Chapter 33 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
MAPABOUT (About Autodesk Map 3D command) . . . . . . . . . . 1253
MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
MAPWSFOCUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
MAPWSREFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
Autodesk Map Hillshade dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
Autodesk Map Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254
Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
Drawing Maintenance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265
Drawing Set Display Filter dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266
Drawing Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267
Drawing Statistics dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270
Drive Alias Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
Generate Object Data Index dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272
Index Maintenance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272
Remove Object Data Index dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273
Select Alias dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274
Undefined Alias Referenced dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274
User Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274
User Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276
xviii | Contents
User Login dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276
Chapter 34 Thematic Mapping Dialog Boxes (Older Method) . . . . . . . 1279
MAPTHEMATIC (Thematic Mapping command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1280
Add Thematic Range dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280
Edit Thematic Range dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
Insert Thematic Range dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
Object Thematic Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282
Property Expression dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
Select Linetype dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
Select Pattern dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
Select Style dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
Thematic Display Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
Thematic Legend Design dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287
Topology Thematic Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291
MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command) . . . . . . . . . . 1295
MAPLINKADD (Add Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296
MAPLINKDEL (Delete Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
MAPLINKEDIT (Edit Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
MAPLINKREV (Reverse Direction of Topology Link command) . . . . 1298
MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . 1298
MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
MAPNODDEL (Delete Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
MAPNODEDIT (Edit Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
MAPNODUPD (Update Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . 1301
MAPPOLYADD (Add Topology Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . . 1301
MAPPOLYDEL (Delete Topology Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . 1302
MAPPOLYUPD (Update Topology Polygon command) . . . . . . . . 1302
Autodesk Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOADMIN
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
Autodesk Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOEDIT . . . . . . 1303
Autodesk Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOADMIN
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
Centroid Objects dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
Create Closed Polylines dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
Create Network Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box . . . . . . 1306
Create Network Topology - Select Links dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1307
Create Network Topology - Select Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1308
Create Node Topology - Select Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Centroids dialog box . . . . . 1310
Contents | xix
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . 1311
Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog box . . . . . . . . 1312
Create Polygon Topology - Select Links dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1313
Create Polygon Topology - Select Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1314
Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box . . . . . . . 1315
Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
Create Topology Warning dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319
Delete Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319
Edit Direct Resistance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319
Edit Direction dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320
Edit Reverse Resistance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320
Edit Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321
Link Objects dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322
Load Topology Conflict dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
Load Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
Load Topology From Source Drawing dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box . . . . . . 1325
Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326
Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction dialog
box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box . . . . . . . . 1329
Node Objects dialog box - Network and Polygon Topologies) . . . . . 1331
Node Objects dialog box (Node topology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
Rename Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
Select Data dialog box - Topology Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
Topology Buffer - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box . . . . 1334
Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335
Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
Topology Dissolve - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box . . 1337
Topology Dissolve - Create Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
Topology Dissolve - Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box . . . . . . . . 1341
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog
box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . 1345
Topology Overlay Analysis - New Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . 1346
Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Attributes dialog box . . . . . . 1347
Topology Overlay Analysis - Select Overlay Topology dialog box . . . 1348
Topology Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348
Topology Query Result dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1350
Topology Selection dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351
Topology Statistics dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351
Chapter 36 Viewing Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353
xx | Contents
Define Document View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
Define Key View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356
Document View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
Key View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
Quick View Drawings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358
Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358
Chapter 37 Programming Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
Contents | xxi
Getting Started Guide
1
This section introduces the main concepts of Autodesk Map In this chapter
3D. In addition, you can take a quick tour of the user interface ■ Getting Started with Autodesk
Map 3D
and learn about the documentation available to help you
■ The User Interface
expand your knowledge of the program. ■ Finding the Information You Need
For a general overview of working with geospatial data, see
Best Practices for Managing Geospatial Data.
For a tutorial that introduces the concepts and leads you
through the basic steps of creating a map, see Introducing
Autodesk Map 3D 2007
1
Getting Started with Autodesk Map 3D
Use Autodesk Map 3D to create, edit, maintain, and analyze large volumes of
drawing data, spatial data, and attribute data.
View and edit data from many sources, style and theme your data, and share
your maps with printouts, DWFs, or on the Web.
Create, Edit, and Share Maps
Autodesk Map 3D provides the tools you need to view and edit data from
many sources. You can style and theme the data, edit the data, and publish
single maps or map books.
View and style with the ease of GIS, edit with the power of CAD.
2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Create Maps
Create maps by selecting the data you want to include in your map.
Access data from many formats, including
feature databases such as Oracle and
ArcSDE, file-based feature sources such as
SDF or SHP, Web servers such as WMS and
WFS, CAD drawing files, and other formats
such as DGN or SDTS.
Style Data
Apply styles to features in your map. For example, use linetypes and colors
for roads and symbols for schools and libraries. Apply themes to color terrain
based on elevation or color counties based on population density.
Create, Edit, and Share Maps | 3
Your styles and themes are saved in your map, and can be exported to share
with others.
Edit Data
Your map displays a window onto all your data. The data remains in the source
location — your changes are made in the source and immediately reflected
in your map. Because you are editing the original data, you don't run the risk
4 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
of accidentally corrupting the data when you move it from one source to
another.
Use the powerful, high precision AutoCAD
tools to edit the feature, then save your
changes back to the source.
When you check out a feature for editing, Autodesk Map 3D locks the feature
so no one else can edit it (to the extent supported by the feature source).
Share Data
Autodesk Map 3D makes it easy to share data, both inside your organization
and with others outside your organization.
Because you are editing the data in the
original source, your changes are immedi-
ately visible to others in your organization.
Create, Edit, and Share Maps | 5
To share data with others outside your organization, you can publish single
page or multipage maps, publish to DWF, export to another format such as
DGN or SHP, publish to a web page, or export all your map data in a format
that can be used by MapGuide.
More Information
For information about... See
Accessing feature data Accessing Geospatial Features (page 222)
Accessing drawing objects Accessing Drawing Objects (page 245)
Importing from other formats
Editing features Working with Features (page 436)
Editing drawing objects Working with Drawing Objects (page 452)
Creating styles Styling Features (page 401) and Styling
Drawing Layers (page 411)
Creating themes Creating Themes (page 738)
Creating multipage maps Publish Map Books (page 900)
Publishing to DWF Publish to DWF (page 891)
Exporting to other formats Exporting (page 915)
Integrate GIS and CAD Data from Many Sources
Access data from many sources and edit data in its original source—no more
manually transferring data between applications.
6 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Spatial Data
Combine feature data from a spatial database with objects from CAD drawings
or raw geometry from a spreadsheet. You can easily select the data to include
in your drawing.
Features and objects are automatically transformed to the coordinate system
used in the drawing.
Integrate GIS and CAD Data from Many Sources | 7
Attribute Data
You can view and edit attribute data from inside your map. The data is
displayed in tables that let you highlight data for specific features and objects
in your map. Autodesk Map 3D maintains the link between spatial data and
attribute data; when you update the attribute data, the updates are dynamically
reflected in your drawing.
8 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Raster Images
Raster images add context to your map. Add aerial photos, contour maps,
DEM surfaces, and many other raster formats.
When you add a raster or surface to your
map, Autodesk Map 3D reads the place-
ment data from the raster file.
■ Geo-referenced images are displayed
in the correct location.
■ Surface rasters are draped over your
elevations.
More Information
For information about... See
Accessing feature data Accessing Geospatial Features (page 222)
Accessing drawing objects Accessing Drawing Objects (page 245)
Importing from other formats
Linking attribute data to drawing objects Linking Database Records to Objects (page
315)
Using raster images Accessing Raster Data (page 261)
Integrate GIS and CAD Data from Many Sources | 9
Drawing Objects and Geospatial Features
Using Autodesk Map 3D, you can work with both CAD objects and geospatial
features. You can combine them in your map, edit either type of object, and
even move objects from one format to the other.
Features
A feature is the spatial description of a real-world entity such as a road or a
utility pole. Features are stored in a spatial database or file such as Oracle,
ArcSDE, SDF, or SHP. The spatial database or file is referred to as a feature
source.
To work with features, connect to the database or file and then select the types
of features you want to include in your drawing. Each type of feature is called
a feature class.
Drawing Objects
A drawing object is any object in a DWG file, such as a line, circle, or closed
polyline.
To work with drawing objects, you can create and store the objects in the
current map, or you can attach a DWG file to the current map and query in
objects from that file. Autodesk Map 3D remembers the original location of
the objects and saves edited objects back to their original file.
Working with Features vs. Objects
While you can combine features and objects in your map, you work with them
in different ways. The table below outlines how to work with each type of
spatial data.
Action Spatial Features Drawing Objects
Access spatial data Use Data Connect to con- Attach drawings to the cur-
nect to your data and select rent map. Then run a query
the feature classes. All fea- to bring selected objects
tures from the feature class from those drawing into
immediately appear in your your map. See Accessing
map. See Accessing Drawing Objects (page 245).
Geospatial Features (page
222).
10 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Action Spatial Features Drawing Objects
Use attribute data Attribute data in your data Use Attach Data Source to
source is visible in the Data connect the attribute data
NOTE You must use the
Grid. You can edit the data to the map. Create a link
appropriate method to
and use the data for them- template for the attribute
connect to the attribute da-
ing. See To view data for a data table. See Setting Up
ta. If you plan to link the
selected feature class (page Data Sources for Drawings
data to objects, attach the
725) (page 161) and To view
data using the Attach Data
properties and attributes in
Source method.
a drawing (page 728).
Link records in the data ta-
ble to objects in your draw-
ing. See Linking Database
Records to Objects (page
315).
You can also use Object
Data to store attribute data
in the map itself. See Stor-
ing Attribute Data in the
Drawing (Object Data)
(page 331).
Edit Select the feature and check Select the object. Edit it us-
it out. Edit it using AutoCAD ing AutoCAD commands.
commands and special fea- See Working with Drawing
ture editing commands. Objects (page 452).
Check the feature in to up- If the object is from an at-
date and unlock the feature tached drawing, save it
in the feature source. See back to update and unlock
Working with Features the object in the attached
(page 436). drawing. See Editing and
Drawing Objects and Geospatial Features | 11
Action Spatial Features Drawing Objects
TIP Some AutoCAD com- Saving Objects in Attached
mands will not work on Drawings (page 456).
features. To use these com-
mands, extract the feature
geometry, edit the geome-
try using the AutoCAD
commands, and update the
feature with the new geom-
etry. See Using AutoCAD
Commands on Features
(page 447).
Style data Use the Style Editor. See Add a style and use the
Styling Features (page 401). Properties Palette. See
Styling Drawing Layers
(page 411).
Theme data Use the Theme button on Add a Theme style. See
the Style Editor. See Them- Theming Drawing Data
ing Features (page 740). (page 749).
Classify features and ob- All features are classified. Use Object Classification.
jects See Using Object Classifica-
tion (page 662).
Filter a layer Edit the query for the layer. For query layers only, use
See Filtering a Feature Layer the Properties palette to
(page 782). edit the query.
Convert Use Extract Geometry From Use New Feature From Ge-
Feature. See Extracting Fea- ometry. See Creating a New
ture Geometry (page 448). Feature from a Drawing
Only the geometry is con- Object (page 440).
verted. Properties and at- Only the geometry is con-
tribute data are not convert- verted. Properties and at-
ed. tribute data are not convert-
ed.
12 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Attribute Data
Attribute data is additional data about a drawing object or feature. For example,
if you have a drawing of parcels, you might have attribute data from the
assessor's department that lists the owner and improvements for each parcel.
Use the Data Grid to view attribute data in your feature source. The Data Grid
displays both spatial data and attribute data from your feature source.
You can search and theme features based on any data in the feature source.
To link attribute data to drawing objects, attach the attribute data to the
current drawing and then link records in the data table to objects in the
drawing.
Attribute Data | 13
Link attribute data to drawing objects, then highlight objects in your drawing by
selecting the linked data in the table.
More Information
For information about... See
Viewing attribute data for features To view data for a selected feature class
(page 725)
Linking attribute data to drawing objects Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings
(page 161)
Linking Database Records to Objects (page
315)
Edit Data In Its Source
When you connect to a feature source, your map is a window onto the data.
Your edits are made directly to the source.
Because you are editing the original data, you don't run the risk of accidentally
corrupting the data when you move it from one source to another.
14 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
When you edit objects from attached drawings, Autodesk Map 3D keeps track
of the original location of each object and saves them back to their original
source.
While Autodesk Map 3D gives you access to vast volumes of data, it provides
the tools to find exactly the data you want.
Use the query tools to find a specific feature or object based on its location,
its properties, even on attribute data linked to it from another source.
Once you find the feature or object, edit it using the full power of CAD editing
commands. Autodesk Map 3D includes all the AutoCAD editing tools and
adds some additional tools specifically for creating maps, such as using
coordinate geometry to specify a point.
While you edit, Autodesk Map 3D uses the locking capability of the feature
source to lock the original objects so no other users can modify them.
Spatial Data Type Locking Type
Oracle and ArcSDE Individual features are locked when you
check them out.
SHP The file is locked when you connect it.
Edit Data In Its Source | 15
Spatial Data Type Locking Type
Attached drawings (DWG) Individual objects are locked when you
query them into the map.
More Information
For more information... See
Editing feature data Working with Features (page 436)
Editing drawing objects Working with Drawing Objects (page 452)
Theme and Analyze Data
Create styled and themed maps.
16 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Theme and Analyze Data | 17
Create complex styles, such as roads with a thick black line with a double
yellow stripe down the middle or use specific colors and lines types for different
features.
Create themes by varying the style based
on an attribute of the feature; for example,
change the color of parcels based on their
size.
Analyze geospatial data by exaggerating
elevations or looking at maps in different
light conditions.
18 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
More Information
For information about... See
Creating styles Styling Features (page 401) and Styling
Drawing Layers (page 411)
Creating themes Creating Themes (page 738)
Analyzing surfaces Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces (page 758)
Send Maps to the Field
You can easily share your maps with others by plotting them, publishing them
to DWF or PDF format, or creating a multi-page map book.
When you publish maps electronically, you can include attribute data to give
your clients access to any data they need.
More Information
For information about See
Plotting Publish a Map to a Plotter (page 891)
Publishing to DWF Publish to DWF (page 891)
Creating multipage map books Publish Map Books (page 900)
Post Maps on a Web Site
You can publish your map as a single HTML page or you can publish it to
MapGuide.
When you save your map in HTML format, the result is a “snapshot” of the
map that cannot be edited in Autodesk Map 3D, but can be viewed by any
web browser.
Send Maps to the Field | 19
When you publish to MapGuide, all layers, layer definitions, dynamic labels,
queries, filters, and styles (including point, line, raster, and other styles) in
your map are published in the format that MapGuide needs.
More Information
For information about... See
Publishing to a Web page Publish to a Web Page (page 896)
Publishing to MapGuide Publish to MapGuide (page 899)
Exporting to MapGuide 6.5 and earlier Exporting DWG Data as Autodesk
MapGuide SDF 2 (page 925)
What's In a Drawing
An Autodesk Map 3D map contains all the information you need to produce
your map.
When you create a map, you set up connections to features sources, drawings,
and attribute data. You store queries, object data, and printing layouts. In
addition, you can store customized settings.
Whenever you open this map, all of this information is immediately available
to you.
For example, a city planner creates a drawing for the city and connects to the
city feature source for parcel data, the assessor’s database of parcel ownership
information, the county’s raster server of aerial photos, and queries that locate
selected parcels and highlight them. Or a facilities manager creates a drawing
for a building, and attaches drawings with electrical and floor plan information
and a database of maintenance information.
Setting Up Your Map
Task Procedure
Assign a coordinate system to the map Click Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordi-
nate System.
20 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Task Procedure
Connect a feature source and display fea- 1 In the Display Manager, click
tures in your map Data ➤ Add Data.
2 Select the feature source. Click
Connect.
3 Select the feature classes. Click
Add To Map.
Connect to a drawing and display drawing 1 In the Display Manager, click
objects in the map Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ At-
tach Source Drawings.
2 In the Display Manager, click
Data ➤ Add Drawing Da-
ta ➤ Query Current Drawing
or Query Source Drawing.
3 Define a query that selects the
objects you want.
4 Click OK.
Attach attribute data to a drawing object 1 In the Map Explorer, right-click
Data Sources ➤ Attach.
2 Double-click the table to open
Data View.
3 Create a link template and link
records in the table to objects
in the drawing.
Filter a feature source layer In the Display Manager, right-click the
layer and click Edit Query.
What's In a Drawing | 21
Task Procedure
Create object data tables In the Map 3D For Drawings workspace,
click Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data.
Once the tables are defined, you can at-
tach data to objects.
Click Create menu ➤ Attach/Detach Ob-
ject Data.
Style features in your map to show themes In the Display Manager, right-click a lay-
or to highlight specific features. er ➤ Add Style ➤ select the style type.
In the Style Editor, specify the style you
want.
Style drawing objects in your map to show In the Display Manager, right-click a lay-
themes or to highlight specific objects. er ➤ Edit Display Style.
In the Properties palette, specify the style
settings.
For themes, specify settings in the Themat-
ic Mapping dialog box.
Edit a feature from a feature source 1 Select the feature.
2 Right-click the feature ➤ Check
Out Feature.
3 Make your edits.
4 Right-click the feature ➤ Check
In Feature.
Set up your map for hard copy or digital On the Task Pane, open Map Book and
output. specify settings.
Modify the settings of attached drawings, 1 In the Map 3D For Drawings
for example to offset a source drawing so workspace, click Setup menu
it aligns correctly in the current drawing ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
22 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Task Procedure
or to specify the save back extents of a
2 Click Drawing Settings.
source drawing
Change user options (such as whether to Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Op-
automatically activate source drawings or tions.
connect to data sources)
Change AutoCAD options Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options.
See also:
■ Attaching Drawings (page 128)
■ Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 136)
■ Setting Options (page 169)
■ Working with the Display Manager (page 401)
■ Working with Features (page 436)
■ Working with Map Books (page 902)
The User Interface
The Autodesk Map 3D work environment makes it easy to create, manage,
share, and publish maps.
You can customize the environment to look and function just the way you
want. For example, you can add options to the menus and the toolbars.
Or if you prefer to work in the classic environment, you can easily switch back
to it.
For more information about the menus, toolbars, and status bar, see Taking a
Quick Tour of Autodesk Map 3D in the tutorial.
The User Interface | 23
Exploring the User Interface
The menus, toolbars, and task pane provide quick access to the most commonly
used tools.
Menus and toolbars (page 25). The menus and toolbars include the
commands you need to complete your mapping tasks.
Data Grid and Data View (page 26). Display spatial and attribute data in
a table format. Use the Data Grid for viewing spatial data and attribute data
for geospatial features; use the Data View for viewing attribute data linked to
drawing objects.
Task Pane (page 27). The Task Pan provides centralized access to the tasks
and tools you need to create, manage, display, and publish maps.
Status bar. Use the status bar to seethe current cursor location, change
exaggeration and scale settings, and switch between 2D and 3D. In addition,
the status bar provides access to common tools.
24 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Command interface at the cursor (page 31). Launch commands and respond
to prompts right at the cursor using Dynamic Input.
See also:
■ Customizing Your Work Environment (page 72)
■ Switching Between Work Environments (page 33)
■ Setting Options (page 169)
Menus and Toolbars
In Autodesk Map 3D, the menus and toolbars are organized so the commands
you need for a specific task are together. For example, the commands you
need to analyze map data are on a menu called Analyze.
Only the options you need most are presented by default.
You can customize the menus and toolbars to include the commands you
want. You save your customized settings as a “workspace.”
Autodesk Map 3D comes with some predefined workspaces:
■ Map 3D for Geospatial — customized for working with feature sources
■ Map 3D for Drawings — customized for working with drawing objects
■ Map Classic — sets the menus up the way they used to be, including the
AutoCAD menus
Menus and Toolbars | 25
No matter which workspace you use, all AutoCAD and Autodesk Map 3D
commands are available, many from right-click menus.
NOTE The Autodesk Map 3D documentation is based on the new work
environment. If you modify the work environment, or switch back to Map Classic,
the documentation will not match. The AutoCAD documentation is based on the
classic AutoCAD configuration.
See also:
■ Customizing Your Work Environment (page 72)
■ Switching Between Work Environments (page 33)
Viewing Attribute Data
Autodesk Map 3D provides a window onto your attribute data. You can view
and edit the data, link data to objects in your map, and find features and
objects based on attribute data.
■ To view attribute data for features, use the Data Grid.
■ To view attribute data linked to drawing objects use the Data View.
26 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Both the Data Grid and Data View let you find features and objects in your map by
selecting linked data in the table, or find data in the table by selecting features and
objects in your map.
The Task Pane
The Task Pane provides centralized access to the tasks and tools you need to
create, manage, display, and publish maps.
The toolbar in the Task Pane provides quick and easy access to the tools you
need.
In addition, right-click any item in the Task Pane to see a customized menu
for that item.
TIP You can make the Task Pane transparent. When the Task Pane is undocked,
right-click the title bar and choose Transparency.
Map Explorer
Map Explorer allows you to manage mapping resources included in your
current drawing.
The Task Pane | 27
Use Map Explorer to manage the following resources:
■ feature sources (page 224) (such as Oracle, ArcSDE, SHP, and SDF)
■ attached source drawings (page 245)
■ queries (page 801)
■ object classes (page 667)
■ data sources (page 164)
■ topologies (page 528)
■ link templates (page 319)
Display Manager
The Display Manager makes is easy to add styles and themes to your map.
28 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Map Book
Use Map Book to create printed maps, map books, and multi-page DWFs from
stylized drawings. Map Book takes full advantage of the AutoCAD Sheet Set
Manager, and provides a tree view of tiles the map book, like pages in an atlas.
Use navigation arrows to move between tiles in your map.
See also:
■ Attaching a Drawing (page 130)
The Task Pane | 29
■ Defining Drawing Queries (page 800)
■ Setting Up Object Classification (page 96)
■ Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings (page 161)
■ Creating Topologies (page 528)
■ Creating a Link Template (page 318)
■ Working With the Display Manager (page 401)
■ Publishing Map Books (page 900)
To hide or display the Task Pane at startup
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options.
2 In the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254), click the Task Pane
tab.
3 Select Show Task Pane On Startup.
To hide or display the Task Pane within your current session
■ Click View menu ➤ Task Pane.
To refresh Map Explorer
■ Right-click a clear area in Map Explorer, and click Refresh; or enter
mapwsrefresh at the command line.
To adjust the transparency of the Task Pane
1 Right-click on the title bar of the Task Pane, and choose Transparency.
2 In the Transparency dialog box, adjust the transparency level.
3 Click OK
Quick Reference
MAPDOCKWSPACE
Docks and undocks the Task Pane
30 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Command Line MAPDOCKWSPACE
Task Pane Double-click the title bar (floating) or the double bar
at the top of the pane (docked)
Dialog Box MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command) (page
1253)
MAPWSPACE
Shows or hides the Task Pane
Menu View ➤ Task Pane
Command Line MAPWSPACE
Task Pane Right-click a blank area ➤ Close
Dialog Box MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command) (page 1253)
MAPWSREFRESH
Redisplays the Task Pane
Command Line MAPWSREFRESH
Task Pane Right-click a blank area ➤ Refresh
Dialog Box MAPWSREFRESH (page 1253)
The Command Interface
Autodesk Map 3D provides a command interface near the cursor. This interface
is called Dynamic Input. The older command line window is hidden by default,
however, you can choose to display it at any time.
With Dynamic Input, you can
■ Launch commands by typing them directly into the drawing area.
■ Respond to command prompts in a tooltip or tooltip menu near the cursor
instead of on the command line.
■ View the location of the crosshairs as coordinate values in a tooltip.
■ Enter coordinate values in the tooltip when a command prompts for a
point instead of on the command line.
The Command Interface | 31
■ View distance and angle values when a command prompts for a second
point.
For more information about using and customizing Dynamic Input, see the
AutoCAD help.
NOTE With the command line hidden, some detailed information for some
commands is not visible. To see this information, display the command line by
pressing CTRL+9 on the keyboard.
To hide or show the command line
■ Press CTRL+9 on the keyboard
To turn on or off dynamic input
■ On the status bar, click Dyn, or press F12.
To control Dynamic Input settings
■ Right-click Dyn and click Settings.
To turn off dynamic input temporarily
■ Hold down the F12 key while you work.
32 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Switching Between Work Environments
Autodesk Map 3D comes with predefined workspaces. Each workspace shows
a different set of commands and toolbars. You can switch between the
workspaces.
■ Map 3D for Geospatial — customized for working with feature sources
■ Map 3D for Drawings — customized for working with drawing objects
■ Map Classic — sets the menus up the way they used to be, including the
AutoCAD menus
No matter which workspace you use, all AutoCAD and Autodesk Map 3D
commands are available, many from right-click menus.
To change the workspaces
■ Click View menu ➤ Menu/Toolbar Layout, and then choose the workspace
you want.
NOTE The Autodesk Map 3D documentation is based on the new work
environment. If you modify the work environment, or switch back to Map Classic,
the documentation will not match. In addition, the AutoCAD documentation is
based on the classic AutoCAD configuration, which differs from Autodesk Map
3D.
See also:
■ Menus and Toolbars (page 25)
■ Customizing Your Work Environment (page 72)
Finding the Information You Need
Using the Help
Autodesk Map 3D Help contains the Autodesk Map 3D online User’s Guide,
Reference Guide, Getting Started Guide, and additional information.
Switching Between Work Environments | 33
The online User’s Guide displays related information on 3 tabs:
■ Concept — Conceptual information about performing the task and hints
to help you use the feature.
■ Procedure — Step-by-step instructions to perform the task.
■ Quick Reference — The commands you need for this task, and where to
find them on the menus and toolbars.
34 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Use the tabs in the left pane to find information:
Contents ■ Presents an overview of the available
documentation in a list of topics and
subtopics.
■ Allows you to browse by selecting and
expanding topics.
■ Provides a structure so you can always
see where you are in Help and quickly
jump to other topics.
Index ■ Displays an alphabetical list of key-
words related to the topics listed on
the Contents tab.
■ Accesses information quickly when you
already know the name of a feature,
command, or operation, or when you
know what action you want the pro-
gram to perform.
Favorites ■ Bookmark topics that you want to re-
turn to.
■ Create your own list of favorite topics.
■ To add a topic to the list, open the
Favorites tab and click the Add button.
Search ■ Allows you to find information using
a question phrased in everyday lan-
guage.
■ Displays a ranked list of topics that
correspond to the word or phrase en-
tered in the question field.
■ Provides a "Search the Web" link that
sends a query to a search engine on
the Web.
Using the Help | 35
NOTE Depending on the language version
of the product, the Search tab provides
either the traditional Microsoft search that
locates keywords and exact phrases, or a
natural-language search that analyzes
phrases or questions.
Help with AutoCAD Commands
The AutoCAD Help is a separate document from the Autodesk Map 3D Help.
To view the AutoCAD Help, choose AutoCAD Help from the Help menu.
Tutorials
Try the tutorials to get started or to learn Autodesk Map 3D's advanced
functionality.
To launch the tutorials, click Help menu ➤ Tutorials.
Sample Data
Autodesk Map 3D provides sample data and template files to help you learn
Autodesk Map 3D.
Redding Sample Data Set
The Redding sample data set contains map data from the City of Redding,
California in the United States, including some of their real raster images,
parcel drawings, sewer data, soil drawings, and more.
You can look at the Redding sample data to get ideas, or use it to experiment
with Autodesk Map 3D before you create your own map.
The Redding sample data and other sample data are on the Sample Data CDs.
You can copy the data from the CD onto your computer.
Tutorial Drawing Files
The tutorials are accessible from the Help menu.
36 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
After installation, the drawing files are located in Program Files\Autodesk Map
3D 2007\Help\Map 3D Tutorials. During the tutorials, you are prompted to
make a copy of these in your My Documents folder so you are not modifying
the original files.
Templates
Autodesk Map 3D also includes several template files with content for settings,
styles, and organization of objects. You can use these files as a basis for
developing your own content.
In addition to templates for working in 2D or 3D, we’ve included a number
of templates for Map Book that include navigation arrows and layout settings
already specified.
After installation, you can find these files in the same folder as the AutoCAD
templates.
To create a file from a template:
1 Click File ➤ New.
2 Select the template you want to use.
Symbols
Sample symbols are located in C:\Program Files\Autodesk Map 3D
2007\Sample\Symbols
Additional AutoCAD Samples
AutoCAD provides additional sample drawings, sample sheet sets, sample
blocks, VBA samples, and more.
After installation, the files are located in C:\Program Files\Autodesk Map 3D
2007\Sample.
Viewing the AutoCAD Help
Autodesk Map 3D includes the complete functionality of AutoCAD, including
all the AutoCAD commands and system variables. For information on using
the AutoCAD commands, refer to the AutoCAD Help.
Viewing the AutoCAD Help | 37
NOTE The procedures in the AutoCAD Help assume you are using the Map Classic
workspace. To use the steps described in the AutoCAD Help, you may need to
change your workspace. For all workspaces, you can enter a command at the
command prompt.
You can view the AutoCAD help by clicking Help menu ➤ AutoCAD Help.
Viewing the Readme
The Readme contains updates about this release of Autodesk Map 3D, including
late-breaking product news and known software issues.
View the Readme
Other Sources of Information
Additional Documentation
■ Best Practices for Managing Geospatial Data— Learn the key concepts of
working with geospatial data and the best way to use Autodesk Map 3D
to achieve your goals.
■ Developer Documentation (page 1361) — Learn how to use the Autodesk
Map 3D Application Programming Interfaces (APIs), including ObjectARX,
ObjectARX Managed Wrappers, ActiveX, and AutoLISP. For more
information, click Help menu ➤ Additional Resources ➤ Autodesk Map
3D Developer Help.
■ FDO Developer Help — Use the FDO developer help to extend the
functionality of the feature source providers. See FDO Developer’s Guide,
The Essential FDO, and the API references for each provider:
■ FDO Provider for Oracle API Reference
■ FDO Provider for ArcSDE API Reference
■ FDO Provider for SQL Server API Reference
■ FDO Provider for MYSQL API Reference
■ FDO Provider for SHP API Reference
■ FDO Provider for SDF API Reference
38 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
■ FDO Provider for ODBC API Reference
■ FDO Provider for Raster API Reference
■ FDO Provider for WMS API Reference
■ AutoCAD Help — View the AutoCAD Help, including the AutoCAD User's
Guide, Command Reference, Customization Guide, and more. Click Help
menu ➤ AutoCAD Help.
These manuals are also available as PDF files on the product CD.
■ Other AutoCAD Manuals — Other AutoCAD manuals, such Build Your World
and Getting Started, are availble on the product CD. For information on
printing these manual, see Printing this Documentation (page 40).
■ New Features Workshop — View a series of animated demos, tutorials, and
new feature overviews designed to help you learn about the new features
in Autodesk Map 3D and AutoCAD. Click Help menu ➤ New Features
Workshop.
Online Resources
■ Product Support Resources— Get answers quickly and efficiently via email
or get Product Support phone numbers.
■ Autodesk Map 3D Discussion Groups— Share product information, ideas,
and solutions with other Autodesk Map 3D and other Autodesk product
users.
■ Training Resources— Learn about the training resources available for
Autodesk Map 3D and other Autodesk products.
■ Developer Center— Learn about programming and development tools to
help customize Autodesk Map 3D or build your own applications.
■ Subscription Resources — Access your subscription services including support
and training directly through the Help menu.
■ Communication Center — Receive Autodesk company news and product
announcements, breaking news from Autodesk Product Support, new
article notifications, tips, and more. For more information, see the AutoCAD
help.
■ Design Center Online — Access maps, images, and other content (such as
blocks, symbol libraries, manufacturer content, and online catalogs) to
Other Sources of Information | 39
help create your maps and drawings. For more information, see the
AutoCAD help.
Refer to the Learning Path for an overview of the types of information available
to help you learn and use Autodesk Map 3D. To view the Learning Path, click
Learning Path on the Help home page.
Printing this Documentation
If you want, you can print the Help and other manuals.
Printing PDF Versions of the Help
Most of the onscreen Help, including Autodesk Map 3D Users Guide (the help
system), the AutoCAD User’s Guide, and the AutoCAD Command Reference,
are available in PDF format.
Some FDO developer documentation and AutoCAD manuals, including The
Essential FDO, the FDO Developer’s Guide, Building Your World, and Getting
Started, are available only in PDF format.
NOTE You must have Adobe® Acrobat Reader™ installed to view and print PDF
documents.
To print the Autodesk Map 3D Users Guide
1 Open the Autodesk Map 3D User’s Guide.
2 In Adobe Acrobat Reader, click the Print icon.
WARNING The User’s Guide is over 1000 pages long! You may want to print
individual chapters.
To print the other manuals
1 Insert the Autodesk Map 3D CD into the drive.
2 When the CD Browser starts, click the Documentation tab. If the CD
Browser does not start automatically, double-click the Setup.exe file.
3 On the Documentation tab, select the book you want to print.
40 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Copyrights and Trademarks
Copyright© 2006 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any
method, for any purpose.
AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING
THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON
AN "AS-IS" BASIS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL,
COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE
MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC.,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE
PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.
Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees
fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the time of its
publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.
Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and
other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3D Studio,
3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, AEC-X,
Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI,
AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Inventor,
Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, Autodesk
WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Backdraft, Bringing
information down to earth, Buzzsaw, CAD Overlay, Can You Imagine,
Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Civil 3D, Cleaner, Combustion,
Create>what's>Next (design/logo), DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo),
Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), EditDV, Education by
Design, FBX, Filmbox, Gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, i-drop, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara
(design/logo), Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, ObjectARX, Open Reality,
PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), ProjectPoint,
RadioRay, Reactor, Revit, SketchBook, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual
Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual
Copyrights and Trademarks | 41
Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP!
(logo).
The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries:
AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension,
AutoCAD SQL Interface, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo),
Burn, CAiCE, Cinestream, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content
Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's
Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF,
DWFit, DWG Linking, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Extending
the Design Team, GDX Driver, Gmax (logo), Gmax ready (logo), Heads-up
Design, HumanIK, Incinerator, jobnet, LocationLogic, MotionBuilder,
ObjectDBX, Plasma, PolarSnap, Productstream, RealDWG, Real-time Roto,
Render Queue, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus,
and Wiretap.
Autodesk Canada Co.Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA
and/or Canada and other countries: Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Flint RT, Frost,
Glass, Inferno, MountStone, Riot, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Stream, Vapour,
Wire.
The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co., in the USA, Canada,
and/or other countries: Backburner, Multi-Master Editing.
Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective
holders.
Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002
Autodesk, Inc.
HLM is a trademark of D-Cubed Ltd. HLM (c) Copyright D-Cubed Ltd.
1996-2004.
AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2005 Vantage Software Technologies, Inc.. All rights
reserved.
Portions Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
Libpng is copyright (c) 2004 Glenn Randers-Pehrson.
42 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Libtiff is Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler And Copyright © 1991-1997
Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Active Delivery™ 2.0. (c) 1999-2004 Inner Media, Inc. All rights reserved.
Produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide ® from
Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals,
Inc. All rights reserved. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks
of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc.
International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout &
Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.
InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All
rights reserved.
Macromedia ® and Flash ® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States or other countries.
PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user
documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult
current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color.
PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone,
Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002
Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are
licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with
certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software
shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the
execution of this Autodesk software product.
Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.
Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG
Group.
RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches
Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute
for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin."
Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992.
Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.
Printed and Help produced with Idiom WorldServer™
Copyrights and Trademarks | 43
Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2006 Macrovision Corporation. All rights reserved.
Stingray is Copyright 1995-2005, Quovadx, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Protected
by copyright and licenses restricting use, copying, distribution and
decompilation. The Rogue Wave name and logo and the Stingray name and
logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Quovadx, Inc. in the
United States and/or other countries.
Xerces is Copyright © 1999-2005, The Apache Software Foundation. Licensed
under the Apache License, Version 2.0; you may not use this file except in
compliance with the license. You may obtain a copy of the license at the
following web address: http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval
for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum
2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic
Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product
(Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).
MrSID image compression format is Copyright © 2005, LizardTech, a division
of Celartem,Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID technology is protected by U.S.
Patent No 5,710,835 and patents pending.
Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource
Mapping, Inc.
The OSTN97 coordinate transformation is © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights
reserved.
The OSTN02 coordinate transformation is © Crown copyright 2002. All rights
reserved.
The OSGM02 coordinate transformation is © Crown copyright 2002, ©
Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002.
FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.
Libcurl is Copyright (c) 1996 - 2006, Daniel Stenberg, <[email protected]>. All
rights reserved.
The Redland RDF Application Framework is Copyright (C) 2000-2005 Institute
for Learning and Research Technology, University of Bristol. Licensed under
the Apache License, Version 2.0; you may not use this file except in compliance
with the license. You may obtain a copy of the license at the following web
address: http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
GDAL is Copyright (c) 2000, Frank Warmerdam.
44 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Portions of sample data provided by NAVTEQ. ©NAVTEQ 2001-2006, All rights
reserved.
GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions
as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights)
and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as
applicable.
Copyrights and Trademarks | 45
Workflows for Common
Tasks 2
In this chapter
■ Start to Finish
■ Setting Up
■ Managing Data
■ Adding Data
■ Creating and Editing Data
■ Styling and Analyzing Data
47
Use these workflows to get an overview of how to perform common tasks.
Start to Finish
Create a Map Containing Styled Drawing Objects
Create a map that styles drawing objects.
1 Open a drawing.
To include objects that are in other drawings, such as quadrants of a city
or separate utility maps, attach those drawings to the current drawing.
For information on setting up your drawing and attaching the other
drawings, see Set Up a Drawing Map (page 51).
2 Create a new map:
■ From the Task list in the Task pane, choose Display Manager.
■ In the Current Map box, enter a name for the new map.
48 | Chapter 2 Workflows for Common Tasks
You'll notice that the new map has a layer called Map Base. This layer
includes all objects that are not part of any other layer. For now, Map
Base includes all the objects in your current drawing.
3 Select the first set of objects you want to stylize.
You can select objects by layer, object class, topology, feature source,
location, property, or attribute data associated with the object.
See Accessing Drawing Objects (page 245).
This set of objects is called a layer.
4 Select any additional sets of objects to stylize.
If an object is not included in any of the layers you define, it remains in
the Map Base layer.
5 Next, style the layers.
For each layer, specify exactly how you want to display the objects in
that layer. You can modify the way the objects look, represent them with
symbols, or add text, annotation, or hatch. You can combine styles to
create just the look you want.
See Styling Drawing Layers (page 411).
6 If you create a style that you plan to use again, save the style in the
Display Library. You can drag a style from the Display Library onto
another layer in your map.
In the Display Library, you can create categories to group styles.
See To save a style to the Display Library (page 422).
7 You can define different styles for different zoom levels. For example,
you could turn off text when the map is zoomed out.
See Create or modify a scale threshold (page 425).
8 You can define a theme instead of a style. A theme varies the stylization
depending on an attribute of the object. For example, use a thicker
lineweight for roads with more lanes.
See To create a theme for a drawing layer (page 750).
9 Create a legend for the map.
See Adding a legend (page 431).
Create a Map Containing Styled Drawing Objects | 49
Edit a Map in a Multi-User Feature Source
Environment
You can safely revise a map in a multi-user, feature source environment. If
you are working with Oracle or ArcSDE databases, features are locked while
you are editing. If you are working with SHP-based feature data, the file is
locked while you are editing.
1 Open a drawing.
This drawing may be a blank drawing or it may contain the outline of
your project.
2 Connect to feature source data.
For more information, see Accessing Geospatial Features (page 222).
3 To work with a separate version of the data, create a new version.
For more information, see Managing Versions (page 451).
4 Edit feature data.
For more information, see Working with Features (page 436).
5 Style feature data.
For more information, see Styling Features (page 401).
6 If you are working with a separate version, save the changes back to the
parent version.
For more information, see Managing Versions (page 451).
Setting Up
Setting Up Your Work Environment
You can customize your work environment by alternating workspaces, setting
up workspaces, changing colors, docking windows and saving all your settings
in a specific profile you can reuse depending on your particular project.
See Customizing Your Work Environment (page 72).
Autodesk Map 3D now includes three different workspaces, which you can
also customize.
50 | Chapter 2 Workflows for Common Tasks
See Switching Between Work Environments (page 33).
Set Up a Drawing Map
You create a drawing that includes all the attribute data you want to include.
The Map Explorer task pane displays all the items included in your map.
1 First, open a drawing.
This drawing may be a blank drawing or it may contain the outline of
your project.
2 Next attach any drawings you plan to use.
See Attaching Drawings (page 216).
3 Now assign a coordinate system to the current drawing and to any
attached drawings.
See Assigning Coordinate Systems (page 123).
4 If you don’t use coordinate systems, specify the scale, rotation, and offset
of attached drawings so the layers line up in the map.
See Setting Transformation Options (page 138).
5 Clean up the edges so the objects from the different maps align perfectly.
See Matching Map Edges (page 628).
6 Attach any databases you plan to use.
See Attaching Data Sources (page 164).
7 Use the Quick View command to quickly view all the objects in the
drawing.
See Viewing All Objects (page 460).
Setting Up a Feature Source Map
If most of your data is stored in feature souces such as an Oracle database or
a SHP file, you can view and edit the data by adding connections to your map.
1 Create a new map:
■ From the Task list in the Task pane, choose Display Manager.
Set Up a Drawing Map | 51
In the Current Map box, enter a name for the new map.
2 Assign a coordinate system to your map.
See Assigning Coordinate Systems (page 123)
3 Add the data to your map.
See To access geospatial features (page 223).
4 Add raster images and surfaces to your map.
See To access raster data (page 261).
5 Style the data.
For more information, see Styling Features (page 401).
6 Edit the data.
For more information, see Working with Features (page 436).
Managing Data
Move a SHP File to Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL,
or Oracle
You can migrate from SHP files to Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, or Oracle to
benefit from locking, versioning, and other advanced features that multi-user
DBMSes offer.
1 Connect (page 235) to the source SHP file.
2 Create (page 381) a target feature source for Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL,
or Oracle and connect (page 222) to it.
3 Copy (page 393) the data from the SHP file to the target database.
52 | Chapter 2 Workflows for Common Tasks
Transform the Coordinate System of a SHP File
Bulk Copy provides an easy way to transform the coordinate system of a SHP
file (or feature source of any provider).
1 Connect (page 235) to the source SHP file.
2 Create (page 381) the target SHP file with the desired coordinate system
and connect (page 235) to it.
3 Copy (page 393) the data from the source to the target SHP file, making
sure that the Ignore Coordinate System option is unchecked.
Add a Property to a File-Based Feature Schema
Spatial data file formats, such as Shape and SDF, use a schema to define their
features. For example, an SDF file containing roads might have properties for
street name, speed limit, travel time, and so on.
You cannot edit an existing file-based feature schema. However, you can create
a new schema that contains all the properties of an existing one, plus the extra
properties you need. You can then copy the source data from the original
schema into the new one.
NOTE You can add properties to an SDF schema only once, so be sure to add all
the properties you need.
1 First, open a map file.
2 Use Data Connect to attach the SDF or SHP file containing the original
schema (the one that you want to add properties to). This is the source
schema.
See Connecting to SDF. (page 238) or Connecting to SHP (page 236)
3 In Map Explorer, right-click the SDF or SHP file containing the source
schema. Choose Edit Schema.
See Editing a Schema (page 387).
4 In the Schema Editor, click Save Schema and save the schema as an XML
file.
5 Next, in Map Explorer, click Schema ➤ Create SDF or Create SHP. This
is the target schema.
Transform the Coordinate System of a SHP File | 53
6 Use Data Connect to attach the new SDF or SHP file (the one containing
the target schema).
7 In Map Explorer, right-click the SDF or SHP file containing the target
schema. Choose Edit Schema.
8 In the Schema Editor, click Load Schema and specify the source schema
you saved to an XML file.
See Importing a Schema (page 385).
9 Click New Property and add the information for the new property. Repeat
this step for all the properties you need.
10 Use theBulk Copy feature to copy the data from the source schema to
the target schema.
SeeCopying Data From One Feature Source to Another (page 395)
Adding Data
Create a Map from Other Maps
You can create a new drawing by copying in objects from other drawings.
1 Open a new drawing. Attach the other drawings.
For information on setting up your current drawing and attaching the
source drawings you will use, see Set Up a Drawing Map (page 51).
2 Although the drawings are attached as source drawings, no objects from
those drawings have been copied into your current drawing. To view the
objects in the attached drawings, do a Quick View.
See Viewing All Objects (page 460).
Quick View shows you the objects in the source drawings, but it does not
copy objects from the source drawings to the current drawing.
3 To copy the objects you want from the source drawings into the current
drawing, run a query. A query is made up of conditions that tell Autodesk
Map 3D which objects to copy from the source drawings.
■ To find objects based on their location in the map, define a Location
condition.
54 | Chapter 2 Workflows for Common Tasks
See To retrieve drawing objects based on their location (page 804).
■ To find objects based on a property, such as layer, color, or elevation,
define a Property condition.
See To retrieve drawing objects based on their properties (page 806).
■ To find objects based on data attached to the object, such as object
data or attribute data, define a Data condition.
See To retrieve drawing objects based on their object data (page 810).
■ To find objects based on data attached to the object from an external
database, define a SQL condition.
See To retrieve drawing objects based on linked SQL data (page 814).
You can combine conditions to find exactly the objects you want, and
you can run more than one query to get different sets of objects
4 Once you have defined the query, execute the query in draw mode to
copy the objects from the source drawings into your current drawing.
See To run a drawing query in Draw mode (page 846).
5 Once the objects are in the current drawing, save the current drawing
with the objects in it.
See Saving Objects (page 456).
Import a Map from Another Program
If you have map files that are not in Autodesk drawing format, you can import
those maps into Autodesk Map 3D and maintain coordinate system
information and links to data. You can limit the import to a specific area in
the map or assign incoming data to existing Autodesk Map 3D object classes.
1 Open a new drawing.
2 To use coordinate system information, assign a coordinate system to the
new drawing.
See To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing (page 123).
The coordinate system you assign to the new drawing does not have to
match the coordinate system for the drawing you are importing. If they
do not match, Autodesk Map 3D will automatically transform the objects
Import a Map from Another Program | 55
in the incoming drawing to the coordinate system you've assigned to the
new drawing.
3 If you are importing objects that have links to a database table, you can
maintain those links. Attach the database table to the new drawing, and
create a link template for the table.
See Attaching a Data Source (page 164) and Creating a Link Template
(page 319).
4 Start the import command.
To limit the import to a specific area in your map, use the spatial filter
option to define that area. Then, for each layer in the incoming map,
specify the following:
■ the layer in the new drawing to which you want to import the objects
■ the coordinate system used to create the incoming layer
■ how you want the data stored
■ the object class assignment
See .
5 If necessary, clean up the imported data to fix any misaligned lines or
other errors.
See To clean your drawings (page 478).
6 Save your new drawing.
NOTE When you import a map, the entities in the imported map are converted
to drawing objects. Changes you make to these objects are made in the current
drawing and are not made to the original map. For SHP maps, you have another
option: you can work directly with the objects in the original map. For information,
see Using Features from a SHP Feature Source (page 235)
Import a Paper Map
You can transfer information from a paper map into a drawing. You do this
by opening a drawing and tracing the features on the map.
1 Open a drawing.
2 Set up your digitizer and register the map.
56 | Chapter 2 Workflows for Common Tasks
See To configure the digitizer (page 110) and To register the map (page
113).
3 Specify the settings for the mapdigitize command.
See To set digitizing specifications (page 116).
4 If you plan to attach object data as you digitize the objects, create the
object data table and then specify that table in the digitizing settings.
See To create an object data table (page 158) and To attach object data
as you digitize (page 715).
5 If you plan to link objects to records in an external database as you digitize
the objects, create the link template for the table and then specify that
link template in the digitizing settings.
See To create a link template (page 319) and To link database records as
you digitize (page 718).
6 Digitize the objects. If you plan to attach data or link records to the objects
as you digitize, use the mapdigitize command. If you don't plan to add
data, you can use drawing commands such as ARC, LINE, and PLINE.
See To digitize links and nodes (page 714) and (for an overview of
digitizing).
7 Clean up the map to fix any errors you made while digitizing.
See .
Related Workflow To include a raster image of the map in the drawing, see
Inserting a Photo Behind a Map (page 276).
Combine Maps with Different Coordinate Systems
Each Autodesk Map 3D drawing can have a coordinate system assigned to it.
When you bring objects into a drawing from other drawings, Autodesk Map
3D automatically transforms those objects to the coordinate system of the
current drawing.
Combine Maps with Different Coordinate Systems | 57
1 Assign coordinate systems to all the drawings you will use.
When you assign a coordinate system to a drawing, you tell Autodesk
Map 3D what coordinate system is used in the drawing.
See To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing (page 123).
2 Open a new drawing. This drawing will be used as the base drawing when
you bring in objects from your other drawings.
3 In the new drawing, assign the coordinate system that you want to use
for the current drawing. All objects from the other drawings will be
transformed to this coordinate system.
4 Attach the other drawings as source drawings.
See Attaching Drawings (page 216).
5 Bring in the objects that you want from the source drawings.
To bring in objects from source drawings, you define and run a query
that selects the objects.
■ To bring in all the objects in all the source drawings, define a query
that uses a location condition that selects all objects.
■ To bring in selected objects, define a query that selects just those
objects. For example, define a location condition that selects items
in a specific part of your drawing, or define a property condition that
selects all objects on specific layers. There are many ways that you
can select objects, and you can combine conditions to select exactly
the objects you want.
See Accessing Drawing Objects (page 245).
58 | Chapter 2 Workflows for Common Tasks
As the objects are copied from the source drawings into the current map, they
are automatically transformed to the coordinate system you assigned to the
current drawing.
Attach Data to a Drawing Object
You can attach data to specific objects in your drawings.
NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. It does not apply to features
from a feature source.
1 Decide whether you want to use object data or external data.
■ Object data stores the data directly in your map. This makes it easy
to send maps to others—the data is included in the map.
■ If you store the data in an external database, such as Access or Excel,
you can create a link between the object and a specific record in the
database. This method is better if you want to share the same database
with other maps and other users, or if the database already exists.
2 Specify the table you plan to use.
■ If you use object data, define the object data table.
See To create an object data table (page 158).
■ If you use an external database, attach the database to the drawing
and create a link template for the database.
See To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task
Pane (page 164) and To create a link template (page 319).
Attach Data to a Drawing Object | 59
3 Attach data to each object.
■ If you use object data, attach data to the object.
See To attach data to an object (page 698).
■ If you use an external database, link a record from the database to the
object.
See To manually link a record to an object (page 322).
Creating and Editing Data
Find and Edit Geospatial Features
You can connect to feature sources and quickly display features in your map.
You can then check out a feature, edit it, and check it back in to the feature
source.
1 Open a drawing.
This drawing may be a blank drawing or it may contain the outline of
your project.
2 Connect to feature source data.
For more information, see Accessing Geospatial Features (page 222).
3 Locate the feature to edit.
For more information, see Finding and Selecting Features (page 775).
4 Check out the feature.
For more information, see Checking Out Features (page 442).
5 Edit the feature.
For more information, see Editing Features (page 445).
6 Check in the feature.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 441).
60 | Chapter 2 Workflows for Common Tasks
Update Your Feature Source with an Object from
a Drawing
You can add drawing objects to a feature source.
1 Open a drawing.
This drawing may be a blank drawing or it may contain the outline of
your project.
2 Connect to feature source data.
For more information, see Accessing Geospatial Features (page 222).
3 Attach the source drawing that contains the drawing object.
For more information, see Attaching Drawings (page 216).
4 Define a query to retrieve the drawing object.
For more information, see Querying Objects from Attached Drawings
(page 799).
5 Select the drawing object and create a new feature from the geometry.
For more information, see Creating a New Feature from a Drawing Object
(page 440).
Edit Objects in Attached Drawings
You can edit any objects associated with the current drawing.
NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. It does not apply to features
from a feature source.
1 Open a drawing.
For information on setting up your drawing and attaching the source
drawings you will use, see Set Up a Drawing Map (page 51).
2 Although drawings are attached as source drawings, objects from those
drawings are not automatically copied into your current drawing. To view
the objects in the attached drawings, do a Quick View.
See Viewing All Objects (page 460).
Update Your Feature Source with an Object from a Drawing | 61
Quick View shows you the objects in the source drawings, but it does not
copy objects from the source drawings to the current drawing.
3 To copy the objects you want from the source drawings into the current
drawing, run a query. A query is made up of conditions that tell Autodesk
Map 3D which objects to copy from the source drawings.
■ To find objects based on their location in the map, define a Location
condition.
See Selecting Objects by Location (page 251)
■ To find objects based on a property such as layer, color, or elevation,
define a Property condition.
See Selecting Objects by Property (page 253).
■ To find objects based on data attached to the object, such as object
data or attribute data, define a Data condition.
See Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data (page 255).
■ To find objects based on data attached to the object from an external
database, define a SQL condition.
See Selecting Obejcts Using an SQL Condition (page 257).
You can combine conditions to find exactly the objects you want, and
you can run more than one query to get different sets of objects.
4 Edit the objects.
The objects that you modify are automatically locked so no other users
can modify them until you are finished making changes.
See Sharing Attached Drawings (page 453) and Saving Objects (page 456).
5 Save the changed objects back to the source drawing.
See To save queried objects back to attached source drawings (page 466).
Styling and Analyzing Data
Analyzing Feature Source and Attribute Data
You can analyze the feature source and attribute data in your map by viewing
and editing all the data in one place, the Data Grid.
62 | Chapter 2 Workflows for Common Tasks
See Overview of the Data Grid (page 723).
Creating a Theme To Reveal Patterns in Your Data
You can create a theme to help you analyze map data and reveal patterns or
trends in the data. Themes vary the display of your data based on properties
or attributes of the data. For example, use different colors for different soil
conditions or bigger dots for larger cities.
1 Create a map by adding layers of data in Display Manager.
You can add layers from feature sources (such as Oracle Spatial, SDF or
ArcSDE), DWG drawing sources, raster imagery (JPG2000, GeoTIFF,
satellite images), or raster-based surfaces (DEM, DTED, ESRI GRID).
See Creating a Map (page 220).
2 Decide what kind of theme you want to create and determine what kind
of data you will be working with.
For example, do you want to create a theme to highlight temperature or
rainfall? Are you theming features or drawing objects? Are the objects
lines, points or polygons? You need to know because the methods and
options for theming these are different.
3 If you are theming features or drawing objects, determine whether you
have all the attribute data (sometimes referred to as properties) you need.
If not, you must add them.
For example, if you have a parcel map and want to study assessed value,
you will need those values available.
4 If you need to add attribute data:
■ For features, edit the feature schema and then add the attribute data
you need. For example, add population density to your SDF file, traffic
rates to an Oracle Spatial data store, or election results to MySQL.
■ For drawing objects, link attribute data to objects using a link template,
or store data in the drawing using object data.
See Editing a Schema. (page 387) and Adding a Property to a File-Based
Feature Schema (page 53).
See Using Attribute Data with Drawing Objects (page 315)
Note: You do not add attribute data to raster-based surfaces.
Creating a Theme To Reveal Patterns in Your Data | 63
5 Next, you create the theme. Be sure to follow the method that applies to
the data you are working with.
See Creating Themes for Feature Layers (page 744)
See Creating a Theme for a Drawing Layer (page 750).
See Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect (page 773)
6 For feature or drawing themes, add labels to the theme.
See Adding Labels to Features (page 407).
See Creating a Style (annotation or text) (page 416).
7 For feature or drawing themes, create a legend that lists the theme’s
conditions and explains the colors, symbols, line patterns, shadings and
annotation used.
See Creating a Legend (page 431).
Display and Analyze Maps with 3D Surfaces
You can add 3D raster-based surfaces such as Digital Elevation Models (DEMs),
Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED), or ESRI Grid data to your map to add
three-dimensionality.
The result is a more realistic map, which you can analyze and examine in 3D.
When you go into a 3D view, all 2D data is draped onto the surface, making
for a very realistic display.
To do further analysis, you can add contour lines to the surface, or use
raster-based theming to analyze elevation, slope, and aspect.
1 Add a raster-based surface to your map using Data Connect.
See Using DEMs in Your Map (page 264).
2 Specify hillshading and vertical exaggertation settings.
Hillshading adds shading to a surface by casting the sun's light across a
surface from the direction and angle you specify. Vertical exaggeration
controls how extreme the elevation changes appear.
3 See Using Hillshading and Vertical Exaggeration (page 770).
4 Add contour lines.
See Adding and Modifying Contour Lines (page 761).
64 | Chapter 2 Workflows for Common Tasks
5 View the map in 3D so 2D data is draped on the surface.
This gives you a realistic view of all the data in 3D.
See Draping Map Data Over Surfaces (page 763).
6 Use AutoCAD visualization tools to display different views in 3D so that
you explore, examine, and analyze the surface from different perspectives:
■ 3D orbit
■ 3D pan and zoom
■ 3D swivel
■ Walk or fly through
■ Record motion path animation
See Viewing Surfaces in 3D (page 765).
7 If you are zoomed in, use the Query To View option to resample / requery
the image. This improves the display and gets rid of things like pixelation.
See Viewing Raster Images (page 433).
8 Switch to 2D if you want.
See Switching Between 2D and 3D (page 765).
9 Theme on height, slope, or aspect to analyze the surface further. You can
turn off other layers if you want to view the theme more clearly.
See Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect (page 773)
Find and Select Features By Attribute and Location
You can find, filter, and select just the specific subset of features you want to
focus on.
Use the Find filter in the Data Grid when you want a quick and easy way to
filter (limit) the number of features based on column values in the Data Grid.
Use Search when you need a more comprehensive way to find features in map,
for example, to define attribute and location criteria or combine multiple
criteria.
1 Create a map by adding features from feature sources. Use Display
Manager to add the data.
Find and Select Features By Attribute and Location | 65
See Accessing a Feature Source (page 224).
2 Open the Data Grid and use Find to quickly locate a subset of data based
on a column value.
See Finding a Subset of Data in the Data Grid (page 778).
3 Use Search to find by map features by attribute and location.
See Searching For and Selecting Features (page 780).
66 | Chapter 2 Workflows for Common Tasks
Users Guide
This section explains Autodesk Map 3D’s features by In this part
introducing concepts, providing step-by-step procedures, and ■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
■ Accessing Data
providing quick reference information.
■ Managing Data
For information on AutoCAD commands, refer to the AutoCAD ■ Visualization and Styling
■ Creating and Editing Data
Help.
■ Analyzing Data
■ Publishing and Sharing Maps
67
Setting Up Autodesk Map
3D 2007 3
In this chapter
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
69
Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
To set up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights
The system administrator controls who has access to Autodesk Map 3D by
assigning login names and passwords to users. Also, the system administrator
can specify the privileges or operations available to each user.
Autodesk Map 3D stores the settings for several Autodesk Map 3D options
with your login name, which means that these option settings are in effect
whenever you log in under that name to that copy of Autodesk Map 3D on
that machine. After you log in, Autodesk Map 3D sets up your user
environment, including user privileges and user-specific options, such as Task
Pane options and Data Source options.
See also:
■ Setting Task Pane Options (page 170)
■ Setting Data Source Options (page 183)
To add a new user
1 Click Setup menu ➤ User Administration.
2 Under User Profile, in the Login Name box, enter a name for the user.
The login name must be unique. It is not case sensitive. Use any characters
except the following: " / \ [ ] : ; | = , + * ? < >
3 In the Password box, enter a password for the user. Passwords are case
sensitive.
4 Under Privileges, specify the operations available to the user by selecting
one or more of the following:
■ Superuser — User can perform user administration tasks, set system
options, and perform any other Autodesk Map 3D operation.
70 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
The default superuser login name is SuperUser (case insensitive) and
the password is SUPERUSER (case sensitive). If security is an issue,
make sure you change the default superuser login and password.
■ Alter Drawing Set — User can attach and detach drawings. If this
option is not selected, the user can activate and deactivate drawings,
but cannot attach and detach them.
■ Alter Object Class — User can define and edit object class definitions.
If this option is not selected, users can only assign object classes and
change the current object classification file.
■ Edit Drawing — User can edit objects and save them back to source
drawings. If this option is not selected, the user can edit objects but
cannot save them back to source drawings.
■ Draw Query — User can execute Draw mode queries, which copy
objects into the current drawing. If this option is not selected, users
can do Preview and Report mode queries only.
5 Click Add.
6 Click OK.
To edit an existing user profile, select the name in the User List and modify
the settings you want. Click Update.
Quick Reference
MAPUSERADMIN
Performs administrative functions
Menu Setup ➤ User Administration
Command Line MAPUSERADMIN
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ User
Admin
Dialog Box User Administration dialog box (page 1274)
Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights | 71
Setting Up Your Environment
To set up your environment
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
Customizing Your Work Environment
Your work environment – that is, the way the menus, toolbars, and dockable
windows are laid out – is saved in a workspace.
You can customize a workspace to look and function just the way you want,
or create a new workspace. You can save different workspaces for different
tasks, use them to help you streamline common tasks, or set up best practices
for mapping tasks and workflow.
For example, you can set up a map creation workspace to streamline acquiring,
integrating, and building maps, and another workspace for creating and
publishing map books and atlases.
Within a session, you can easily switch between workspaces.
Listed below are the predefined workspaces that are included with Autodesk
Map 3D:
■ Map 3D Geospatial - New for Autodesk Map 3D 2007! For more information
on Geospatial features, see Drawing Objects and Geospatial Features (page
10)
■ Map 3D Drawing
■ Map 3D Classic
You can customize any of these workspaces and easily switch between them.
See also:
■ Switching Between Work Environments (page 33)
To create a new workspace
1 Click View menu ➤ Menu/Toolbar Layout ➤ Customize.
72 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
2 In the Customize User Interface dialog box, under Customizations In All
CUI Files, right-click the Workspace node, and select New, or right-click
an existing workspace, and select duplicate.
3 Select the new workspace.
4 Under Workspace Contents, click Customize Workspace.
5 In the Customizations In All CUI Files tree, check the items you want to
include.
6 Click Done.
7 Click OK.
To add menu and toolbar options
1 In the Customize User Interface dialog box, under Customizations In All
CUI Files, select the workspace you want to modify.
2 Under Customizations In All CUI Files, expand the item you want to
customize so that you can see all the items underneath it.
For example, expand the Topology menu to see the topology options
underneath.
3 Under Command List, click and drag the tool you want to include to the
item in Customizations In All CUI Files.
4 Click Apply.
5 Click OK.
To add entire menus or toolbars to a workspace
1 In the Customize User Interface dialog box, under Customizations In All
CUI Files, select the workspace you want to modify.
2 Under Workspace Contents, click Customize Workspace.
3 In the Customizations In All CUI Files tree, check the items you want to
include.
4 Click Done.
5 Click OK.
Setting Up Your Environment | 73
To switch between Map 3D Geospatial, Map 3D Drawing and Map Classic
workspaces
1 Right-click any toolbar or in the menu toolbar area, select ACAD and
scroll down to Workspaces.
A floating toolbar will open with all workspace options available. You
can either dock this toolbar, leave it floating or close it.
2 In the Workspaces toolbar, use the drop-down list to select the workspace
you want. Unless you specify otherwise, Autodesk Map 3D opens with
the Map 3D Geospatial workspace.
For more information, see Switching Between Work Environments (page 33).
To restore the default colors
1 Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, click the Display tab, and then click Colors.
3 In the Color Options dialog box, select the element you want to change
by clicking the images for the Model tab or Layout tabs.
As you click areas of the images, the selection is displayed in the Window
Element list. You can also change an attribute by selecting it from the
Window Element list. For example, for the Map background, select Model
Tab Background.
4 From the Color list, click Select Color.
5 In the Select Color dialog box, click the Color Books tab, and then select
Autodesk Map 3D Colors from the Color Book list.
The Autodesk Map 3D color book displays the default colors used in the
application. You can select a color or use the color book as a reference.
It does do not control the defaults in the application; do not attempt to
modify it.
6 Select a color by clicking a color chip.
For example, click the blue Map Background chip to use the new map
background color (model tab).
7 Click OK.
8 In the Color Options dialog box, click Apply and Close to record the
current option settings in the system registry and close the dialog box.
9 In the Options dialog box, click OK.
74 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Menu Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options
Command Line OPTIONS
Task Pane Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Creating New Coordinate Systems
Autodesk Map 3D comes with an extensive library of coordinate systems. If
no suitable coordinate system exists, you can define a customized coordinate
system.
To create a new coordinate system
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
Defining Coordinate Systems
You can define customized coordinate systems in Autodesk Map 3D.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 75
To define and modify coordinate systems
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems
You can create a completely new coordinate system or use a predefined
coordinate system as a basis for creating your own. You can also modify or
delete any coordinate systems that you define. You cannot delete any of the
predefined coordinate systems supplied with Autodesk Map 3D.
When you define a coordinate system you must specify the following
parameters:
■ Map Projection — Used to convert points from latitude and longitude to
Cartesian coordinates.
and one of the following:
■ Datum — Reference point, line, or surface for mapping.
■ Ellipsoid — Geometric surface whose plane sections are all circles or ellipses.
To create and modify coordinate systems, use these procedures
■ Defining a Global Coordinate System (page 77)
■ Defining a New Datum (page 79)
■ Defining an Ellipsoid (page 80)
■ Creating a Coordinate System Category (page 81)
■ Modifying or Deleting a Global Coordinate System (page 82)
■ Modifying or Deleting a Datum (page 83)
■ Modifying or Deleting an Ellipsoid (page 84)
■ Modifying or Deleting a Coordinate System (page 85)
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
76 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Defines a global coordinate system
Menu Setup ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Command Line ADEDEFCRDSYS
Dialog Box Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box
Defining a Global Coordinate System
You can define new coordinate systems based on your own data or use a
predefined coordinate system as a basis for creating your own.
Depending on the projection you use to define a custom coordinate system,
you must provide certain information. For example, if you use the Transverse
Mercator projection, you must specify a longitude value called the central
meridian.
False Origin
When defining a custom coordinate system, you may want to enter a false
origin, with northing and easting values. For example, if you are using the
Transverse Mercator projection, and the central meridian bisects the mapping
region, half of the X coordinates are negative values. Coordinate system
definitions usually include an offset called the false origin that is added to all
coordinates to make them positive. The X coordinate of this offset is called
the false origin easting. The Y coordinate of this offset is called the false origin
northing.
Scale Reduction Factor
To produce the smallest possible distance between the projection surface and
any point in the region you are mapping, you must specify a scale reduction
factor. This is particularly important when you are mapping large regions. For
the Transverse Mercator projection, you enter this value in the Scale Reduction
Factor At The Central Meridian edit box.
To define a coordinate system
1 ClickSetup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System.
2 In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, select a category.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 77
3 Do one of the following:
■ To create a new coordinate system, click Define.
■ To create a new coordinate system based on an existing, predefined
coordinate system, select the coordinate system from the Coordinate
Systems In Category list. Click Modify.
4 On the General tab of the Define Coordinate System dialog box, enter a
unique code in the Code box.
The code must be unique within a category and across all coordinate
systems and must not contain spaces. Only the following characters are
valid: A-Z (upper or lower case), 0-9, dash, and underscore.
If you are creating a new coordinate system based on an existing,
predefined coordinate system, you must change the code before you can
change any of the other information.
5 Enter a description.
Autodesk Map 3D displays the description in the Coordinate Systems In
Category list of the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box.
6 In the Units box, select the units to use for this coordinate system.
7 Under Coordinate System Type, select one of the following:
■ To base the coordinate system on a datum, select Geodetic. Click
Select to specify the datum.
■ To base the coordinate system on an ellipsoid, select Non-Geodetic.
Click Select to specify the ellipsoid.
8 On the Projection tab, select a projection.
The projection you choose determines how many projection parameters
you must enter and the units you can use.
9 Optionally, under False Origin, enter Northing and Easting values.
10 Under Projection Parameters, enter values for the remaining fields in the
dialog box. Click OK.
These fields vary according to the projection you select.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
78 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Defines a global coordinate system
Menu Setup ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Command Line ADEDEFCRDSYS
Dialog Box Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box
Defining a New Datum
You can define new datums based on your own data or use a predefined datum
as a basis for creating your own.
When defining a custom datum, select the conversion technique, either
Molodensky, Bursa/Wolfe, or Seven Parameter Transformation. After choosing
the conversion technique, specify the appropriate conversion parameters for
the technique you chose.
To define a datum
1 On the General tab of the Define Global Coordinate System dialog box
or the Modify Global Coordinate System dialog box, select Geodetic.
Click Define.
2 In the Datum Manager dialog box, click Define.
3 On the General tab of the Define Datum dialog box, enter a code and
description for the datum.
The code must be unique within a category and across all coordinate
systems and must not contain spaces. Only the following characters are
valid: A-Z (upper or lower case), 0-9, dash, and underscore.
Autodesk Map 3D displays the description in the Datums list of the Datum
Manager dialog box.
4 Under Ellipsoid, select or define an ellipsoid to use for the new datum.
For information about defining ellipsoids, see Defining an Ellipsoid (page
80).
5 On the Datum Conversion tab, select a conversion technique from the
Datum Conversion Technique list.
6 Enter the appropriate conversion parameters for the conversion technique
you selected.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 79
Under Conversion Parameters, under Vector Component Deltas To
WGS-84 In Meters, enter the vector component deltas to WGS-84.
If you use the Bursa/Wolfe or Seven Parameter Transformation conversion
method, fill in all four edit boxes under Rotation Angle From WGS-84 In
Arc Seconds.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Menu Setup ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Command Line ADEDEFCRDSYS
Dialog Box Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box
Defining an Ellipsoid
You can define new ellipsoids based on your own data or use a predefined
ellipsoid as a basis for creating your own.
When defining a custom ellipsoid, you must specify the calculation method
and values used to determine the dimensions of the ellipsoid. After choosing
the calculation method, you supply two of the required values, and Autodesk
Map 3D determines the remaining two values for you.
To define an ellipsoid
1 Do one of the following:
■ On the General tab of the Define Datum dialog box or the Modify
Datum dialog box, under Ellipsoid, click Define.
■ Under Coordinate System Type on the General tab of the Define
Global Coordinate System dialog box, select Non-Geodetic. Click
Define.
2 In the Ellipsoid Manager dialog box, click Define.
3 In the Define Ellipsoid dialog box, enter a code and description for the
ellipsoid.
80 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
The code must be unique within a category and across all coordinate
systems and must not contain spaces. Only the following characters are
valid: A-Z (upper or lower case), 0-9, dash, and underscore.
Autodesk Map 3D displays the description in the Available Ellipsoids list.
4 Under Ellipsoid Dimensions, do the following:
5 Select a calculation method.
6 Enter values for the two parameters that correspond to the calculation
method you chose. Autodesk Map 3D computes the other two values
based on the ones you enter.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Menu Setup ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Command Line ADEDEFCRDSYS
Dialog Box Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box
Creating a Coordinate System Category
You can organize your coordinate systems by creating categories and moving
coordinate systems into those categories.
To create a coordinate system category
1 ClickSetup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System.
2 In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, click Category
Manager.
3 In the Coordinate System Category Manager, click New.
4 Type a name in the Category Name box.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 81
5 From the Available Categories list, select a category that contains
coordinate systems to include in the new category.
6 In the Coordinate Systems In Category list, select the coordinate systems
to include in the new category.
7 Click Add.
You can select any number of coordinate systems from existing categories
to include in the new category.
8 When you have finished adding coordinate systems, click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Menu Setup ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Command Line ADEDEFCRDSYS
Dialog Box Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box
Modifying or Deleting a Global Coordinate System
You can modify or delete any coordinate systems that you define. You cannot
modify or delete predefined coordinate systems supplied with Autodesk Map
3D.
To modify or delete a coordinate system
1 ClickSetup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System.
2 In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, select the category
that contains the global coordinate system to modify or delete.
3 Select the coordinate system from the Coordinate Systems In Category
list.
4 To modify the coordinate system, click Modify.
To delete the coordinate system, click Remove. Click OK.
82 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
5 If you are modifying the coordinate system, in the Modify Global
Coordinate System dialog box, change information as necessary.
To modify a predefined coordinate system, you must change the code
on the General tab before you can make changes to the other coordinate
system properties.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Menu Setup ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Command Line ADEDEFCRDSYS
Dialog Box Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box
Modifying or Deleting a Datum
You can modify or delete any datums that you define. You cannot modify or
delete predefined datums supplied with Autodesk Map 3D.
If you modify or delete a datum that you have defined, you must also modify
or delete any coordinate systems that reference that datum.
To modify or delete a datum
1 On the General tab of the Define Global Coordinate System dialog box
or the Modify Global Coordinate System dialog box, select Geodetic.
Click Define.
2 In the Datum Manager dialog box, select a datum.
3 To modify the datum, click Modify.
To remove the datum, click Remove.
4 If you are modifying the daturm, on the General tab of the Define Datum
dialog box, change the code and description for the datum.
To modify a predefined datum, you must change the code on the General
tab before you can make changes to the other datum properties.
5 Under Ellipsoid, select or define an ellipsoid to use for the datum.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 83
For information about defining ellipsoids, see Defining an Ellipsoid (page
80).
6 On the Datum Conversion tab, select a conversion technique from the
Datum Conversion Technique list.
7 Enter the appropriate conversion parameters for the conversion technique
you selected.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Menu Setup ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Command Line ADEDEFCRDSYS
Dialog Box Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box
Modifying or Deleting an Ellipsoid
You can modify or delete any ellipsoids that you define. You cannot modify
or delete predefined ellipsoids supplied with Autodesk Map 3D.
If you modify or delete an ellipsoid that you have defined, you must also
modify or delete any coordinate systems that reference that ellipsoid.
To modify or delete an ellipsoid
1 On the General tab of the Define Datum dialog box or the Modify Datum
dialog box, under Ellipsoid, click Define.
2 In the Ellipsoid Manager dialog box, select an ellipsoid.
3 To modify the ellipsoid, click Modify.
To delete the ellipsoid, click Remove.
4 If you are modifying an ellipsoid, enter a code and description for the
ellipsoid.
To modify a predefined ellipsoid, you must change the code before you
can make changes to the other ellipsoid properties.
84 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
5 Under Calculation Method, select a calculation method.
6 Enter the appropriate ellipsoid dimension parameters for the calculation
method you selected.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Menu Setup ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Command Line ADEDEFCRDSYS
Dialog Box Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box
Modifying or Deleting a Coordinate System
Category
You can modify categories by adding or removing coordinate systems, or
moving coordinate systems from one category to another. You can also delete
categories.
To edit or delete a coordinate system category
1 ClickSetup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System.
2 In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, click Category
Manager.
3 In the Coordinate System Category Manager, select a category.
4 To modify the category, click Edit.
To delete the category, click Remove.
5 If you are modifying the category, do one or more of the following:
■ To remove coordinate systems from the category, click the coordinate
system names in the list under the Category Name box. Click Remove.
■ To add coordinate systems to the category, click the coordinate system
names in the list under the Available Categories list. Click Add.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 85
■ To add coordinate systems from different categories, select the category
name in the Available Categories list.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Menu Setup ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Command Line ADEDEFCRDSYS
Dialog Box Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box
Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues
When converting between certain coordinate systems in North American,
Australia, and New Zealand, Autodesk Map 3D uses grid based data files called
grid data files to obtain datum shift information.
For United States, Australia, and New Zealand geography, the grid data files
are in the public domain and are distributed with Autodesk Map 3D. The grid
data files which cover Canadian geography are not in the public domain and
must be obtained from the proper authorities in Canada. For more information,
see Datum Shift Issues for North American Users (page 92).
Autodesk Map 3D uses Grid Data Catalog (GDC) files to determine the order
in which grid data files are used in areas of overlap when converting from one
datum to another. When you have a new grid data file, for example from
Canada, copy it into the appropriate folder under the Autodesk shared
coordinate system folder, by default C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk
Shared\GIS\CoordSys\Canada. Edit the appropriate GDC file to point to the
name and location of your new grid data file. For more information on editing
GDC files, refer to Grid Data Catlog (GDC) (page 87).
See also:
■ Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 91)
■ Grid Data Files for the United States (page 88)
■ Coordinate System Files (page 93)
86 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
■ Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes (page
91)
Grid Data Catalog (GDC) Files
Autodesk Map 3D uses Grid Data Catalog (GDC) files to determine the order
in which grid data files are used in areas of overlap when converting from one
datum to another in certain parts of the world, such as North America,
Australia, and New Zealand.
In the case of an overlapping coverage, Autodesk Map 3D selects the grid data
file with the smallest grid cell in the region of the conversion. If the grid cell
sizes are the same, Autodesk Map 3D selects the grid data file that appears first
in the GDC file.
Grid Data Catalog files are ASCII text files with a .gdc extension that are stored,
by default, in the C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk
Shared\GIS\CoordSys\11c folder. The base name of a GDC file is generally
based on the transformation with which it is associated. For example, the
GDC file for the NAD27 to NAD83 transformation is Nad27toNad83.gdc.
Each line in a GDC file points to a grid data file (also known as a datum shift
data file). GDC files also often include comments that are preceded by a pound
sign (#) and a fallback datum definition that is used when none of the grid
data files provide coverage for a point being converted.
When you obtain new grid data files, you must edit the appropriate GDC file
to point to the name and location of your new file. You can also make other
changes to GDC files, such as rearranging or replacing grid data files, changing
the fallback datum definition, or adding comments.
To view or edit GDC files, use any text editor or word processor that can
produce an ASCII file, such as Notepad or Wordpad. It is strongly
recommended that you back up GDC files before you edit them, so you can
restore them to their previous state, if necessary.
See also:
■ Datum Shift Issues for North American Users (page 92)
■ Coordinate System Files (page 93)
■ Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 86)
■ Grid Data Files for the United States (page 88)
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 87
■ Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 91)
■ Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes (page
91)
Grid Data Files for the United States
Autodesk Map 3D uses North American Datum Conversion (NADCON) grid
data files from the National Geodetic Survey to obtain latitude and longitude
shift information for converting between coordinate systems within the United
States. A pair of grid data files is required for each area or state covered: a .las
file is required for latitude shift values (latitude seconds) and a .los file for
longitude shift values (longitude seconds).
The NADCON files include grid data files for transformations between NAD83
and state readjustments to HARN (High Accuracy Resolution Network) projects.
The .las and .los files are in the public domain and are distributed with
Autodesk Map 3D. The files are stored in the Autodesk shared coordinate
system folder, by default C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk
Shared\GIS\CoordSys\Usa\Nadcon.
The following is a list of NADCON grid data files.
Files (.las and NADCON (North American Area/State
.los) Datum Conversion)
conus NAD27 to NAD83 United States (USA) - lower 48 states including
EEZ
alaska Alaska to NAD83 Alaska
hawaii Old Hawaiian to NAD83 Hawaii
prvi Puerto Rico to NAD83 Puerto Rico, Virgin Islands
stlrnc St. Lawrence Island to NAD83 St Lawrence: off the coast of Alaska
stpaul St. Paul Island to NAD83 St Paul: Pribiloff Islands off the coast of Alaska
88 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Files (.las and NADCON (North American Area/State
.los) Datum Conversion)
stgeorge St. George Island to NAD83 St George: Pribiloff Islands off the coast of
Alaska
HARN Readjust-
ments
alhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Alabama
azhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Arizona
cahpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) California, south of 38 degrees North
cnhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) California, north of 38 degrees North
cohpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Colorado
emhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Idaho and Montana, east of 113 degrees West
ethpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Texas, east of 100 degrees West
flhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Florida
gahpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Georgia
kyhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Kentucky
lahpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Louisiana
mdhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Maryland and Delaware
mehpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Maine
mihpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Michigan
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 89
Files (.las and NADCON (North American Area/State
.los) Datum Conversion)
mshpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Mississippi
nbhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Nebraska
ndhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) North Dakota
nehpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) New England (Connecticut, Massachusetts,
New Hampshire, Rhode Island, and Vermont)
nmhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) New Mexico
nyhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) New York
okhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Oklahoma
pvhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Puerto Rico, Virgin Islands
sdhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) South Dakota
tnhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Tennessee
vahpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Virginia, excluding West Virginia
wihpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Wisconsin
wmhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Idaho and Montana, west of 113 degrees West
wohpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Washington and Oregon
wthpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Texas, west of 100 degrees West
wyhpgn NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN) Wyoming
For more information about NADCON grid data files, refer to the National
Geodetic Survey web site.
90 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand
Autodesk Map 3D comes with grid data files for Australia and New Zealand.
These files are installed in folders under the Autodesk shared coordinate system
folder, by default C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk Shared\GIS\CoordSys.
Following is a table of the grid data files and GDC files used for Australia and
New Zealand.
Area Transformation Grid Data File (GSB) GDC File
Australia AGD84 to GDA94 QLD_1299.gsb agd84ToGda94.gdc
Victoria AGD66 to GDA94 vic_0799.gsb agd66ToGda94.gdc
Tasmania AGD66 to GDA94 tas_1098.gsb agd66ToGda94.gdc
Northern Territory AGD66 to GDA94 Nt_0599.gsb agd66ToGda94.gdc
New Zealand New Zealand nzgd2kgrid9911.gsb Nzgd49ToNzgd2K.gdc
For more information about Australia and New Zealand coordinate systems,
go to http://www.ga.gov.au.
For information about changes to Australian datum transformations and
coordinate systems, see Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate
System Changes (page 91).
Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate
System Changes
The Geocentric Datum of Australia (GDA) is the new Australian coordinate
system, replacing the Australian Geodetic Datum (AGD). GDA is part of a
global coordinate reference frame and is directly compatible with the Global
Positioning System (GPS).
Due to differences in the way the two datums were created, the GDA94
coordinates of a point appear to be about 200 meters northeast of the AGD
coordinates of the same point. The precise size and orientation of the difference
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 91
will vary from place to place. For more technical information on the GDA, go
to http://www.icsm.gov.au/icsm/gda/
The new implementation of GDA94 and the associated datum transformations
are available by using the coordinate system files supplied in Autodesk Map
3D. To use the new high accuracy GDA94 datum, you must first reassign one
of the following coordinate systems to your drawing:
■ AMG66-49-Grid through AMG66-57-Grid
■ AMG-49-Grid through AMG-57-Grid
■ MGA-48-Grid through MGA-58-Grid
■ ISG_54-2-Grid through ISG_56-2-Grid
■ SGC-Grid
■ VICT-Grid
■ LL-AGD84-Grid
For example, if you have a drawing that uses AM666-49, reassign it to
AM666-49-Grid before using GDA94.
To define a new coordinate system using high accuracy datum transformations,
use ASTRLA66-Grid and ASTRLA84-Grid.
To define a new coordinate system using the 3-Dimensional Similarity
Transformations, use ASTRLA66-7P, STRLA66-Tasm-7P, ASTRLA66-VictNSW-7P,
ASTRLA66-ACT-7P, and ASTRLA84-7P.
Datum Shift Issues for North American Users
If the source and destination coordinate systems use different datums, Autodesk
Map 3D automatically performs a datum shift. Within North America, this is
most often a shift between the NAD27 and NAD83 datums.
For United States users, Autodesk Map 3D uses the freely distributable NADCON
grid data files (page 88) supplied by USGS.
Canadian users may use either version 1 or version 2 of the Canadian National
Transformation supplied by Geomatics Canada.
■ To use version 2 of the Canadian National Transformation, obtain a copy
of the data file. Contact:
Information Services
92 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Geodetic Survey Division, Geomatics Canada
615 Booth Street
Ottawa, Ontario, K1A 0E9
(613) 995-4410
http://www.geod.nrcan.gc.ca
Once you have the file, copy it into the Autodesk shared coordinate system
folder, by default C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk
Shared\GIS\CoordSys\Canada, and give it the name Ntv2_0.gsb.
Using a text editor such as Notepad, open Nad27ToNad83.gdc (located by
default in the C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk
Shared\GIS\CoordSys\11c folder) and delete the initial pound sign (#) from
the line that begins: #.\Canada\Ntv2_0.gsb.
■ To use version 1 of the Canadian National Transformation, obtain the grid
file, copy it into the C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk
Shared\GIS\CoordSys\Canada folder, and give it the name grid11.dac. Open
Nad27ToNad83.gdc and delete the initial pound sign (#) from the line that
begins: #.\Canada\grid11.dac
For more information on editing GDC files, see Grid Data Catalog (GDC)
Files (page 87).
WARNING Geomatics Canada no longer supports version 1, and many
Canadian provinces do not consider it to produce valid results. If you are in
Canada and doing NAD Shifts, it is recommended that you use version 2.
If both versions of the Canadian National Transformation are present, Autodesk
Map 3D uses version 2.
Coordinate System Files
Autodesk Map 3D uses certain files for storing coordinate system definitions
and defining datum transformation information.
Following is a list of these files, located in the Autodesk shared coordinate
system folder, by default C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk
Shared\GIS\CoordSys. Some of the files are text files that you can modify with
a text editor; however, you should always make backup copies of these files
before modifying them.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 93
NOTE Files that should not be modified are marked with an asterisk (*).
File Description
agd66ToGda94.gdc Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within Australia. Default grid data files:
Vic_0799.gsb, nt_0599.gsb, and
TAS_1098.gsb. Default fallback datum:
ASTRLA66.
agd84ToGda94.gdc Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within Australia. Default grid data file:
QLD_1299.gsb. Default fallback datum:
ASTRLA84-7P.
GeoidHeight.gdc Grid Data Catalog file for determining the
geoid height for any position in the United
States. Default data files are
GEO96AN.GEO, GEO96AS.GEO,
GEO96HW.GEO, GEO96NC.GEO,
GEO96NE.GEO, GEO96NW.GEO,
GEO96PR.GEO, GEO96SC.GEO,
GEO96SE.GEO, and GEO96SW.GEO. Fall-
back datum definition is not recommend-
ed.
Nad27ToNad83.gdc Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within North America. Default data files:
Conus.l?s, Alaska.l?s, PrVi.l?s, Hawaii.l?s,
STGEORGE.l?s, STLRNC.l?s, and
STPAUL.l?s. Default fallback datum:
NAD27-48.
Nad83ToHarn.gdc Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within North America. Default grid data
files: alhpgn.l?s, azhpgn.l?s, cnhpgn.l?s,
cohpgn.l?s, cshpgn.l?s, emhpgn.l?s, eth-
pgn.l?s, flhpgn.l?s, gahpgn.l?s, hihpgn.l?s,
kshpgn.l?s, kyhpgn.l?s, lahpgn.l?s, mdh-
pgn.l?s, mehpgn.l?s, mihpgn.l?s, msh-
pgn.l?s, nbhpgn.l?s, ndhpgn.l?s, neh-
94 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
File Description
pgn.l?s, nmhpgn.l?s, nvhpgn.l?s, nyh-
pgn.l?s, ohhpgn.l?s, okhpgn.l?s, pvh-
pgn.l?s, sdhpgn.l?s, tnhpgn.l?s, uthpgn.l?s,
vahpgn.l?s, wihpgn.l?s, wmhpgn.l?s,
wohpgn.l?s, wthpgn.l?s, wvhpgn.l?s, and
wyhpgn.l?s. Fallback datum definition is
not recommended.
Nzgd49ToNzgd2K.gdc Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within New Zealand. Default grid data file:
nzgd2kgrid9911.gsb. Default fallback da-
tum: NZGD49-7P.
Vertcon.gdc Grid Data Catalog file for computing the
modeled difference in orthometric height
between the North American Vertical Da-
tum of 1988 (NAVD 88) and the National
Geodetic Vertical Datum of 1929 (NGVD
29) for a given location specified by lati-
tude and longitude. Default grid data files:
VERTCONC.94, VERTCONE.94, and VERT-
CONW.94. Fallback datum definition is not
recommended.
Category.csd * A binary compiled file used for storing co-
ordinate system category definitions. Also
called a dictionary file.
Coordsys.csd * Coordinate systems dictionary file.
Datums.csd * Datums dictionary file.
Elipsoid.csd * Ellipsoids dictionary file.
.mrt files * Multiple Regression Transformation binary
files that store the coefficients required for
multiple regression analysis. The base name
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 95
File Description
of the file is the same as the key name of
the datum with which it is associated.
.94 files * Grid data files used by Vertcon.gdc.
.geo files * Data files for determining the geoid height
for any position in the United States. These
are in GEOID96 format and are used by
GeoidHeight.gdc.
.gsb files * Grid data files for Canada, Australia, and
New Zealand. Both latitude and longitude
shifts (as well as accuracy values) are incor-
porated into a single .gsb file. The file
structure also supports the concept of
multiple grids, and sub-grids within a ma-
jor grid.
.las and .los files * Grid data files for United States geography.
See also:
■ Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 86)
■ Grid Data Catalog (GDC) Files (page 87)
■ Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 91)
■ Grid Data Files for the United States (page 88)
Setting Up Object Classification
Define the object classes to use in your drawings.
To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
70).
96 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
See also:
■ Overview of Setting Up Object Classification (page 97)
■ Attaching an Object Class Definition File (page 677)
To set up an object class
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
See also:
■ Overview of Setting Up Object Classification (page 97)
Overview of Setting Up Object Classification
When you set up object classification, you define a set of standard objects for
your organization. Using object classification, whenever a user adds one of
these standard objects to a drawing, the object is created using the properties
you have defined.
You set up object classification by doing the following:
■ Create an object definition file.
■ Determine the objects you want to use in your organization.
■ Determine the hierarchy of object classes.
You can create categories of object classes and have all object classes in a
category inherit certain settings from the base object class for that category.
■ Define the object classes, and specify the allowable range of values for each
property included in an object class.
■ Attach the object class definition file to your drawing template.
Once you have set up the object definition file, people in your organization
can create classified objects. When someone creates an object using object
classification, the classified object is created using the appropriate object type,
it has the object data, external data, and topology data that you have defined
for the object class, and all properties included in the object class definition
have values that fall within the range you specified for the property.
Setting Up Object Classification | 97
When users edit the properties of classified objects, they can enter only values
that fall within the ranges you have specified for the property.
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
70).
See also:
■ Using Object Classification (page 667)
■ Understanding Object Classification (page 663)
To set up object classification
■ Create a sample object that has all the data and properties that you want
to include in the object class definition file.
■ Attach (page 677)an existing object definition file or create (page 108) a new
object class definition file.
■ Define (page 100) the new object class.
To use this object class as a base class (page 103), set the default value and
the range of allowable values (page 105) for each object that you include.
■ Store the object class definition file in a location that is accessible to all
the people in your organization who need it.
■ You can attach the object class definition file to your drawing template so
it is attached to all new drawings.
Quick Reference
ATTACHDEF
Changes the current feature definition file
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Attach Definition
File
Command Line ATTACHDEF
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Attach Definition File
98 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Dialog Box Attach Object Class Definition File dialog box (page
1086)
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in the current drawing
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class
Icon
Define Object Class
Command Line FEATUREDEF
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Dialog Box Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1089)
NEWDEF
Creates a new object class definition file
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ New Defintion File
Command Line NEWDEF
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ New Definition File
Dialog Box New Object Class Definition File dialog box (page 1094)
Defining an Object Class
Define an object class by selecting a sample object in your drawing, choosing
which of its properties to include in the definition, and specifying the allowable
settings.
For example, if you want to define an object class for manhole covers, select
an existing manhole cover in your drawing.
If you do not have a sample object in your drawing, create an object with the
data and property settings that you want to include in the object class
definition.
Setting Up Object Classification | 99
For each object class, Autodesk Map 3D stores information on how to create
the object, what properties it should have, what data should be attached, and
what topology information should be associated with it. All objects you create
using this object class definition will have the selected properties and values.
Editing Object Class Definitions
To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class Privileges (page
70).
WARNING Only one person should edit object class definitions at a time. If two
people edit at the same time, one set of edits may be lost.
If the definition file has just been edited by someone else, quit Autodesk Map
3D and restart to get the updated definitions.
Renaming an Object Class
When you rename an object class, you change the name only in the object
class definition file. Any objects tagged with the object class name are
unchanged. Since these objects point to a name that no longer exists in the
object class definition file, the objects become undefined. You can search for
these undefined objects and update their object class name.
See also:
■ Using Base Object Classes (page 102)
■ Modifying an Object Class Definition (page 106)
■ Attaching an Object Class Definition File (page 677)
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
70).
To define an object class
1 Select a sample object for the object class.
The sample object must have the properties, links, and attributes that
you want to include in the definition of the object class.
2 If an object definition file is not attached, enter attachdef on the
command line and attach the file.
100 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
3 On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click Object Classes.
Click Define Object Class.
4 When prompted to select a sample object, select the sample object. Press
Enter.
5 In the Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1089), enter a name
and a description.
6 To base this object class on an existing object class (page 103), select the
existing object class from the Based On list.
To use this object class as a base only, select Use As Base Object
Classification Only.
7 On the Applies To tab, select the object type for this object class.
You must select the object type before you can select properties on the
Properties List tab.
For best results, select the most specific object type that applies to all
objects in this class.
NOTE If you plan to use this object class with objects from a drawing source,
do not select more than one object type.
8 On the Properties List tab, select each of the properties you want to
include in the definition. For each property, enter a default value and a
range of possible values (page 105).
To specify a lineweight, enter the decimal value as an integer. For example,
to specify a lineweight of 0.13, enter 13.
9 On the Class Settings tab, select the object to use to create the feature.
For example, if you are defining an object class for roads, select Polyline
as the creation method.
NOTE You can select only objects that match the object type you selected
on the Applies To tab.
You can also specify the icon to display for the object class and whether
or not you want the object class to appear on the Map Explorer tab of
the Task Pane.
Setting Up Object Classification | 101
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in the current drawing
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class
Icon
Define Object Class
Command Line FEATUREDEF
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Dialog Box Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1089)
Using Base Object Classes
You can create hierarchies of object classes. When you base a new object class
on an existing object class, the new object class has all the properties of the
base class.
You cannot change base properties, but you can modify their attributes,
including the default value and the range of allowable values, and you can
include additional properties.
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
70).
Sample Use
1 Define an object class called Roads with the basic properties that you
want to assign to all roads.
2 Define object classes called Primary Roads, Local Roads, and Fire Roads,
and base each of them on Roads.
Because the new object classes are based on Roads, they include all the
properties selected for Roads.
When you select all objects in a base class, objects in object classes based
on that class are also selected.
102 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Using Object Classes as Base Classes Only
Sometimes when you create a base class, you intend that it be used only as a
base for other object classes and not to create objects in drawings. For example,
you may not want the object class Roads to be used to create roads. You want
people to create roads using the Primary Roads and Secondary Roads classes
that are based on the Roads class. You can specify that an object class can be
used only as a base class.
Editing Base Classes
To edit a definition for an object class, you must have a sample object in the
drawing. However, if you use an object class as a base class only, you will not
have any example objects. For these object classes, you must edit the .xml
definition file directly.
See also:
■ Defining an Object Class (page 99)
■ Setting Up Object Classification (page 96)
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
70).
To base a new object class on an existing class
1 Define the object class (page 100).
2 For Based On, select the object class on which you want to base this new
object class.
The selected properties of the base object class appear in the list.
3 You cannot clear any of the properties of the base object class, but you
can edit the property attributes, including the default and the range of
allowable values.
4 Add any additional properties you want, and finish defining the object
class.
To specify that an object class can be used only as a base class
1 Define the object class (page 100).
Setting Up Object Classification | 103
2 In the Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1089), select Use As
Base Object Classification Only.
Users can select objects using the base object class, but they cannot create
objects using it.
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in the current drawing
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class
Icon
Define Object Class
Command Line FEATUREDEF
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Dialog Box Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1089)
Specifying Ranges and Defaults
When you define an object class, you can specify a range of allowable values
and a default value for new objects created using the object class.
When someone creates a new object using this object class, Autodesk Map 3D
creates the object using the current settings for the property. If the current
settings do not match the range, the object is created using the specified
default value.
When users edit the values for properties associated with the object class, they
can only values that are within the allowable range. (This applies only if you
edit the properties using the Object Class Data tab of the Properties palette.)
When users classify existing objects, they can skip objects whose values are
not within the specified range. If they do not skip these objects, the objects
are assigned the default values.
104 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
70).
See also:
■ Defining an Object Class (page 99)
■ Setting Up Object Classification (page 96)
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges (page
70).
To specify a default value and a range for a property
1 Create the object class and select the object type (page 100) on the Applies
To tab of the Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1089).
2 On the Properties List tab, select a property.
3 Under Property Attributes, for Default, enter the default value for this
property.
4 For Range, specify the range of allowable values.
Click… to select from a list of properties if available, otherwise, enter the
values.
■ To enter a list of values, separate them with commas, for example:
1,5,9
■ To enter a range of numbers, enclose the first and last numbers in
square brackets and separate the numbers with a comma, for example:
[3,7]
■ You can combine a range with additional values, for example: 1,[3,7],9
■ To delete a range, enter two dashes ( "--" ).
Note that range values are case-sensitive. For example, if you specify "Road"
as an allowable value in the range, "ROAD" will not match this value and will
be considered outside of the range.
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Setting Up Object Classification | 105
Defines a new object class based on an example in the current drawing
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class
Icon
Define Object Class
Command Line FEATUREDEF
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Dialog Box Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1089)
Modifying an Object Class Definition
To add properties to an object class definition, you must have a sample object
that includes the properties you want to add.
Notes and Warnings
When you rename an object class, you change the name only in the object
classification file. Any objects tagged with the object class name are unchanged.
Since these objects point to an object class name that no longer exists in the
object classification file, the objects become undefined. You can search for
these undefined objects and update their object class name.
NOTE To modify an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges
(page 70).
See also:
■ Defining an Object Class (page 99)
■ Setting Up Object Classification (page 96)
NOTE To modify an object class definition, you must have Alter Object Class
privileges (page 70).
To modify an object class definition
1 Open a drawing that contains an object classified with the object class
you want to modify.
106 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
To add properties to the object class definition, the sample object must
have the properties you want to add to the object class definition.
2 If an object classification file is not attached, enter attachdef on the
command line and attach the file.
3 On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click the object class
whose definition you want to modify. Click Define Object Class.
4 Select the sample object. This object must be classified with the object
class you want to modify.
5 In the Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1089), modify
properties.
■ You cannot change the object type used for the feature.
■ On the Properties List tab, select or clear properties you want to include
in the definition. For each new property, enter a default value and a
range of possible values (page 105).
To specify a lineweight, enter the decimal value as an integer. For
example, to specify a lineweight of 0.13, enter 13.
■ On the Class Settings tab, specify the icon to display for the feature
and whether the data appears on the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane.
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in the current drawing
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class
Icon
Define Object Class
Command Line FEATUREDEF
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Dialog Box Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1089)
Setting Up Object Classification | 107
Creating an Object Classification File
The object classification file contains information on object classes you have
defined. You can create a new object classification file.
As a general rule, you want to use the same object classification file across all
your drawings. This ensures that you have the same object class definitions
for all source drawings attached to a drawing. You may want to attach the
object classification file to the drawing template, and make sure that everyone
has the same alias to the path.
If the object classification file is shared by users in your organization, store it
on the network in a place accessible to all users.
To use object classification, users attach the object classification file to their
drawing. They can then create standard objects using the object class
definitions.
Only the object classes defined in the object classification file attached to a
drawing can be assigned to objects or used to create new objects.
NOTE To create a new object classification file, you must have Alter Object Class
privileges (page 70).
See also:
■ Attaching an Object Class Definition File (page 677)
■ Setting Up Object Classification (page 96)
To create a new object classification file
1 On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click Object Classes.
Click New Definition File.
2 Specify a name for the new object classification file. Click OK.
NOTE To create a new object classification file, you must have Alter Object Class
privileges (page 70).
Quick Reference
NEWDEF
108 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Creates a new object class definition file
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ New Defintion File
Command Line NEWDEF
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ New Definition File
Dialog Box New Object Class Definition File dialog box (page 1094)
Setting Up for Digitizing
Before you begin digitizing, you must configure the digitizer, register the map,
and set the digitizing options.
See also:
■ Digitizing Objects (page 705)
■ Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 706)
To set up for digitizing
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
Configuring the Digitizer
You must configure the digitizer so a movement on the digitizing tablet can
be recorded directly into an existing drawing file as you digitize.
To configure the digitizing tablet, you define screen pointing areas. A screen
pointing area is a rectangular region on the digitizer surface within which the
digitizer acts like a mouse and can access windows, menus, and dialog boxes.
You can configure two screen pointing areas, one fixed and one floating.
When you digitize, the fixed screen pointing area is disabled. To access the
menus from the digitizer, use the floating screen pointing area.
You can toggle between the fixed and floating screen pointing areas with the
F12 key.
Setting Up for Digitizing | 109
See also:
■ Registering the Map (page 111)
■ Setting Digitizing Specifications (page 114)
■ Digitizing Objects (page 705)
■ Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 706)
To configure the digitizer
1 Click Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options and click the System tab.
2 Select your digitizer in the Current Pointing Device list.
3 Start the TABLET command, and use the CFG option to configure the
tablet. Specify the fixed screen pointing area and a floating screen pointing
area in a corner of your tablet area.
4 Mark the floating screen area on your tablet with a marker or piece of
paper.
When you complete the configuration, two new options appear on the
status bar at the bottom of the Autodesk Map 3D window. TABLET and
FLOAT let you toggle the two modes.
You must use the Options dialog box to disable the mouse while you are
digitizing.
1 Choose Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options and select the System tab.
2 Under Accept Input From, select Digitizer Only.
3 Click OK.
When you complete digitizing, return to the Options dialog and select the
Digitizer And Mouse option to use both input devices.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Menu Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options
110 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Command Line OPTIONS
Task Pane Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
TABLET
Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing table
Command Line TABLET
Registering the Map
Registration is the process of making a map's coordinate system correspond to
the Cartesian coordinate system used by Autodesk Map 3D.
You select specific calibration and control points for each map that you digitize.
Digitizer calibration points.
Choosing the Number of Calibration Points
Selecting a maximum of nine points is a good rule; specifying more only
increases computation time with little increase in precision. If the original is
not badly distorted, four corner points and some intermediate points should
be sufficient. It is more important to distribute the points evenly around the
whole map than to concentrate more points in an area.
Setting Up for Digitizing | 111
Calibration Options
To complete the calibration, select one of the following transformation options:
■ Orthogonal — Needs only two digitized and specified calibration points
to create a transformation consisting of arbitrary translation, uniform
scaling, and rotation. This method is not recommended unless only two
control points can be found.
■ Affine — Requires three calibration points. Allows a tablet transformation
combining translation, independent X and Y scaling, rotation, and some
skewing. Provides an arbitrary linear transformation in two-dimensional
space. This is the preferred method for registering paper maps drawn in a
Cartesian coordinate system.
■ Projective — Needs at least four calibration points. Makes a transformation
equivalent to a perspective projection of any plane onto another plane.
Allows for some stretching of an original paper drawing by different
amounts along a perspective projection. This is the best option for
orthophotos.
The TABLET command calculates the errors associated with the available
transformation options, depending on how many points you digitized. When
the calculations are complete, or when you cancel the calculations, a table
showing the results of your calibration appears. Here is a sample output:
Transformation type: Orthogonal Affine Projective
Outcome of fit: Success Success Exact
RMS Error: 154 79
Standard deviation: 67 1
Largest residual: 208 80
At point: 3 4
Second largest residual: 191 8
At point: 4 3
112 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
There are four possible responses from the calibration calculations for each
transformation type:
■ Exact — Number of points specified is correct for this type of
transformation.
■ Success — More points specified than needed. For a Success, the RMS error
and standard deviation are reported.
■ Impossible — Not enough points specified to define a transformation.
■ Failure — Points specified are colinear or coincidental. The transformation
may not have valid definition.
If you get either Impossible or Failure, do not use that transformation. If all
the results are Impossible or Failure, check the calibration on the digitizer,
recalibrate, and digitize the map again.
RMS Error, Standard Deviation, and Residual Values
The RMS error indicates how uniform or extreme the required transformation
is: the lower the value, the better the calibration.
Standard deviation is reported at all calibration points. The residual error is
the difference between the actual calibration point and the computed
transformation point. A large difference indicates a procedural error. You may
have entered the wrong coordinates or digitized a wrong point.
If the RMS and standard deviation values seem high, you might have made
an error when entering location values or the map might have slipped during
calibration. In this case, restart the procedure to calibrate the digitizer.
See also:
■ Configuring the Digitizer (page 109)
■ Setting Digitizing Specifications (page 114)
■ Digitizing Objects (page 705)
■ Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 706)
To register the map
1 Tape the map on the tablet. The map on the tablet should be flat, with
no bumps or wrinkles, and securely fastened.
Setting Up for Digitizing | 113
2 Start the TABLET command and use the CAL option.
3 Digitize the control points of the map, and enter X and Y coordinate
values for the locations.
4 When you complete the control points, press Enter. Wait for the
calculations to complete.
5 At the prompt, enter the calibration option to use. Select the
transformation that gave an Exact outcome. If all the transformations
were a Success, select the option with the lowest RMS and standard
deviation errors.
Quick Reference
TABLET
Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing table
Command Line TABLET
Setting Digitizing Specifications
To use the options provided by the MAPDIGITIZE command, you must
configure the digitizer and register the map.
Attaching Data
You can link data to objects as you digitize. Although you can store data in
Autodesk Map 3D as block attributes, you can perform more sophisticated
analysis of the data if you use one of the following methods:
■ Data linked to an object is stored as object data in the drawing.
■ Data linked to an object is stored in an external database.
Label Point
A label point is the point used to insert text to describe the digitized object.
You can specify a label point for each object as you digitize.
114 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Layer
Plan the layers you will use in your drawing. A layer is a logical grouping of
data, which simplifies organizing and viewing data. For more information,
look up "layers, creating" in the help index.
Each object that represents a different type of map data should go on a separate
layer. For example, a polyline representing a coastline could go on a layer
named COASTLINE, interstate highways on a layer named INTERSTATE, land
boundaries on a layer named LOTS.
If you have not established a scheme for layer names, you can create one using
the numeric feature-classification code found in some digital source data. For
example, major roads might be on a layer named "170-201". A better naming
convention combines names that suggest their function and a structure that
allows selection with wild cards and groups of layer names. For example, you
might decide that all topographic objects should go on layers beginning with
the letters TP. So you might put rivers on a layer named TP_RIVERS, and
contours on a layer named TP_CONTOURS. To freeze, thaw, lock, or unlock
all layers with topographic data, you use the expression TP*. For more
information on wild-card characters, look up "wild-card characters" in the
help index.
Block Name or Linetype
To represent nodes using blocks available in the current drawing, select a block
name or ACAD_POINT for the block name.
Choosing ACAD_POINT places a point object at each node position. For
information about changing the appearance of this point object, look up
DDPTYPE in the help index.
Wherever possible, use the linetypes supplied with Autodesk Map 3D to
indicate different types of boundaries, road types, and waterways. Using
standard linetypes ensures consistency across maps and helps you keep track
of what you have digitized. Associate each linetype with a different layer.
Object Snap
Use object snap to tie nodes or segments to linear objects that are already in
place. For example, always use object snap to position junctions of pipes,
roads, or railways.
Setting Up for Digitizing | 115
Width
Linear objects that contain three-dimensional information cannot have a
width.
See also:
■ Registering the Map (page 111)
■ Configuring the Digitizer (page 109)
■ Digitizing Objects (page 705)
■ Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 706)
To set digitizing specifications
1 On the command line, enter MAPDIGISETUP. Press Enter.
2 In the Digitize Setup dialog box (page 1017), select an object type.
Select Nodes to digitize points or blocks. Select Linear to digitize polylines.
3 To attach data to objects as you digitize them, select Attach Data.
Click Data To Attach and select the table to use for the data. As you
digitize the objects, you are prompted for the data to attach to the object.
4 To change the label point for objects as you digitize them, select Prompt
For Label Point.
5 Specify the layer for new objects.
6 Specify the block (for nodes) or the linetype (for linear objects) to use
when creating the new objects.
7 Specify whether to snap to the closest endpoint (for nodes) or insertion
point (for linear objects).
8 For nodes, select whether to specify the rotation and scale of each node
block.
For linear objects, select whether the objects are 2D or 3D. For 2D objects,
specify a width.
9 Click OK to close the dialog box and save your settings.
116 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Quick Reference
MAPDIGISETUP
Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects
Menu None Setup
Command Line MAPDIGISETUP
Dialog Box Digitize Setup dialog box (page 1017)
Setting Up Your Map File
To set up your map file
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
Logging Into Autodesk Map 3D
When you log into Autodesk Map 3D, your work environment is automatically
set up as it was last saved, including user privileges and user-specific options.
Depending on your organization, you may be required to log in. System
Administrators can set this Autodesk Map 3D multi-user option.
If user login is not required, you can work with Autodesk Map 3D without
logging in. However, you may log in at anytime to restore settings that you've
saved to your user name or to use privileges associated with your user name.
User Privileges
To perform some Autodesk Map 3D commands, you must be logged in as a
user with the appropriate privileges.
Example: To change Multi-user settings in the Autodesk Map Options dialog
box, you must have Superuser privileges.
The default superuser name is Superuser, and the default superuser password
is SUPERUSER (case sensitive).
Setting Up Your Map File | 117
TIP You can customize many Autodesk Map 3D settings. Some of these
customizations are saved to your user name. To customize the settings differently
for each drawing, set up multiple user names and log in with the appropriate
name for each drawing.
See also:
■ Setting Multi-user Options (page 175)
■ Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights (page 70)
To log in to Autodesk Map 3D
1 Click Setup menu ➤ User Login.
2 In the Login Name box, enter the login name provided to you by your
system administrator.
3 In the Password box, enter your password.
The default superuser login name is SuperUser (case insensitive) and the
password is SUPERUSER (case sensitive). If security is an issue, make sure
you change the default superuser login and password. See To add a new
user (page 70).
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPLOGIN
Log in as an Autodesk Map user
Menu Setup ➤ User Login
Command Line MAPLOGIN
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ User
Login
Dialog Box User Login dialog box (page 1276)
118 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Assigning Coordinate Systems
With Autodesk Map 3D, you can combine data from maps that use different
coordinate systems. To do this, you specify the coordinate system used for
attached drawings and for the current drawing. When you bring objects from
attached drawings into the current drawing, the objects are transformed to
the th coordinate system of the current drawing.
The coordinate system you assign to your drawing specifies the system that
was used when creating the drawing. For example, if you created a map using
Universal Transverse Mercator, Zone 27, US Survey Feet, you assign the code
UTM-27F to the map.
To assign coordinate systems
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
Overview of Coordinate Systems
With Autodesk Map 3D, you can combine data from maps using different
coordinate systems.
You specify the coordinate system used for the current drawing and for
attached source drawings before querying any items from the source drawings.
When you query objects from source drawings, Autodesk Map 3D automatically
converts them to the coordinate system of the current drawing. This operation
is called coordinate transformation. When you save objects back to source
drawings, Autodesk Map 3D reverses the conversion.
The coordinate system code and definition are stored in the drawing file. You
can share the drawing with anyone using Autodesk Map 2000 Release 4 or
later, and they will have the correct coordinate system.
When the coordinate system you select is assigned to the selected attached
drawings, a backup file, with a .bak extension, is made of each source drawing
before assigning the coordinate system information.
The coordinate systems supplied with Autodesk Map 3D include the Universal
Transverse Mercator System and the State Plane Coordinate systems used in
the USA, as well as many international coordinate systems used around the
world. For a complete listing of supported systems, see the Global Coordinate
System Manager dialog box.
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 119
To use coordinate systems with maps
1 Assign a coordinate system (page 121) to your current drawing and to the
source drawings.
In addition, you can do the following
1 Set Coordinate System Options (page 179)
2 Define a coordinate system (page 77)
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Menu Setup ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Command Line ADEDEFCRDSYS
Dialog Box Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Menu Setup ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Icon
Assign Coordinate System
Command Line ADESETCRDSYS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Dialog Box Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page
1008)
120 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source
Drawing
You must specify a coordinate system for each attached source drawing to
take advantage of the coordinate transformation capabilities in Autodesk Map
3D.
See also:
■ Datum Shift Issues for North American Users (page 92)
■ Coordinate System Files (page 93)
■ Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 86)
■ Grid Data Files for the United States (page 88)
■ Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 91)
■ Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes (page
91)
To assign a coordinate system to a source drawing
1 ClickSetup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System.
2 In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page 1008), under
Source Drawings, click Select Drawings and select the source drawings.
You cannot assign a coordinate system to a source drawing that currently
has queried objects in the current drawing.
3 Under Source Drawings, enter the coordinate system code for the selected
source drawings.
If you do not know the code, click Select Coordinate System. In the Select
Global Coordinate System dialog box, select a category. Select from a list
of available coordinate systems. Click Properties to view the properties
of the selected coordinate system.
To remove an assigned coordinate system, in the Code box in the Assign
Global Coordinate System dialog box, type a period.
4 Click OK.
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 121
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Menu Setup ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Icon
Assign Coordinate System
Command Line ADESETCRDSYS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Dialog Box Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page
1008)
Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current
Drawing
You must specify a coordinate system for the current drawing to take advantage
of the coordinate transformation capabilities in Autodesk Map 3D.
After you bring objects into the current drawing, do not change the coordinate
transformation options if you plan to save changes back to source drawings.
The save-back process uses the original settings to determine whether
adjustments are necessary to restore objects to the correct coordinate system.
See also:
■ Datum Shift Issues for North American Users (page 92)
■ Coordinate System Files (page 93)
■ Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues (page 86)
■ Grid Data Files for the United States (page 88)
■ Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand (page 91)
■ Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes (page
91)
122 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing
1 ClickSetup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System.
2 In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page 1008), under
Current Drawing, enter the coordinate system code for the current
drawing.
If you do not know the code, click Select Coordinate System. In the Select
Global Coordinate System dialog box, select a category. Select from a list
of available coordinate systems. Click Properties to view the properties
of the selected coordinate system.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Menu Setup ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Icon
Assign Coordinate System
Command Line ADESETCRDSYS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Dialog Box Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page
1008)
Using a Geodetic Coordinate System
All geographic data is created in some coordinate system, and in the context
of some datum. A datum includes ellipsoid information and a datum definition.
For example, the Gauss-Kruger Conformal projection system used in Germany
uses the Bessel ellipsoid and Potsdam datum definition. Some coordinate
systems only specify the ellipsoid; these are non-geodetic. Coordinate systems
that specify the complete datum are geodetic.
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 123
Most of the coordinate systems supplied with Autodesk Map 3D are geodetic,
but about ten percent are non-geodetic. Therefore, you should determine
whether the coordinate systems you use are geodetic or non-geodetic before
you assign a coordinate system to a drawing. If you have data in a drawing
that uses a non-geodetic coordinate system, but don't know what datum the
data came from, you might introduce errors if you convert the drawing to a
geodetic coordinate system.
To determine if a coordinate system is geodetic
1 ClickSetup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System.
2 In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page 1008), under
Current Drawing or Source Drawings, click Select Coordinate System.
3 In the Category list, select the category that contains the coordinate
system you want.
4 In the Coordinate Systems In Category list, select a coordinate system.
5 Click Properties.
The type of coordinate system is displayed under Coordinate System Type on
the General tab of the Global Coordinate Systems Properties dialog box. If the
coordinate system is geodetic, the datum is displayed in the Datum box.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Menu Setup ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Icon
Assign Coordinate System
Command Line ADESETCRDSYS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Dialog Box Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page
1008)
124 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Removing an Assigned Coordinate System
Using the Autodesk Map 3D coordinate systems requires many complex
calculations and can decrease performance for operations such as querying
and saving back objects.
You can turn off a coordinate system while working in a particular drawing.
To turn off a global coordinate system
1 ClickSetup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System.
2 In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page 1008), in the Code
box under Current Drawing, enter a period (.). Press Enter.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Menu Setup ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Icon
Assign Coordinate System
Command Line ADESETCRDSYS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Dialog Box Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page
1008)
Viewing the Assigned Coordinate System for a
Source Drawing
If the current drawing has an assigned coordinate system, you can view the
code in the Drawing Settings dialog box.
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 125
To see the assigned coordinate system for a source drawing
1 ClickSetup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
2 Click Drawing Settings.
Autodesk Map 3D displays the active drawing's global coordinate system code
to the right of the drawing name.
Quick Reference
ADEDWGSTAT
Displays drawing statistics
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing Statistics
Command Line ADEDWGSTAT
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Statistics
Dialog Box Drawing Statistics dialog box (page 1270)
Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing
You can transform an existing map from one coordinate system to another
by querying the objects from the attached source drawing into the current
drawing.
The original source drawing is unchanged, but the objects in the current
drawing use the new coordinate system.
To transform the coordinate system of a drawing
1 Open a new drawing.
2 Attach the drawing whose coordinate system you want to transform. See
Attaching Drawings (page 128).
3 In the new drawing, assign the new coordinate system to the current
drawing. See Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing (page
123).
4 If you have not already assigned a coordinate system to the original
drawing, do that now. Assign the coordinate system that was used to
126 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
create the original drawing. See Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source
Drawing (page 121).
5 Define a query to bring in all objects from the source drawing. The easiest
way to do this is to define a location condition and use the Boundary
Type "All." This retrieves all objects in the source drawing. See Finding
All Objects in a Specified Location (page 804).
As the objects are retrieved from the source drawing into the current drawing,
they are transformed from the coordinate system of the source drawing to the
coordinate system of the current drawing.
Once the objects are in the new drawing, you can detach the source drawing
and save the new drawing. The objects are unchanged in the source drawing,
but they use the new coordinate system in the new drawing.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
Menu Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Command Line ADEDRAWINGS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1263)
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 127
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Menu Setup ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Icon
Assign Coordinate System
Command Line ADESETCRDSYS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Dialog Box Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page
1008)
Attaching Drawings
When you attach a drawing to the current drawing, you can work with any
objects and data in that drawing, edit them, and save them back to the attached
drawing.
To attach drawings
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
Overview of Attaching Drawings
You can work with objects from other drawings by attaching the other drawings
to the current drawing. The group of drawings attached to the current drawing
is called a drawing set.
Example: You have separate drawings for each quadrant of a town. You attach
those dravings to the current drawing, and then view all the quadrants
simultaneously.
128 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Aligning Attached Drawings
If an attached drawing has a global coordinate system assigned to it, objects
from that drawing are automatically converted to their appropriate size and
location in the current drawing.
If an attached drawing does not have a global coordinate system assigned to
it, you can specify how to align objects from that drawing when they are
copied into the current drawing.
Attached Drawings Current Drawing
Tile drawings by specifying the drawing offset for each attached drawing.
For each attached drawing, you can specify a drawing offset. You can also
specify how objects from the attached drawings are scaled or rotated when
they are brought into the current drawing. See Setting Transformation Options
(page 137).
For information about passwords and security, see AutoCAD help.
Attaching Drawings | 129
See also:
■ Overview of Attaching Drawings (page 128)
■ Viewing Objects in the Save Set (page 465)
To create a drawing set
1 If necessary, create a drive alias (page 134).
2 Attach the drawings (page 130) you plan to use with the project.
3 Activate the drawings (page 133) to query.
If you no longer use an attached drawing with the current drawing, you can
remove the drawing from the drawing set.
To modify the settings for attached drawings, such as the offset, scale, or save
back extents, see Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 136).
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
Menu Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Command Line ADEDRAWINGS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1263)
Attaching a Drawing
You can work with objects from multiple drawings by attaching other drawings
to the current drawing.
130 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Nested Drawings
If you attach a drawing that has other drawings already attached to it, those
other drawings appear in the list as nested drawings.
You can query objects from nested drawings. If a top level drawing is not
active, you cannot see or activate nested drawings. However, if the top level
drawing is active, you can deactivate a nested drawing.
Working with Xrefs
To query data in an external reference, delete the external reference from the
attached drawing and attach the reference drawing to the current drawing
The Order of Attached Drawings
The order in which you attach drawings can affect the properties of objects
retrieved by queries.
If two drawings use the same name for a block, layer, group, or text style,
Autodesk Map 3D will use the definition from the first retrieved object that
uses that item.
For example, if you create a query to retrieve objects on LAYER_A, and LAYER_A
does not exist in the current drawing, Autodesk Map 3D uses the definition
of LAYER_A in the first active attached drawing that contains objects on
LAYER_A. Objects retrieved from LAYER_A in other drawings acquire the color
and linetype that is defined for LAYER_A in this drawing. This change also
applies when you save changes back to attached drawings.
TIP To maintain consistency between drawings, define blocks, layers, groups,
and text styles in the current drawing. For example, if you define a LAYER_A in
the current drawing, Autodesk Map 3D applies the current drawing definition of
LAYER_A to objects retrieved from LAYER_A in all attached drawings, and when
you save back, applies the current drawing layer definition to the saved objects.
For information on viewing definitions in attached drawings, see Viewing
Information about Attached Drawings (page 140).
For information about passwords and security, see AutoCAD help.
To attach drawings
■ Drag the file from Windows Explorer to the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane.
Attaching Drawings | 131
- or -
1 Open the drawing to which you want to attach another drawing.
2 Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
3 In the Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1263), click Attach.
4 In the Select Drawings to Attach dialog box, select the drawings to attach.
Click Add.
To modify the settings for attached drawings, such as the offset, scale, or save
back extents, see Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 136).
For information on viewing the attached drawings, see Viewing All Objects
in Selected Attached Drawings (page 459).
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
Menu Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Command Line ADEDRAWINGS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1263)
Activating a Drawing
When you execute a query, Autodesk Map 3D searches only the active drawings
and ignores any inactive drawings.
When you run a query to retrieve objects from attached drawings, Autodesk
Map 3D retrieves objects only from active drawings.
You cannot make a drawing active or inactive when there are locked objects
in the drawing.
132 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
NOTE If an attached drawing is active in the current drawing, you cannot open
that drawing directly.
To activate a drawing
1 In the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click the drawing name.
Click Activate.
NOTE To activate a nested drawing, you must first activate the drawing to which
it is attached.
To activate a group of drawings
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
2 Select the drawings to activate.
3 Click Activate.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
Menu Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Command Line ADEDRAWINGS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1263)
Creating a Drive Alias
If you plan to share drawings with other users, use drive aliases to specify the
location of attached drawings.
Attaching Drawings | 133
Example: You connect to the drawing server as drive J, but another user
connects as drive K. This makes it difficult to share drawings, since your
drawing specifies J as the location for the attached files. However, if you both
assign the same drive alias to the server, such as ProjectMaps, you can specify
the location of the attached drawings by this drive alias.
Autodesk Map 3D provides a default drive alias called C. To store drawings in
a location other than drive C, create a drive alias for the location.
To create a drive alias
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
2 In the Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box, click Attach.
3 In the Select Drawings to Attach dialog box, click .
4 In the Drive Alias Administration dialog box (page 1271), type a name for
the alias.
The name must use only alphanumeric characters (including hyphen
and underscore), contain no spaces or colons, and start with a character.
NOTE If you are creating a drive alias for a drawing with an undefined alias,
type that alias name exactly.
5 Specify a path for the new alias.
6 Click Add.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Menu Setup ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Command Line ADEDEFCRDSYS
Dialog Box Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
134 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Menu Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Command Line ADEDRAWINGS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1263)
Opening an Active Attached Drawing
You cannot directly open an attached drawing that is activated in the current
drawing. You must first deactivate it in the current drawing.
To open an active attached drawing
1 Do one of the following:
■ Deactivate (page 133) the attached drawing.
■ Close the drawing containing the attached drawing.
2 Click File menu ➤ Open to open the drawing.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
Menu Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Command Line ADEDRAWINGS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1263)
Attaching Drawings | 135
Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
You can specify how attached drawings work with the current drawing. You
can also view information about attached drawings.
NOTE You cannot specify drawing settings for nested drawings.
To modify attached drawings
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
Creating a Drawing Description
Providing a description for an attached drawing helps you and other users
identify the drawing more easily.
TIP You can filter a drawing list by the drawing description. For example, when
you are selecting drawings to Quick View, you could display only drawings with
the word 'sewer' in their description.
To create a drawing description
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
2 Click Drawing Settings.
3 In the Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1267), select the drawing for which
you want to add a description.
4 In the Drawing Description box, enter a description.
5 Click Apply.
If you later want to modify the description, return to the Drawing Settings
dialog box and enter a new description.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
136 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Manages the drawing set
Menu Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Command Line ADEDRAWINGS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1263)
Setting Transformation Options
Set simple transformation options to specify how to adjust the scale, rotation,
and XY offset of objects retrieved from an attached drawing. Use these settings
to make items from the attached drawings appear at the proper orientation,
size, and placement in the current drawing.
Autodesk Map 3D stores this information with the current drawing. The
attached drawing does not change, which is useful for overlaying drawings
or tiling them.
Attaching Drawings | 137
You can rotate objects from attached drawings so they match the rotation of the current
drawing.
Example: You have individual maps for each square-mile sector. You create a
drawing that encompasses a 5-square mile area, and you attach each of the
square-mile maps. You set the appropriate offset for each attached map so it
appears correctly in the current drawing.
If you save edited objects back to attached drawings, the objects are restored
to their original rotation, scale, and offset.
NOTE If you have set a global coordinate system code, these simple transformation
options are unavailable.
Use these simple transformation settings to temporarily adjust objects from
attached drawings so they align correctly in the current drawing. To permanently
edit the location, rotation, or scale of an object, see Moving, Rotating, and
Scaling an Object (page 611).
To set transformation options
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
2 Click Drawing Settings.
3 In the Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1267), select the drawing whose
objects you want to transform.
4 Under Simple Transformation, select On/Off.
5 In the Scale box, enter the scale factor to scale the objects.
A value of 2 doubles the size of objects; a value of 0.5, halves the size of
objects.
6 In the Rotation box, enter the angle in degrees to rotate the objects.
7 In the Offset (X,Y) boxes, enter the amount to offset objects using the
drawing units from the attached drawing.
8 To select coordinates manually, click Pick.
When prompted, specify the points on which to base the simple
transformation. Autodesk Map 3D calculates the scale, rotation, and offset
based on the four points you specify; the base point for the rotation is
0,0.
9 Click Apply.
138 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
This procedure transforms objects from the attached drawing as they are
queried into the current drawing. When objects are saved back to the attached
drawing, the transformation is undone. To permanently transform selected
objects, use the ADETRANSFORM (page 611)command.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
Menu Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Command Line ADEDRAWINGS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1263)
Setting Save Back Extents
For an attached drawing, you can specify save back extents that are different
from the drawing extents.
This is useful if you save objects back to attached drawings based on their
location. If you don't specify save back extents, Autodesk Map 3D uses the
attached drawing extents as the save back extents.
See also:
To set save back extents
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
2 Click Drawing Settings.
3 In the Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1267), select the drawing for which
you want to define save back extents.
Attaching Drawings | 139
4 Under Save Back Extents, click Define <.
5 Specify the boundary by using your pointing device or by entering
coordinates on the command line. When you finish specifying the
boundary, press Enter.
6 Click Apply.
TIP To view the save back extents, click Show <.
NOTE Simple transformations modify the default save back extents but do not
affect user-defined save back extents.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
Menu Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Command Line ADEDRAWINGS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1263)
Viewing Information about Attached Drawings
View information about attached drawings such as the number and type of
objects, symbol tables, object data tables, and object classes:
■ Object Counts — The number and type of objects in the attached drawing.
■ Symbol Tables — Displays information stored in symbol tables, for example,
block names, layer names, linetypes, and registered applications (regapps).
NOTE Regapps are registered applications that contain extended data (Xdata).
140 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
■ Object Data — Displays information stored in object data.
■ Object Classes — Displays object classes used in the selected drawings and
the number of objects in each object class.
To view information about attached drawings
1 In the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click Drawings. Click
Statistics.
2 Select drawings from the Active Drawings list.
3 Click a button:
■ Object Counts displays the number of each type of object in the
selected drawings.
■ Symbol Tables displays all symbol tables in the selected drawings.
■ Object Data displays all link templates, object data tables, and
attributes.
■ Object Classes displays objects used in the selected drawings and the
type of data in each object class.
Quick Reference
ADEDWGSTAT
Displays drawing statistics
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing Statistics
Command Line ADEDWGSTAT
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Statistics
Dialog Box Drawing Statistics dialog box (page 1270)
Setting Up a Query Library
You can save and organize your queries in the query library.
Setting Up a Query Library | 141
To set up a query library
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
See also:
■
■
Overview of Using the Query Library
If you plan to run a query more than once, you can save it. Once you have
saved a query, you can run it anytime.
■ Saving a Query (page 144)— Save the current query to the query library or
to an external file.
■ Running a Saved Query (page 146)— Run a query saved in the query library.
Each drawing has a query library where you can organize your saved queries
into categories.
■ Adding an External Query to Your Library (page 147)
■ Using Query Library Categories (page 148)
■ Editing a Saved Query (page 150)
To use the query library
1 On the Map Explorer of the Task Pane, right-click Query Library. Click
Administration.
2 In the Query Library Administration dialog box (page 1221), under Category,
select the category for the query you want, or click New to create a new
category (page 149).
3 Under Available Queries, select the query.
You can assign the query to a different category, change the query’s name,
description or location, or add an external query to the library.
142 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
4 If you've modified the settings for an existing query, click Update. If
you've added a new query, click Add
5 Click OK.
See also:
■
■
Quick Reference
ADEQUERYLIB
Maintains the library of queries
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library
Icon
Query Library
Command Line ADEQUERYLIB
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Query
Library ➤ Administration
Dialog Box Query Library Administration dialog box (page 1221)
ADERUNQUERY
Runs queries in the Query Library
Menu Edit ➤ DWG Query
Icon
Run Query
Command Line ADERUNQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Execute
As Preview -or- Right-click Current Query ➤ Execute
As Defined -or- Right-click a query ➤ Execute As
Preview -or- Right-click a query ➤ Execute As Defined
Dialog Box Run Library Query dialog box (page 1224)
Setting Up a Query Library | 143
ADERUNXQUERY
Runs externally saved queries
Menu Edit ➤ More DWG Querying Options ➤ Run External
Query
Command Line ADERUNXQUERY
Saving a Query
If you plan to use a query more than once, you can save it.
You can save the query with the current drawing, or you can save it to an
external file. Saving to an external file is useful if you want to share a query
with another user or use it in another drawing.
If you save the query to an external file you can specify several additional
settings:
■ Save List Of Active Drawings — Sets the drawing status to Active for
drawings involved in the saved query.
■ Save Location Coordinates — Stores the coordinates used for location
queries. If you don't save the location query coordinates, Autodesk Map
3D prompts you for them when you execute the query.
■ Keep Reference In Library — Maintains a list of the external queries in the
Query Library. If you plan to reference the query in the Query Library, you
must provide a name and description for it.
■ Save Alter Properties — Saves the property alteration definition with the
query.
■ Auto Execute — Executes the query in addition to loading it. If you don't
select Auto Execute, Autodesk Map 3D displays the query in the Define
Query dialog box and waits for you to click Execute Query. Do not select
this option if you want to modify a query before you run it.
You can list these external queries in your query library (page 147).
To save a query
1 Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
144 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
2 Make sure the query to save is the current query. If it is not, modify the
current query or click load a different query.
3 Click Save Query.
4 In the Save Current Query dialog box (page 1224), select a category for the
query.
5 Enter a name and description for the query.
6 Select any other query options you want.
7 To save the query to an external file, select Save To External File and
specify a file name.
To display the external query in the Run Library Query dialog box and
the Query Library Administration dialog box, select Keep Reference In
Library.
8 Click OK.
See also:
■
■
■
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Setting Up a Query Library | 145
Running a Saved Query
After you save queries, you can load, revise, and execute them.
NOTE If you plan to modify an externally saved query before executing it, do
not set Auto Execute in the Save Current Query dialog box. That way, when you
run the query, Autodesk Map 3D displays the query in the Define Query dialog
box but does not execute it.
You can list external queries in your query library (page 147).
To run a query from the Query Library
1 Click Edit menu ➤ DWG Query.
2 In the Run Library Query dialog box (page 1224), select the category for
the query.
3 Select the query in the Available Queries list.
4 Click Execute Query.
Alternately, on the Map Explorer of the Task Pane, right-click the query name.
Click Execute As Preview or Execute As Defined. If you select Execute As
Preview, the query executes as a preview query, regardless of whether it was
defined as a preview, draw, or report mode query. If you select Execute As
Defined, the query executes using the query mode with which it was defined.
To run an external query
1 Click Edit ➤ More DWG Querying Options ➤ Run External Query.
2 In the Run External Query dialog box, select the query.
3 Click OK.
If you turned off the Auto Execute option when you saved the query, the
query loads but doesn't execute. To execute the query, clickSetup menu
➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query. In the Define Query dialog box, click
Execute Query.
See also:
■
■
146 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
■
Quick Reference
ADERUNQUERY
Runs queries in the Query Library
Menu Edit ➤ DWG Query
Icon
Run Query
Command Line ADERUNQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Execute
As Preview -or- Right-click Current Query ➤ Execute
As Defined -or- Right-click a query ➤ Execute As
Preview -or- Right-click a query ➤ Execute As Defined
Dialog Box Run Library Query dialog box (page 1224)
ADERUNXQUERY
Runs externally saved queries
Menu Edit ➤ More DWG Querying Options ➤ Run External
Query
Command Line ADERUNXQUERY
Adding an External Query to Your Library
You can list an external query in the query library. By adding a reference to
the external query to the library, you can organize the query with your other
queries. In addition, you can give the query a name and a description to help
you identify it.
You can add an external query to the Query Library for more than one drawing.
To reference an external query in the query library
1 Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library.
Setting Up a Query Library | 147
2 In the Query Library Administration dialog box (page 1221), select a
category.
3 Under Selected Query, make sure the Query Type is set to External.
4 Click Browse. Select the file that contains the external query.
5 Specify a name and description for the query.
6 Click OK.
To execute the query, click Edit menu ➤ DWG Query.
See also:
■
■
■
Quick Reference
ADEQUERYLIB
Maintains the library of queries
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library
Icon
Query Library
Command Line ADEQUERYLIB
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Query
Library ➤ Administration
Dialog Box Query Library Administration dialog box (page 1221)
Using Query Library Categories
The Query Library lets you organize your queries into categories.
You can move a query to a new category, change a query’s name or description.
If you move an external query, you can specify the new location for the query.
148 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
To add a category to the query library
1 Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library.
2 In the Query Library Administration dialog box (page 1221), do one of the
following:
■ To add a category, under Category, click New.
Enter a name for the category. Click OK. Do not include spaces in the
name.
■ To assign a query to a different category, under Category, select the
current category of the query.
From the Available Queries list, select the query. Click Category.
In the Change Category dialog box, under New Category, select the
new category for the query. Click OK.
■ To change the name or description of a query, under Category, select
the category for the query.
Under Available Queries, select the query.
Under Selected Query, edit the query's name or description. For
external queries, you can specify a new location for the query.
Click Update.
■ To delete or rename a category, select the category and click Remove
or Rename.
You cannot remove a category that contains queries. You must first
delete the queries or move the queries to a different category and then
remove the empty category.
3 Click OK.
See also:
■
■
■
Quick Reference
ADEQUERYLIB
Maintains the library of queries
Setting Up a Query Library | 149
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library
Icon
Query Library
Command Line ADEQUERYLIB
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Query
Library ➤ Administration
Dialog Box Query Library Administration dialog box (page 1221)
Editing a Saved Query
Once you've saved a query to the query library, you can reload the query at
any time to review it or revise it.
If you save the query to an external file, it is saved as an AutoLISP script. Using
a text editor, you can modify an external query file and include AutoLISP API
commands. For more information, refer to "Editing Query Files", under "Using
Interface Functions" in the online Autodesk Map 3D AutoLISP Reference.
To edit a query saved with the current drawing
1 On the Map Explorer of the Task Pane, right-click a query name. Click
Edit. The Define Query dialog box (page 1203) appears with the selected
query loaded.
2 Modify any conditions (page 818).
3 Modify any properrty alterations (page 841).
4 In the Define Query dialog box, click Save.
To save the changes to a new query, enter a new name and description.
Click OK.
5 In the Define Query dialog box, click OK to save your changes without
running the query.
To edit an external query
1 Click Edit ➤ More DWG Querying Options ➤ Run External Query.
2 In the Run External Query dialog box, select the query.
3 Click OK.
150 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
The external query runs and becomes the current query.
4 Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
5 Modify any conditions (page 818).
6 Modify any property alterations (page 841).
7 Click Save.
NOTE To be able to edit an external query before you execute it, do not set Auto
Execute in the Save Current Query dialog box. That way, when you execute the
query, Autodesk Map 3D loads the query in the Define Query dialog box but does
not execute it.
See also:
■
■
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Setting Up Annotation Templates
To set up annotation templates
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 151
■ Setting Options
Defining Annotation Templates
In an annotation template, you define the information to display in the
annotation and the layout of that information. Annotation templates are
stored as specially named blocks within your drawing.
After you create an annotation template, you can insert instances of the
annotation into your drawing. Both the creation of annotation templates and
the insertion of the annotation are very similar to creating and inserting
blocks.
Using Annotation Templates from XREF Drawings
The annotation templates are stored in the drawing as special blocks. The two
things that distinguish an annotation template block from a regular block are:
(1) The block name is prefixed with "ACMAP_ANN_TEMPLATE_" followed by
the annotation template name as specified in the Define Annotation Template
dialog box. (2) There are special table objects stored within the block's
extension dictionary.
If you attach a drawing containing annotation templates as an XREF, the block
names in the XREFed drawing have a prefix that consists of the XREF drawing
file name followed by a vertical bar. Because the annotation commands identify
annotation templates by looking for the "ACMAP_ANN_TEMPLATE_" at the
beginning of the block name, the templates within the XREFed drawing will
not be available via the annotation commands. Therefore, you will not be
able to edit those annotation templates or use them to annotate any objects
in the main drawing.
When you BIND an XREFed drawing containing annotation templates, the
XREFed block names will still have a prefix. To make these annotation
templates available in the current drawing, you can alter the block name of
the annotation template blocks. Using the RENAME command, select Blocks
from the Named Objects list, and select the annotation template from the list
of blocks in the Items list. You will find blocks with names like
xrefdwgname$0$ACMAP_ANN_TEMPLATE_templatename. Remove
xrefdwgname$0$ from the name of each template you want.
If you use the Insert option when you BIND an XREFed drawing containing
annotation templates, any annotation templates in the XREFed drawing are
immediately available in the main drawing as annotation templates. However,
if there is a name conflict between an annotation template in the XREFed
152 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
drawing and one in the main drawing, the template in the main drawing is
retained, and the similarly-named template in the XREFed drawing is discarded.
For more information, see Attach, Update, and Bind External References in
the AutoCAD help.
See also:
■ Attaching Annotation to Objects (page 657)
To define an annotation template
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Define Annotation Template.
2 Click New.
3 In the New Annotation Template Name dialog box (page 986), type a name
for the template, and click OK.
A new drawing window opens, called Map Annotation Template
Editor.dwg. Define the template in this window and save it before
returning to the Define Annotation Template dialog box.
4 On the command line, enter mapanntext. Press Enter.
This opens the Annotation Text dialog box (page 982), in which you specify
what text will be included in the annotation template.
5 In the Annotation Text dialog box, under Attribute, enter a Tag name
and Value for the annotation text.
For the value, enter static text or an expression that displays different
text depending on the object being annotated. Click to select from
a list of available properties and attributes.
NOTE To add multiple pieces of text to a template, each one must have a
tag name that is unique within that template.
6 Specify the Object Properties and Text Options for the annotation text.
Enter static values or expressions that are evaluated against the object to
annotate. Click to select from a list of available properties and
attributes.
7 Click OK.
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 153
8 In the Map Annotation Template Editor.dwg window, click where the
text should start.
9 Optionally, to include geometry as a part of the annotations, create it in
the Map Annotation Template Editor.dwg.
10 When you finish adding elements to the template, click Save Annotation
on the AnnTemplate toolbar.
The Map Annotation Template Editor.dwg window closes, returning to
the Define Annotation Template dialog box.
11 In the Define Annotation Template dialog box, specify default properties
and insertion options.
These settings control the appearance of the annotation template block.
If you selected ByBlock for any of the properties or options in the
Annotation Text dialog box, these are the settings that will be used.
12 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Menu Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template
Icon
Define Annotation Template
Command Line MAPANNTEMPLATE
Dialog Box Define Annotation Template dialog box (page 983)
MAPANNTEXT
Creates and edits annotation text
Icon
Edit Annotation Text
Command Line MAPANNTEXT
Dialog Box Annotation Text dialog box (page 982)
154 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Changing Annotation Templates
You can change existing annotation templates in several ways. You can make
changes to the expressions in the template, such as the expression used to
determine the value or location of the text element; or you can change the
template definition, such as adding or removing text elements. After you have
made such a change to a template, refresh or update the annotation associated
with that template to see the text changes in your drawing. If you make
changes to the graphic elements in the template, you will see the results once
you have finished making the change.
See also:
■ Refreshing Annotation (page 658)
■ Updating Annotation (page 660)
To change an annotation template
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Define Annotation Template.
2 In the Template Name list, click the template to change.
3 Do one or more of the following:
■ Click Copy to make a copy of the template.
■ Click Rename to rename the template.
■ Click Edit Template Contents to modify the text or geometry elements
of the template.
■ Change any properties or insertion options.
Quick Reference
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Menu Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template
Icon
Define Annotation Template
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 155
Command Line MAPANNTEMPLATE
Dialog Box Define Annotation Template dialog box (page 983)
MAPANNTEXT
Creates and edits annotation text
Icon
Edit Annotation Text
Command Line MAPANNTEXT
Dialog Box Annotation Text dialog box (page 982)
Deleting Annotation Templates
You can delete an annotation template only if you first delete all references
to that template from the drawing.
Before deleting an annotation template, delete all references to the annotation
template.
To delete all references to a selected annotation template
1 Click Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Delete.
2 Select an annotation template. Click OK.
All annotation based on the selected template is deleted.
To delete an annotation template
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Define Annotation Template.
2 Select the annotation template to delete from the Template Name list.
3 Click Delete.
The selected annotation template is deleted.
Quick Reference
MAPANNTEMPLATE
156 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Menu Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template
Icon
Define Annotation Template
Command Line MAPANNTEMPLATE
Dialog Box Define Annotation Template dialog box (page 983)
Setting Up Object Data
Object data is attribute data that is attached to individual objects and stored
in tables in the drawing. To use object data, first define the format for the
table, and then create each record as you attach it to an object.
See also:
■ Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data (page 808)
■ Altering Object Properties Using Object Data (page 826)
To set up object data
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
Creating an Object Data Table
Object data tables store text and numerical information related to an object.
When you define an object data table, you specify a set of fields for the table
and assign a name, description, data type, and default value to each field.
After you define an object data table, you use a separate procedure to attach
a record from the table to an object.
You can create multiple object data tables in a single drawing. For example,
you can create one table with pipe flow information and a separate table with
inspection information.
Setting Up Object Data | 157
Using the Same Table Name in Other Drawings
Take care when naming your tables. If you use the same table name in more
than one source drawing, be sure that all tables with same name have the
same fields and field types. If your current drawing has more than one source
drawing with the same object data table name, Autodesk Map 3D uses the
object table definition (or structure) for the first drawing that you activate. If
the other source drawings have tables with the same name but with different
fields, you will not be able to use those tables in the current drawing. If
necessary, you can rename or redefine an object data table.
To create an object data table
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data.
2 In the Define Object Data dialog box (page 1181), select a table to modify,
or click New Table to create a new table.
■ If you select an existing table, the Object Data Fields list displays fields
already defined for the table.
■ If you click New Table, enter a name for the new table.
3 To create a new data field, fill in the Field Definition area:
■ Enter a name and description for the field.
■ Select the field type. The type specifies what kind of information can
be entered in the field. For example, if you specify a numeric type,
you will not be able to enter letters in the field.
■ Specify the default value for the field. This value is attached to the
object unless you change it.
4 Click Add to add the new field to the table.
5 Add any additional fields to the table.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Menu Setup ➤ Define Object Data
158 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Icon
Define Object Data
Command Line ADEDEFDATA
Dialog Box Define Object Data dialog box (page 1181)
Modifying an Object Data Table
You can add, modify, and delete fields in newly defined object data tables
until you perform a save operation (either saving objects back to source
drawings or saving the current drawing). Once you perform a save operation,
the table can be modified only by a Superuser. Also, you cannot modify an
object data table if you have already queried any object from a source drawing.
When you modify an object data field, Autodesk Map 3D updates all instances
of the field attached to objects. If the object data table is large, this process
may take a long time.
Renaming and Deleting Tables
You can rename or delete object data tables if you have Superuser privileges.
You cannot rename or delete an object data table if you have already queried
any object from a source drawing.
If you rename a table, the new name must not duplicate an existing table
name.
WARNING When you delete an object data table from a drawing, the table is
deleted from all attached, active source drawings.
Use the MAPLOGIN command to log in as a Superuser, or contact your system
administrator.
To modify an object data table
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data.
2 In the Define Object Data dialog box (page 1181), under Table, select the
object data table to modify.
3 Click Modify.
Setting Up Object Data | 159
4 In the Define New Object Data Table dialog box (page 1178), delete, add,
or update the fields:
■ To add a field, under Field Definition, enter a name, type, description,
and default value for the field. Click Add.
■ To modify a field, under Object Data Fields, select the field to modify.
Under Field Definition, change any information. Click Update.
Autodesk Map 3D updates the object data field and all instances of it
attached to objects. If you change the data type of a field from Real
to Integer, Autodesk Map 3D drops everything to the right of the
decimal point, leaving only the value to the left of the decimal point.
■ To delete a field, under Object Data Fields, select the field to delete.
Click Delete.
To rename or remove an object data table
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data.
2 In the Define Object Data dialog box, under Table, select the object data
table you want to rename or remove.
3 To rename the table, click Rename. Enter a new table name and click OK.
To delete the table, click Delete. The table and its object data fields and
field values are deleted from every object to which they are attached.
NOTE When you delete an object data table from a drawing, the table is
deleted from all attached, active source drawings.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Menu Setup ➤ Define Object Data
Icon
Define Object Data
Command Line ADEDEFDATA
Dialog Box Define Object Data dialog box (page 1181)
160 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings
You can attach a database to your drawing and link records from that table
to objects in your drawing.
To set up data sources for attribute data
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings
A data source is a database table or a set of tables.
When you attach a data source to a drawing, the data source is listed on the
Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane. You can view and edit data in the data
source or link records from the data source to objects in the drawing.
For most database types, you attach a data source by dragging the database
file onto the Map Explorer tab. Autodesk Map 3D automatically creates the
files it needs to communicate with the database application. However, for
some database types, you must configure these files yourself.
While keeping the data source attached, you can disconnect the data source
to save resources and reconnect when you are ready to work with the data.
Autodesk Map 3D supports two methods for connecting to external databases:
the File ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Attach External Records and the dbConnect
command. To use the features described in this chapter, you must connect
databases using the File ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Attach External Records(which
is also activated by dragging and dropping a database onto the Map Explorer
tab).
TIP You can work with an external database table without using the database
application itself.
For information on using the dbConnect command and features, look up
"dbconnect" in the help index.
To use a database in a drawing
■ Using Explorer or My Computer, select the database file you want and
drag it to the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 161
If the Map Explorer tab does not immediately display a data source or link
template, right-click on a blank space in the Map Explorer tab. Click
Refresh.
■ To display information about a database table, such as column names and
types, right-click the table name in the Map Explorer tab. Click Properties.
■ To open a table or database query, double-click the item. To open a linked
table or query, double-click the link template name.
Quick Reference
MAPATTACHDB
Attaches a data source to the current drawing
Menu File ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Attach External Records
Command Line MAPATTACHDB
Task Pane Drag a data source onto the Map Explorer tab
MAPCONFIGDB
Configures the connection to an external data source
Menu Setup ➤ Create/Edit A Source OfData ➤ External
Records
Command Line MAPCONFIGDB
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Data Sources ➤ Configure
Dialog Box Configure Data Source dialog box (page 1067)
MAPCONNECTDB
Connects to an attached data source
Menu File ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Connect To External
Records
Command Line MAPCONNECTDB
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source or a link
template ➤ Connect -or- To connect all data sources:
Right-click Data Sources ➤ Connect All
162 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Dialog Box Connect Data Source dialog box (page 1068)
MAPDETACHDB
Detaches a data source from the current drawing
Menu File ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Detach External Records
Command Line MAPDETACHDB
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Detach
Dialog Box Detach Data Source dialog box (page 1072)
MAPDISCONNECTDB
Disconnects an attached, connected database
Menu File ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Disconnect From
External Records
Command Line MAPDISCONNECTDB
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source
➤ Disconnect -or- To disconnect all data sources:
Right-click Data Sources ➤ Disconnect All
Dialog Box Disconnect Data Source dialog box (page 1072)
Attaching a Data Source
To use data from an external data source, attach the data source to the drawing.
When you attach a data source, it appears in the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane along with the tables and database queries associated with it.
For the following data sources, Autodesk Map 3D automatically creates the
files it needs to communicate with the data source:
■ .dbf
■ .db
■ .mdb
■ .xls (must have at least one named range)
■ .udl
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 163
For other data sources, you must manually create the files (page 165) before
you can attach the data source.
Tips
You can set an option (page 183) to have Autodesk Map 3D prompt you for
the database version each time you attach a data source or you can specify a
default version.
Autodesk Map 3D stores the UDL (page 1381) (universal data link) files in a
specific directory. If it does not find a UDL file in this directory, it creates a
new UDL file. You can change the directory used for UDL files.
To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane
1 Using Explorer or My Computer, select the database file and drag it to
the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
You can drag and drop databases with the following extensions: .udl, .db,
.dbf, .mdb, and .xls.
2 If prompted, select a version and click OK.
3 If prompted, enter your user name and password.
Autodesk Map 3D creates the necessary configuration files and attaches the
database.
For information on using specific database types with Autodesk Map 3D, see
the AutoCAD help.
Quick Reference
MAPATTACHDB
Attaches a data source to the current drawing
Menu File ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Attach External Records
Command Line MAPATTACHDB
Task Pane Drag a data source onto the Map Explorer tab
MAPDETACHDB
Detaches a data source from the current drawing
164 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Menu File ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Detach External Records
Command Line MAPDETACHDB
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Detach
Dialog Box Detach Data Source dialog box (page 1072)
Configuring a Data Source
Microsoft Windows uses UDL (page 1381) (Universal Data Link) files to point
to specific data sources. The UDL file lists the location of the data, the type
of database, the version of the database, and the appropriate database driver.
For each data source that you use with Autodesk Map 3D, you must have a
UDL file in the Autodesk Map 3D data source directory. Once the UDL file
exists in the data source directory, you can attach the data source to any
drawing.
For most data sources, Autodesk Map 3D creates the UDL file automatically
when you attach a database. However, for some database types, you will need
to manually create the UDL file.
When you edit or create a UDL file, you use the Microsoft Windows Data Link
Properties dialog box. For more information on using this dialog box, refer to
your Microsoft Windows documentation.
Drivers
To read external data files, Autodesk Map 3D uses drivers that translate the
data to a standard format. The first time you use a data source with Autodesk
Map 3D, Autodesk Map 3D determines the appropriate driver for the data
source. It stores this information in the UDL file.
Autodesk Map 3D supports these drivers:
■ Jet provider, which works with Microsoft Access database files
■ SQL Server provider
■ Oracle provider
■ ODBC driver, which works with ODBC-compliant databases
These drivers are installed with Autodesk Map 3D.
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 165
Because the ODBC provider works with many different database types, it
requires additional information about each specific database type. It gets this
information from a Data Source Name (DSN) that registers information about
the database type. You need only one DSN for each database type.
For the following ODBC-compliant databases, Autodesk Map 3D creates a DSN
for you when you attach the database:
■ Microsoft Access
■ dBase
■ Microsoft Excel
■ Paradox
■ Microsoft Visual FoxPro
By default, Autodesk Map 3D connects to Microsoft Access using the Jet
provider, which does not require a DSN. If you want to connect to Microsoft
Access using the ODBC driver, you must create a DSN.
For information on creating a DSN, refer to your Microsoft Windows
documentation.
Displaying Configuration Dialog Boxes
When you attach a data source that does not already have a UDL file, Autodesk
Map 3D creates the UDL file and determines the settings for Windows data
source configuration.
If the Expert variable is set to 3 or more, Autodesk Map 3D determines the
settings, and displays the data source configuration dialog boxes so you can
review or modify the settings.
To automatically configure a data source
1 Drag and drop one of the following database types onto the Map Explorer
tab of the Task Pane:
■ Microsoft Access
■ dBASE
■ Microsoft Excel (must have at least one named range; do not use
DATABASE or other reserved words as a range name)
■ Paradox
166 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
■ Microsoft Visual FoxPro
To manually configure a data source
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Create/Edita Source of Data ➤ External Records.
2 Type a name for the data source and click OK. The data link file will have
the same name.
3 On the Provider tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box, select the
database provider. If you are using the ODBC provider, select the name
of the DSN.
4 Enter additional information as needed and click OK. The Data Link
Properties dialog box is a Microsoft Windows dialog box.
NOTE If you are using the ODBC provider, before you manually create the data
link file, you must have a DSN (Data Source Name) for the database software.
Windows may have created this file when you installed your database software.
To create a DSN, run the ODBC Data Source Administrator from your Windows
control panel. Many ODBC-compliant databases can work with the OLE DB ODBC
provider. If you have trouble, refer to the online help for the Windows ODBC Data
Source Administrator or contact your database customer support organization to
see if they provide an updated driver.
For help on database configuration, see the AutoCAD help. Additional
information is available by clicking Help in the Data Link Properties dialog
box.
To modify an existing data link file
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Create/Edita Source of Data ➤ External Records.
2 Select the data source and click OK.
3 Make the modifications and click OK. The Data Link Properties dialog
box is a Microsoft Windows dialog box.
NOTE If you modify a data link file for a data source that is currently attached
and connected, the changes will not take effect until the next time you connect
the data source.
NOTE If you have more than one copy of a UDL file, be sure to edit the copy in
the Autodesk Map 3D data links directory.
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 167
Quick Reference
EXPERT
Controls whether certain prompts are issued (system variable)
Command Line EXPERT
MAPCONFIGDB
Configures the connection to an external data source
Menu Setup ➤ Create/Edit A Source OfData ➤ External
Records
Command Line MAPCONFIGDB
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Data Sources ➤ Configure
Dialog Box Configure Data Source dialog box (page 1067)
Connecting a Data Source
To free up memory or database connections, you can disconnect a data source
but keep it attached to the current drawing. When you want to use the data
source again, reconnecting is a one-step process.
TIP You can set an option to automatically connect (page 183) to all attached data
sources each time you open a drawing.
To connect a data source
■ On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, double-click the data source.
To disconnect a data source
■ Right-click the data source. Click Disconnect.
Quick Reference
MAPCONNECTDB
168 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Connects to an attached data source
Menu File ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Connect To External
Records
Command Line MAPCONNECTDB
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source or a link
template ➤ Connect -or- To connect all data sources:
Right-click Data Sources ➤ Connect All
Dialog Box Connect Data Source dialog box (page 1068)
MAPDISCONNECTDB
Disconnects an attached, connected database
Menu File ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Disconnect From
External Records
Command Line MAPDISCONNECTDB
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source
➤ Disconnect -or- To disconnect all data sources:
Right-click Data Sources ➤ Disconnect All
Dialog Box Disconnect Data Source dialog box (page 1072)
Setting Options
You can change many settings that affect the work environment, how the
program starts up, whether users will need to log in, and settings for your
current drawings, data sources, and more.
See also
■ Setting Raster Image Options (page 192)
■ Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 183)
■ Setting AutoCAD Options (look up “interface options, setting” in the help
index)
To set options
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
Setting Options | 169
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
Setting Task Pane Options
You can specify what to display in the Task Pane and what displays when you
start the program.
■ Map Explorer Categories To Display — Lets you select which categories
(nodes) you want to display on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
The visibility of some nodes is dependent on the visibility of others. For
example, the Tables node is visible in the Map Explorer tab of Task Pane
only when you select both Data Sources and Tables.
NOTE When you attach drawings with the Topologies node visible, Autodesk
Map 3D creates a list of all the topologies to display under Topologies in Map
Explorer. If you attach a large number of drawings containing topologies at
the same time, the creation of the topology list increases the processing time.
To reduce processing time, hide the Topologies node before attaching the
drawings.
■ Show Task Pane On Startup — Specifies whether to display the Task Pane
when you start Autodesk Map 3D.
If the Task Pane is not visible, you can display it by entering mapwspace
on the command line.
■ Show Properties Palette On Startup — Specifies whether to display the
Properties palette when you start Autodesk Map 3D.
If the Properties palette is not visible, you can display it by entering
properties on the command line.
■ Show Display Manager On Startup — Specifies whether to use the Display
Manager, or the older Thematic Manager on startup.
This setting takes effect the next time you start Autodesk Map 3D.
To set Task Pane options
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options.
2 In the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254), select the Task Pane
tab.
170 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
3 Modify the options you want:
■ Under Map Explorer Categories To Display, select the categories to
display on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
■ Select which palettes you want to show at startup.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
Setting Drawing Options
You can specify settings for the current drawing.
You can also set coordinate transformation options for the current drawing.
If you are working with drawings that were created using different global
coordinate systems, Autodesk Map 3D standardizes the drawings based on the
current drawings's global coordinate system.
NOTE Once you bring objects into the current drawing, do not change the
coordinate transformation options if you plan to save changes back to source
drawings. The save-back process uses the stingiest determine whether adjustments
are necessary to restore objects to the correct coordinate system when you save
them back to source drawings.
Setting Drawing Options | 171
Drawing Options
Under Activate Attached Source Drawings, you can select the following options:
■ From Last Session At Startup — Activates the drawings that were active the
last time you quit Autodesk Map 3D. If you don't select this option, all
drawings are inactive on startup.
■ After Attaching — Sets the status of a drawing to Active when you attach
it. If you don't select this option, all drawings are inactive when you attach
them.
Under Coordinate Transformation Adjustments, the Adjust Sizes And Scales
area has the following options:
■ For Changes In Units — Use this option when you are working with text
and block objects from a source drawing that uses different coordinate
system units than the current drawing. For example, if your source drawing
uses meters and the current drawing uses U.S. Survey Feet, you can scale
text and blocks so that their size or scale measures in feet rather than
meters.
If you don't select this option, Autodesk Map 3D does not adjust the size
or scale of text and block objects. For example, if you have a block that is
five meters long in the source drawing, it will be five feet long when you
bring it into the current drawing.
Do not change this setting after you bring objects into the current drawing,
or you might introduce unintended changes to text and blocks when you
save them back to their source drawings.
■ For Map Distortion — Use this option to adjust the size and scale of text
and blocks to correct for map distortion introduced when you represent
a spherical object (earth) in a Cartesian coordinate system.
For example, two objects, located at the northern and southern extremes
of a map, of equal length in coordinate system X will remain the same
length when transformed to coordinate system Y.
If you don't select this option, the two objects will be scaled to different
lengths in coordinate system Y according to the relative map distortion
(or grid scale factor).
Note that the For Map Distortion option in the Adjust Sizes And Scales
area is available only if you selected the previous option, For Changes In
Units.
172 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Under Coordinate Transformation Adjustments, the Adjust Rotations area has
the following options:
■ For Map Distortion — Adjusts the angle of text and blocks to correct for
map distortion due to the convergence angle (the deviation of the Y axis
of a Cartesian coordinate system from true north).
■ For Zero-Rotation Objects — Specifies that text and blocks that have a
rotation value of zero in the source drawing are adjusted to correct
distortion due to the convergence angle.
If you select this option, Autodesk Map 3D calculates the convergence
angle for text and blocks with a zero rotation value. If you don't select this
option, Autodesk Map 3D does not rotate text and blocks with a zero
rotation value, even if there is a convergence angle.
Note that the For Zero-Rotation Objects option is available only if you
selected the previous option, For Map Distortion, in the Adjust Rotations
area.
Select Adjust Elevations to adjust the elevation (Z axis) of objects when you
select For Changes In Units and For Map Distortion under Adjust Sizes And
Scales.
Under Data Source Options:
■ Select Reconnect Data Source When Drawing Opens to reconnect the
databases that were connected the last time you quit Autodesk Map 3D.
■ In the Number Of SQL Conditions To Keep In History List box, enter the
number of SQL conditions to store in the SQL condition history list.
Reducing the size of this list saves memory and reduces the number of
conditions you must scroll through when you search for a particular
condition. Note that the first condition added to the list is the first one to
be dropped when Autodesk Map 3D reaches the maximum number you
specify.
To set drawing options
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options.
2 In the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254), select the Current
Drawing tab.
3 Modify the options you want.
Setting Drawing Options | 173
Activate Attached Source Drawings:
■ From Last Session At Startup — Activates the drawings that were active
the last time you quit Autodesk Map 3D.
■ After Attaching — Sets the status of a drawing to Active when you
attach it.
Coordinate Transformation Adjustments:
Adjust sizes and scales:
■ For Changes In Units — Use this option when you are working with
text and block objects from a source drawing that uses different
coordinate system units than the current drawing. For example, if
your source drawing uses meters and the current drawing uses U.S.
Survey Feet, you can scale text and blocks so that their size or scale
measures in feet rather than meters.
■ For Map Distortion — Adjusts the size and scale of text and blocks to
correct for map distortion introduced when you represent a spherical
object (earth) in a Cartesian coordinate system.
Adjust rotations:
■ For Map Distortion — Adjusts the angle of text and blocks to correct
for map distortion due to the convergence angle (the deviation of the
Y axis of a Cartesian coordinate system from true north).
■ For Zero-Rotation Objects — Specifies that text and blocks that have
a rotation value of zero in the source drawing are adjusted to correct
distortion due to the convergence angle.
■ Adjust Elevations — Adjusts the elevation (Z axis) of objects when
you select For Changes In Units and For Map Distortion under Adjust
Sizes And Scales.
Data Source Options:
■ Select Reconnect Data Source When Drawing Opens — Reconnects
the databases that were connected the last time you quit Autodesk
Map 3D.
■ Number Of SQL Conditions To Keep In History List — Specifies the
number of SQL conditions to store in the SQL condition history list.
4 Click OK.
174 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
Setting Multi-user Options
You can specify options that affect how Autodesk Map 3D operates for all
users, across all drawings. For example, you can set login or object locking
options. The system administrator controls these settings.
These options apply to all Autodesk Map 3D users in a single installation and
are set by the system administrator. The settings affect all drawings and, in
network installations, are common to all users.
Object locking is recommended on networked systems to avoid conflicts when
querying and editing. If you are working on a stand-alone system, you don't
need object locking.
Under Multi User Options:
■ Select Force User Login to require users to log in before using Autodesk
Map 3D.
Note that you must have Superuser privilege to set this option.
If Force User Login is enabled, users are required to log in at Autodesk Map
3D startup. If a user attempts to halt log in by pressing the Escape key, Autodesk
Map 3D assigns view-only privileges, and the user cannot alter the drawing
set, edit drawings, or perform queries. Once logged in, a user may log in under
a different login name, even while working in a drawing with active source
drawings.
Setting Multi-user Options | 175
If Force User Login is not enabled and the user does not log in, Autodesk Map
3D uses the user's operating system login name to identify the user when
locking objects, creating the .DWK file, and restoring options. A user may log
in using his or her login name while working in drawings, including drawings
with attached source drawings.
■ Select Enable Object Locking to protect objects that are being edited from
being modified by other Autodesk Map 3D users.
You cannot change the Enable Object Locking option while drawings are
attached. If this option is not selected, only one user at a time can attach a
drawing.
To set multi-user options
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options.
2 In the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254), select the Multi User
tab.
3 Modify the options you want.
Under Multi User Options:
■ Select Force User Login to require users to log in before using Autodesk
Map 3D.
Note that you must have Superuser privilege to set this option.
If Force User Login is enabled, users are required to log in at Autodesk
Map 3D startup. If a user attempts to halt log in by pressing the Escape
key, Autodesk Map 3D assigns view-only privileges, and the user cannot
alter the drawing set, edit drawings, or perform queries. Once logged in,
a user may log in under a different login name, even while working in a
drawing with active source drawings.
If Force User Login is not enabled and the user does not log in, Autodesk
Map 3D uses the user's operating system login name to identify the user
when locking objects, creating the .DWK file, and restoring options. A
user may log in using his or her login name while working in drawings,
including drawings with attached source drawings.
■ Select Enable Object Locking to protect objects that are being edited
from being modified by other Autodesk Map 3D users.
You cannot change the Enable Object Locking option while drawings are
attached. If this option is not selected, only one user at a time can attach
a drawing.
176 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
Setting System Options
You can specify options that affect the operation of a single installation of
Autodesk Map 3D.
Under Log File Options, do any of the following:
■ Select Log File Active to create a log file for Autodesk Map 3D messages.
■ In the File Name box, provide the path and name for a log file in which
to record error, warning, and diagnostic messages. The default name is
acadmap.log. Optionally, you can click Browse to search your file system
for an existing file. Autodesk Map 3D appends messages to the file you
select.
■ Specify one of the following under Message Level:
Level 0: Error Messages — The log file contains error messages that describe
potential problems you may encounter. For example, if you attempt to attach
a drawing that is already attached, Autodesk Map 3D produces an error message
that is stored in the log file.
Level 1: Error And Warning Messages — The log file contains warning messages
in addition to error messages. Warning messages alert you to potential
Setting System Options | 177
problems. For example, if you use duplicate link template names, Autodesk
Map 3D produces a warning message that is stored in the log file.
Level 2: Error, Warning And Diagnostic Messages — The log file contains status
messages as well as error and warning messages.
You can specify the number of drawings that can be loaded in memory at one
time.
When you attach and activate drawings, Autodesk Map 3D opens them in
memory. You do not see the open drawings, but Autodesk Map 3D must open
them to perform operations.
The number of drawings that Autodesk Map 3D can open in memory at the
same time depends on several factors. These include the size of the drawings,
amount of memory, and your system setup.
To specify a default directory for externally saved queries, enter the path in
the Default Query File Directory box. Or click Browse to locate an existing
directory.
To set system options
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options.
2 In the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254), select the System tab.
3 Modify the options you want.
Log file options
■ Log file active — Creates a log file for Autodesk Map 3D messages.
■ File name — Provides the path and name for a log file in which to
record error, warning, and diagnostic messages. The default name is
acadmap.log. Optionally, click Browse to search your file system for
an existing file. Autodesk Map 3D appends messages to the file you
select.
■ Specify one of the following under Message level:
Level 0: Error messages — Includes only error messages in the log file.
For example, if you attempt to attach a drawing that is already attached,
Autodesk Map 3D writes an error message.
Level 1: Error and warning messages — Includes error and warning
messages in the log file. For example, if you use duplicate link template
names, Autodesk Map 3D writes a warning message.
178 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Level 2: Error, warning and diagnostic messages — Includes error, warning,
and diagnostic messages in the log file.
Data Source Options:
■ Number of drawings loaded in memory at once — Specifies the
number of drawings that Map can have open in memory at the same
time. This number does not limit the number of active drawings.
Autodesk Map 3D opens and closes files in memory as it needs them.
If your system has a lot of memory, you can enter a larger number
(up to 200) to make queries go faster.
■ Default query file directory — Specifies a default directory for
externally saved queries. Enter the path in the text box or click Browse
to locate an existing directory.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
Setting Coordinate System Options
You can set a number of options to determine how Autodesk Map 3D performs
coordinate system transformations and responds when you open drawings
with embedded coordinate system definitions.
These options apply only to the current drawing. Each time you open a
drawing, these settings take effect, but they do not affect other drawings.
Setting Coordinate System Options | 179
Coordinate Transformation Adjustment
Coordinate transformation allows the manipulation of the coordinate
geometry. Use the Coordinate Transformation Adjustment options to specify
how Autodesk Map 3D performs coordinate transformations through
adjustments for size, scale, rotation, and elevation.
After you query objects into a drawing from source drawings, do not change
the coordinate transformation options if you plan to save changes back to the
source drawings.
NOTE The Autodesk Map 3D simple transformation options, available in the
Drawing Settings dialog box, cannot be used with coordinate transformations.
Storing Coordinate Systems in the Drawing
When you open a drawing that has a coordinate system that is not in your
dictionary, Autodesk Map 3D can add that coordinate system definition to
your dictionary. You can choose to always add the definitions, never add the
definitions, or have Autodesk Map 3D prompt you each time.
Units
Specify the units to use when displaying geodetic distance.
To specify coordinate system options
1 ClickSetup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options. Click the Current Drawing
tab.
2 Under Coordinate Transformation Adjustments, specify how you want
Autodesk Map 3D to perform coordinate transformations.
3 Click the Coordinate Systems tab.
4 Under Coordinate System Definitions Stored In Drawing, specify how
you want Autodesk Map 3D to respond when you open drawings with
embedded coordinate system definitions.
5 Under Geodetic Distance, select the units to use when displaying geodetic
distance.
6 Click OK.
180 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
Setting Coordinate Geometry Options
You can set the following coordinate geometry options:
■ If North on your map is not aligned with the Y axis, specify the angle for
North.
■ If azimuth bearings on your map are measured relative to South, set the
azimuth base to South.
■ If your COGO information sometimes includes elevation information, set
the COGO commands to prompt for 3D data. If you never include 3D data,
you can turn this prompt off.
To set coordinate geometry options
1 From the Input and Inquiry toolbar typically located at the bottom left
of your application window, select .
2 In the Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box, set of of the following
options.
■ To change the setting for North, under Direction From Y Axis, specify
the direction from the Y axis to North on your map. Enter a number
Setting Coordinate Geometry Options | 181
that represents the angular distance measured clockwise from the Y
axis.
■ If bearings in your map are relative to South, select Define Bearings
Relative To South.
■ To have Autodesk Map always prompt for elevation, grade, or slope,
select Prompt For 3D Data Input.
3 Click OK to save your settings.
To quickly change the azimuth bearing
1 At the command prompt, enter mapcgazbase.
2 Enter n for North or s for South and press Enter.
Quick Reference
MAPCGAZBASE
Sets the azimuth base
Icon
azimuth distance
Command Line MAPCGAZBASE
MAPCGSETUP
Specifies coordinate geometry settings
Icon
Setup COGO Options
Command Line MAPCGSETUP
Dialog Box Setting Coordinate Geometry Options (page 181)
182 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings
You can specify a number of options for attaching data sources.
■ Specify whether data sources, tables, database queries, and link templates
appear on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
■ Specify whether Autodesk Map 3D automatically reconnects the data
sources that were connected the last time you closed this drawing.
■ Specify the default driver to use when you drop an MDB file onto the Map
Explorer tab.
■ Specify the default database version for files with a .db, .dbf, or .xls file
extension that you drop on the Map Explorer tab.
■ Change the Expert setting to display or hide the data source configuration
dialog boxes. An Expert setting of 3 or above displays the configuration
dialog boxes. An Expert setting of 2 or less hides the dialog boxes.
■ Change the default location for UDL files.
To set data source options
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options.
2 In the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254):
■ On the Task Pane tab, select the items to display on the Map Explorer
tab.
■ On the Current Drawing tab, specify whether to automatically connect
to attached data sources when you open a drawing and how many
filters or conditions should be stored in the History List.
■ On the Data Source tab, specify the default driver to use when you
drop an MDB file on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane. Click
Associate to specify the default database version
To change the expert setting
1 Type expert at the command line.
2 Enter an expert setting.
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings | 183
For information on the Expert system variable, look up "system variables" in
the help index.
To change the default data link file directory
1 Click Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options.
2 On the Files tab of the Options dialog box, specify the Data Sources
Location.
See also:
■ To set Data View options (page 185)
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Menu Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options
Command Line OPTIONS
Task Pane Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
MAPOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
Setting Data View Options
You can set a number of Data View options.
184 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
These options apply to a single user's Autodesk Map 3D environment. All
drawings opened by a particular user display these settings, but they do not
affect others who open the same drawings.
To set Data View options
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options.
2 In the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254), select the Data Source
tab.
3 Modify the options you want.
4 To change the number of filters that Autodesk Map 3D displays in the
Table Filter History dialog box, select the Current Drawing tab. Enter a
new number.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Menu Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options
Command Line OPTIONS
Task Pane Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
MAPOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
Setting Data View Options | 185
Associating Database Versions with File Extensions
This information applies only to drawing objects.
When you drag and drop a database onto the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane, you can select the version of the database used to create the database.
By default, Autodesk Map 3D prompts you each time to specify the version
that was used. If all your databases were created with a specific version of the
software, you can set an option to automatically select that version.
To associate database versions with files extensions
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options.
2 In the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254), select the Data Source
tab.
3 Under Associate Database Versions With File Extensions, select Associate.
4 In the Associate Database Versions dialog box (page 1065), under each
database name, do one of the following:
■ To be prompted each time you drag and drop a database file onto the
Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, select Always Prompt.
■ To associate a database file extension with a specific version of the
database software, select Always Use. Select the correct version.
When you drop a database file onto the Map Explorer tab, Autodesk
Map 3D checks the file extension and uses the specified version of
the database software.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
186 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
Setting Query Options (DWG)
You can set several options that determine how queries run, how they appear
onscreen, and how they are saved. For detailed information about the options,
see the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254) help topic.
On the Task Pane Tab
You can hide or display the query node on the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane.
NOTE The Queries option that appears under the Data Sources category is for
database queries.
Options you set on the Task Pane tab apply to a single user's Autodesk Map
3D environment. All drawings opened by a particular user display these
settings, but they do not affect others who open the same drawings.
On the Query Tab
You can set specific query options, including the default joining operator,
display parameters for preview queries, and options for location conditions.
Options you set on the Query tab apply only to the current drawing. Each
time you open this drawing, these settings take effect, but they do not affect
other drawings.
On the Save Back Tab
You can set options that determine if queried objects are added to the save
set.
Options you set on the Save Back tab apply only to the current drawing. Each
time you open this drawing, these settings take effect, but they do not affect
other drawings.
Setting Query Options (DWG) | 187
On the System Tab
You can specify a default directory for externally saved queries.
To set query options
■ Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options. Click the tab you want.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
Using Associative Hatch
You can set an option to specify whether hatch objects created by property
alteration queries and thematic mapping are associative.
Hatch patterns used in thematic maps.
Associative hatch maintains a link between a hatch object and its boundary:
if the boundary is modified, the hatch updates automatically. However, if the
188 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
boundary if modified so that it no longer encloses the hatch or if any of the
boundary objects are deleted, the association between the hatch and the
boundary is lost.
When querying multiple files, it is very easy to lose the association between
a hatch object and its boundary. If you want associative hatch, the easiest
solution may be to delete the old hatch object and recreate the associative
hatch after you finish modifying the attached drawings.
To maintain an existing association, keep these points in mind:
■ If you modify an object that is part of a hatch boundary, be sure your
changes do not break the boundary. That is, you can enlarge a circle, but
don't trim it. You can extend the corner of a square, but don't open it up.
■ To save a new associative hatch object to an attached drawing, all the
boundary objects must be in the same attached drawing. In addition, all
objects must be saved to the attached drawing at the same time. If any of
the boundary objects are saved to a different file or are saved at a different
time, the association is lost.
■ When you add an associative hatch object to the save set, all its boundary
objects are added automatically. If any of the boundary objects are locked,
the hatch is not added to the save set.
■ When you remove an associative hatch object from the save set, boundary
objects are removed from the save set automatically.
■ When you add a boundary object to the save set, hatch objects associated
with that boundary are not added to the save set automatically. To maintain
the association, add the hatch object to the save set.
■ When combining solid hatch with text, use the DRAWORDER command
to make the text visible on top of the hatch.
To have hatch created by property alteration be associative
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options. Select the Query tab.
2 Under Query Options, select Create Associative Hatch Objects.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Using Associative Hatch | 189
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
Saving Option Settings
Autodesk Map 3D saves your options in one of three places, depending on
the option type.
■ Drawing options are saved in the drawing.
■ User and installation options are saved in the acadmap.ini file. On startup,
Autodesk Map 3D searches for the acadmap.ini file first in the current
directory, then in all the directories listed in the Autodesk Map 3D path,
and finally in the Autodesk Map 3D executable directory. If it does not
find the acadmap.ini file, the program creates the file in the current working
directory.
■ Multi-user options are saved in the binary acadmap.sys file. The acadmap.sys
file is located in the Autodesk Map 3D executable directory. After setting
the multi-user options, the system administrator should make the file
read-only to prevent users from modifying or deleting it.
NOTE When you uninstall Autodesk Map 3D, acadmap.ini is also uninstalled. If
you have modified the settings in this file, you should save acadmap.ini prior to
uninstalling. If you uninstall and then re-install Autodesk Map 3D, you can simply
replace the newly installed acadmap.ini with the saved one. Note that Map release
4 and earlier saved option settings in the ade.ini file. If you uninstall release 4 or
earlier and then install a newer release of Autodesk Map 3D, you cannot replace
the newly installed acadmap.ini with the saved ade.ini. Instead, you will need to
reset your options in the Autodesk Map Options dialog box.
See also:
■ Setting Drawing Options (page 171)
190 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
■ Setting Task Pane Options (page 170)
■ Setting System Options (page 177)
■ Setting Multi-user Options (page 175)
■ Setting Data Source Options for Drawings (page 183)
■ Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights (page 70)
To set Autodesk Map 3D options
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options.
2 In the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254), select the tab you
want.
3 Modify the options you want.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Menu Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options
Command Line OPTIONS
Task Pane Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
MAPOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
Saving Option Settings | 191
Setting Raster Image Options
You can set a number of options for raster images by using the Raster Extension
Options dialog box.
To set raster image options
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
Setting the Resource Files Directory
Resource files store information about an image's insertion point, scale,
rotation, and density. The Resource File Directory indicates where Autodesk
Map 3D will search for resource files. Resource files have the same base name
as the raster image with a .res extension.
When you insert an image, Autodesk Map 3D looks for associated correlation
sources, such as world files, resource files, and tab files. By default, Autodesk
Map 3D looks in the directory containing the image. However, for resource
files, you can specify an additional location.
Note that this alternate directory applies only to resource files (.res). It does
not apply to other correlation sources.
To set the resource file directory
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240), select the Paths
tab.
3 Under Resource File Directory, type the directory path for the resource
files or click Browse to select a directory.
4 If you want Autodesk Map 3D to search the Resource File Directory before
searching the image directory, select Use Resource File Directory Before
Using Image Directory.
5 Click OK to save your changes.
192 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specify default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Menu Setup ➤ Raster Options
Command Line MAPIOPTIONS
Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240)
Changing How Image Frames Are Displayed
You can choose to display the image frame in front of an image, behind an
image, or you can hide the frame. When the frame is behind the image, you
can still select the image by selecting the frame. However, if you hide the
frame, you cannot select the image by selecting the frame.
NOTE If you use the Toggle Frames command to hide frames, and then redisplay
them, the frames appear in front of the images.
To change how image frames are displayed
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240), select the General
tab.
3 Under Display Preferences, select an option from the Image Frame list.
■ Frame Drawn Above Image displays the frame above the image.
■ Frame Drawn Below Image hides the frame behind the image. You
can still select the image by selecting the frame.
■ Frames Off hides the frame. If frames are hidden, you select images
by pressing Shift + left-click select method (page 300).
4 Click OK.
Setting Raster Image Options | 193
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specify default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Menu Setup ➤ Raster Options
Command Line MAPIOPTIONS
Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240)
Changing Image Display Quality
You can display your images in high quality or draft quality. High quality
dithers the pixels so that the areas between shading appear more gradual.
Draft quality can speed up the performance of your system, but may reduce
the quality of how some color and grayscale images appear onscreen.
NOTE The display quality setting affects only how Autodesk Map 3D displays the
image onscreen. It does not alter the contents of the image file.
See also:
■ Changing Image Display Quality and Speed (page 304)
To change the image display quality
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240), select the General
tab.
3 Under Display Preferences, select a Display Quality option:
■ High dithers the pixels, making differences in shading more gradual.
If you are using a 256 color palette to display images, dithering helps
make an image that has more than 256 shades appear more realistic.
■ Draft does not dither the pixels. This setting is recommended for
bitonal images.
4 Click OK.
194 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specify default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Menu Setup ➤ Raster Options
Command Line MAPIOPTIONS
Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240)
Choosing an Image Detach Method
When you erase images from a drawing, information about the image is still
stored in the drawing. To delete this information, detach the image. You can
choose whether images are detached automatically when you erase the last
instance of the image from the drawing.
To choose an image detach method
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240), select the General
tab.
3 Under Image Detach Preferences, select one of the following methods:
■ Ask Before Detach prompts you to detach an image when you erase
all image frames that reference that image.
■ Always Detach automatically detaches an image when you erase all
image frames that reference that image.
■ Never Detach does not detach an image when you erase all image
frames that reference that image.
4 Click OK.
NOTE You can manually detach an image by using the IMAGE command.
Setting Raster Image Options | 195
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specify default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Menu Setup ➤ Raster Options
Command Line MAPIOPTIONS
Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240)
Using Shift + Left-click to Select Images
This feature is useful when you are zoomed in on the image and you cannot
see the image frame.
To turn on Shift + left-click
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240), select the General
tab.
3 Select Shift + Left-click Image Select to be able to select images (page 300)
by pressing Shift and clicking the left mouse button.
Clear if you do not want to use this feature.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specify default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Menu Setup ➤ Raster Options
Command Line MAPIOPTIONS
Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240)
196 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Setting Correlation Defaults
Most images have correlation data that is stored in the image file header or
in a correlation source file. However, some images may not have any
correlation data. For those cases, you can specify default correlation data. In
addition, if the correlation source does not contain information on scale or
density, Autodesk Map 3D uses the default settings for those items.
NOTE Setting default correlation data can save you time if you have multiple
images that require the same insertion point, scale, rotation, and density.
See also:
■ Setting Image Density (page 283)
To set the correlation defaults
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240), select the Image
Defaults tab.
3 Under Insertion Point, type default insertion point coordinates in the X
and Y boxes. The precision of these points depends on the precision value
in the Drawing Units dialog box. For more information about the
AutoCAD UNITS command, see the AutoCAD help.
4 To set an elevation for image frames, type the elevation in the Z insertion
point box.
This value is useful to establish the elevation of a floor plan image, for
example.
5 In the Rotation box, type a default rotation angle for images. The unit
of measurement depends on the selected value in the Drawing Units
dialog box.
6 In the Scale box, type a default scale for images. Image scale does not
change the scale of the vector drawing.
7 In the Density box, type a default density for images. This should usually
be the scanned resolution. For example, if the majority of your images
were scanned at 300 dots per inch, then type 300 in this box.
Setting Raster Image Options | 197
8 In the Units box, select the default unit for the insertion point and density
of images. For example, if the majority of your images were scanned at
300 dots per inch, then select Inch as the default.
9 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specify default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Menu Setup ➤ Raster Options
Command Line MAPIOPTIONS
Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240)
Configuring Memory Use
Autodesk Map 3D reserves 25% of the total physical memory (RAM) on your
system for inserting images with the Raster Extension. If you increase the
default amount, more of the physical memory is used for images and less is
available for other operations in Autodesk Map 3D and for other applications
you might be running.
If you require additional memory for your images, the Raster Extension uses
a temporary swap file. For example, if you insert a 100 MB file, and the Memory
Limit is 8 MB, Autodesk Map 3D stores the remaining 92 MB in a temporary
file. You can specify where the swap file is created.
You can change the following Raster Extension memory settings:
■ Temporary File Location — The default directory for the temporary swap
files is the Windows temp directory.
TIP For best performance, use a local drive for your temporary swap file. It is
recommended that you do not use the drive where the operating system is
installed as the drive for the swap file unless this is your only local drive.
■ Memory Limit — Specify the maximum amount of computer memory that
Autodesk Map 3D can use to store image files.
198 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
NOTE The more physical RAM you have, the higher you can make your Memory
Limit. The higher the Memory Limit, the less swapping to hard disk occurs and
the faster your images load and display. However, do not allocate all available
physical RAM because doing so slows overall performance.
NOTE Close and restart Autodesk Map 3D after adjusting these settings.
To configure memory for images
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240), select the Memory
tab.
3 To locate a drive for your temporary swap file location, click Browse under
Temporary File Location, and locate a drive.
4 To change the amount of memory reserved for inserting images, type a
new value in the Memory Limit box. Be careful that you do not use all
of your system resources.
NOTE You can click Default to return this setting to the recommended value.
5 Click OK to accept the changes.
You must quit and restart Autodesk Map 3D for these settings to take effect.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specify default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Menu Setup ➤ Raster Options
Command Line MAPIOPTIONS
Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240)
Using Profiles and .ini Files
Use profiles and .ini files to customize and automate import and export.
Using Profiles and .ini Files | 199
To use profiles and .ini files
■ Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D
■ Setting Up Your Map File
■ Setting Options
Using Profiles
To reuse or share your settings, save them as a profile.
Export Profiles
When you save an export profile, it does not store the current file name or
the current selection set.
When you load an export profile, if the specified data source doesn't exist,
Include Table Data is set to No.
Import Profiles
When you save an import profile, it does not store the current file name.
When you load an import profile, the table settings are reset for any input
layers that match an input layer name in the saved profile. Layers that do not
match an input layer in the saved profile are not reset.
■ If the specified coordinate system code isn't in the dictionary, the
coordinate system is set to <None>.
■ If the data field name to be used for a layer doesn't exist, the drawing layer
is set to Layer 0. If the specified drawing layer doesn't exist, it will be
created.
■ If the data field name to use for the block name doesn't exist, or if the
specified block doesn't exist, the block is set to ACAD_POINT.
When you load an import profile containing object class settings, Autodesk
Map 3D checks for potential problems and handles them as follows:
■ If the appropriate object classification file is not attached to the drawing,
the object class settings are ignored.
■ If the object class settings to be used for a layer contradict the import file,
the object class settings are not applied.
200 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
■ If the specified object class does not exist, the object class assignment is
set to <None>.
■ If the object class attribute settings conflict with the import file, Autodesk
Map 3D displays the Conflict Resolution dialog box (page 1117).
Compatibility with Previous Releases
■ Profiles saved with Autodesk Map 3D 2005, Autodesk Map 2004, 6, and 5
are compatible with this release.
■ Profiles saved with Autodesk Map 2000 Release 4 or earlier cannot be used
with this release.
■ Profiles created in this release contain additional information and cannot
be used with previous releases.
To create a profile
1 Open the Import or Export options dialog box.
2 Specify the settings you want to save.
3 Click Save.
4 Enter a name for the profile.
To use a profile
1 Open the Import or Export options dialog box.
2 Click Load.
3 Select the profile.
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports data from Autodesk Map to an external file format
Menu File ➤ Export ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Export Map File
Using Profiles and .ini Files | 201
Command Line MAPEXPORT
Dialog Box Export dialog box (page 1119)
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into Autodesk Map
Menu File ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Import Map File
Command Line MAPIMPORT
Dialog Box Import dialog box (page 1124)
Customizing the .ini File
Some of the defaults for import and export settings are stored in .ini
(initialization) files. When you use a new format with Autodesk Map 3D, the
information about that format is added automatically to the .ini files. However,
in some instances, you may want to modify these files yourself. In addition,
you can set some formatting options in these files.
You can modify the following .ini files:
■ mapexport.ini — Set options to export a file-based format as a folder based
format (which is especially useful for Shapefiles); to specify how to segment
arcs and circles; to define the default seed file for exporting DGN files
(which determines defaults such as units of measure and 2D vs. 3D); to
specify the schema mode to use; and to specify language encoding settings
for exporting GML data in Asian languages.
■ mapimport.ini — Set options to use for file or folder selection; to import
DGN cells as blocks; to import object colors to their RGB (True Color)
equivalent; and to specify language encoding settings for importing GML
data in Asian languages.
■ mapforeignfileproperties.ini — Set options to specify linetype, lineweight,
font, and justification.
202 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Exporting to ArcView ShapeFiles
If you are exporting to ArcView ShapeFiles, you can treat it as a folder-based
format. To do this, you must modify the following items in the MapExport.ini
file:
■ Specify that it requires a folder rather than a file.
■ Specify that it requires a prefix name.
■ Specify that it no longer requires a type (point/line/polyline/text).
If you modify these items, be sure to modify them only for a driver that
supports this change.
Segmenting Certain Entity Types When Exporting
When you export Splines and polylines with bulges, they are broken into
polyline segments. The number of degrees used for segmentation is set by the
SegmentationDegrees option. By default, SegmentationDegrees is 2 degrees.
In addition, when you exporting to a file format that doesn't support arcs or
ellipses, such as Shape or Coverage, or doesn't support ellipses that have axes
at an angle, such as MIF/MID, you can further modify the segmentation by
changing the value for FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE. By default,
FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE is 5 degrees.
You can change SegmentationDegrees and FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE
to be larger or smaller.
Exporting to MicroStation DGN Files
When exporting to DGN files, Autodesk Map 3D reads a seed file to determine
default information, such as whether the destination DGN file will be in
imperial units or metric and whether the file will be 2D or 3D. There are
separate seed file for DGN version 7 and DGN version 8. For more information
about seed files, see MicroStation DGN Versions 7 and 8 (page 347).
To change the default units of measure (or other defaults), you must change
the default seed files specified in the MapExport.ini file.
Specifying the File and Folder Selection Options to Use for Import
By default, when you import ArcView ShapeFiles, MapInfo MIF/MID, MapInfo
TAB, or VPF files, you can select one or more files in a folder to import. This
is called multi-select.
Using Profiles and .ini Files | 203
If you want, you can change the settings in the mapimport.ini file so that these
formate are considered folder-based formats (you select a folder and all the
files in the folder are imported) or single-select formats (only one file can be
selected for import). Note that VPF can be folder-based or multi-select only.
Importing DGN Cells
When you import data from a DGN file, you can specify how DGN cells are
imported.
Importing Object Colors as RGB (True Color) Colors
By default, objects are imported using the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color.
When you import from DGN or MIF/MID, you can specify that objects
maintain their RGB color values.
Even if you import using RGB colors, white objects are always imported to
the ACI White, which displays white on a black background and black on a
white background. Black objects are assigned the ByLayer color. If you want
to export objects to MIF/MID as black, change the layer color to black before
exporting.
Note that if your Model Tab Background color is something other than Black
or White and you import using RGB colors, you may not be able to see objects
whose color is close to the background color.
Importing and Exporting GML Data
Autodesk Map 3D can export GML data in one of two schema modes: Fixed
or Create. In addition, Autodesk Map 3D provides the ability to specify
language encoding settings so that you can import and export GML data in
Asian languages.
Schema Modes
You can specify one of the following schema modes to use when exporting
GML data:
■ Fixed mode — Creates a single GML file (.gml) that contains all entity
types. A separate schema file (.xsd) is NOT written.
■ Create mode — Produces 3 files: a GML file (.gml) that contains the
geometry and data, an xfMap file (.xmp), and a schema file and description
(.xsd).
204 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Fixed mode is recommended and is the default mode. Fixed mode can
recognize certain multi-byte characters, such as multi-byte square ASCII
characters in output field names (for instance, in Japanese with Shift_JIS
encoding, 0x8250 – the ‘1’ character), which can be problematic in Create
mode. This can be an important consideration when working with data in
Asian languages.
NOTE Earlier versions of Autodesk Map 3D provided support for Fixed mode.
However, Fixed mode was limited to single entity type. This limitation is no longer
the case in Autodesk Map 3D 2007. Fixed mode now supports all entity types.
Language Encoding Settings to Use When Importing or Exporting GML Data
in Asian Languages
When exporting GML data in Asian languages, you must verify that
mapexport.ini contains the language encoding settings needed to export valid
GML data for the language you want.
Using Fixed schema mode when exporting is recommended, as it can recognize
certain multi-byte characters that can be problematic in Create mode.
When importing GML data in Asian languages, you must verify that the
language encoding settings specified in Autodesk Map 3D’s mapimport.ini
file match the settings in your incoming file. The settings need to match for
the import to be successful.
Adding Custom Tags
If you are familiar with the options for a driver, you can add custom tags. Use
the format:
Driver:XXX
Where XXX is the code you want to send to the driver. Add the line to the
appropriate section of the MapExport.ini file. Incorrect tags will have
unpredictable results.
Location of the .ini File
When exporting, Autodesk Map 3D looks first for the .ini file in the current
directory. If no .ini file is there, it uses the .ini file in the C:\Documents and
Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Autodesk Map 3D 2007\R17folder.
To always use the same settings, do not create additional .ini files.
Using Profiles and .ini Files | 205
Changing Font, Linestyle, Lineweight, or Justification
You can set a number of formatting options in the mapforeignfileproperties.ini
file.
DGN Fonts
Use the [IGDS_Font] section (for DGN version 7) or [DGN_V8] section (for
DGN version 8) to map DGN font numbers to textstyles that you've defined.
DGN Linestyles
Use the [IGDS_LineStyle] or [DGN_V8_LineStyle] section to map DGN line
styles to linestyles loaded in the Autodesk Map 3D drawing.
DGN Lineweight
Use the [IGDS_LineWeight] or [DGN_V8_LineWeight] section to map DGN
lineweights to allowable Autodesk Map 3D lineweight values.
The DGN lineweight range is 0-31. Autodesk Map 3D lineweights are in 100ths
of a millimeter and only the following values are supported: 0, 5, 9, 13, 15,
18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 53, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 106, 120, 140, 158, 200, 211,
-1, -2 and -3. The Autodesk Map 3D values -1, -2, and -3 indicate ByLayer,
ByBlock, and by lineweight default respectively.
DGN Justification
Use the [IGDS_Justification] or [DGN_V8_Justification] section to map the
DGN justification to AutoCAD vertical and horizontal modes or AutoCAD
attachment.
DGN justification values range from 0-14:
0 is Left/Top, 8 is Center/Bottom, 1 is Left/Center, 9 is Right Margin/Top, 2
is Left/Bottom, 10 is Right Margin/Center, 3 is Left Margin/Top, 11 is Right
Margin/Bottom, 4 is Left Margin/Center, 12 is Right/Top, 5 is Center/Bottom,
13 is Right/Center, 6 is Center/Top, 14 is Right/Bottom, 7 is Center/Center,
Default is 5
The following values are supported for Autodesk Map 3D justifications:
TopLeft, TopCenter, TopRight, MiddleLeft, MiddleCenter, MiddleRight,
BottomLeft, BottomCenter, BottomRight, BaseLeft, BaseCenter, BaseRight,
BaseAlign, BottomAlign, MiddleAlign, TopAlign, BaseFit, BottomFit, MiddleFit,
TopFit, BaseMid, BottomMid, MiddleMid, TopMid
MIF Justification
Use the [MIF_Justification] section to set justification for MIF. Allowed MIF
Justifications are left, center, and right.
206 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
When importing from MIF to Autodesk Map 3D, the last mapping in the table
is used.
ArcInfo and E00 Justification
Use the [ARCINFO_Justification] and [E00_Justification] sections to set
justification for ArcInfo and E00.
When importing from ArcInfo or E00 to Autodesk Map 3D, the last mapping
in the table is used.
To export to .shp as folder-based rather than file-based
1 Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is located in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Autodesk Map 3D 2007\R17 folder
2 Find the [SHAPE] section.
3 To export to a folder, specify File=False.
4 To add the "Prefix file name" option, specify Rootname=True.
5 To turn off prompting for entity types when exporting, specify
EntTypes=All.
6 Save and close the ..ini file.
To export to .shp as file-based rather than folder-based
1 Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Autodesk Map 3D 2007\R17 folder.
2 Find the [SHAPE] section.
3 To export to a file, specify File=True.
4 To remove the "Prefix file name" option, specify Rootname=False.
5 To have Autodesk Map 3D prompt for entity types when exporting,
specify EntTypes=Types.
6 Save and close the .ini file.
Using Profiles and .ini Files | 207
To change the segmentation size for splines, polylines with bulges, arcs, and
ellipses
1 Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Autodesk Map 3D 2007\R17 folder.
2 Find the [Options] section.
3 To change the segmentation of splines and polylines with bulges, edit
the SegmentionDegrees value to the number you want.
By default, the value is 2 degrees.
4 To change the segmentation of arcs and ellipses, find the File section
pertaining to one of the following file formats: ArcInfo, E00, MIF,
MapInfo, or Shape.
5 Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the following line:
Driver:FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE=5
6 Change the FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE value to the number you
want.
7 Save and close the .ini file.
To change the default seed file for exporting DGN files
1 Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Autodesk Map 3D 2007\R17 folder.
2 Find the [IGDS] section (for DGN version 7) or [DGN_V8]section (for DGN
version 8). This is where the default seed file is specified.
3 Change the default seed file to the seed file you want.
NOTE Make sure to choose a seed file for the appropriate version of DGN.
If you export to DGN version 7 using a DGN version 8 seed file, the operation
will fail.
4 Save and close the .ini file.
To export DGN files in imperial units rather than metric
1 Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
208 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
2 Find the [IGDS] section (for DGN version 7) or [DGN_V8]section (for DGN
version 8).
3 Change the default seed file to the seed file you want.
For example, change the default seed file to one that specifies imperial
units rather than metric:
Driver:RUNTIME_MACROS=_SEED,"C:\Program Files\Common
Files\Autodesk Shared\GIS\ImportExport\4.0\design\seed3d_ft.dgn"
NOTE Make sure to choose a seed file for the appropriate version of DGN.
If you export to DGN version 7 using a DGN version 8 seed file, the operation
will fail.
4 Save and close the .ini file.
To import Shapefiles, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF as folder-based, multi-select, or
file-based
1 Open the mapimport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is located in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Autodesk Map 3D 2007\R17 folder
2 Find the File section pertaining to one of the following file formats:
ShapeFile, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF.
The File section is preceeded by a comment such as, "This section
determines how you want to Import Mif/Mid files" and has several lines
containing the word File.
3 Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the line for the option you
want:
■ File=MultiSelect
The format will be considered a multi-select, file-based format. This
means that you will be able to select one or more individual files in
the Import Location dialog box to include in the import process.
■ File=SingleSelect
The format will be considered a single-select, file-based format. This
means that you will be able to select one file only in the Import
Location dialog box. Note that this is not a valid option for VPF.
■ File=False
The format will be considered a folder-based format and all files in
the selected folder will be included in the import process.
Using Profiles and .ini Files | 209
4 Make sure there is a semicolon at the beginning of the line for the options
you do not want to use. The semicolon tells Autodesk Map 3D to ignore
the line.
5 Save and close the .ini file.
To import DGN version 7 cells as blocks
1 Open the mapimport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Autodesk Map 3D 2007\R17 folder.
2 Find the [IGDS] section.
NOTE Do not use this procedure in the [DGN_V8] section. This procedure
works only for DGN version 7. For DGN version 8, use Cell Expansion options
in the Import dialog box (page 348) to expand cells as blocks or points, or to
explode them.
3 Find CELLS=POINTS.
4 Change this to CELLS=BLOCKS.
5 Save and close the .ini file.
To import objects using RGB (True Color) colors
1 Open the mapimport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Autodesk Map 3D 2007\R17 folder.
2 Find the Color section for either IGDS (DGN) or MIF (MapInfo).
3 Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the line for the option you
want:
■ Color=Closest ACI only
The RGB values from the file will be converted to the closest ACI
value.
■ Color=RGB only
The RGB values from the file will be preserved. Objects whose color
is black (0,0,0) will be assigned the color ByLayer. Objects whose color
is white (255,255,255) will be assigned the color ACI White.
■ Color=Equivalent ACI and RGB
210 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
For any RGB value that exactly matches an ACI, the objects will be
imported using the ACI color value. All other objects will use their
RGB values.
4 Make sure there is a semicolon at the beginning of the line for the options
you do not want to use. The semicolon tells Autodesk Map 3D to ignore
the line.
5 Save and close the .ini file.
To specify the schema mode (fixed or create) to use when exporting GML
data
1 Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Autodesk Map 3D 2007\R17 folder.
2 Find the [GML2] section.
3 Do one of the following:
■ If you want to use FIXED mode, make sure there is a semi-colon at
the beginning of the line. The semi-color tells Autodesk Map 3D to
ignore the line.
;Driver:RUNTIME_MACROS=_OUT_SCHEMA_MODE=CREATE
■ If you want to use CREATE mode, delete the semicolon at the
beginning of the following line so it appears as follows:
Driver:RUNTIME_MACROS=_OUT_SCHEMA_MODE=CREATE
IMPORTANT Fixed mode is recommended and is the default mode. Fixed
mode can recognize certain multi-byte characters, such as multi-byte square
ASCII characters in output field names (for instance, in Japanese with Shift_JIS
encoding, 0x8250 – the ‘1’ character), which can be problematic in Create
mode. This can be an important consideration when working with data in
Asian languages.
4 Save and close the .ini file.
To specify language encoding settings for GML in Asian languages
1 Open the mapimport.ini or mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as
WordPad.
Using Profiles and .ini Files | 211
2 Find the [GML2] section.
3 Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the lines for the language
encoding settings you want to use. For example, for mapimport.ini, here
are the settings you can use for Japanese.
Driver:GML2_FEATURE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Driver:GML2_MAPPING_FILE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
For mapexport.ini you can use:
Driver:GML2_FEATURE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Driver:GML2_OUTPUT_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Driver:GML2_MAPPING_FILE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Below is a summary of some of the specific settings you can use.
Language Possible Settings
Chinese Big5
GB2312
GB18030
GBK
Japanese EUC-JP
Shift-JIS
Korean EUC-KR
KSC5601
4 Save and close the .ini file.
To specify object properties
1 Open the mapforeignfileproperties.ini file using a text editor such as
WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Autodesk Map 3D 2007\R17 folder.
2 For information on each of the settings, refer to the instructions in the
file.
212 | Chapter 3 Setting Up Autodesk Map 3D 2007
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports data from Autodesk Map to an external file format
Menu File ➤ Export ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Export Map File
Command Line MAPEXPORT
Dialog Box Export dialog box (page 1119)
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into Autodesk Map
Menu File ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Import Map File
Command Line MAPIMPORT
Dialog Box Import dialog box (page 1124)
Using Profiles and .ini Files | 213
Accessing Data
4
Use Autodesk Map 3D to view and edit data from many In this chapter
sources. ■ Overview of Accessing Data
■ Before You Access Your Data
■ Accessing Geospatial Features
■ Accessing Drawing Objects
■ Accessing Raster Data
■ Accessing Attribute Data
■ Importing Maps from Other
Formats
■ Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data
215
Overview of Accessing Data
Use Autodesk Map 3D to view and edit data from many sources.
■ Combine feature data from a geospatial database with objects from drawings
or raw geometry from a table. You can easily select the data to include in
your map.
■ Associate attribute data with the features and drawing objects in your map,
then view and edit the data using an easy table display.
■ Add raster images and surfaces to your maps.
Using the Display Manager vs. Importing Data
When you use the Display Manager, you view data in its source. Edits are
saved back to the source. The data stays in its original location; you use
Autodesk Map 3D to view and edit the data in its source.
When you Import data, you make a copy of the data and bring that copy into
your map. When you edit the data, you are editing the copy. The original data
is unchanged.
Autodesk Map 3D supports both methods of viewing and editing data. For
some formats, such as Oracle and ArcSDE, you can only use the Display
Manager. For other formats, such as Microstation Design (DGN) and Arc/INFO,
you can only import and export the data. And for some formats, such as SHP,
you can do either.
To access data
Type of Data How to Access Description
Features from the following 1 In the Display Manager, click All features in the selected feature class
feature sources: Data ➤ Add Data. appear in the map.
■ ArcSDE To filter data, see Filtering a Feature Source
2 In the Data Connect window Layer (page 243)
■ Oracle
select the feature source inthe To style data, see Styling Features (page
■ MySQL left column, enter connection 401)
■ SQL Server information in the right panel,
and click Connect.
■ SHP
216 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Type of Data How to Access Description
■ SDF 3 Select the feature classes to in-
■ WFS clude in your map, and click
Add to Map.
SHP file To view and edit data in the source SHP
file, see above
To import a copy of the data into the cur-
rent drawing, click File menu ➤ Import ➤
Vector Files.
Formats not listed in the Use Import to import a copy of the data To style objects, see Accessing Drawing
Data Connect window into the current drawing. Click File Objects (page 245) and Styling Drawing
menu ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files. Layers (page 411).
To attach attribute data, see Setting Up
Data Sources for Drawings (page 161). and
Using Attribute Data with Drawing Objects
(page 315)
Overview of Accessing Data | 217
Type of Data How to Access Description
Drawing objects in the cur- 1 In the Display Manager, click To style objects, see Styling Drawing Layers
rent drawings Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ (page 411).
Query Current Drawing. To attach attribute data, see Setting Up
Data Sources for Drawings (page 161). and
2 Define a query that retrieves Using Attribute Data with Drawing Objects
the objects you want. See Ac- (page 315)
cessing Drawing Objects (page
245).
Drawing objects in other 1 Attach the drawings to the To style objects, see Styling Drawing Layers
drawings current drawing. See Attaching (page 411).
Drawings (page 128). To attach attribute data, see Setting Up
Data Sources for Drawings (page 161). and
2 In the Display Manager, click Using Attribute Data with Drawing Objects
Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ (page 315)
Query Source Drawing.
3 Define a query that retrieves
the objects you want. See Ac-
cessing Drawing Objects (page
245).
Attribute data to use with 1 Add the data to the map. See To view or edit the data, double-click the
drawing objects Setting Up Data Sources for table name in Map Explorer.
Drawings (page 161). You can create themes based on the at-
tribute data. See Theming Drawing Data
2 Define a link template for the (page 749).
data. See Creating a Link Tem-
plate (page 318).
3 Link records to drawing ob-
jects. See Manually Linking
Database Records to Objects
(page 321).
The following raster image 1 In the Display Manger, click To style an image, see Analyzing Raster-
formats: Data ➤ Add Data. Based Surfaces (page 758).
DEM, ESRI Grid, DTED, JPEG
218 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Type of Data How to Access Description
and JPEG2K , PNG, MrSID, 2 In the Data Connect window,
TIFF, ECW choose Raster from the Feature
Source list. Specify the folder
that contains the raster and
click Connect.
3 Select the raster and click Add
to Map.
Other raster image formats 1 Click Create menu ➤ Insert An To change the transparency, brightness,
Image. see Making an Image Transparent (page
305)..
2 Select the image and specify To clip the image see Clipping an Image
the image placement and set- (page 310)
tings. To change other image settings, see Mod-
ifying Raster Images (page 299)
Before You Access Your Data
Creating a Map
When you create a map, you make connections to all the data you want to
include in the map.
This can be
■ data from other drawings
■ data in a spatial database, such as Oracle, ArcSDE, MySQL, or SQLServer
■ data in a spatial data file, such as SDF or SHP
■ data from a Web server, such as WFS or WMS
■ data from other files
■ attribute data, such as an Access database
■ raster images and surfaces
Before You Access Your Data | 219
Autodesk Map 3D is your window onto all this data. You view the data in its
original source; any edits you make are made to the original source.
To create a new map
1 Create a drawing.
2 In the Display Manger, click Data ➤ Add Map.
3 In the Current Map field, specify a name for the map.
4 Assign a coordinate system to the map. See To assign coordinate systems
(page 123).
All the data you bring into this map will be converted to this coordinate
system. If you save the data back to its source, it will be converted back
to its original coordinate system.
NOTE If you do not assign a coordinate system to the map, data that you
bring into the map will appear using its native coordinate system. If you bring
in data from more than one coordinate system, entities may not align correctly
in the map.
5 Add features and objects to the map. See To access geospatial features
(page 223) and To access drawing data (page 245).
6 Optionally, add attribute data. See To access attribute data (page 313)
7 Add raster images and surfaces. See To access raster data (page 261)
8 Add styles and themes. See Overview of Visualization and Styling (page
400) and Overview of Creating Themes (page 738).
9 Optionally, create new features or objects. See To create a new Point or
MultiPoint feature (page 438). To create new drawing objects, use any
AutoCAD commands (page 37).
Quick Reference
Select Checked-Out Features
Selects features that have been checked out to edit
Menu In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace: Edit ➤ Select
Checked-Out Features
220 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Icon
Select Checked-Out Features
Command Line MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer
Organizing Layers in Your Map
The Display Manager offers two ways to view the layers in your map:
■ Organization view
Use this view to organize the list of layers.
For example, create a group for as-built data and a separate group for
proposed changes.
■ Display Order view
Use this view to change the display order of the layers.
Items at the top of the draw order are drawn on top of items below them
on the list.
If an object is a member of more than one layer, it is styled by each layer of
which it is a member. For example, if a line is in both the Transportation layer
and the Roads layer, it will be styled by both layers. If the layers specify
conflicting style or visibility settings, the object uses the style and visibility
settings of whichever layer is higher in the Display Manager list.
To create a group
1 In the Display Manager, click View ➤ Organization.
2 Click Data ➤ Add Group.
3 To change the group name, select the group then click the existing name.
Type a new name and press Enter.
4 Drag layers into the group.
NOTE If you have not used the Draw Order view, changes you make in the
Organization view affect the draw order of objects in your map. Once you use the
Draw Order view, changes in the Organization view do not affect the draw order.
Organizing Layers in Your Map | 221
To change the draw order
1 In the Display Manager, click View ➤ Draw Order.
2 Drag layers up or down to change their display order.
Items at the top of the draw order are drawn on top of items below them on
the list.
To change the thumbnail style for a layer
1 Right-click the layer. Click Display.
2 On the Display tab of the Properties palette, click in the Thumbnail
Preview field and choose an icon type.
For example, if the layer includes parcels, choose the polygon icon. If the
layer includes pipes, choose the arc icon.
The setting you choose here affects the icon both in the Display Manager and
in the legend for this map.
Quick Reference
Select Checked-Out Features
Selects features that have been checked out to edit
Menu In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace: Edit ➤ Select
Checked-Out Features
Icon
Select Checked-Out Features
Command Line MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer
Accessing Geospatial Features
A feature is the spatial description of a real-world entity such as a road, a utility
pole, or a river. Features are stored in a spatial database or file. The spatial
database or file is referred to as a feature source.
222 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
To access geospatial features
■ Overview of Accessing Data
■ Before You Access Your Data
■ Accessing Geospatial Features
■ Accessing Drawing Objects
■ Accessing Raster Data
■ Accessing Attribute Data
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats
■ Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data
Overview of Feature Sources
A feature is the spatial description of a real-world entity such as a road, a utility
pole, or a river. Features are stored in a spatial database or file. The spatial
database or file is referred to as a feature source.
The feature source could be a database (such as Oracle, ArcSDE, SQL Server,
or MySQL), a file-based feature source (such as SDF or SHP), a Webserver (such
as WFS), or a table with feature geometry (such as Microsoft Access).
To work with features, you connect to the database or file and then select the
types of features you want to include in your drawing. Each type of feature is
called a feature class. Autodesk Map 3D displays all the features from the
selected features classes.
Different feature sources support different levels of locking, versioning, and
schema editing. For example, Oracle and ArcSDE support locking on the feature
level. That is, when you check out a feature, that feature is locked in the
database so no other users can edit it. Other users can view your edits and
they can edit other features in the feature source. Oracle and ArcSDE also
support persistent locking, so the object stays locked until you check it back
in.
SHP feature sources, on the other hand, support file locking. When you check
out a feature, the entire SHP file is locked. No other users can edit features
from that file until your lock is released. The lock is released when you close
the map. Even if you have features checked out, the lock is released. When
using this format, be careful to check in your changes before you close the
map.
WFS feature sources do not support editing so you don’t lock objects or create
versions.
Overview of Feature Sources | 223
The following table lists the level of locking, versioning, and schema editing
supported by each feature source type.
Feature Source Lock Level Persistent Versions Edit
Type Locking Schema
ArcSDE (page Feature Yes Yes No
229)
MySQL (page None No No Yes
233)
ODBC (page 239) File No No No
Oracle (page 226) Feature Yes Yes Yes
SDF (page 237) None No No No
SHP (page 235) File No No Yes
SQL Server (page None No No Yes
231)
WFS (page 242) N/A N/A No No
WMS (page 267) N/A N/A N/A N/A
Raster (page 261) N/A N/A N/A N/A
NOTE WMS and Raster are used to access images, not features. You cannot edit
or lock these images. For information on adding images to your map, see Accessing
Raster Data (page 261).
To access a feature source
1 Make sure your feature source is set up correctly. If you have questions,
refer to the Readme.
2 Find out your user name and password, if required.
Your CAD Manager or Database Administrator can help you with this.
224 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
3 Open the drawing where you want to include the data.
4 If you are working with data from various coordinate systems, assign a
coordinate system to the current drawing. See Assigning a Coordinate
System (page 123).
All the data you bring into this map will be converted to this current
coordinate system. If you edit the data and save it back to its source, it
will be converted back to its original coordinate system.
5 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Data.
6 In the Data Connect window, select the feature source.
7 In the right pane, enter a name for this connection and specify the
information to connect to the feature source. Click Connect.
8 In the Add Data To Map section, under Schema, select the feature classes
to include in your map.
9 If necessary, specify the coordinate system for the incoming data.
10 Click Add To Map.
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
See also:
■ To add features from an Oracle feature source (page 227)
■ To add features from an ArcSDE feature source (page 229)
■ To add features from a SQL Server feature source (page 231)
■ To add features from a MySQL feature source (page 233)
■ To add features from a SHP feature source (page 236)
■ To add features from an SDF feature source (page 238)
■ To add features from an ODBC feature source (page 239)
■ To add features from a WFS feature source (page 242)
■ Styling Features (page 401)
■ To create a theme for a feature layer (page 742)
■ To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 446)
Overview of Feature Sources | 225
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source.
Menu Map 3D for Geospatial workspace ➤ File ➤ Data
Connect
Icon
Connect
Command Line MAPCONNECT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click and click Data ➤ Add
Data
Select Checked-Out Features
Selects features that have been checked out to edit
Menu In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace: Edit ➤ Select
Checked-Out Features
Icon
Select Checked-Out Features
Command Line MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer
Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source
When you view and edit features from an Oracle data source, you can do the
following:
■ Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■ Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■ Style, theme, and edit the features.
■ Lock individual features when you check then out for editing.
■ Keep features checked out and locked even when you close your drawing.
Features are not checked back in and unlocked until you specify.
226 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
■ Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■ Create versions of your data. When you create a version, you create a copy
of the data in the data source. Your changes are made to the new version
of the data. This is good for proposed changes or changes that need
approval. When the changes are final, you can roll your changes up to the
original version.
■ Use a foreign data store. If your data source schema is not set up to work
with Autodesk Map 3D, Autodesk Map 3D will create a custom mapping
so you can use the data in your map.
■ View and edit the schema definition.
NOTE You can customize this provider. The API has custom commands for
gathering information about a provider, transmitting client services exceptions,
getting lists of accessible data stores, creating connection objects, and creating
and dropping spatial indexes. For more information, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for Oracle API Reference.
To add features from an Oracle feature source
1 Make sure your feature source is set up correctly. For a list of issues, refer
to the Readme.
2 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Data.
3 In the Data Connect window, select Oracle in the Feature Sources list.
4 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
5 Under Service Name, enter the service name for the Oracle data store. If
you do not know this name, check with your System Administrator.
6 In the Credentials area, enter your user name and password.
Optionally, select Remember Password if you want Autodesk Map 3D to
remember this user name and password and log you in whenever you
open this drawing.
7 Under Data Store, enter the data store name. If you do not know this
name, check with your System Administrator.
To select from a list of data stores, click the down arrow.
Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source | 227
NOTE If the data store is not in the list, it may not use a Autodesk Map 3D
schema. Select Show Foreign Data Stores to add these to the list. Autodesk
Map 3D will create a mapping to use these data stores with Autodesk Map
3D.
8 Optionally, select a version of the data store.
9 Click Connect.
10 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
11 Click Add To Map.
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
See also:
■ Styling Features (page 401)
■ To create a theme for a feature layer (page 742)
■ To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 446)
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source.
Menu Map 3D for Geospatial workspace ➤ File ➤ Data
Connect
Icon
Connect
Command Line MAPCONNECT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click and click Data ➤ Add
Data
228 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Using Features from an ArcSDE Feature Source
When you view and edit features from an ArcSDE data source, you can do the
following:
■ Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■ Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■ Style, theme, and edit the features.
■ Lock individual features when you check then out for editing.
■ Keep features checked out and locked even when you close your drawing.
Features are not checked back in and unlocked until you specify.
■ Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■ Create versions of your data. When you create a version, you create a copy
of the data in the data source. Your changes are made to the new version
of the data. This is good for proposed changes or changes that need
approval. When the changes are final, you can roll your changes up to the
original version. Note that if you want to use this feature, you must have
versioning support turned on in your database.
■ View the schema definition.
NOTE If you want to use long transactions, make sure this is set in the data store.
NOTE For information on customizing this provider, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for ArcSDE API Reference.
To add features from an ArcSDE feature source
1 Make sure your feature source is set up correctly. For a list of issues, refer
to the Readme.
2 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Data.
3 In the Data Connect window, select ArcSDE in the Feature Sources list.
4 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
Using Features from an ArcSDE Feature Source | 229
5 Under Servere Name and Instance Name, enter the information for the
ArcSDE database. If you do not know the name, check with your System
Administrator.
6 In the Credentials area, enter your user name and password.
Optionally, select Remember Password if you want Autodesk Map 3D to
remember this user name and password and log you in whenever you
open this drawing.
7 Under Data Store, enter the database name. If you do not know this name,
check with your System Administrator.
To select from a list of databases, click the down arrow. Autodesk Map
3D connects to the specified server and instance and lists the avaible
databases.
8 Optionally, select a version of the database.
9 Click Connect.
10 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
11 Click Add To Map.
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
See also:
■ Styling Features (page 401)
■ To create a theme for a feature layer (page 742)
■ To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 446)
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source.
Menu Map 3D for Geospatial workspace ➤ File ➤ Data
Connect
Icon
Connect
230 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Command Line MAPCONNECT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click and click Data ➤ Add
Data
Using Features from a SQL Server Feature Source
When you view and edit features from a SQL Server data source, you can do
the following:
■ Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■ Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■ Style, theme, and edit the features.
■ Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■ View and edit the schema definition.
For information on creating a SQL Server data source, see Creating a New
Feature Source (page 381). For informatoin on moving SHP data into SQL Server,
to take advantage of feature-level locking and better data sharing, see Move
a SHP File to Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, or Oracle (page 52).
NOTE You can customize this provider. The API has custom commands to support
schema read/write and geospatial and non-geospatial data read/write. For more
information, refer to the FDO API Reference and the FDO Provider for SQL Server API
Reference.
To add features from a SQL Server feature source
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, select SQL Server in the Feature Sources
list.
3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4 Under Service Name, enter the information for the SQL Server data source.
If you do not know the name, check with your System Administrator.
Using Features from a SQL Server Feature Source | 231
5 In the Credentials area, enter your user name and password.
Optionally, select Remember Password if you want Autodesk Map 3D to
remember this user name and password and log you in whenever you
open this drawing.
6 Under Data Store, enter the data store name. If you do not know this
name, check with your System Administrator.
To select from a list of data stores, click the down arrow. Autodesk Map
3D connects to the specified server and instance and lists the avaible data
stores.
NOTE If the data store is not in the list, it may not use a Autodesk Map 3D
schema. Select Show Foreign Data Stores to add these to the list. Autodesk
Map 3D will create a mapping to use these data stores with Autodesk Map
3D.
7 Click Connect.
8 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
9 Click Add To Map.
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
See also:
■ Styling Features (page 401)
■ To create a theme for a feature layer (page 742)
■ To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 446)
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source.
Menu Map 3D for Geospatial workspace ➤ File ➤ Data
Connect
232 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Icon
Connect
Command Line MAPCONNECT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click and click Data ➤ Add
Data
Using Features from a MySQL Feature Source
When you view and edit features from a MySQL data source, you can do the
following:
■ Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■ Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■ Style, theme, and edit the features.
■ Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■ Use a foreign data store. If your data source schema is not set up to work
with Autodesk Map 3D, Autodesk Map 3D will create a custom mapping
so you can use the data in your map.
■ View and edit the schema definition.
For information on creating a MySQL data source, see Creating a New Feature
Source (page 381). For information on moving SHP data into MySQL, to take
advantage of better data sharing, see Move a SHP File to Microsoft SQL Server,
MySQL, or Oracle (page 52).
NOTE The MySQL architecture supports different storage engines, each with
varying characteristics and capabilities. The API has custom commands for gathering
information, transmitting exceptions, getting lists of accessible data stores, and
creating connection objects. There is support for spatial data types and spatial
query operations. For more information, refer to the FDO API Reference and the
FDO Provider for MYSQL API Reference.
To add features from a MySQL feature source
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Data.
Using Features from a MySQL Feature Source | 233
2 In the Data Connect window, select MySQL in the Feature Sources list.
3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4 Under Service Name, enter the information for the MySQL data source.
If you do not know the name, check with your System Administrator.
5 In the Credentials area, enter your user name and password.
Optionally, select Remember Password if you want Autodesk Map 3D to
remember this user name and password and log you in whenever you
open this drawing.
6 Under Data Store, enter the data store name. If you do not know this
name, check with your System Administrator.
To select from a list of data stores, click the down arrow. Autodesk Map
3D connects to the specified server and instance and lists the avaible data
stores.
NOTE If the data store is not in the list, it may not use a Autodesk Map 3D
schema. Select Show Foreign Data Stores to add these to the list. Autodesk
Map 3D will create a mapping to use these data stores with Autodesk Map
3D.
7 Click Connect.
8 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
9 Click Add To Map.
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
See also:
■ Styling Features (page 401)
■ To create a theme for a feature layer (page 742)
■ To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 446)
234 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source.
Menu Map 3D for Geospatial workspace ➤ File ➤ Data
Connect
Icon
Connect
Command Line MAPCONNECT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click and click Data ➤ Add
Data
Using Features from a SHP Feature Source
You can access existing spatial and attribute data in an ESRI SHP data store,
which consists of three separate files: SHP (shape geometry), SHX (shape
index), and DBF (shape attributes in dBASE format). Autodesk Map 3D accesses
the information in each of these files and treats each SHP and associated DBF
file as a feature class with a single geometry property.
When you view and edit features from a SHP data source, you can do the
following:
■ Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■ Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■ Style, theme, and edit the features.
■ Lock the file when you connect to it.
■ Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
■ View and edit the schema definition.
Using Features from a SHP Feature Source | 235
NOTE You can bring SHP data into your map in 2 ways:
■ Use Data Connect to view and edit the data directly in the SHP file. Use
this method to edit geometry and attributes or to style and theme the data.
For information, click the Procedure tab at the top of this Help topic.
■ Use import to bring the data into this drawing and convert it to drawing
objects. Use this method to clean the data or to create a DWG file. You
can export the objects back to SHP. For information, see Importing Maps
from Other Formats (page 332) and Exporting (page 915).
NOTE For information on customizing this provider, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for SHP API Reference.
To add features from a SHP feature source
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, select SHP in the Feature Sources list.
3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4 Under Source File Or Folder, specify the location of the file. To include
multiple files in a group, specify a folder.
Click to browse to a file. Click the folder icon to browse to a folder.
5 Click Connect.
6 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
7 Verify that the coordinate systems are correct. To change a coordinate
system, click the coordinate system and select a new one from the list.
8 Click Add To Map.
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
See also:
■ Styling Features (page 401)
■ To create a theme for a feature layer (page 742)
236 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
■ To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 446)
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source.
Menu Map 3D for Geospatial workspace ➤ File ➤ Data
Connect
Icon
Connect
Command Line MAPCONNECT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click and click Data ➤ Add
Data
Using Features from an SDF Feature Source
You can access spatial and attribute data in an SDF data store. SDF supports
spatial indexing and can store geometric and non-geometric data with
minimum overhead.
When you view and edit features from an SDF data source, you can do the
following:
■ Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■ Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■ Style, theme, and edit the features.
■ Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
■ View the schema definition.
For SDF 2 files (created for MapGuide version 6.5 or earlier), you cannot use
these procedures. Instead, import (page 374) the file.
NOTE For information on customizing this provider, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for SDF API Reference.
Using Features from an SDF Feature Source | 237
See also:
■ Importing Maps from SDF 2 (page 374)
To add features from an SDF feature source
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, select SDF in the Feature Sources list.
3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4 Under Source File, specify the file.
5 Click Connect.
6 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
7 Verify that the coordinate systems are correct. To change a coordinate
system, click the coordinate system and select a new one from the list.
8 Click Add To Map.
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
NOTE For SDF files created for MapGuide version 6.5 or earlier, you cannot use
this procedures. Instead, import (page 375) the file.
See also:
■ Styling Features (page 401)
■ To create a theme for a feature layer (page 742)
■ To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 446)
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source.
238 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Menu Map 3D for Geospatial workspace ➤ File ➤ Data
Connect
Icon
Connect
Command Line MAPCONNECT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click and click Data ➤ Add
Data
Using Features from an ODBC Feature Source
An ODBC data source, such as Microsoft Access, can contain point data such
as survey points, LIDAR data, or GPS data, which is typically specified either
by Latitude and Longitude columns or by XY coordinates.
By default, Autodesk Map 3D maps each table in the database to a “feature
class” while each column becomes a “property.”
When you view and edit data from an ODBC database, you can do the
following:
■ Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■ Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■ Style, theme, and edit the features.
■ Lock the file when you connect to it.
■ Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■ Define feature classes for any relational database table with X, Y and
optionally Z columns. Object locations are stored in separate properties in
the object definition of a feature, which is accessible through the Geometry
class property. You cannot create or destroy feature schema.
NOTE For information on customizing this provider, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for ODBC API Reference.
To add features from an ODBC feature source
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Data.
Using Features from an ODBC Feature Source | 239
2 In the Data Connect window, select ODBC in the Feature Sources list.
3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4 Under Source Type, select one of the following:
■ Data Source Name (DSN) — Use a DSN you have defined in your
Windows Control Panel. See below.
■ Connection String — The connection string specifies the driver and
path to use.
5 Under source, specify the table.
■ Data Source Name (DSN) — Click the browse button and select the
DSN.
■ Connection String — Specify the driver and path. For a Microsoft
Access database, use the format:
Driver={Microsoft Access Driver
(*.mdb)};DBQ=pathname\filename.mdb
Where pathname\filename.mdb is the complete path and filename
of the Microsoft Access database. Note the curly braces and the space
before “(*.mdb)” For more information, see the ODBC documentation
on the Microsoft Web site.
6 If required by the table, enter your user name and password.
7 Click Connect.
8 Under Add Data To Map, select the tables.
9 For each table, specify the coordinate system.
10 Specify the columns to use for point geometry. This can be lat/long or
X, Y, and Z coordinates. To specify the column name, click in the field,
then click the down arrow to choose from a list of column names.
11 Click Add To Map.
If the Add To Map button is greyed, check that you have specified the
coordinate system and X and Y columns for the table.
To create a DSN in Windows XP
1 In the Windows Control Panel, double-click Administrative Tools.
240 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
2 In Administrative Tools, double-click Data Sources (ODBC).
3 In the ODBC Data Source Administrator, click User DSN or System DSN.
A User DSN is visible only to you. A System DSN is visible to all users on
the current machine.
4 Click Add and select the driver to use.
For example, create a DSN for an Access database, select Microsoft Access
Driver.
5 In the ODBC Microsoft Access dialog box, enter information about the
data. When you finish, click OK. Click OK again to close the ODBC Data
Source Adminstrator dialog box.
The DSN you defined will appear in the DSN list in the Data Connect window.
See also:
■ Styling Features (page 401)
■ To create a theme for a feature layer (page 742)
■ To edit a feature using feature editing commands (page 446)
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source.
Menu Map 3D for Geospatial workspace ➤ File ➤ Data
Connect
Icon
Connect
Command Line MAPCONNECT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click and click Data ➤ Add
Data
Using Features from an ODBC Feature Source | 241
Using Features from a WFS Feature Source
You can access feature data in an OGC WFS-based data store. Web Feature
Service provides access to geographic features stored in a data store in a client
/ server environment. WFS allows a client to retrieve geospatial data encoded
in GML from a single or multiple Web Feature Services. The communication
between client and server is encoded in XML and if the response includes
feature geometries, it is encoded in GML.
When you view and edit features from a WFS data source, you can do the
following:
■ Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■ Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■ Style and theme features. You cannot edit features from a WFS data source.
NOTE For information on customizing this provider, refer to the FDO API Reference
and The Essential FDO.
To add features from a WFS feature source
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, select WFS in the Feature Sources list.
3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4 Under server name, specify the URL for the WFS server. Click the down
arrow to choose from a list of recently-used URLs.
5 If required, enter your user name and password.
6 Click Connect.
7 In the Add Data To Map area, select the feature classes to include.
8 For each feature class you select, verify the coordinate system.
9 Click Add To Map.
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
242 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
See also:
■ Styling Features (page 401)
■ To create a theme for a feature layer (page 742)
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source.
Menu Map 3D for Geospatial workspace ➤ File ➤ Data
Connect
Icon
Connect
Command Line MAPCONNECT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click and click Data ➤ Add
Data
Filtering a Feature Source Layer
Filter a feature source layer so that only some of the features appear in your
map.
To filter the layer, define a query condition or a set of conditions that specify
which features you want.
TIP Using the filter can help you improve performance when working with large
sets of feature data. You can filter data after you bring it into your map, or you
can cancel the Add Data operation while bringing it in and then use edit query
to apply a filter.
To filter a feature source layer
1 Make sure you are conected to the feature source for the layer.
2 In the Display Manager, right-click the layer and click Edit Query.
The Feature Source Query dialog box (page 1099) displays.
Filtering a Feature Source Layer | 243
3 If you are creating a location condition, click Zoom to zoom the drawing
window to the extents of the selected feature class.
4 Click Add and select a condition type:
■ Location — Selects all features in a location you specify. In the
Location Condition dialog box (page 1107), specify a selection type and
define a location in your drawing. You can specify whether to select
features completely within the selection area, within or crossing the
selection area, or within a specified distance of the selection area.
For example, use a location condition to find all manholes in one
section of town, or all parcels that touch a road, or all water pipes
within 100 meters of a road.
■ Property — Selects all features that have the property value you specify.
In the Property Condition dialog box (page 1109), select a property, an
operator, and a value.
For example, to select all pipes with a diameter greater than 10, specify
Diameter > 10.
The Property list displays the properties available for this feature class.
For Value, click Select to display the Property Values dialog box where
you can choose from a list of the values in the feature source.
■ Filter — Use the Feature Source Filter Language to write a condition.
In the Filter Condition dialog box (page 1100), write the condition.
5 Optionally, create additional conditions.
6 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Select Checked-Out Features
Selects features that have been checked out to edit
Menu In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace: Edit ➤ Select
Checked-Out Features
Icon
Select Checked-Out Features
Command Line MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer
244 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Accessing Drawing Objects
You can include objects in your map from the current drawing or from attached
drawings.
Each set of objects you select is stored in a layer in the Display Manager.
See also:
■ Attaching a Drawing (page 130)
To access drawing objects
■ Overview of Accessing Data
■ Before You Access Your Data
■ Accessing Geospatial Features
■ Accessing Drawing Objects
■ Accessing Raster Data
■ Accessing Attribute Data
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats
■ Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data
Overview of Selecting Objects for Your Map
Include drawing objects in your map so you can style and theme them.
Example: On a city map, select all properties that lie along a creek and color
those properties red. Find all storm sewer inlets and mark them with a large
red circle so the volunteer crews can clear them.
Select object from the current drawing and from attached drawings.
Select objects by Includes
Layer All the objects on the selected AutoCAD
layer (from the current drawing)
Object class All the objects in the selected object class
(from the current drawing)
Topology All the objects in the selected topology
(from the current drawing)
Accessing Drawing Objects | 245
Select objects by Includes
Location All the objects in the specified location
(from the current drawing, attached source
drawings, or a selected topology)
Object property All objects that have the selected property,
such as elevation, layer, or area (from the
current drawing, attached source drawings,
or a selected topology)
Attached data All objects with the specified data, such as
object data or linked records from an exter-
nal database (from the current drawing,
attached source drawings, or a selected
topology)
246 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Each set of objects is called a layer.
You can turn off layers to hide the objects on that layer.
Map Base
Objects in the current drawing that are not included in any layer are included
in the Map Base layer. You can choose to hide all objects on this layer or dim
them.
NOTE Objects from attached drawings that you have queried into the current
drawing using a standard query are added to the Map Base layer. To style these
objects separately in your map, create a query to bring them into the display.
See also:
■ Attaching Drawings (page 128)
■ Assigning Coordinate Systems (page 119)
Overview of Selecting Objects for Your Map | 247
■ Selecting Objects by Drawing Layer (page 248)
■ Selecting Objects by Object Class (page 250)
■ Selecting Objects by Topology (page 258)
■ Selecting Objects by Location (page 251)
■ Selecting Objects by Property (page 253)
■ Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data (page 255)
■ Filtering a Feature Source Layer (page 243)
Select objects using one of the following
■ To select objects by drawing layer (page 249)
■ To select objects by object class (page 250)
■ To select objects based on their location (page 252)
■ To select objects based on their properties (page 254)
■ Select objects based on object data or external (SQL) data (page 256)
■ To select objects by topology (page 258)
■ Filtering a Feature Source Layer (page 243)
■ To add a raster image to the map (page 262)
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer
Creates a new Display Manager layer
Task Pane In Display Manager, click New and then select a layer
type
Selecting Objects by Drawing Layer
When creating a map, you can create a layer that includes all the objects from
an AutoCAD layer.
248 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Example: To create a layer that includes all the fire hydrants, select the
HYDRANT AutoCAD layer.
You can organize layers into groups. Grouping layers lets you quickly turn off
the display of all the objects in the group.
TIP To select just some of the objects on an AutoCAD layer, combine conditions.
For example, select only the fire hydrants within 1000 meters of a corporation
yard. See Combining Conditions (page 259).
See also:
■ Selecting Objects by Object Class (page 250)
■ Selecting Objects by Topology (page 258)
■ Selecting Objects by Location (page 251)
■ Selecting Objects by Property (page 253)
■ Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data (page 255)
■ Filtering a Feature Source Layer (page 243)
To select objects by drawing layer
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Layer.
2 In the Select Layers dialog box, select the AutoCAD layers that include
the objects you want to display.
Autodesk Map 3D will create an layer in the Display Manager for each
AutoCAD layer you select.
3 To group the layers, select Group Selection.
If you combine the layers in a group, you can turn the display of the
group on or off.
4 Click OK.
The new layer appears in the Display Manager. All objects on the selected
AutoCAD layer are included in this layer. If you selected multiple AutoCAD
layers, then multiple layers are created in your map.
Selecting Objects by Drawing Layer | 249
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - AutoCAD Layer
Creates a new layer from AutoCAD layers in Display Manager
Task Pane In Display Manager, click New ➤ Layer
Dialog Box Select Display Element dialog box (page 1033)
Selecting Objects by Object Class
When creating a map, you can create a layer that includes all the objects in
an object class.
Example: To create a layer that includes all the primary roads, select the
PRIMARY_ROADS object class.
You can organize layers into groups. Grouping layers lets you quickly turn off
the display of all the objects in the group.
TIP To select just some of the objects in an object class, combine conditions. For
example, you could find only the primary roads in the West quadrant of the county.
See Combining Conditions (page 259).
See also:
■ Selecting Objects by Drawing Layer (page 248)
■ Selecting Objects by Topology (page 258)
■ Selecting Objects by Location (page 251)
■ Selecting Objects by Property (page 253)
■ Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data (page 255)
■ Filtering a Feature Source Layer (page 243)
To select objects by object class
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Object Class
2 In the Select Object Classes dialog box, select the object classes that
include the objects you want to display.
250 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Autodesk Map 3D will create a layer in the Display Manager for each
object class you select.
3 To group the object class layers, select Group Selection.
If you combine the layers in a group, you can turn the display of the
group on or off.
4 Click OK.
The new layer appears in the Display Manager. All objects in the selected
object class are included in this layer. If you selected multiple object classes,
then multiple layers are created.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Object Class
Creates a new object class layer in the Display Manager
Task Pane In Display Manager, click New ➤ Obeject Class
Dialog Box Select Feature Classes dialog box (page 1137)
Selecting Objects by Location
You can select all the objects in a specified location.
Example: Select all utility poles within 100 feet of a specified road or all parks
within a specified quadrant of the city.
You can select from objects in the current map, in attached drawings, or in a
topology.
TIP You can combine a location condition with other conditions to create very
specific queries. For example, you could find all parcels that are zoned Residential
and are within 500 meters of a contaminated well.
See also:
■ Selecting Objects by Drawing Layer (page 248)
■ Selecting Objects by Object Class (page 250)
■ Selecting Objects by Topology (page 258)
Selecting Objects by Location | 251
■ Selecting Objects by Property (page 253)
■ Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data (page 255)
■ Filtering a Feature Source Layer (page 243)
To select objects based on their location
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Current
Drawing, Query Source Drawings, or Query Topology.
2 In the Define Query dialog box, click Location.
3 In the Location Condition dialog box (page 1213), select a boundary to
determine the type of area to query.
Select Fence to specify a new polyline; select Polyline to use an existing
polyline.
4 Choose a selection type:
■ Inside includes only objects that are completely inside the boundary.
■ Crossing includes all objects that are inside the boundary or crossing
the boundary.
5 If you select the Polyline boundary, specify a polyline mode.
6 To define the coordinates of the boundary, click Define<, and use any
Autodesk Map 3D selection method to define the boundary.
7 Click OK.
8 Optionally, define another condition. See Combining Conditions (page
260).
9 In the Define Query dialog box, click OK.
The new layer appears in the Display Manager. Objects that meet the
conditions of the query are included in this layer.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Query
Creates a new query layer in Display Manager
252 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Task Pane In Display Manager, click New and the select a query
type
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Selecting Objects by Property
You can select all objects that have a specific property.
Example: Select all roads with a dashed linetype.
You can select from objects in the current map, or from objects in attached
drawings.
TIP You can combine a property condition with other conditions to create very
specific queries. For example, you could find all parcels that are zoned Residential
and have an elevation lower than 50. See Combining Conditions (page 259).
Additional Information
■ If an object has the property set to BYLAYER, it will be selected only if you
set the search value to BYLAYER.
Example: If you search for a DASHED linetype, you will get only objects
that have the linetype set to DASHED; you will not get objects that have
that linetype because they reside on a layer with a DASHED linetype. To
get these objects, you must set the search value to BYLAYER.
■ Custom objects will not appear in the Object Type values list until you
load the DBX module for the object.
■ Because topology information is stored in object data, use a data condition
to search for the following properties of topology objects: area, length,
perimeter, direction, direct resistance, and reverse resistance.
See also:
■ Selecting Objects by Drawing Layer (page 248)
■ Selecting Objects by Object Class (page 250)
■ Selecting Objects by Topology (page 258)
■ Selecting Objects by Location (page 251)
■ Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data (page 255)
Selecting Objects by Property | 253
■ Filtering a Feature Source Layer (page 243)
To select objects based on their properties
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Current
Drawing, Query Source Drawings, or Query Topology.
■ Query Current Drawing — Selects from objects in the current drawing.
■ Query Source Drawings — Selects from objects in active attached
drawings
To zoom to the extents of all active drawings, click Zoom Ext.
■ Query Topology — Selects from objects in a specified topology.
2 In the Define Query dialog box, click Property.
3 In the Property Condition dialog box (page 1218), select a property.
4 Select an operator.
For some properties, such as layer, the only available operator is = (equal).
5 Enter a value for the property.
To select from a list of values, click Values. For example, if you select the
layer property, click Values to display a list of layers in the drawings.
You can use wild-card characters to enter values for the following
properties: Block Name, Color, Text Style, Object Type, Group, Layer,
Feature Class, Linetype, and Plotstyle.
6 Click OK.
7 Optionally, define another condition. See Combining Conditions (page
260).
8 In the Define Query dialog box, click OK.
The new layer appears in the Display Manager. Objects that meet the
conditions of the query are included in this layer.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Query
Creates a new query layer in Display Manager
254 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Task Pane In Display Manager, click New and the select a query
type
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data
When creating a map, you can select objects based on attribute data associated
with the object, for example, object data or data in a linked external database.
Example: If you have a linked database that lists pavement surfaces, select all
objects with a gravel pavement surface.
Select from objects in the current map, or from objects in attached drawings.
TIP Combine a data condition with other conditions to create very specific queries.
For example, you could find all parcels that are zoned Residential and are within
500 yards of a contaminated well. See Combining Conditions (page 259).
Notes
■ You cannot retrieve objects based on constant block attributes.
■ For Data queries, the Database Link option tests the link data stored on
the object, not the data in the database table. To retrieve objects based on
data in the linked database table, create a SQL condition.
■ Because topology information is stored in object data, use a data condition
to search for the following properties of topology objects: area, length,
perimeter, direction, direct resistance, and reverse resistance.
See also:
■ Selecting Objects by Drawing Layer (page 248)
■ Selecting Objects by Object Class (page 250)
■ Selecting Objects by Topology (page 258)
■ Selecting Objects by Location (page 251)
■ Selecting Objects by Property (page 253)
■ Filtering a Feature Source Layer (page 243)
■ Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data (page 255)
Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data | 255
Select objects based on object data or external (SQL) data
■ To select objects based on object data (page 256)
■ To select objects based on external (SQL) data (page 257)
To select objects based on object data
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Current
Drawing, Query Source Drawings, or Query Topology.
2 In the Define Query dialog box, click Data.
3 In the Data Condition dialog box (page 1201), select the type of data to
use.
4 Specify the location of the data.
■ To retrieve objects based on object class, in the Class list, select the
object class of the objects to retrieve. Under Properties, select the
specific properties to query.
■ To retrieve objects based on object data, select the table and field to
query.
If two attached drawings have a table with the same name, Autodesk
Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you
activate.
■ To retrieve objects based on database link data, in the Link Template
list, select the link template associated with the objects you want to
retrieve. Under Key Columns, select the key column to query.
To search for objects in attached drawings, only link templates defined
in your attached drawing are displayed in the list.
■ To retrieve objects based on block attribute information, in the Blocks
list, select the block that contains the attribute tag information to
query. Under Attribute Tags, select the attribute tag to query. Or select
* in the Blocks list to see a list of all the attribute tags of all the blocks
in the active drawing.
5 Select an operator.
When you query database link data, only the = operator is available.
6 Enter the data value.
You can use wild-card characters in the Value box. For more information
about wild cards, see Wildcard Characters (page 959).
256 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
7 Click OK.
8 In the Define Query dialog box, click OK.
NOTE Before you execute a query with a SQL condition, verify that the appropriate
data source is attached and connected.
To select objects based on external (SQL) data
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Current
Drawing, Query Source Drawings, or Query Topology.
2 In the Define Query dialog box, click SQL.
3 In the SQL Link Condition dialog box (page 1228), select the link template
for the table to search.
If you chose Attached Drawings in Step 1, the link template list includes
only link templates for active attached drawings. If the link template is
not listed, verify that it is defined in the attached drawing.
4 Create a SQL condition by selecting a column, an operator, and a value.
To type the condition, click Type Condition.
5 Click Add Condition to add the condition to the Current SQL Condition
list.
6 To add more conditions, select And or Or. Create another condition.
7 When you finish building the SQL condition, click OK.
8 Optionally, define another condition. See Combining Conditions (page
260).
9 In the Define Query dialog box, click OK.
The new layer appears in the Display Manager. Objects that meet the
conditions of the query are included in this layer.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Query
Creates a new query layer in Display Manager
Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data | 257
Task Pane In Display Manager, click New and the select a query
type
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Selecting Objects by Topology
When creating a map, you can create a layer that includes all the objects in
a topology.
Example: To create a layer that includes all the objects in the Streets topology,
select the STREETS topology.
You can organize layers into groups. Grouping layers lets you quickly turn off
the display of all the objects in the group.
TIP To select just some of the objects in a topology, combine conditions. For
example, you could find only the streets with four or more lanes. See Combining
Conditions (page 259).
See also:
■ Selecting Objects by Drawing Layer (page 248)
■ Selecting Objects by Object Class (page 250)
■ Selecting Objects by Location (page 251)
■ Selecting Objects by Property (page 253)
■ Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data (page 255)
■ Creating Topologies (page 528)
To select objects by topology
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Topology.
2 In the Select Topologies dialog box, select the topologies that include the
objects to display.
Autodesk Map 3D will create a layer in the Display Manager for each
topology you select.
3 To group topology layers, select Group Selection.
258 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
If you combine the layers in a group, you can turn the display of the
group on or off.
4 Click OK.
The new layer appears in the Display Manager. All objects in the selected
topology are included in this layer. If you selected multiple topologies, then
multiple layers are created.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Topology
Creates a new topology layer in Display Manager
Task Pane In Display Manager, click New ➤ Topology
Dialog Box Select Display Element dialog box (page 1033)
Combining Conditions
You can select specific objects by combining conditions.
Example: Combine a layer condition with a location condition to find utility
lines in the West quadrant of a city.
You can select from objects in the current map, in attached drawings, or in a
topology.
See also:
■ Selecting Objects by Drawing Layer (page 248)
■ Selecting Objects by Object Class (page 250)
■ Selecting Objects by Topology (page 258)
■ Selecting Objects by Location (page 251)
■ Selecting Objects by Property (page 253)
■ Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data (page 255)
Combining Conditions | 259
To select specific objects by combining conditions
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Current
Drawing, Query Source Drawings, or Query Topology.
2 In the Define Query dialog box (page 1203), create the first condition by
clicking Query Type.
■ Location — Selects objects based on their location. Click Zoom Ext
to zoom to the extents of all active attached drawings.
■ Property — Selects objects based on an object property, such as layer,
color, or area.
■ Data — Selects objects based on object class, object properties, database
links, object data, or attributes.
■ SQL — Selects objects based on linked external data.
When you finish defining the condition, you return to the Define Query
dialog box with the condition listed in the Current Query area.
3 Before you create the next condition, select a joining operator.
■ And — Finds objects only if both conditions are true.
■ Or — Finds objects if either condition is true.
■ And Not — Finds objects only if the first condition is true and the
second condition is false.
■ Or Not — Finds objects if either the first condition is true or the second
condition is false.
4 Create the next condition by clicking Query Type.
5 Continue to create conditions.
6 To group conditions, select the first and last condition in the group. Click
Group. Conditions inside the parentheses are evaluated first.
7 When you finish defining conditions, click OK.
The new layer appears in the Display Manager. Objects that meet the
conditions of the query are included in this layer.
260 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Query
Creates a new query layer in Display Manager
Task Pane In Display Manager, click New and the select a query
type
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Accessing Raster Data
To access raster data
■ Overview of Accessing Data
■ Before You Access Your Data
■ Accessing Geospatial Features
■ Accessing Drawing Objects
■ Accessing Raster Data
■ Accessing Attribute Data
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats
■ Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data
Overview of Raster Images
When creating a map, you can add a raster image to the display.
Adding an image behind your map can give context to the map.
Accessing Raster Data | 261
Use the following raster image types in your map.
Raster Type Formats
raster-based surfaces DEM (Digital Elevation Model), ESRI Grid,
(page 264) or Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED)
2D raster (page 265) JPEG and JPEG2K (Joint Photographic Ex-
perts Group), PNG (Portable Network
Graphic), MrSID (Multi-Resolution Seamless
Image Database), TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), ECW (Enhanced Compressed
Wavelet)
WMS raster (page maps on a server
267)
Other raster formats BMP, CALS-I, FLIC, GeoSpot, IG4, IGS,
(page 271) PCX, PICT, RLC, TARGA
NOTE Layers in the map are rendered based on the order of the layers in the
Display Manager. To display drawing objects in front of the raster image, put the
raster image layer at the bottom of the list.
To add a raster image to the map
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, select Raster in the Feature Sources list.
3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4 Specify the folder that contains the image. Click the folder icon to browse
to the folder.
5 Click Connect.
6 In the Add Data To Map area, select the images to include.
7 For each image you select, specify the coordinate system and vertical
units.
262 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
NOTE Scroll the table to see these columns. Click in a field to display a down
arrow that lets you choose from a list of coordinate systems.
8 To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful if you have a series of images that you want to
combine to create a single layer; for example, you may have GeoTIFs of
each county that combine for a state map.
9 Click Add To Map.
10 If prompted, specify the location, scale, and rotation for each image. See
To specify an image insertion point (page 269).
Some image files contain placement information and are placed
automatically in your map. For images that do not contain placement
information, you are prompted for the location, scale, and insertion
point.
11 In the Display Manager, make sure the image layer is in the correct display
order.
To move the raster layer below objects and features, in the Display
Manager, click Tools ➤ List View. Move the raster layer down in the list.
Layers at the bottom of the list are rendered first, so they appear behind
other layers in the list.
To add an image format not listed above
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Raster Image.
2 In the Select Image dialog box, select the image.
3 To group the image layers, select Group Selection.
If you combine the image layers in a group, you can turn the display of
the group on or off.
4 Click OK.
Note that images added using this process cannot be styled and themed.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Raster Image
Overview of Raster Images | 263
Creates a new image layer in Display Manager
Task Pane In Display Manager, click New ➤ Raster
Dialog Box Select Display Element dialog box (page 1033)
Using Raster-Based Surfaces in Your Map
Add raster-based surfaces, such as DEM (Digital Elevation Model), ESRI Grid,
or Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED), to your map.
When you add raster-based surfaces to your map, you can create contour maps
to help you analyze 3D terrain, use raster-based theming to analyze elevation,
slope, and aspect, and drape map data over surfaces and view the data in 3D.
For more information, see Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces (page 758).
To add a raster-based surface to your map
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, select Raster in the Feature Sources list.
3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4 Specify the folder that contains your surface. Click the folder icon to
browse to the folder.
5 Click Connect.
6 In the Add Data To Map area, select the surfaces to include.
7 For each surface you select, specify the coordinate system and vertical
units.
NOTE Scroll the table to see these columns. Click in a field to display a down
arrow that lets you choose from a list of coordinate systems.
8 To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful if you have a series of images that you want to
combine to create a single layer; for example, you may have GeoTIFs of
each county that combine for a state map.
9 Click Add To Map.
264 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
The surface is added to your map.
Quick Reference
Select Checked-Out Features
Selects features that have been checked out to edit
Menu In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace: Edit ➤ Select
Checked-Out Features
Icon
Select Checked-Out Features
Command Line MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer
Using 2D Rasters
Add raster images to your map. A raster image can be an aerial photograph,
an artist’s sketch, your company logo, or any other image that you want to
display in your map.
You can add the following formats using the steps described on the Procedure
tab:
■ JPEG and JPEG2K (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
■ PNG (Portable Network Graphic)
■ MrSID (Multi-Resolution Seamless Image Database)
■ TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)
■ ECW (Enhanced Compressed Wavelet)
You can also add surface-based rasters such as DEM and ESRI Grid. See Using
Raster-Based Surfaces in Your Map (page 264).
NOTE If you use the steps described on the Procedure tab of this topic, you have
many options for styling the graphic. For formats that are not supported by this
procedure, you may not have as many styling options. For information on inserting
these other graphic formats, see Using Other Raster Image Formats (page 271)
Using 2D Rasters | 265
See also:
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces (page 758)
To add 2D rasters to your map
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, select Raster in the Feature Sources list.
3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4 Specify the folder that contains the image. Click the folder icon to browse
to the folder.
5 Click Connect.
6 In the Add Data To Map area, select the images to include.
7 For each image you select, specify the coordinate system and vertical
units.
NOTE Scroll the table to see these columns. Click in a field to display a down
arrow that lets you choose from a list of coordinate systems.
8 To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful if you have a series of images that you want to
combine to create a single layer; for example, you may have GeoTIFs of
each county that combine for a state map.
9 Click Add To Map.
10 If prompted, specify the location, scale, and rotation for each image. See
To specify an image insertion point (page 269).
Some image files contain placement information and are placed
automatically in your map. For images that do not contain placement
information, you are prompted for the location, scale, and insertion
point.
The image is added to your map.
266 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Quick Reference
Select Checked-Out Features
Selects features that have been checked out to edit
Menu In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace: Edit ➤ Select
Checked-Out Features
Icon
Select Checked-Out Features
Command Line MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer
Using an image from a WMS
Add map images from an OGC Basic Web Map Service (WMS) that provides
pictorially formatted images, such as PNG, GIF, or JPEG.
To add a WMS-based image to your map
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, select WMS in the Feature Sources list.
3 Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4 Specify the URL for the WMS server. Click the down arrow to choose
from a list of recently-used URLs.
5 If required, enter your user name and password.
6 Click Connect.
7 In the Add Data To Map area, select the images to include.
8 For each image you select, verify the coordinate system.
9 To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful if you have a series of images that you want to
combine to create a single layer; for example, you may have images of
each county that combine for a state map.
Using an image from a WMS | 267
10 Click Add To Map.
The image is added to your map.
Quick Reference
Select Checked-Out Features
Selects features that have been checked out to edit
Menu In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace: Edit ➤ Select
Checked-Out Features
Icon
Select Checked-Out Features
Command Line MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer
Specifying Image Insertion Point
If an image does not contain location information, you can specify the
insertion point and rotation of the image so that it is inserted correctly in
relation to other data. You can also adjust the scale so that it matches the
scale of the other data.
Autodesk Map 3D saves the insertion point setting with the drawing. The
changes are not saved back to the image file or to the correlation source file.
NOTE To modify the settings stored in the image file, use an image-editing
application such as Autodesk Raster Design. If you modify the original settings in
the image, you must reinsert the image to see the changes.
Specifying the Insertion Point
Setting Description
Insertion Point The insertion point values on the Source
tab use the unit specified at the bottom of
the Source tab. The insertion point values
268 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Setting Description
on the Insertion tab are translated to the
current Autodesk Map 3D drawing unit.
You can edit the settings or select an inser-
tion point in the drawing by clicking Pick
< on the Insertion tab and then picking a
location in the drawing.
Rotation Rotation is in degrees or in the units set by
the AUNITS variable. The image is rotated
around the insertion point.
Scale If the image you insert contains correlation
information, the image is inserted at the
scale specified by that information.
Otherwise, the image is inserted at a scale
factor of 1 image unit of measurement to
1 Autodesk Map 3D unit of measurement.
You can change the scale to align the im-
age with the vector geometry in the
drawing. For example, if your raster image
has a scale of 1 inch equals 50 feet or
1:600, and your Autodesk Map 3D drawing
has a scale of 1 unit equals 1 inch, enter
600 as the scale on the Insertion tab.
Density For bitmaps, the density unit used in the
image may be in dots per inch. For satellite
photos, the density may be in miles. This
unit is also used for the insertion point.
Frame Color This color is also used as the foreground
color for bitonal images. To change the
frame color, click Select on the Insertion
tab and choose a color.
To specify an image insertion point
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Data.
Specifying Image Insertion Point | 269
2 In the Data Connect dialog box, select Raster.
3 Under Connection, type a name for this image.
4 Under Source Folder, click the folder icon and browse to the folder than
contains your image.
5 Select the image and click Add To Map.
6 In the Image Insertion dialog box specify where to insert the image. You
can enter X,Y coordinates for the image or manually specify the insertion
point in the drawing. Each option is described below.
To manually insert the image
1 In the Image Insertion dialog box , on the Insertion tab, click Pick <.
An outline of the frame appears onscreen. This outline reflects the aspect
ratio of the image that you are inserting.
2 Pick the base point for the frame.
You can also type coordinates at the command line, or, if there is already
correlation data for the image, press Enter to accept the existing
coordinates.
3 Type a rotation angle or pick a point to define the rotation angle.
4 Pick the second corner point to define the size of the frame.
The Image Insertion dialog box is redisplayed with the new coordinates,
rotation, and scale.
5 Click OK to insert the image into the specified frame.
To enter the coordinates for the image insertion point
1 Specify the insertion point for the lower-left corner of the image frame.
On the Source tab, this information is in the units specified in the Units
area at the bottom of the tab. On the Insertion tab, this information is
in current drawing units.
2 Specify the rotation.
Use current drawing angle units. This value uses the lower-left corner as
the base point.
3 Specify the scale.
270 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
A scale factor > 1 enlarges the image, while a scale factor less than 1 makes
the image smaller.
For example, to make the image twice as large, type 2 in the Scale box.
4 Specify the units for insertion point and density.
For example, if your image was scanned at 300 dpi, then select Inches as
the unit.
5 Specify the frame color (on the Insertion tab).
When you insert a bitonal image, Autodesk Map 3D first looks for the
foreground color in the image header file or in a resource file. If it cannot
find the color information, then the foreground color defaults to the
current Autodesk Map 3D color.
Using Other Raster Image Formats
Use this feature to connect to raster image formats that are not supported by
Data Connect. Images attached using the following methods support a limited
set of styles.
To use other raster image formats
■ Overview of Accessing Data
■ Before You Access Your Data
■ Accessing Geospatial Features
■ Accessing Drawing Objects
■ Accessing Raster Data
■ Accessing Attribute Data
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats
■ Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data
Inserting Raster Images
Use the Raster Extension features to insert and correlate raster images.
NOTE If you are inserting large images or multiple images at once, you can set
Raster Extension memory options. See Configuring Memory Use (page 198).
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 271
To insert raster images
■ Overview of Accessing Data
■ Before You Access Your Data
■ Accessing Geospatial Features
■ Accessing Drawing Objects
■ Accessing Raster Data
■ Accessing Attribute Data
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats
■ Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data
Overview of Inserting Raster Images
Some image-editing applications, such as Autodesk® Raster Design, store
information about image location in the raster image file or an associated
correlation source file.
When you insert a raster image using the Create ➤ Insert an Image command,
Autodesk Map 3D reads coordinate correlation information and places the
image in the precise coordinate location in the drawing.
272 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Inserting a raster image into a city map. Move your cursor over the image to see the
results.
After you insert the image, you can change the image display order (page 289)
to have the features and drawing objects display on top of the image.
When you insert an image, Autodesk Map 3D links the image to the drawing
file through a path name or a data-management document ID. When you
update a linked image, the updates appear in the drawing. Because the image
itself is not included in the drawing, the image does not increase drawing size.
Once you have inserted an image, you can reinsert it multiple times treating
it as if it were a block. Each insertion has its own clip boundary and its own
settings for brightness, contrast, fade, and transparency. A single image can
be cut into multiple pieces that can be rearranged in your drawing.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 273
NOTE If you are inserting large images or multiple images at once, you can set
Raster Extension memory options. See Configuring Memory Use (page 198).
Supported Image Formats
Autodesk Map 3D supports the most common image file formats used in major
technical imaging application areas: computer graphics, document
management, and mapping and geographic information systems (GIS). Images
can be bitonal, 8-bit gray (grayscale), 8-bit color (indexed color), or 24-bit
color (true color).
Several image file formats support images with transparent pixels. When image
transparency is on, Autodesk Map 3D recognizes those transparent pixels and
allows graphics on the Autodesk Map 3D screen to show through those pixels.
(In bitonal images, background pixels can be treated as transparent.)
Transparent images can be grayscale or color.
In addition, you can select the transparent color for grayscale or color images.
Autodesk Map 3D supports the following raster file formats. Some formats,
such as SID and ECW, are supported as OLE objects and not as image files.
Autodesk Map 3D determines the file format from the file contents, not from
the file extension.
Type Description and version File extension
BMP Windows and OS/2 bitmap format .bmp, .rle, .dib
CALS-I Computer Aided Acquisition and Logis- .rst, .gp4, .mil, .cal, .cg4
tics Support
ECW Highly-compressed ER Mapper format .ecw
FLIC Autodesk digital animation format .flc, .fli
GeoSpot SPOT Image Corporation format with .bil
georeferencing information
GeoTIFF TIFF with georeferencing information .tif
IG4 Image Systems Group 4 .ig4
274 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Type Description and version File extension
IGS Image Systems Gray Scale .igs
JFIF JPEG File Interchange Format .jpg
JPEG Joint Photographics Expert Group .jpg
PCX PC Paintbrush Exchange .pcx
PICT Macintosh PICT1, PICT2 .pct
PNG Portable Network Graphics .png
RLC RLC format .rlc
SID (MrSID) Highly-compressed LizardTech format .sid
TARGA TrueVision image file format .tga
TIFF Tagged Image File Format .tif
To insert a raster image (overview)
1 Select the image (page 276) to insert.
2 Specify correlation settings (page 280) for the image.
3 Specify image density (page 285).
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Menu Create ➤ Insert An Image
Command Line MAPIINSERT
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 275
Dialog Box Insert Image dialog box (page 1239)
Inserting a Raster Image
You can insert images of many different types and formats into a drawing.
Each image has a frame (also referred to as a boundary), which is a vector
object that encloses the image.
When you insert an image into a drawing, you can preview the image, modify
the image frame and image density, and correlate the image (page 278) with
existing vector information or with a previously correlated image. You can
use correlation settings from an external file, or you can enter the settings
manually. You can also modify the correlation settings after you insert the
image (page 307).
After you insert several images, use REGEN to display the correct draw order
of the images. See Changing Image Draw Order (page 289).
To insert a raster image
1 Click Create ➤ Insert an Image.
2 In the Insert Image dialog box (page 1239), select the drive and folder that
contains the image(s).
3 In the Files Of Type box, select the file format of the image(s) to insert.
NOTE To insert more than one image type at a time, select All Images.
4 In the list of images, select the image(s) to insert.
TIP For information about an image, click Information >> to display the file
size, creation date, and other information, as well as a preview of the image.
5 To view or modify the image correlation data, select Modify Correlation.
6 Click Open.
If Modify Correlation is not selected or if you are inserting more than
one image, the Image Correlation dialog box does not appear and the
images are inserted using their default correlation information. Autodesk
Map 3D searches in this order for correlation information:
■ World file
276 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
■ Resource file (.res extension)
■ Tab file (.tab file)
■ Image file
■ Settings from the Raster Extension Options dialog box
If you selected Modify Correlation, the Image Correlation dialog box
displays. The image frame, which indicates where the image will be
inserted, is displayed in your drawing.
TIP If you cannot see the image frame, use the ZOOM or PAN commands
to bring it into view while leaving the Image Correlation dialog box open.
7 Do one of the following:
■ To insert the image using the current settings, click OK.
■ To use a different correlation source (page 280), select the correlation
source from the Correlation Source list.
■ To change the insertion point, rotation, or scale, type the appropriate
values. For more information, see To correlate an image during
insertion (page 280).
■ To resize or orient the image to existing vectors or images, click the
image frame while the Image Correlation dialog box is open.
■ To define the insertion point, rotation, and scale onscreen, select the
Insertion tab. Click Pick <. For more information, see To manually
adjust the image frame during insertion (page 281).
■ To specify the density units for the image, select the Source tab. Select
Units (page 285).
■ To change the color of the frame, select the Insertion tab. Click Select
in the Frame Color area. If Raster Extension cannot find the foreground
color information in the selected correlation source, then it defaults
to the current Autodesk Map 3D color. (To change the current color,
enter color on the command line.)
8 Click OK.
The image is inserted on the current layer and its correlation data is saved in
the drawing file. The next time you open the drawing, the image is displayed
automatically using these settings.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 277
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Menu Create ➤ Insert An Image
Command Line MAPIINSERT
Dialog Box Insert Image dialog box (page 1239)
Correlating a Raster Image During Insertion
When you insert an image, you can correlate the image with your existing
vectors or a previously correlated image. You can change the insertion point
and rotation of the image so that it is inserted correctly in relation to other
data. You can also adjust the scale so that it matches the scale of the other
data.
You can set the following options when inserting an image:
■ Correlation source
■ Insertion point (georeferencing correlation information)
■ Rotation
■ Scale
■ Density
■ Units for insertion point and density
■ Color
If you modify the correlation settings, Autodesk Map 3D saves the changes
with the drawing. The changes are not saved back to the image file or to the
correlation source file.
NOTE To modify the settings stored in the image file, use an image-editing
application such as Autodesk Raster Design. If you modify the original settings in
the image, you must reinsert the image to see the changes.
278 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Correlation Settings
■ Correlation Source — Displays available correlation sources. (See
"Correlation Sources".) If the source you want is not listed, it may not be
in the same directory as the image file or, if it is a resource (.res) file, not
on the specified resource file path.
NOTE To specify the path for resource (.res) files, click Setup menu ➤ Raster
Options and select the Paths tab.
■ Insertion Point — The insertion point is the lower left corner of the image
before any rotation is applied.
The insertion point values on the Source tab use the unit specified at the
bottom of the Source tab. The insertion point values on the Insertion tab are
translated to the current Autodesk Map 3D drawing unit.
You can edit the settings or select an insertion point in the drawing by clicking
Pick < on the Insertion tab and then picking a location in the drawing.
■ Rotation — Rotation is in degrees or in the units set by the AUNITS variable.
The image is rotated around the insertion point.
■ Scale — If the image you insert contains correlation information, the image
is inserted at the scale specified by that information.
Otherwise, the image is inserted at a scale factor of 1 image unit of
measurement to 1 Autodesk Map 3D unit of measurement. You can change
the scale to align the image with the vector geometry in the drawing. For
example, if your raster image has a scale of 1 inch equals 50 feet or 1:600, and
your Autodesk Map 3D drawing has a scale of 1 unit equals 1 inch, enter 600
as the scale on the Insertion tab.
■ Density — For bitmaps, the density unit used in the image may be in dots
per inch. For satellite photos, the density may be in miles. This unit is also
used for the insertion point.
■ Frame Color — This color is also used as the foreground color for bitonal
images. To change the frame color, click Select on the Insertion tab and
choose a color.
To see how your correlation settings translate to Autodesk Map 3D units, select
the Insertion tab. To preview the settings in the drawing, click Apply.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 279
NOTE To modify correlation settings after you insert an image use the Properties
palette.
Correlation Sources
When you insert an image, Autodesk Map 3D searches for correlation files for
the image and displays them in the Correlation Source list of the Image
Correlation dialog box. You may see the following sources listed.
■ World File (Various file extensions)
■ Resource File (.res) — You can specify an alternate location for resource
files. See Setting the Resource Files Directory (page 192).
■ Tab File (.tab)
■ Image File — For certain types of images, correlation data can be saved as
part of the image file. These file types include RLC, IG4, IGS, GeoTags in
GeoTIFF, or HDR File in GeoSPOT.
■ Default — The values that you set on the Image Defaults tab of the Raster
Extension Options dialog box.
See also:
■ Modifying the Correlation Settings for an Image (page 307)
To correlate an image during insertion
1 Insert an image (page 276)
2 In the Image Correlation dialog box (page 1236), do one or more of the
following:
■ Select a correlation source.
■ Type new coordinates for the image frame. The insertion point
represents the lower-left corner of the frame.
■ Scale the image.
For example, to make the image twice as large, type 2 in the Scale
box.
■ Rotate the image. The units of the rotation value depend on the setting
of the AUNITS system variable.
280 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
NOTE You can click on the frame while the Insert Image dialog box is
open and use the grips to move, scale, or rotate the frame.
3 Click Apply to see your changes.
4 Click OK to insert the image.
Autodesk Map 3D inserts the image on the current layer and saves its
correlation data in the drawing file. The next time you open the drawing, the
image displays using these settings.
TIP If your image is not visible, click View menu ➤ Extents.
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Menu Create ➤ Insert An Image
Command Line MAPIINSERT
Dialog Box Insert Image dialog box (page 1239)
Manually Adjusting the Image Frame During
Insertion
If you do not know the exact coordinates for the image, you can specify the
insertion point, rotation angle, and scale of the image by adjusting the frame
at the time of insertion. As you draw the frame onscreen, the program
maintains the aspect ratio of the image that you are inserting.
See also:
■ Modifying the Correlation Settings for an Image (page 307)
To manually adjust the image frame during insertion
1 Insert an image (page 276).
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 281
2 In the Image Correlation dialog box (page 1236), on the Insertion tab, click
Pick <.
An outline of the frame appears onscreen. This outline reflects the aspect
ratio of the image that you are inserting.
3 Pick the base point for the frame.
You can also type coordinates at the command line, or, if there is already
correlation data for the image, press Enter to accept the existing
coordinates.
4 Type a rotation angle or pick a point to define the rotation angle.
5 Pick the second corner point to define the size of the frame.
TIP You can use UNDO to undo a point.
The Image Correlation dialog box is redisplayed with the new coordinates,
rotation, and scale.
6 Click OK to insert the image into the specified frame.
Autodesk Map 3D inserts the image on the current layer and saves its
correlation data in the drawing file. The next time you open the drawing,
the image displays using these settings.
TIP You can select the frame and use the grips or standard Autodesk Map 3D
commands to size, move, or rotate the image while the Image Correlation dialog
box is open.
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Menu Create ➤ Insert An Image
Command Line MAPIINSERT
Dialog Box Insert Image dialog box (page 1239)
282 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Setting Image Density
For some images, the density value and units are already stored in the image
file or correlation source. If the image that you are inserting does not have
correlation information, Autodesk Map 3D uses the settings from the Image
Defaults tab in the Raster Extension Options dialog box.
You can change the density unit when you insert an image but not the density
value. You must set the default density value from the Raster Extension Options
dialog box.
■ Density — Shows the dots (or pixels) per unit for the image. If this
information was not stored with the image or the correlation source, then
Autodesk Map 3D uses the default density from the Raster Extension
Options dialog box.
■ Units — Select the units for the density from the Units list. For example,
if your image was scanned at 300 dots per inch, then select Inch as the
density unit.
Some image formats, such as GeoTIFF, GeoSPOT, and any image with a World
file for correlation source, have density units that are in real-world coordinates.
For example, a satellite photo can be based on dots-per-mile. In this case,
select Mile as the density unit.
The density unit that you specify can vary depending on what type of image
you are inserting. The following two examples explain the difference between
inserting an image that was scanned using dots per inch, and an aerial
photo/satellite photo that was saved in real-world units.
Setting Density Units for an Image That Is Not Georeferenced
The following example shows the relationship between paper scale, density
units, and insertion scale for an image that is not georeferenced (an image
that was not saved with real-world unit data). Any image that is drawn using
a scale (such as a floor plan) and captured with a scanner will likely fall into
this category.
The image in the following example was drawn at a paper scale of 1" = 48",
scanned at 300 dots per inch, then inserted into a drawing using 300 as the
density value and Inches as the density unit. Then it was scaled based on its
paper scale of 1" = 48".
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 283
The density units that you select when you insert an image that is not
georeferenced should match the units at which the image was scanned. In
this case, the units are inches because the image was scanned in dots per inch.
NOTE Remember that the scale must be based on the same units. For example,
if the scale in the original floor plan is 1" = 4', you must convert both sides to the
same unit. In this case, convert the 4 feet to inches, which is why you use 1" = 48"
as the scale factor.
Setting Density Units for an Image That Is Georeferenced
The following example shows the relationship between density units and a
georeferenced image. Because there is no paper scale to consider, you can
insert the image using the units that the image represents, such as feet or
miles, and you do not have to scale the image when you insert it.
Georeferenced images include GeoSPOT and GeoTIFF file types, and images
that use World files as their correlation source.
284 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
To change the density unit when inserting an image
1 Click Create menu ➤ Insert an Image.
2 In the Insert Image dialog box (page 1239), select the image(s) to insert.
3 Select Modify Correlation.
4 Click Open.
5 Select the Source tab. Select the units.
To set the default density value and density unit
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2 In the Import dialog box (page 1124), select the Image Defaults tab.
3 In the Density box, type a default density for images. This should be the
scanned resolution (page 1376). For example, if the majority of your images
were scanned at 300 dots per inch, then type 300.
4 In the Units box, select the default unit for the insertion point and density
of images. For example, if the majority of your images were scanned at
300 dots per inch, then select Inch.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Menu Create ➤ Insert An Image
Command Line MAPIINSERT
Dialog Box Insert Image dialog box (page 1239)
Inserting an Image from the Command Line
You can insert an image at the command line by setting the FILEDIA variable
to <0>. This feature is useful if you already have correlation data stored with
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 285
your images or if you want to use an AutoLISP routine to insert images into
your drawing.
Autodesk Map 3D uses correlation data if available, searching for a correlation
source in the following order:
■ world file
■ resource file
■ tab file
■ image file
Autodesk Map 3D uses the correlation information from the first source that
it locates. If it cannot find a correlation file, then the image is inserted using
the default insertion point information that you defined in the Raster
Extension Options dialog box. You can specify a default location for resource
files, and you can specify that Autodesk Map 3D search for correlation
information in the resource directory before checking the image directory. If
the correlation source does not include information on scale or density,
Autodesk Map 3D uses the scale and density specified on the Image Defaults
tab of the Raster Extension Options dialog box.
See also:
■ Setting the Resource Files Directory (page 192)
■ Setting Correlation Defaults (page 197)
To insert an image from the command line
1 With the FILEDIA system variable set to 0, enter MAPIINSERT at the
command line.
2 Do one of the following:
■ Type the name of the image to insert including its file extension.
If you do not specify a path to the image, then Autodesk Map 3D
searches for the image using the Project Files Search Path set in the
Files tab of the AutoCAD Options dialog box.
■ Type the path to the image, the image name, and the file extension.
Example: c:\Projects\Images\contour.rlc
Autodesk Map 3D searches for the image on the path that you specify.
If it cannot locate the image on this path, then it searches for the
image using the Project Files Search Path.
286 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
NOTE When FILEDIA is set to <0>, you can display the Insert Image dialog box
by typing a tilde (~) in response to a command prompt.
When Autodesk Map 3D locates the image, it inserts it into your drawing. If
there is correlation data stored with the image, then Autodesk Map 3D inserts
the image using this data.
TIP If you cannot see the image after you insert it, zoom to the extents of the
drawing or use the Image Management dialog box to zoom to the image (page
294).
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Menu Create ➤ Insert An Image
Command Line MAPIINSERT
Dialog Box Insert Image dialog box (page 1239)
MAPIOPTIONS
Specify default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Menu Setup ➤ Raster Options
Command Line MAPIOPTIONS
Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240)
Managing Raster Images
When you insert an image into a drawing, only information about the image
is stored in the drawing, along with a pointer to the actual image.
You can view and modify this stored information.
To manage raster images
■ Overview of Accessing Data
■ Before You Access Your Data
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 287
■ Accessing Geospatial Features
■ Accessing Drawing Objects
■ Accessing Raster Data
■ Accessing Attribute Data
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats
■ Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data
Viewing Image Information
You can view information about any image in your drawing in the following
ways:
■ The Image Management dialog box displays information about the number
of instances of an image in the drawing, the draw order of images, and
other image information.
■ The Image Information dialog box displays information about the file, the
image, properties, and correlation information.
■ The Properties palette provides access to image properties.
To display the Image Management dialog box
■ In the Map 3D For Drawings workspace, click Setup menu ➤ Image
Management.
You can click Layout to modify the columns in the Image Management dialog
box. You can hide or display topic columns, or change the order of topic
columns.
To display the Image Information dialog box
1 Click the frame of the image to select it.
NOTE If you are zoomed in and cannot see the image frame, press Shift +
left-click (page 300) to select the image.
2 Right-click the image. Click Image ➤ Information.
To display the Properties palette
1 In the drawing, select the image to modify.
288 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
2 Right-click the image. Click Properties.
Quick Reference
MAPIINFO
View file, image, object property, and correlation information about selected
images
Menu View ➤ Imaging Tools ➤ Information
Command Line MAPIINFO
Dialog Box Image Information dialog box (page 1237)
MAPIMANAGE
View a list of images in the current drawing, change drawing order, erase or
zoom to selected images
Command Line MAPIMANAGE
Dialog Box Image Management dialog box (page 1237)
Changing Image Draw Order
When you insert raster images, the images draw in the order in which you
insert them. You can change the draw order of:
■ Raster images.
■ Raster images and vector objects.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 289
You can change the draw order of images and vector objects. By sending an image to
the back, the vector objects display on top of the image. Move your cursor over the
image to see the results.
NOTE If you change the draw order and then undo the change, images may not
appear in the correct draw order. Use the REGEN command to display the correct
draw order of the images.
The following conditions affect the image draw order:
■ Image insertion order
Autodesk Map 3D uses image insertion order first. For example, if you insert
images A,B,C in that order, and then reorder them so that they are arranged
as B,C,A, then you will need to use REGEN when you open that drawing again
if you want the order to be restored to B,C,A.
Autodesk Map 3D always uses this optimization feature and applies it to the
draw order of all objects, not just to images.
■ Image selection
290 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
You can set an option to draw hatch marks over a selected image. Click Setup
menu ➤ AutoCAD Options. Select the Display tab. Under Display
Performance, set Highlight Raster Image Frame Only to off.
If Highlight Raster Image Frame Only is off, when you select an image, it rises
to the top of the display order, obscuring any vectors that cross it. Use the
REGEN command to restore the proper display order.
To change the draw order of images
1 Enter the mapimanage command.
2 In the Image Management dialog box (page 1237), select an image name
and drag it up or down in the Image column.
The current draw order is indicated in the Image column. The top image
in the list is drawn on top of all the other images and is the last drawn.
The last image in the list is drawin beneath any images that may overlap
it.
To change the draw order of images and objects
1 Select the image.
2 Click Modify menu ➤ Draw Order ➤ Bring To Front or Send To Back.
If necessary, use REGEN.
NOTE Changes made using Draw Order are reflected in the Image Management
dialog box.
Quick Reference
REGEN
Regenerates the drawing and refreshes the current viewport
Menu View ➤ Regen
Command Line REGEN
MAPIMANAGE
View a list of images in the current drawing, change drawing order, erase or
zoom to selected images
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 291
Command Line MAPIMANAGE
Dialog Box Image Management dialog box (page 1237)
Changing an Image Name
Image names are not necessarily the same as image file names. When you
attach an image to a drawing, Autodesk Map 3D uses the file name without
the file extension as the image name. You can change the image name without
affecting the name of the file.
To change an image name
1 In the Map 3D For Drawings workspace, click Setup menu ➤ Image
Management.
2 In the Image Manager dialog box, select the image name.
3 Click the image name again to edit it.
4 Enter the new name.
5 Click OK.
TIP You can also change the image name by pressing F2 while in the Image
Manager dialog box and editing the name.
Quick Reference
IMAGE
Manages images
Menu Setup ➤ Image Management
Icon
Manage Images
Command Line IMAGE
Task Pane Select an image. Right-click in drawing area
➤ Image ➤ Image Manager
292 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Creating a Search Path for Raster Images
When you insert an image, Autodesk Map 3D stores the location of the image
in the drawing file. When you open a drawing, Autodesk Map 3D searches
this stored location for the file. If the image has been moved or deleted,
Autodesk Map 3D searches the Project Files Search Path.
To create a search path
1 Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options.
2 On the Files tab, select Project Files Search Path. Click Add.
A folder named Projectx (where x indicates the next available number)
appears under Project Files Search Path.
3 Enter a name for the project.
The project name cannot contain leading spaces or terminating spaces.
4 Click Apply.
5 With the project name selected, click Set Current.
6 Click Add.
A path entry is created under the project name.
7 Enter the search path or click Browse to select a directory.
8 Click OK.
For more information about using project files and alternate search paths,
refer to PROJECTNAME in the online AutoCAD Command Reference.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Menu Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options
Command Line OPTIONS
Task Pane Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 293
Zooming to an Image
You can zoom to any image in your drawing.
To zoom to an image
1 Enter the mapimanage command.
2 In the Image Management dialog box (page 1237), select an image.
3 Right-click the image. Click Zoom To.
Quick Reference
MAPIMANAGE
View a list of images in the current drawing, change drawing order, erase or
zoom to selected images
Command Line MAPIMANAGE
Dialog Box Image Management dialog box (page 1237)
Hiding, Unloading, Detaching, and Erasing Images
When you insert an image, Autodesk Map 3D stores information about the
image in the drawing, loads the image into memory, displays it onscreen, and
locks the image file on the disk.
You can increase redrawing speed by hiding or unloading images you do not
need in the current drawing session. Hidden images are not displayed or
plotted; only their drawing boundaries are displayed. You can choose to hide
an image regardless of the current viewport coordinate system. If you no longer
need the image in the drawing, you can erase a single instance of the image
or you can detach the image to erase all instances of the image and the image
information.
Aside from locking the image file, none of these actions modify the original
image file itself.
To hide, unload, detach, and erase images
■ Overview of Accessing Data
294 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
■ Before You Access Your Data
■ Accessing Geospatial Features
■ Accessing Drawing Objects
■ Accessing Raster Data
■ Accessing Attribute Data
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats
■ Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data
Hiding an Image
When you hide an image, the image does not display onscreen, nor does it
plot. Only the image boundary displays onscreen. However, the image is still
loaded in memory, and the image file is still locked on the disk. It cannot be
deleted or modified. Hiding images is a convenient way to speed regeneration
time. You can redisplay the image when you are ready to plot.
This command is not available if you have selected more than one image. To
show or hide multiple images, use the Properties palette.
NOTE You can also control the display of images by using the LAYER command.
When you insert an image, it is inserted on the current layer, but you can move
it to another layer. You can then use the LAYER command to control the layer
visibility.
The images are also affected by other layer attributes such as whether a layer
is locked or frozen. If you are working with several images and you do not
want to modify certain images, then move those images to a separate layer
and lock the layer.
To hide an image
1 Select the image frame.
2 Right-click the image. Click Image ➤ Show Image.
To show a hidden image, follow the same steps.
NOTE You can also modify this setting on the Properties palette.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 295
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
MAPISHOWIMAGE
Hide or display a raster image
Menu Right-click a selected image frame ➤ Image ➤ Show
Image
Command Line MAPISHOWIMAGE
Unloading an Image
To conserve memory and enhance performance, unload images that you do
not need to view and/or plot.
When you unload an image, you remove the image from memory. It does not
display onscreen, nor does it plot, and it is no longer locked on the disk. Only
the image boundary displays onscreen. Information about the image, such as
its path and scale, remains in the drawing. Before you can plot the image, you
must reload it into memory.
For more information about displaying images, see Changing Image Display
Quality and Speed (page 304).
To unload an image
1 At the command prompt, enter externalreferences.
2 In the External References palette, right-click the image.
3 Click Unload.
This status is saved with the drawing when you close the drawing.
296 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Quick Reference
IMAGE
Manages images
Menu Setup ➤ Image Management
Icon
Manage Images
Command Line IMAGE
Task Pane Select an image. Right-click in drawing area
➤ Image ➤ Image Manager
Erasing an Image
When you erase an image, that instance of the image is erased from the
document. Erasing an image does not delete the image information. You can
set an option so that when the last instance of an image is erased from the
drawing, Autodesk Map 3D detaches the image, deleting the image
information.
See Choosing an Image Detach Method (page 195).
To erase an image
1 Select the image.
2 Click Modify menu ➤ Erase.
If you erase all instances of an image within a drawing, you may be
prompted to detach the image (page 298) from the drawing.
Quick Reference
ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing
Menu Modify ➤ Erase
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 297
Icon
Erase
Command Line ERASE
Task Pane Select objects to erase. Right-click in drawing area
➤ Erase
MAPIOPTIONS
Specify default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Menu Setup ➤ Raster Options
Command Line MAPIOPTIONS
Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240)
Detaching an Image
When you detach an image, all instances of the image are removed from the
drawing, the image information is deleted, and the image file is unlocked.
Detach images that you no longer need in the drawing.
To detach an image
1 In the Map 3D For Drawings workspace, click Setup menu ➤ Image
Management.
2 In the Image Manager dialog box, select the image name.
3 Click Detach.
The image is no longer linked to the drawing file, and all instances of the
image are removed from the drawing.
Quick Reference
IMAGE
Manages images
Menu Setup ➤ Image Management
298 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Icon
Manage Images
Command Line IMAGE
Task Pane Select an image. Right-click in drawing area
➤ Image ➤ Image Manager
Modifying Raster Images
Like other Autodesk Map 3D drawing objects, raster images can be copied,
moved, or clipped. You can modify an image with grip modes, adjust an image
for contrast, clip the image with a rectangle or polygon, or use an image as a
cutting edge for a trim.
Image Frames
Autodesk Map 3D inserts images into frames. A frame is a rectangular vector
object that encloses the image. When you select the frame, you create a
selection set that you can manipulate using any editing command. You can
copy, move, stretch, rotate, and scale images.
To modify raster images
■ Overview of Accessing Data
■ Before You Access Your Data
■ Accessing Geospatial Features
■ Accessing Drawing Objects
■ Accessing Raster Data
■ Accessing Attribute Data
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats
■ Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data
Selecting an Image
If an image frame is visible, you can select the image by clicking on the frame
or by drawing a crossing window around a frame edge. When you select an
image by selecting its frame, grips are displayed.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 299
You can also select an image by placing your cursor over the image and pressing
Shift + left-click. This feature is useful when you are zoomed in to the image
and you cannot see the image frame or if the image frames are turned off.
After you select an image frame, you can:
■ Right-click to display the Raster Extension shortcut menu.
■ Select a grip. Right-click to display the Autodesk Map 3D shortcut menu.
■ Manipulate the image using Autodesk Map 3D commands.
NOTE You can set an option to draw hatch marks over a selected image. Click
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options and select the Display tab. Under Display
Performance, set Highlight Raster Image Frame Only to off. If Highlight Raster
Image Frame Only is off, when you select an image, it rises to the top of the display
order, obscuring any vectors that cross it. Use the REGEN command to restore the
proper display order.
To select an image by pressing Shift + left-click
1 Position your pointer so that it is over the image or images to select.
2 Press Shift and click the left mouse button.
If you clicked more than one image, the Image Select dialog box appears.
This dialog box displays the names of all the images that are inserted into
your drawing. The image(s) that are already selected are highlighted (not
just the images that you selected by pressing Shift + left-click).
3 Click the images in the list to select. Click OK. To select all the images
in your drawing, click Select All. To clear the selection set, click Select
None.
NOTE If Shift + left-click is not working, you may need to load the Raster Extension
by using an image command such as Create ➤ Insert an Image, or you may need
to turn on the option.
To turn on the Shift + left-click option
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2 In the Raster Extension Options dialog box, select the General tab.
3 Select Shift + Left Click Image Select.
300 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
4 Click OK to exit the dialog box.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specify default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Menu Setup ➤ Raster Options
Command Line MAPIOPTIONS
Dialog Box Raster Extension Options dialog box (page 1240)
Displaying Image Frames
An image frame is a vector object that encloses each image you insert.
Hiding an image frame ensures that the image cannot accidentally be moved
or modified by a single- or double-click and prevents the frame from being
plotted or displayed. When image frames are hidden, clipped images are still
displayed to their specified frame limits; only the frame is affected. Showing
and hiding image frames affects all images attached to your drawing.
When you attach an image to a drawing, the image frame inherits the current
color, layer, linetype, and linetype scale. If the image is a bitonal image, then
the frame color and the bitonal objects are always drawn in the same color.
See also:
■ Changing How Image Frames Are Displayed (page 193)
■ Modifying Other Image Properties (page 308)
To display image frames
■ Click View menu ➤ Imaging Tools ➤ Toggle Frames.
NOTE If frames are invisible or an image is on a locked or frozen layer or a layer
that is turned off, then you cannot select the image by clicking the frame. However,
if frames are hidden but the image is on an editable layer, then you can select the
image using Shift + left-click (page 300).
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 301
Quick Reference
MAPIFRAME
Makes frames enclosing raster images, visible or invisible
Menu View ➤ Imaging Tools ➤ Toggle Frames
Command Line MAPIFRAME
Dialog Box MAPIFRAME (Image Frame command) (page 1236)
Changing Image Alignment
You can change the alignment and scale of an image. You can reference two
points in vector space and two points on a raster image to move, scale, and
rotate the image to the vector coordinates. This process performs a simple
transformation but does not rubber sheet the image.
See also:
■ Moving, Rotating, and Scaling an Object (page 611)
To change image alignment
1 On the command line, enter align.
2 Select the image and press Enter.
3 Specify a first source point on the image and a first destination point in
the drawing.
4 Specify a second source point on the image and a second destination
point in the drawing.
5 Press Enter.
6 To scale the image, type y (Yes) and press Enter.
The image aligns with the drawing according to the reference points you
specified.
302 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Quick Reference
ALIGN
Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D
Command Line ALIGN
Adjusting Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade
When you adjust image brightness, contrast, and fade in Autodesk Map 3D,
the changes you make affect the display of the image as well as the plotted
output, but do not affect the original raster image file. Adjust brightness to
darken or lighten an image. Adjust contrast to make poor-quality images easier
to read. Adjust fade to make vectors easier to see over images or to create a
watermark effect in your plotted output.
NOTE Bitonal images cannot be adjusted for brightness, contrast, or fade. Bitonal
images fade to the current screen background when displayed, and fade to white
(the color of most paper) when plotted.
To adjust brightness, contrast, and fade
1 On the command line, enter imageadjust.
2 Select the image to modify. Press Enter.
3 In the Image Adjust dialog box, specify the settings you want:
■ To adjust brightness or contrast, use the Brightness or Contrast slider
bar.
■ To adjust image fade, use the Fade slider bar.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 303
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Changing Image Display Quality and Speed
Changing Image Display Quality
You can change image display quality. Draft-quality images may appear more
grainy, but they display more quickly than high-quality images. Changing
the image display quality setting affects all images attached to your drawing.
Hiding Images
You can hide an image. Hidden images are not displayed or plotted; only the
drawing frame is displayed. You can choose to hide an image regardless of the
current viewport coordinate system.
Clipping Images
You can clip the image so that only the parts of the image you want visible
are displayed. To display more than one piece of the image, create additional
insertions of the image, each with a different clip boundary.
See also:
■ Hiding, Unloading, Detaching, and Erasing Images (page 294)
■ Changing Image Display Quality (page 194)
To change image display quality
1 On the Command line, enter imagequality.
2 Type d (draft) or h (high). Press Enter.
304 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
To hide a drawing or show clipped images
1 Click the frame of the image(s) to change.
NOTE If you are zoomed in and cannot see the image frames, press Shift +
left-click to select the image(s).
2 Right-click the image. Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, select one of the display options.
■ Select Show Image and set it to No if you do not want to display the
image.
■ Select Show Clipped and set it to Yes to display any clip boundaries
you have made on an image using the IMAGECLIP command.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Making an Image Transparent
You can make all pixels of a specific color in a grayscale or color image
transparent. (The transparency color of a bitonal image is always the
background color of the image.) This is useful if you want to overlay two
images or place an image in front of objects.
This option is not available if the image is currently unloaded or if the Raster
Extension is not loaded. To load the Raster Extension, use an image command,
such as Create ➤ Insert an Image.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 305
NOTE The transparency color is stored in the drawing as an Autodesk Map 3D
custom object. If you send the drawing to other users, they can see the
transparency color only by opening the drawing in Autodesk Map 3D or Autodesk
Raster Design. If they open the drawing in AutoCAD, they see a message that
AutoCAD cannot reference the custom object and will not display the transparent
color.
To make an image transparent
1 Select the image.
2 Right-click the image. Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, select Transparency.
4 Click the down arrow at the right of the box and select Yes.
You must now specify which color will be transparent.
To change the color that is transparent
1 Zoom in close to the image so that you can accurately select the color.
2 Click the image frame.
NOTE If you are zoomed so you cannot see the image frame, press Shift +
left-click to select the image.
3 Right-click the image. Click Properties.
4 In the Properties palette, select Transparency Color.
If Transparency Color doesn't appear in the Properties palette, the image
may not be loaded or the Raster Extension may not be loaded. To load
the image, select the image. Right-click the image. Click Image ➤ Show
Image. To load the Raster Extension, choose an image command, for
example, Create ➤ Insert an Image.
NOTE You can choose the transparency color for grayscale and color images.
In bitonal images, the transparency color is always the background color of
the image.
5 Click to display the Transparency Color dialog box.
6 Click Select and pick the desired color on the image. Click OK.
306 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
7 To turn on transparency, select Transparency in the Properties palette
and set it to Yes.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Modifying the Correlation Settings for an Image
You can specify a precise location for an image.
NOTE When you change the insertion point values, Autodesk Map 3D repositions
the image in the drawing and saves the settings in the drawing. However, these
correlation changes are saved only in the drawing and are not saved back to the
original image file. To change the original correlation information in the image
file, use an image-editing application such as Autodesk Raster Design.
To modify the correlation settings for an image
1 Select the image.
2 Right-click the image. Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, do one of the following:
■ To move the image, type new coordinates in the Position X, Y, and
Z boxes. This insertion point represents the lower-left corner of the
image frame before any rotation is applied.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 307
■ To rotate the image, type a new value in the Rotation box. The units
of the rotation value depend on the units that the drawing is using.
Autodesk Map 3D rotates the image around the insertion point.
■ To scale the image, type a new value in the Scale box. For example,
to make the image twice as large, type 2 in the Scale box.
4 Close the Properties palette.
TIP You can also click the Pick icon to adjust the frame (page 281) location and
size.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Modifying Other Image Properties
Use the Properties palette to modify image properties such as the following:
■ Frame color, layer, linetype, and linetype scale
■ Image brightness, contrast, and fade
■ Location
■ Rotation, width, height, and scale
■ Image transparency and transparency color
The settings apply only to the selected images.
308 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Rotation is in degrees (or the units set by the AUNITS system variable); scale,
width, and height are based on the unit of measurement used in the drawing.
When you insert an image, it is inserted on the current AutoCAD layer. Since
Autodesk Map 3D controls the visibility and behavior of the layers, you can
move an image to another AutoCAD layer to take advantage of the layer
properties. For example, if you want to display images, but you do not want
to edit them, move the images to an AutoCAD layer and lock the layer.
To modify image properties
1 Click the frame of the image(s) to change.
NOTE If you are zoomed in and cannot see the image frames, press Shift +
left-click to select the image(s).
2 Right-click the image. Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, select the property to modify. For example:
■ Color — Select a color or click Select Color to display the Select Color
dialog box.
Select the desired color or select ByLayer to set the frame color of the
image to the color of the layer it is on. The frame color is also the
foreground color for bitonal images.
Click OK to apply the new color to the selected image(s).
■ Layer — Select the AutoCAD layer to which you want to move the
image(s).
■ Linetype — Select a linetype for the image frame(s). Select any linetype
that is loaded in your drawing or select ByLayer to use the linetype
defined for that layer.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 309
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Clipping an Image
By clipping an image, you can display and plot only a portion of the image.
The clipping boundary can be a rectangle or a two-dimensional polygon with
vertices constrained to lie within the boundaries of the image. Multiple
instances of the same image can have different clipping boundaries.
310 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Image Clip lets you show only the part of an image you require. Move your cursor over
the image to see the clipped portion of the image.
You can display a clipped image using the clipping boundary, or you can hide
the clipping boundary and display the original image boundaries.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 311
NOTE To clip an image, the image boundary must be visible. See Displaying
Image Frames (page 301).
A clip boundary is a display-only feature that you can use for viewing and
plotting purposes. It does not permanently change image data. When you
delete a clipping boundary, the original image boundary is restored. To
permanently clip the image, use an image-editing application such as Autodesk
Raster Design.
To clip an image
1 Type IMAGECLIP at the command line.
2 Select the image (page 300) to clip. You can only clip one image at a time.
3 Press Enter or type n to create a new clip boundary.
4 Type r to create a rectangular boundary, or type p to create a polygonal
boundary.
5 Pick the points to define the clip boundary. You must pick at least three
points to define a polygonal boundary.
To restore the image, use the IMAGECLIP command and type OFF.
You can modify the clip boundary by defining a new boundary for the image
or by using object grips.
You can also choose to show or hide clip boundaries by changing the image
display properties (page 304) in the Properties palette.
Quick Reference
IMAGECLIP
Creates new clipping boundaries for an image object
Icon
Clip Image
Command Line IMAGECLIP
Task Pane Select an image. Right-click in drawing area
➤ Image ➤ Clip
312 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Accessing Attribute Data
Attribute data is additional data about a feature or object. For example, if you
have a map of parcels, you might have additional data from the assessor’s
department listing owner name and lot improvements.
■ When working with features, attribute data can be included in your feature
source.
■ When working with objects, you must attach the data to the map and link
the attribute data to objects in the drawing.
You can view and edit attribute data from within your map, and you can style
your map based on the data.
To access attribute data
■ Overview of Accessing Data
■ Before You Access Your Data
■ Accessing Geospatial Features
■ Accessing Drawing Objects
■ Accessing Raster Data
■ Accessing Attribute Data
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats
■ Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data
Viewing Attribute Data for Spatial Features
Use the Data Grid to view attribute data in your feature source. The Data Grid
displays both spatial data and attribute data from your feature source.
Accessing Attribute Data | 313
You can search and theme features based on any data in the feature source.
To view data using the Data Grid
1 Connect the feature source to your map.
See Accessing Geospatial Features (page 222).
2 In Map Explorer, select the table and click to open the Data Grid
window.
Quick Reference
Select Checked-Out Features
Selects features that have been checked out to edit
Menu In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace: Edit ➤ Select
Checked-Out Features
Icon
Select Checked-Out Features
314 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Command Line MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer
Using Attribute Data with Drawing Objects
Link attribute data to objects in your drawing.
To use attribute data with drawing objects
■ Overview of Accessing Data
■ Before You Access Your Data
■ Accessing Geospatial Features
■ Accessing Drawing Objects
■ Accessing Raster Data
■ Accessing Attribute Data
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats
■ Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data
Linking Database Records to Objects
You can link objects in your drawings to records in an external database.
To link attribute data to drawing objects
■ Overview of Accessing Data
■ Before You Access Your Data
■ Accessing Geospatial Features
■ Accessing Drawing Objects
■ Accessing Raster Data
■ Accessing Attribute Data
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats
■ Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data
See also:
■ Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings (page 161)
Using Attribute Data with Drawing Objects | 315
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects
You can create a link between a record in an external database and an object
in your drawing. Once the link exists, use the information in the database to
help you analyze, select, and display objects in your drawing.
Example: Link property ownership data to a map of a housing development.
Select records based on property value and highlight all objects linked to those
records. Alternately, select all the houses in a specified area and highlight
records that are linked to the selected houses.
Linking records takes two steps:
■ Create a link template for each database. The link template specifies which
column in the database table to use as a key column.
■ Link specific objects to specific records in the table.
When you link a record from a database to an object in your drawing, Autodesk
Map 3D stores link data on the object.
To link records to objects
1 Before you can link a database record to an object, you must attach the
data source to the drawing (page 164) and create a link template for the
table (page 319).
2 Create links using one of the following methods:
■ Manually link a specific record to a specific object (page 322).
■ Link objects automatically based on text or blocks in the drawing
(page 324).
■ Convert existing object data to a linked database table (page 326).
3 If necessary you can edit the link (page 328).
See also:
■ Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings (page 161)
316 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Quick Reference
ADEGENLINK
Automatically links objects to object data or external database records
Menu Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Generate
Links
Command Line ADEGENLINK
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link template
➤ Generate Links
Dialog Box Generate Data Links dialog box (page 1182)
(Data View) Link Records to Objects
Links the selected records to objects in your drawing
Menu In the Data View: Links ➤ Link Records To Objects
Icon
Link Records to Objects
MAPDELETELINKS
Deletes database links from objects
Menu Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Delete Links
Command Line MAPDELETELINKS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ Delete
Links
Dialog Box Select Link Templates dialog box (page 1077)
MAPLINKMANAGER
Edits the link data attached to an object
Menu Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Link Manager
Command Line MAPLINKMANAGER
MAPOD2ASE
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Using Attribute Data with Drawing Objects | 317
Menu Setup ➤ Convert Object Data To Database Links
Command Line MAPOD2ASE
Dialog Box Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box
(page 1068)
Creating a Link Template
A link template specifies how to link objects in a drawing to records in a
specific database table.
A link template specifies the name of the database table and the key columns
to use to uniquely identify each record.
The link template is stored in the current drawing.
NOTE Before you create a link template, make sure the data source for the table
is currently attached (page 164) and connected (page 168).
318 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
To create a link template
1 In Map Explorer, right-click the table and click Define Link Template.
2 In the Define Link Template dialog box, type a name for the link template.
3 Under Key Selection, select the column to use as the key by clicking the
check box in the Key column.
Autodesk Map 3D uses the value in the key column to uniquely identify
a record, so select a column or a combination of columns that contains
a unique value for each record in the database.
4 Click OK.
NOTE If the link template does not immediately appear on the Map Explorer tab
of the Task Pane, right-click a blank space in Map Explorer. Click Refresh.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Define Link Template
Creates a new link template
Menu In the Data View: Links ➤ Define Link Template
Icon
Define Link Template
Dialog Box Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT)
(page 1071)
MAPDEFINELT
Defines a link template for a database table
Menu Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Define Link
Template -or- In the Data View: Links ➤ Define Link
Template
Icon
Define Link Template
Command Line MAPDEFINELT
Using Attribute Data with Drawing Objects | 319
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source table or
query ➤ Define Link Template
Dialog Box Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT)
(page 1071)
Opening a Linked Database Table
Once you have a defined a link template for a table, you can open the table
as a linked table. When a table is opened as a linked table, Autodesk Map 3D
tracks the relationship between the records in the table and the objects in
your drawing.
To open a linked database table
■ In Map Explorer, double-click a link template. Depending on the data
source option setting, the linked table opens in either Edit mode or View
mode. If the table is write-protected, it opens in View mode. Queries always
open in View mode.
■ To open a table in View mode, right-click the link template. Click View
Linked Table.
Quick Reference
MAPBROWSELINK
Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to edit in the
Data View
Menu Edit ➤ More External Records Options ➤ Edit Linked
Table
Command Line MAPBROWSELINK
Task Pane Double-click a link template
Dialog Box Select Link Template dialog box (page 1077)
MAPVIEWLINK
Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to view in the
Data View
320 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Menu Edit ➤ More External Records Options ➤ View Linked
Table
Command Line MAPVIEWLINK
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ View
Linked Table
Dialog Box Select Link Template dialog box (page 1077)
Manually Linking Database Records to Objects
You can create a link between an object in the drawing and a record in a
database table. You cannot create a link to a feature from a feature source.
You cannot create links for nongraphical objects such as layers and linetypes.
Link Data
When you create a link, link data is stored on the object. The link data has
two parts: the name of the link template to use, and the actual value to search
for in the key column. The record with the matching key value is linked to
the object.
Using Attribute Data with Drawing Objects | 321
NOTE To link records to objects, you must first define a link template for the table
(page 318), and you must open the table as a linked table (page 320).
NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features
from a feature source.
To manually link a record to an object
1 Open a linked database table in the Data View.
2 In the Data View window, select a record.
3 In the Data View, click Links menu ➤ Link Records To Objects, or from
the toolbar click
4 Select the objects in your drawing. Press Enter.
NOTE If you are linking data to a polygon and plan to use the data with
topology functions, be sure to link the data to the centroid of the polygon.
Topology functions do not use data linked to the polygon border.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Link Records to Objects
Links the selected records to objects in your drawing
Menu In the Data View: Links ➤ Link Records To Objects
Icon
Link Records to Objects
Automatically Linking Database Records to
Objects
If information in your drawing, such as object data, text, or block attribute
data, matches information in a database table, you can automatically create
links from each selected object to a matching record in the database table.
322 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
For example, if each parcel in a parcel map has attached object data that
contains the parcel ID, you can automatically link each parcel to the correct
record in a database of parcel information.
Or if you have district code stored as block attribute data and also have a table
that has a column for district codes, you can automatically link each code in
the map to the corresponding record in the table.
If no matching record is found in the database table, you can set an option
to create the record.
If you are using block or text, you can set an option to use the insertion point
point of the block or text as the label point for the object.
See also:
■ Defining the Text Insertion Point (page 614)
■ Converting Object Data to Database Links (page 326)
NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features
from a feature source.
Before you begin, be sure you have defined a link template (page 319) for the
database you want to use, and the objects you want to link are accessible. You
cannot create links to objects on layers that are locked, frozen, or turned off.
Using Attribute Data with Drawing Objects | 323
To automatically link records to objects using object data
1 In the Map 3D For Drawing Objects workspace, click Setup menu
➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
2 In the Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box (page 1068), under
Source Object Data Table, select an object data table.
3 Select Remove Data From Objects Processed to delete the object data after
creating the link.
4 Under Target Link Template, select Link Object Data To Database.
5 Click Define to specify the link template.
6 In the Select Existing Link Template dialog box (page 1076), under Link
Template, select an available link template.
7 For each key field in the link template, select a field in the object data
table.
8 Select a Database Validation option:
■ None — Creates links without checking to see if a matching record
exists in the table
■ Link Must Exist — Creates a link only if the value in the drawing
matches the key field value of an existing record. If no record has a
matching value, a link is not created for that object.
■ Create If New — Creates a new record in the table if no existing record
has a matching value.
9 Click OK.
10 In the Convert Object Data To Database Links dialog box, specify how
you want to select objects with attached object data.
You can select objects automatically or manually, and you can use a filter
to restrict selection to specified layers.
11 Click Proceed.
To automatically link records to objects using text or block attribute data
1 In the Map 3D For Drawing Objects workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
Link Template Options ➤ Generate Links.
2 In the Generate Data Links dialog box, select a linkage type.
324 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
3 Under Data Links, select Create Database Links.
4 Select a link template.
If you are creating links to enclosed text, select a link template that has
only one key field.
5 If you are creating links to blocks or enclosed blocks, select the name of
the block.
For each key field in the link template, select a tag from the block
attribute. You can assign a tag to only one key field.
6 Select a Database Validation option.
7 If you want, select Use Insertion Point As Label Point.
8 Click OK.
9 Enter a to use all blocks or text objects, or enter s to select block or text
objects.
Quick Reference
MAPOD2ASE
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Menu Setup ➤ Convert Object Data To Database Links
Command Line MAPOD2ASE
Dialog Box Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box
(page 1068)
ADEGENLINK
Automatically links objects to object data or external database records
Menu Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Generate
Links
Command Line ADEGENLINK
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link template
➤ Generate Links
Dialog Box Generate Data Links dialog box (page 1182)
Using Attribute Data with Drawing Objects | 325
Converting Object Data to Database Links
You can convert object data into linked records in an external database table.
You can do one of the following
■ Create a new table in an existing data source. For the new link template,
you can use an existing field as the key field, or you can have Autodesk
Map 3D create a new field and assign a unique value to each record.
■ Add the data to an existing database table.
Field Names in the New Table
By default, the fields in the new database table have the same names as the
fields in the object data table. Autodesk Map 3D resolves any conflicts in the
following ways:
■ Truncates fields that are too long and adds an incremental digit to the
resulting duplicate field names
■ Replaces unsupported characters in a field name with an underscore (_)
■ Converts unsupported field types to character
■ Converts point fields to a character string and separates coordinates with
commas
In addition, if you have object data that matches information in a database
table, you can automatically create links from each selected object to a
matching record in the database table. For more information, see Automatically
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 322).
If you plan to create a new table in an existing data source, make sure the
appropriate data source is attached.
NOTE During the conversion, field names in the object data table become field
names in the database table. Make sure that the field names in your object data
table are not SQL reserved words such as DATE, SELECT, or CURRENT. If necessary,
rename the fields in your object data table before you convert it.
To convert object data to a linked database table
1 In the Map 3D For Drawing Objects workspace, click Setup menu
➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
326 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
2 In the Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box (page 1068), under
Source Object Data Table, select an object data table.
3 Select Remove Data From Objects Processed to delete the object data after
creating the link.
4 Under Target Link Template, select Convert Object Data To Database.
5 Click Define to specify the link template.
6 In the Define Link Template dialog box, select an available data source.
Click Connect.
7 Enter a table name.
8 Specify the fields to use as key fields (columns). To enter more than one
field name, separate names with a comma.
To select from a list of field names in the object data table, or to rename
the fields, click Select to display the Select Link Template Key(s) dialog
box.
You can use an existing object data field as the key column or create a
new field. If you select Generate Key Field, specify a name for the field
in the Generate Key area. Autodesk Map 3D sets the first record in the
database table to 1, and increments each subsequent record by 1. Click
OK to close the Select Link Template Key(s) dialog box.
9 In the Define Link Template dialog box, enter a name for the link template
and click OK.
The link template stores the address of the database table and the name
of the key field. Accept the default or enter a new unique name.
10 In the Convert Object Data To Database Links dialog box, specify how
you want to select objects with attached object data.
You can select objects automatically or manually, and you can use a filter
to restrict selection to specified layers.
11 Click Proceed.
Autodesk Map 3D converts the object data into linked database tables.
Quick Reference
MAPOD2ASE
Using Attribute Data with Drawing Objects | 327
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Menu Setup ➤ Convert Object Data To Database Links
Command Line MAPOD2ASE
Dialog Box Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box
(page 1068)
Editing Database Links
To link an object to a different record in a database table, you can either delete
the old link and create a new link, or you can edit the link data stored on the
object.
The link data specifies the following:
■ the link template for the database table
■ the link value for the record
The object is linked to the record in the database table where the value in the
key column matches the link value on the object. If you edit the link value,
you link the object to a different record in the table.
Example: You have a database table with a record for each piece of equipment.
The link template for the database specifies the serial number column as the
key column. If you replace a piece of equipment, you need to edit the link
value on the object in the drawing to reflect the new serial number. This links
the object to the record with the new serial number.
Editing Linked Objects
If you move, copy, or delete a linked object, the link data is moved, copied,
or deleted with it. Deleting the object and its link data does not affect the data
in the database table.
You can also delete the link from the object.
To edit or delete a database link
1 In the Map 3D For Drawing Objects workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
Link Template Options ➤ Link Manager.
2 Select the object whose link you want to edit.
328 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
3 In the Link Manager dialog box, review or edit the link data.
4 To modify link data, click the value you want to edit. Type a new value,
or click… to select from a list of values in the database.
5 To delete a link, click the link template and click Delete.
6 When you finish, click OK.
To delete links for a group of objects
1 In the Map 3D For Drawing Objects workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
Link Template Options ➤ Delete Links.
2 Select the object or objects whose links you want to delete.
3 In the Select Link Templates dialog box, select the link templates whose
links you want to delete from the objects.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPDELETELINKS
Deletes database links from objects
Menu Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Delete Links
Command Line MAPDELETELINKS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ Delete
Links
Dialog Box Select Link Templates dialog box (page 1077)
MAPLINKMANAGER
Edits the link data attached to an object
Menu Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Link Manager
Command Line MAPLINKMANAGER
Using Attribute Data with Drawing Objects | 329
Editing a Link Template
If you rename a database table or change the location of the database, you
must edit the link template associated with that database table.
When you edit a link template, all objects in the drawing that reference the
link template use the new information.
If you no longer use a link template in a drawing, you can delete the link
template from the current drawing. When you delete a link template, all links
that reference that link template are deleted from the drawing.
NOTE The procedure below edits the link template in the active drawing. It does
not update the asi.ini file, source drawings, or other drawings that use this link
template.
To edit the database path in a link template
1 In the Map 3D For Drawing Objects workspace, click Setup menu ➤ Edit
Link Template Properties.
2 Select the link template. Click OK.
3 In the Link Template Properties dialog box (page 1074), select a new data
source, catalog, schema, or table.
4 Click OK.
5 On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click. Click Refresh.
To delete a link template
1 In the Map 3D For Drawing Objects workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
Link Template Options ➤ Delete Link Template.
2 In the Select Link Template dialog box, select the link template. Click
OK.
Quick Reference
MAPDELETELT
Deletes a link template
330 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Menu Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Delete Link
Template
Command Line MAPDELETELT
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ Delete
Link Template
Dialog Box Select Link Template dialog box (page 1077)
MAPPROPSLT
Edits the database table name or location in a link template
Menu Setup ➤ Edit Link Template Properties
Command Line MAPPROPSLT
Storing Attribute Data in the Drawing (Object
Data)
Object data is attribute data that is attached to individual objects and stored
in tables in the drawing. To use object data, first define the format for the
table, and then create each record as you attach it to an object.
For information on object data, see the following:
■ Setting Up Object Data (page 157)
■ Entering and Editing Object Data (page 697)
■ Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data (page 255)
To store attribute data in the drawing (object data)
■ To create an object data table (page 158)
■ To attach data to an object (page 698)
■ To select objects based on object data (page 256)
Using Attribute Data with Drawing Objects | 331
Importing Maps from Other Formats
You can import maps from other formats into Autodesk Map 3D. You can
import not only the objects themselves, but also data and display options
associated with the objects. In addition, you can specify an import area to
determine which area of the map will be imported, assign incoming objects
to existing object classes, and automatically perform a coordinate conversion
on the objects as they are imported.
Only one file can be imported at a time. However, you can use a command
script to import a series of files using prespecified options for the translation.
See also:
■ Exporting (page 915)
■ Digitizing Maps (page 1017)
To import maps from other formats
■ Overview of Accessing Data
■ Before You Access Your Data
■ Accessing Geospatial Features
■ Accessing Drawing Objects
■ Accessing Raster Data
■ Accessing Attribute Data
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats
■ Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data
See also:
■ Supported Formats (page 337)
Overview of Importing
During import, Autodesk Map 3D copies objects from the input file into the
active Autodesk Map 3D drawing.
Before you import a file, determine the following:
■ You can limit the import to the current display area or to an area that you
define.
332 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
■ You can put objects on a specific existing layer, on a new layer, or on a
layer specified in data stored in the input file.
■ Determine which incoming data values you want to use to populate the
object class data fields, and decide how you want to handle data values
that don't fall within the acceptable object class range (keep them as is or
assign them default object class values).
■ Assign a coordinate system to the current Autodesk Map 3D drawing. You
need to know which coordinate system is used with the input files.
■ Determine whether to import the data as object data or as external data,
and whether to use an existing table or create a new one.
■ Import point objects as points, text, or blocks. If blocks, be sure you've
copied the block you want into the Autodesk Map 3D drawing.
For information on specific formats, see the following:
■ ArcView ShapeFile (page 337) (often referred to as an ESRI ShapeFile or ESRI
Shape)
■ Arc/INFO Coverages (page 339)
■ GML (Geography Markup Language) (page 342) (GML V2 and Ordnance
Survey of Great Britain MasterMap GML V2)
■ MapInfo MIF/MID (page 344)
■ MapInfo TAB (page 346)
■ MicroStation DGN Versions 7 and 8 (page 347)
■ SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard) (page 353)
■ VPF (Vector Product Format) (page 355)
See also:
■ Exporting (page 915)
■ Digitizing Maps (page 1017)
To import maps from other programs
1 Click File menu ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files.
Overview of Importing | 333
2 In the Import Location dialog box, under Files Of Type, select the format
of the map to import.
3 Select the file or folder to import. Click OK.
4 Some formats have additional options. To view these options, in the
Import dialog box, click Driver Options.
Driver Options is available only for formats with additional options. For
more information about the formats with additional options and their
associated driver options, see ArcView ShapeFile (page 337), Arc/INFO
Coverages (page 339), GML (Geography Markup Language) (page 342) (GML
V2 and Ordnance Survey of Great Britain MasterMap GML V2), MapInfo
MIF/MID (page 344), MapInfo MIF/MID (page 344), MicroStation DGN
Versions 7 and 8 (page 347), SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard) (page
353), or VPF (Vector Product Format) (page 355).
NOTE If you plan to change driver options, do so before you modify other
settings in the Import options dialog box. Changing driver options can
invalidate any changes you've made to the table in this dialog box.
5 In the Import dialog box (page 1124), under Spatial Filter, specify whether
you want to limit the area where data will be imported:
■ None — Place no area limits on the incoming file.
■ Current Display — Limit the import to the current drawing area.
■ Define Window — Limit the import to an area you define. To use this
option, click Select. Respond to the prompts to define the area.
6 Specify the import settings for each input layer (sometimes called a theme,
level, or file).
■ Drawing Layer (page 357)— Select a target layer for each layer in the
incoming file.
■ Object Class (page 359)— Assign incoming objects to an existing object
class and map incoming attribute data to the data fields in the object
class. The Object Class fields are available only if you have object
classes defined in your Map drawing. For more information about
setting up object classes, see Setting Up Object Classification (page
98).
■ Input Coordinate System (page 361)— Specify the coordinate system
of the incoming file. If the Autodesk Map 3D drawing has a coordinate
334 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
system assigned to it, incoming objects are converted to the coordinate
system of the drawing.
■ Data (page 363)— For each layer, specify how to import data.
■ Points (page 365)— For each layer, specify how to treat incoming point
objects.
NOTE If you're importing points and have assigned them to an object class
with a creation method of Blocks, you must use the Points column to convert
the points to blocks so that the objects can be classified. Object classification
does not convert points to blocks for you.
7 By default, polygons are imported as polygon objects. To import them
as closed polylines, select Import Polygons As Closed Polylines.
8 If you assigned incoming objects to object classes and want to use the
object class defaults for any incoming data that's out of the defined object
class range, select Use Class Defaults For Out Of Range Values.
If you do not select this option, incoming data will be imported as is,
which may include some out of range values. If you later view the data
on the Object Class tab of the Properties palette, Autodesk Map 3D
automatically modifies the data, using defaults as needed, so that the
data is in range and properly classified.
9 To save your settings as a profile, click Save. These saved profiles can be
loaded when you import other files, and they can be used to automate
command line scripts.
10 Click OK to begin the import process.
If you cancel the Import operation, all objects imported prior to canceling
will remain in the Autodesk Map 3D drawing. You can delete these objects
and any associated data.
Notes and Warnings
■ To copy the contents of a field, right-click in the field. Click Copy.
Right-click in the field and click one of the Paste options. To copy the
contents of a field to all other layers, right-click in the field. Click Paste
To All Layers.
■ When pasting into Object Class fields, the object class name and the data
mappings are pasted separately. The paste data mappings options are
Overview of Importing | 335
available only if, for all mapped fields, the same fields exist in the incoming
data.
■ You cannot copy a "By Data" or "ACAD_TEXT" setting.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into Autodesk Map
Menu File ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Import Map File
Command Line MAPIMPORT
Dialog Box Import dialog box (page 1124)
Accessing Data vs. Importing Data
You can work with your data either by accessing it from the Display Manager
or by importing it.
When you use the Display Manager, you view data in its source. Edits are
saved back to the source. The data stays in its original location; you use
Autodesk Map 3D to view and edit the data in its source.
When you Import data, you make a copy of the data and bring that copy into
your map. When you edit the data, you are editing the copy. The original data
is unchanged.
Autodesk Map 3D supports both methods of viewing and editing data. For
some formats, such as Oracle, ArcSDE, and SDF 3, you can only use the Display
Manager. For other formats, such as Microstation Design (DGN), Arc/INFO,
and SDF 2 (Autodesk MapGuide 6.5 and earlier), you can only import and
export the data. And for some formats, such as SHP, you can do either.
See also:
■ Accessing Geospatial Features (page 222)
■ Overview of Importing (page 332)
336 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Supported Formats
ArcView ShapeFile
Autodesk Map 3D supports up to ArcView version 3.2, and 8.x.
ArcView ShapeFiles store both geometry and attributes (data) for features. A
single shapefile consists of three physical files with the same filename, but
different file extensions:
■ .shp— Points, polylines, and polygon geometric data can be stored in a
shp file, however a single shp file can only one type of geometry.
■ .shx — Index to the geometric map features.
■ .dbf— Data associated with the map features.
For specific information about ArcView ShapeFile format, read the sections
below. For information about how to import and export files, see Overview
of Importing (page 332) and Overview of Exporting (page 916).
Importing
By default, Autodesk Map 3D considers ShapeFiles a multi-select, file-based
format, that is, you select one or more individual .shp files during a single
import process. To change the default so that Autodesk Map 3D considers
ShapeFiles a folder-based format (all files in the folder are included in the
import) or a single-select format (only one file can be selected for import),
modify the settings in the mapimport.ini file. For more information, see To
export to .shp as folder-based rather than file-based (page 207).
When importing Shapefiles, it is important that you have the complete set of
.shp, .shx, and .dbf in the same folder.
The link to the data stored in the .dbf file can be maintained during the import
operation, or the data can be imported into object data in the Autodesk Map
3D drawing.
ShapeFiles don't include color information. Imported objects will have the
same color as the Autodesk Map 3D layer.
Point symbols, line styles, and fill styles are not maintained when importing
from ShapeFiles. Before the translation, put these items into one or more fields
Supported Formats | 337
in the associated database so you can reassign the display properties of the
graphical objects using these values in the drawing file.
Driver Options
ArcView does not have import driver options.
Exporting
Each ArcView ShapeFile stores a single type of spatial data: point, line, or
polygon. When you export, Autodesk Map 3D automatically filters the selected
objects and exports the correct type of object to the corresponding ShapeFile.
You can export a specific type of data by exporting to a file, or you can export
multiple types of data by exporting to a folder. For information on exporting
to a folder, see Customizing the .ini File (page 202). If you are exporting to a
folder and you want to create polygons in the ShapeFile, you must select the
Treat Closed Polylines As Polygons option.
■ To export closed polylines as lines, select the Line object type.
■ To export closed polylines as polygons, select the Polygon object type and
select Treat Closed Polylines As Polygons on the Options tab
Data in ShapeFiles should be stored in latitude-longitude coordinates, not
Cartesian coordinates. Before exporting, be sure to assign a coordinate system
to the Autodesk Map 3D file. Then convert the coordinates of geometric data
to latitude-longitude.
You can also export object data or external database links to the corresponding
ShapeFile database (DBF) file.
ShapeFiles do not support color; in ArcView, each theme is assigned a color
that is used when an item is drawn.
ArcView does not support arcs. During export, arcs are converted to segmented
polylines. For information on how to change the settings used for
segmentation, see To export to .shp as folder-based rather than file-based (page
207).
When you export text to a ShapeFile, Autodesk Map 3D creates fields in the
shape DBF file for text angle, text size, and text string. To bring this file back
into Autodesk Map 3D, select the import option to import points as text.
Driver Options
338 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
When exporting to ShapeFiles, you can select the following driver options:
Option Description
Shapefile Type Select 2D (Arcview 3.0), 2D + Measures,
or 3D + Measures
Arc/INFO Coverages
Autodesk Map 3D supports Arc/INFO version 7.2, 7.3, and 8.x, and E00.
For specific information on Arc/INFO format, read the sections below. For
information about how to import and export files, see Overview of Importing
(page 332) and Overview of Exporting (page 916).
Importing
Arc/INFO stores coverages on your hard disk as a directory of files.
In the coverage directory, each file contains specific data pertaining to the
coverage. For example, ARC files contain coordinates for arcs, LAB files contain
the coordinates for label points, and TIC files contain the tics for the coverage.
Tics are points with known real-world coordinates. Coverages use tics to ensure
that stacked coverages and adjoining tiled coverages align accurately.
The following table shows how coverage features are translated to drawing
objects on import:
Coverage Feature Drawing Object
Point Point on _point layer, PAT attributes in
object data or in an external database.
Arc Sketch on _arc layer, AAT attributes in ob-
ject data or in an external database.
Polygon Closed polyline on _poly layer, PAT in ob-
ject data attached to polyline. In addition,
all segments are duplicated as sketches on
the _arc layer.
Supported Formats | 339
Coverage Feature Drawing Object
Point, Arc, and Polygon with FAT (feature Geometry converted as above, attribute in
allocation table) in dBASE object data.
Annotation Text on _text layer. Text arrows on _textar-
row layer.
Tics Points on _tic layer, attributes in object
data.
The following features are not supported when importing an Arc/INFO coverage
into a drawing:
■ feature attribute tables
■ text attributes
■ route systems
■ address files
■ turntables
■ LOG files
■ fonts
■ symbols
■ linetypes
■ shades
If a coverage has a field that describes Z values, commonly SPOT or
ELEVATION, the field is treated only as an attribute. It is not translated into
a Z value. You may be able to use a property alteration query to change the
elevation of the resulting drawing objects. (This will depend on the object
type. Elevation is not supported for all object types.)
When importing polygon coverages, polygon areas may be imported as closed
polylines. If you plan to recreate the topology in Autodesk Map 3D, use the
MAPCREATECENTROIDS command to create centroids and move any attribute
data from the polyline or polygon to the centroids (page 580). Use the _arc
layer to create the topology using the topology commands.
340 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
In addition, Autodesk Map 3D supports the coverage exchange format E00.
Driver Options
You can set the following option when importing Arc/INFO coverages or E00
files:
Option Description
Text Curves Select Follow, Fit, or Ignore.
Optional Feature Types Select Extract Bounds, or Extract Tics.
Exporting
Arc/INFO stores coverages on your hard disk as a directory of files. The main
coverage directory, called the workspace, always includes one subdirectory
called INFO. Each coverage is written to its own subdirectory. If you don't
have a coverage workspace on your computer, Autodesk Map 3D creates one
for you when you export to an Arc/INFO coverage.
When specifying a coverage name, use fewer than 14 characters and don't use
periods in the name. If you're using double-byte characters, you can use 6 or
fewer characters.
If you specify a directory name that already exists, be sure the directory is
empty. If you write to a folder that contains a log or text file, you may lose
some data.
Arc/INFO also supports a transfer format called E00 which writes all
information out to a single file. Because this is an ASCII format, keep in mind
that the file can get large.
Map objects such as arcs, splines, and circles are segmented in the coverage.
For information about how to change the settings used for segmentation, see
To export to .shp as folder-based rather than file-based (page 207).
Arc/INFO uses elevation values but they are stored in the coverage as a field
in the attribute table. Select the Elevation property to export elevation.
When exporting text or mtext to Arc/Info Coverages, the resulting objects in
the Coverage data are annotation. Autodesk Map 3D does not support attribute
data for annotation. As a result any data linked to text objects will be lost
during the export process. The text value itself will be maintained.
Supported Formats | 341
When exporting, the exported file is stored in memory before it is written to
the file. If you run into problems exporting a large drawing, increase the size
of your virtual memory.
PC coverages are single precision. UNIX coverages can be single or double
precision. Autodesk Map 3D always exports double-precision coverages,
although it does import single- or double-precision coverages.
Driver Options
When exporting to E00 or coverage format, you can set the following options:
Option Description
Coverage Precision Select Double or Single. The default is
Double.
Compression (available only for E00) Select None, Partial, or Full.
Linear Topology Select Create or Bypass. The default is
Create.
GML (Geography Markup Language)
GML (Geography Markup Language) version 2 is an OpenGIS® Implementation
specification that defines an XML encoding for the transport and storage of
geographic information. The specification can be found on the OpenGIS
Consortium web site.
You can import the following types of GML files into Autodesk Map 3D.
■ GML version 2 files
■ Ordnance Survey of Great Britain MasterMap GML version 2 files
You can export to GML version 2 only.
For specific information about importing and exporting GML files, read the
sections below. For general information on using the Import or Export
commands, see Overview of Importing (page 332) and Overview of Exporting
(page 916).
342 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Importing
Because the GML V2 format is flexible and allows you to specify your own
schemas, semantics, and options, there are many variations of the GML V2
format. Autodesk Map 3D reads many of these, but some may not be
compatible with the Autodesk Map 3D GML driver.
In addition, before importing GML data in Asian languages, you must verify
that the language encoding settings specified in Autodesk Map 3D’s
mapimport.ini file match the settings in your incoming file. The settings need
to match for the import to be successful. For more information, see
Customizing the .ini File (page 202).
Driver Options
GML has no import driver options.
Exporting
You can export GML version 2 files. Ordnance Survey of Great Britain
MasterMap GML version 2 format is import-only.
If you are exporting GML data in Asian languages, you must verify that
mapexport.ini contains the language encoding settings you need to export
valid GML data in the language you want. In addition, using the Fixed schema
mode (the default) is recommended. For more information, see Driver Options
below and Customizing the .ini File (page 202).
Driver Options
You can set the following option when exporting GML version 2 files:
Option Description
Schema Mode Select an export mode:
■ FIXED to create a single GML file
(.gml) that contains all entity types.
■ CREATE to produce 3 files: a GML file
(.gml) that contains the geometry and
data, an xfMap file (.xmp), and an ap-
plication schema and description file
(.xsd).
Fixed mode is recommended and is the
default mode. Fixed mode can recognize
certain multi-byte characters, such as multi-
Supported Formats | 343
Option Description
byte square ASCII characters in output field
names (for instance, in Japanese with
Shift_JIS encoding, 0x8250 – the ‘1’ char-
acter), which can be problematic in Create
mode. This can be an important consider-
ation when working with data in Asian
languages.
NOTE Earlier versions of Autodesk Map
3D provided support for Fixed mode.
However, Fixed mode was limited to single
entity type. This limitation is no longer the
case in Autodesk Map 3D 2006. Fixed
mode now supports all entity types
MapInfo MIF/MID
MIF/MID is a file standard used by MapInfo, a desktop mapping system.
Autodesk Map 3D supports MapInfo up to version 7 MIF/MID files.
MapInfo MIF/MID format stores both geometry and attributes (data) for
features, and is a set of two physical files that work together:
■ .mif— Vector geometric data. A single .mif file can contain many different
types of geometry.
■ .mid— Attributes for the geometric data.
For specific information on MapInfo MIF/MID format, read the sections below.
For general information on using the Import or Export commands, see
Overview of Importing (page 332) and Overview of Exporting (page 916).
Importing
By default, Autodesk Map 3D considers MapInfo MIF/MID a multi-select,
file-based format, that is, you select one or more individual .mif files during
a single import process. To change the default so that Autodesk Map 3D
considers MIF/MID a folder-based format (all files in the folder are included
in the import) or a single-select format (only one file can be selected for
344 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
import), modify the settings in the mapimport.ini file. For more information,
see To export to .shp as folder-based rather than file-based (page 207).
When you import MapInfo MIF/MID files, it is important that you have both
the .mif and .mid files in the same folder.
Symbol types are similar to Autodesk Map 3D point objects. You cannot import
MIF/MID symbol types directly. However, if you store the symbol type
information in a column in a MID file, you can map each symbol type to a
block in the current Autodesk Map 3D drawing. To do this, prepare the MIF
file by putting the name of the symbol type into a field in the database. Prepare
the Autodesk Map 3D drawing by creating similar symbols as blocks in the
Autodesk Map 3D drawing. Then, during import, perform a point-block
mapping and select the check box to get the block name from data and select
the symbol type field you created.
In MapInfo, polygons are represented as closed areas. When you import
polygons into Autodesk Map 3D, they appear as polygons unless you select
Import Polygons As Closed Polylines in the Import dialog box.
By default, object colors are imported to their closest ACI (AutoCAD Color
Index) color. To import object colors using RGB (True Color), edit the
mapimport.ini file. For more information, see Customizing the .ini File (page
202).
To change the default text justification setting for MIF/MID, edit the
mapforeignfileproperties.ini file. Use the [MIF_Justification] section to set
justification for MIF. Allowed MIF Justifications are left, center, and right. For
more information, see Customizing the .ini File (page 202).
Driver Options
MapInfo MIF/MID has no import driver options.
Exporting
The MIF/MID format does not support ellipses with an angled bounding box
(i.e, ellipses whose axes are at an angle to the X and Y axes), so when you
export such ellipses from Autodesk Map 3D to MIF/MID, they are segmented.
For information about how to change the settings Autodesk Map 3D uses for
segmentation, see To export to .shp as folder-based rather than file-based (page
207).
Driver Options
MapInfo MIF/MID has no export driver options.
Supported Formats | 345
MapInfo TAB
MapInfo TAB, also referred to as the MapInfo native format, is a
two-dimensional format that stores both feature geometry and attributes (data)
in a set of physical files that have the following file extensions:
■ .tab— The main file for a MapInfo table. It is associated with the appropriate
.dat, .id, .map, and .ind files.
■ .dat— Tabular data for a table in MapInfo's native format.
■ .id— An index to a MapInfo graphical objects (.map) file.
■ .map— Contains geographic information describing map objects.
■ .ind— An index to a MapInfo tabular (.dat) file.
With Autodesk Map 3D, you can import and export MapInfo TAB up to version
7.
For specific information about importing and exporting the MapInfo TAB
format, read the sections below. For general information on using the Import
or Export commands, see Overview of Importing (page 332) and Overview of
Exporting (page 916).
Importing
By default, Autodesk Map 3D considers MapInfo TAB a multi-select, file-based
format, that is, you select one or more individual .tab files during a single
import process. To change the default so that Autodesk Map 3D considers
MapInfo TAB a folder-based format (all files in the folder are included in the
import) or a single-select format (only one file can be selected for import),
modify the settings in the mapimport.ini file. For more information, see To
export to .shp as folder-based rather than file-based (page 207).
When you import MapInfo TAB files, it is important that you have the
complete set of physical files (.tab, .dat, .id, .map, and .ind) in the same folder.
Symbol types are similar to Autodesk Map 3D point objects. You cannot import
TAB symbol types directly. However, if you store the symbol type information
in a column in a DAT file, you can map each symbol type to a block in the
current Autodesk Map 3D drawing. To do this, prepare the TAB file by putting
the name of the symbol type into a field in the database. Prepare the Autodesk
Map 3D drawing by creating similar symbols as blocks in the Autodesk Map
3D drawing. Then, during import, perform a point-block mapping and select
346 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
the check box to get the block name from data and select the symbol type
field you created.
In MapInfo, polygons are represented as closed areas. When you import
polygons, the polygons appear as polygons in Autodesk Map 3D unless you
select Import Polygons As Closed Polylines in the Import dialog box.
By default, object colors are imported to their closest ACI (AutoCAD Color
Index) color. If you want to import object colors using RGB (True Color), you
must edit the mapimport.ini file. For more information, see Customizing the
.ini File (page 202).
To change the default text justification setting for TAB, edit the
mapforeignfileproperties.ini file. Use the [MAPINFO_Justification] section to set
justification for TAB. Allowed TAB Justifications are left, center, and right. For
more information, see Customizing the .ini File (page 202).
Driver Options
MapInfo TAB has no import driver options.
Exporting
The TAB format does not support ellipses with an angled bounding box (i.e,
ellipses whose axes are at an angle to the X and Y axes), so when you export
ellipses from Autodesk Map 3D to TAB, they are segmented. For information
about how to change the settings Autodesk Map 3D uses for segmentation,
see To export to .shp as folder-based rather than file-based (page 207).
Driver Options
MapInfo TAB has no export driver options.
MicroStation DGN Versions 7 and 8
Autodesk Map 3D supports MicroStation DGN version 7 and 8, which are
separate choices in the Export Location dialog box. Bentley Systems, Inc., and
MicroStation programs use the DGN format, which is similar to a DWG file;
points, lines, areas, text, and other object types can all be present in the same
file.
Geometry in DGN 7 files is stored in fixed-point integers. When you export
map data with large coordinate values, you can overflow these values with
unpredictable results. The seed file you use for export has a dramatic effect
on the resulting DGN data.
Supported Formats | 347
For specific information on MicroStation DGN 7 and 8 formats, read the
sections below. For general information on using the Import or Export
commands, see Overview of Importing (page 332) and Overview of Exporting
(page 916).
Importing
Data-element information is stored in an external database file and linked to
graphic objects. Autodesk Map 3D imports database link information so you
can maintain the linkage during import (page 370).
By default, object colors are imported to their closest ACI (AutoCAD Color
Index) color. To import object colors using RGB (True Color), edit the
mapimport.ini file. For more information, see Customizing the .ini File (page
202).
For DGN8, the Input Layer column lists the model name. To see the layers
for a specific model, you may need to scroll the list.
Driver Options for DGN 7
You can set the following options when importing DGN 7 files:
Option Description
Group Elements By Choose how to group the incoming elements. Geometry
groups objects by entity type. Level or Level Names groups
objects by their DGN level or level name. Only levels that
contain elements will be imported. Schema groups objects
by schema.
Element Expansion Select the options to use during import. For example, select
Explode Complex Strings to return each component of a
complex chain as its own feature (no feature will be returned
for the complex chain as a whole). Otherwise, all elements
of the complex chain merge into a single linear feature, any
arcs in the complex chain become linestrings, and any link-
ages on the component elements themselves are lost. Select
Propagate Member Linkages to return the linkages attached
to the first component of the complex chain to supplement
any existing linkages. Otherwise, any linkages on the compo-
nent elements themselves are lost and only linkages attached
to the complex chain itself are returned.
348 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Option Description
Linkage Extraction Allows you to extract MSLinks and FRAMME attribute linkage
values from the DGN 7 file. If you select MSLinks, Autodesk
Map 3D imports up to three links per object for DGN 7. For
each link, two fields are added to the object data table:
mslinks_n, which specifies the key value, and entity_num_n,
which specifies the table. If you select FRAMME, the following
fields are added to the object data table: comp_count,
comp_num, dgnfile, feat_num, state_num, and ufid.
Coordinate Units Each DGN 7 file defines a UOR (unit of resolution); in addition,
it can define Sub units and Master units. Select Master, Sub,
or UOR to specify which of these units in the DGN 7 file
matches the default unit in the Autodesk Map 3D map. For
example, if the default unit in your Autodesk Map 3D map is
meters, and meters are the Sub unit in the imported file, select
Sub. If you select Sub or Master, the UORs in the DGN 7 file
are converted to Sub or Master units according to the conver-
sion factor in the DGN file header. If you select UOR, the
UORs in the DGN 7 file are imported directly with no conver-
sion. The default unit is Sub.
Driver Options for DGN 8
You can set the following options when importing DGN 8 files:
Option Description
Group Elements By Choose how to group the incoming elements. Level or Level
Names groups objects by their DGN level or level name.
Only levels that contain elements will be imported. Geometry
groups objects by entity type.
Cell Expansion By default, cells are expanded into blocks. You can choose to
explode cells or create the cells as points instead.
Coordinate Units Each DGN 8 file can define Sub units and Master units.
Specify which of these units in the DGN 8 file matches the
default unit in the Autodesk Map 3D map. For example, if
the default unit in your Autodesk Map 3D map is meters, and
meters are the Sub unit in the imported file, select Sub.
Supported Formats | 349
Option Description
When you import the file, one Master or Sub unit (whichever
you choose) will become one drawing unit in your Autodesk
Map 3D map. If the relationship between these units is not
accurately reflected in the ratio shown, change the Unit Ratio
field.
Element Expansion Select the options to use during import. For example, select
Explode Complex Strings to return each component of a
complex chain as its own feature (no feature will be returned
for the complex chain as a whole). Otherwise, all elements
of the complex chain merge into a single linear feature, any
arcs in the complex chain become linestrings, and any link-
ages on the component elements themselves are lost.
Linkage Extraction Allows you to extract MSLinks and FRAMME attribute linkage
values from the DGN 7 file. For each link, two fields are added
to the object data table: mslinks_n, which specifies the key
value, and entity_num_n, which specifies the table. If you
select FRAMME, the following fields are added to the object
data table: comp_count, comp_num, dgnfile, feat_num,
state_num, and ufid.
Other Import Options
You can set a number of options in the MapForeignFileProperties.ini file.
Exporting
Every DGN file requires a seed file to give it default information (similar to
the acad.dwg prototype or template file). The seed file controls working units,
global origin, the version you want to export, etc. Several seed files ship with
Autodesk Map 3D.
The default for a version 7 DGN file is lrgseed.dgn. The default for a version
8 DGN file is lrgseed3d_v8.dgn. Both of these are three-dimensional seed files.
To export to a two dimensional DGN file, or to set a specific global origin or
specific working units, reference the file name of the desired seed file. The
global origin and units of resolution should be set in a seed file that is
appropriate to your Autodesk Map 3D drawing coordinates.
350 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
The seed file you use significantly affects the outcome of the export process.
If the design plane coordinate bounds in the seed file do not fully contain the
extents of the Autodesk Map 3D drawing, Autodesk Map 3D will not export
objects. In this case, use a seed file that works for your region and coordinate
system. As a last resort, select the driver option Compute Optimal Seed File
Parameters.
To change the seed file for a single file
1 In the Export dialog box, click the Options tab.
2 Click Driver Options.
3 In the Design File Output Settings dialog box, under Seed File, click
.
NOTE If you are a limited rights user, be sure that the seed file is in a location
where you have access to it.
4 In the Select Seed File dialog box, navigate to the location of the seed file
to use and select the file.
NOTE Be sure to specify a seed file designed for the version of DGN you
specified in the Export Location dialog box. You cannot use a DGN version
8 seed file when exporting to DGN version 7.
5 Click Open.
To change the default seed file
1 Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\Autodesk Map 3D\R17.0 folder.
2 Find the section labeled [IGDS] (for version 7 files) or [DGN_V8](for version
8 files). This is where the default seed file is specified.
3 Change the default seed file to the seed file you want.
For example: Driver:RUNTIME_MACROS=_SEED,"C:\Program Files\Common
Files\Autodesk Shared\GIS\ImportExport\4.0\design\seed3d_ft.dgn".
4 Save and close the .ini file.
Supported Formats | 351
Additional Notes
Closed objects are not filled, even if they were filled originally.
Hatch patterns are not exported. If you export polygon data that is hatched
in Autodesk Map 3D, the resulting data will not be filled in MicroStation.
Driver Options for DGN 7
You can set the following options when exporting DGN 7 files:
Option Description
Coordinate Units Select the coordinate units of the features: Master, Sub,
or UOR. Select the unit that matches the default unit in
your Autodesk Map 3D drawing. For example, if the default
unit in your Autodesk Map 3D drawing is meters, and you
are using a seed file that defines meters as the Master unit,
then select Master. The default is the Sub unit.
Two Point Line Output Select Type 3 Elements or Type 4 Elements.
Allow Area Fills Controls whether or not fill linkages will be written out for
ellipses, shapes, and solids. Select Yes or No.
Seed File Select the seed file, which controls whether or not the
output DGN file is two-dimensional or three-dimensional,
sets the coordinate units, sets global origin, etc. You must
use a version 7 DGN seed file.
Compute Optimal Seed Select this option to override all seed file settings and have
File Parameters Autodesk Map 3D calculate the settings for you. Autodesk
Map 3D determines the largest dimension for the set of
exported objects and sets the appropriate range and pre-
cision. It sets the UOR per Sub to 10, and sets the Global
Origin to the center of the bounding rectangle of the ex-
ported objects.
Override Global Origin Select this option to override the global origin setting in
the seed file. Specify the global origin you want to use.
Override Units Select this option to override the units setting in the seed
file. Specify the units setting you want to use.
352 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Option Description
Cell Library File You can optionally select a file to use as the cell library,
which contains definitions of symbols that can be placed
in the output DGN file.
Driver Options for DGN 8
You can set the following options when exporting DGN 8 files:
Option Description
Coordinate Units Select the coordinate units of the features: Master or Sub.
Select the unit that matches the default unit in your Au-
todesk Map 3D drawing. For example, if the default unit
in your Autodesk Map 3D drawing is meters, and you are
using a seed file that defines meters as the Master unit,
then select Master. The default is the Master unit.
Seed File Select the seed file, which controls whether or not the
output DGN file is two-dimensional or three-dimensional,
sets the coordinate units, sets global origin, etc.
SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard)
Autodesk Map 3D supports SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard). SDTS is an
import-only format. You cannot export to this format.
For specific information on SDTS format, read the sections below. For general
information on using the Import command, see Overview of Importing (page
332).
Importing
When you select an SDTS catalogue file, Autodesk Map 3D imports objects
and attributes from the dataset specified in the catalogue file. Typically, a
dataset is a group of .ddf files with the same filename prefix.
Autodesk Map 3D imports only one record per object. If an object has multiple
records attached, only one of the records will be imported.
Driver Options
Supported Formats | 353
SDTS has no import driver options.
VML (Vector Markup Language)
Autodesk Map 3D supports VML (Vector Markup Language). VML is an
export-only format.
For specific information on VML format, read the sections below. For
information about how to export files, see Overview of Exporting (page 917).
Exporting
VML, which is written using the XML syntax, is a text-based markup language
used for describing vector graphics. When you export to VML format, Autodesk
Map 3D creates a single HyperText Markup Language (HTML) file with the
VML data contained in the <body> region of the HTML.
When you export objects, be sure the objects have a color that will be visible
on the target page. For example, if you are exporting to a page with a white
background, be sure the objects themselves are not white.
You can specify the following attributes for VML objects:
VML Attribute Description
vml_title The title of the feature that may be displayed by the VML
viewer. (The title appears as a ToolTip when the user places
their mouse over the feature. Range: string Default: none
vml_url The URL to jump to if this feature is clicked. Range: string De-
fault: none
vml_target The target frame in the URL. Range: string Default: none
vml_z_index The z-index of the feature in the output VML file. Positive
numbers are in front of the screen; negative numbers are be-
hind the screen. Features having a higher z-index obscure
features with a lower z-index. Range: integer Default: 0 for
vml_polygon features 10 for vml_polyline features 11 for
vml_point features 12 for vml_text features
Driver Options
354 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
VML has no export driver options.
VPF (Vector Product Format)
You can import Vector Product Format (VPF) files into Autodesk Map 3D. You
cannot export to this format.
VPF is a standard format, structure, and organization for large geographic
databases that are based on a georelational data model. It is commonly used
by military departments and defense agencies.
The VPF specification is available on the National Imaging and Mapping Agency
(NIMA) web site
For specific information about importing VPF format, read the sections below.
For general information on using the Import command, see Overview of
Exporting (page 917).
Importing
By default, Autodesk Map 3D considers Vector Product Format (VPF) a
multi-select, file-based format, that is, you select one or more individual files
during a single import process. To change the default so that Autodesk Map
3D considers VPF a folder-based format (all files in the folder are included in
the import) or a single-select format (only one file can be selected for import),
modify the settings in the mapimport.ini file. For more information, see To
export to .shp as folder-based rather than file-based (page 207).
Driver Options
VPF has no import driver options.
Specifying an Area to Import
When importing data from another file format, you can specify (or limit) the
area into which incoming objects will be imported.
You can import objects into the current drawing area, into an area you define
in the map, or import the entire file.
See also:
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats (page 332)
Specifying an Area to Import | 355
To specify an area to import
1 Click File menu ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files.
2 In the Import dialog box (page 1124), under Spatial Filter, specify whether
you want to limit the area into which data will be imported:
■ None — Place no area limits on the incoming file.
■ Current Display — Limit the import to the current drawing area.
■ Define Window — Limit the import to a rectangular area you define.
To use this option, click Select. Drag your cursor from right to left to
define the area. Objects within the rectangular window are imported.
■ Autodesk Map 3D does not display a preview of the incoming data.
■ If the coordinate system assigned to the Map drawing differs from the
coordinate system specified in the Coordinate System column, Autodesk
Map 3D will perform a reverse transformation to determine the correct
coordinate space (area) for the incoming data.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into Autodesk Map
Menu File ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Import Map File
Command Line MAPIMPORT
Dialog Box Import dialog box (page 1124)
Specifying an AutoCAD Layer During Import
By default, Autodesk Map 3D imports data to an AutoCAD layer with the same
name as the layer (sometimes called a schema, level, or file) in the input file.
If an AutoCAD layer with this name already exists, objects are copied to that
356 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
layer. Otherwise, a new AutoCAD layer is created and objects are copied to
the new layer.
If you assign the input layer to an object class with a layer property, the default
will instead be the default AutoCAD layer defined by the objectclass, and the
Drawing Layer field displays <By Class>.
You can specify one of the following layer options:
■ Put objects on an existing AutoCAD layer.
■ Put objects on a new AutoCAD layer.
■ Put objects an an AutoCAD layer based on data attached to the objects.
■ Put objects on the AutoCAD layer specified by the assigned object class
(available only if you assigned the input layer to an object class with a
layer property).
See also:
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats (page 332)
To specify an AutoCAD layer during import
1 Click File menu ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files.
2 In the Import dialog box (page 1124), review the target drawing layer for
each input layer (sometimes called a schema, level, or file) in the incoming
file.
3 To change the AutoCAD layer, click in the Drawing Layer field for the
input layer you want to change.
■ To import objects to an existing AutoCAD layer, click the down arrow
and select the layer.
■ To import objects to a new AutoCAD layer, click in the cell and enter
a layer name.
■ To import objects to an AutoCAD layer whose name is specified in
data stored on the imported objects, c lick . In the Import dialog
box (page 1124), click Use Data Field For Layer Name. Select the data
field to use. Click OK to close the Layer Mapping dialog.
During import, Autodesk Map 3D reads the specified data value for
each object. If the data value specifies a layer that already exists, the
object is imported to that layer. If the data value specifies a layer that
Specifying an AutoCAD Layer During Import | 357
does not exist, the layer is created. If an object does not have a data
value attached, the object is imported to Layer 0.
■ To import objects to a layer with the same name as the input layer,
right-click the Drawing Layer column heading in the table. Click Use
Input Layer Names.
■ To import objects to the layer specified by the assigned object class,
verify that <By Class>; is displayed in the Drawing Layer field. If it is
not, type <By Class>; into the field.
NOTE If the layer specified in the Drawing Layer column is different than what
the Object Class specifies, Autodesk Map 3D uses the Drawing Layer setting unless
it violates the range specified by the Object Class.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into Autodesk Map
Menu File ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Import Map File
Command Line MAPIMPORT
Dialog Box Import dialog box (page 1124)
Assigning an Object Class During Import
As you import objects, you can assign them to an existing object class in the
Autodesk Map 3D drawing and map the incoming attribute data to the object
class definition.
Example: Objects being imported from a Shapefile input layer can be classified
and included in the "LAND USE" object class , and data values from the
Shapefile can be mapped to the "LAND USE" object class definition.
Because some of the incoming data values may conflict with data ranges
defined in the object class, Autodesk Map 3D gives you the option of using
the object class default values instead of the incoming data values for values
358 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
that are not within the acceptable range. This ensures that incoming data is
accurately classified but may require changing incoming data values.
To assign an object class, you must first define object classes in your Autodesk
Map 3D drawing. For more information, see Setting Up Object Classification
(page 96).
See also:
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats (page 332)
■ Setting Up Object Classification (page 96)
To assign an object class to an input layer
1 Click File menu ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files.
2 In the Import dialog box (page 1124), review the settings in the Object Class
column.
NOTE To make selections in the Object Class column, first define object
classes in the Autodesk Map 3D drawing. If there are no object classes defined,
the fields in the Object Class column are grayed-out. For more information,
see .
3 For each layer in the incoming file, click in the Object Class field.
4 Select an object class.
5 Click to map incoming attribute data to the Autodesk Map 3D object
class definition.
6 In the Feature Class Attribute Mapping dialog box (page 1122), verify that
the object class you just selected is highlighted in the Select An Object
Class list.
7 On the right, review the Input Fields list, which displays the incoming
attribute data fields that are available to be mapped to Target Fields in
the object class definition.
8 For each Input Field you want to map, click the down-arrow under Target
Fields, and select a target field in the object class definition. The syntax
used for the Target field is:
Assigning an Object Class During Import | 359
CATEGORY:TABLE:FIELD
■ CATEGORY — Type of data, for example "OD" for object data, or "LT"
for link template (linked external database).
■ TABLE — Object data table name or database table name.
■ FIELD — Data field name.
After you map a target field, it no longer appears in the Target Fields list.
This ensures that each target field is mapped to only one incoming data
field.
9 Map as many of the Target Fields as needed. If there are no more target
fields in the Target Fields list, you've mapped them all. If you do not map
a target field, the default object class value is used.
10 Click OK to close the Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog box.
11 To use object class default values for incoming data values that are not
within the specified object class range, select Use Class Defaults For Out
Of Range Values. Properties such as Layer and Color are also enforced.
This ensures that incoming data will be accurately classified but may
require Autodesk Map 3D to change some of the incoming data values.
■ If you're importing points and have assigned them to an object class with
a creation method of Blocks, use the Points column to convert the points
to blocks so that the objects can be classified. Object classification does
not convert points to blocks for you. For more information, see To specify
how to import points (page 365).
■ To copy the Object Class names and attribute mapping settings from one
layer to another, right-click in the Object Class field you want to copy.
Click Copy. Then right-click in the field in the target layer and choose
whether you want to Paste the object class name or attribute mapping. To
copy to all other layers, right-click and choose whether you want to Paste
the name or the attribute mapping to all layers. Note that if attribute
mapping conflicts are detected, the paste attribute mappings options is
not available.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
360 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Imports an external file format into Autodesk Map
Menu File ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Import Map File
Command Line MAPIMPORT
Dialog Box Import dialog box (page 1124)
Performing a Coordinate Conversion During Import
As you import objects, you can convert them from the coordinate system of
the input file to the coordinate system of the Autodesk Map 3D drawing.
To perform this conversion, you must first assign a coordinate system to the
current drawing (page 122). Then, for each layer that you import, you must
specify the appropriate coordinate system.
See also:
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats (page 332)
To perform a coordinate conversion
1 Click File menu ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files.
2 In the Import dialog box (page 1124), note the coordinate system assigned
to the current drawing.
NOTE If the current drawing does not have a coordinate system assigned,
click Assign Global Coordinate System and select the coordinate system for
the current drawing.
3 For each layer in the incoming file, click in the Input Coordinate System
field.
4 Enter a new global coordinate system code, or click to select from a
list of global coordinate systems.
5 In the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box, select the category
and coordinate system for the incoming layer.
Performing a Coordinate Conversion During Import | 361
6 Click OK to close the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box.
You can copy the settings from one layer to another. Right-click in the field
you want to copy. Click Copy. Then right-click in the field in the target layer.
Click Paste. To copy the setting to all other layers, Click Paste To All Layers.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into Autodesk Map
Menu File ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Import Map File
Command Line MAPIMPORT
Dialog Box Import dialog box (page 1124)
Importing Attribute Data
As you import objects, you can import the attribute data attached to the
objects.
You can import the data to one of the following:
■ Existing object data table — By default, incoming fields are imported into
object data fields with the same name. If no object data field exists with
the same name, the incoming field is not imported. If you don't want to
do this, use Object Data Mapping to manually map incoming fields to
object data fields with other names or to create new fields.
Incoming data is converted to the data type of the existing object data
field. If this conversion fails (for example, if you import characters to an
integer field), Autodesk Map 3D uses 0 for integers, 0.0 for real numbers,
and "" for text.
■ New object data table — By default, the fields in the new object data table
match the fields you've chosen to import. If you don't want to do this, use
Object Data Mapping to select the fields you want to import or to change
the names of the object data fields.
362 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
When the data is imported, it will be converted to the following object
data types:
■ Integer32, Integer16, and Boolean data types are converted to the
Integer data type. For Boolean data, False is converted to 0 and True is
converted to 1.
■ Float, Double, and Decimal data types are converted to the Real data
type.
■ Char and Date data types are converted to the Character data type.
Data is imported only if it is attached to an incoming object. If no objects
are found for an input layer, then the object data table will not be created.
■ External database — Imported data is added to the external database table
as new records.
■ External database, link only — If you don't need to add the data to the
external database, you can import just the links to the data. When you
import links only, the link from the object to the external data are
maintained, but the external database is not modified. This is much faster
than importing the entire record.
See also:
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats (page 332)
To specify the data to import
1 Click File menu ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files.
2 In the Import dialog box (page 1124), review the settings in the Data
column.
3 To change the setting for a layer, click in the Data field for the layer you
want to change. Click… .
4 In the Attribute Data dialog box (page 1115), select an option:
■ If you do not want to import data, click Do Not Import Attribute Data
and close the dialog box.
■ To import data as object data, click Create Object Data and enter a
name for the object data table or select an existing object data table.
Click Select Fields to map incoming fields to object data fields.
Importing Attribute Data | 363
Select Add Unique Key Field to automatically create a unique key for
each incoming record.
■ To import data to an external database, click Add To Database Table
and select a link template.
To import only the link data, select Create Link Only.
Click Select Fields to map incoming fields to fields in the external
database table.
5 Click OK to close the Attribute Data dialog box.
■ To import data to object data tables with the same name as the input layer
names, right-click the Data column header in the table. Click Use Input
Layer Name For Table Name.
■ To import data to an external database, attach the data source and define
the link template before you start the import process.
■ If conflicts are found between the settings made in the Data column and
an assigned object class definition, Autodesk Map 3D displays the Conflict
Resolution dialog box (page 1117), where you can resolve the conflicts before
proceeding with the import.
See also:
■ To import objects with links to an external database (page 370)
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into Autodesk Map
Menu File ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Import Map File
Command Line MAPIMPORT
Dialog Box Import dialog box (page 1124)
364 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Specifying How to Import Points
As you import objects, you can choose how to import points.
■ Import points as points, using ACAD_POINT.
■ Import points as text, using text specified in data attached to the objects.
■ Import points as blocks, using a specified block definition.
■ Import points as blocks, using a block name specified in data attached to
the objects.
If you import points as blocks, you can choose to import the attribute data
with the objects. If an attribute name on the block that is being created
matches a field name on the incoming point, the data for that attribute will
be imported with the point.
NOTE If the attribute data includes the values used to link the object to an external
database, you can recreate these links (page 322) in the Autodesk Map 3D drawing
using the ADEGENLINK command.
See also:
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats (page 332)
To specify how to import points
1 Click File menu ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files.
2 In the Import dialog box (page 1124), review the settings in the Points
column.
3 To change the setting for a layer, click in the Points field for that layer.
Do one of the following:
■ To import points as points, click the down arrow and select
ACAD_POINT.
■ To import points as mtext, click… . In the Import dialog box (page
1124), click Create As Text From Data and select the data field to use. If
an object does not have a value in the selected data field, the point
is imported using ACAD_POINT.
Text uses the text style for the current drawing. To change the text
style for the current drawing, click Text Style and select the style you
want.
Specifying How to Import Points | 365
■ To import points to a specific block, click the down arrow and select
the block name.
■ To import points to a block whose name is specified in data stored
on the imported objects, click… . In the Point Mapping dialog box,
click Get Block Name From Data and select the data field to use.
During import, Autodesk Map 3D reads the specified data value for
each object. If the data value stored on the object specifies a valid
block name, the object is imported to that block. If the data value
stored on the object specifies a block name that does not exist or if
the object does not have a data value attached, the point is imported
using ACAD_POINT.
4 To fill attributes with values from fields in the input file, select Get
Attribute Values From Fields. This works with either the Create As Blocks
or the Get Block Name From Data option.
NOTE This option works only if incoming field names match the block
attribute tags. If they do not match, you can map specific incoming fields to
specific block attributes using the Object class column.
5 Click OK to close the Point Mapping dialog box.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into Autodesk Map
Menu File ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Import Map File
Command Line MAPIMPORT
Dialog Box Import dialog box (page 1124)
366 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Importing Polygons
By default, polygons are imported as polygon objects. However, if you want
to use the polygons in a topology, you must import them as polylines and
create centroids for them.
If a polygon has attribute data attached, the data is initially attached to the
polyline. You must move the attribute data from the polyline to the centroid.
See also:
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats (page 332)
To import polygons
1 Click File menu ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files and import the attribute data
as object data (page 363).
2 If you plan to use the polygons in a polygon topology, in the Import
dialog box (page 1124), select the option to Import Polygons As Closed
Polylines.
NOTE To set the default state of this option, use the MAPUSEMPOLYGON
command.
3 Run To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines (page 581) to
create centroids in the polygons and move the data from each closed
polyline or polygon to its centroid.
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Menu Create ➤ Centroids
Icon
Create Centroids
Command Line MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Dialog Box Create Centroids dialog box (page 1177)
Importing Polygons | 367
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into Autodesk Map
Menu File ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Import Map File
Command Line MAPIMPORT
Dialog Box Import dialog box (page 1124)
Creating Centroids for Polygons
If you have polygon objects or closed polylines with data attached to them,
you can create centroids and move the data to the centroid. This is useful:
■ After you import or digitize objects.
■ Before using editing commands such as Drawing Cleanup, Boundary Break,
or Boundary Trim.
■ When working with topology.
368 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Object data attached to closed polylines (top) and object data moved to
centroids (bottom).
Autodesk Map 3D checks that the lines do not intersect each other, and that
the area is greater than 0. It then creates a centroid inside each selected polygon
or closed polyline and moves any object data or SQL link data to the centroid.
For an object shaped like a figure eight, Autodesk Map 3D creates one centroid.
Centroids are created with a Z value of 0.
NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. It does not apply to features
from a feature source.
To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines
1 Click Create menu ➤ Centroids.
Creating Centroids for Polygons | 369
2 In the Create Centroids dialog box (page 1177), specify whether to create
centroids for all closed objects or only for selected closed objects. If only
for selected closed objects, select the polygons and closed polylines.
TIP Click the Quick Select tool to view and filter the object type as you select
objects.
3 Specify the layer on which the centroids should be created.
4 Specify the block to use for centroids, or use ACAD_POINT.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Menu Create ➤ Centroids
Icon
Create Centroids
Command Line MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Dialog Box Create Centroids dialog box (page 1177)
Importing Objects with Links to an External Database
If objects in a file you are importing have links to attribute data in a separate
database, you can maintain those links.
See also:
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats (page 332)
■ Importing Attribute Data (page 362)
To import objects with links to an external database
1 Make sure you have created a link template (page 319) for the external
database, and that the database is attached (page 164) and connected.
370 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
2 Click File menu ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files.
3 In the Import dialog box (page 1124), click in a field in the Data column.
Click… .
4 In the Attribute Data dialog box (page 1115), select Add To Database Table.
5 Select the link template to use.
6 Select Create Link Only.
7 Click OK to close the Attribute Data dialog box.
When you import objects, the attribute data on the objects will be converted
to link data for the selected link template.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into Autodesk Map
Menu File ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Import Map File
Command Line MAPIMPORT
Dialog Box Import dialog box (page 1124)
MAPOD2ASE
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Menu Setup ➤ Convert Object Data To Database Links
Command Line MAPOD2ASE
Dialog Box Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box
(page 1068)
Importing Objects with Links to an External Database | 371
Displaying Attribute Data as Text
If you have attribute data attached to objects, you can display that data as
text next to the object. This works whether the data is object data, external
data linked to the object, or block attributes.
TIP If you are importing points, you can import the points directly as attribute
data. See Specifying How to Import Points (page 365).
See also:
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats (page 332)
■ Adding Annotation (page 657)
To import a file with attribute data and display the data as text
1 Click File menu ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files and import the attribute data
as object data (page 363). Save and close the file.
2 Open a drawing and attach the drawing file (page 128) containing the
imported objects.
3 Define a query that includes the objects you want. If you have only one
file attached, define a Location condition (page 804) to find all objects in
the source drawing.
4 As part of the query, define a property alteration that displays the object
data as text (page 834). When specifying the text, click Expression and
choose the object data table that contains the imported attribute data.
5 If you want, save the changes (page 466) back to the attached (source) file.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
Menu Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
Define/Modify Drawing Set
372 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Command Line ADEDRAWINGS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click
Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Dialog Box Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1263)
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
Menu File ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set
Icon
Save to Source Drawings
Command Line ADESAVEOBJS
Dialog Box Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box (page 1247)
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into Autodesk Map
Menu File ➤ Import ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Import Map File
Command Line MAPIMPORT
Dialog Box Import dialog box (page 1124)
Displaying Attribute Data as Text | 373
Importing a DXF File
You can use DXF files created by other applications to bring information into
Autodesk Map 3D. When you import objects from DXF files, they do not have
links to other objects or to data. For example, a polygon that encloses a parcel
ID is not linked to the parcel ID except visually. Data imported from a DXF
file does not have any links to object data or external databases.
You cannot attach a source drawing to a DXF file or attach DXF files to another
drawing.
To import a DXF file
1 Click File menu ➤ Open.
2 In the Select File dialog box, under Files Of Type, select DXF (*.dxf).
3 Select the file. Click Open.
Quick Reference
OPEN
Opens an existing drawing file
Menu File ➤ Open
Icon
Open Drawing
Command Line OPEN
Importing Maps from SDF 2
While importing SDF 2 files (Autodesk MapGuide 6.5 and earlier), you can
perform coordinate conversions, create object data tables from the key, name,
and URL fields, and create hyperlinks on imported objects. Import a selected
portion of the SDF by specifying four corner points of an area.
374 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
NOTE SDF 2 files can only be imported. They cannot be accessed using Data
Connect. However, SDF 3 files, using the new MapGuide technology, use Data
Connect. For information, see To add features from an SDF feature source (page
238)
See also:
■ Exporting DWG Data as Autodesk MapGuide SDF 2 (page 925)
■ Using Features from an SDF Feature Source (page 237)
To import SDF 2 files
1 Click File menu ➤ Import ➤ Autodesk MapGuide.
2 In the Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box, select a file. Click Open.
3 In the SDF Import dialog box (page 991), under Import Layer, select the
AutoCAD layer to which you want to import the SDF information.
To create a new AutoCAD layer, click Create New Layer.
4 Under Coordinate Conversion, select Convert From. Enter a coordinate
system code.
To select the code from a list, click Select Coordinate System.
5 Under Data Elements, select Assign To Object Data Table. Specify the
object data table and fields.
To create a new table or field, click Create New Table or Create New Field.
6 Optionally, under Data Elements, select the Create Hyperlinks From URL
Field.
7 Under Import By Location, select Define An Area To Import From The
SDF File and enter the coordinates for the area to import.
The coordinates must be in the coordinate system of the SDF file.
8 To save your settings as a profile, click Save.
9 Click OK.
The objects in the SDF file are imported into the drawing.
See also:
■ To add features from an SDF feature source (page 238)
Importing Maps from SDF 2 | 375
Quick Reference
MAPSDFIN
Imports an SDF 2 format file from Autodesk MapGuide 6.5 or earlier
Menu File ➤ Import ➤ Autodesk MapGuide
Command Line MAPSDFIN
Dialog Box SDF Import dialog box (page 991)
Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data
You can access features from an Autodesk Civil 3D project.
You start by exporting Autodesk Civil 3D alignment, point, parcel, and pipe
network data to an SDF file.
Then access the SDF file from your map.
The table below lists the Autodesk Civil 3D object and attributes that are
exported to the SDF file.
Autodesk Civil 3D Object Exported Attributes
376 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Alignment ■ Alignment Name
■ Length
■ Design Speed
■ Starting Station
■ Ending Station
Point ■ Point Number
■ Point Name
■ Elevation
■ Description
■ Raw Description
■ Latitude
■ Longitude
Parcel ■ Parcel Name
■ Parcel Number
■ Area
■ Perimeter
Pipe ■ Network Name
■ Length
■ Slope
■ Inside Diameter
■ Outside Diameter
■ Shape
■ Elevation at Start
■ Elevation at End
■ Structure Start
■ Structure End
Structure ■ Network Name
Accessing Autodesk Civil 3D Data | 377
■ Rim Elevation
■ Structure Name
To export data from Autodesk Civil 3D to SHP
1 Open the project in Autodesk Civil 3D. In Autodesk Civil 3D, click File
menu ➤ Export ➤ Export to SDF.
2 In the Export To SDF dialog box, specify a name for the SDF file.
3 Specify the coordinate system.
NOTE If the drawing already has a coordinate system specified, it is used
automatically and the Select Coordinate System controls in the Export To
SDF dialog box are grayed out.
4 Click OK to export the file.
To access the SDF file from a map
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Data.
2 In the Data Connect window, select SDF in the Feature Sources list.
3 Specify information to connect to the SDF file. For more information,
see To add features from an SDF feature source (page 238).
378 | Chapter 4 Accessing Data
Managing Data
5
In this chapter
■ Overview of Managing Data
■ Creating a New Feature Source
■ Creating a New Schema
■ Importing and Exporting a Schema
■ Viewing a Schema
■ Editing a Schema
■ Deleting Schemas
■ Undoing Schema Changes
■ Copying Data from One Feature
Source to Another
■ Setting Up Database Users
379
Overview of Managing Data
Autodesk Map 3D comes with integrated tools that let you manage the
structure and content of your geospatial data. You can use:
■ Data Connect to create (page 381) database-based feature sources
■ Schema Editor to create (page 383), import or export (page 384), view (page
386), edit (page 387), and delete (page 392) schemas
■ Bulk Copy to copy (page 393) data from one feature source to another
Each tool offers a graphical interface within Autodesk Map 3D that works
consistently across providers, whether your data reside in database-based,
file-based, or web-based feature sources. This consistency means that you don’t
have to learn multiple or complex native data-management tools, such as
Oracle Enterprise Manager, to manage your geospatial data. These tools are
intended for data administrators and advanced users who set up and maintain
map data and data structures.
Autodesk Map 3D uses a containment hierarchy to organize map objects
logically. A feature source is a collection of related feature classes contained
in a single data-storage location. Oracle, SDF, and WFS, for example, provide
database-based, file-based, and web-based feature sources, respectively. Feature
classes are defined within one or more schemas (the file-based feature sources,
SDF and SHP, allow only one schema per file). A feature class describes a type
of real-world object by listing its properties, which are single attributes of an
object. A schema named ElectricTransmission, for example, would contain
feature classes named Pole, Transformer, and Cable, among others. The Pole
feature class would have the properties identification number, name, model,
material, weight, length, installation date, and so on. After you have defined
feature classes, Autodesk Map 3D users can add specific instances of feature
classes—called features—to maps: individual roads, hydrants, poles, and other
distinguishable real-world objects. No matter what kind of feature source you
use, it’s useful to think of geospatial data in terms of tables: each row is a
feature, each column is a property, each table’s structure (table name, column
names, data types, default values, and constraints) defines a feature class, and
a collection of related tables is a schema. Note that, for any provider, you can
view but not edit or delete a schema, feature class, or property for which
feature data exist.
You don’t have to create schemas within Autodesk Map 3D. You may prefer
to use standardized schemas rather than design new ones. For example, the
Computer-Aided Design and Drafting/Geographic Information System
380 | Chapter 5 Managing Data
(CADD/GIS) Technology Center for Facilities, Infrastructure, and Environment
has developed the Spatial Data Standard for Facilities, Infrastructure, and
Environment (SDSFIE). SDSFIE is nonproprietary and provides a standardized
grouping of geospatial features and their attributes. You can learn more about
this model and take a free web-based SDSFIE training course at
https://tsc.wes.army.mil. Autodesk Map 3D also comes with sample SDSFIE
schemas, but the latest ones are available on the SDSFIE web site. In addition,
the Federal Geographic Data Committee (FGDC, http://www.fgdc.gov) promotes
the coordinated development, use, sharing, and dissemination of geospatial
data on a national basis. You can use FGDC-defined geospatial metadata to
document digital resources such as GIS files, geospatial databases, and earth
imagery. In any case, whether you use standardized, in-house, or third-party
schemas, Autodesk Map 3D lets you import (page 384) them into your maps.
Creating a New Feature Source
Autodesk Map 3D lets you create new database-based feature sources (Microsoft
SQL Server, MySQL, or Oracle) or file-based feature sources (SDF or SHP),
provided you have the necessary privileges for the target database or directory.
To overwrite an existing feature source, you first must delete the old one (for
database-based feature sources, use DBMS-specific tools to drop existing tables).
After you create a feature source and define a schema, Autodesk Map 3D users
can create, store, and access (page 222) geospatial data.
To create a database-based feature source
1 At the top of the Task pane, choose Map Explorer from the Task
drop-down list.
2 In Map Explorer, click Data ➤ Add Data.
Data Connect opens.
3 In the Feature Sources list, click the provider (MySQL, Oracle, or SQL
Server) for which you want to create the new feature source.
4 In the details pane, enter the connection name, service name, and, if
required, user credentials.
5 In the Data Store list, choose New.
The Create Data Store dialog box for the specified provider opens.
6 Enter the settings for the new feature source.
Creating a New Feature Source | 381
Different sections of the Create Data Store dialog box will be available or
unavailable, depending on what information the provider supports or
needs to create the feature source. The following table describes the
settings. Some settings apply only to some providers.
Setting Description
Name Enter the name of the new feature source or accept the default
name. This name will appear in the Feature Sources list of Data
Connect.
Password Type the user password (Oracle only).
Confirm password Re-type the user password (Oracle only).
Description Optionally enter a description of the new feature source.
Data store coordi- Enter the coordinate system code for the new feature source. If
nate system
you don’t know the code, click to select a coordinate system.
In the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box, select a cate-
gory. Select from a list of available coordinate systems. Click
Properties to view the properties of the selected coordinate system.
Click OK. Choose a coordinate system that both the provider and
Autodesk Map 3D support.
Data store extents Enter the new feature source’s minimum and maximum X and Y
spatial extents or accept the default values. You can’t add objects
that are outside these extents.
Storage resolution Enter the new feature source’s X and Y tolerance or accept the
default value. If the distance between two points is smaller than
the resolution, the points are considered to be equivalent for most
spatial tests.
Data store ta- Enter the new feature source’s tablespace name (Oracle only).
blespace
7 Click OK.
382 | Chapter 5 Managing Data
The new feature source is created and appears in Feature Sources list under
the provider (for Oracle, a new user is created). Use Schema Editor to
create (page 383) or import (page 384) the feature source’s schema.
To create an SDF or SHP feature source
1 At the top of the Task pane, choose Map Explorer from the Task
drop-down list.
2 In Map Explorer, click Schema ➤ Create SDF or Schema ➤ Create SHP.
The Create File dialog box opens.
3 In the Choose File Name box, enter the path and file name of the feature
source to create.
4 In the Choose Coordinate System box, enter the coordinate system code
for the new feature source. If you don’t know the code, click to select
a coordinate system. In the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box,
select a category. Select from a list of available coordinate systems. Click
Properties to view the properties of the selected coordinate system. Click
OK. Choose a coordinate system that both the provider and Autodesk
Map 3D support.
5 Click OK.
Schema Editor opens.
6 Use Schema Editor to edit (page 387) or import (page 384) the new feature
source’s schema.
The new SDF or SHP file is created in the target directory when you apply
the schema.
Creating a New Schema
Schema Editor lets you define a new schema in a new (page 381) or existing
feature source for a database-based provider (Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL,
or Oracle). You must create schema elements according to their containment
hierarchy: create a schema before creating its feature classes, and a feature
class before its properties. If you’re using a standard schema (such as SDSFIE
(page 380)) or creating a complex schema then it’s often more sensible to import
(page 384) it rather than define it directly in Schema Editor. Database-based
providers let you create multiple schemas within the same feature source and
Creating a New Schema | 383
support updateable schemas, which you can change (page 387) after you define
and save them the first time. Note that, for any provider, you can view (page
386) but not edit a schema for which feature data exist.
To create a schema
1 Connect (page 222) to the database-based feature source in which you
want to create the schema.
2 At the top of the Task pane, choose Map Explorer from the Task
drop-down list.
3 In Map Explorer, right-click the desired connection in the connection
tree and then select Edit Schema from the shortcut menu.
Schema Editor opens.
4 Expand the Schema tree and do one of the following:
■ To create a schema, right-click the Schemas icon (the top-most node)
in the Schema tree and then select New Schema from the shortcut
menu (or click New Schema on the Schema Editor toolbar).
■ To create a feature class, right-click the icon of the parent schema in
the Schema tree and then select New Class from the shortcut menu
(or click New Class on the Schema Editor toolbar).
■ To create a property, right-click the icon of the parent feature class in
the Schema tree and then select New Property from the shortcut menu
(or click New Property on the Schema Editor toolbar).
5 Edit (page 387) the new schema element’s settings in the details pane and
then click OK.
6 Repeat the preceding two steps as needed to create other schema elements.
7 Click Apply to make the changes permanent.
Importing and Exporting a Schema
Schema Editor’s ability to load an XML or XMI schema or save a schema as
an XML file lets you:
■ Import a schema that was created in a modeling tool such as Microsoft
Visio, ArgoUML, or Rational Rose
384 | Chapter 5 Managing Data
■ Import standard models such as SDSFIE (page 380)
■ Import in-house or third-party schemas or schemas that other Autodesk
Map 3D users have created
■ Create a schema in Schema Editor and export it to share with other
Autodesk Map 3D or GIS-software users
■ Define a schema in Schema Editor and export it to a modeling tool
■ Export a schema to back up as an XML file
■ Save your work in progress if you discover that the original data source or
directory becomes unavailable
The Autodesk Map 3D XML schema format is a subset of the Geography
Markup Language (GML, http://www.opengis.net/gml) standardized by the Open
Geospatial Consortium (OGC, http://www.opengeospatial.org). For more
information, see the Autodesk FDO API Developer’s Guide and The Essential FDO.
To import an XML or XMI schema
1 Connect (page 222) to the feature source in which you want to import the
schema.
2 At the top of the Task pane, choose Map Explorer from the Task
drop-down list.
3 In Map Explorer, right-click the desired connection in the connection
tree and then select Edit Schema from the shortcut menu.
Schema Editor opens.
4 Right-click the Schemas icon (the top-most node) in the Schema tree and
then do one of the following:
■ To import a schema in XML format, select Import XML File from the
shortcut menu (or click Load Schema File on the Schema Editor
toolbar).
■ To import a schema in XMI format, select Import XMI File from the
shortcut menu.
The Open dialog box opens.
5 Navigate to the XML or XMI file and then click Open.
The Schema tree updates to show the imported schema.
6 Click Apply to make the changes permanent.
Importing and Exporting a Schema | 385
To export an XML schema
1 Connect (page 222) to the feature source from which you want to export
the schema.
2 At the top of the Task pane, choose Map Explorer from the Task
drop-down list.
3 In Map Explorer, right-click the desired connection in the connection
tree and then select Edit Schema from the shortcut menu.
Schema Editor opens.
4 Right-click the Schemas icon (the top-most node) in the Schema tree and
then select Export XML File from the shortcut menu (or click Save Schema
File on the Schema Editor toolbar).
The Save As dialog box opens.
5 Navigate to the desired directory and enter a name for the file.
6 Click Save.
The exported schema file is created in the target directory.
Viewing a Schema
Schema Editor lets you inspect any feature source’s schema, including those
of providers that don't support updateable schemas. Opening a non-updateable
schema puts Schema Editor in read-only mode, whereas an updateable schema
puts it in edit (page 387) mode. If you change an updateable schema mistakenly,
click Cancel or Dismiss to undo (page 393) the changes. Providers that support
updateable schemas include Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, and Oracle.
To view a schema
1 Connect (page 222) to the feature source containing the schema that you
want to view.
2 At the top of the Task pane, choose Map Explorer from the Task
drop-down list.
3 In Map Explorer, right-click the desired connection in the connection
tree and then select Edit Schema from the shortcut menu.
Schema Editor opens.
386 | Chapter 5 Managing Data
4 Expand the Schema tree and then click any schema, feature class, or
property to view its settings in the details pane.
5 When you are finished inspecting the schema, click Dismiss to close
Schema Editor.
Editing a Schema
You can use Schema Editor to edit a schema, feature class, or property if the
provider supports updateable schemas (as do Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL,
and Oracle, for example). Opening an updateable schema puts Schema Editor
in edit mode, which lets you change the settings of schema elements. A
non-updateable schema puts Schema Editor in read-only mode, which lets
you view (page 386) but not change settings. You can click Cancel or Dismiss
to undo (page 393) your changes at any time; clicking Apply makes your changes
permanent. Note that, for any provider, you can view but not change a schema,
feature class, or property for which feature data exist.
To edit a schema
1 Connect (page 222) to the feature source containing the schema that you
want to edit.
2 At the top of the Task pane, choose Map Explorer from the Task
drop-down list.
3 In Map Explorer, right-click the desired connection in the connection
tree and then select Edit Schema from the shortcut menu.
Schema Editor opens.
4 Expand the Schema tree and then click the schema, feature class, or
property that you want to edit.
The current settings appear in the details pane.
5 In the details pane, edit the schema element’s logical settings.
Each individual setting will be available or unavailable depending on
whether the provider supports it and whether it can be changed. For
example, the Long Transaction section won’t appear or will be disabled
if the provider doesn’t support versioning.
Editing a Schema | 387
The following table describes the settings that are available for a schema.
Schema setting Description
Name Enter the name of the schema. This name, which will
appear in the Schema tree, must follow the naming rules
of the provider.
Description Optionally enter a description of the schema.
The following table describes the settings that are available for a feature
class.
Feature class setting Description
Name Enter the name of the feature class. This name, which
will appear in the Schema tree, must follow the naming
rules of the provider.
Description Optionally enter a description of the feature class.
Type Specify the class type:
■ A feature class defines a spatial feature having an as-
sociated geometry. For most providers, a feature class
requires a unique identifier to distinguish the features
(unless the feature class has a base class from which
it inherits an identifier).
■ A non-feature class is for non-spatial data (with no
geometry) and can be used as a standalone class or
a contained class. As a standalone class, it has no as-
sociation with another class and requires a unique
identifier. As a contained class, it defines a property
of another non-feature or feature class. For example,
Sidewalk could be a property of a Road feature class;
the Sidewalk class defines the Road.Sidewalk proper-
ty. In this case, the Sidewalk class does not need an
identity property, although it could have one.
Base feature class If this feature class inherits from another feature class,
select the superclass; otherwise select None. This setting
388 | Chapter 5 Managing Data
Feature class setting Description
applies only to feature classes (not non-feature classes)
and is available only if the provider supports inheritance.
Abstract If this feature class is an abstract class, click Yes; otherwise
click No. You can’t create features for an abstract class
but you can use it as a base class. This setting applies
only to features classes (not non-feature classes) and is
available only if the provider supports inheritance.
Identifier properties Specify which properties comprise the unique identifier
(for non-null primary-key values) for this feature class.
Use the check boxes to select one property for a simple
identifier or multiple properties for a compound identifier
(some providers support only simple identifiers). You first
must create the properties that you designate as identi-
fiers. Use the up-arrow and down-arrow buttons to re-
order the properties.
Constraints Enter a constraint for this feature class in the Constraints
box and then click New to apply it. Repeat this step to
create additional constraints if necessary. Use the up-ar-
row and down-arrow buttons to reorder the constraints.
To remove a constraint, select it and click Delete. This
setting applies to features only of this feature class and
is available only if the provider supports constraints.
Constraint syntax is provider-specific.
Locking Click Yes to enable locking; otherwise click No. A user
can use locking to take update control of features to the
exclusion of other users. This setting applies to features
only of this feature class and is available only if the
provider supports locking.
Long transaction Click Yes to enable long transactions; otherwise click No.
A long transaction is an administration unit that groups
conditional changes to one or many features. Long
transactions are used to create different versions of a
feature or set of features. This setting applies to features
Editing a Schema | 389
Feature class setting Description
only of this feature class and is available only if the
provider supports versioning.
The following table describes the settings that are available for a property.
Property setting Description
Name Enter the name of the property. This name, which will
appear in the Schema tree, must follow the naming rules
of the provider.
Type Select the property type:
■ A data property is a non-spatial property, an instance
of which contains a boolean, date/time, numeric,
character, BLOB, or other type of value. The data-
type list in the Data Attributes section updates dynam-
ically to show the types that the provider supports.
■ An instance of a geometry property contains an object
that represents one or more geometry types. In the
geometry-type list in the Data Attributes section, the
elements Point, Curve, and Surface refer to the
schema definition of the Open Geospatial Consortium
(OGC, http://www.opengeospatial.org) where these
elements are named Point, Polyline, and Polygon,
respectively. Dimensionality is independent of geom-
etry type and all geometries support all dimensional-
ities. All geometries must have the same dimension
defined by the hasElevation or hasMeassure at-
tributes. For example, a point can be defined by the
coordinates XY, XYZ, XYZM, or XYM, where Z is the
height above the ground and M (hasMeasure) is an
arbitrary measurement, such as a mile marker on a
highway. Not all providers support all dimensionali-
ties; SHP supports only XY points, for example,
whereas Oracle supports XY, XYZ, XYZM, and XYM
points. Similarly, not all providers support all geome-
try types.
■ An object property can define a single instance per
class instance (an address property of a land parcel,
390 | Chapter 5 Managing Data
Property setting Description
for example), or can represent a list of instances of
that class per instance of the owning class (multiple
inspection records as a property of an electrical device
feature class, for example). The list type of an object
property can be Value, Collection, or Ordered Collec-
tion. The Value type has a one-to-one relationship,
providing a single value for each property. The Col-
lection and Ordered Collection types have a one-to-
many relationship, where many object properties can
be associated with one property. Ordered Collections
can be stored in an ascending or descending order.
■ An association property is used to model a peer-to-
peer relationship between two classes. This relation-
ship is instantiated when the object is created. The
association property supports various cardinality set-
tings, cascading locks, and different delete rules.
Description Optionally enter a description of the property.
System generated Click Yes if you want the system to autogenerate values
for this property; otherwise click No. The Yes setting
typically is used for identifier properties whose values
identify each feature uniquely. This setting is available
only if the property’s data type (usually an integer or
GUID) supports autogeneration.
Data attributes Enter values for the attributes of the property. The list
changes dynamically to show the different attributes that
are available for the selected property type. Click an at-
tribute name to display its description to the right of the
name-value grid.
6 For a feature class and property, click the Physical Configurations tab to
edit the physical settings if necessary.
Each provider maps a correspondence between a schema element and a
physical object in a feature source. The physical structure of feature sources
varies by provider, as do the types of schema mappings and default
settings. Oracle, for example, maps each feature class onto a table in the
Editing a Schema | 391
Oracle database where the feature source resides, giving the class and
table the same name. You can override these defaults by changing the
settings on the Physical Configurations tab. The tab’s settings vary by
provider. The tab is unavailable for providers the don’t let you change
the defaults.
7 Click OK.
8 Repeat the preceding four steps as needed to edit other schema elements.
9 Click Apply to make all the changes permanent.
Deleting Schemas
In Schema Editor, deleting a schema, feature class, or property makes its icon
disappear from the Schema tree, along with the icons of any of its child
elements. Though the Schema tree reflects deletions visually, the changes
aren’t actually made permanent in the underlying feature source until you
apply them. If you delete a feature class, for example, the class and all its
properties vanish from the Schema tree but its table isn’t dropped from its
feature source until you click Apply. If you delete schema elements mistakenly,
you can undo (page 393) the changes as long as you haven’t clicked Apply.
Note that, for any provider, you can view (page 386) but not delete a schema,
feature class, or property for which feature data exist.
To delete schema elements
1 Connect (page 222) to the feature source containing the schema elements
that you want to delete.
2 At the top of the Task pane, choose Map Explorer from the Task
drop-down list.
3 In Map Explorer, right-click the desired connection in the connection
tree and then select Edit Schema from the shortcut menu.
Schema Editor opens.
4 Expand the Schema tree, right-click the schema, feature class, or property
that you want to delete, and then select Delete from the shortcut menu.
The Delete command indicates which type of schema element will be
deleted.
5 When prompted, click Yes to confirm the deletion.
392 | Chapter 5 Managing Data
The Schema tree updates to show the deletion.
6 Repeat the preceding two steps as needed to delete other schema elements.
7 Click Apply to make all the deletions permanent.
Undoing Schema Changes
Your actions in Schema Editor—renaming a schema, creating a new feature
class, or deleting a property, for example—are reflected visually in the Schema
tree and details pane but are not actually made permanent in the underlying
feature source until you save them by clicking Apply. If you’re editing a schema
element (schema, feature class, or property), you can undo all your edits to
that particular element by clicking Cancel in the details pane. Going a step
further, you can discard all your changes to all schema elements by clicking
Dismiss, which reverts the schema to its original state (since the last Apply).
Cancel and Dismiss have a broad scope; you can't use them to undo individual
edits as you would with a conventional Undo command.
To discard all changes to the schema element that you are currently editing
■ In the Schema Editor details pane, click Cancel.
To discard all schema changes
■ In Schema Editor, click Dismiss.
Copying Data from One Feature Source to Another
Bulk Copy lets you copy data from one feature source to another, either in
the same or a different format. You can copy either the complete feature source
or a subset based on specified schemas, feature classes, or properties. Bulk
Copy is useful if you want to:
■ Make your own copy of data owned by another department
■ Upgrade from file-based (SDF or SHP) to multi-user database-based storage
(Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, or Oracle) to benefit from advanced features
such as locking and versioning (long transactions)
■ Transform coordinate systems easily
Undoing Schema Changes | 393
■ Convert a foreign schema to a native format.
When using Bulk Copy, keep the following points in mind:
■ The copied schema is created if it does not exist in the destination feature
source
■ You can set a default value for a destination property if the source property
does not exist
■ The names of schemas, feature classes, and properties in the source feature
source do not need to match the names in the destination feature source
■ You can save or load an XML mapping file to set up the mapping between
the source and destination feature sources
■ By default, Bulk Copy stops processing when it encounters an insertion
error (caused by a constraint violation or low tablespace, for example) or
a data or geometry type mismatch between the source and destination;
you can use copying options to make Bulk Copy ignore these errors and
continue processing
■ You have the option to copy geometry with no transformation of the
coordinates
Bulk Copy supports the same properties (data, geometry, object, and
association) as Schema Editor (page 387), and retains the same property type
during copying. Not all providers support all property types, so Bulk Copy
offers the option to either ignore mismatches and continue copying or stop
processing if it encounters an unsupported property.
During copying, Bulk Copy retains the same data type when possible but will
perform a widening conversion if needed. For example, if the source data type
is byte but the destination does not support the byte data, Bulk Copy will
convert the byte data to int16 (or int32 or whatever next wider type is
available). Bulk Copy copies geometry properties as is, except that it will
convert an arc to a line if the destination does not support arcs. Bulk Copy
offers an ignore-and-continue or stop-processing option for data and geometric
type mismatches. This option is useful if a narrowing conversion is needed;
for example, the source contains int32 data but the destination supports only
int16.
394 | Chapter 5 Managing Data
Bulk Copy uses the following rules when copying an autogenerated identifier
from the source feature source:
■ If the identifier exists in the destination schema and is not autogenerated,
then the identifier is copied from the source feature source
■ If the identifier exists in the destination schema and is autogenerated, then
the identifier is generated by the destination provider
■ If the identifier does not exist in the destination schema and the destination
schema does not support autogenerated identifiers, then the schema is
created with a non-autogenerated identifier and the identifier is copied
from the source feature source
■ If the identifier does not exist in the destination schema and the destination
schema supports autogenerated identifiers, then the schema is created with
an autogenerated identifier and the identifier is generated by the
destination provider
To copy data from one feature source to another
1 Connect (page 222) to the source and destination feature sources.
2 At the top of the Task pane, choose Map Explorer from the Task
drop-down list.
3 Click Tools ➤ Bulk Copy.
Bulk Copy opens.
4 Under Data Source, select the source feature source in the Connection
Name list.
5 If the source feature source supports versioning, select a version in the
source Version list.
6 Under Data Destination, select the destination feature source in the
Connection Name list.
7 If the destination feature source supports versioning, select a version in
the destination Version list.
The source and destination schema trees update automatically when you
choose a connection and version.
8 On the Data Source schema tree, use the check boxes to select the
individual schemas, features classes, and properties of the data to copy
to the destination feature source.
Copying Data from One Feature Source to Another | 395
Selecting any schema element automatically selects all its child elements
(selecting a feature class also selects all its properties, for example). A
square (instead of a check) in a check box means that some of that
element’s children are not selected.
9 On the Data Destination schema tree, use the drop-down lists to to choose
existing schemas, features classes, and properties or create new ones.
10 In the Set Default Value section, use the settings to define the data type
and default value for new destination properties.
11 Check the Ignore Insert Errors and Ignore Unmatched Data or Geometric
Type options if you want Bulk Copy to ignore insertion and
type-mismatch errors and continue processing. Uncheck these options
if you want Bulk Copy to stop processing and report errors when they
occur.
12 Choose whether to transform the coordinate system.
If the Ignore Coordinate System option is checked then no coordinate
transformation will be applied between the source and destination. If it
is unchecked then for each feature that is copied, the source feature’s
coordinates will be transformed to match the coordinate system of the
destination.
13 To save the current settings in an XML mapping file, click Save Mappings.
Click Load Mappings to open a saved mapping file (before loading a
mapping file, connect to the source and destination feature sources).
14 Click Copy.
The data for the specified schema elements is copied from the source
feature source to the destination feature source. Bulk Copy reports
warnings and errors depending on the data, formats of two feature sources,
and selected copying options.
Setting Up Database Users
The FdoUserManager command-line utility lets you manage database users
and accounts consistently across DBMSes. Its menu-driven interface lets you
choose a database provider and connection and then presents you with a
provider-specific task list, including:
■ Add, drop, or list users
■ Assign, revoke, or list roles and privileges
396 | Chapter 5 Managing Data
■ Grant, revoke, or list access to feature sources (data stores)
Note that database users are not the same as Autodesk Map 3D users, which
are managed separately (page 70).
To manage database users and accounts
1 Start FdoUserManager.
FdoUserManager is located by default in \Program Files\Autodesk Map
3D\FDO\bin\. To start it, either double-click FdoUserManager.exe in
Windows Explorer or type FdoUserManager at a command prompt. (To
invoke FdoUserManager from any prompt, add its directory to your path.)
2 At the Choose a Provider menu, type the digit that corresponds to your
provider and then press Enter.
3 Enter each connection parameter when prompted and press Enter.
For example, enter the required service name and username/password.
For more information, contact your database administrator.
4 After you are connected, follow the onscreen instructions.
5 When you are finished, type 0 (zero) to exit FdoUserManager.
Setting Up Database Users | 397
Visualization and Styling
6
In this chapter
■ Overview of Visualization and
Styling
■ Working With the Display
Manager
■ Styling Features
■ Styling Drawing Layers
■ Controlling Display Order
■ Adding a Legend
■ Setting Map Scale
■ Viewing Raster Images
399
Overview of Visualization and Styling
This topic describes using the Display Manager to create styles for features
and drawing objects in your maps. For example, create a map for a road crew
that highlights all roads that need to be paved. Create a map for a city planning
department that highlights all lots within 100 meters of a proposed highway.
The methods for styling features and drawing objects are different. For more
information about feature and drawing objects, see Understanding Feature
Data and Drawing Data (page 436).
Apply styles to features and drawing objects. You can combine styles, for example,
combine a thick black line with a dotted yellow line.
In addition to styling features and drawing objects, you can change the display
order and specify different styles for different views based on scale.
The styles you create for the map do not affect the actual objects in your map.
400 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
Working With the Display Manager
The Display Manager displays styles for feature layers and drawing object
layers. Drawing object layers are listed in italic text. Different operations are
available for feature and drawing layers. Right-click a layer to see the available
commands.
To display the Display Manager
1 Click View menu ➤ Task Pane.
2 From the Task list in the Task Pane, click select Display Manager.
Styling Features
You can specify properties that control how features appear on a map. For
example, you can specify the scale ranges at which a feature is visible, set line
color, and add labels. To specify styles for a layer, you define a style for a scale
range. By default, 0 - Infinity is the only scale range. Add narrower scale ranges
as you define styles to define how the data should appear at various scales.
For example, you could create one scale range that displays roads with thick
lines when you zoom in, and create a second scale range that displays roads
with thin lines when you zoom out.
You can also create a theme, which displays data in varying styles to indicate
different values. For more information, see Creating Themes (page 738).
Default styles are applied to features. When you add point and polygon features
to the map, they appear with a default line and fill style. Polylines are given
a default line style. Each layer is given a distinctive color. For example,
polygons are filled with a color that is different from other polygon layers
that are already in the map. Change the default styles as needed.
To style feature layers
■ Overview of Visualization and Styling
■ Working With the Display Manager
■ Styling Features
■ Styling Drawing Layers
■ Controlling Display Order
■ Adding a Legend
■ Setting Map Scale
Working With the Display Manager | 401
■ Viewing Raster Images
Understanding Scale Ranges
A scale range specifies the zoom level at which a particular style is applied to
the display of your features. When the zoom level of the map is within the
specified scale range, Autodesk Map 3D redraws the features as specified by
the style associated with the scale ranges.
The style is applied when the zoom level is greater than or equal to the From
value and less than the To value. When setting up adjacent scale ranges, use
the same To value as the next range's From value. For example, if one range
is 0 - 20,000 set the next range to 20,000 - 40,000.
Defining Scale Ranges
The first step in creating styles is to define your scale ranges.
NOTE When setting up multiple scale ranges for a map, make sure that they do
not overlap. For example, the ranges 500,000 - 5,000,000 and 2,000,000 -
10,000,000 overlap. In such cases, when the zoom level is within the overlapping
scale range, Autodesk Map 3D displays the features using the style of the first scale
range listed.
To define scale ranges
1 In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer.
2 Click Edit Display Style to display the Style Editor.
3 In the Style Editor, in the Scale Ranges area, under From, enter the lower
end of the scale range. Under To, enter the upper end of the scale range.
For example, to make a style visible when the map is zoomed anywhere
between 1:250,000 and 1:5,000,000, enter 250000 for From and enter
5000000 for To.
4 To add a new scale range, click Add A Scale Range.
5 Specify From and To values.
6 When working with scale ranges:
■ To copy a scale range, select the range and click Duplicate.
402 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
■ To delete a scale range, select the range and click Delete.
■ To change the position of a scale in the list, select the range and click
Move Up or Move Down.
Quick Reference
Update Display Manager
Refreshes the current display
Task Pane Right-click the Display Manager. Click Update
Styling Point Features
Use symbols to represent and display point features.
If precise placement of labels is important, you can display labels instead of
symbols at feature point locations. For more information, see Displaying Fixed
Labels at Point Locations (page 409). You can also specify whether other labels
on other layers should obscure symbols on this layer. For more information,
see Allowing Labels to Obscure Points (page 409).
To apply styles to points
1 In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer that contains points.
2 Click Edit Display Style.
3 In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style.
For more information about scale ranges, see Understanding Scale Ranges
(page 402).
4 In the Point Style area for the selected scale range, click the box under
Style.
5 In the Style Point dialog box, select the Style A Point Symbol check box.
6 For Symbol, click .
Styling Point Features | 403
7 In the Select A Symbol dialog box, specify a symbol library and a symbol.
Click OK.
8 For Size Context, specify the type of units:
■ Select Device Space to specify symbol widths and heights in screen
units. Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters.
■ Select Map Space to specify symbol widths and heights in Mapping
Coordinate System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards,
Miles, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers.
9 For Units, select the type of units to use.
10 For Width, enter the symbol width or specify the width using a number
expression.
For more information, see the Number Expression dialog box (page 1030).
11 For Height, enter the symbol height or specify the height using a number
expression.
For more information, see the Number Expression dialog box (page 1030).
12 To maintain width-to-height proportions when you change the width
or height of the symbol, select the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box.
13 To change the fill and edge colors of the symbol, use the Fill Color and
Edge Color lists.
If you do not change the colors, the default colors from the symbol are
used.
14 For Rotation, do one of the following:
■ Enter the amount to rotate the symbol.
■ Click Any Angle. Specify the angle using the slider or enter an angle
in the box. Click OK.
■ Click Expression. Specify the rotation using a number expression.
For more information, see the Number Expression dialog box (page
1030).
15 Click OK.
404 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
Styling Line Features
Specify the thickness, color, and pattern of polyline features. Style a single
line or build a composite line with several components and then style each
component. For example, to illustrate a highway, create a thick black line and
add a thinner, dashed, yellow line.
To apply styles to lines
1 In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer that contains lines.
2 Click Edit Display Style.
3 In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style.
For more information about scale ranges, see Understanding Scale Ranges
(page 402).
4 In the Line Style area for the selected scale range, click the box under
Style.
5 In the Style Line dialog box, select the Apply Styles To The Line check
box.
6 To style a single line, do the following:
■ For Units (Device Space), select the type of units to measure line
thickness.
Lines are specified in Device Space units.
■ Use the lists to specify polyline thickness, color, and pattern.
NOTE Select 0 thickness to draw the line as thinly as possible.
7 To build a composite line, do the following:
■ Click Create Composite Lines to expand the Style Line dialog box.
■ Style the first line in the composite.
■ Click New to add a new component to the line.
■ Style the new component as desired.
■ Control the position of the selected component in the overall
composite line by clicking the up and down arrows.
8 Click OK.
Styling Line Features | 405
Styling Area Features
Specify the fill style and color, background color, edge style and color, and
line thickness used to draw area (polygon) features.
To apply styles to areas
1 In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer that contains polygons.
2 Click Edit Display Style.
3 In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style.
For more information about scale ranges, see Understanding Scale Ranges
(page 402).
4 In the Area Style area for the selected scale range, click the box under
Style.
5 To fill polygons, in the Style Area dialog box, select the Apply Fill To The
Area check box.
6 For Fill Pattern, select Solid or a pattern.
■ If you specified Solid fill, specify Foreground Transparency and
Foreground Color.
■ If you specified a pattern fill, specify colors for Foreground Color and
Background Color. If you do not want a background color for the
pattern, click Transparent for Background Color.
NOTE In polygons with transparent backgrounds, the colors you see on
the map may differ from the colors displayed in the preview frame because
the preview frame always uses a white background, which may differ from
the color beneath the transparent objects in your map.
7 To add borders to polygons, select the Apply A Border To The Area check
box and then do the following:
■ For Line Pattern, specify the pattern for the area border.
■ For Units (Device Space), select the type of units to use to measure
border thickness.
■ For Line Thickness, specify a thickness for the area border.
NOTE Select 0 thickness to draw the border as thin as possible.
406 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
■ For Line Color, specify a color for the area border.
8 Click OK.
Adding Labels to Features
Add labels to features on feature layers. The label is placed near the line, point
symbol, or polygon. For point layers, if precise placement is important, display
the label at a point location. For more information, see Displaying Fixed Labels
at Point Locations (page 409). If a feature label obscures another label, it is not
displayed. Feature labels are drawn on top of point symbols, lines, and
polygons. By default, feature labels will not obscure point symbols. You can
allow feature labels to obscure point symbols. For more information, see
Allowing Labels to Obscure Points (page 409).
NOTE For performance reasons, the maximum number of labeIs drawn is 1000.
If the total number of labels obscures geometry, the labels are not drawn.
Specify the label text, font, size, format, color, background style and color,
alignment, and rotation of the label.
To label features
1 In Display Manager right-click a feature layer containing the features to
label.
2 Click Edit Display Style.
3 In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style.
For more information about scale ranges, see Understanding Scale Ranges
(page 402).
4 In the style geometry area for the selected scale range, click the box under
Feature Label.
5 In the Style Label dialog box, select the Style check box.
6 For Property To Display, do one of the following:
■ Select a property.
■ Select Expression to use Text Expression dialog box to specify label
text.
For more information, see the Text Expression dialog box (page 1039).
Adding Labels to Features | 407
7 For Font, select a font from the list.
8 For Size Context, specify the type of units:
■ Select Device Space to specify symbol widths and heights in screen
units. Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters.
■ Select Map Space to specify symbol widths and heights in Mapping
Coordinate System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards,
Miles, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers.
9 For Units, select the type of units to use.
10 For Size, enter the text size or specify the size using a number expression.
For more information, see the Number Expression dialog box (page 1030).
11 To apply bold, italic, or underlining, click one or more of the Format
options.
12 For Text Color, click a color.
13 To specify a background style, from the Background Style list click one
of the following:
■ Ghosted: Draws an opaque border around each character. Use
Background Color to specify a color for the outline.
■ Opaque: Draws a background behind the labels. They are displayed
as rectangles with text inside. Use Background Color to specify a color
for the rectangles.
■ Transparent: No background is applied to the labels, which are
displayed only as text on the map.
14 For Ghosted and Opaque background styles, click a color in the
Background Color list.
15 If you are adding labels to a polyline layer, use Vertical Alignment to
specify the label position.
You can select one of the available positions or select a layer property
that contains alignment information for each feature.
NOTE Horizontal and vertical alignment settings are not available for area
layers. Only the vertical alignment setting is available for line layers. Horizontal
and vertical alignment settings are available for point layers that display fixed
labels instead of symbols. For more information, see Displaying Fixed Labels
at Point Locations (page 409).
408 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
16 For Rotation, do one of the following:
■ Enter the amount to rotate the text.
■ Click Any Angle. Specify the angle using the slider or enter an angle
in the box. Click OK.
■ Click Expression. Specify the rotation using a number expression.
For more information about creating a number expression, see the
Number Expression dialog box (page 1030).
17 Click OK.
18 Click File menu ➤ Save.
Allowing Labels to Obscure Points
Autodesk Map 3D will not draw a label if it blocks a point symbol on another
layer. The label will be drawn when you zoom in far enough to allow sufficient
space to display it. You can specify that labels on other layers be allowed to
obscure points on the selected layer.
To allow labels to obscure points on the selected layer
1 In the Display Manager, select the point layer. Click the Display button.
2 In the Style Editor, click Allow Other Labels To Obscure Feature Symbols
On This Layer.
3 Click File menu ➤ Save.
Displaying Fixed Labels at Point Locations
If exact placement of labels is important, disable the point style and place
fixed labels at feature locations.
NOTE Fixed labels are always displayed, even if they obscure other labels or
features. While feature labels are drawn after all layer features have been drawn,
fixed labels are drawn according to the draw order of their layer within a map,
and may be obscured by features from other layers.
Allowing Labels to Obscure Points | 409
To place labels at points
1 In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style.
For more information about scale ranges, see Understanding Scale Ranges
(page 402).
2 Select the Labels Are Fixed (Not Dynamic) check box.
3 In the style geometry area for the selected scale range, click the box under
Style.
4 To remove the point symbol, in the Style Point dialog box, clear the Style
a Point Symbol check box. Click OK.
5 In the style geometry area for the selected scale range, click the box under
Feature Label.
6 To turn on and style the label, in the Style Label dialog box, select the
Style check box.
7 Specify label text and style.
For more information about feature labels, see Adding Labels to Features
(page 407).
8 Use the Horizontal Alignment and Vertical Alignment lists to specify the
position of the label relative to the feature.
You can select one of the available positions or select a layer property
that contains alignment information for each feature. The alignment
values in the property must be specified as follows:
■ Horizontal: Left, Center, or Right.
■ Vertical: Baseline, Bottom, Capline, Halfline, or Top.
9 Click File menu ➤ Save.
Saving Styled Feature Layers
After you have styled feature layers, you can save the connection and styling
information to LAYER files that you can share with other users. A LAYER file
contains connection and style information only, no feature data. For more
information, see Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer (page 927).
410 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
Loading Styled Feature Layers
When you load a LAYER file, Autodesk Map 3D adds the source file to the
Map Explorer, creates the connection, adds the feature layer to the Display
Manager, and styles the layer correctly. Drag/drop the LAYER file to Display
Manager.
To load a LAYER file
■ Drag and drop the LAYER file to the Display Manager.
Styling Drawing Layers
When you define a style for a drawing layer, you specify how to style drawing
objects on that layer. In other words, you define how you want the drawing
objects to look.
To style drawing layers
■ Overview of Visualization and Styling
■ Working With the Display Manager
■ Styling Features
■ Styling Drawing Layers
■ Controlling Display Order
■ Adding a Legend
■ Setting Map Scale
■ Viewing Raster Images
Overview of Styling Drawing Layers
When you define a style for a layer, you specify how to style drawing objects
on that layer.
Style the drawing objects in your map by creating layers and then applying
one or more styles to the selected layer.
Loading Styled Feature Layers | 411
TIP For better performance, create a new map rather than modifying the default
map. There are circumstances when the default map is automatically displayed,
and if this map has a lot of objects, it could take a while to display.
■ A single map can have many drawing layers.
■ You can specify a different style for each drawing layer in your map, and
combine multiple styles for a single layer.
■ You can create a theme for a drawing layer. A theme varies the style based
on data associated with the object, for example, a darker color to represent
a higher traffic volume. For more information about theming drawing
layers, see Theming Drawing Data (page 749).
You can apply one or more styles to layers in your map.
If a drawing object is a member of more than one drawing layer, it is styled
by each layer of which it is a member. For example, if a line is in both the
Transportation layer and the Roads object class layer, it will be styled by both
layers. If the layers specify conflicting style or visibility settings, the drawing
object uses the style and visibility settings of whichever layer is higher in the
Display Manager list.
Style objects by changing one or more of the following:
■ Color
■ Linetype
■ Linetype scale
■ Lineweight
412 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
■ Plot style
■ Symbol or image used to represent objects
■ Adding hatch
■ Adding text
■ Adding annotation
To create a map with styled drawing layers
1 In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Map.
2 In the Current Map box, enter a name for the new map.
3 Select the objects to stylize. (page 245)
Each set of drawing objects is a drawing layer.
4 For each layer, specify a style (page 417) or a theme (page 749).
5 Optionally:
■ Change the display order of drawing layers. Layers at the top of the
list appear on top of other layers.
■ Specify different styles at different view scales. (page 424)
6 Create a legend (page 431).
To Do This Click Description
Display the Display Manag- Click View menu ➤ Task Use the Display Manager to style features and
er Pane. From the Task list, drawing objects in your maps, and to update
click Display Manager. the display for different drawing scale thresh-
olds.
Create a drawing layer In the Display Manager, A drawing layer is a set of objects. Each layer
click Data ➤ Add Draw- can have its own style. See Accessing Drawing
ing Data. Click the type Objects (page 245).
of layer to create.
Overview of Styling Drawing Layers | 413
To Do This Click Description
Query objects in the cur- In the Display Manager, A query lets you define conditions to select
rent drawing click Data ➤ Add Draw- specific objects. See Accessing Drawing Objects
ing Data ➤ Query Cur- (page 245).
rent Drawing.
Query objects in attached In the Display Manager, A query lets you define conditions to select
drawings click Data ➤ Add Draw- specific objects. See Accessing Drawing Objects
ing Data ➤ Query Source (page 245).
Drawings.
Create a style Right-click a layer. Click Change color, linetype, linetype scale,
Add Style, and then lineweight, or plotstyle; change the symbol
choose the type of style used to represent the objects; or add hatch,
to create. text, or annotation for objects using this style.
See Creating a Style (page 418).
Create a theme style Right-click a layer. Click A theme varies the style based on data associ-
Add Style ➤ Theme ated with the object. See Overview of Theme
Styles (page 750).
Import a theme or map Click Data ➤ Add Draw- You can import a theme or map you created
from a previous version of ing Data ➤ Import Old in a previous version of Autodesk Map 3D.
Autodesk Map 3D Theme or Import Old
Map.
Turn a style on or off Select or clear the check When a style is turned off, drawing objects are
box next to the style displayed without styles.
name in the Display
Manager.
Create a new scale thresh- In the Display Manager, Use scale thresholds to change drawing layer
old click Tools ➤ Show styles as you zoom in or out, for example, turn
text off as you zoom out. Close the lock icon
on the Status Bar to link scale and style.
414 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
To Do This Click Description
Thresholds. Click the thin NOTE This functionality applies to drawing
down arrow next to the layers only. Feature layers use scale ranges. For
Threshold list, and then more information, see Understanding Scale
click Duplicate. Enter the Ranges (page 402).
new threshold and click
OK.
Change the display order Drag the layer up or Layers are drawn from the bottom up. Objects
of layers down in the Display in the layer at the top of the Display Manager
Manager. You can use the are drawn last and appear on top of other ob-
Organization or Draw Or- jects. If an object is a member of more than
der view to change the one layer, it is drawn based on the highest
display order. The Draw layer to which it belongs. The Draw Order view
Order view is useful for takes precedence over the order in the Organi-
defining a display order zation view.
that is different from the
way you organize layers
in the Display Manager or
in the legend. To change
views, click View ➤ Orga-
nization or Draw Order.
Hide objects in a layer Clear the check box next If a layer is turned off, objects from that layer
to the layer name are hidden.
Add a legend In the Display Manager, The legend lists the styles used in the map. See
click Tools ➤ Create Leg- Adding a Legend (page 430).
end
Update the drawing Right-click the Display Reloads the entire drawing, including rereading
Manager. Click Update. attribute data, reevaluating expressions for
styles and themes, and requerying layers. To
update a single layer, right-click the layer. Click
Update.
Refresh the Display Manag- On the command line, You may sometimes need to refresh the items
er enter mapwsrefresh. in the Display Manager. This operation does
not affect the drawing.
Overview of Styling Drawing Layers | 415
Quick Reference
Update Display Manager
Refreshes the current display
Task Pane Right-click the Display Manager. Click Update
Styling a Drawing Layer
When you define a style for a layer, you specify how to style objects on that
layer.
To style a drawing layer
1 Select the layer.
2 Do one of the following:
■ Create a new style. (page 418)
■ Create a theme style.
■ Copy an existing style.
■ Reference a library style. (page 424)
■ Create a theme (page 749).
3 If you want, add another style to the element (page 420).
Symbol styles can be combined only with other symbol styles. Themes
cannot be combined with any other styles.
4 You can save your style (page 422) in the Display Library.
5 If your map does not look exactly as desired, modify the style (page 421).
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Style
Creates a new Display Manager style
416 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click a layer ➤ Add Style ➤
(select a style type)
Creating a Style
You can define a style for a drawing layer in a map. All the drawing objects
on this layer will be displayed using the style.
You can create more than one style for a drawing layer. The styles overlay each other.
Style Types
Entity Specifies color, linetype, linetype scale,
lineweight, and plotstyle for drawing ob-
jects using this style.
Annotation Adds annotation, such as text, blocks, im-
ages, and information based on object
properties, to drawing objects using this
style.
Hatch Adds hatch to drawing objects using this
style.
Creating a Style | 417
Style Types
Symbol Uses symbols such as blocks or annotation
to represent drawing objects using this
style. Can be combined with other symbol
styles only.
Text Adds text to drawing objects using this
style.
Raster Image Specifies brightness, contrast, and fade for
images using this style.
Theme Displays the Thematic Mapping dialog
box, where you can create a theme style.
All the properties of the style are displayed on the Display tab of the Properties palette,
where you can view or modify them.
See also:
■ Saving a Display Style in the Library (page 422)
■ Referencing a Library Style (page 423)
■ Creating Themes for Drawing Layers (page 749)
To create a display style
1 In Display Manager, right-click the layer to style. Click Add Style, and
then choose the type of style to create.
418 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
2 ■ Entity Style
■ Hatch Style
■ Text Style
■ Raster Image Style
■ Annotation Style
■ Symbol Style
3 Select the style.
4 If the Properties palette is not already visible, click the Display button.
5 On the Display tab of the Properties palette, specify style settings.
NOTE When entering an expression, you may need to first select an item
from the list. Click to display the Edit Expression dialog box (page 985).
NOTE If drawing objects are not stylized, remember that the Display Manager
does not stylize civil objects or drawing objects that have been queried into the
current drawing using a standard Query. For information about stylizing civil
objects, see the Civil Extension section of the help. To stylize drawing objects from
attached drawings, see Overview of Selecting Objects for Your Map (page 245).
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Style
Creates a new Display Manager style
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click a layer ➤ Add Style ➤
(select a style type)
Combining Styles
You can combine styles for a single drawing layer.
Combining Styles | 419
Style roads by combining a thick continuous black line with a thin dotted yellow line.
Styles are rendered from bottom to top. That is, the bottom style in the list is
rendered first.
NOTE Symbol styles can only be combined with other symbol styles. Themes
cannot be combined with any other styles.
See also:
■ Creating a Style (page 417)
NOTE If the layer has a symbol style applied, you can only combine it with other
symbol styles. You cannot combine a theme with any other styles.
To add a display style to a layer
1 Select the layer.
2 Do one of the following:
■ Create a new style. (page 418)
■ Copy an existing style.
■ Reference a library style. (page 424)
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Style
Creates a new Display Manager style
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click a layer ➤ Add Style ➤
(select a style type)
Modifying a Style
The properties of the style are displayed on the Display tab of the Properties
palette. Modify the settings as desired.
420 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
Modify style settings on the Properties palette.
Style Referencing
If a style references another style, any changes to the style in one location are
automatically reflected in any other locations where the style is used. If you
turn off referencing for a style, any additional changes you make to that style
do not affect the other locations.
See also:
■ Creating a Style (page 417)
■ Referencing a Library Style (page 423)
■ Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale Threshold (page 426)
To modify a display style
1 In Display Manager, click the style.
2 If the Properties palette is not already visible, click the Display button.
3 On the Display tab of the Properties palette, modify style settings.
To hide the drawing objects in a layer
■ Clear the check box next to the layer's name in Display Manager.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Modifying a Style | 421
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Saving a Display Style in the Library
If you plan to use a style more than once, you can save it in the Display Library.
Once a style is saved in the library, you can drag it to a drawing layer.
NOTE If you drag a style from the Library to a drawing layer, the style is referenced.
If you copy and paste the style, a new style is created.
When you drag a style from the library, you can reference the library style.
When a style references a library style, any changes to the style in one location
are automatically reflected in the other location.
TIP To have a layer look the same at all scale thresholds, store the style in the
Display Library. Then, at every scale threshold, reference the Library style. This
way, you can automatically modify the style at every scale threshold by updating
the style in the Display Library.
See also:
■ Creating a Style (page 417)
■ Referencing a Library Style (page 423)
To save a style to the Display Library
1 In Display Manager, right-click the style to save. Click Copy.
2 If the Display Library is not already displayed, click Tools ➤ Show Library.
3 On the Display Styles tab of the Display Library, right-click, and choose
Paste.
422 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
Note that the style is not referenced. Only dragging from the Library to the
drawing layer creates a referenced style.
TIP You can also create styles from within the Display Library. Right-click in the
Display Library. Click Add Style, and define the style. For more information on
creating styles, see Creating a Style (page 418).
To create a new category in the Display Library
1 On the Display Library palette, right-click the Display Styles tab. Click
Add Category.
NOTE You must right-click the tab and not in the palette.
2 To change the name of the tab, right-click the tab name. Click Rename.
Enter a name for the tab.
Quick Reference
Display Library Palette
Turns the Display Library palette on and off
Command Line MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY
Task Pane In Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Show Library or
Hide Library
Copy Display Manager Style
Copies a Display Manager style
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the style ➤ Copy
Referencing a Library Style
Use a style from the Display Library.
Example: The Display Library has a style called "Pipes" that colors drawing
objects blue. Reference this style from any pipe layer.
When you drag a style from the library, the style in the layer references the
style in the Display Library.
Referencing a Library Style | 423
If a style references a library style, any changes to the style in one location are
automatically reflected in any other locations where the style is used. That is,
if you modify the style in the Display Manager, the style in the Display Library
is automatically updated, as are any other styles that reference the style in the
Display Library.
If you turn off referencing for a style, any additional changes you make to
that style do not affect the other locations.
NOTE Once you turn off referencing for a style, you cannot turn it back on.
See also:
■ Creating a Style (page 417)
■ Saving a Display Style in the Library (page 422)
To reference a style from the Display Library
1 If the Display Library is not already displayed, in Display Manager, click
Tools ➤ Show Library.
2 Select the style in the Display Library.
3 Drag it onto the drawing layer to stylize in the Display Manager.
To turn off style referencing
1 In Display Manager, click the style for which to turn off referencing.
2 If the Properties palette is not already displayed, right-click the style.
Click Properties.
3 On the Display tab of the Properties palette, under Style, click the box
next to Reference and select No.
NOTE Once you turn off referencing for a style, you cannot turn it back on.
Defining Scale Thresholds for Drawing Layers
In Display Manager, you can specify different styles for different scale
thresholds.
424 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
To define scale thresholds
■ Overview of Visualization and Styling
■ Working With the Display Manager
■ Styling Features
■ Styling Drawing Layers
■ Controlling Display Order
■ Adding a Legend
■ Setting Map Scale
■ Viewing Raster Images
Overview of Display Manager Scale Thresholds
You can define different styles at different scale thresholds.
Example: Turn on the display of road names only when the drawing scale
factor is below 1:5000
Create or modify a scale threshold
■ To create or modify a scale threshold (page 426)
■ To view a layer's styles at all scale thresholds (page 428)
Quick Reference
Compare Display Manager Scale Thresholds
For the selected layer, lists the Display Manager styles for each scale threshold
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the layer and choose
Compare Thresholds
New Display Manager Scale Threshold
Creates a new Display Manager scale threshold
Task Pane In Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Show Thresholds.
Click the thin down arrow next to the Threshold list
and choose Duplicate.
Defining Scale Thresholds for Drawing Layers | 425
Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale
Threshold
In a map, you can specify different styles for different scale thresholds.
Example: Turn on the display of road names only when the drawing scale
factor is below 1:3.
Referenced Styles
To display a layer the same way at multiple scale thresholds, save the styles
to the Library. For each new scale threshold, reference the style in the Library.
Any changes you make to the style at one scale threshold are reflected at the
other scale thresholds.
Turn off referencing for the styles that change from one scale threshold to the
next.
Example: Reference the Library Style for the Road layer at all scale thresholds
except when you are zoomed out. For that scale threshold, turn off referencing
so you can change the display of roads when you zoom out.
See also:
■ Viewing Styles at All Scale Thresholds (page 428)
■ Accessing Drawing Objects (page 245)
To create or modify a scale threshold
1 Zoom the drawing to the scale factor for which you will be creating or
modifying the threshold.
2 In the Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Show Thresholds to display the
Threshold list.
3 Click the thin down arrow next to the Threshold list and click Duplicate.
4 In the New Threshold dialog box, enter the new threshold value. Click
OK.
5 Modify any of the styles that will be different at this scale threshold.
If the styles reference a Library Style, turn off referencing for the selected
style before you modify it. To turn off style referencing, select the style.
On the Display tab of the Properties palette, next to Reference, select No.
426 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
If you do not turn off Reference, any changes you make to the style in
this scale threshold are automatically reflected in any styles that reference
this style.
NOTE When creating and modifying styles, you can specify how you want to
display styles as you change scale thresholds.
■ Close the lock icon on the Status Bar if you want the drawing
window to update using the appropriate styles for the each drawing scale
threshold. Styles will change as you adjust the scale threshold.
■ Open the lock icon on the Status Bar if you want the drawing
window to update using the styles for the scale threshold that is currently
displayed. Styles will not change as you zoom.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Scale Threshold
Creates a new Display Manager scale threshold
Task Pane In Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Show Thresholds.
Click the thin down arrow next to the Threshold list
and choose Duplicate.
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Defining Scale Thresholds for Drawing Layers | 427
Viewing Styles at All Scale Thresholds
You can view a layer's styles for each scale threshold in the map.
For the layer Roads, note how the drawing layer styles display more information as
you zoom in.
See also:
■ Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale Threshold (page 426)
To view a layer's styles at all scale thresholds
1 In Display Manager, right-click the layer.
2 Click Show Thresholds.
For the selected layer, the Compare Thresholds palette lists the styles for
each scale threshold defined in the map.
3 To view the styles for a different layer, select the layer in Display Manager.
The Compare Thresholds palette displays the styles for the new layer.
TIP You can add a style to a layer by dragging it from the Display Library or
another scale threshold and dropping it on the scale where you want to add it.
428 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
Quick Reference
Compare Display Manager Scale Thresholds
For the selected layer, lists the Display Manager styles for each scale threshold
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the layer and choose
Compare Thresholds
Controlling Display Order
Layers in the map are displayed in the order they are displayed in the Display
Manager draw order view; layers higher in the list are drawn in front of layers
lower down.
You can change the display order by moving layers up or down in the list.
For example, to display drawing objects in front of a raster image, put the
raster layer at the bottom of the list.
To change the order of layers
1 In Display Manager, click the layer to move.
Controlling Display Order | 429
NOTE You can use the Organization view or Draw Order view to change the
display order. The Draw Order view is useful for defining a display order that
is different from the way you organize layers in the Display Manager or in
the legend. To change views, click View ➤ Organization or Draw Order.
Once you adjust the Draw Order view, the Organization view has no impact
on Draw Order.
2 Drag the layer up or down in the list.
Drawing objects from layers higher in the list are drawn on top of drawing
objects from layers lower in the list.
To turn on or off layers
■ In Display Manager, select or clear the check box next to the layer name.
To turn on or off styles
■ In Display Manager, select or clear the check box next to the style name.
Adding a Legend
A legend lists the styles in your map.
The legend describes the styles used in your map.
430 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
Legend Style
By default, legends use the Legend table style. To change your legend style,
modify the Legend table style using the TABLESTYLE command. For more
information, see the AutoCAD help.
To create and modify the legend, do any of the following operations.
To create a legend
1 Zoom the drawing to the desired scale threshold.
The default legend size is based on the window size when the legend is
created.
2 Click Tools ➤ Create Legend.
3 Click a spot in the drawing to place the legend.
To change the size of thumbnails
1 In Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Map Properties.
2 On the Display tab of the Properties palette, in the Legend area, enter a
new value for thumbnail height or width.
You can turn on or off the thumbnail frame.
3 Click Tools ➤ Update Legend.
The thumbnail settings affect both the legend and the Display Manager.
To change the icon used for thumbnails
1 In Display Manager, click a drawing layer.
Click the Display button to display the Properties palette if it is not
displayed.
2 On the Display tab of the Properties palette, next to Thumbnail Preview,
select the style of thumbnail to use.
For example, select the polyline icon to display an icon of a wavy line,
or choose the polygon icon to display hatch or fill.
The thumbnail settings affect both the legend and the Display Manager.
Adding a Legend | 431
To edit titles or text in the legend
1 Use the Properties palette to revise layer titles in the Display Manager.
2 Click Tools ➤ Update Legend.
To change legend settings or use a different style
1 Select the legend.
2 In the Properties palette, change any setting.
To edit the Legend table style
1 At the command prompt, enter tablestyle.
2 In the Table Style dialog box, do one of the following:
■ Select the Legend style and click Modify.
■ Click New to create a new table style and specify a name for the style.
3 In the Modify Table Style dialog box, specify the settings.
To update the Legend
■ Click Tools ➤ Update Legend.
Quick Reference
Display Manager Legend
Creates a Display Manager legend
Task Pane In Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Create Legend
Setting Map Scale
The scale control indicates and sets your current stylization scale. The list
includes all the scale ranges (for feature data) and thresholds (for drawing
data) defined in the current map. If you link scale to zoom by closing the lock
icon, styles update appropriately as you adjust the zoom, and zoom updates
432 | Chapter 6 Visualization and Styling
when you select a scale. If you use the custom scale box, the correct style is
applied based on where the custom value lands within the scale ranges and
thresholds.
To set the map scale
1 To link style to scale, close the lock icon on the Status Bar.
2 On the Status Bar, select a scale from the list or
click Custom and enter a value in the Scale box.
Viewing Raster Images
When you zoom in on a raster image you can requery the image from the
source to improve the display. Use the Query To View tool to improve the
display of raster feature data as you zoom. This tool requeries just the displayed
portion of the image. When you zoom out, use the Zoom To Extents tool for
the feature layer to display the full extents for the zoom position.
NOTE This functionality applies only to maps with raster-based surfaces that have
been added with Data Connect.
To requery a raster image
1 Display the raster image at the desired zoom level.
2 In the Display Manager, right-click the image layer. Click Query To View.
To zoom to image extents
1 Zoom out as desired.
The image will be cropped by the previous Query To View operation.
2 Right-click the image layer. Click Zoom To Extents.
Quick Reference
Viewing Raster Images | 433
Creating and Editing Data
7
In this chapter
■ Understanding Feature Data and
Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
435
Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
Autodesk Map 3D works on two distinct types of objects: features and drawing
objects.
■ Features are GIS objects stored in external files and databases. Display
and edit them in your map and then save the changes back to the original
source.
■ Drawing objects are AutoCAD objects stored within a map or retrieved
from attached drawings using queries. Save changes to drawing objects in
the current map or back to the attached source drawing depending on the
source of each object.
Use both Autodesk Map 3D and AutoCAD to edit features and drawing objects.
Many AutoCAD commands work on both types of objects. Some AutoCAD
commands can only be performed on features after you extract the feature
geometry and edit it as a drawing object. Most Autodesk Map 3D operations
are specific to one or the other type of object. Use the right-click menus to
see the commands that are available for the selected feature or drawing object.
Working with Features
Because features are different from drawing objects, you create and edit them
using different commands. This section describes how to create new features
and edit existing features. This section also describes how to work offline and
how to work with different versions of Oracle Spatial and ArcSDE data.
To work with features
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
436 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Displaying Features
When you connect to data and add it to your map, the features are drawn
quickly as a single feature that is not available for editing. To edit features you
must check them out. For more information, see Checking Out Features (page
442). For more information on connecting to data, see Accessing Geospatial
Features (page 222).
Creating New Features
There are two ways to create new features.
■ Use one of the feature creation commands to create a new feature. New
features can be one of the following: Point, MultiPoint, LineString,
MultiLineString, Polygon, or MultiPolygon.
If the provider supports curves, the arc option is available in the LineString,
MultiLineString, Polygon, and MultiPolygon creation commands.
■ Create a new feature from a drawing object’s geometry.
NOTE If the feature class for a layer does not provide automatically generated ids
for new features, Autodesk Map 3D will not create new features on the layer. To
create new features in this case, clear the Update Edits Automatically check box.
Autodesk Map 3D will hold the features in a queue instead of attempting to save
them to the source immediately. Feature ids are generated in the queue. For more
information, see Updating Edits Automatically (page 444).
To create new features
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Displaying Features | 437
Creating New Point and MultiPoint Features
If you have point feature layers in your drawing, you can create new Point
and MultiPoint features. MultiPoint features are multiple points that behave
like a single Point feature.
NOTE The feature creation commands available for a feature layer depend on the
capabilities of the feature class represented by the layer. Feature geometry follows
OGC specifications.
To create a new Point or MultiPoint feature
1 In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer for the new feature.
2 Do one of the following:
■ Click Create ➤ New Point feature_name.
■ Click Create ➤ New MultiPoint feature_name.
Where feature_name is the name of the Point or MultiPoint feature layer.
3 When prompted, specify the location for the new Point or MultiPoint
feature.
For MultiPoint features, specify the location of each point.
4 For MultiPoint operations, press Enter to complete the operation.
The new feature is added to the data grid. To add information to the grid,
see Editing Features using the Data Grid (page 446).
5 Check in the new features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 441).
Creating New Polygon and MultiPolygon Features
If you have polygon feature layers in your drawing, you can create new Polygon
and MultiPolygon features. MultiPolygon features behave like a single Polygon
feature.
NOTE The feature creation commands available for a feature layer depend on the
capabilities of the feature class represented by the layer. Feature geometry follows
OGC specifications.
438 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
A polygon has one outer ring and can have one or more inner rings. A ring
within a polygon is considered a hole. To create polygons with multiple outer
and inner rings, create a MultiPolygon feature.
To create a new Polygon or MultiPolygon feature
1 In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer for the new feature.
2 Do one of the following:
■ Click Create ➤ New Polygon feature_name.
■ Click Create ➤ New MultiPolygon feature_name.
Where feature_name is the name of the Polygon or MultiPolygon feature
layer.
3 When prompted, specify the location for the new Polygon or
MultiPolygon feature.
4 Use the command line or right-click to complete the new feature.
For more information, see MAPPOLYGONCREATE (page 1056) and
MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE (page 1053).
5 Press Enter to complete the operation.
The new feature is added to the data grid. To add information to the grid,
see Editing Features using the Data Grid (page 446).
6 Check in the new features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 441).
Creating New LineString and MultiLineString
Features
If you have line feature layers in your drawing, you can create new LineString
and MultiLineString features. MultiLineString features are multiple lines that
behave like a single Line feature.
NOTE The feature creation commands available for a feature layer depend on the
capabilities of the feature class represented by the layer. Feature geometry follows
OGC specifications.
Creating New Features | 439
To create a new LineString or MultiLineString feature
1 In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer for the new feature.
2 Do one of the following:
■ Click Create ➤ New LineString feature_name.
■ Click Create ➤ New MultiLineString feature_name.
Where feature_name is the name of the LineString or MultiLineString
feature layer.
3 When prompted, specify the location for the new LineString or
MultiLineString feature.
4 Use the command line or right-click to complete the new feature.
For more information, see MAPLINESTRINGCREATE (page 1048) and
MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE (page 1050).
5 Press Enter to complete the operation.
The new feature is added to the data grid. To add information to the grid,
see Editing Features using the Data Grid (page 446).
6 Check in the new features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 441).
Creating a New Feature from a Drawing Object
You can create new features using drawing object geometry.
To create a new feature from geometry
1 In Display Manager, right-click the layer. Click New Feature from
Geometry.
2 When prompted, select the object or objects to convert to features. Press
Enter.
All selected objects are converted into a single feature. To create multiple
features, perform this operation on one object at a time.
3 When prompted to erase the drawing object, do one of the following:
■ Click Yes to erase the original drawing object.
440 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
■ Click No to keep the drawing object in the drawing.
Keep the object if you plan to use it to create other features. You can
store drawing objects on a layer and turn off visibility of the layer.
4 Check in the new features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 441).
Quick Reference
New Feature from Geometry
Creates a new feature from drawing object geometry
Menu In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace:
Create ➤ New Feature from Geometry
Icon
New Feature From Geometry
Command Line MAPCREATEFEATUREFROMGEOMETRY
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer. Click
New Feature from Geometry
Checking In Features
Checking in features saves your changes and additions to the feature source
and releases any locks.
You can choose to update the source automatically as you edit or wait until
you check in the features. If you update the source with edits automatically,
be sure to check in features when you are finished working. For more
information, see Updating Edits Automatically (page 444).
To check in features
1 Select the features to check in using one of the following methods:
■ Click a feature or features.
■ Right-click the feature layer in the Display Manager. Click Select
Checked-Out.
Checking In Features | 441
2 Right-click the drawing. Click Check-In Feature.
Quick Reference
Check In Feature
Checks in features, saves your changes and additions to the feature source,
and releases locks
Menu In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace:
Edit ➤ Check-In
Icon
Check-In Features
Command Line MAPCHECKIN
Checking Out Features
Checking out features makes them available to edit. If the data source supports
locking, features or files will be locked. For more information, see Editing in
a Multiuser Environment (page 444). Checking in or cancelling a check out
operation unlocks locked features.
If you plan to work offline, check out the features you want to edit before
going offline. For more information about working offline, see Working Offline
(page 450).
To check out features
1 Click a feature or features.
2 Right-click the drawing. Click Check-Out Feature.
Grips are displayed on the checked-out feature. If you do not edit using
grips you can turn them off. For more information, see the AutoCAD
Help.
Quick Reference
Check Out Feature
442 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Checks out a feature to make it available for editing
Menu In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace:
Edit ➤ Check-Out
Icon
Check-Out Features
Command Line MAPCHECKOUT
Cancelling Check Out
You can cancel the check out of all, selected, or erased features. You can also
cancel the check out of features by layer. When you cancel check out, locks
are released and your changes are discarded.
NOTE If Update Edits Automatically is enabled, edits are made in the feature
source immediately. Cancelling check out will not discard changes or restore erased
features.
To cancel check out
1 In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace, click Edit menu ➤ Cancel Check
Out.
2 When prompted, click one of the following options:
Option Description
All Cancels check out of all features
Erased Cancels check out of all erased features
Layer Prompts for a layer and cancels check out
of all features on the selected layer. This
option is the same as All if there is only one
layer.
Select Objects Prompts for features or cancels check out
of selected features
Cancelling Check Out | 443
Quick Reference
Cancel Checkout
Cancels a checkout operation. If you have Update Edits Automatically
enabled, cancelling the checkout does not undo changes.
Menu In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace:
Edit ➤ Cancel Check-Out
Icon
Cancel Feature Check-Out
Command Line MAPCANCELCHECKOUT
Editing in a Multiuser Environment
If you share data in a multiuser environment, be aware of the locking status
of the following providers.
■ Oracle and ArcSDE support feature level locking that is persistent when
the connection with the source is closed and you go offline.
■ MySQL and SQL Server do not support feature level locking or persistent
locking. Locks are released when the connection is closed.
■ SDF does not support locking. Be very careful when working in a multiuser
environment.
■ SHP supports file locking only as long as you are connected to the data.
When you close your map, break the connection, or go offline, the file is
unlocked.
Updating Edits Automatically
You can choose to queue your edits and save them to the source all at once
or save them as you work.
NOTE If you enable the Update Edits Automatically option, changes are made
directly in the source. Cancelling a check out will not discard changes or restore
features to their state before the check out.
444 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
To update edits automatically
■ In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace, click Edit menu. Select Update
Edits Automatically.
Editing Features
There are several ways to edit features.
■ Use one of the feature editing commands.
You can edit Point, MultiPoint, LineString, MultiLineString, Polygon, or
MultiPolygon features.
■ Modify a feature in the Data Grid.
■ Use any available AutoCAD commands.
■ If you want to perform an AutoCAD operation that is not available for
features, extract the geometry from the feature, modify it using AutoCAD,
and then update the feature geometry.
To edit features
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Using Feature Editing Commands
After you check out a feature, one way to edit it is to use the feature editing
command specific to the geometry of the feature. Editing commands are
available for Point, MultiPoint, LineString, MultiLineString, Polygon, or
MultiPolygon features.
NOTE To improve performance when editing features, clear the Update Edits
Automatically check box. For more information, see Updating Edits Automatically
(page 444).
Editing Features | 445
To edit a feature using feature editing commands
1 Check out the feature.
For more information, see Checking Out Features (page 442).
2 Right-click the feature. Click Edit Feature Geometry.
The appropriate feature editing command for the geometry will apply to
the feature.
3 Edit the Point, MultiPoint, LineString, MultiLineString, Polygon, or
MultiPolygon features.
For more information about editing these features see
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT (page 1052), MAPLINESTRINGEDIT (page 1049),
MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT (page 1051), MAPPOLYGONEDIT (page 1057),
and MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT (page 1054).
4 Check in the revised features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 441).
Editing Features using the Data Grid
Use the Data Grid to view and edit features by selecting data in the Data Grid
window or by selecting areas of your map.
NOTE When you edit feature data in the Data Grid, the corresponding geometry
is checked out and locked if possible. You must check in the geometry when you
are finished editing.
To edit features using the Data Grid
1 In Map Explorer, expand the Data Source tree and select the feature layer
you want to edit.
2 Click .
The Data Grid window opens displaying the feature data contained in
your map.
3 Select and edit the cell(s) in the Data Grid window.
446 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
The corresponding geometry is checked out and locked if possible.
Changes are made in the source and are immediately reflected in your
map.
4 Check in the revised features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 441).
5 Close the Data Grid window when you are finished.
For more detailed information on using the Data Grid, see Overview of the
Data Grid (page 723).
Quick Reference
MAPDATAGRID
Allows you to view, edit and filter feature data
Menu Edit ➤ Data Grid
Icon
Grid
Command Line MAPDATAGRID
Task Pane In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Grid
button
Dialog Box Data Grid Dialog Box (page 1011)
Using AutoCAD Commands on Features
Some AutoCAD commands can be used on features directly. However, if there
is an AutoCAD operation you cannot perform on a feature, you can extract
the geometry from the feature, edit it using AutoCAD commands, and then
update the feature geometry. Feature data and rules are preserved. You can
also merge AutoCAD geometry with existing features directly. It is not necessary
to first extract feature geometry.
To use AutoCAD commands on features
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
Editing Features | 447
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Extracting Feature Geometry
Extract the geometry from a feature to use AutoCAD commands that are not
available for features.
To extract feature geometry
1 Check out the feature.
For more information, see Checking Out Features (page 442).
2 Right-click the feature. Click Extract Geometry From Feature.
You can now merge the updated geometry back into the feature. For more
information, see Updating Feature Geometry (page 449).
Quick Reference
Extract Feature Geometry
Extracts the geometry from a feature to use AutoCAD commands that are
not available for features
Menu In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace:
Modify ➤ Advanced Feature Editing ➤ Extract
Geometry from Feature
Icon
Extract Feature Geometry
Command Line MAPEXTRACTFEATUREGEOMETRY
448 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Updating Feature Geometry
You can merge new or existing drawing object geometry with a feature. If you
have extracted the geometry from a feature to edit it using AutoCAD, you
must update the feature geometry when you are finished editing.
To update feature geometry
1 Right-click the feature to be merged with a drawing object. Click Update
Feature From Geometry.
2 When prompted, select the drawing object to merge. Press Enter.
3 When prompted to erase the drawing object, do one of the following:
■ Click Yes to erase the original drawing object.
■ Click No to keep the drawing object in the drawing.
Keep the object if you plan to use it to create other features. You can
store drawing objects on an AutoCAD layer and turn off visibility of
the layer.
4 Check in the edited feature.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 441).
Quick Reference
Update Feature from Geometry
Merges new or existing drawing object geometry with a feature
Menu In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace:
Modify ➤ Advanced Feature Editing ➤ Update Feature
from Geometry
Icon
Update Feature Geometry
Command Line MAPUPDATEFEATUREGEOMETRY
Editing Features | 449
Working Offline
When you work offline, Autodesk Map 3D caches all your feature data
connections.
NOTE This procedure applies only to feature sources, not attached drawings.
Clear the cache periodically to improve performance.
To work offline
1 In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace, click Edit menu. Clear the
Update Edits Automatically check box.
2 Check out the features you plan to use.
For more information, see Checking Out Features (page 442).
3 Click the Online/Offline toggle on the Status Bar.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D caches the feature source. This could take some
time.
If you want to edit a feature that you did not check out before going offline,
you can still check it out and edit it. When you return online, Autodesk Map
3D attempts to lock features that you checked out while you were offline.
To return online
1 Click the Offline/Online toggle on the Status Bar.
2 Check in the checked out features.
For more information, see Checking In Features (page 441).
To clear the cache
1 In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace, click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk
Map Options.
2 In the Autodesk Map 3D Options dialog box, click the System tab.
450 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
3 Click Clear Cache. Click OK.
Managing Versions
For feature sources that support versioning, you can create a version, edit
objects in that version, and then save (commit) changes from the child version
back to the parent version.
Support for versioning is based on the feature source. However, the following
guidelines apply to most feature sources that support versioning:
■ Features queried from one version of the feature source can only be saved
back to that version. If you plan to edit features, be sure to query the
features from the version where you plan to save the edits.
■ Objects locked in one version of the feature source are automatically locked
in all versions (if the feature source supports locking). This reduces the
chance of a conflict where an object is edited in two versions of the feature
source.
However, these conflicts can still occur, for example if one version is edited
offline. In these cases, you must specify how to resolve the conflicts before
you save the version.
■ You cannot save or discard the active version.
■ You cannot save or discard a version if it has children.
■ You cannot save or discard a version if it has checked out features. You
must first unlock the objects by either checking them in or cancelling
check out.
■ When you save or discard a version, all features in the drawing that were
queried from that version are removed from the drawing.
■ When you discard a version, all edits saved to that version are discarded.
■ You cannot undo saving or discarding a version.
To create a new version
1 In the Map Explorer, click Tools ➤ Set And Manage Versions.
Managing Versions | 451
2 In the Versions dialog box, select the connection for which you want to
create a new version and do one of the following operations:
■ Click Add ➤ New Version to create a sibling version.
■ Click Add ➤ New Child Version to create a child version.
3 Enter a name for the new version. Click OK.
To activate a version
■ Select the version and click Active.
All queries are performed on the active version of the feature source.
To commit changes back to the parent version
1 Check in features.
2 Select the version and click Merge.
If the parent version was changed since you created your version, you
must resolve which version to use.
To discard a version
1 Check in any checked out features.
2 Make sure the parent version is not connected in any other drawing.
3 Select the version and click Rollback.
Working with Drawing Objects
To work with drawing objects
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
452 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Editing Data in Attached Drawings
To edit data in attached drawings
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Sharing Attached Drawings
Object locking lets multiple network users simultaneously retrieve, edit, and
save back different objects while working in the same attached drawing. If
object locking is not selected, only one user can have write access to an active
drawing.
See also:
■ Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings (page 456)
To use object locking
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Turning On Object Locking
If object locking is enabled, two network Autodesk Map 3D users can edit
different objects in the same drawing at the same time, but cannot edit the
same object at the same time.
Any objects that you add to the save set are locked. Other users can view these
objects, but cannot save modifications back to the attached drawings until
you unlock the objects.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 453
When you finish editing the objects, save them back to their attached drawings.
The objects are automatically unlocked.
Only a superuser can change object locking settings.
NOTE You must have superuser privileges to change the Enable Object Locking
setting.
To turn on object locking
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options.
2 In the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254), select the Multi User
tab.
3 Under Multi User Options, select Enable Object Locking.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
Finding Out Who Has an Object Locked
You can use the Who Has It operation at any time to find out who locked an
object.
454 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
NOTE If the DWK file has been deleted, the user names are no longer available.
When this happens, Autodesk Map 3D displays user names and drawing names
as *UNKNOWN*.
To find out who has an object locked
1 Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Who Has It?
2 Select the object.
The Who Has It Information dialog box (page 1249) displays the name of the
user who has the object locked, the drawing that the object comes from, the
name of the current drawing, and the date and time the object was locked.
Quick Reference
ADEWHOHASIT
Displays the current owner of a selected locked object
Menu File ➤ More DWG Save Set Options ➤ Who Has It
Icon
Show Who Has It
Command Line ADEWHOHASIT
Dialog Box Who Has It Information dialog box (page 1249)
Releasing All Locked Objects for a Specific User
If a system failure occurs while objects are locked, you must manually release
the object locks. However, only a superuser can remove locks set by other
users.
NOTE If a drawing is activated in another user's drawing, you will not be able to
release locks in that drawing.
When you remove locks, the object is also removed from the save set. You
can restore the locks by adding the objects to the save set again.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 455
To release all locked objects
1 Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing Maintenance.
2 Under Active Drawings, select the drawing that contains the locks to
release.
3 Choose User List.
The names of the users responsible for the locks appear under User Name.
The number of objects locked by each user appears under Number of
Objects Locked.
4 Choose Remove Locks.
If you do not have superuser privileges, you can only remove the locks that
you have set. Autodesk Map 3D removes the objects from the save set.
If you have superuser privileges, you can select a user name and remove all
the locks set by that user.
Quick Reference
ADEDWGMAINT
Removes locks from objects
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing Maintenance
Command Line ADEDWGMAINT
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Maintenance
Dialog Box Drawing Maintenance dialog box (page 1265)
Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings
When you use Autodesk Map 3D with multiple drawings, you can query
objects from attached drawings into the current drawing and create new
drawings, or you can edit the objects from the attached drawings and then
save them back.
To edit and save objects
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
456 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
See also:
■ Defining Drawing Queries (page 800)
Zooming to the Extents of Selected Drawings
Use Zoom Extents to zoom the current drawing to the extents of the selected
source drawings. Adjust the current drawing extents to view all objects after
you execute a query.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 457
The drawing coordinates in the lower-left corner of the screen reflect the new
extents of the current drawing.
See also:
■ Setting Save Back Extents (page 139)
To zoom to the extents of selected drawings
1 In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings. Click Zoom Extents.
2 In the Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box (page 1358), select the drawings
to view.
3 Click OK.
The command zooms the current drawing to the extents of the selected source
drawings. The drawing coordinates in the lower-left corner of your screen
reflect the new extents of the current drawing.
458 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
ADEZEXTENTS
Performs a ZOOM command to display the extents of selected active drawings
Icon
Zoom Drawing Extents
Command Line ADEZEXTENTS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Zoom Extents
Dialog Box Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box (page 1358)
Viewing All Objects in Selected Attached Drawings
Use Quick View to preview the contents of one or more active source drawings.
Quick View shows all objects in the selected source drawings.
You can plot the results of a Quick View.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 459
Notes
Quick View displays objects but does not bring them into the drawing. The
display contains one selectable picture for each source drawing. To bring
objects into the current drawing, define a query that copies the objects from
the source drawing into the current drawing. For more information, see
Defining Drawing Queries (page 800).
Quick View does not display shapes.
To view objects in source drawings
1 In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings. Click Quick View.
2 In the Quick View Drawings dialog box (page 1358), select the drawings to
quick view.
To control the display of nested drawings you must select them
individually.
3 To filter the list of active drawings on the basis of file names, descriptions,
or both, click Filter.
To turn on a filter, select Filter.
4 Select Zoom To The Extents Of Selected Drawings to see the extents of
all the drawings to review with Quick View.
5 Click OK.
The objects in the active source drawing appear. Although you see many
objects, each set of objects appear as a single object from each drawing.
If you attempt to select several objects, Autodesk Map 3D reports "one
object found" for each of the source drawings.
You can zoom and pan, but you cannot select or edit individual objects. When
you regenerate or redraw, the pictures are cleared from the current drawing.
To edit the objects, define a query that copies the objects from the source
drawing into the current drawing. For more information, see Defining Drawing
Queries (page 800).
Quick Reference
ADEQVIEWDWGS
Performs a quick display of active drawings
460 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Menu View ➤ Quick View Drawings
Command Line ADEQVIEWDWGS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Quick View
-or- Right-click a drawing ➤ Quick View
Dialog Box Quick View Drawings dialog box (page 1358)
Editing Objects in Attached Drawings
To view and edit objects in attached drawings, create a query that specifies
the objects you want. When you run the query, Autodesk Map 3D finds all
the objects in the attached drawings that match the query criteria, and copies
those objects to the current drawing.
Example: You have separate drawings for each quadrant of a town. You create
a main drawing and attach the other drawings, and then view all water mains
in the town or all emergency routes.
After you edit the objects, you can save the changed objects back to their
attached drawings.
If you intend to edit queried objects and then save them back to attached
drawings, you must specify the objects to save back to attached drawings by
adding them to the save set. Then, when you save the current drawing,
Autodesk Map 3D prompts you to save the objects in the save set back to their
attached drawings. If you do not add modified objects to the save set, you can
save the modifications to the current drawing or to a new drawing, but the
changes are not saved back to the attached drawings.
Markup objects are not added to the save set. To copy them from the current
drawing to an attached drawing, open the attached drawing directly. Copy
the markup objects in the current drawing and paste them into the other
drawing.
WARNING If you work with an attached drawing from a previous release and
save back your changes, Autodesk Map 3D updates the attached drawing to the
current format. To retain the attached drawing in the previous drawing format,
do not save back your changes.
See also:
■ Defining Drawing Queries (page 800)
■ Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings (page 456)
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 461
To edit objects in attached drawing
1 to retrieve the objects to edit.
2 Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items to Save Set. Select
the objects to edit.
Autodesk Map 3D locks the objects in the attached drawings so no other
users can modify them.
3 Edit the objects.
4 To save the edited objects back to their attached source drawings, click
File ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
Menu File ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set
Icon
Save to Source Drawings
Command Line ADESAVEOBJS
Dialog Box Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box (page 1247)
462 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Adding an Object to the Save Set
If you modify an object that was queried from an attached drawing, Autodesk
Map 3D prompts you to add the object to the save set, which locks the object.
If an object is locked, other users cannot modify the object.
TIP Lock the objects before you edit them. This ensures that other users are not
modifying the same objects. To lock an object before editing, manually add the
object to the save set.
When you save changed objects back to attached drawings, only objects in
the save set are saved back.
NOTE You can set an option to automatically add modified objects to the save
set without prompting, or you can turn the prompt off. For more information see
Setting Save Back Options (page 474).
New objects are not automatically added to the save set. You must manually
add them to the save set.
Additional Information
Keep these points in mind as you modify objects and add them to the save
set:
■ If an object is on a locked layer in the attached drawing or you are working
in the Layout tab, you cannot add the object to the save set.
■ If your system administrator has enabled object locking, Autodesk Map
3D locks the objects in the attached drawing when you add the objects to
the save set.
For more information about object locking and file locking, see Sharing
Attached Drawings (page 453).
■ By breaking a queried object into two pieces using the BREAK, TRIM,
FILLET, CHAMFER, or EXPLODE commands, you create both an altered
queried object and a new object. When you save back the objects, the
queried object is automatically saved back to its attached source drawing,
and the new object is automatically added to the save set. However, the
new object does not have an associated attached drawing; you must specify
the drawing to save back to.
■ If you experience a system failure while objects are locked, you must use
the Drawing Maintenance command to release the object locks.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 463
For more information, see Releasing All Locked Objects for a Specific User
(page 455).
■ Autodesk Map 3D cannot save edits back to a detached drawing. If you
query and edit objects from an attached drawing, do not detach that
drawing from the current drawing before you perform the save back
operation.
■ If you decide you don't want to save changes to an object back to the
attached source drawing, remove the object from the save set. The changes
are maintained in the current drawing, but are not saved back to the
attached drawing.
■ If you delete an object after adding it to the save set, you can restore it by
removing erased objects from the save set. Autodesk Map 3D restores all
erased objects in the save set.
■ After you add objects to the save set, you can undo the operation using
the UNDO command.
To add objects to the save set and lock the objects
1 Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items to Save Set.
2 Enter n to add all new objects to the save set, or enter s and select the
objects to add.
Quick Reference
ADESELOBJS
Creates a set of objects to be saved to source drawings
Menu File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items To Save
Set
Icon
Add Objects to Save Set
Command Line ADESELOBJS
Dialog Box ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command)
(page 1246)
464 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Viewing Objects in the Save Set
Objects that you have added to the save set are locked. You can highlight
these locked objects in your drawing.
To view objects in the save set
1 Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Show Items in Drawing Save
Set.
2 All locked objects are highlighted.
To remove the highlighting, press Enter.
Quick Reference
ADESHOWOBJS
Displays the objects in the save set
Menu File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Show Items In
Drawing Save Set
Icon
Show Objects in Save Set
Command Line ADESHOWOBJS
Dialog Box ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command)
(page 1247)
Saving Queried Objects Back to Attached
Drawings
Objects saved back to their attached drawings replace the original objects.
Autodesk Map 3D lets you save objects to attached drawings in read-only
directories.
You cannot undo a Save To Source Drawings operation. Once you perform a
Save DWG Save Set operation, attached drawings contain the modified objects.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 465
WARNING If you work with an attached drawing from a previous release and
save back your changes, Autodesk Map 3D updates the attached drawing to the
current format. To retain the attached drawing in the previous drawing format,
do not save back your changes.
To save queried objects back to attached source drawings
1 To make sure objects are in the save set, click File ➤ Drawing Save Set
Options ➤ Show Items in Drawing Save Set.
To add objects to the save set, click File ➤ Drawing Save Set
Options ➤ Add Items to Save Set. Select the objects to save.
2 Click File ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set.
3 In the Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box (page 1247), select Save
Queried Objects.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
Menu File ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set
Icon
Save to Source Drawings
Command Line ADESAVEOBJS
Dialog Box Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box (page 1247)
Saving New Objects to Attached Drawings
If you create new objects that you want to add to attached drawings, select
save order options for the new objects.
■ Selective — Prompts you to select the objects to save to each attached
drawing.
466 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
■ Area — Saves new objects in to the attached drawing within whose save
back extents the objects lie. By default, the save back extents correspond
to the drawings extents. You can change the save back extents of attached
drawings.
The newly created arc crosses three tiled attached drawings but is saved to the first
drawing in the list of attached drawings. Drawings are listed in the order in which you
attach them.
■ Layer — Saves new objects to attached drawing layers that use the same
names as the current drawing layers on which the objects lie. If more than
one active drawing contains a given layer name, Autodesk Map 3D saves
the object to the first drawing that contains that layer.
■ None — Disables all other save back options. For example, to manually
specify the objects to save and the attached drawing in which to save them,
set the first save back option to Selective, and set the other two options to
None.
If Autodesk Map 3D is unable to save new objects using option 1, it uses the
setting for save order option 2, and so forth.
You can save objects to attached drawings located in read-only directories.
To save new objects to attached drawings
1 To add the objects to the save set, click File ➤ Drawing Save Set
Options ➤ Add Items to Save Set. Enter n to add all new objects to the
save set, or enter s and select the objects to add.
2 Click File ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set.
3 In the Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box (page 1247), select Save
Newly Created Objects.
4 Specify the Save Order.
5 Select the drawings to save objects to.
6 Click OK.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 467
If you're using the Selective save method, select the objects to save to
each attached drawing.
Quick Reference
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
Menu File ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set
Icon
Save to Source Drawings
Command Line ADESAVEOBJS
Dialog Box Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box (page 1247)
Saving Objects to the Current Drawing
When you query objects from attached drawings into the current drawing,
Autodesk Map 3D creates an association between the original object in the
attached drawing and the copy of the object in the current drawing.
If you edit one of these queried objects, you can save the edited object back
to the attached drawing, or you can save the edited object to the current
drawing. If you save an object to the current drawing, the original object is
unchanged in the attached drawings.
TIP When you close the current drawing, the association between queried objects
and their attached drawings is removed. If you want to save changes back to the
original drawing, you must save back before you close the current drawing.
To save objects to the current drawing
1 Click File menu ➤ Save.
2 If prompted to save objects to attached source drawings, do not do so at
this time since this removes them from the current drawing.
468 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
To save the objects to both the current drawing and attached drawings, first
clear Erase Saved Back Objects on the Save Back tab (page 474) of the Autodesk
Map Options dialog box.
Quick Reference
SAVE
Saves the drawing under the current file name or a specified name
Menu File ➤ Save
Command Line SAVE
Saving Objects to a New Drawing
When you save objects to a new drawing, you create a copy of the current
drawing, including objects, options, queries, and attached drawings. If you
queried objects from attached drawings, the original objects are unchanged
in the attached drawings.
To save objects to a new drawing
1 Run a query to retrieve the objects you want. Be sure to use Draw mode
so the retrieved objects are copied to the current drawing.
2 Click File menu ➤ Save As.
3 Enter a name for the new drawing.
4 If prompted to save objects to attached source drawings, do not do so at
this time since this removes them from the current drawing.
To save the objects to both a new drawing and to attached drawings, first clear
Erase Saved Back Objects on the Save Back tab (page 474) of the Autodesk Map
Options dialog box.
Quick Reference
SAVEAS
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 469
Saves an unnamed drawing with a file name or renames the current drawing
Menu File ➤ Save As
Command Line SAVEAS
Removing an Object from the Save Set
You can manually remove an object from the save set. Removing the object
from the save set releases the lock on the object.
Generally, when you edit an object that was queried in from an attached
drawing, that object is locked so no one else can edit it. When you save objects
back to attached drawings, the locks are automatically removed. (To change
this default setting, use the Map Options command.)
In some cases, you may want to manually remove an object from the save set.
To remove objects from the save set and unlock the objects
1 Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Remove Items from Save Set.
2 Enter s to select the objects to remove, or enter e to remove objects that
have been erased from the current drawing.
If you enter s, select the objects to remove from the save set. Press Enter
when you finish selecting objects.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEREMOBJS
Removes objects from the save set so they aren't saved to source drawings
Menu File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Remove Items
From Save Set
Icon
Remove Objects from Save Set
Command Line ADEREMOBJS
470 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Dialog Box ADEREMOBJS (Remove Objects from Save Set
command) (page 1246)
Problem Solving
Several issues can arise when you save queried objects back to attached
drawings.
Redefining Blocks on Save Back
When you retrieve a block, you can use the EXPLODE command to break the
block into its component elements, edit the separate objects, and then use
the BLOCK command to redefine the block.
To save the redefined block definition back to the attached source drawing,
make sure that the Redefine Block Definitions On Save Back option on the
Save Back tab of the Autodesk Map Options dialog box is selected. Autodesk
Map 3D sets this option by default.
Exploding Blocks and Save Back
If you explode a block, the block definition is deleted, and you are prompted
to add the separate objects to the save set. If you answer Yes and use the default
settings, the block components are erased and not saved back. To save the
individual objects back to the attached source drawings, you must add the
individual components of the block to the save set.
Saving Back Dimensions
If you either set a global coordinate system or use the Transform editing tool,
you might have problems saving back dimensions. If you use a location query
to retrieve one or more dimensions and save the dimension back to the
attached source drawings, you might find that another location query will
not retrieve the dimension. In this case, you should detach the source drawing
and reattach it before repeating the location query.
Saving Back Hatch Patterns
When you create an associative hatch pattern, information is written to the
boundary objects. When you add such a hatch pattern to a save set, the
boundary is also added to ensure data integrity.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 471
When you modify a queried hatch boundary object, the geometry is modified
and Autodesk Map 3D automatically updates the hatch pattern. You are
prompted to add the boundary to the save set. Even if you answer Yes, the
hatch pattern might not be added to the save set. You should check that the
hatch pattern is in the save set before you save back the changed objects.
When you add an associative hatch pattern to the save set, Autodesk Map 3D
attempts to add the boundary objects that define the hatch pattern. If all
boundary objects are not available, you cannot add the hatch pattern to the
save set.
To redefine block definitions on save back
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options.
2 In the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254), select the Save Back
tab.
3 Under Save Back To Source Drawings, select Redefine Block Definitions
On Save Back.
4 Click OK.
To save back individual block components
1 Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items to Save Set.
2 Select all the block components.
3 Press Enter.
To check that the hatch pattern is in the save set
1 Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Show Items in Drawing Save
Set.
2 Check that the hatch pattern is highlighted.
3 If the hatch pattern is not highlighted, make sure that all boundary objects
are added to the save set.
Quick Reference
ADESELOBJS
472 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Creates a set of objects to be saved to source drawings
Menu File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items To Save
Set
Icon
Add Objects to Save Set
Command Line ADESELOBJS
Dialog Box ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command)
(page 1246)
ADESHOWOBJS
Displays the objects in the save set
Menu File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Show Items In
Drawing Save Set
Icon
Show Objects in Save Set
Command Line ADESHOWOBJS
Dialog Box ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command)
(page 1247)
MAPOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 473
Setting Save Back Options
You can specify a number of options that affect how queried objects are saved
back to attached drawings or feature sources. These options apply to the current
drawing.
Save Set and Edit Set options
■ Don't Add Objects Automatically — Edited objects are not added to the
save set, and you are not prompted to add them.
Use this option if you are creating a new drawing and are not planning to
save changes back to attached drawings. You can still manually add objects
to the save set. See Adding an Object to the Save Set (page 463).
■ Prompt To Add Objects — When you edit an object that was retrieved
from an attached drawing or a feature source, you are prompted to add
the object to the save set.
Use this option if you plan to save some edited objects, but not others, back
to attached drawing or feature source.
■ Add Objects Automatically Without Prompting — When you edit an object
that was retrieved from an attached drawing or feature source, the object
is automatically added to the save set.
Use this option if you plan to save most modified objects back to attached
drawings and feature sources.
NOTE If you create new objects that you want to save to attached drawings, you
must manually add them to the save set. Autodesk Map 3D does not prompt you
to add them.
For a complete list of save back options, refer to the Save Back tab of the
Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254).
To set editing and save back options
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options.
2 In the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254), select the Save Back
tab.
474 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
3 Set the options you want.
■ Use the Save Set options to specify settings for saving objects to
attached drawings.
■ Use the Edit Set options to specify settings for saving objects to feature
sources.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
Cleaning Up Drawing Data
Use drawing cleanup to correct common map errors resulting from surveying,
digitizing, and scanning errors. You can also remove unnecessary detail from
complex maps.
To clean up drawing data
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 475
Overview of Cleaning Up Maps
Use drawing cleanup to correct common map errors resulting from surveying,
digitizing, and scanning. Clean errors before you define a topology, perform
a map analysis, or plot a map.
You can also remove unnecessary detail from complex maps.
Example: You digitized paper maps and now some street intersections do not
align correctly. You want clean the maps before you create a topology.
You can perform the following cleanup actions:
■ delete duplicate objects
■ erase short objects
■ break crossing objects
■ extend undershoots
■ extend to apparent intersections
■ snap clustered nodes
■ dissolve pseudo nodes
■ erase dangling objects (overshoots)
■ simplify objects
■ delete zero-length objects
■ weed 3D polyline vertices
WARNING To edit topologies, use the topology editing commands (page 549).
Drawing Cleanup can make a topology invalid. In addition, when a cleanup action
creates a new object or breaks an object into multiple segments, classification
information remains with the segment that contains the start point of the original
object. Classify other segments manually.
WARNING To edit topologies, use the topology editing commands (page 549).
Drawing Cleanup can make a topology invalid.
476 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
To clean up objects in a map
1 Open the drawing containing the objects to clean or query the objects
into the current drawing.
2 Because your map may be altered during the cleanup operation, it is
recommended that you back up your data before starting.
3 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
4 Follow these steps:
■ Selecting and Anchoring Objects (page 479) Select the objects to include
in the cleanup operation and the objects to anchor. Click Next.
■ Setting Cleanup Options (page 482) Select cleanup actions and set the
parameters for each action you select. Specify whether to correct errors
automatically or to review and confirm each correction. Click Next.
■ Converting Objects After Cleanup (page 485) Specify how to treat the
original objects after the cleanup operation is complete. Click Next.
■ Setting Markers for Interactive Mode (page 486) If you selected
Interactive mode in Setting Cleanup Options to review error
corrections, specify the error markers to use. Click Next.
■ Saving Cleanup Settings (page 489) To save your settings as a profile,
click Save.
5 Click Finish.
Autodesk Map 3D performs the cleanup with the options and values you
specified.
6 Depending on whether you selected Interactive, Autodesk Map 3D does
one of the following:
■ If you selected Interactive mode (page 492), Autodesk Map 3D displays
a list of detected errors. You can review the errors and decide how to
handle them. For example, you can place markers on the errors, correct
them, or ignore them.
■ If you cleared Interactive, Autodesk corrects all detected errors
automatically (page 491) and reports a summary of the results on the
command line.
You can run the operation again to verify that you corrected all existing errors.
Note that cleaning up geometry in a drawing creates new geometry and new
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 477
relationships between the objects. You may need to repeat the cleanup
operation.
See also:
■ Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Drawing Cleanup Process
You can select the errors you want to fix, specify tolerances for the errors, and
select how to correct the errors. You can save your settings to use again later.
To clean your drawings
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Step 1: Selecting and Anchoring Objects
In step one of the drawing cleanup process, you select the objects to include
in the cleanup. You can automatically select all objects or select objects
manually.
478 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
You also select the objects to anchor. Anchored objects are reference points
and are not altered or moved; objects being cleaned are moved towards
anchored objects.
In addition, you can filter object selection by layer and object class so that
only objects that belong to the specified layers and object classes are selected.
Example: Select all objects on the Roads layer for cleanup, and anchor survey
points in the Monuments object class so that they maintain their accuracy.
NOTE In general, you can clean up linear objects only (lines, arcs, circles, and
polylines), although a few cleanup actions support additional object types, including
points, blocks, text, and mtext. Anchoring supports these additional object types.
Any unsupported object types are not cleaned up or anchored.
To select and anchor objects for drawing cleanup
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2 On the Select Objects page, under Objects To Include In Drawing Cleanup,
select the objects to clean up.
■ Choose the method to use for selecting objects. Click Select All to
select all objects. Click Select Manually to select individual objects.
■ To limit object selection to objects on specific layers or in specific
object classes, specify the layers and object classes to include.
■ If you chose Select Manually, click Select Objects To Be Included to
select objects in the drawing area. Press Enter to return to the Select
Objects page.
In general, you can clean up linear objects only (lines, arcs, circles, and
polylines). A few cleanup actions support additional object types, such
as points, blocks, text, and mtext. Unsupported object types are not
cleaned up.
The status line shows how many objects are selected and how many have
been filtered out.
3 Under Objects To Anchor In Drawing Cleanup, select the objects to use
as reference points during the drawing cleanup. These points are not
altered. You can anchor linear objects, points, blocks, text, and mtext.
■ To limit object selection to objects on specific layers or in specific
object classes, specify the layers and object classes to include.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 479
■ Click Select Objects To Be Anchored. Select the objects to anchor.
Press Enter to return to the Select Objects page.
4 Click Next.
5 Continue with Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options (page 482).
See also:
■ Select Objects Page (page 1003)
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options
As you clean up a map, you select one or more cleanup actions to perform.
Each cleanup action detects a different type of map error, for example,
duplicate objects, undershoots, or zero-length objects.
For best results, run Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines individually. Run
other cleanup actions individually or with a minimum of other actions.
Cleanup Actions
You can perform the following cleanup actions:
■ Delete Duplicates (page 501)
■ Erase Short Objects (page 504)
480 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
■ Break Crossing Objects (page 506)
■ Extend Undershoots (page 508)
■ Apparent Intersection (page 510)
■ Snap Clustered Nodes (page 512)
■ Dissolve Pseudo Nodes (page 515)
■ Erase Dangling Objects (page 517)
■ Simplify Objects (page 519)
■ Zero-Length Objects (page 522)
■ Weed Polylines (page 523)
Order of Cleanup Actions
The order of cleanup actions can produce different results. Specify the order
by moving cleanup actions up or down in the list. The action at the top of
the list is performed first.
Setting Cleanup Options
Set the options for each cleanup action individually. For more information,
see the individual help topics about each cleanup action.
Understanding the Tolerance Setting
Tolerance is the minimum distance allowed between linear objects or nodes.
If two linear objects or nodes are separated by a distance less than the tolerance,
Autodesk Map 3D corrects the error.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 481
If you set the tolerance too low, Autodesk Map 3D might miss some errors. If
you set the tolerance too high, Autodesk Map 3D might correct linear objects
that are not errors. Decide if the data constitutes an error and choose a suitable
tolerance to eliminate errors.
For example, a tolerance of 10 would eliminate dangles less than 10 meters
long; but in some cases, such dangles might be the correct mapping of a short
pipe or street.
To select cleanup actions and set options
1 On the Select Actions page, select the cleanup actions to perform by
adding them to the Selected Actions list.
482 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
To add a cleanup action to the Selected Actions list, select the action in
the Cleanup Actions (page 496) list, and click Add >.
For best results, run Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines individually.
Run other cleanup actions individually or with a minimum of other
actions.
2 In the Selected Actions list, specify the order of cleanup actions. The order
can effect results. The first action in the list is performed first. To change
the order, highlight an action and click the up or down arrow.
3 In the Selected Actions list, select the action for which you want to specify
settings.
4 Under Cleanup Parameters, specify the settings to use for the selected
action. For more information about each cleanup action, click one of the
following links:
■ Delete Duplicates (page 501)
■ Erase Short Objects (page 504)
■ Break Crossing Objects (page 506)
■ Extend Undershoots (page 508)
■ Apparent Intersection (page 510)
■ Snap Clustered Nodes (page 512)
■ Dissolve Pseudo Nodes (page 515)
■ Erase Dangling Objects (page 517)
■ Simplify Objects (page 519)
■ Zero-Length Objects (page 522)
■ Weed Polylines (page 523)
5 To review detected errors before correcting them, under Options, select
Interactive.
Otherwise, Autodesk Map 3D corrects all detected errors.
NOTE Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines are not interactive operations.
Autodesk Map 3D makes these changes automatically during cleanup.
6 Click Next.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 483
7 Continue with Step 3: Specifying How to Convert Objects After Cleanup
(page 484).
See also:
■ Select Actions Page (page 998)
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Step 3: Specifying How to Convert Objects After
Cleanup
As you clean up a map, you can specify how to treat the original objects after
the cleanup operation is complete.
■ Modify Original Objects — Uses the original layer and as much of the
original data as possible. For example, linear objects are extended where
necessary.
■ Retain Original And Create New Objects — Keeps the original objects and
creates new objects on a layer you specify. For example, to extend an
undershoot, new linear objects are created on the specified layer for the
undershoot and target linear objects, and the originals are retained.
■ Delete Original And Create New Objects — Deletes all the original objects
and creates new objects on a layer you specify. For example, the original
undershoot is deleted, and a new linear object is created that extends to
the required location.
484 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
NOTE When you create new objects, existing object data and database links are
copied to the new objects. All created objects are assigned the current value of
the ELEVATION system variable.
Converting Objects to Polylines
You can specify whether to convert lines, arcs, and 3D polylines to 2D
polylines, and convert circles to arcs or 2D polylines. If you convert arcs to
polylines, the polyline is created using a true arc, not a set of straight line
segments. If you convert a circle to a polyline, the polyline is created using
two true arcs, not a set of straight line segments. Use these conversion options
in the following cases:
■ You plan to use the results of the drawing cleanup operation in another
program that accepts only polylines.
■ You want to modify the line width of the arcs, circles, or lines so you can
use them in a thematic map. You can assign line width only to polylines.
NOTE If you convert objects to different entity types during the cleanup process,
classified objects may be modified so that they no longer meet the object class
definition and will be unclassified.
To specify how to convert the objects after cleanup
1 On the Cleanup Methods page, under Cleanup Method, specify how to
treat the objects after the conversion process is complete.
NOTE Creating new objects may increase file size significantly.
2 If you are creating new objects, select the layer to use.
3 Under Convert Selected Objects, specify whether to convert lines, arcs,
and 3D polylines to 2D polylines, and convert circles to arcs or 2D
polylines.
4 To save your settings as a profile, click Save.
5 Do one of the following:
■ If you selected Interactive on the Select Actions page, click Next to
continue with To set up markers for interactive mode (page 488).
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 485
■ If you cleared Interactive on the Select Actions page so that Autodesk
Map 3D would clean up errors automatically (page 491), click Finish
to start the cleanup process.
See also:
■ Cleanup Methods Page (page 996)
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Step 4: Setting Up Markers for Interactive Mode
When you review errors interactively, Autodesk Map 3D places error markers
on detected errors to help you locate the errors more quickly and evaluate
whether they need correction.
If you correct an error, the marker is removed. If you do not correct the error,
you can remove the marker and skip the error, or leave the marker in the map
for later reference.
You can mark each error with a different shape and color marker to indicate
each type of operation.
If you clean up a map multiple times, you can remove or maintain markers
from earlier operations. You can also remove or maintain markers after the
current operation.
486 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Set the type and color of markers used to mark errors.
■ If you correct errors automatically, errors are not marked.
■ The markers used in drawing cleanup are the same as those used when
creating a polygon topology. Before beginning either operation, existing
markers are removed.
NOTE The Error Markers page is available only if you select Interactive in Step 2
(page 482).
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 487
To set up markers for interactive mode
1 To remove markers placed by an earlier cleanup operation, on the Error
Markers page, select Erase Markers When Cleanup Starts. This is useful if
you repeat the cleanup process to catch errors missed in the first pass.
2 To leave markers after this cleanup operation, select Maintain Markers
When Command Ends.
3 In the Marker Size box, specify a marker size. A value between 3% and
7% is usually suitable.
4 Under Blocks And Colors, select the marker shape and color for each type
of error.
5 To save your settings as a profile, click Save.
6 Click Finish.
The Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box appears, where you review and
confirm error corrections automatically (page 494).
You can run the operation again to verify that you corrected all existing errors.
Note that cleaning up geometry in a drawing creates new geometry and new
relationships between the objects. You may need to repeat the cleanup
operation.
See also:
■ Error Markers Page (page 997)
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
488 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Saving Cleanup Settings as a Profile
Once you have specified the settings for drawing cleanup, you can save them
as a profile for later use. Profiles are also useful when you automate the drawing
cleanup process with scripts. Drawing cleanup profiles are saved as *.dpf files.
Saving Drawing Cleanup Settings as a Profile
Drawing cleanup profiles include all the options specified in the drawing
cleanup dialog boxes, including the layer names used for object selection and
anchoring, cleanup actions and settings, cleanup methods, and error marker
settings (if any). Drawing cleanup profiles do not include the actual objects
selected and anchored on the specified layers.
Loading Drawing Cleanup Profiles
Load a profile to make the saved settings current. Settings that are loaded
include the object selection and anchoring criteria, cleanup actions and
settings, cleanup methods, and error marker settings.
Editing Drawing Cleanup Profiles
You can edit drawing cleanup profiles in Autodesk Map 3D and save your
changes, choosing either to replace an existing profile or save it as a new
profile.
WARNING Do not edit drawing cleanup profiles outside of Autodesk Map 3D.
Doing so may produce unexpected results.
To save drawing cleanup settings as a profile
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2 Specify the settings to save.
3 Click Save.
4 In the Save Drawing Cleanup Profile dialog box, enter a name for the
profile. Click Save.
To load an existing drawing cleanup profile
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 489
2 Click Load.
3 In the Select Drawing Cleanup Profile dialog box, select the profile to
load.
4 Click Open.
The settings from the selected profile are made current.
To edit a drawing cleanup profile
1 Load the profile as described above.
2 Make changes to the drawing cleanup settings.
3 Save the profile.
See also:
■ Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Correction Methods
You can correct errors automatically or review each error and decide how to
fix it.
To select a correction method
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
490 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Automatically Correcting Errors
You can configure Autodesk Map 3D so that it cleans up detected errors
automatically. The results of the cleanup are displayed on the command line.
See also:
■ Using Interactive Mode to Review and Confirm Corrections (page 492)
To correct errors automatically
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2 In the Drawing Cleanup - Select Objects dialog box, select the objects to
clean and the objects to anchor. Click Next.
3 In the Select Actions Page, select cleanup actions by adding them to the
Selected Actions list. Specify the cleanup parameters for each action.
4 In the Options area, clear Interactive.
The Error Markers dialog box is disabled.
5 Click Next to go to the Cleanup Methods Page where you specify how
you want to treat the objects after the cleanup process is complete.
6 Click Finish.
Autodesk Map 3D corrects the errors and displays a summary of the results
on the command line.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 491
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Using Interactive Mode to Review and Confirm
Corrections
Use the Interactive option in the Select Actions Page if you want to review
the list of errors detected by the Drawing Cleanup command, place error
markers showing their location in the map, and zoom to and highlight errors
to better examine them. Correct errors one at a time or correct all the errors
detected for a selected cleanup action as a single action.
You can configure error markers (page 486) on the Drawing Cleanup - Error
Markers dialog box. You can also indicate whether to maintain markers both
from earlier cleanup operations and after the current cleanup operation.
492 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Review, mark, and correct errors interactively.
■ All cleanup actions are represented in the Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog
box, with the exception of Simplify Objects which is not an interactive
operation.
■ If you are cleaning up short objects, Autodesk Map 3D divides the detected
errors into three groups: Short Degenerate Objects, Short Line Objects, and
Short Polyline Objects so you can evaluate and correct these types of errors
separately. If you are cleaning up zero length objects, Autodesk Map 3D
divides the errors into two groups: Zero Length Line Objects and Zero
Length Polyline Objects.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 493
■ When you fix an error or group of errors, it may affect the errors further
down the list. For example, if you break two crossing objects and create
four new, shorter objects, the new objects may be shorter than the tolerance
specified for Erase Short Objects tolerance. Drawing Cleanup would detect
these as new, additional errors and add them to the list.
■ Objects are not updated visually until you close the dialog box. When you
review the new errors, objects will not appear in their corrected state.
See also:
■ Automatically Correcting Errors (page 491)
To review errors before correcting them
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2 In the Drawing Cleanup - Select Objects dialog box, select the objects to
clean and the objects to anchor. Click Next.
3 In the Select Actions Page, select the cleanup actions to perform by adding
them to the Selected Actions list. Specify the cleanup parameters for each
action.
4 To review errors before correcting them, in the Options area, select
Interactive.
When you select Interactive, the Error Markers page is enabled so that
you can configure error markers.
5 On the left side of the dialog box, click Error Markers in the list.
6 In the Error Markers Page, specify the size, shape, and color of the error
markers to use for each cleanup action. Also specify whether to remove
markers from earlier operations or remove markers after this cleanup.
7 To save your settings in a profile (page 489), click Save.
8 Click Finish to run the cleanup process and review the list of detected
errors in the Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box.
In the Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box, the first cleanup action with
detected errors is selected. All other actions are dimmed. Cleanup actions
are listed in the order specified on the Drawing Cleanup - Selected Actions
dialog box. The icons to the left of the action name show you what the
error marker for that action looks like.
494 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
All cleanup actions are represented in the Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog
box, with the exception of Simplify Objects which is not an interactive
operation. For short objects, Autodesk Map 3D divides the detected errors
into three groups: Short Degenerate Objects, Short Line Objects, and
Short Polyline Objects. If you are cleaning up zero length objects,
Autodesk Map 3D divides the errors into two groups: Zero Length Line
Objects and Zero Length Polyline Objects.
9 You can address all errors for each cleanup action as follows:
■ To correct all errors for the selected action, click Fix All.
NOTE Corrections are made after you finish reviewing and correcting
all errors.
■ To display error markers for all errors for the selected action, making
them easily visible in the map, click Mark All.
■ To ignore all errors for a selected action and remove any error markers,
click Remove All.
■ To go to the next cleanup action in the list without correcting errors,
click Next Action.
10 To address errors one at a time, click the plus (+) next to the cleanup
action. Select Error 1 of... and choose an option:
■ To correct the current error and go to the next one, click Fix.
NOTE Corrections appears after you finish reviewing and correcting all
errors.
■ To leave a marker on the current error, click Mark.
■ To go to the next error in the list without making a correction and
remove any error marker, click Remove.
■ To skip an error, click Next.
11 You can highlight and zoom to errors in the map by setting the following
options under Zoom Settings:
■ To dynamically zoom to selected errors, select Auto Zoom.
■ To indicate the percent of the drawing display that selected error
occupies, enter a value in the Zoom % box. For example, specify 100%
to zoom the display to the extents of the selected error, or specify
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 495
60% to display more of the drawing outside the selected error. Specify
0 to maintain the current zoom level.
■ To zoom to the selected error, clear the Auto Zoom check box and
click Zoom.
12 Click Close to make the corrections to your map.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Cleanup Actions
Drawing cleanup actions detect map errors (for example, duplicate objects,
undershoots, or zero length objects), simplify complex 2D maps, and weed
and supplement 3D polylines.
To select cleanup actions and set options
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
496 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Overview of Cleanup Actions
Drawing cleanup actions can be used to detect map errors (for example,
duplicate objects, undershoots, or zero length objects), simplify complex 2D
maps, and to weed and supplement 3D polylines. Because drawing cleanup
may alter your data, you should always make a backup of your data before
cleaning up a map.
For best results, run cleanup actions individually or with a minimum of other
actions.
The following table shows examples of problems that Drawing Cleanup can
correct.
Before Drawing After Drawing Description of Cleanup Action
Cleanup Cleanup Problem
Duplicate objects Delete Duplicates (page 501)
Short objects Erase Short Objects (page 504)
Crossing objects Break Crossing Objects (page 506)
Undershoots Extend Undershoots (page 508)
Objects could be ex- Apparent Intersection (page 510)
tended along their
natural paths to inter-
sect at a projected
point
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 497
Before Drawing After Drawing Description of Cleanup Action
Cleanup Cleanup Problem
Node cluster Snap Clustered Nodes (page 512)
Pseudo-nodes Dissolve Pseudo Nodes (page 515)
Dangles or over- Erase Dangling Objects (page 517)
shoots
2D linear object sim- Simplify Objects (page 519)
plification
Zero-length objects Zero-Length Objects (page 522).
Too many or too few Weed Polylines (page 523)
vertices in a 3D poly-
line
Order of Cleanup Actions
The order of cleanup actions can produce different results. Specify the order
by moving cleanup actions up or down in the list. The action at the top of
the list is performed first.
498 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Setting Cleanup Options
Set the options for each cleanup action individually. For more information,
see the individual help topics about each cleanup action.
Cleaning for Topology
Some types of errors should be fixed before you create a topology. The
following table indicates data errors that should be considered when you are
creating a network or polygon topology. Node topologies do not usually
require cleanup.
Error Network Topology Polygon Topology
Duplicates Must remove Must remove
Short Linear Objects Can remove Can remove
Crossing Linear Objects Check for validity. See Creating a Must remove
Network Topology (page 534).
Undershoots Must remove Must remove
Node Cluster Must remove Must remove
Pseudo Nodes Can remove Can remove
Dangles or overshoots Check for validity. Can remove Must remove
Simplify Linear Objects Can apply Can apply
Zero-Length Objects Must remove Must remove
In addition, if you have closed polylines (polygons) that may be missing
centroids, you should create centroids (page 580) for them before using them
in topology.
Notes
■ Cleanup affects objects on layers that are OFF. It does not affect objects
on layers that are FROZEN. It is recommended that you use drawing cleanup
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 499
on a layer-by-layer basis, or on selective sets of layers. Avoid using automatic
cleanup for all objects on all layers.
■ All tools except Weed Polylines work in two dimensions only, ignoring
Z-values. When you use the 2D tools, Z data (indicating elevations) might
be lost when processing objects at different elevations.
To select cleanup actions and set options
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2 On the Select Actions page, select the cleanup actions to perform by
adding them to the Selected Actions list.
To add an action to the Selected Actions list, select the action in the
Cleanup Actions list. Click Add >.
■ To delete duplicate objects (page 503)
■ To erase short linear objects (page 505)
■ To break crossing objects (page 507)
■ To extend undershoots (page 509)
■ To extend objects to their apparent intersection (page 512)
■ To snap clustered nodes (page 514)
■ To dissolve pseudo nodes (page 516)
■ To erase dangling objects (page 518)
■ To simplify objects (page 521)
■ To identify zero-length objects (page 522)
■ To weed or add vertices to a 3D polyline (page 526)
3 In the Selected Actions list, specify the order in which to perform the
cleanup actions. The order is important and can effect your results. The
first action in the list will be performed first. To change the order,
highlight an action and click the up or down arrow.
NOTE For best results, run Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines by
individually. If you run one of these with other actions, it will always be run
before other actions, regardless of its position in the list. In addition, these
actions will only be run once, regardless of how many times they are listed.
500 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
4 In the Selected Actions list, select an action.
Each action has it's own set of options, and it is important that you take
the time to set up each one individually. For more information about a
specific action's settings, click one of the links above.
5 Under Cleanup Parameters, enter the settings to use for the selected
action.
6 To review detected errors before correcting them, under Options, select
Interactive.
Otherwise, Autodesk Map 3D automatically corrects all detected errors.
NOTE Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines are not interactive operations.
Autodesk Map 3D makes these changes automatically during cleanup.
7 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Delete Duplicates
Delete Duplicates locates objects that share the same start and end points as
well as all other points within the tolerance distance. You can delete one of
the objects. You can include the following object types:
■ Linear objects
■ Points
■ Blocks
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 501
■ Text
■ Mtext
WARNING Do not use Delete Duplicates with polygon topology because it deletes
important topology data.
■ The coordinate locations of objects and the number of vertices (i.e., object
geometry) are considered when checking for duplicates, therefore, objects
with different directions, objects of different types (for example, lines and
polylines), and objects with different properties (for example, linetype and
color) can be considered as duplicates.
■ You can choose to consider Z-value (elevation) when checking for
duplicates. For blocks, text, and mtext, you can also choose whether to
consider object rotation.
■ Objects with the same geometry, but on different layers, are considered
duplicates. Use the Select Objects page to select objects on one layer at a
time.
502 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
NOTE When deleting duplicate edges that are polyline segments, the command
deletes lines and arcs before breaking polylines. The command removes only
objects with the same geometry, even if the objects are on different layers.
To delete duplicate objects
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Delete
Duplicates. Click Add >.
3 In the Select Actions list, click Delete Duplicates to display the cleanup
parameters for this action.
4 Under Cleanup Parameters, set Tolerance to a value slightly higher than
the distance between the objects.
Enter a value in the Tolerance box or click Pick to select two points that
define the tolerance.
5 Select the object types to include in the Delete Duplicates calculation.
6 To include rotation in the delete duplicates calculation for Blocks, Text,
or Mtext, select Rotation.
7 To include z-values (elevation) in the delete duplicates calculation, select
Z-values.
8 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 503
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Erase Short Objects
Using the Erase Short Objects cleanup action, you can locate any objects
shorter than the specified tolerance and erase them. This removes short isolated
linear objects and short linear objects that are part of a polyline.
504 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
This action is similar to the Dissolve Pseudo-Nodes action, except Erase Short
Objects removes both the linear object and associated nodes.
Depending on your data, use Snap Clustered Nodes next to correct errors that
might result from the Erase Short Objects option.
To erase short linear objects
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Erase Short
Objects. Click Add >.
3 In the Select Actions list, click Erase Short Objects to display the cleanup
parameters for this action.
4 Under Cleanup Parameters, set Tolerance to a value slightly smaller than
the shortest length you want to retain.
You can enter a value into the Tolerance box or click Pick to go to the
map and select two points that define the tolerance to use.
5 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 505
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Break Crossing Objects
Use Break Crossing Objects, to locate objects that cross each other and have
no node at the crossing, break the crossing objects, and create a node at the
crossing. This action takes a complex system of lines, arcs, circles, and polylines
and breaks them at intersections into individual, unambiguous objects.
This action is important when you are establishing network topology or
working with topographic contours. The first example shows four linear objects
in a network topology that were digitized as two linear objects; after you use
Break Crossing Objects, the linear objects are four separate objects that intersect
at a common point.
506 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Closed objects, such as contours and lakes, can be cleaned up with the Break
Crossing Objects and Erase Dangling Objects actions. Use Break Crossing
Objects to create separate objects, and then use Erase Dangling Objects (page
517) or the ERASE command. Verify that the shape created after editing reflects
the intended shape and that a distorted, closed area is not created.
Notes
■ Autodesk Map 3D does not refer to a tolerance value when breaking crossing
objects.
■ The Break Crossing Objects action corrects apparent problems across layers
and may break lines meant to indicate separate objects, such as rivers and
roads. Use Break Crossing Objects with one layer at a time to avoid this
problem.
■ Using the Break Crossing Objects action on an arc whose endpoints are
very close may result in the duplication or extension of the arc.
To break crossing objects
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Break
Crossing Objects. Click Add >.
3 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
■ Break Crossing Objects does not use a tolerance value or other cleanup
parameters.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 507
■ Using the Break Crossing Objects action on an arc whose endpoints are
very close may result in the duplication or extension of the arc.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Extend Undershoots
Undershoots are often caused by inaccurate digitizing or when converting
scanned data. Using the Extend Undershoots cleanup action, you can locate
objects that come within the specified tolerance radius of each other, but do
not meet.
If one object can be extended to cross the other, it will be extended (while
maintaining the same direction) and snapped to a point on the object. If no
node exists, one will be created at the intersection.
If two objects pass within the specified tolerance and can be snapped without
changing their direction, they will be snapped together. If no node exists at
that point, one will be created.
508 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Undershoots are often found in the same drawing as dangles. Dangles, or
overshoots, are caused by a linear object going beyond an intersection with
a target linear object. See Erase Dangling Objects (page 517).
The Extend Undershoots action works in the same way as Break Crossing
Objects works with undershoots, except that with Extend Undershoots, you
must select the Break Target option to break the target linear objects at the
intersections.
NOTE Using the Extend Undershoots action on an arc whose endpoints are very
close may result in the duplication or extension of the arc.
To extend undershoots
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 509
2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Extend
Undershoots. Click Add >.
3 In the Select Actions list, click Extend Undershoots to display the cleanup
parameters for this action.
4 Under Cleanup Parameters, set Tolerance to a value slightly larger than
the largest gap.
You can enter a value into the Tolerance box or click Pick to go to the
map and select two points that define the tolerance to use.
5 To break target linear objects at the intersections during the Extend
Undershoots operation, select Break Target.
6 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
NOTE Using the Extend Undershoots option on an arc whose endpoints are very
close may result in the duplication or extension of the arc.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Apparent Intersection
With Apparent Intersection, you can locate two objects that do not intersect
but that could be extended (within a specified tolerance radius) along their
natural paths to intersect at a projected point.
The tolerance is used as a radius distance from the end of the two links. If the
endpoints of the objects and the apparent intersection fall within the specified
510 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
tolerance radius distance, and the objects can be extended without changing
their direction, they will be extended to the apparent intersection.
NOTE Apparent Intersection is based on the AutoCAD EXTEND command and
uses its Edge and Extend options.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 511
To extend objects to their apparent intersection
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Apparent
Intersection. Click Add >.
3 In the Select Actions list, click Apparent Intersection to display the cleanup
parameters for this action.
4 Under Cleanup Parameters, set the Tolerance to a value slightly higher
than the radius of a circle that includes the endpoints of the objects and
their projected intersection point (try to imagine a point where the objects
would intersect if they extended along their natural paths).
You can enter a value into the Tolerance box or click Pick to go to the
map and select two points that define the tolerance to use.
If Autodesk Map 3D doesn't find an apparent intersection, you might
want to try increasing the Tolerance value.
5 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Snap Clustered Nodes
Use Snap Clustered Nodes to correct multiple nodes near the same point. With
Snap Clustered Nodes, you locate nodes within a specified tolerance radius
distance of each other and snap them to a single location. Nodes at the ends
of lines and polylines are automatically included in this cleanup action. You
can also include stand-alone nodes (points and blocks).
512 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
The snap point will be one of the existing nodes, and you can choose whether
you want it to be one of the link endpoints or one of the stand-alone nodes.
Based on your settings, Autodesk Map 3D determines the best snap point,
calculating which point has the most weight based on its relative location to
the other nodes. Also considered are anchored nodes. While anchored nodes
are not altered or moved during the Snap Clustered Nodes operation, they are
included in the calculation that determines the snap point.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 513
Notes
■ When using Snap Clustered Nodes, nodes are moved to a single location
but are not deleted, which can result in multiple objects at the same
location. Use Delete Duplicates to remove duplicate objects.
■ You can anchor objects during object selection so that they are not changed
during the snap operation. Note, however, anchored objects are included
in the selection set and will affect the snap point.
■ As the endpoints of the links move, the direction of the links can also
change.
■ Text and MText are excluded from the Snap Clustered Nodes operation.
To snap clustered nodes
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Snap
Clustered Nodes. Click Add >.
3 In the Select Actions list, click Snap Clustered Nodes to display the cleanup
parameters for this action.
4 Under Cleanup Parameters, set Tolerance to a value slightly higher than
the radius of a circle that includes the link endpoints and nodes to snap
together.
You can enter a value into the Tolerance box or click Pick to go to the
map and select two points that define the tolerance to use.
5 The endpoints of lines and polylines are automatically included in the
Snap Clustered Nodes operation. To include stand-alone nodes in the
calculation as well, select the types to include:
■ Points
■ Blocks
Text and Mtext are automatically excluded.
6 Select the snap behavior to use:
■ Snap To Node – Snaps to an existing node.
■ Snap To Link – Snaps to an existing link endpoint.
7 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
514 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Dissolve Pseudo Nodes
A pseudo-node is an unnecessary node in a geometric link that is shared by
only two objects. For example, a long link might be divided unnecessarily
into many, smaller links by pseudo-nodes.
Using the Dissolve Pseudo-Nodes cleanup action, you can locate any
pseudo-nodes, dissolve the node, and join the two objects. This option removes
nodes that are at the intersection of two linear objects, but leaves the vertex
in place.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 515
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D does not refer to a tolerance value when dissolving
pseudo nodes.
When you dissolve a pseudo node on a 2D polyline with different Z values,
the first Z-value on the object is used. On a 3D polyline, the Z-value on the
first vertex is used. The object remains a 3D polyline. For all other properties,
the values on the first object are used.
WARNING Using Dissolve Pseudo-Nodes may result in the loss of certain types
of data. For example, if two lines have object data attached, the resulting single
polyline retains object data from only one of the lines. Similarly, if two lines on
different layers share an end point, the resulting polyline will reside on only one
of the layers.
See also:
■ Erase Short Objects (page 504)
■ Snap Clustered Nodes (page 512)
■ Simplify Objects (page 519)
To dissolve pseudo nodes
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Dissolve
Pseudo Nodes. Click Add >.
3 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
516 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
NOTE Dissolve Pseudo Nodes does not use a tolerance value or other cleanup
parameters.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Erase Dangling Objects
Use Erase Dangling Objects to locate an object with at least one end point
that is not shared by another object, and erase the object.
The Erase Dangling Objects action searches for and deletes all line, arc, and
polyline dangling edges, and nodes. Dangling objects do not include closed
polylines.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 517
A dangle is often caused by inaccurate digitizing where an object extends
beyond its intended intersection with a target object. Usually you should use
Break Crossing Objects before using Erase Dangling Objects.
To erase dangling objects
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Erase
Dangling Objects. Click Add >.
3 In the Select Actions list, click Erase Dangling Objects to display the
cleanup parameters for this action.
4 Under Cleanup Parameters, set Tolerance to a value slightly larger than
the longest dangle to erase.
You can enter a value into the Tolerance box or click Pick to go to the
map and select two points that define the tolerance to use.
5 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
518 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Simplify Objects
When maps are digitized, edges may be defined with more detail than
necessary. Use Simplify Objects to reduce unnecessary complexity in contour
lines, rivers, and coastlines. Simplifying objects, also known as generalizing
or weeding, reduces the number of points on a complex line.
Simplify Objects works in two dimensions, ignoring Z-values. For information
about how to add and remove vertices from 3D polylines, see Weed Polylines
(page 523).
When you use Simplify Objects, you simplify complex polylines by removing
all interior nodes that fall within the specified tolerance width. Polyline
segments falling within the same corridor are generalized into a single polyline.
Branching points, dead ends, and endpoints of polylines are not generalized.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 519
Setting the Tolerance
Autodesk Map 3D converts a set of connected polyline segments within the
same tolerance into a single polyline. You specify the tolerance corridor width.
The corridor values vary according to the scale of the map; maps with
coordinate values of millions use larger values than those using hundreds.
Simplifying linear objects removes as many points as possible from a polyline
while keeping it within the original tolerance corridor.
520 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
A coastline simplified at different tolerance settings
■ For best results, run Simplify Objects individually. If you perform Simplify
Objects with other cleanup actions, Autodesk Map 3D performs Simplify
Objects first, regardless of its position in the Selected Actions list.
■ Use deleting duplicates (page 501) before simplifying linear objects.
■ Simplify Objects is not an interactive operation. Autodesk Map 3D makes
the changes automatically during cleanup.
■ If your objects are lines, not plines, use Dissolve Pseudo Nodes to create a
single pline.
■ Simplify Objects removes width from polylines. Save your map before you
simplify linear objects, so you can return to the original lines if necessary.
NOTE Simplify Objects works in two dimensions, ignoring Z-values. For
information about how to add and remove vertices from 3D polylines, see Weed
Polylines (page 523).
To simplify objects
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Simplify
Objects. Click Add >.
NOTE For best results, run Simplify Objects individually. If you run Simplify
Objects with other actions, Autodesk Map 3D runs Simplify Objects first,
regardless of its position in the Selected Actions list.
3 In the Select Actions list, click Simplify Objects to display the cleanup
parameters for this action.
4 Under Cleanup Parameters, set Tolerance to an appropriate value.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 521
You can enter a value into the Tolerance box or click Pick to go to the
map and select two points that define the tolerance to use.
5 To allow the introduction of arcs during the Simplify Objects operation,
select Create Arcs.
6 Accept all other defaults.
Autodesk Map 3D automatically simplifies objects. You do not need to
set the Interactive option.
7 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Zero-Length Objects
Use Zero-Length Objects to locate lines, arcs, and polylines that have a start
point and an end point but have zero-length, or are missing an end point,
and erase them. The Zero-Length Objects cleanup action does not evaluate
closed polylines.
Zero-length objects can be introduced inadvertently when importing data
from other applications or when digitizing map data.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D does not refer to a tolerance value when identifying
zero-length objects.
To identify zero-length objects
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
522 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
2 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Zero Length
Objects. Click Add >.
3 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
NOTE Zero Length Objects does not use a tolerance value or other cleanup
parameters.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Weed Polylines
Use Weed Polylines to add and remove vertices on 3D polylines. This is helpful
to control the drawing file size and contour appearance, or to remove
redundant information.
Using Weed Polylines, you enter Weeding and Supplementing Factors to
determine if a vertex should be added or removed from the 3D polyline.
Weeding Factors
Use Weeding Factors to reduce the number of points generated along 3D
polylines. Weeding factors ignore vertices that are closer together than the
Distance factor and that deflect less than the Angle factor. A larger distance
and deflection angle weeds a greater number of points. The distance factor is
measured in linear units and the angle factor is measured in angular units.
Weeding factors must be less than Supplementing Factors.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 523
A point on the 3D polyline is weeded by calculating its location in relation
to the vertices before and after it. If the length between these three points is
less than the weeding length value, and the deflection angle is less than the
weeding angle value, then the middle point is not added to the contour data
file.
Weeding factor parameters
Supplementing Factors
Use Supplementing Factors to supplement or add vertices along 3D polylines.
The supplementing distance is the maximum distance between vertices. If the
distance between vertices on a contour is greater than the Supplementing
Factor, then points are added along the contour at equal intervals that are less
than or equal to the supplementing distance. The smaller the distance, the
greater the number of supplemented points.
524 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Supplementing Factor parameters
Bulge
For curves, the bulge value is a ratio of the distance from the arc to the chord
divided by half the length of the chord. The bulge factor adds vertices to a
polyline curve, creating an approximation of the curve using straight line
segments. The length of these segments varies depending on the bulge factor
and the degree of curvature.
Bulge factor parameters
■ Notes
It is recommended that you run Weed Polylines individually. If you run
it with other operations, it will always be run before other actions,
regardless of its position in the list. In addition, it will only be run once,
regardless of how many times it is listed.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 525
■ Weed Polylines is not an interactive operation. Autodesk Map 3D makes
the changes automatically during cleanup.
To weed or add vertices to a 3D polyline
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2 On the Select Objects page, select the 3D polylines from which you want
to remove extra vertices or add vertices. Click Next.
3 On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Weed
Polylines. Click Add >.
NOTE It is recommended that you run Weed Polylines by itself (without
other cleanup actions). If you choose to run it with other actions, note that
Weed Polylines will only be run once, regardless of how many times it's listed
in the Selected Actions list, and it will always be run before other actions,
regardless of its position in the list.
4 In the Select Actions list, click Weed Polylines to display the Cleanup
Parameters for this action.
5 Under Weeding Factors, enter the weeding distance in the Distance box,
or click Pick and use your pointing device to specify distance by selecting
two locations in the drawing.
6 For Angle, enter the deflection angle, or click Pick to specify the angle
by selecting a starting point, a vertex, and an ending point.
Notes
■ A point on a 3D polyline is weeded by calculating its location in
relation to the vertices before and after it. If the length between these
three points is less than the weeding Distance value, and the deflection
angle is less than the weeding Angle value, then the middle point is
weeded out.
■ A larger distance and deflection angle weeds a greater number of
points.
■ The weeding distance must be less than the supplementing distance.
■ When using Pick to specify measurements, measurements are displayed
dynamically using a tooltip. The format and precision of of the
measurements are determined by the UNITS command.
526 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
7 Under Supplementing Factors, enter the supplementing Distance, or click
Pick to specify distance in the drawing.
The supplementing distance is the maximum distance between vertices.
If the distance between vertices on a contour is greater than the
supplementing factor, then points are added along the contour at equal
intervals that are less than or equal to the supplementing distance. The
smaller the distance, the greater the number of supplemented points.
8 For Bulge, enter the bulge factor value, or click Pick to specify it in the
drawing.
The bulge factor adds vertices to a polyline curve, creating an
approximation of the curve using straight line segments. The bulge value
is a ratio of the distance from the arc to the chord divided by half the
length of the chord.
9 Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings. Click Finish.
When the operation is complete, the total number of original vertices, the
total number of vertices removed, and the number of new vertices is reported
on the command line.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies
A topology is defined by a set of objects anddata and their relationship. Use
the information in these sections to create, analyze, edit, and manage
topologies.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 527
To create, edit, and manage topologies
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Creating Topologies
Using Autodesk Map 3D, you can create node, network, or polygon topologies.
For network topologies, you can specify the direction of movement allowed
for links and the resistance for links and nodes.
To create a topology
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Overview of Creating Topologies
Using Autodesk Map 3D, you can create node, network, or polygon topologies.
528 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Node Topologies:
■ Define the interrelation of nodes (point objects).
■ Are often used in conjunction with other topologies in analysis.
Network Topologies:
■ Connect links (lines) to form a linear network.
■ Links can connect nodes.
An example of network topology is a water-distribution application that traces
the flow of water from a pumping station to residences. A street network is
another example. For network topologies, you can specify the direction for a
link and specify the resistance for a link or node.
Polygon Topologies:
■ Define polygons that represent enclosed areas such as land parcels and
census tracts. A single link defines the common boundary between adjacent
areas.
Uses of polygon topology include tax assessment and land planning in which
parcels of land are represented by polygons. Political boundaries, such as
voting districts, city, state, or provincial boundaries, special districts, and
school districts, are other examples of the use of polygon topology.
When you create a topology, keep the following points in mind:
■ Before you create network or polygon topologies, use the drawing cleanup
tools to clean up your map, as described in Cleaning Up Maps (page 477).
Node topologies do not usually require cleanup.
■ Before you create a topology, freeze all layers containing objects in paper
space (Layout tab). Otherwise, these objects are included in the topology
creation when you use the "Select All" objects option.
■ MAPTOPOCREATE can create topologies on layers that are turned off. It
does not affect layers that are frozen.
■ When creating network or polygon topologies, if you enable the Create
New Nodes option, Autodesk Map 3D detects where lines are connected
and assigns nodes to end points. It creates physical or explicit node objects
at all link end points where no objects exist. If the layer you specify does
not exist already, Autodesk Map 3D creates the layer with a color of 7 and
a CONTINUOUS linetype.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 529
■ If you create nodes using ACAD_POINT, to change their appearance and
size, click Setup ➤ More Formatting Options ➤ Point Style.
■ When you create a topology, information is stored as object data on each
element of the topology and is saved with the map. Each node, link, or
polygon is automatically given a unique identification (ID) number. Each
ID is automatically processed when you use any topology command.
WARNING Using the BREAK command affects topology. If you use BREAK, you
must use MAPTOPOCREATE again to recreate the topology. You might also need
to clean up the geometry in the drawing again.
See also:
To create a topology
1 Bring the nodes or links into the current drawing:
■ Attach the drawings containing the objects, then query the objects
into the current drawing.
■ Open the drawing containing the objects.
2 Click Create menu ➤ Topology.
3 In the Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box (page 1317), enter a
name and description for the new topology.
4 Under Topology Type, select the topology to create. Follow the steps for
that topology:
■ To create a node topology (page 532)
■ To create a network topology (page 535)
■ To create a polygon topology (page 540)
5 When you are done specifying settings, click Finish to create the topology.
6 If appropriate, save the topology information back to source drawings.
As you create the topology, if Autodesk Map 3D finds errors, it gives a warning
message and highlights the errors. Correct any errors; then create the topology
over again.
530 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
See also:
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOCREATE
Creates a new topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Create ➤ Topology
Icon
Create Topology
Command Line MAPTOPOCREATE
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Topologies ➤ Create
Dialog Box Create Topology dialog box
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Creating a Node Topology
You can create a node topology with point objects, blocks, or text. A node
topology used in association with a network or polygon topology can hold
information about junctions and intersections between elements of the
topology.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 531
Customer locations can be used as the basis for a node topology.
Object Data for Node Topology
Information about a node topology is held in an object data table as shown
in this table.
Topology Name Object Data Table Object Data Field
SAMPLE_NODE TPMNODE_SAMPLE_NODE ID
To create a node topology
1 Do one of the following to bring nodes into the current drawing:
■ Attach the drawings containing the nodes. Query the nodes into the
current drawing.
■ Open the drawing containing the nodes.
■ Import nodes from another file format.
2 In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing DataTopology.
3 In the Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box (page 1317):
■ Click Node to specify the type of topology to create.
■ Enter a name and description for the new topology.
532 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore, hyphen,
and dollar characters. Names cannot include spaces.
■ Click Next.
4 In the Create Node Topology - Select Nodes dialog box, specify the nodes
to include in the topology:
■ To include all nodes in the map, click Select All.
■ To manually select the nodes to include, click Select Manually. Click
Select Nodes to select the nodes in the map. When you finish selecting
nodes, press Enter.
■ To filter (restrict) node selection by layer (only the nodes that are on
specified layers will be selected), specify those layers in the Layers box.
To select from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. If the
layer is not listed, it may be Frozen, Locked. or Off. To use all layers,
enter an asterisk (*).
■ To use only selected blocks as node objects, specify those blocks in
the Blocks box. To use points as nodes, select the ACAD_POINT block.
■ To filter node selection by object class, specify those object classes in
the Object Classes box. Only nodes that belong to the specified object
classes will be included in the topology.
The layer, block, and object class filters apply to both automatic and
manual selection of nodes.
5 Click Finish to create the topology.
6 If appropriate, save the topology information back to source drawings.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOCREATE
Creates a new topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Create ➤ Topology
Icon
Create Topology
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 533
Command Line MAPTOPOCREATE
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Topologies ➤ Create
Dialog Box Create Topology dialog box
Creating a Network Topology
Network topology defines the interconnection of links and, optionally, nodes
at link junctions. Networks may contain loops. Network segments have a
specified direction. Links can be lines, open polylines, or arcs. You can use
information from different layers to define a network topology.
If you plan to use the network topology for direction analysis, you can use
PEDIT to join a series of objects with the same flow direction into one object
with nodes at each vertex. The directions derived from arc objects might be
arbitrary; to control and edit these directions easily, use PEDIT to join segments
with the same direction.
When you create the network topology with nodes at each intersection, the
nodes do not significantly increase file size. You can use the nodes for path
traces (page 858), best route analysis (page 862), and flood traces (page 867).
Object Data for Network Topology
Network topology information is stored on the links and nodes as object data.
Each element of the network topology has different object data values.
Topology Name Object Data Table Object Data Field
SAMPLE_NET TPMLINK_SAMPLE_NET ID
START_NODE
END_NODE
DIRECTION
DIRECT_RESISTANCE
REVERSE_RESISTANCE
534 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
By default, each link is bidirectional. Both resistance and direction are stored
as object data. You can edit both direction (page 543) and resistance (page 547)
values.
If you create nodes when you create the network topology, the object data
table for each node has the following information.
Topology Name Object Data Table Object Data Field
SAMPLE_NET TPMNODE_SAMPLE_NET ID
RESISTANCE
See also:
■ Performing a Shortest Path Trace (page 858)
■ Performing a Best Route Analysis (page 862)
■ Performing a Flood Trace (page 867)
To create a network topology
1 Do one of the following to bring the linework into the current drawing:
■ Attach the drawings containing the linework. Query the linework
into the current drawing.
■ Open the drawing containing the linework.
■ Import the linework from another file format.
2 In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing DataTopology.
3 In the Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box (page 1317):
■ Click Network to specify the type of topology to create.
■ Enter a name and description for the new topology.
Names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore, hyphen,
and dollar characters. Names cannot include spaces.
■ Click Next.
4 In the Create Network Topology - Select Links dialog box, specify the
links to include in the topology:
■ To include all links in the map, click Select All.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 535
■ To manually select the links to include, click Select Manually. Click
Select Links to select the links in the map. When you finish selecting
links, press Enter.
■ To filter (restrict) link selection by layer (only links on the specified
layers will be selected), specify the layers in the Layers box. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. If the layer is not
listed, it may be Frozen, Locked, or Off. To use all layers, enter an
asterisk (*).
■ To filter link selection by object class, specify the object classes in the
Object Classes box. Only links that belong to the specified object
classes will be included in the topology.
Layer and object class filters apply to both the automatic and manual
selection of links.
■ Click Next.
5 In the Create Network Topology - Select Nodes dialog box dialog box,
select the nodes to include:
■ To include all nodes, click Select All.
■ To manually select nodes, click Select Manually. Click Select Nodes
to select the nodes.
■ To filter (restrict) node selection by layer (only the nodes on the
specified layers are selected), specify the layers in the Layers box.
■ To use only selected blocks as node objects, specify the blocks in the
Blocks box. To use points as nodes, select the ACAD_POINT block.
■ To filter node selection by object class, specify the object classes in
the Object Classes box. Only nodes that belong to the specified object
classes are included in the topology.
■ To have Autodesk Map 3D create node objects at the endpoint of
links, click Next. Otherwise, go to step 7.
6 In the Create Network Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box, do the
following:
■ To create new nodes, select Create New Nodes.
■ Select a layer for the new nodes.
■ Select a block to use for the nodes. To use a point object, select
ACAD_POINT. Modify the appearance of a point object using the
536 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
PDMODE and PDSIZE system variables. For more information, see the
AutoCAD help.
7 Click Finish to create the topology.
8 If appropriate, save the topology information back to source drawings.
For information about adding direction and resistance, see the following
topics:
Specifying the Direction for a Link (page 543)
Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node (page 547)
See also:
■ To perform a shortest path trace (page 859)
■ To perform a best route analysis (page 864)
■ To perform a flood trace (page 868)
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOCREATE
Creates a new topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Create ➤ Topology
Icon
Create Topology
Command Line MAPTOPOCREATE
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Topologies ➤ Create
Dialog Box Create Topology dialog box
Creating a Polygon Topology
Polygon topology is an extension of network topology and focuses on
area-based relationships. Every area forms a polygon; and each polygon in a
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 537
topology consists of a set of links. A polygon in a topology has a centroid,
which is a point or block element within the polygon, and contains
information about the area it encloses.
A polygon in a topology consists of a centroid containing information about the
surrounding links. Intersecting links can have nodes. A polygon can contain one, or
more, islands.
You cannot create a polygon topology from ellipses or from closed polylines
that share an edge or intersection with other polygons. You must explode a
closed polyline before you create the topology. You can use information from
different layers to define a polygon topology.
Cleaning Your Data
Clean up your data before creating polygon topology; eliminate gaps,
intersections, or overlaps between any of the linework in a polygon topology.
In addition, eliminate zero length objects or areas with missing centroids.
If Autodesk Map 3D cannot create a polygon topology because the links in
the polygons that cross over do not have a node where they meet, the
intersections are highlighted with an X or marked with an error marker (block)
that you configure. Missing centroids are also highlighted or marked in the
538 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
same way. Optionally, you can detect duplicate centroids, incomplete areas,
and sliver polygons (page 542) as well.
NOTE The markers used to mark polygon topology errors are the same as those
used to mark drawing cleanup errors. Before creating a polygon topology, Autodesk
Map 3D removes any markers present from previous drawing cleanup operations.
Conversely, when you run a drawing cleanup operation, Autodesk Map 3D removes
any markers present from creating a polygon topology.
To fix crossing objects, use to break the crossing objects, and create the
topology again.
You can ensure there are no missing centroids by selecting the Create Missing
Centroids option on the Create Polygon Topology - Create New Centroids
screen.
Object Data for Polygon Topology
Information about a polygon topology is held in the centroids and links. The
object data table for each centroid has the following information.
Topology Name Object Data Table Object Data Field
SAMPLE_POLY TPMCNTR_SAMPLE_POLY ID
AREA
PERIMETER
LINKS_QTY
The object data table for each link in a polygon topology has the following
information.
Topology Name Object Data Table Object Data Field
SAMPLE_POLY TPMLINK_SAMPLE_POLY ID
START_NODE
END_NODE
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 539
Topology Name Object Data Table Object Data Field
DIRECTION
DIRECT_RESISTANCE
REVERSE_RESISTANCE
LEFT_POLYGON
RIGHT_POLYGON
If you create nodes when you create the polygon topology, the object data
table for each node has the following information.
Topology Name Object Data Table Object Data Field
SAMPLE_POLY TPMNODE_SAMPLE_POLY ID
RESISTANCE
Creating Topologies for a Land Use Map
To create a topology for a land use and land cover map, create areas for each
type and add text or a block to each area to identify the type. Create one
topology named LAND_USE; on the Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids
dialog box, click Select Manually, then click Select Objects , and select
the text or block objects. The centroid value can then be queried from the
polygon topology with the topology query command described in Querying
a Topology (page 881).
To create a polygon topology
1 Do one of the following to bring linework into the current drawing:
■ Attach the drawings containing the linework. Query the linework
into the current drawing.
■ Open the drawing containing the linework.
■ Import the linework from another file format.
540 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
2 In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing DataTopology.
3 In the Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box (page 1317):
■ Under Topology Type, click Polygon to indicate that you want to
create a polygon topology.
■ Enter a Topology Name and Topology Description for your new
topology.
Names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore, hyphen,
and dollar characters. Names cannot include spaces.
■ Click Next.
4 Continue and follow the on-screen instructions to specify the objects to
use to create the topology. You can also have Autodesk Map 3D create
any missing nodes and centroids.
■ Use the Create Polygon Topology - Select Links dialog box to select
the linear objects to use to generate polygons for the topology. To use
a closed polyline to create polygon topology, you must first explode
the closed polyline.
■ Use the Create Polygon Topology - Select Nodes dialog box to select
the node objects to include in the topology.
■ Use the Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box (page
1311) to have Autodesk Map 3D create node objects where needed.
Specify the layer and block to use for the new node objects.
■ Use the Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog box (page
1312) to select the centroids to use.
■ Use the Create Polygon Topology - Create New Centroids dialog box
(page 1310) to create centroids where needed. Specify the layer and block
to use for the new centroids.
5 In the Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box (page 1315),
indicate whether to highlight and/or mark detected errors with blocks.
Autodesk Map 3D automatically checks for Missing Centroids and
Intersections. Additionally, you can choose to have Autodesk Map 3D
check for Duplicate Centroids, Incomplete Areas, and Sliver Polygons.
■ To highlight errors with red Xs, select Highlight Errors.
■ To mark errors with blocks of the shape and color you specify, select
Mark Errors With Blocks.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 541
■ In the Marker Size box, specify the marker size as a percent of the
screen size. A value between 3% and 7% is usually suitable.
■ If you choose the Mark Errors With Blocks option, specify the shape
and color of the block to use to mark each error.
6 Click Finish to create the polygon topology.
To remove highlighting, use the REDRAW, REGEN, or SAVE command.
To remove an error marker, select it and press Delete.
7 If appropriate, save the topology information back to source drawings.
Sliver Polygons
A sliver polygon is very long and thin; its perimeter is very large compared to
its area. When overlaying two topologies, Autodesk Map 3D checks for sliver
polygons. When creating a new polygon topology, checking for sliver polygons
is optional.
If a sliver polygon is detected, Autodesk Map 3D highlights its centroid with
an X. To clear the Xs, use the REGEN command.
Though sliver polygons are not considered errors by Autodesk Map 3D and
your topology can still be considered correct and complete, the sliver polygons
may be unintentional, for example, the result of digitizing errors. If you see
sliver polygons, you may want to double-check your data to make sure it is
correct and that the sliver polygons are expected.
For example, imagine you digitize two adjacent polygons, such as a parcel
and a flood plain, and there are slight overlaps between the two. Then, you
create topologies for each, overlay the topologies, and the resulting topology
contains sliver polygons. These may be correct or not, depending on your
data. If the boundaries between the adjacent polygons are meant to be the
same, then the sliver polygons are incorrect and you must correct your data.
If the boundaries are not meant to be the same, then sliver polygons are
correct.
542 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Sliver polygons detected during an overlay (the Xs indicate the sliver polygons).
See also:
■ Correcting or Completing a Topology (page 600)
Specifying the Direction for a Link
You can specify the direction of movement allowed for a link in a network
topology. Autodesk Map 3D uses this direction when tracing through network
topology for path traces, best route analysis, and flood traces.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 543
544 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Direction Property in the Object data val-
Properties palette ue
Bi-Directional (two-way) Bi-Directional 0
Same as created. Movement along the link Forward 1
is allowed only in the direction that the
link was created.
Reverse of created direction. Movement Reverse -1
along the link is allowed only in the oppo-
site direction that the link was created.
The default direction of an arc, or a two point polyline with an arc segment,
is counterclockwise. Set the value to Bi-Directional (0) or Forward (1) for
counterclockwise, and to Reverse (-1) for clockwise.
To reverse the direction of selected links, right-click a network topology in
Map Explorer. Click Reverse Link Direction. Or use the MAPRL command.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 545
To specify the direction for a link
1 Verify that the network topology containing the link is loaded. Note that
you can specify link direction for network topologies only.
2 In the map, double-click the link for which you want to specify direction.
If more than one topology contains the same link, select one of the
topologies. Update the other topologies later using the Update option.
3 In the Properties palette, under the Topo properties, choose a setting for
the Flow Direction property:
■ Bi-Directional — Movement is allowed in both directions.
■ Forward — Movement is allowed only in the direction that the link
was created.
■ Reverse — Movement is allowed only in the opposite direction of the
direction that the link was created.
The new direction setting is assigned to the link.
NOTE You can also store a direction value in an object data table or an external
database table. When you run a shortest path trace, best route analysis, or flood
trace, you can specify the location of this data. When storing this data, use 0 for
Bi-Directional, 1 for Forward, and -1 for Reverse.
Quick Reference
MAPEDITDIR
Edits direction of a link in a network topology
Command Line MAPEDITDIR
Dialog Box MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command) (page 1295)
MAPRL
Reverses a link in a topology
Command Line MAPRL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Reverse
Link Direction
546 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node
Direct Resistance is the resistance to travel in the direction that a link was
created, while Reverse Resistance is the resistance in the opposite direction
along a link.
For both types, you can specify a resistance for any link in the network
topology. This resistance specifies the difficulty in traversing the link. The
default resistance is the length of the link.
Autodesk Map 3D uses this resistance when doing a shortest path trace, best
route analysis, or flood trace. For an example of using resistance to show travel
times, see Performing a Flood Trace (page 867).
You can also specify the Resistance of a node in a network topology, such as
setting resistance for a valve in a pipe network, or a junction in a road network.
To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology
1 Verify that the network topology containing the link or node is loaded.
Be sure to load the topology from the current drawing. Note that you
can specify resistance for network topologies only.
2 In the map, double-click the link or node for which you want to specify
resistance.
If more than one topology contains the same link or node, select one of
the topologies. Update the other topologies later using the Update option.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 547
3 In the Properties palette, under the group of Topo properties, enter new
value(s) for resistance. Note that you must enter a numeric value.
■ For a node, enter a value for Resistance, which is the resistance to
cross the node.
■ For a link, enter values for Direct Resistance and Reverse Resistance.
Direct resistance is the resistance to travel in the direction that a link
was created, while reverse resistance is the resistance in the opposite
direction along a link. The default value is the length of the link.
The new resistance values are assigned to the objects.
NOTE You can also store a resistance value in object data or an external database.
When you run a flood trace, path trace, or best route analysis, specify the location
of this data.
If you are entering the commands on the command line, use the MAPEDITRES1
command to edit the Direct Resistance of links and the Resistance of nodes;
use the MAPEDITRES2 command to edit the Reverse Resistance of links.
Quick Reference
MAPEDITRES1
Edits direct resistance of a node or link in a network topology
Command Line MAPEDITRES1
Dialog Box MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command)
(page 1295)
MAPEDITRES2
Edits reverse resistance of a link in a network topology
Command Line MAPEDITRES2
Dialog Box MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command)
(page 1295)
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
548 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Editing Topologies
Use the topology editing commands, which are accessible from Map Explorer
or the command line, to make changes to a topology without losing the
integrity of the topology.
To edit a topology
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Overview of Editing a Topology
Use topology editing commands to make changes to a topology without losing
the integrity of the topology. If you use object-editing commands such as
ERASE or STRETCH to modify a topology, important data may be lost. To
repair a topology edited with these commands, use the Update option (page
584).
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 549
Edits to this polygon topology consist of adding a node (page 573) and then
dividing the polygon (page 563) with a link.
To edit a topology, the topology data and geometry must be loaded in the
current drawing. Only one topology can be edited at a time, and multi-user
editing of a topology is not permitted. When you load a topology, an audit
checks topology integrity. This audit is only concerned with topology data,
not with geometry. Any incomplete objects are registered, because only
complete objects can be edited.
To add or insert objects into a topology, the current drawing must be where
the topology was created. If the topology was created in a source drawing, you
must open that drawing to add objects to the topology. Make the layer
containing the topology objects current so new objects have the same
properties as objects already in the topology.
If you edit a topology and then use the Undo command, the altered geometry
is restored to its former state but the altered topology remains current. To
perform further editing on the topology, unload and reload (page 591) the
topology. This applies to all topology functions.
Editing Topologies from More than One Drawing
To edit a topology that spans more than one drawing, you must edit the
topology in the drawing where it was created. The other drawings will be
attached to this drawing. First, query the topology into the drawing, then
unload (page 591) the topology from the source drawings and retrieve the
topology into the current drawing. You can edit part of a topology by querying
just the part you want, but the topology editing commands don't allow you
to edit the edges of a topology or an incomplete topology. See Correcting or
Completing a Topology (page 600) for notes on complete topologies.
550 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
The safest option is to use a query to retrieve the entire topology. However,
if the topology is large, it may impair performance. With large topologies,
query the area to edit plus enough of an area around the edit area to ensure
that the objects to be edited are complete.
Editing a Network Topology
To modify a network topology, for example, adding a new pipe to a water
network, you can add nodes and links to an existing network topology, and
then update the topology to include the new pipes.
Before you edit a topology object, make sure the layer containing the topology
objects is the current layer.
NOTE To edit a topology, you use the Autodesk Map 3D topology edit commands.
When you edit a topology, the topology must be loaded from the current drawing.
To add an object to a topology, the current drawing must be the drawing where
the topology was created.
What do you want to do?
■ To edit a node (page 557)
■ To reposition a node at the end point of a link (page 560)
■ To divide a polygon into two smaller polygons (page 564)
■ To change the appearance of points (page 567)
■ To specify the direction for a link (page 546)
■ To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology (page 547)
■ To create a node on an existing link (page 574)
■ To create a link and add it to a topology (page 576)
■ To add a polygon to a polygon topology using existing linework (page 578)
■ To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines (page 581)
■ To delete a link, node, or polygon (page 582)
■ To update a topology (page 584)
■ To retrieve objects to edit (page 587)
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 551
Quick Reference
DDPTYPE
Specifies the display mode and size of point objects
Menu Setup ➤ More Formatting Options ➤ Point Style
Command Line DDPTYPE
MAPAL
Adds a link to a topology
Command Line MAPAL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Add New Links
MAPAN
Adds a node to a topology
Command Line MAPAN
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Add
Node
MAPAP
Adds a polygon to a polygon topology
Command Line MAPAP
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon topology
➤ Add Polygon
MAPBL
Breaks a link in a topology at a specified point
Command Line MAPBL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Break Link
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
552 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Menu Create ➤ Centroids
Icon
Create Centroids
Command Line MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Dialog Box Create Centroids dialog box (page 1177)
MAPDL
Deletes a link in a topology
Command Line MAPDL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Delete Links
MAPDN
Deletes a node in a topology
Command Line MAPDN
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Delete
Node
MAPDP
Deletes a polygon from a polygon topology
Command Line MAPDP
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon topology
➤ Delete Polygon
MAPDVP
Divides a polygon in a polygon topology by allowing you to add a link
Command Line MAPDVP
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon topology
➤ Divide Polygon
MAPEDITDIR
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 553
Edits direction of a link in a network topology
Command Line MAPEDITDIR
Dialog Box MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command) (page 1295)
MAPEDITRES1
Edits direct resistance of a node or link in a network topology
Command Line MAPEDITRES1
Dialog Box MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command)
(page 1295)
MAPEDITRES2
Edits reverse resistance of a link in a network topology
Command Line MAPEDITRES2
Dialog Box MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command)
(page 1295)
MAPIL
Inserts a link in a topology
Command Line MAPIL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Insert New Link
MAPIN
Inserts a node in a topology
Command Line MAPIN
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Insert
Node
MAPJL
Joins two links in a topology
Command Line MAPJL
554 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Join Links
MAPMEL
Repositions an end point of a link in a topology
Command Line MAPMEL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Move End Of Link
MAPML
Moves a link in a topology
Command Line MAPML
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Move Links
MAPMN
Moves a node in a topology or moves a node at the end of a link in network
or polygon topologies
Command Line MAPMN
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Move
Node
MAPMP
Merges polygons in a polygon topology
Command Line MAPMP
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon topology
➤ Merge Polygon
MAPRL
Reverses a link in a topology
Command Line MAPRL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Reverse
Link Direction
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 555
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Editing a Node
You can move a node in a node topology, or move a node at the end point
of a link in a network or polygon topology. Moving the node at the end point
of a link also moves that end of the chosen link. Edits to nodes and links in
a polygon topology change the centroid, the area, and perimeter values.
When you move a node, Autodesk Map 3D checks its new location.
■ In node topologies, if there is an existing node in the same location, you
must specify which node to keep.
■ In network or polygon topologies, you must specify whether to join the
links and which node to use to join them.
You can also delete nodes. For more information, see Deleting Links, Nodes,
and Polygons (page 581).
556 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Deleting one node that indicates adjoining links, creates a single link.
To turn an explicit node into an implicit node, unload the topology, delete
the point or block representing the explicit node, and then reload the topology.
To turn an implicit node into an explicit node, first insert a block or point at
the implicit node point (use an Intersection or End snap to position the block
accurately). Then, if you are working with a node topology, right-click the
topology name in Map Explorer. Click Add Node. You cannot use the Insert
Node option. If you are working with a network or polygon topology, use the
MAPAN command.
If you retrieve the nodes of a network or polygon topology, but not the
connecting links, you can still move the nodes. However, the current topology
knows nothing about the connecting links because all the link information
is stored on the links, and saving any edited nodes back to the source drawings
will create an incorrect topology.
See also:
■ Adding a Node (page 573)
■ Deleting Links, Nodes, and Polygons (page 581)
To edit a node
1 Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
2 Do one of the following:
■ For a node topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology name.
Click Move Nodes.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 557
■ For a network or polygon topology, type mapmn at the command
line.
3 When prompted, click the nodes to move.
4 Press Enter when you finish selecting nodes.
5 Specify the base point or displacement.
6 Specify the second point of displacement.
The two points you specify define a displacement vector that indicates
how far the selected objects are to be moved and in what direction. If
you press Enter at the Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt, the
first point is interpreted as relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if
you specify 2,3 for the base point and press Enter at the next prompt,
the object moves 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction
from its current position.
In a node topology, if the node's new location is the same a an existing node,
specify which node to keep. In a network topology, specify whether to join
the links and which node to keep.
If you're working with a network topology, you can also modify the resistance
(page 547) of nodes.
See also:
■ To create a node on an existing link (page 574)
■ To delete a link, node, or polygon (page 582)
■ To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology (page 547)
Quick Reference
MAPMN
Moves a node in a topology or moves a node at the end of a link in network
or polygon topologies
Command Line MAPMN
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Move
Node
558 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
MAPNODEDIT
Edits a node in a topology
Command Line MAPNODEDIT
Dialog Box MAPNODEDIT (Edit Topology Node command) (page
1300)
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Editing a Link
There are several ways you can edit links in a network or polygon topology.
You can:
■ Move a link to a new location.
■ Reposition one of the nodes at the end point of a link. Moving the node
at the end point of a link moves that end of the chosen link.
If you move an end point to the same location as an existing end point,
Autodesk Map 3D prompts you to join the links and specify which node
to keep. If you select a line or arc when moving links or end points of links,
it is converted to a polyline.
■ Join two links in a network or polygon topology by removing an
intersection or pseudo-node.
■ Break a link at a specified break point. Autodesk Map 3D inserts a node at
the break point.
■ Reverse a link's direction in a network topology.
■ Specify a link's resistance, reverse resistance, and direction.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 559
Edits to links in a polygon topology change the centroid, the area, and the
perimeter values.
See also:
■ Specifying the Direction for a Link (page 543)
■ Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node (page 547)
■ Adding a Link (page 575)
■ To delete a link, node, or polygon (page 582)
To reposition a node at the end point of a link
1 Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
2 Do one of the following:
■ For a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology
name. Click Move End Of Link.
■ For a polygon topology, type MAPMEL on the command line.
3 When prompted, click the node (end point) to move.
4 When prompted, click the location of the new end point.
If the new location is the same as an existing end point in the topology,
specify whether to join the links and which node to keep.
To reposition a link
1 Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
2 Do one of the following:
■ For a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology
name. Click Move Links.
■ For a polygon topology, type MAPML on the command line.
3 When prompted, click the link to reposition.
4 When prompted, click any additional links to reposition.
5 Press Enter when you finish selecting links.
6 Specify the base point or displacement.
560 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
7 Specify the second point of displacement.
The two points define a displacement vector that indicates how far the
selected objects are moved and in what direction. If you press Enter at
the Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt, the first point is
interpreted as relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify
2,3 for the base point and press Enter at the next prompt, the object
moves 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from its
current position.
To join two links, break a link, or reverse a link's direction
1 Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
2 Do one of the following:
■ For a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology
name. Click a menu option.
■ To join two links in a polygon topology, type MAPJL on the command
line. To break a link in a polygon topology, type MAPBL on the
command line. You cannot reverse a link's direction in a polygon
topology.
Follow the command line prompts.
To modify a link's resistance or direction
■ For information about specifying values for resistance, see To edit the
resistance of a link or node in a network topology (page 547).
■ For information about specifying direction, To specify the direction for a
link (page 546).
See also:
■ To create a link and add it to a topology (page 576)
■ To delete a link, node, or polygon (page 582)
Quick Reference
MAPBL
Breaks a link in a topology at a specified point
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 561
Command Line MAPBL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Break Link
MAPEDITDIR
Edits direction of a link in a network topology
Command Line MAPEDITDIR
Dialog Box MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command) (page 1295)
MAPEDITRES1
Edits direct resistance of a node or link in a network topology
Command Line MAPEDITRES1
Dialog Box MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command)
(page 1295)
MAPEDITRES2
Edits reverse resistance of a link in a network topology
Command Line MAPEDITRES2
Dialog Box MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command)
(page 1295)
MAPJL
Joins two links in a topology
Command Line MAPJL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Join Links
MAPMEL
Repositions an end point of a link in a topology
Command Line MAPMEL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Move End Of Link
562 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
MAPML
Moves a link in a topology
Command Line MAPML
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Move Links
MAPRL
Reverses a link in a topology
Command Line MAPRL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Reverse
Link Direction
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Editing a Polygon
You can divide a polygon into two smaller polygons by drawing a link between
two nodes that define the polygon. You can also remove a boundary between
two polygons and combine them into one polygon. You can specify the
centroid to remove. Splitting and combining polygons change the centroid,
the area, and perimeter values.
You can also use the commands for editing nodes (page 556) and editing links
(page 559)to edit a polygon topology. When you do, Autodesk Map 3D changes
the centroid, the area, and perimeter values of the polygons automatically.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 563
Polygons at the edge of a queried polygon topology cannot be edited.
See also:
■ Adding a Polygon (page 578)
■ To delete a link, node, or polygon (page 582)
■ Editing a Link (page 559)
■ Editing a Node (page 556)
To divide a polygon into two smaller polygons
1 Open the drawing where the polygon topology was created and load the
topology.
2 In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click Divide Polygon.
3 Specify a node for the first divide point.
4 Specify the node for the second divide point.
To merge two polygons into one polygon
1 Open the drawing where the polygon topology was created and load the
topology.
2 In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click Merge Polygon.
564 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
3 Specify the link (boundary between two polygons) to remove.
4 Specify the centroid to remove.
5 On the command line, type Y to merge the polygons.
See also:
■ To reposition a node at the end point of a link (page 560)
■ To edit a node (page 557)
Quick Reference
MAPDVP
Divides a polygon in a polygon topology by allowing you to add a link
Command Line MAPDVP
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon topology
➤ Divide Polygon
MAPMP
Merges polygons in a polygon topology
Command Line MAPMP
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon topology
➤ Merge Polygon
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 565
Changing the Appearance of Points
If you create nodes as ACAD_POINT, you can change their appearance.
566 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
To change the appearance of points
1 Click Setup ➤ More Formatting Options ➤ Point Style.
2 In the Point Style dialog box, select any of the point modes.
You can also change the Point Size to improve the visibility of the points.
3 Click OK.
4 On the Command line, enter regen.
Nodes you created using ACAD_POINT appear in the point style you selected.
To reset the node display, use the Point Style dialog box to reset the point
style. Then enter regen on the Command line.
Quick Reference
DDPTYPE
Specifies the display mode and size of point objects
Menu Setup ➤ More Formatting Options ➤ Point Style
Command Line DDPTYPE
Editing the Direction for a Link
You can specify the direction of movement allowed for a link in a network
topology. Autodesk Map 3D uses this direction when tracing through network
topology for path traces, best route analysis, and flood traces.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 567
568 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Direction Property in the Object data
Properties value
palette
Bi-Directional (two-way) Bi-Directional 0
Same as created. Movement along the link is al- Forward 1
lowed only in the direction that the link was
created.
Reverse of created direction. Movement along Reverse -1
the link is allowed only in the opposite direction
that the link was created.
The default direction of an arc, or a two point polyline with an arc segment,
is counterclockwise. Set the value to Bi-Directional (0) or Forward (1) for
counterclockwise, and to Reverse (-1) for clockwise.
To reverse the direction of selected links, right-click a network topology in
Map Explorer. Click Reverse Link Direction. Or use the MAPRL command.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 569
To edit the direction of a link
1 Verify that the network topology containing the link is loaded. Note that
you can specify link direction for network topologies only.
2 In the map, double-click the link.
If more than one topology contains the same link, select one of the
topologies. Update the other topologies later using the Update option.
3 In the Properties palette, under the Topo properties, choose a setting for
the Flow Direction property:
■ Bi-Directional — Movement is allowed in both directions.
■ Forward — Movement is allowed only in the direction that the link
was created.
■ Reverse — Movement is allowed only in the opposite direction of the
direction that the link was created.
The new direction setting is assigned to the link.
NOTE You can also store a direction value in an object data table or an external
database table. When you run a shortest path trace, best route analysis, or flood
trace, you can specify the location of this data. When storing this data, use 0 for
Bi-Directional, 1 for Forward, and -1 for Reverse.
Quick Reference
MAPEDITDIR
Edits direction of a link in a network topology
Command Line MAPEDITDIR
Dialog Box MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command) (page 1295)
MAPRL
Reverses a link in a topology
Command Line MAPRL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Reverse
Link Direction
570 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Editing the Resistance for a Link or Node
Direct Resistance is the resistance to travel in the direction that a link was
created, while Reverse Resistance is the resistance in the opposite direction
along a link.
For both types, you can specify a resistance for any link in the network
topology. This resistance specifies the difficulty in traversing the link. The
default resistance is the length of the link.
Autodesk Map 3D uses this resistance when doing a shortest path trace, best
route analysis, or flood trace. For an example of using resistance to show travel
times, see Performing a Flood Trace (page 867).
You can also specify the Resistance of a node in a network topology, such as
setting resistance for a valve in a pipe network, or a junction in a road network.
To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology
1 Verify that the network topology containing the link or node is loaded.
Be sure to load the topology from the current drawing. Note that you
can specify resistance for network topologies only.
2 In the map, double-click the link or node.
If more than one topology contains the same link or node, select one of
the topologies. Update the other topologies later using the Update option.
3 In the Properties palette, under the group of Topo properties, enter new
value(s) for resistance. Note that you must enter a numeric value.
■ For a node, enter a value for Resistance, which is the resistance to
cross the node.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 571
■ For a link, enter values for Direct Resistance and Reverse Resistance.
Direct resistance is the resistance to travel in the direction that a link
was created, while reverse resistance is the resistance in the opposite
direction along a link. The default value is the length of the link.
The new resistance values are assigned to the objects.
NOTE You can also store a resistance value in object data or an external database.
When you run a flood trace, path trace, or best route analysis, specify the location
of this data.
If you are entering the commands on the command line, use the MAPEDITRES1
command to edit the Direct Resistance of links and the Resistance of nodes;
use the MAPEDITRES2 command to edit the Reverse Resistance of links.
Quick Reference
MAPEDITRES1
Edits direct resistance of a node or link in a network topology
Command Line MAPEDITRES1
Dialog Box MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command)
(page 1295)
MAPEDITRES2
Edits reverse resistance of a link in a network topology
Command Line MAPEDITRES2
Dialog Box MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command)
(page 1295)
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
572 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Adding a Node
You can add nodes to an existing topology. To add nodes, the current drawing
must be where the topology was created and the geometry (point, block, or
text object) must already exist. You can add a node to the end of a link or a
vertex in network or polygon topologies.
Adding a node to an existing topology.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 573
To create a node on an existing link
1 Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
To create a node and add it to a topology, the current drawing must be
the drawing where the topology was created.
NOTE To add the same point to more than one topology, select one of the
topologies. Update the other topologies later using the Update option.
2 Do one of the following:
■ To add a node to a node topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the
topology name. Click Insert Node.
■ To add a node to a network or polygon topology, type mapin on the
command line.
3 When prompted, select the block to use for the node.
4 When prompted, specify the location for the node. You can use an object
snap such as Midpoint. Enter any other node information.
To add an existing node to a topology
1 Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
2 Create the point, block, or text object that you will use as the node.
3 Be sure to load the topology you want to add the node to from the current
drawing.
4 Do one of the following:
■ To add a node to a node topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the
topology name. Click Add Node.
■ To add a node to a network or polygon topology, type mapan on the
command line.
5 When prompted, select the object to use as the node.
Quick Reference
MAPAN
574 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Adds a node to a topology
Command Line MAPAN
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Add
Node
MAPIN
Inserts a node in a topology
Command Line MAPIN
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Insert
Node
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Adding a Link
You can add a new or existing link to a network or polygon topology. The
current drawing must be where the topology was created.
Create new links between existing nodes. Add nodes as needed. For more
information, see Adding a Node (page 573). New links cannot cross other links.
If you draw a line or arc, it is converted to a polyline.
When adding links to polygon topologies, Autodesk Map 3D updates the
centroid, the area, and perimeter values of the polygons. You can also divide
a polygon using the MAPDVP command. For more information, see Editing
a Polygon (page 563).
You cannot add links to node topologies.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 575
See also:
■ Adding a Node (page 573)
■ Editing a Link (page 559)
■ Editing a Polygon (page 563)
To create a link and add it to a topology
1 Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
2 Do one of the following:
■ To create a new link in a network topology, in Map Explorer,
right-click the topology name. Click Insert New Link.
■ To create a link in a polygon topology, type MAPIL on the command
line.
3 When prompted, click the start point for the new link.
4 When prompted, click the next point(s).
5 To finish entering points, press Enter.
6 Optionally, modify the values for resistance (page 547) and direction (page
546).
To add an existing link to a topology
1 Open the drawing where the network or polygon topology was created
and load the topology.
2 Do one of the following:
■ To add a link to a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the
topology name. Click Add New Links.
■ To add a link to a polygon topology, type MAPAL on the command
line.
3 When prompted, click the link to add to the topology.
4 Click any additional links to add.
5 When you finish selecting links, press Enter.
576 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
6 Optionally, modify the values for resistance (page 547) and direction (page
546).
See also:
■ To create a node on an existing link (page 574)
■ To reposition a node at the end point of a link (page 560)
■ To divide a polygon into two smaller polygons (page 564)
Quick Reference
MAPAL
Adds a link to a topology
Command Line MAPAL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Add New Links
MAPIL
Inserts a link in a topology
Command Line MAPIL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Insert New Link
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 577
Adding a Polygon
You can add a polygon using existing objects or new linework as a perimeter.
To add a polygon to a polygon topology, the current drawing must be where
the topology was created.
New polygons can be added to an existing polygon topology.
To add a polygon to a polygon topology using existing linework
1 Open the drawing where the polygon topology was created and load the
topology.
578 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
To add a polygon to a polygon topology, the current drawing must be
the drawing where the topology was created.
2 In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click Add Polygon.
Alternately, type mapap on the command line.
3 In the map, select the border objects of the polygons to add.
4 Press Enter when you finish selecting polygons.
5 If you have blocks defined in the drawing, you are prompted to specify
a block to use for the centroid. Press Enter to use ACAD_POINT, or type
a block name and press Enter.
To add a polygon to a polygon topology by creating new linework
1 Open the drawing where the polygon topology was created and load the
topology.
2 On the command line, type MAPIL.
3 When prompted, specify the location for a new link. The link must define
a polygon.
Quick Reference
MAPAP
Adds a polygon to a polygon topology
Command Line MAPAP
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon topology
➤ Add Polygon
MAPIL
Inserts a link in a topology
Command Line MAPIL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Insert New Link
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 579
Creating Centroids for Polygons
If you have polygon objects or closed polylines with data attached to them,
you can create centroids and move the data to the centroid. This is useful:
■ After you import or digitize objects.
■ Before using editing commands such as Drawing Cleanup, Boundary Break,
or Boundary Trim.
■ When working with topology.
Object data attached to closed polylines (above) and object data moved to centroids
(below).
580 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Autodesk Map 3D checks that the lines do not intersect each other, and that
the area is greater than 0. It then creates a centroid inside each selected polygon
or closed polyline and moves any object data or SQL link data to the centroid.
For an object shaped like a figure eight, Autodesk Map 3D creates one centroid.
Centroids are created with a Z value of 0.
To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines
1 Click Create menu ➤ Centroids.
2 In the Create Centroids dialog box (page 1177), specify whether to create
centroids for all closed objects or only for selected closed objects. If only
for selected closed objects, select the polygons and closed polylines.
TIP Click the Quick Select tool to view and filter the object type as you select
objects.
3 Specify the layer on which the centroids should be created.
4 Specify the block to use for centroids, or use ACAD_POINT.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Menu Create ➤ Centroids
Icon
Create Centroids
Command Line MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Dialog Box Create Centroids dialog box (page 1177)
Deleting Links, Nodes, and Polygons
You can delete a node in a node, network, or polygon topology; a link in a
network or polygon topology; or a polygon in a polygon topology. Note that
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 581
when you delete nodes, links, or polygons, object data and external database
links may be lost.
WARNING Both the topology information and associated objects are deleted.
■ Deleting a node shared by two links joins the links together. First and last
point information on the resulting link is updated.
■ Deleting a dangling link deletes the dangling end node.
■ Deleting a link deletes any associated nodes, unless the link is also part of
another topology or the nodes are referenced by another link.
■ Deleting a polygon deletes the centroid and all references to it in
surrounding links, unless objects are part of another topology or are
referenced by another polygon.
When you remove a link, any nodes that are not connected to other links are also
removed.
To delete a link, node, or polygon
1 Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
582 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
2 Do one of the following:
■ To delete a node from a node topology, in Map Explorer, right-click
the topology. Click Delete Node. To delete a node from a network or
polygon topology, type MAPDN on the command line.
■ To delete a link from a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click
the topology. Click Delete Links. To delete a link from a polygon
topology, type MAPDL on the command line.
■ To delete a polygon from a polygon topology, in Map Explorer,
right-click the topology. Click Delete Polygon.
3 Select the object(s) to delete. To select a polygon, click near its centroid.
Quick Reference
MAPDL
Deletes a link in a topology
Command Line MAPDL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Delete Links
MAPDN
Deletes a node in a topology
Command Line MAPDN
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Delete
Node
MAPDP
Deletes a polygon from a polygon topology
Command Line MAPDP
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon topology
➤ Delete Polygon
PROPERTIES
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 583
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Updating a Topology
Objects in a topology have relationship data stored in an object data table. If
you modify the objects using the topology editing commands (page 549), the
topology data on the objects is updated. However, you must manually update
the topology data in the following circumstances:
■ If you modify the objects using standard AutoCAD commands, such as
Move.
■ If the object is referenced by more than one topology. (Only the selected
topology is updated when you modify the object. Use the Update option
to update the remaining topologies that reference the object.)
NOTE If the update options cannot restore integrity, try using Recreate. Right-click
a topology. Click Administration menu ➤ Recreate. When you recreate a topology,
the topology is completely recreated. Any editing changes you made to the
topology object data are erased.
To update a topology
1 Verify that the topology containing the objects to update is loaded (page
591).
■ To update nodes in a node topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the
topology name. Click Update. To update nodes in a network or
polygon topology, type MAPNODUPD on the command line.
■ To update links in a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click
the topology name. Click Update. To update links in a polygon
topology, type MAPLINKUPD on the command line.
584 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
■ To update polygons links in a polygon topology, in Map Explorer,
right-click the topology name. Click Update. You can also type
MAPPOLYUPD on the command line.
2 Select the objects to update. Press Enter
The topology data for the object is updated in the topology.
If you delete an object from one topology, and the object belongs to another
topology, the physical object is not removed from the drawing. The second
topology is not changed and no update is necessary for the deleted object.
Quick Reference
MAPLINKUPD
Updates links in a network topology
Command Line MAPLINKUPD
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Update
Dialog Box MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology Link command)
(page 1298)
MAPNODUPD
Updates nodes in a topology
Command Line MAPNODUPD
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Update
Dialog Box MAPNODUPD (Update Topology Node command)
(page 1301)
MAPPOLYUPD
Updates a polygon topology
Command Line MAPPOLYUPD
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Update
Dialog Box MAPPOLYUPD (Update Topology Polygon command)
(page 1302)
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 585
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Editing a Partial Topology
In general, when editing a topology, you should retrieve the entire topology.
However, if the topology is large, it may impair performance. With large
topologies, you can query in just a part of the topology.
Topology editing tools (page 549) do not allow you to edit incomplete objects
at the edges of the queried area. Your query must retrieve enough of an area
around the edit area to ensure that the objects to be edited are complete. For
more information on complete topologies, see Correcting or Completing a
Topology (page 600).
Polygons at the edge of a queried polygon topology cannot be edited.
586 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
To retrieve objects to edit
1 Open a drawing, attach the source drawings that contain the topology
you wish to edit, and make those source drawings active. Zoom to the
extents of the active source drawings.
2 In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Topology.
3 In the Topology Query dialog box (page 1348), click Load.
4 In the Topology Selection dialog box, select the topology to query. Click
OK.
5 In the Load Topology from Source Drawing dialog box, make sure that
both the Topology Objects options are not selected. Click OK.
6 In the Topology Query dialog box, select or define a query.
■ To load an existing query, click Load Query and select the query.
■ To define a new query, click Define Query, then define a query (page
886) to retrieve the topology geometry you require.
7 Select Draw mode and execute the query.
Now that the objects are in the current drawing, you can edit them.
To edit the objects
1 Unload (page 591) the topology from the source drawings. Load the
topology in the current drawing.
2 Make any edits to the topology with the editing topology tools (page 549).
3 Add the changes to the save set.
4 Save back the changes to the source drawings (page 466). Do not save the
current drawing.
Quick Reference
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
Menu File ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 587
Icon
Save to Source Drawings
Command Line ADESAVEOBJS
Dialog Box Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box (page 1247)
MAPTOPOLOAD
Loads a topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Analyze ➤ More
Topology Options ➤ Load Topology
Icon
Load Topology
Command Line MAPTOPOLOAD
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Administration ➤ Load Topology
Dialog Box Topology Selection dialog box (page 1351)
MAPTOPOQUERY
Queries topologies
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Setup ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Topology Query
Icon
Query Topology
Command Line MAPTOPOQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Analysis ➤ Topology Query
Dialog Box Topology Query dialog box (page 1348)
MAPTOPOUNLOAD
Unloads a topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Analyze ➤ More
Topology Options ➤ Unload
588 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Icon
Unload Topology
Command Line MAPTOPOUNLOAD
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Administration ➤ Unload Topology
Dialog Box Topology Selection dialog box (page 1351)
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Creating Closed Polylines from a Polygon
Topology
You can create closed polylines from a polygon topology. This is useful if you
want to give data to an AutoCAD user so the user can hatch polygonal areas.
While creating closed polylines from polygon topology, you can create a group
containing all the elements of complex areas, such as islands. If the islands
themselves have nested islands or other polygons, these nested polygons will
form a separate grouping automatically, creating different levels of grouping.
If two or more inner polygons are not nested but share the same outer
boundary, they will be treated as one group.
You can manipulate grouped data with the GROUP command. For more
information, see the AutoCAD help.
You can also copy the object data and the external database links held in the
centroids to the closed polylines.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 589
To create closed polylines from a polygon topology
1 Click Create ➤ Create Closed Polylines.
2 In the Create Closed Polylines dialog box (page 1305), click Load to load
the polygon topology or select from the Name list.
All polygons in the selected topology are automatically selected.
3 Under How to Close, specify the layer to create the polylines.
4 You can select Group Complex Polygons to create a group containing all
the elements of complex areas, such as islands.
5 You can select Copy Object Data From Centroid To Pline and Copy
Database Links From Centroid To Pline to copy the object data and
external database links held in the centroids to the closed polylines.
6 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPCLPLINE
Creates polylines from a polygon topology
Menu Create ➤ Create Closed Polylines
Command Line MAPCLPLINE
Dialog Box Create Closed Polylines dialog box (page 1305)
Managing Topologies
Using topology administration tools, you can load, unload, rename, and delete
an existing topology, audit or check the status of a topology to ensure its
integrity, and, if a topology was edited with commands other than the topology
editing tools, you can also recreate it. You can get statistics on the topologies
in the current drawing, highlight all objects in a topology, and highlight all
topologies for a selected object.
When you use these tools, all source drawings associated with a named
topology must be attached and active.
590 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
To manage topologies
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Loading or Unloading Topologies
When you load a topology, Autodesk Map 3D loads topologies in the current
drawing and retrieves topologies from attached drawings into the current
drawing. If you save a drawing with a topology and later open the drawing,
reload the topology to use it.
In Map Explorer, topologies with colorful icons are loaded. Topologies with
grayed-out icons are unloaded.
When loading a topology from a source drawing, select Create Objects When
Loaded to create the topology in the current drawing. Otherwise, the topology
is loaded without retrieving the topology geometry.
To load a topology
1 In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click
Administration ➤ Load Topology.
2 If the topology is stored in a source drawing, the Load Topology from
Source Drawing appears where you can specify the following:
■ Create Topology Objects When Loaded — Select this check box to
copy the topology objects into the current drawing as the topology
is loaded. If this option is not selected, the objects are loaded but are
not copied into the current drawing.
■ Select Topology Objects For Save Back — Select this option to add
objects in the current drawing to the save back set if they are
referenced by the selected topology. This means that the objects will
be saved back to their source drawings and replace the original objects.
■ Audit Geometry of Topology Objects — Select this option to verify
that objects for the selected topology are geometrically correct. Any
objects that are not correct are highlighted.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 591
In Map Explorer, the icon for the topology becomes colorful, indicating
that the topology is loaded.
To unload a topology
1 In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click
Administration ➤ Unload Topology.
In Map Explorer, the icon for the topology is grayed to indicate it has
been unloaded.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOLOAD
Loads a topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Analyze ➤ More
Topology Options ➤ Load Topology
Icon
Load Topology
Command Line MAPTOPOLOAD
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Administration ➤ Load Topology
Dialog Box Topology Selection dialog box (page 1351)
MAPTOPOUNLOAD
Unloads a topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Analyze ➤ More
Topology Options ➤ Unload
Icon
Unload Topology
Command Line MAPTOPOUNLOAD
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Administration ➤ Unload Topology
Dialog Box Topology Selection dialog box (page 1351)
592 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Highlighting and Identifying Topology
Using the topology highlighting and identification tools, you can
■ Show Geometry–Highlight the objects in a topology.
■ Show Topology–Identify and highlight the topologies associated with an
object.
These tools work only with topologies that have been loaded in the current
drawing. The color used for highlighting is the Selected Grip Color. You remove
the highlighting and restore objects to their original color by pressing ESC.
Use Show Geometry to show the location and extent of a topology. Autodesk
Map 3D highlights all objects in the selected topology.
Highlight objects in the selected topology.
Use Show Topology to show the location and extent of all the topologies
associated with an object. Autodesk Map 3D highlights all objects in the
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 593
topologies associated with the selected object and identifies the topologies by
name on the command line.
Highlights and identifies topologies for the selected object.
The color used for highlighting is the Selected Grip Color, which you can
specify in the AutoCAD Options dialog box. Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD
Options. Click the Selection tab.
To remove highlighting and restore objects to their original color, press Esc.
To highlight all objects in a selected topology
1 In Map Explorer, verify that the topology you want to highlight is loaded
(page 591). A topology must be loaded before it can be highlighted.
2 Right-click the topology name. Click Show Geometry.
In the drawing, Autodesk Map 3D highlights all objects in the selected
topology. To return objects to their original color, press ESC.
To highlight and identify the topologies associated with an object
1 In Map Explorer, right-click the Topologies folder. Click Show Topology.
2 In the map, click the object.
If the object belongs to one or more topologies, Autodesk Map 3D
highlights all objects that belong to those topologies and lists the topology
names on the command line. If the object does not belong to a topology,
Autodesk Map 3D reports that on the command line.
594 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
NOTE Only topologies that are loaded are considered.
3 Select another object to highlight and identify, or press ESC to end the
command.
To change the color used for highlighting
1 Click Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options.
2 In the Options dialog box, click the Selection tab.
3 From the Selected Grip Color list, select the color to use for highlighting
topologies.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPSHOWGEOM
Highlights and identifies topologies for the selected object
Icon
Show Geometry
Command Line MAPSHOWGEOM
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Topologies ➤ Show
Geometry
MAPSHOWTOPO
Highlights objects in the selected topology
Icon
Show Topology
Command Line MAPSHOWTOPO
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Show
Topology
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 595
Viewing Topology Data
Information about each topology you create is stored in an object data table
in the current drawing as shown in this table.
Topology Name Object Data Table Object Data Field Information Stored
EXAMPLE TPMDESC_EXAMPLE TYPE Topology type
TOLERANCE Setting of VIEWRES when
created or edited
LINK_LAYER Layer for links
LINK_COLOR Color of links
CREATE_NODE Nodes in topology; 0=No,
1=Yes
NODE_LAYER Layer for nodes
NODE_TYPE Type of nodes
NODE_BLOCK Block used for nodes
CREATE_CNTR Centroids in topology; 0=No,
1=Yes
CNTR_LAYER Layer for centroids
CNTR_COLOR Color of centroids
CNTR_TYPE Type of centroids
CNTR_BLOCK Block used for centroids
596 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
This information can be used in a topology query. Depending on the type of
topology, other object data tables are created and attached to the elements of
the topology.
You can also view and edit data associated with the objects in a topology using
the Properties palette. For example, for a link in a network topology, you can
view general information about the link, such as the ID of the start and end
nodes, and you can edit specific information such as the link's direction, direct
resistance, and reverse resistance.
To view topology object data
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Object Data.
2 Select the object.
3 In the Edit Object Data dialog box (page 1147), view the topology data.
If the topology data is not displayed, select a topology table from the
Table list. The topology tables start with the letters "TPM."
To view and edit the properties of topology objects in the Properties palette
1 Click Analyze ➤ Properties.
2 Select the object.
3 In the Properties palette, under the Topo group, view the topology
properties.
For example, if you choose a link in a network topology, you can see the
type object you selected, information about the start and end nodes, flow
direction, direct resistance, and reverse resistance.
4 To view the properties of another object, select it in the map.
Quick Reference
ADEEDITDATA
Edits attached object data
Menu Modify ➤ Edit Object Data
Icon
Edit Object Data
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 597
Command Line ADEEDITDATA
Dialog Box Edit Object Data dialog box (page 1147)
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Viewing Topology Statistics
You can view information about a topology, including:
■ Basic Information — name, description, and type (node, network, or
polygon).
■ Extents — coordinates of the lower-left corner and upper-right corner of
the bounding rectangle for the topology.
■ Object Counts — number of nodes, links, and polygons in the topology.
■ Details — about area, perimeter, and length, including totals, averages,
minimum values, maximum values, variance, and deviation. These apply
to network and polygon topologies only.
Variance is the average of the squares of any given area, perimeter, or
length minus the square of the average. Deviation is the square root of
variance.
To view topology statistics
1 In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click Statistics.
2 Review statistics in the Topology Statistics dialog box (page 1351).
3 Click OK.
598 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOSTATS
Displays detailed information about a topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Analyze ➤ More
Topology Options ➤ Statistics
Command Line MAPTOPOSTATS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Statistics
Dialog Box Topology Statistics dialog box (page 1351)
Saving Topology to Source Drawings
You can save the topology in the current drawing or save it back to the attached
source drawings.
If you retrieved data from source drawings, you can save back the topology
information to the source drawings, and also save the current drawing. Future
work with the topology should be done in the current drawing with the source
drawings active and attached. This method ensures that complete and correct
object data associated with the topology is available.
To save topology to source drawings
1 Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items to Save Set.
2 Use any selection method to add the topology objects to the save set.
3 Click File ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set.
4 In the Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box (page 1247), under What
To Save, make sure Save Queried Objects is selected.
If you created new node or centroid objects, or if you added objects to a
topology, also select Save Newly Created Objects.
5 If you are saving new objects, select a save order.
6 Click OK.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 599
Quick Reference
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
Menu File ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set
Icon
Save to Source Drawings
Command Line ADESAVEOBJS
Dialog Box Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box (page 1247)
ADESELOBJS
Creates a set of objects to be saved to source drawings
Menu File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items To Save
Set
Icon
Add Objects to Save Set
Command Line ADESELOBJS
Dialog Box ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command)
(page 1246)
Correcting or Completing a Topology
If parts of the topology are incomplete (not closed or only part of a polygon),
they are marked and excluded from editing. Two examples of incomplete
topologies created by queries are shown in the following illustration. The
outer polygons in the grid are incomplete because their outside links are parts
of polygons not included in the query.
600 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
If you use a location query to retrieve polygons, make sure you use a Crossing
window. If you are using data that is shared with other users, be sure that you
load the topology to ensure that you are using current data.
Completing a Topology
When you complete a topology, Autodesk Map 3D looks at the objects and
object data in a drawing, and attempts to complete a network or polygon
topology by retrieving further drawing objects, such as links and centroids
referenced by the topology object data tables. Complex polygons, with one
or more islands, must be fully represented, and all internal islands referenced
by a polygon must be present for the option to work.
This option completes dangling edges in a network topology, and all
incomplete areas in polygon topologies; however, it might fill islands as well.
Auditing and Recreating a Topology
When you audit a topology, Autodesk Map 3D checks that a topology is
complete and contains no errors. Any errors found are marked but are not
fixed. Errors in a node topology are not marked.
To reestablish a topology that was edited with nontopology editing commands
such as STRETCH and PEDIT, you recreate the topology; however, topology
data might be lost. You can only recreate a topology in the current drawing;
to recreate topology in an attached drawing, use a query to retrieve the
geometry first. Load the topology before using recreate.
To modify the geometry of a topology (the nodes, links, or polygons), use the
topology editing tools explained in Editing Topologies (page 549).
To create closed polylines for a non-Autodesk Map 3D user, or if you are
exporting data to an external file format that does not support topologies,
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 601
click Create menu ➤ Creating Closed Polylines from a Polygon Topology
(page 589).
To audit, recreate, or complete a topology
1 In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click an option from
the Administration submenu.
To test the integrity of a network topology
1 Click Analyze menu ➤ Network Analysis.
2 Select the network the topology to test.
3 In the Topology Network Analysis - Select Method dialog box, click Flood
Trace (page 868). Click Next.
4 Select select a starting point for the analysis. Click Next.
5 Set the Maximum Resistance to a value so that all links will be flooded.
Click Next.
6 Select Highlight. Choose a color that is different from the color of the
links.
7 Click Finish.
If some links are not flooded, the topology may be incorrect. Use the topology
editing tools (page 549)to correct the topology.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOAUDIT
Checks that a topology is complete and contains no errors
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Analyze ➤ More
Topology Options ➤ Audit
Command Line MAPTOPOAUDIT
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Administration ➤ Audit
MAPTOPOCOMP
602 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Completes a network or polygon topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Analyze ➤ More
Topology Options ➤ Complete
Icon
Complete Topology
Command Line MAPTOPOCOMP
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Administration ➤ Complete
MAPTOPORECR
Reestablishes a topology that was edited with nontopology editing commands
such as STRETCH, PEDIT, and MOVE
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Analyze ➤ More
Topology Options ➤ Recreate
Icon
Recreate Topology
Command Line MAPTOPORECR
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Administration ➤ Recreate
Dialog Box Topology Selection dialog box (page 1351)
Saving and Loading Settings Using Profiles
You can save your topology overlay analysis or network analysis (path trace,
best route analysis, or flood trace) settings in a profile and use them again
later. This can save time if you plan to use the same settings more than once.
Profiles are also useful when you automate topology analysis with scripts.
Topology profiles are saved as *.tpf files.
NOTE You cannot use profiles to save settings for creating topologies, buffering
topologies, or dissolving topologies. Topology profiles can be used to save topology
overlay analysis or network topology analysis (path trace, best route analysis, or
flood trace) settings only.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 603
You can edit topology profiles in Autodesk Map 3D and then save your
changes, choosing either to replace an existing profile or save it as a new
profile. To rename or delete profiles, right-click the profile in the Select
Topology Profile or Save Topology Profile dialog box. Click Rename or Delete.
WARNING Do not edit topology profiles outside of Autodesk Map 3D. Doing so
may produce unexpected results.
To save topology analysis settings in a profile
1 Click Analyze menu ➤ Overlay or Analyze ➤ Network Analysis.
2 Specify the settings to save. For more information, see Analyzing Drawing
Topologies (page 854).
3 Click Save.
4 In the Save Topology Profile dialog box, enter a name for the profile.
Click Save.
To load an existing topology profile
1 In any one of the Topology Overlay Analysis or Network Topology
Analysis dialog boxes, click Load.
2 In the Select Topology Profile dialog box, select the profile to load.
Topology profiles are saved as *.tpf files.
3 Click Open.
The settings from the selected profile are made current.
Quick Reference
MAPANOVERLAY
Overlays one topology with another, and creates a new topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Analyze ➤ Overlay
Icon
Overlay Topology
Command Line MAPANOVERLAY
604 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Analysis ➤ Overlay
Dialog Box Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box
(page 1341)
MAPANTOPONET
Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace)
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Analyze ➤ Network Analysis
Icon
Network Analyze
Command Line MAPANTOPONET
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis
Dialog Box Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog
box (page 1329)
Renaming Topologies and Changing Their
Descriptions
You can change the name, description, or both of a complete, loaded topology.
When you rename a topology, Autodesk Map 3D renames the object data
table containing the topology relationship data.
Before you rename a topology or change its description:
■ Attach all source drawings that are referenced by the topology. If the source
drawings are not attached, you could corrupt your data set.
■ Load the topology from the current drawing.
■ To rename a topology or change its description without creating a backup
of an attached drawing, disable the Create Backup File Of Source Drawing
option of the Save Back tab of the Autodesk Map Options dialog box.
NOTE You cannot undo this operation using the UNDO command.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 605
To change the name, description, or both of a topology
1 In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click
Administration ➤ Rename.
You can only rename topologies that are loaded and completely
represented.
2 In the Rename Topology dialog box (page 1333), edit the name or
description. Click OK.
Names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen
characters. Names cannot contain spaces.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOREN
Changes the name and description of a topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Analyze ➤ More
Topology Options ➤ Rename
Command Line MAPTOPOREN
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Administration ➤ Rename
Dialog Box Rename Topology dialog box (page 1333)
Deleting Topologies
When you delete a topology, the topology relationship data (object data) is
deleted from objects referenced by the selected topology. You can choose to
delete the referenced objects as well.
Load a topology and verify that it is completely represented before deleting
it. This ensures that all pieces of the topology are deleted, including pieces in
attached source drawings. If you delete an incomplete topology, the corrupt
topology still exists in the source drawings that were not attached.
To delete a topology
1 In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click
Administration ➤ Delete.
606 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
NOTE It is recommended that you load a topology and verify that its
completely represented before deleting it.
2 In the Delete Topology dialog box (page 1319), select Delete Geometry to
delete the referenced objects from the current drawing. The topology
relationship data is automatically deleted when you delete a topology.
3 Click OK to delete the topology.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPODEL
Removes topology data from objects and optionally deletes the objects
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Analyze ➤ More
Topology Options ➤ Delete
Command Line MAPTOPODEL
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Administration ➤ Delete
Dialog Box Topology Selection dialog box (page 1351)
Using Map Editing Tools
You can use the Autodesk Map 3D editing tools to edit your maps and spatial
date. For information about editing objects and design data, see the AutoCAD
help.
To use Map editing tools
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Using Map Editing Tools | 607
Overview of Using the Map Editing Tools
Autodesk Map 3D provides special editing tools designed specifically for editing
maps and spatial data, as well as AutoCAD editing tools for editing drawing
objects and design data.
Examples: You want to stretch a new subdivision map into a preexisting parcel
map and align them geographically, you want to break a large city map into
three tiled sections, or you want to create a seamless join across two or more
maps.
WARNING Do not use any of these methods to edit topologies; you might make
a topology invalid and not be able to recreate it. Use topology editing commands
(page 549) instead.
For information about editing objects and design data, see the AutoCAD help.
To use the Autodesk Map 3D editing tools
1 Open the drawing containing the objects you want to edit or query the
objects into the current drawing.
2 Use one or more of the following Autodesk Map 3D editing commands:
■ Transform (page 611)
■ Rubber Sheet (page 613)
■ Define Text Location (page 615)
■ Fill Closed Polylines (page 617)
■ Fill Polygons (page 638)
■ Boundary Break (page 619)
■ Create an Enlarged Map Section (page 620)
■ Boundary Trim (page 622)
■ Manually Edit (page 624)
■ Creating Centroids for Polylines (page 625)
■ Match Map Edges (page 628)
608 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Notes and Warnings
■ To perform general and object-specific editing operations, use the AutoCAD
editing commands. For more information, see the AutoCAD help.
■ Do not use any of the methods described above to edit topologies; you
might not be able to recreate the topology. Use the topology editing
commands (page 549) instead.
Quick Reference
ADEFILLPOLYG
Fills a selected polygon
Command Line ADEFILLPOLYG
Dialog Box ADEFILLPOLYG (Fill Closed Polyline command) (page
1046)
ADERSHEET
Performs rubber sheeting on selected objects
Menu Modify ➤ Rubber Sheet
Command Line ADERSHEET
Dialog Box ADERSHEET (Rubber Sheet command) (page 1046)
ADETEXTLOC
Redefines the default label point of an object for text
Menu Create ➤ Map Labelpoint Location
Icon
Map Labelpoint Location
Command Line ADETEXTLOC
Dialog Box ADETEXTLOC (Map Labelpoint Location command)
(page 1175)
ADETRANSFORM
Moves, scales, and rotates a set of objects
Using Map Editing Tools | 609
Menu Modify ➤ Transform
Command Line ADETRANSFORM
Dialog Box ADETRANSFORM (Transform command) (page 1047)
MAPBREAK
Breaks objects along a selected or defined boundary
Menu Modify ➤ Boundary Break
Icon
Boundary Break
Command Line MAPBREAK
Dialog Box Break Objects at Boundary dialog box (page 1058)
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Menu Create ➤ Centroids
Icon
Create Centroids
Command Line MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Dialog Box Create Centroids dialog box (page 1177)
MAPTRIM
Trims objects to a set of edges
Menu Modify ➤ Boundary Trim
Icon
Boundary Trim
Command Line MAPTRIM
Dialog Box Trim Objects at Boundary dialog box (page 1059)
610 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Moving, Rotating, and Scaling an Object
You can simultaneously move, rotate, and scale a group of objects using the
Transform editing tool.
Differences From Simple Transformation Settings
The Transform editing tool works very differently from the Simple
Transformation settings (page 137) in the Drawing Settings dialog box. The
Simple Transformation settings temporarily adjust the position of objects as
they are retrieved during the query process. Autodesk Map 3D reverses these
transformations during save back. The Transform editing tool permanently
scales, moves, and rotates objects within the current drawing.
To move, rotate, or scale an object
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Transform.
2 Specify whether you want to select objects or use all objects on a specified
layer.
3 Select the objects you want to transform, or select a layer.
4 Define the base point.
The rotation and scaling occur around this point.
5 Specify a base rotation and scale, separated by a comma. For a simple
transformation, set the base rotation to 0 and the base scale to 1.
6 Define a new zero point.
Selected objects are offset by the difference between the original base
point and the new point.
7 Define a new rotation and scale, separated by a comma.
Selected objects are rotated the difference between the new rotation and
the old rotation. They are scaled based on the ratio of the new scale to
the old scale.
Quick Reference
ADETRANSFORM
Using Map Editing Tools | 611
Moves, scales, and rotates a set of objects
Menu Modify ➤ Transform
Command Line ADETRANSFORM
Dialog Box ADETRANSFORM (Transform command) (page 1047)
Rubber Sheeting Two Maps
Rubber sheeting is a nonuniform adjustment of a data set based on the
movement of known control points to new locations. For example, data
collected by aerial survey may be inaccurate because of flight alignment and
camera inaccuracies. By comparing this data with accurate ground survey data,
the aerial data can be stretched or rubber sheeted over the accurate data using
control points and monuments common to both data sets.
Use rubber sheeting when you want two or more different data sets from
different sources to align geographically: for example, when stretching a new
subdivision map into a preexisting parcel map.
The reference map is correct, but the map with new details is severely distorted. By
running the Rubber Sheeting command and selecting common control points, the two
maps can be correctly aligned.
Note that objects that have a given shape, such as circles, arcs, and ellipses,
retain their original shape.
WARNING Use rubber sheeting only when it is absolutely necessary because it
can severely compromise the accuracy of your data.
612 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Because rubber sheeting is not a linear transformation, it is difficult to reverse
the effects of the transformation and return a drawing to its original state.
You should save your drawing before you perform a rubber sheeting operation.
Changing Scale
Do not rubber sheet two maps drawn at different scales. If you do, the
command matches objects and changes the original scaling of text and blocks
to match the new scaling, which can change data significantly. You should
use rubber sheeting as a last resort after exhausting other methods of object
editing and coordinate adjustment.
If you are working with two maps that have different scales and coordinate
systems, first decide which coordinate system to use for the reference map.
Then set the coordinate systems for the current and source maps.
Rubber sheet the less accurate data to fit the more accurate data. Perform a
query to bring in the source drawing and apply rubber sheeting to the two
maps. If you have set up a system of control points, or monuments, use this
data as the reference to which you rubber sheet other maps.
To rubber sheet two maps
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Rubber Sheet.
2 When prompted on the command line for Base point 1, specify the first
common feature on map 2, the warped map.
3 When prompted on the command line for Reference point 1, specify the
corresponding feature on map 1, the accurate map.
4 Follow the prompts on the command line and continue specifying base
and reference points. When you're done, press Enter.
The order in which you select the points and the spread of the points
will affect the results. For complex curved figures, the more vertices you
enter, the more accurate the proportionate stretching.
5 Select the objects to rubber sheet. Enter a to select objects by area, or s
to select objects individually. If you queried all objects in the warped
map onto their own layer, select that layer.
6 Press Enter to complete the process.
Using Map Editing Tools | 613
Quick Reference
ADERSHEET
Performs rubber sheeting on selected objects
Menu Modify ➤ Rubber Sheet
Command Line ADERSHEET
Dialog Box ADERSHEET (Rubber Sheet command) (page 1046)
Defining the Text Insertion Point
You can add text to objects using the Alter Properties feature in the Define
Query dialog box. By default, Autodesk Map 3D positions the text at the
centroid of the object.
614 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
The text position relative to the object is called the label point. You can redefine
the label point using the Create ➤ Map Labelpoint Locationoption.
To use the label point, choose the .LABELPT dot variable in the Define Text
dialog box when you create the Property Alteration definition in the Define
Query dialog box. For more information, see Adding Text to Queried Objects
(page 834).
The label point of an object specifies the starting point for text added during
a query property alteration. To define the label point for an object, do the
following:
To define text location
1 Click Create ➤ Map Labelpoint Location.
2 Select the object.
3 Click the place on the object where you want the label point to be located.
To use this label point as the text insertion point during a property alteration
(page 834), choose LABELPT as the insert point.
Quick Reference
ADETEXTLOC
Redefines the default label point of an object for text
Menu Create ➤ Map Labelpoint Location
Using Map Editing Tools | 615
Icon
Map Labelpoint Location
Command Line ADETEXTLOC
Dialog Box ADETEXTLOC (Map Labelpoint Location command)
(page 1175)
Filling a Closed Polyline
You can fill closed polylines in your drawing with solid fills and hatch patterns.
You can use one color to show counties with a population over 10,000 and
another color to show counties under 10,000.
Filling closed polylines
The ADEFILLPOLYG command always creates a hatch object with the solid
fill hatch style.
You can also use the BHATCH command to fill closed polylines. Use the
MPFILL command to fill polygon objects.
616 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
NOTE If you move closed polylines that you filled using ADEFILLPOLYG, you must
move the hatch object as well. Autodesk Map 3D considers the closed polyline
and the hatch object as separate objects.
To fill closed polylines automatically with hatch patterns or solid fills when
performing queries, use the Alter Properties feature in the Define Query dialog
box. For more information, see Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing
Objects (page 819).
If you set the Create Associative Hatch Objects option on the Query tab of
the Autodesk Map Options dialog box, Autodesk Map 3D creates associative
hatch objects for hatch objects created by the ADEFILLPOLYG command, the
ADEQUERY command (using Alter Properties), and the MAPTHEMATIC
command (using a fill).
To fill a closed polyline with a solid-looking hatch
1 On the command line, enter adefillpolyg.
2 Specify whether you want to select objects or fill all objects on a specified
layer.
3 Select the objects or specify a layer.
4 Specify the color for the fill.
Quick Reference
ADEFILLPOLYG
Fills a selected polygon
Command Line ADEFILLPOLYG
Dialog Box ADEFILLPOLYG (Fill Closed Polyline command) (page
1046)
Breaking Objects at a Closed Boundary
Using the Boundary Break option, you can break any objects that cross a given
line. This capability lets you save maps back to source drawings with clean
edges or plot maps without overlapping borders. It functions like the AutoCAD
BREAK command for a selected set of objects and a polyline boundary.
Using Map Editing Tools | 617
Note that the text Thonon-les-Bains remains in the central map because the
text has a MiddleCenter justification and insertion point. For more information
on insertion points, see Finding All Drawing Objects in a Specified Location
(page 802).
The Boundary Break option
■ Breaks vectors and edge objects with start and end points that straddle a
cutting edge.
■ Does not break objects such as blocks, text, hatch patterns, and other
objects with a single insertion point that do not form edges; the insertion
point determines which map contains the object.
Specifying the Boundary Edge
When breaking objects, there are several ways to specify the boundary to use.
You can draw a boundary, choose one or more existing objects that form a
closed boundary, or use the save back extents of the active source drawings
as the boundary. Using save back extents combines the extents of all active
source drawings as the boundary.
The edges of the boundary do not have to form a rectilinear shape. If you are
breaking using lines of latitude and longitude, the edges form a trapezoidal
shape.
618 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Retaining Object Data
You can also choose to retain existing attached object data and links to external
database records on the objects created by the break.
Once the objects are broken, you can save the data back to the source drawings.
See Saving Objects (page 456).
To break objects at a boundary
1 Open a drawing and attach the maps you want.
2 Define and execute a query to retrieve the objects to break.
3 Click Modify menu ➤ Boundary Break.
4 In the Break Objects at Boundary dialog box (page 1058), under Boundaries,
choose how to specify the boundaries for breaking:
■ Use Save Back Extents Of Active Source Drawings — Uses the combined
extents of all active source drawings as the boundary.
■ Select Boundaries — Allows you to choose existing objects in the
current drawing. These objects need to form a closed area but do not
need to be single objects. Click Select < and select the objects to use.
■ Define Boundary — Allows you to draw a single closed boundary on
screen. Click Define < and specify the boundary.
5 Under Objects To Break, specify whether to select objects manually or
automatically, and whether to use only objects on selected layers.
6 Under Break Method, specify whether to exclude topology objects, and
whether to retain object data on the objects.
7 Click OK.
8 In the Confirm Save Back dialog box, click Yes.
The objects are broken according to the location of the save back extents. Now
you save the data back to the source drawings.
1 Click File ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set.
2 Under What To Save, make sure that both Save Queried Objects and Save
Newly Created Object are selected.
3 Under Save Order For Newly Created Objects, select Area. Click OK.
Using Map Editing Tools | 619
Quick Reference
MAPBREAK
Breaks objects along a selected or defined boundary
Menu Modify ➤ Boundary Break
Icon
Boundary Break
Command Line MAPBREAK
Dialog Box Break Objects at Boundary dialog box (page 1058)
Creating an Enlarged Map Section
You can use Boundary Break to show an enlargement of a selected area.
Use Boundary Break to isolate an area, then move and scale up the selected area. This
is useful for map inserts.
Adding an inset to a map communicates the focus of the map better.
To create an enlarged map section
1 Draw a rectangle around the area you want to enlarge.
2 Break the boundaries (page 619) inside the rectangle.
3 Copy objects from the rectangle to a new location.
4 Rescale the objects to a larger size.
620 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
MAPBREAK
Breaks objects along a selected or defined boundary
Menu Modify ➤ Boundary Break
Icon
Boundary Break
Command Line MAPBREAK
Dialog Box Break Objects at Boundary dialog box (page 1058)
Trimming Objects at a Boundary
Using the Boundary Trim command, you can specify a closed boundary as a
trimming edge for a selected set of objects. You can use this option to trim
objects inside or outside a boundary. Use Boundary Trim to quickly clear a
circular or rectilinear area in a complex map in order to insert a legend or
label.
You can use this command to enhance plotted maps. Ater trimming objects
inside an area, you can add text that will not be obscured.
You can use a boundary to trim all objects inside the boundary or outside the boundary.
Using Map Editing Tools | 621
To trim objects inside a boundary
1 Open a drawing and attach the maps you want.
2 Define and execute a query to retrieve the objects to trim.
3 Click Modify menu ➤ Boundary Trim.
4 Under Boundary, select how to specify the boundary:
■ Reference Last Query Boundary — Use the boundary you used in the
last query.
■ Select Boundary — Use an object in the current drawing as the
boundary. Click Select < and select the object to use. The object needs
to form a closed area.
■ Define Boundary — Use a boundary you define. Click Define < and
specify the boundary.
5 Under Objects To Trim, specify whether to select objects manually or
automatically, and whether to use only objects on selected layers.
6 Under Trim Method, specify whether to trim inside or outside the
boundary. Specify whether to exclude topology objects, and whether to
retain object data on the objects.
If you select Retain Object Data, object data and external link data is
duplicated on each piece of a trimmed object. If data is not retained, it
remains attached only to the original location.
7 Under Objects That Cannot Be Trimmed, specify what to do with text,
hatch patterns, and blocks that cross the boundary.
622 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
8 Click OK.
9 To save the trim with your topology, save your changes back to the source
drawings.
To save the trim results without modifying the original topology, save
the changes to a new drawing.
Quick Reference
MAPTRIM
Trims objects to a set of edges
Menu Modify ➤ Boundary Trim
Icon
Boundary Trim
Command Line MAPTRIM
Dialog Box Trim Objects at Boundary dialog box (page 1059)
Manually Editing Objects
Although the automatic Autodesk Map 3D editing tools can correct many
problems, you may need to edit a drawing manually. Use commands such as
FILLET, TRIM, and EXTEND to correct situations similar to those shown in
the following illustration.
WARNING Do not use these editing commands to edit topology; you might
corrupt the topology. Instead, use the Editing topologies (page 549)commands.
Using Map Editing Tools | 623
You can also use object grips to correct errors. Using grips, you can quickly
correct overlaps of coincident boundaries, such as county lines and roads or
geological boundaries and fault lines.
In this example, you can use the grips to align the two boundaries along the
fault line.
To use grips
1 Click Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options. Click the Selection tab.
2 Make sure Enable Grips is selected and click OK.
You can also edit the size and color of the grips. Once grips are enabled,
squares appear on objects when you select them without starting a
command. These squares are the object grips.
3 Select an object so its grips appear.
4 Select an object grip.
To select more than one grip, hold down the Shift key as you select each
grip.
5 Select a new point. The grip you selected is relocated to the selected point,
stretching the rest of the objects associated with that grip.
As you move the cursor, it snaps or locks onto an object grip when it
moves into the square zone representing the grip. You can use this feature
instead of using an object snap such as Endpoint or Midpoint.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
624 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Menu Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options
Command Line OPTIONS
Task Pane Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Creating Centroids for Polylines
If you have polygon objects or closed polylines with data attached to them,
you can create centroids and move the data to the centroid.
This is useful:
■ After you import or digitize objects.
■ Before using editing commands such as Drawing Cleanup, Boundary Break,
or Boundary Trim.
■ When working with topology.
Using Map Editing Tools | 625
Object data attached to closed polylines (above) and object data moved to centroids
(below).
Autodesk Map 3D checks that the lines do not intersect each other, and that
the area is greater than 0. It then creates a centroid inside each selected polygon
or closed polyline and moves any object data or SQL link data to the centroid.
For an object shaped like a figure eight, Autodesk Map 3D creates one centroid.
Centroids are created with a Z value of 0.
To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines
1 Click Create menu ➤ Centroids.
626 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
2 In the Create Centroids dialog box (page 1177), specify whether to create
centroids for all closed objects or only for selected closed objects. If only
for selected closed objects, select the polygons and closed polylines.
TIP Click the Quick Select tool to view and filter the object type as you select
objects.
3 Specify the layer on which the centroids should be created.
4 Specify the block to use for centroids, or use ACAD_POINT.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Menu Create ➤ Centroids
Icon
Create Centroids
Command Line MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Dialog Box Create Centroids dialog box (page 1177)
Matching Map Edges
Maps that are digitized at different times or that use different coordinate
systems often appear distorted at their edges.
Edge matching is the term given to the process that creates a seamless join
across two or more maps.
Use the edge-matching process on one layer at a time. You might edge match
the roads on the two maps first.
One way to avoid the need to use edge matching is to digitize a complete map
in one session rather than breaking the map into smaller sections. If you have
to digitize a map in sections, allow a 3-5% overlap along the edges of a map
tile and digitize both linear and point features on each tile that are common
to both tiles of the map.
Using Map Editing Tools | 627
To match map edges
1 Open a drawing and attach the maps you want to match at edges.
2 Define a query to retrieve the objects to match:
■ Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
■ Define a location condition with a buffer fence option. When defining
the buffer fence, select the edge to match and specify a suitable buffer
fence width.
■ You can also add a property condition to select objects on a specific
layer.
3 Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
4 In the Drawing Cleanup - Select Objects dialog box, click Select All. You
can specify the layer(s) you want to use, for example, the layer containing
road data, and anchor objects as needed. Click Next.
5 In the Select Actions Page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Snap Clustered
Nodes. Click Add to indicate that you want to perform this cleanup action.
6 In the Selected Actions list, click Snap Cluster Nodes. Under Cleanup
Parameters, set Tolerance to a value just greater than the offset distance
between objects. You can type a value in the Tolerance box or click <
Pick to specify the tolerance in the drawing.
7 Under Options, clear Interactive to indicate that you want Autodesk Map
3D to correct errors automatically. Click Next.
8 In the Cleanup Methods Page, under Cleanup Method, select Modify
Original Objects.
9 You can save your settings in a profile (page 489)to use again later.
10 Click Finish to start the drawing cleanup operation.
11 In the Confirm Save Back dialog box, click Yes.
The objects are now contiguous across the map edges. Repeat steps 4 to
11 for all other layers and objects in the edge matching part of the maps.
Save the edited objects back to the source drawings.
1 Click File ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set.
2 Under What To Save, make sure Save Queried Objects is selected. Click
OK.
628 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
All the objects are now matched at their edges.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Menu Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Icon
Drawing Cleanup
Command Line MAPCLEAN
Dialog Box Drawing Cleanup (page 1000)
Digitizing Points Using Coordinates
You can digitize new points in existing maps with precision by using the Track
Coordinates feature to specify the exact coordinates of the points.
To digitize points using coordinates
1 In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing. Click Track Coordinates.
2 In the Track Coordinates pane, click Select Coordinate System.
3 In the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box, choose the coordinate
system.
4 Click OK.
The Track Coordinates pane displays the code and description of the
coordinate system you chose.
5 Start the command for which you want to enter coordinates.
6 In the X and Y text boxes, type the coordinates of the point to digitize.
7 Do one of the following:
Click Digitize.
Press Enter.
Digitizing Points Using Coordinates | 629
The appropriate coordinates are entered on the command line. You can
continue to enter coordinates.
Quick Reference
MAPTRACKCS
Tracks the coordinates of the cursor in any coordinate system
Menu Analyze ➤ Track Coordinates
Icon
Track Coordinates
Command Line MAPTRACKCS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Track
Coordinates
Working with Polygon Objects
A polygon is a closed area that stores information about its inner and outer
boundaries, and about other polygons nested within it or grouped with it.
The polygon object (called the mpolygon) allows accurate translation of data
between Autodesk Map 3D and other GIS packages.
To work with polygon objects
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Overview of Polygons
A polygon is an object type with closed boundaries. Polygons store information
about their inner and outer boundaries, and about other polygons nested
within them or grouped with them.
630 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Polygons can represent areas such as property lots, city limits, county
boundaries, state borders, buildings, and parcels, as well as more complex type
of objects, such as islands.
Example: A state map could be composed of a single polygon with an outer
boundary representing the state, interior boundaries representing lakes, and
boundaries within those boundaries representing islands. Or you could create
a country map with individual polygons representing each state.
The following table explains some common terms used to describe the structure
of polygons.
Term Definition
Boundaries Closed boundaries that make up a polygon. Polygons can have
multiple non-intersecting boundaries, or boundaries nested
within boundaries.
Balancing Process of recalculating which boundaries are outer or inner.
Nested boundaries are alternately classified as outer and inner.
That is, the outermost boundary is classified as an outer
boundary. A boundary nested within this boundary is an inner
boundary. A boundary nested within the inner boundary is
classified as an outer boundary.
Inner boundary Nested boundary that is totally within an outer boundary.
Outer boundary The outermost boundary for any discreet set of boundaries that
define the polygon, or a boundary residing within an inner
boundary. A polygon can have several unnested outer boundaries
and several nested outer boundaries.
Understanding Boundaries
The figure below shows two polygon objects, each with three boundaries. The
one on the left has two discrete outer boundaries and one inner boundary.
The inner boundary is nested within the second discrete outer boundary. The
polygon on the right also has two outer boundaries and one inner boundary.
However, the second outer boundary is nested within the inner boundary.
Working with Polygon Objects | 631
Polygon objects maintain a tree structure to keep track of the boundaries and
identify nesting levels. The illustration below shows the different tree structures
for the two objects shown above. The first polygon tree contains two branches,
while the second polygon tree contains a single branch.
In addition to outer and inner boundaries, there is an Annotation boundary
type. This boundary has the characteristics of an inner boundary, but only
affects the display of the pattern fill and is ignored when calculating the area
or interior of the polygon object. Its primary purpose is to allow you to
annotate your drawings without the fill pattern of the polygon obscuring the
annotations. The annotation will typically consist of text or blocks.
See also:
■ Creating Polygon Objects (page 635)
■ Modifying Polygon Objects (page 637)
■ Setting Polygon Options (page 651)
Do one of the following
■ To create a polygon object (page 635)
■ To add boundaries (page 638)
■ To convert polylines to polygons (page 645)
632 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
■ To convert a polygon topology to polygons (page 648)
■ To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines (page 651)
■ To change the default setting for importing polygons (page 652)
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Menu Create ➤ Centroids
Icon
Create Centroids
Command Line MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Dialog Box Create Centroids dialog box (page 1177)
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON
Converts closed polylines to polygons
Icon
Convert Polylines to Polygons
Command Line MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON
MAPTOPOLOGYTOPOLYGONS
Converts an existing polygon topology to polygons
Icon
Convert Topology to Polygons
Command Line MAPTOPOLOGYTOPOLYGONS
Dialog Box Create Polygons From Topology dialog box (page 1195)
MAPUSEMPOLYGON
Enables/disables use of mapping polygons
Command Line MAPUSEMPOLYGON
Working with Polygon Objects | 633
Dialog Box MAPUSEMPOLYGON (page 1190)
MPEDIT
Edits polygons
Menu Modify ➤ Edit Mpolygon
Icon
Edit Polygon
Command Line MPEDIT
Dialog Box MPEDIT (Edit Polygon command) (page 1190)
MPFILL
Sets the default fill for polygons
Icon
Polygon Fill Settings
Command Line MPFILL
Dialog Box Polygon Fill Properties dialog box (page 1195)
MPOLYGON
Creates polygons
Menu Create ➤ Mpolygon
Icon
MPolygon
Command Line MPOLYGON
MPSPLIT
Splits an existing polygon into two new polygons
Icon
Split Polygon
Command Line MPSPLIT
Dialog Box MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command) (page 1193)
634 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Creating Polygon Objects
Create polygon objects by selecting existing closed polyline objects and circles,
or by specifying points.
The boundaries of a polygon object can overlap or touch, but they cannot
cross. When you pick points to draw a boundary, a point will be rejected if it
causes the boundary to cross itself or if it crosses a previous boundary created
by the command.
You select the fill color and pattern used to fill polygon objects. For color, you
can choose from a variety of colors including true colors and colors from
imported color books. For pattern, you can choose a predefined hatch pattern,
a simple line pattern of your own design, a more complex hatch pattern, or
a solid color. You can also create a gradient fill, which uses a transition between
shades of one color or between two colors. Gradient fills can be used to give
the appearance of light reflecting on an object.
See also:
■ Converting Polylines to Polygons (page 644)
■ Converting Polygon Topology to Polygons (page 646)
■ Modifying Polygon Objects (page 637)
■ Setting Polygon Options (page 651)
To create a polygon object
1 Click Create menu ➤ Mpolygon.
2 Click in the drawing to specify a start point, or select an existing object
to include in the polygon.
3 Optionally, enter a to draw an arc as part of the polygon.
4 Repeat Step 2 to add objects or specify more points.
5 Enter c to close the polygon.
To set the Fill property for polygon objects
1 On the command line, enter mpfill. Press Enter.
2 Enter f.
Working with Polygon Objects | 635
3 In the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box (page 1195), set the polygon fill
properties.
These properties are applied to the polygon that you are drawing and all
new polygons you create or convert.
To fill with... Do this in the Polygon Fill Properties dialog
box...
Solid ■ Click the Hatch tab.
■ For Pattern Type, select Predefined.
■ For Pattern Name, select Solid.
■ For Fill Color, select the fill color. Choose "Select
Color" to select from a large palette of colors.
Predefined hatch pattern ■ Click the Hatch tab.
■ For Pattern Type, select Predefined.
■ For Pattern Name, select a pattern.
User defined hatch pattern ■ Click the Hatch tab.
■ For Pattern Type, select User Defined.
■ Specify the angle and spacing of the hatch pattern.
One or two color gradient ■ Click the Gradient tab.
■ Select the number of colors to use for the gradient
fill.
■ Select the colors.
■ Use the Shade/Tint slider to adjust the color.
■ Click a pattern.
■ Select Center to create a symmetrical fill, or clear
Center to move the "highlight" up and to the left.
■ Specify an angle for the "highlighted" area.
4 Continue creating the polygon by following the steps in the previous
procedure.
636 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
MPOLYGON
Creates polygons
Menu Create ➤ Mpolygon
Icon
MPolygon
Command Line MPOLYGON
Modifying Polygon Objects
You can edit a polygon by editing its boundaries (adding, deleting, moving,
or disconnecting them), changing its fill properties, moving nodes in a
boundary, changing individual boundary types to Inner or Outer, or
rebalancing the polygon. For explanations of these terms, see Overview of
Polygons (page 630)
Rebalancing Polygons
If you add or delete boundaries, be sure to rebalance the polygon. A polygon
becomes unbalanced when it does not have correct information about which
is an inner boundary and which is an outer boundary. When you rebalance
the polygon, the nesting order follows an alternating outer/inner/outer order.
Area of a Polygon
The area between an inner and outer boundary is filled or not filled in an
alternating manner. In a balanced polygon, the filled area represents the total
area of the polygon object. The total area of the polygon is calculated by
subtracting the sum of the area of all inner boundaries from the sum of the
area of all outer boundaries.
Filling a Polygon
You can change the default fill color and pattern assigned to polygons. For
color, you can choose from a variety of colors including true colors and colors
from imported color books. For fill pattern, you can select a predefined hatch
Working with Polygon Objects | 637
pattern, define your own hatch pattern, choose a solid color, or define a one-
or two-color gradient fill.
See also:
■ Creating Polygon Objects (page 635)
■ Setting Polygon Options (page 651)
■ Overview of Polygons (page 630)
To add boundaries
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Mpolygon.
2 In the drawing area, select the polygon to edit.
3 Enter a.
4 Select the polygon or closed polyline to add to the polygon.
The boundary is added to the polygon and assigned an inner or outer
boundary type based on its relationship to the rest of the object
5 Repeat Step 2 to add any other boundaries.
6 When the selection is completed, you can rebalance the polygon by
entering r.
To delete boundaries
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Mpolygon.
2 Select the polygon to edit.
3 Enter d to delete the boundary, or enter c to delete the boundary from
the polygon but preserve it as an object.
4 Click a boundary object to delete from the polygon.
The boundary is removed from the polygon.
5 Repeat Step 2 to delete any other boundaries.
6 When the selection is completed, you can enter r to rebalance the
polygon.
638 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
To move boundaries
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Mpolygon.
2 Select the polygon to edit.
3 Enter m.
4 Click a boundary object to move within the polygon.
Any nested boundaries within the boundary are also selected.
5 Click in the drawing to specify the base point.
6 Click in the drawing to specify the displacement point.
7 Repeat these steps to move any other boundaries.
To edit nodes on a boundary
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Mpolygon.
2 Select the polygon to edit.
3 Enter e.
4 Click a boundary object to edit.
5 Click the node to edit.
TIP Press the Spacebar to move to the next node.
Enter r to remove the node, m to move the node, or i to insert a new
node.
You can not modify the boundary in a way that would make it cross
another boundary in the polygon. For example, you cannot delete a node
if that would make the current boundary cross an inner boundary.
6 When you finish editing nodes, press x to exit node-editing mode.
To change the boundary type
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Mpolygon.
2 Select the polygon to edit.
3 Enter b.
4 Click the boundary object for which you want to change the type.
Working with Polygon Objects | 639
5 Enter o, i, or a (Outer/Inner/Annotation).
Annotation boundaries behave the same as inner boundaries, but have
no effect on area calculations.
To rebalance the polygon object
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Mpolygon.
2 Select the polygon to edit.
3 Enter r.
The Rebalance option recalculates the polygon tree and reassigns the
Inner/Outer property of all the boundaries based on their nesting level.
To edit the fill property for the polygon object
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Mpolygon.
2 Select the polygon to edit.
3 Enter f.
640 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
4 In the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box (page 1195), edit the polygon fill
properties. These properties are applied to the polygon that you are
editing.
To fill with... Do this in the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box...
Solid ■ Click the Hatch tab.
■ For Pattern Type, select Predefined.
■ For Pattern Name, select Solid.
■ For Fill Color, select the fill color. Choose "Select
Color" to select from a large palette of colors.
Predefined hatch pattern ■ Click the Hatch tab.
■ For Pattern Type, select Predefined.
■ For Pattern Name, select a pattern.
User defined hatch pattern ■ Click the Hatch tab.
■ For Pattern Type, select User Defined.
■ Specify the angle and spacing of the hatch pattern.
One or two color gradient ■ Click the Gradient tab.
■ Select the number of colors to use for your gradient
fill.
■ Select the colors.
■ Use the Shade/Tint slider to adjust the color.
■ Click a pattern.
■ Select Center to create a symmetrical fill, or clear
Center to move the "highlight" up and to the left.
■ Specify an angle for the "highlighted" area.
To set the default fill pattern for polygons
1 On the command line, enter mpfill. Press Enter.
2 Select the fill pattern and properties.
All polygons you create or convert will use the new default fill.
Working with Polygon Objects | 641
Editing Using Grips
In addition to the options described above, you can edit a polygon object
using grips in the same way that you edit a polyline object (stretch a vertex,
move, rotate, scale, etc.).
Quick Reference
MPEDIT
Edits polygons
Menu Modify ➤ Edit Mpolygon
Icon
Edit Polygon
Command Line MPEDIT
Dialog Box MPEDIT (Edit Polygon command) (page 1190)
MPFILL
Sets the default fill for polygons
Icon
Polygon Fill Settings
Command Line MPFILL
Dialog Box Polygon Fill Properties dialog box (page 1195)
Splitting Polygon Objects
You can split an existing polygon into two new polygons. The existing polygon
is deleted.
Example: If a parcel is subdivided, you can split the existing parcel.
642 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
When you split a polygon, the split line cannot cross itself or cross an internal
boundary of the polygon.
This split is allowed. This split is not allowed because This split is not allowed because it
it crosses an internal boundary. touches one of the vertices of the
internal boundary.
When you split the polygon, you can choose to copy any existing data from
the original polygon to both of the new polygons.
See also:
■ Modifying Polygon Objects (page 637)
■ Setting Polygon Options (page 651)
To split a polygon object
1 On the command line, enter mpsplit. Press Enter.
2 Select the polygon to split.
3 Specify the line to split the polygon:
■ To split the polygon by drawing a line, enter d.
Click in the drawing to specify the first point for the line.
Click to specify the next point, or enter a to draw an arc. For more
information on drawing arcs, see the AutoCAD help.
■ To split the polygon by using an existing line, enter s. Select the line
or lines.
4 To copy attached data from the original polygon to the two new polygons,
enter y.
Working with Polygon Objects | 643
Otherwise, the data is deleted.
Quick Reference
MPSPLIT
Splits an existing polygon into two new polygons
Icon
Split Polygon
Command Line MPSPLIT
Dialog Box MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command) (page 1193)
Converting Polylines to Polygons
You can convert all, or a selection of, the closed polylines in an existing
drawing to polygon objects. When you convert a closed polyline, the original
polyline is erased and is replaced with a polygon object.
When exporting objects to other formats, use polygons to preserve information
about islands, holes, or discontinuous polygons.
Here are some typical situations in which you may want to convert polylines
to polygons.
Converting Polylines to Polygons
This illustration shows a map made of polylines. Every closed polyline is converted to
a polygon.
644 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Converting Nested Polylines to Polygons
This illustration shows a state with lakes as closed polylines.
To create a complex polygon with islands, holes, or discontinuous polygons,
first use the GROUP command to group the objects that you want to include
in the polygon. Then use the MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON command.
WARNING When you group objects, only the data from the outermost boundary
is maintained. The data from nested objects is lost.
To preserve nested data, you may want to convert your polylines in steps. For
example, in the illustration above, you could first query in the state and lake
boundaries, group all these objects, and create a polygon. The resulting polygon
will show the state with holes for the lakes, and will maintain only the state
data. Next, query in the lake polylines, do not group them, and then convert
the lake polylines to polygons. Each of the polygons representing the lakes
will have its data attached.
See also:
■ Converting Polygon Topology to Polygons (page 646)
■ Overview of Polygons (page 630)
■ Setting Polygon Options (page 651)
To convert polylines to polygons
1 Set the PROXYGRAPHICS system variable to 0.
2 On the command line, enter mappolylinetopolygon. Press Enter.
Working with Polygon Objects | 645
3 If you already had a selection set, the selected closed polylines are
converted. If you did not have a selection set, select the polylines to
convert. Press Enter.
Each closed polyline in the selection set is converted. If the polyline
belongs to a group, only the first (outermost) polyline is converted. Other
polylines in the group are copied into the polygon as additional
boundaries and the polygon is rebalanced.
When objects are converted to polygons, they use the color or hatch set by
the MPFILL command (page 652).
Quick Reference
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON
Converts closed polylines to polygons
Icon
Convert Polylines to Polygons
Command Line MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON
Converting Polygon Topology to Polygons
You can create polygons from a polygon topology. The polygon topology is
not changed.
When exporting objects to other formats, use polygons to preserve information
about islands, holes, or discontinuous polygons.
Here are some typical situations in which you may want to create polygons
from a polygon topology.
646 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
This illustration shows a polygon topology. You can create polygons for each polygon
in the polygon topology. This is especially useful when exporting to other formats.
This illustration shows lakes as part of a state topology. To create a polygon for the
state with "holes" in it for the lakes, select the Group Complex Polygons option.
Converting Polygon Topology with Nested Boundaries
When you have nested polygons in your topology, you have several options
on how to convert them.
If you select the Group Complex Polygons option and all the polygons have
centroids, Autodesk Map 3D will create a single balanced polygon.
If you do not select the Group Complex Polygons option, Autodesk Map 3D
will create separate polygons, one for each centroid.
To create a single polygon from polygons nested within each other, each
nested polygon must have a centroid. For example, if you have three polygons
nested one within another, and the middle polygon does not have a centroid,
Autodesk Map 3D will create separate polygons for the inner polygon and the
outer polygon.
Working with Polygon Objects | 647
See also:
■ Converting Polylines to Polygons (page 644)
■ Overview of Polygons (page 630)
■ Setting Polygon Options (page 651)
To convert a polygon topology to polygons
1 On the command line, enter maptopologytopolygons. Press Enter.
2 For Name, select the topology to convert.
Click Load Topology to select and load the topology.
3 For Layer, select the layer on which you want to place the converted
polygon(s).
Click Layer Settings to create a new layer and set its properties.
4 Optionally, select Group Complex Polygons to create a single polygon
from nested polygons in the topology.
If one polygon is inside another, they both become boundaries in the
resulting polygon object. There is no specific limit to the nesting level of
polygons grouped with this option, but in some conditions the resulting
inner/outer type of individual boundaries may not be what you
anticipated. You can use the MPEDIT (page 638) command to correct this.
5 Optionally, select Copy Object Data From Centroid to copy object data
from the polygons to the new polygon objects.
If you selected Group Complex Polygons, the object data is copied only
from the outermost polygon.
6 Optionally, select Copy Database Links From Centroid to copy database
links from the polygons to the new polygon objects.
If you selected Group Complex Polygons, the database links are copied
only from the outermost polygon.
7 Click OK.
When objects are converted to polygons, they use the color or hatch set by
the MPFILL command (page 652).
648 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOLOGYTOPOLYGONS
Converts an existing polygon topology to polygons
Icon
Convert Topology to Polygons
Command Line MAPTOPOLOGYTOPOLYGONS
Dialog Box Create Polygons From Topology dialog box (page 1195)
Creating Centroids for Polygons
If you have data attached to polygon objects or closed polylines, you can
create centroids for the polygons or closed polylines and move the data to the
centroid.
This is useful after you import or digitize objects, before using editing
commands such as Drawing Cleanup, Map Break, or Map Trim, or when
working with topology.
Working with Polygon Objects | 649
Object data attached to closed polylines (above) and object data moved to centroids
(below).
When you use this feature, Autodesk Map 3D checks that the selected polygons
or closed polylines are clean; that is, that the lines do not intersect each other,
and that the area is greater than 0.
It creates a centroid inside each selected polygon or closed polyline and moves
any object data or SQL link data to the centroid. For a 'figure eight' object,
Autodesk Map 3D creates one centroid.
Centroids are created with a Z value of 0.
See also:
■ Creating Polygon Objects (page 635)
650 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
■ Overview of Polygons (page 630)
To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines
1 Click Create menu ➤ Centroids.
2 In the Create Centroids dialog box (page 1177), specify whether to create
centroids for all closed objects or only for selected closed objects. If only
for selected closed objects, select those polygons and closed polylines.
TIP Use Quick Select to view and filter the object type as you select objects.
3 Specify the layer on which the centroids should be created.
4 Specify the block to use for centroids, or use ACAD_POINT.
5 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Menu Create ➤ Centroids
Icon
Create Centroids
Command Line MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Dialog Box Create Centroids dialog box (page 1177)
Setting Polygon Options
Autodesk Map 3D uses polygons by default for import and export. If you do
not want to use polygons, for example, for compatibility with an older drawing,
you can select the option to import polygons as polylines. You can also change
the default setting for this option.
When objects are imported as polygons, they use the default fill color and
pattern set by the MPFILL command. Boundaries come in as usual, using the
default layer color unless another color is specified in the imported file.
Working with Polygon Objects | 651
You can change the default fill color and pattern assigned to polygons. For
color, you can choose from a variety of colors including true colors and colors
from imported color books. For fill pattern, you can select a predefined hatch
pattern, define your own hatch pattern, choose a solid color, or define a one-
or two-color gradient fill.
You can also change the display of polygon boundaries to display just the
edges, just the fill, or both.
See also:
■ Creating Polygon Objects (page 635)
■ Overview of Polygons (page 630)
To change the default setting for importing polygons
1 On the command line, enter mapusempolygon.
You are asked whether you want to use polygons.
2 Type off or on. Press Enter.
If you turn off mpolygons, Autodesk Map 3D creates closed polylines for
polygon objects that it imports.
To change the default fill for polygons
1 On the command line, enter mpfill. Press Enter.
652 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
2 In the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box (page 1195), select the polygon
fill properties.
To fill with... Do this in the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box...
Solid ■ Click the Hatch tab.
■ For Pattern Type, select Predefined.
■ For Pattern Name, select Solid.
■ For Fill Color, select the fill color. Choose "Select Color"
to select from a large palette of colors.
Predefined hatch pattern ■ Click the Hatch tab.
■ For Pattern Type, select Predefined.
■ For Pattern Name, select a pattern.
User defined hatch pattern ■ Click the Hatch tab.
■ For Pattern Type, select User Defined.
■ Specify the angle and spacing of the hatch pattern.
One or two color gradient ■ Click the Gradient tab.
■ Select the number of colors to use for your gradient
fill.
■ Select the colors.
■ Use the Shade/Tint slider to adjust the color.
■ Click a pattern.
■ Select Center to create a symmetrical fill, or clear
Center to move the "highlight" up and to the left.
■ Specify an angle for the "highlighted" area.
All polygons you create or convert will use the new default fill. Note that you
can change the fill for an existing polygon by using the MPEDIT command.
To change the display of polygon edges
1 On the command line, enter polydisplay.
Working with Polygon Objects | 653
2 Enter e to view edges only, f to view fill only, or b to view both edges
and fill.
3 On the command line, enter regen.
Quick Reference
MAPUSEMPOLYGON
Enables/disables use of mapping polygons
Command Line MAPUSEMPOLYGON
Dialog Box MAPUSEMPOLYGON (page 1190)
MPFILL
Sets the default fill for polygons
Icon
Polygon Fill Settings
Command Line MPFILL
Dialog Box Polygon Fill Properties dialog box (page 1195)
POLYDISPLAY
Specifies whether to display edges only, fill only, or both for polygons
Icon
Polygon Display Mode
Command Line POLYDISPLAY
Adding and Deleting Annotation
Use annotation to quickly and easily label objects with their attribute values,
display properties, and geometric values.
To add and delete annotation
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
654 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Overview of Annotation
Use annotation to indicate textual values on an object. These values might
be attributes, such as object data; display properties, such as a lineweight; or
geometric values, such as the line direction. In addition, you can add graphics
to your annotation, such as arrows, static text, or other geometry, using
standard AutoCAD drawing commands.
Annotation may have both textual and graphic contents. The textual contents,
as well as properties such as layer, color, insertion point, etc., are defined in
the annotation template, and any values defined by expressions are determined
when the annotation is inserted. When you add or remove textual elements
or change properties or expressions in an annotation template, the existing
annotations based on that template do not refresh automatically. Use either
the Refresh or the Update command to see those changes.
To use annotation
■ Define an annotation template (page 152)
■ Attach annotation to objects (page 657)
■ Refresh annotation (page 658)
■ Update annotation (page 660)
■ Delete annotation from drawings (page 661)
■ Delete annotation templates (page 156)
Quick Reference
MAPANNDELETE
Deletes all annotation based on selected template
Menu Setup ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Delete
Adding and Deleting Annotation | 655
Icon
Delete
Command Line MAPANNDELETE
Dialog Box Annotation Delete Dialog Box (page 982)
MAPANNINSERT
Adds annotation to objects based on selected annotation template
Menu Create ➤ Insert Annotation
Icon
Insert Annotation
Command Line MAPANNINSERT
Dialog Box Insert Annotation dialog box (page 985)
MAPANNREFRESH
Refreshes existing annotation
Menu Setup ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Refresh
Icon
Refresh
Command Line MAPANNREFRESH
Dialog Box Annotation Refresh Dialog Box (page 982)
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Menu Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template
Icon
Define Annotation Template
Command Line MAPANNTEMPLATE
Dialog Box Define Annotation Template dialog box (page 983)
MAPANNTEXT
Creates and edits annotation text
656 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Icon
Edit Annotation Text
Command Line MAPANNTEXT
Dialog Box Annotation Text dialog box (page 982)
MAPANNUPDATE
Updates existing annotation
Menu Setup ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Update
Icon
Update
Command Line MAPANNUPDATE
Dialog Box Annotation Update dialog box (page 983)
Attaching Annotation to Objects
After you have defined an annotation template, use the MAPANNINSERT
command to attach annotation to selected objects in your drawing.
See also:
■ Defining Annotation Templates (page 152)
■ Changing Annotation Templates (page 155)
To insert annotation
1 Click Create menu ➤ Insert Annotation.
2 Select an annotation template.
Make sure that the template name check box is selected. To insert
annotations based on multiple templates, select the check box for each
template.
3 Optionally, click Advanced to insert annotations with override options
and properties.
The override information is applied only to the highlighted template.
Adding and Deleting Annotation | 657
If you subsequently use the Update command with this annotation
template, you must use the Retain option or these overrides will be lost.
4 Click Insert.
5 Select the objects to annotate. Press Enter.
Quick Reference
MAPANNINSERT
Adds annotation to objects based on selected annotation template
Menu Create ➤ Insert Annotation
Icon
Insert Annotation
Command Line MAPANNINSERT
Dialog Box Insert Annotation dialog box (page 985)
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Menu Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template
Icon
Define Annotation Template
Command Line MAPANNTEMPLATE
Dialog Box Define Annotation Template dialog box (page 983)
Refreshing Annotation
When you make changes to the expressions in an annotation template, the
expressions in existing annotations based on that template do not change
automatically. Use the Refresh command to see those changes reflected. The
658 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Refresh command re-evaluates the existing expressions in an annotation and
has the following options.
■ Strings Only option — This option re-evaluates any expression-based text
in the annotation, but changes nothing else. For example, when you
annotate a circle, using the expression .AREA as the value of the annotation
text, the text displays the area of the circle. If you change the diameter of
the circle, then use the Refresh command with the Strings Only option,
the text changes to reflect the new area of the circle.
■ Full Annotation option — This option also re-evaluates any
expression-based text in the annotation. In addition, it re-evaluates other
properties of the annotation, such as the insertion point, or the layer upon
which the annotation resides. For example, if you annotated a circle as
described above, and used the expression .CENTER to specify the insertion
point of the text, the area of the circle would be displayed in the center of
the circle. If you re-size and move the circle, the Strings Only option would
change the text for the area, but would not change the position of the
text. So, the annotation text would no longer be centered in the circle.
The Full Annotation option would both update the text to reflect the new
area, and move the annotation to the center of the relocated circle.
See also:
■ Defining Annotation Templates (page 152)
■ Changing Annotation Templates (page 155)
To refresh annotation based on a specific template
1 Click Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Refresh.
2 Select an annotation template, and click OK.
3 On the command line, choose Full Annotation or Strings Only. Press
Enter.
Quick Reference
MAPANNREFRESH
Refreshes existing annotation
Menu Setup ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Refresh
Adding and Deleting Annotation | 659
Icon
Refresh
Command Line MAPANNREFRESH
Dialog Box Annotation Refresh Dialog Box (page 982)
Updating Annotation
When you add or remove textual elements in an annotation template, the
existing annotations based on that template do not change automatically.
Use the Update command to see those changes reflected. The Update command
completely erases and regenerates all annotation based on a specified
annotation template and has the following two options.
■ Retain option — This option regenerates all annotation, without losing
any specific overrides. So, any added or removed textual elements will be
reflected in the existing annotations, and any special modifications you
have made to specific annotations will remain. For example, after inserting
a number of annotations with property or expression overrides specified
in the Insert dialog, the Retain option will regenerate all the annotation
using those overrides.
■ Discard option — This option regenerates all annotation, using the default
values in the template. So, any added or removed textual elements will be
reflected in the existing annotations, but any specific overrides will be lost.
For example, using the previous example, the Discard option will regenerate
all the annotation, using the default properties and expressions in the
annotation template.
See also:
■ Defining Annotation Templates (page 152)
■ Changing Annotation Templates (page 155)
To update annotation based on a specific template
1 Click Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Update.
2 Select an annotation template, and click OK.
3 On the command line, choose Retain or Discard. Press Enter.
660 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
MAPANNUPDATE
Updates existing annotation
Menu Setup ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Update
Icon
Update
Command Line MAPANNUPDATE
Dialog Box Annotation Update dialog box (page 983)
Deleting Annotation from Drawings
You can delete all annotation based on a selected annotation template.
To delete all annotation based on a selected annotation template
1 Click Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Delete.
2 Select an annotation template. Click OK
TIP You can select more than one template at a time.
Quick Reference
MAPANNDELETE
Deletes all annotation based on selected template
Menu Setup ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Delete
Icon
Delete
Command Line MAPANNDELETE
Dialog Box Annotation Delete Dialog Box (page 982)
Adding and Deleting Annotation | 661
Using Object Classification
Use object classification to organize objects in your drawing based on the
real-world objects that they represent. When you create an object using object
classification, the object automatically has properties and values assigned to
it based on its classification.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects.
See also:
■ Understanding Object Classification (page 662)
■ Setting Up Object Classification (page 96)
To use object classification
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Understanding Object Classification
Object classification helps organize and select objects in your drawings.
1 Start by determining the standard objects you use in your organization.
These standard objects are called features. For example, if your
organization produces road maps, you may want a set of standard road
objects, such as Primary Road and Secondary Road.
2 Determine the set of properties and data for each feature. For each feature,
define an object class that specifies the properties and data for the feature.
All object class definitions are stored in an object class definition file.
For example, you may want all Primary Roads to be created using a
polyline, use a thick lineweight, be on the Primary Roads layer, and have
object data associated with them that lists values for speed limit and
number of lanes. You want Secondary Roads to go on the Secondary
Roads layer, use a thin lineweight, and include information on surface
type.
662 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
3 Use object class definitions to create objects with a standard set of
properties and data assigned to them.
For example, if you use the Create Classified Object command to create
a Primary Road, it is created with a polyline, a thick lineweight, on the
Primary Roads layer, and with object data that lists values for speed limit
and number of lanes. When you create a secondary road, it is on the
Secondary Roads layer, with a thinner lineweight, and different values
for surface type and number of lanes.
When you select an object that was created using object classification, the
properties that are associated with that object class are displayed on the Object
Class tab of the Properties palette. For example, when you select a road, the
Properties palette shows you the layer, lineweight, surface type, and number
of lanes. Edit properties by entering new values in the window.
When you select a road in your drawing, the Object Class tab shows all the properties
associated with the object class Road. You can edit a value by clicking in the box and
selecting an item from the list.
To create classified objects
1 Define an object class (page 100).
This step is often performed by the CAD Manager in your organization.
Using Object Classification | 663
2 Use object classification to standardize the objects in your drawings.
■ Create new objects using object classification (page 670).
These new objects are created using the standard properties specified
for the object class.
■ Assign an object class to an existing object (page 672).
The properties and data associated with the object are changed to
match the standards specified for the object class.
Once you have drawing objects in your drawing, you can do the following:
■ Edit object class data for an object (page 674).
■ Select objects by object class (page 675).
■ Query objects from source drawings by object class name (page 806).
■ Create a report that lists the object class properties of selected objects (page
933).
■ View information about attached drawings (page 141).
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
CLASSIFY
Classifies existing objects
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Create ➤ Classify
Objects
664 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Icon
Classify Objects
Command Line CLASSIFY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Classifie Objects
Dialog Box Classify dialog box (page 1087)
Create Classified Object
Creates a new object based on the object classification definition
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
an object class ➤ Create Classified Object
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in the current drawing
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class
Icon
Define Object Class
Command Line FEATUREDEF
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Dialog Box Define Object Classification dialog box (page 1089)
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED
Selects all classified objects
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Edit ➤ Select
Classified Objects
Icon
Select Classified Objects
Command Line MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Classified Objects
Using Object Classification | 665
Dialog Box MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects
command) (page 1085)
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED
Selects all objects that have no classification assigned to them
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Edit ➤ Select
Unclassified Features
Command Line MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Unclassified
Dialog Box MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (Select Unclassified
Objects command) (page 1085)
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED
Selects all objects whose classification is not defined in the current object
class definition file
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Edit ➤ Select
Undefined Objects
Command Line MAPSELECTUNDEFINED
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Undefined
Dialog Box MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (Select Undefined Objects
command) (page 1086)
NEWDEF
Creates a new object class definition file
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ New Defintion File
Command Line NEWDEF
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ New Definition File
Dialog Box New Object Class Definition File dialog box (page 1094)
UNCLASSIFY
666 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Removes classification from an object
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Modify ➤ Unclassify Objects
Icon
Unclassify Objects
Command Line UNCLASSIFY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Classified Objects
Overview of Using Object Classification
Use object classification to organize objects in your drawing based on the
real-world features that they represent, for example, roads or manholes. When
you create an object using object classification, the object automatically has
properties and values assigned to it based on its object classification. In
addition, you can find or select all objects in an object class.
See also:
■ Understanding Object Classification (page 662)
■ Setting Up Object Classification (page 96)
To use object classification, first classify the objects in your drawings:
■ Attach an object class definition file (page 677).
■ Create new objects using object classification (page 670).
■ Assign an object class to existing objects (page 672).
■ Edit object class data (page 674).
Once you have features in your drawing, you can do the following:
■ Select objects by object class (page 675).
■ Query objects from source drawings by object class name (page 806).
■ Query objects from source drawings by object class properties (page 810).
■ Modify objects based on their object class (page 826).
Using Object Classification | 667
■ Create a report that lists the object class properties of selected objects (page
933).
■ Add text to objects based on object class values (page 834).
■ View information about the number of each object (page 141).
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
CLASSIFY
Classifies existing objects
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Create ➤ Classify
Objects
Icon
Classify Objects
Command Line CLASSIFY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Classifie Objects
Dialog Box Classify dialog box (page 1087)
Create Classified Object
Creates a new object based on the object classification definition
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
an object class ➤ Create Classified Object
668 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED
Selects all classified objects
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Edit ➤ Select
Classified Objects
Icon
Select Classified Objects
Command Line MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Classified Objects
Dialog Box MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects
command) (page 1085)
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED
Selects all objects that have no classification assigned to them
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Edit ➤ Select
Unclassified Features
Command Line MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Unclassified
Dialog Box MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (Select Unclassified
Objects command) (page 1085)
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED
Selects all objects whose classification is not defined in the current object
class definition file
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Edit ➤ Select
Undefined Objects
Command Line MAPSELECTUNDEFINED
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Undefined
Dialog Box MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (Select Undefined Objects
command) (page 1086)
UNCLASSIFY
Using Object Classification | 669
Removes classification from an object
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Modify ➤ Unclassify Objects
Icon
Unclassify Objects
Command Line UNCLASSIFY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Classified Objects
Creating New Drawing Objects
Use object classes to create new objects with a predefined set of properties and
values.
When you create a drawing object using object classification, properties are
set to allowable values and data is attached. In addition, the object is tagged
with the name of its object class.
For example, if you create a road using a Road object class, you are prompted
to create a normal polyline. The polyline is created on the Roads layer, has
the default properties for a road, and has the data values specified for a road
feature.
After you create a classified object, you can use the Object Class tab of the
Properties palette to edit the data associated with the object class.
To create classified objects , you must have an object class definition file
attached to your drawing. For information on the location of the object class
definition file, consult your CAD manager.
See also:
■ Editing Object Class Data (page 673)
■ Attaching an Object Class Definition File (page 677)
■ Using Object Classification (page 662)
To create a new drawing object
1 In Map Explorer, right-click the object class you want. Click Create
Classified Object.
670 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
2 Create the object as prompted.
When you create the object, object data, external data, and topology data
are attached. Other properties included in the object class definition are
set to the current drawing setting. If this setting is not within the range
of allowable values for this property, the default value is used.
3 If necessary, edit the properties (page 674) for this object.
If no object classes are listed in Map Explorer, you may need to attach an
object class definition file. For information on the location of the object class
definition file, consult your CAD manager.
NOTE You may not be able to create classified objects from some object classes.
If the object class was defined with a create method of None, or if it was defined
as a base class only, you will not be able to create a feature using this object class.
See also:
■ To attach an object class definition file (page 677)
Quick Reference
Create Classified Object
Creates a new object based on the object classification definition
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
an object class ➤ Create Classified Object
Assigning an Object Class
Classify existing objects by assigning object classes to them. When you classify
an object, the properties and data of the selected object class are assigned to
the object.
Before you assign an object class, make sure that the properties specified in
the object class definition are available in the drawing. For example, if the
object class definition specifies a linetype, make sure the specified linetype is
loaded into the drawing. Any properties that are not available are not updated
for the classified objects.
Using Object Classification | 671
To classify objects, you must have an object class definition file attached to
your drawing. For information on the location of the object class definition
file, consult your CAD manager.
See also:
■ Attaching an Object Class Definition File (page 677)
■ Using Object Classification (page 662)
To assign an object class to an existing object
1 In Map Explorer, right-click the object class to assign to the object. Click
Classify Objects.
2 In the Classify Objects dialog box (page 1087), select the options you want
and click OK.
■ Select Include Objects... to classify objects even if the values for
properties associated with the object class are not within the range of
allowable values specified for the feature.
For these objects, the values that are outside the allowable range will
be reset to the default value.
■ Select Exclude Objects... to ensure that you do not overwrite an object
class already assigned to an object.
3 Select the objects that you want to classify.
If objects do not match the object type of the object class, they are filtered
out of the selection set and are not classified.
If no object classes are listed in Map Explorer, you may need to attach an
object class definition file. For information on the location of the object class
definition file, consult your CAD manager.
To unclassify an object
1 In Map Explorer, right-click Object Classes. Click Unclassify Objects.
2 Select the objects you want to unclassify.
3 When you finish selecting objects, press Enter.
Selected objects have their object classification tag removed.
672 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
See also:
■ To attach an object class definition file (page 677)
Quick Reference
CLASSIFY
Classifies existing objects
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Create ➤ Classify
Objects
Icon
Classify Objects
Command Line CLASSIFY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Classifie Objects
Dialog Box Classify dialog box (page 1087)
UNCLASSIFY
Removes classification from an object
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Modify ➤ Unclassify Objects
Icon
Unclassify Objects
Command Line UNCLASSIFY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Classified Objects
Editing Object Class Data
The Object Class tab of the Properties palette makes object class data for the
selected object available for editing.
When you edit the data on the Object Class tab, you can enter only values
that are within the allowable range for this property. Note that if you edit this
Using Object Classification | 673
data elsewhere, such as on the Categories tab of the Properties palette, you
will be able to enter values that are outside the range. But when you next
select the Object Class tab, the value will be reset to the default value.
See also:
■ Assigning an Object Class (page 671)
■ Creating New Drawing Objects (page 670)
■ Using Object Classification (page 662)
To edit object class data for an object
1 Select the object.
2 If the Properties palette is not already displayed, right-click the object.
Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, select the Object Class tab.
4 Review and edit any information.
When you edit object class, you must enter a value that is within the allowable
range for this object class.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Menu Analyze ➤ Properties
Icon
Properties
Command Line PROPERTIES
Task Pane Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
674 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Selecting Objects
You can create a selection set of objects based on their object class. For
example, you could select all Roads. You can also select all objects that have
not been assigned to any object class.
When you select all objects in a base class, objects in object classes based on
that class are also selected.
You can use Quick Select to select objects with specific properties, such as all
two-line roads.
In addition, you can use queries to in your source drawing and query them
into the current drawing.
See also:
■ Assigning an Object Class (page 671)
■ Creating New Drawing Objects (page 670)
■ Editing Object Class Data (page 673)
■ Using Object Classification (page 662)
To select objects based on their object class
■ To select objects that have been assigned to a specific object class, right-click
the object class name in Map Explorer. Click Select Classified Objects.
■ To select all objects that have been assigned to any object class (all classified
objects), right-click Object Classes in Map Explorer. Click Select Classified
Objects.
■ To select objects that have not been assigned to any object class (all
unclassified objects), right-click Object Classes in Map Explorer. Click Select
Unclassified.
■ To select all undefined objects, right-click Object Classes in Map Explorer.
Click Select Undefined. An undefined object is an object that has been
assigned to an object class, but whose object class is not defined in the
definition file attached to the drawing. This can happen if you get a drawing
from another user, or if you change the object class definition file attached
to the current drawing.
■ To select objects based on the value of one of the properties associated
with the feature, right-click in your drawing. Click Quick Select. In the
Using Object Classification | 675
Quick Select dialog box, under Object Type, select the object class, and
under Properties, select the object class property. Select an operator and a
value.
Selecting Objects from Source Drawings
The above methods select objects in your current drawing. To select objects
in source drawings, define a query that retrieves them.
■ To select objects in source drawings based on the object class name or a
specific value of an object class property, see To retrieve drawing objects
based on their properties (page 806).
■ To select objects in source drawings based on the value of specific object
class data, see To retrieve drawing objects based on their object data (page
810).
Quick Reference
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED
Selects all classified objects
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Edit ➤ Select
Classified Objects
Icon
Select Classified Objects
Command Line MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Classified Objects
Dialog Box MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects
command) (page 1085)
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED
Selects all objects that have no classification assigned to them
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Edit ➤ Select
Unclassified Features
Command Line MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED
676 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Unclassified
Dialog Box MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (Select Unclassified
Objects command) (page 1085)
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED
Selects all objects whose classification is not defined in the current object
class definition file
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Edit ➤ Select
Undefined Objects
Command Line MAPSELECTUNDEFINED
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Undefined
Dialog Box MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (Select Undefined Objects
command) (page 1086)
Attaching an Object Class Definition File
The object class definition file includes information on how to create each of
the object classes you have defined. You can change the object class definition
file that is associated with the current drawing. Only definitions in the
associated definition file can be assigned to objects or used to create new
features.
NOTE For information on the location of the object class definition file, consult
your CAD manager.
See also:
■ Understanding Object Classification (page 662)
■ Creating an Object Classification File (page 108)
To attach an object class definition file
1 In Map Explorer, right-click Object Class Definition. Click Attach Object
Class Definition File.
2 Select the object class definition file. Click Open.
Using Object Classification | 677
Quick Reference
ATTACHDEF
Changes the current feature definition file
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Attach Definition
File
Command Line ATTACHDEF
Task Pane In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Attach Definition File
Dialog Box Attach Object Class Definition File dialog box (page
1086)
Entering Coordinate Geometry
Use coordinate geometry to enter accurate geometry when creating objects.
You can easily send information to and from the field that represents accurate
locations.Use the COGO input commands to create objects using accurate
geometry. For example, you can create parcel boundaries from legal documents
or survey data.
The enter coordinate geometry
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Using Transparent Commands
Transparent commands are commands that you can use in the middle of other
commands. For example, if you are using the PLINE command to create a
polyline, you can use the 'AD command to start the Angle Distance command
which lets you specify your polyline points using coordinate geometry.
678 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
To use a command transparently, enter an apostrophe ( ' ) before the command
name.
To use a command transparently
1 Start a command.
2 When prompted for input, instead of specifying the input, start the
transparent command by entering an apostrophe and then the command
name.
3 When the transparent command finishes, continue responding to the
prompts for the original command.
For example, start the Polyline (PLINE) command. When prompted for the
next point in the polyline, enter 'ad. The Angle Distance command prompts
you for the angle and distance to the new point. When you finish using the
Angle Distance command to specify the point, the Polyline command prompts
you to enter the next point. You can enter the point normally, or you can
start another transparent command to specify the point.
Using Angle and Distance to Specify a Point
When creating an object, such as a line or an arc, you can specify a point by
specifying an angle and a distance from another point.
Select the line from which to measure the angle by either selecting an existing line in
your drawing, or by specifying a starting and ending point (1 and 2) for the line. Then
specify the angle (3) and the distance from the starting point (4).
Using Angle and Distance to Specify a Point | 679
To specify a point using angle and distance
1 Start the command you want to use, for example, PLINE or ARC.
2 To specify a point using angle and distance, enter 'ad.
3 Specify the line you will use to measure the angle.
■ If you are specifying the first point of an object, specify a starting
point and ending point for the line, or select an existing line in the
drawing.
■ If you are specifying a later point in the object, specify just the ending
point for the line. The previous point of the object is used as the
starting point of the line.
4 Enter the angle from the line you just specified to the line that specifies
the new point.
5 Enter the distance from the starting point to the new point.
6 If prompted, enter an elevation, grade, or slope.
NOTE The Elevation/Grade/Slope prompt appears only if you've turned on
the Prompt For 3D Data Input option in the Coordinate Geometry Setup
dialog box.
7 To specify another point, when you are prompted for the point, enter
'ad, and then enter the angle and distance from the point you just
specified.
Quick Reference
AD
Specifies a point based on angle and distance from a given point
Icon
Angle Distance
Command Line 'AD
Dialog Box Command Line: AD
680 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Using Bearing and Distance to Specify a Point
When creating an object, such as a line or an arc, you can specify a point by
specifying a bearing and a distance from another point.
Select a staring point (1) and a quadrant (2). Then specify the bearing angle (3) and
the distance from the starting point (4).
To specify a point using bearing and distance
1 Start the command you want to use, for example, PLINE or ARC.
2 When you want to specify a point using bearing and distance, enter 'bd.
3 If you are specifying the first point of an object, specify a starting point.
If you are specifying a later point in the object, the previous point you
specified for the object is used as the starting point.
4 Enter the quadrant.
■ 1 = northeast
■ 2 = southeast
■ 3 = southwest
■ 4 = northwest
5 Enter the angle.
Enter the angle using the current angular units setting, decimal values,
such as 45.1111, or surveyor type angles, such as 45d3'55".
6 Enter the distance from the starting point.
7 If prompted, enter an elevation, grade, or slope.
Using Bearing and Distance to Specify a Point | 681
The Elevation/Grade/Slope prompt appears only if you've turned on the
Prompt For 3D Data Input option in the Coordinate Geometry Setup
dialog box.
8 To specify another point, when you are prompted for the point, enter
'bd, and then enter the quadrant, angle, and distance from the point you
just specified.
Quick Reference
BD
Specifies a point based on bearing and distance from a given point
Icon
Bearing Distance
Command Line 'BD
Dialog Box Command Line: BD
Using Deflection and Distance to Specify a Point
When creating an object, such as a line or an arc, you can specify a point by
specifying a deflection angle and a distance from another point.
Select the line from which to measure the deflection angle by either selecting an existing
line in your drawing, or by specifying a starting and ending point (1 and 2) for the
line. Then specify the deflection angle (3) and the distance from the starting point (4).
682 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
To specify a point using a deflection angle and a distance
1 Start the command you want to use, for example, PLINE or ARC.
2 When you want to specify a point using deflection angle and distance,
enter 'dd.
3 Specify the line you will use to measure the angle.
■ If you are specifying the first point of an object, specify a starting
point and ending point for the line, or select an existing line in the
drawing.
■ If you are specifying a later point in the object, specify just the ending
point for the line. The previous point of the object is used as the
starting point of the line.
4 Enter the deflection angle from the line you just specified to the line of
the new direction.
Enter the angle using the current angular units setting, decimal values,
such as 45.1111, or surveyor type angles, such as 45d3'55".
5 Enter the distance from the starting point.
6 If prompted, enter an elevation, grade, or slope.
NOTE The Elevation/Grade/Slope prompt appears only if you've turned on
the Prompt For 3D Data Input option in the Coordinate Geometry Setup
dialog box.
7 To specify another point, when you are prompted for the point, enter
'dd, and then enter the deflection angle and distance from the point you
just specified.
Quick Reference
DD
Specifies a point based on deflection and distance from a given point
Icon
Deflection Distance
Command Line 'DD
Using Deflection and Distance to Specify a Point | 683
Dialog Box Command Line: DD
Using Azimuth and Distance to Specify a Point
When creating an object, such as a line or an arc, you can specify a point by
specifying azimuth and distance from another point. Azimuth is the clockwise
angle from the North (or South) meridian.
Select a staring point (1). Then specify the azimuth angle (2) and the distance from
the starting point (3).
To specify a point using azimuth and distance
1 Start the command you want to use, for example, PLINE or ARC.
2 When you want to specify a point using azimuth and distance, enter 'zd.
3 If you are specifying the first point of an object, specify a starting point
for the measurement. If you are specifying a later point in the object, the
previous point you specified for the object is used as the starting point.
4 Enter the azimuth, which is the clockwise angle from the North (or South)
meridian to the line of the new direction.
Enter the angle using the current angular units setting, decimal values,
such as 45.1111, or surveyor type angles, such as 45d3'55".
5 Enter the distance from the starting point to the new point.
6 If prompted, enter an elevation, grade, or slope.
684 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
NOTE The Elevation/Grade/Slope prompt appears only if you've turned on
the Prompt For 3D Data Input option in the Coordinate Geometry Setup
dialog box.
7 To specify another point, when you are prompted for the point, enter
'zd, and then enter the azimuth and distance from the point you just
specified.
Quick Reference
ZD
Specifies a point based on azimuth and distance from a given point
Icon
Azimuth Distance
Command Line 'ZD
Dialog Box Command Line: ZD
Attribute Data and Object Data
To use attribute data and object data
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Viewing a Data Source
The Data View lets you view and edit external database tables.
See also:
■ Linking Database Records to Objects (page 315)
Attribute Data and Object Data | 685
■ Finding Records in a Database Linked to Drawing Objects (page 785)
To use the Data View
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Overview of Viewing a Data Source
Use the Data View to view and edit external database tables.
The Data View shows records in an attached database table.
Using the Data View, you can sort and filter the records in the table. In
addition, if you open the table in Edit mode, you can edit the data in the
database table.
See also:
■ Linking Database Records to Objects (page 315)
■ Finding Records in a Database Linked to Drawing Objects (page 785)
686 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
To use the Data View to view and edit external database tables.
■ To open a table using the Task Pane (page 691)
■ To edit a database record (page 693)
■ To find a database record in the Data View (page 788)
■ To print a database table (page 931)
Quick Reference
AutoCommit
Automatically saves database changes when the cursor leaves the record
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Auto
Commit
Commit
Manually saves changes when AutoCommit is turned off
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Commit
(Data View) Append
Adds a new, blank record to the bottom of a database table
Menu In the Data View: Records ➤ Append
Icon
Append Record
(Data View) Find
Finds specified text
Menu In the Data View: Edit ➤ Find
(Data View) Format Column
Changes the formatting of cells in a column
Menu In the Data View: Format ➤ Column
Viewing a Data Source | 687
Dialog Box Column dialog box (page 1065)
(Data View) Freeze Column
Freezes the selected column to the left of the Data View window
Menu In the Data View: View ➤ Freeze Column
(Data View) Header and Footer
Specifies header and footer for printing in the Data View
Menu In the Data View: File ➤ Header and Footer
Dialog Box Header/Footer dialog box (page 1073)
(Data View) Format Column
Changes the formatting of cells in a column
Menu In the Data View: Format ➤ Column
Dialog Box Column dialog box (page 1065)
(Data View) Page Setup
Sets the print options for Data View
Menu In the Data View: File ➤ Page Setup
Dialog Box Page Setup dialog box (page 1074)
(Data View) Print
Prints the current view of the database table
Menu In the Data View: File ➤ Print
Icon
(Data View) Sort
Sorts records in ascending or descending order based on the selected column,
or specifies a sort order based on more than one column
Menu In the Data View: View ➤ Sort ➤ Multiple Columns
688 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
(Data View) Undo
Reverses the most recent operation
Menu In the Data View: Edit ➤ Undo
(Data View) Unfreeze All Columns
Unfreezes all columns
Menu In the Data View: View ➤ Unfreeze All Columns
(Data View) Unfreeze All Columns
Unfreezes all columns
Menu In the Data View: View ➤ Unfreeze All Columns
MAPBROWSELINK
Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to edit in the
Data View
Menu Edit ➤ More External Records Options ➤ Edit Linked
Table
Command Line MAPBROWSELINK
Task Pane Double-click a link template
Dialog Box Select Link Template dialog box (page 1077)
MAPBROWSETBL
Opens a database table to edit in the Data View
Menu Edit ➤ More External Records Options ➤ Edit Table
Command Line MAPBROWSETBL
Task Pane Double-click a table
Dialog Box Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL) (page 1078)
MAPOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options
Menu Setup ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Viewing a Data Source | 689
Icon
Options
Command Line MAPOPTIONS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Options
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254)
MAPRUNDBQUERY
Runs a database query and opens a database table displaying the results of
the query in the Data View
Menu Edit ➤ More External Records Options ➤ Execute
Query
Command Line MAPRUNDBQUERY
Task Pane Double-click the database query.
Dialog Box Select Query dialog box (page 1077)
MAPVIEWLINK
Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to view in the
Data View
Menu Edit ➤ More External Records Options ➤ View Linked
Table
Command Line MAPVIEWLINK
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ View
Linked Table
Dialog Box Select Link Template dialog box (page 1077)
MAPVIEWTBL
Opens a database table to view in the Data View
Menu Edit ➤ View Table
Command Line MAPVIEWTBL
Task Pane Right-click a table ➤ View Table
Dialog Box Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL) (page 1078)
690 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Opening a Database Table
The Data View provides two modes for opening tables:
■ View mode: you can change the way the table looks onscreen by formatting
columns, sorting records, or filtering records, and you can create links
between the data and objects in your drawing. You cannot edit the contents
of the database table.
■ Edit mode: in addition to formatting the table onscreen, you can edit the
data in the table and add or delete records.
Database queries or views are always opened in View mode.
To open a table using the Task Pane
■ To view or edit the table, double-click the table in Map Explorer,.
■ To create or edit links to the table, double-click the link template.
■ To run a query, double-click the database query name.
The table opens in either Edit mode or View mode depending on the setting
on the Data Source tab of the Autodesk Map Options dialog box. If the table
is write-protected, it opens in View mode. Queries always open in View mode.
Quick Reference
MAPBROWSELINK
Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to edit in the
Data View
Menu Edit ➤ More External Records Options ➤ Edit Linked
Table
Command Line MAPBROWSELINK
Task Pane Double-click a link template
Dialog Box Select Link Template dialog box (page 1077)
MAPBROWSETBL
Opens a database table to edit in the Data View
Viewing a Data Source | 691
Menu Edit ➤ More External Records Options ➤ Edit Table
Command Line MAPBROWSETBL
Task Pane Double-click a table
Dialog Box Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL) (page 1078)
MAPRUNDBQUERY
Runs a database query and opens a database table displaying the results of
the query in the Data View
Menu Edit ➤ More External Records Options ➤ Execute
Query
Command Line MAPRUNDBQUERY
Task Pane Double-click the database query.
Dialog Box Select Query dialog box (page 1077)
MAPVIEWLINK
Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to view in the
Data View
Menu Edit ➤ More External Records Options ➤ View Linked
Table
Command Line MAPVIEWLINK
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ View
Linked Table
Dialog Box Select Link Template dialog box (page 1077)
MAPVIEWTBL
Opens a database table to view in the Data View
Menu Edit ➤ View Table
Command Line MAPVIEWTBL
Task Pane Right-click a table ➤ View Table
Dialog Box Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL) (page 1078)
692 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Editing a Database
You can edit a table in the Data View as you would any database table. You
can add or delete records, or edit a record's values. You can also search a
particular column for occurrences of a specific value.
To edit the values in the table, you must have the proper user authorizations,
and you must have opened the table in Edit mode.
To use Replace, you must have opened the table in Edit mode and you must
have AutoCommit turned off.
You can add records only to the end of a table. You cannot insert a record
elsewhere in a table.
Undoing an Edit
While you are still in the record, use Undo and Redo to affect the last change
you made to the current record.
WARNING Be careful when deleting records. Undo does not restore a deleted
record. Your data is deleted permanently.
AutoCommit
Autodesk Map 3D automatically saves (commits) your changes to the database
as soon as your cursor leaves the record.
If you do not want edits saved automatically, turn off AutoCommit for this
data source.
When AutoCommit is off, you can manually commit your changes. If you do
not manually commit your changes, Autodesk Map 3D commits the changes
when you close all Data View windows for that data source or disconnect the
data source.
If you turn AutoCommit off, the setting applies to all tables in the selected
data source.
To edit a database record
1 Open a database table in the Data View in Edit mode.
2 Click the data to edit.
3 Type the new value.
Viewing a Data Source | 693
To undo all changes to the current cell, choose Undo from the Edit menu in
the Data View. To undo all changes to a record, before leaving the record,
choose Undo Record.
To paste text from the Windows clipboard into a cell, click in the cell where
you want to paste the text. In the Data View, click Edit menu ➤ Paste.
WARNING You cannot use Undo Record after you move off the record you're
editing.
To turn off AutoCommit
■ In Map Explorer, right-click a data source. Click AutoCommit.
If the command is not on the menu, you may have clicked a single table
or you may have clicked the data sources node. Be sure to right-click a data
source.
To manually save changes when AutoCommit is off
■ In Map Explorer, right-click a data source. Click Commit.
Quick Reference
AutoCommit
Automatically saves database changes when the cursor leaves the record
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Auto
Commit
Commit
Manually saves changes when AutoCommit is turned off
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Commit
(Data View) Append
Adds a new, blank record to the bottom of a database table
Menu In the Data View: Records ➤ Append
Icon
Append Record
694 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
(Data View) Sort
Sorts records in ascending or descending order based on the selected column,
or specifies a sort order based on more than one column
Menu In the Data View: View ➤ Sort ➤ Multiple Columns
(Data View) Undo
Reverses the most recent operation
Menu In the Data View: Edit ➤ Undo
Changing the Look of the Data View
You can make a column narrower to fit better on your screen or widen a
column to display all the text.
You can change the font, color, and alignment of text in the column. You
can also change the width and color of the column borders.
NOTE To preserve your formatting changes, be sure the Save Format And Style
Changes With Drawing option is selected on the Data Source tab of the Autodesk
Map Options dialog box. If this option is not selected, formatting information for
the table is removed from the current drawing when you close the Data View.
When you detach a data source, Autodesk Map 3D erases Data View formatting
information for all tables in that data source.
To change the width of a column
1 Move the cursor to the divider line next to the title of the column.
2 When the cursor becomes the double arrow, click and drag the column
to the desired width.
To change the formatting of cells in a column
1 Click the title of the column to select the column.
2 In the Data View, clickFormat menu ➤ Column.
3 In the Column dialog box (page 1065), select the font, cell colors, text
colors, border, and alignment options you want.
Viewing a Data Source | 695
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Format Column
Changes the formatting of cells in a column
Menu In the Data View: Format ➤ Column
Dialog Box Column dialog box (page 1065)
Freezing and Hiding Data View Columns
You can freeze and hide columns in the Data View.
■ Freeze columns to have the columns remain visible at all times. The selected
columns move and become the left-most columns in the Data View. They
are 'frozen' in that position and do not scroll off the screen. For example,
freeze the parcel owner's name to have it remain onscreen as you scroll
through the rest of the record.
■ Hide columns that you don't want to display or print. The columns remain
part of the database, and you can redisplay them at any time. For example,
hide maintenance comments when you print the table.
To freeze columns in the Data View
1 Open the database table in the Data View.
2 Select one or more columns.
3 In the Data View, clickView menu ➤ Freeze Column.
To release frozen columns, select the columns and click View menu ➤ Unfreeze
All Columns.
To hide columns in the Data View
1 In the Data View, select the column header of the column that you want
to hide.
696 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
2 Right-click the column header. Click Hide.
To redisplay all hidden columns, right-click the grid header in the Data View.
Click Unhide All.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Format Column
Changes the formatting of cells in a column
Menu In the Data View: Format ➤ Column
Dialog Box Column dialog box (page 1065)
(Data View) Format Column
Changes the formatting of cells in a column
Menu In the Data View: Format ➤ Column
Dialog Box Column dialog box (page 1065)
(Data View) Unfreeze All Columns
Unfreezes all columns
Menu In the Data View: View ➤ Unfreeze All Columns
(Data View) Unfreeze All Columns
Unfreezes all columns
Menu In the Data View: View ➤ Unfreeze All Columns
Entering and Editing Object Data
To enter and edit object data
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
Entering and Editing Object Data | 697
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Specifying Object Data for an Object
After you define an object data table, you can associate it with one or more
objects. When you attach object data to an object, Autodesk Map 3D creates
a new record in the selected table and attaches the record to the object. You
can create more than one record for each object, and you can attach records
from more than one table to an object.
You can attach object data in these ways:
■ Attach object data manually to selected objects (page 698) by specifying
the data values for each object.
■ Automatically create and attach object data (page 700) based on existing
block attributes or text.
■ Attach object data as you digitize objects (page 715).
When you attach object data to queried objects, Autodesk Map 3D prompts
you to add the object to the save set.
Before you attach data to objects, create the object data table and execute a
Draw mode query to copy the objects into the current drawing.
To attach data to an object
1 Click Create menu ➤ Attach/Detach Object Data.
2 In the Attach/Detach Object Data dialog box (page 1146), select a table.
3 To change the value for a field in the table, select the data field and type
a new value in the Value box. Press Enter.
4 To overwrite any values for this table already attached to the object, select
Overwrite.
If cleared, the object will have both the old and the new values attached.
5 Click Attach To Objects <.
6 Select the objects.
698 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
NOTE If you are attaching data to a polygon and plan to use the data with
topology functions, be sure to attach the data to the centroid of the polygon.
Topology functions do not use data attached to the polygon border.
A record with the specified values is attached to each selected object.
Quick Reference
ADEATTACHDATA
Attaches object data to objects
Menu Create ➤ Attach/Detach Object Data
Icon
Attach/Detach Object Data
Command Line ADEATTACHDATA
Dialog Box Attach/Detach Object Data dialog box (page 1146)
Specifying Multiple Records for an Object
By adding multiple records to the same object, you can keep track of historical
information related to the object. For example, if you have a table called
PipeMaintenance, with fields called Inspector, InspectionDate, and Condition,
you might attach a record to a pipe object each time the pipe is inspected.
To attach multiple records to an object
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Object Data.
2 Select the object to which you want to add a record.
3 In the Edit Object Data dialog box (page 1147), select the attached table to
which you want to add a record.
4 Click Insert Record.
Record # changes from 1 of 1 to 2 of 2 as Autodesk Map 3D advances to
the newly created record.
5 For each field in the record, update the value as necessary.
Entering and Editing Object Data | 699
Select the field in the object data field list. Enter the new value in the
Value box. Press Enter. Repeat this process for each field in the record.
6 Click OK.
The new record is attached to the selected object.
Quick Reference
ADEEDITDATA
Edits attached object data
Menu Modify ➤ Edit Object Data
Icon
Edit Object Data
Command Line ADEEDITDATA
Dialog Box Edit Object Data dialog box (page 1147)
Automatically Specifying Object Data for Objects
You can automatically attach object data records to objects in a drawing. For
example, you can convert block attribute data to object data and attach it to
objects in one operation.
First, you must create the object data table to use for the new data. Then when
you perform the Generate Links operation, Autodesk Map 3D automatically
records the existing data in the new object data table.
NOTE You cannot create links to objects on layers that are locked, frozen, or
turned off.
NOTE Create the object data table before you begin this procedure.
To automatically attach data to objects
1 Click Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Generate Links.
700 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
2 In the Generate Data Links dialog box (page 1182), select a linkage type:
■ Blocks — Create links from block attribute data. The records are
attached to the blocks themselves.
■ Text — Create links from text. The records are attached to the text
objects.
■ Enclosed Blocks — Create links from block attribute data. The records
are attached to the polyline that encloses the block. Blocks that are
not enclosed by a polyline are not linked.
■ Enclosed Text — Create links from text that lies within a closed
polyline. The records are attached to the closed polyline that encloses
the text. Text that is not enclosed by a polyline is not linked.
3 Under Data Links, select Create Object Data Records.
4 Select a table.
If you are creating links for enclosed text, select a table that has only one
field.
5 If you are creating links for blocks or enclosed blocks, select the name of
the block.
6 Click OK.
7 Enter s to select blocks or text objects, or enter a to use all blocks with
the specified name or all text objects.
Quick Reference
ADEGENLINK
Automatically links objects to object data or external database records
Menu Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Generate
Links
Command Line ADEGENLINK
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link template
➤ Generate Links
Dialog Box Generate Data Links dialog box (page 1182)
Entering and Editing Object Data | 701
Displaying and Editing Object Data for an Object
After you attach object data to an object, you can edit the object data record
or delete a record from an object. You must have Edit Drawing privilege to
edit object data.
For information on changing user privileges, see Setting Up Users and Assigning
Rights (page 70).
To display and edit data for an object
1 Select the object in your drawing.
TIP If the drawing contains more than one object in the same location, press
Ctrl while you select the object. This turns on the Autodesk Map 3D cycle
feature, which allows you to select each object at that location, one by one,
as you click. Click until you select the object you want. Press Enter.
2 If the Properties palette is not open, right-click the object. Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, scroll to view the object data information.
4 To edit data, click the data to change and enter the new data.
NOTE If the object is a member of an object class, select the Object Class
tab in the Properties palette and see if the object data is listed on that tab. If
it is, edit the data using the Object Class tab. This tab checks the values you
enter to make sure they meet the standards set for the object class.
To delete object data from an object
1 Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Object Data.
2 Select the object in your drawing.
3 To delete the current record from the selected object, click Delete Record.
4 If the object has more than one record from the selected table, click Next
or Last to view a different record. If the object has records attached from
more than one table, select a table from the Table list to view object data
from that table. To delete object data for a different object, click Select
Object and select the object.
702 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
ADEEDITDATA
Edits attached object data
Menu Modify ➤ Edit Object Data
Icon
Edit Object Data
Command Line ADEEDITDATA
Dialog Box Edit Object Data dialog box (page 1147)
Converting Object Data to a Linked Database
Table
Object data is an efficient method for storing smaller amounts of attribute
data that you want to associate with objects in a drawing, but external
databases store larger amounts of data more efficiently, and allow for more
complex queries.
With Autodesk Map 3D, you can convert object data into a linked database
table that has the same data structure as the object data table. For each object
containing object data in the specified table, Autodesk Map 3D does the
following:
■ Reads the object data
■ Creates a new record in the external database table
■ Attaches link data to the object that links the object to the record
When Autodesk Map 3D converts the data, it creates a new table in an existing
data source. It also creates a link template for the new table. In the link
template, you can choose to use an existing field as the key field, or you can
have Autodesk Map 3D create a new field and assign a unique value to each
record.
Entering and Editing Object Data | 703
Field Names in the New Table
By default, the fields in the new database table have the same names as the
fields in the object data table. Autodesk Map 3D resolves any conflicts in the
following ways:
■ Truncates fields that are too long and adds an incremental digit to the
resulting duplicate field names
■ Replaces unsupported characters in a field name with an underscore (_)
■ Converts unsupported field types to character
■ Converts point fields to a character string and separates coordinates with
commas
This procedure creates a new table in an existing data source. Make sure the
appropriate data source is attached.
NOTE During the conversion, field names in the object data table become field
names in the database table. Make sure that the field names in your object data
table are not SQL reserved words such as DATE, SELECT, or CURRENT. If necessary,
you should rename the fields in your object data table before you convert it.
To convert object data to a linked database table
1 Click Setup menu ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
2 In the Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box (page 1068), under
Source Object Data Table, select an object data table.
3 Select Remove Data From Objects Processed to delete the object data after
creating the link.
4 Under Target Link Template, click Define to specify the link template.
5 In the Define Link Template dialog box, select an available data source.
Click Connect.
6 Enter a table name.
7 Specify the fields to use as key fields (columns). To enter more than one
field name, separate names with a comma.
To select from a list of field names in the object data table, or to rename
the fields, click Select to display the Select Link Template Key(s) dialog
box.
704 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
You can use an existing object data field as the key column or create a
new field. If you select Generate Key Field, specify a name for the field
in the Generate Key area. Autodesk Map 3D sets the first record in the
database table to 1, and increments each subsequent record by 1. Click
OK to close the Select Link Template Key(s) dialog box.
8 In the Define Link Template dialog box, enter a name for the link template
and click OK.
The link template stores the address of the database table and the name
of the key field. Accept the default or enter a new unique name.
9 In the Convert Object Data To Database Links dialog box, specify how
to select objects with attached object data.
You can select objects automatically or manually, and you can use a filter
to restrict selection to specified layers.
10 Click Proceed.
Autodesk Map 3D converts the object data into linked database tables.
Quick Reference
MAPOD2ASE
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Menu Setup ➤ Convert Object Data To Database Links
Command Line MAPOD2ASE
Dialog Box Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box
(page 1068)
Digitizing Objects
To attach attribute data to objects as you digitize them, use the MAPDIGITIZE
command.
See also:
■ Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 706)
■ Setting Up for Digitizing (page 109)
Digitizing Objects | 705
■ Cleaning Up Maps (page 478)
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats (page 332)
To digitize objects
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data
■ Working with Features
■ Working with Drawing Objects
■ Entering Coordinate Geometry
■ Attribute Data and Object Data
■ Digitizing Objects
Overview of Digitizing Maps
Digitizing is the process of converting paper-based graphical information into
a digital format. When you digitize a map, you use drawing commands to
trace data from the paper map into a DWG file.
706 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Overview of Digitizing Maps | 707
Planning for Digitizing
Before you begin to digitize, consider the following:
■ Suitability of source maps
■ Global coordinate system
■ Tiling maps
■ Layer organization
■ Data storage: internal or external
708 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
■ Representation of node, network, and polygon topologies
If possible, plan on completing all digitizing for one map in one session because
the map media may distort over time.
Digitizing Linear Objects
Linear objects are objects such as lines, arcs, and polylines.
■ If you plan to use topography later to generate 3D views from digital terrain
models, place linear objects at the elevations (Z- values) they represent.
■ If you use the SKETCH command to trace an irregular line, make sure the
variable SKETCHINC is set to a reasonable value, because each line segment
ends at the interval set by SKETCHINC. The SKETCH command can create
huge files for one small line when SKETCHINC is set to a small value.
■ When digitizing irregular curves with PLINE or MAPDIGITIZE (page 714),
the spacing of the selected vertex points should depend on the curvature
of the line. Straighter segments require fewer points.
Examples of digitized curves
■ However accurately you work, you lose data when you digitize a curve.
You need to digitize more points when you create sharp curves to ensure
that the line is as accurate as possible; however, while you reduce the data
loss, you increase file size and complexity. If you know the parameters
used to define a regular curve, such as the radius or length, use the Arc
option of the PLINE and MAPDIGITIZE (page 714) commands for digitizing.
Irregular lines, such as topography contours, should be continuous
polylines. They can be smoothed with the Fit option of PEDIT if necessary.
Set the PLINEGEN system variable to 1 (on) before digitizing, so that any
dashed linetypes are evaluated correctly.
Overview of Digitizing Maps | 709
■ When you finish digitizing a segment, mark it on the paper map so you
do not repeat the digitizing. Double digitizing increases file size.
Digitizing Topology
When digitizing data that will be used to create a topology, follow these
principles to achieve the most accurate results.
■ Boundaries (or other polylines) should be completed with the Near,
Intersection, or Endpoint object snaps to ensure that closed areas such as
parcels, buildings, and water bodies are in fact complete polygons.
■ Line segments should be snapped to existing end points where they
intersect.
■ When you are digitizing data for network topology, do not duplicate
objects. For example, do not double-digitize boundary lines separating
adjacent polygons. It's better to digitize adjacent polygons on the same
layer with common lines defining common boundaries. If one edge serves
two or more purposes, digitize the line once, then use the COPY and
CHPROP commands to put a duplicate line on a different layer.
After you digitize the linear elements that form the basis of the topology, you
should clean up any problems (page 477)before you create the topology.
Digitizing Control Data Points and Monuments
When you are trying to match digitized maps with existing digital maps, you
can use some known-to-be-accurate points common to both maps.
■ Control Data Points — A system of geodetic control points covers the
entire United States. The latitude and longitude, and often elevation, are
established for these points. Similar systems exist for other countries, such
as Bench Marks and Trigonometry Points throughout the United Kingdom.
■ Monuments — If you are working with maps for a city or county, points
used for establishing locations for all maps probably already exist: these
points can include features such as public buildings, hill summits, and
parts of highways.
710 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
When you are digitizing a map, use the following procedures to establish
known control points:
■ Create a layer called REFERENCE. On it, digitize at least four points
corresponding to real-world coordinates such as the coordinate intersections
of latitude and longitude lines. These points should either appear at the
corners of your map sheet or surround the map features to be digitized.
Be careful to note on the drawing the location of these reference points
and their real-world coordinates. Use these points to register the map with
the TABLET command, as described in Registering the Map (page 111).
■ To ensure accuracy, you can also digitize other points such as control
points and monument locations that have known positions. Digitizing
more control points is important for Matching Map Edges (page 627) or
Rubber Sheeting Two Maps (page 612) operations.
Placing Annotation
While you are digitizing, you can add text to indicate nodes or important
locations on a map. Use the STYLE command to define a text style that uses
a simple font, such as isocp.shx, with a fixed text height so that you do not
have to enter a text height each time you enter text. You can modify the text
style and height when you finish digitizing.
Use the TEXT command to enter text as you digitize. Text should be single-line
entries on the same layer as the feature it describes. If required, enter complex
or lengthy text with the MTEXT command after you finish digitizing. For
more information, look up "text" in the Help index.
Try to avoid overlaying the insertion point of the text and end points of the
objects you are annotating.
See also:
■ Setting Up for Digitizing (page 109)
■ Digitizing Objects (page 705)
To digitize a map
1 .
2 .
Overview of Digitizing Maps | 711
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Menu Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options
Command Line OPTIONS
Task Pane Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
MAPDIGISETUP
Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects
Menu None Setup
Command Line MAPDIGISETUP
Dialog Box Digitize Setup dialog box (page 1017)
MAPDIGITIZE
Digitizes nodes and linear objects with settings from mapdigisetup
Command Line MAPDIGITIZE
Dialog Box MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command) (page 1016)
Overview of Digitizing Objects
To digitize objects, use one of the following methods:
■ To attach attribute data as you digitize objects, use the MAPDIGITIZE
command. You can also specify the label point, layer, block or linetype,
rotation and scale, 2D or 3D, and snap options.
■ To digitize objects without attaching attribute data or specifying other
settings as you digitize, use the drawing commands.
Digitizing Using the MAPDIGITIZE Command
Use the MAPDIGITIZE command if you want to use the special options it
provides, such as attaching object data as you digitize.
712 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
NOTE Before you begin digitizing, be sure you have configured the digitizer,
registered the map, and set the digitizing specifications. See Setting Up for
Digitizing (page 109).
For detailed information on digitizing linear objects, topologies, and control
points, or on placing annotations, see Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 706).
Digitizing Using Drawing Commands
You can also digitize using drawing commands. However, you should avoid
commands such as CIRCLE, RECTANGLE, and 3DFACE. Instead, use ARC,
LINE, and PLINE to represent map features in the simplest possible forms.
This usage simplifies map cleanup.
See also:
■ Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 706)
■ Setting Up for Digitizing (page 109)
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats (page 332)
NOTE Before you begin digitizing, be sure you have configured your digitizer
(page 110) and registered your map (page 113).
To digitize the objects
1 Check that TABLET is enabled in the status line. If not, double-click
TABLET to enable Tablet mode.
2 To use the MAPDIGITIZE command, .
3 Digitize lines by starting the LINE, PLINE, or MAPDIGITIZE (page 714)
command as appropriate.
Press F12 to access menus and dialog boxes in the floating screen area
you defined.
4 Continue to add lines and arc segments until you are done. Press Enter.
When you finish digitizing, use Cleaning Up Maps (page 478)to clean the
linework and fix errors.
Overview of Digitizing Objects | 713
Quick Reference
MAPDIGITIZE
Digitizes nodes and linear objects with settings from mapdigisetup
Command Line MAPDIGITIZE
Dialog Box MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command) (page 1016)
Digitizing Using MAPDIGITIZE
Use the MAPDIGITIZE command if you want to use the special options it
provides, such as attaching object data or external data as you digitize.
NOTE Before you begin digitizing, be sure you have configured the digitizer,
registered the map, and set the digitizing specifications. See Setting Up for
Digitizing (page 109).
Pressing F12 allows access to the menus and any dialog boxes in the floating
screen area you defined.
See also:
■ Attaching Object Data As You Digitize (page 715)
■ Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize (page 717)
Before you use the MAPDIGITIZE command, set the digitizing specifications
(page 116).
To digitize links and nodes
1 On the command line, enter MAPDIGITIZE. Press Enter.
2 Specify the first point or polyline to digitize.
3 If you selected Attach Data in the Digitize Setup dialog box, enter object
data for the new object.
4 If you selected Prompt For Label Point in the Digitize Setup dialog box,
specify a label point for the new object.
5 If you selected Prompt For Rotation, enter the rotation in degrees for the
node block. If you selected Prompt For Scale, enter the change in scale.
714 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
For example, enter 90 to rotate the block 90 degrees. Enter 2 to double
the size of the block.
6 Continue to specify points or polylines.
Data created by digitizing is not complete until you have cleaned up and
verified the data. See Cleaning Up Maps (page 478).
Quick Reference
MAPDIGITIZE
Digitizes nodes and linear objects with settings from mapdigisetup
Command Line MAPDIGITIZE
Dialog Box MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command) (page 1016)
Attaching Object Data As You Digitize
You can attach object data to nodes and links (linear objects) as you digitize
them. You can specify one object data table for nodes and another for links.
See also:
■ Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize (page 717)
■ Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 706)
Before you set up for digitizing, the object data table must already exist. See
Creating an Object Data Table (page 157).
To attach object data as you digitize
1 On the command line, enter MAPDIGISETUP. Press Enter.
2 Under Object Type, select the object type to digitize.
3 Select Attach Data. Click Data To Attach.
4 In the Data To Attach dialog box, select the object data table to use. Click
OK.
Attaching Object Data As You Digitize | 715
5 For information on completing the other options in the Digitize Setup
dialog box, see To set digitizing specifications (page 116).
6 Click OK.
7 On the command line, enter MAPDIGITIZE to begin digitizing.
As you digitize each object, Autodesk Map 3D prompts you to enter object
data values for each field in the selected object data table.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Menu Setup ➤ Define Object Data
Icon
Define Object Data
Command Line ADEDEFDATA
Dialog Box Define Object Data dialog box (page 1181)
MAPDIGISETUP
Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects
Menu None Setup
Command Line MAPDIGISETUP
Dialog Box Digitize Setup dialog box (page 1017)
MAPDIGITIZE
Digitizes nodes and linear objects with settings from mapdigisetup
Command Line MAPDIGITIZE
Dialog Box MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command) (page 1016)
716 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize
You can attach data in an external database to objects as you digitize. You can
select one link template for nodes and another for links (linear objects). Before
you begin this process, be sure the link templates already exist.
Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize | 717
See also:
■ Attaching Object Data As You Digitize (page 715)
■ Overview of Digitizing Maps (page 706)
To link database records as you digitize
1 On the command line, enter MAPDIGISETUP. Press Enter.
2 Under Object Type, select the object type to digitize.
3 Select Attach Data. Click Data To Attach.
4 In the Data to Attach dialog box (page 1017), under Object Data Type, select
Database Link.
5 For Link Template, select the link template to use.
6 Specify a Record Validation method. Click OK.
7 For information on completing the other options in the Digitize Setup
dialog box, see To set digitizing specifications (page 116).
8 Click OK.
9 On the command line, enter MAPDIGITIZE to begin digitizing.
Autodesk Map 3D prompts you for a key value for each object. The database
validation option you select here determines what happens as you enter a
value for each digitized object:
■ Validate —Autodesk Map 3D checks whether the value you enter exists in
the database table. If the value exists, the link data is attached to the object;
if the value does not exist, Autodesk Map 3D requests a new value. Use
this option to link each object to an existing record in the table.
■ Validate and Create —Autodesk Map 3D checks whether the value you
enter exists in the database table. If the value exists, the link data is attached
to the object; if the value does not exist, Autodesk Map 3D creates a new
record in the database table with this value in the key column and attaches
the link data to the object. Use the Link Template Data Entry dialog box
to enter values for the other columns in the new record.
■ No Validation —Autodesk Map 3D attaches the link data to the object
without checking that the value exists in the table. Use this option if you
do not have a corresponding database record and do not want to create
one at this time.
718 | Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
MAPDEFINELT
Defines a link template for a database table
Menu Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Define Link
Template -or- In the Data View: Links ➤ Define Link
Template
Icon
Define Link Template
Command Line MAPDEFINELT
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a data source table or
query ➤ Define Link Template
Dialog Box Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT)
(page 1071)
MAPDIGISETUP
Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects
Menu None Setup
Command Line MAPDIGISETUP
Dialog Box Digitize Setup dialog box (page 1017)
MAPDIGITIZE
Digitizes nodes and linear objects with settings from mapdigisetup
Command Line MAPDIGITIZE
Dialog Box MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command) (page 1016)
Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize | 719
Analyzing Data
8
With Autodesk Map 3D, you can analyze your map data to In this chapter
help you make decisions, answer questions, and reveal patterns. ■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About
Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking
Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
721
Overview of Analyzing Data
Autodesk Map 3D provides several powerful analysis tools that help you turn
your raw map data into useful information—information that can help you
answer questions, support decisons, test hypotheses, and reveal patterns that
may not be immediately obvious.
For example, with Autodesk Map 3D’s tools, you can:
■ Drill down and get detailed information about features and objects (page
722) you want to focus on
■ Take real-world measurements (page 728) based on coodinate geometry
■ Transform map data using themes (page 738) to highlight data distribution
and patterns
■ Theme raster images to analyze surface slope, aspect, and elevation (page
771)
■ Drape 2D data onto 3D surfaces (page 762) and then view it in 3D for more
real-world analyis - even do walk throughs and record animations
■ Add contour lines (page 759) to help you analyze terrain
■ Find, search, filter and query data (page 775) so that you can focus on just
the data you need
■ Analyze spatial relationships between drawing objects (page 854) using
topology
For workflows related to analyzing data, see Worflows for Styling and Analyzing
Data. (page 62)
Getting Information About Features and Objects
In a typical map, there are two basic types of data: feature source data you
access by connecting to an external provider, and attribute data you store in
a common spreadsheet application. In Autodesk Map 3D you can view and
edit attribute or object class data by using the Properties palette or the Display
Manager. Using the new Data Grid, you can view and edit all the feature source
data included in your map.
722 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To get information about features and objects
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Getting Information about Features
To get information about features
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Overview of the Data Grid
With a wide variety of providers to choose from, you can use the new Data
Grid to access, view and edit feature source and object data contained in
multiple layers in a single window. You can isolate layers of data, sort, zoom
to and edit data directly while connected to a “live” feature source, or view,
attach and edit object data by linking to a spreadsheet application. No matter
which source you are connected to, the Data Grid displays all the data you
are working with.
Connecting To and Accessing Your Data
Before you can access the Data Grid, you must connect to a feature source
and add the data you want to view or edit to a map. For more information on
connecting to a feature source, see Accessing Geospatial Features (page 222).
Getting Information about Features | 723
To access the Data Grid
1 After you have connected to your data source, in the Display Manager
task pane, click .
2 The Data Grid window opens showing all the feature class, attribute data
and database table information contained in your map.
You can either leave the window floating or dock it on the left or right
of your application window by right-clicking the Data Grid title bar and
selecting Allow Docking.
For more detailed information on specific areas of the Data Grid, see the
Data Grid Dialog Box (page 1011)
Quick Reference
MAPDATAGRID
Allows you to view, edit and filter feature data
Menu Edit ➤ Data Grid
Icon
Grid
Command Line MAPDATAGRID
Task Pane In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Grid
button
Dialog Box Data Grid Dialog Box (page 1011)
Viewing Data for a Selected Feature Class or Data
Table
You can use the Data Grid to view data for selected feature classes or data
tables.
724 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To view data for a selected feature class
1 Select the layer in Display Manager that contains the feature class data
you want to view.
2 Click on the toolstrip to open the Data Grid window.
3 Select the row or rows of data you would like to view in your map.
Specific areas of your map are highlighted based on the data you select.
For additional ways to view feature source data in your map, see
Highlighting Data Grid Rows Using the Map (page 726) and Zooming to
a View Using the Data Grid (page 726).
To view table data
1 Click to open the Data Grid window.
2 From the Data drop-down list, select the (FS) data source.
Note that selecting the (FS) feature source displays all records, including
any that are not associated with feature attributes. The selection and
highlighting options are not available when viewing this table.
Highlighting Features Using the Data Grid
If your map contains several types of data (rivers and roads), you can isolate
the data in the Data Grid and that data is automatically highlighted in your
map.
To highlight features
1 In Display Manager, select the layer containing the feature set you want
to view.
2 Click to open the Data Grid window.
Getting Information about Features | 725
3 Select a row or rows of data and the corresponding features are highlighted
in your map.
To remove highlighting
1 From the Options drop-down list, choose Select None.
The highlighting will be removed from your Data Grid and your map.
Highlighting Data Grid Rows Using the Map
You can select features in your map and the corresponding rows of data are
highlighted.
To highlight rows of data
1 Make sure the automatic scroll feature is turned on by selecting
in the Data Grid.
2 Select any area or feature in your map.
The Data Grid scrolls and highlights the corresponding rows of data.
Zooming to a View Using the Data Grid
You can select rows of data in the Data Grid to zoom in directly to data in
your map.
To zoom to a view
1 Make sure the automatic zoom feature is turned on by selecting
in the Data Grid.
2 In the Data Grid, select the rows of data you want to view.
3 From the Options drop-down list, select Zoom To.
Your map zooms to the corresponding data.
726 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
4 Deselect the Zoom To button.
Your map returns to its original state.
Exporting and Printing Data from the Data Grid
You can export the data in the Data Grid to a .csv (comma separated text file)
that can be opened in most spreadsheet applications.
To export and print from the Data Grid
1 From the Options drop-down list in the Data Grid, you choose Select All,
or select the rows of data you want to export.
2 From the Options drop-down list, select Export.
3 Save the .csv file to the specified name and folder.
For more information, see Exporting and Printing Attribute Data (page 929).
Getting Information About Drawing Objects
Drawing objects are associated with different kinds of attribute data. You can
view and edit the properties and attributes contained in your map as well as
data contained in common spreadsheet application databases.
To get information about drawing objects
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Getting Information About Drawing Objects | 727
Viewing Properties and Attributes of Drawing
Objects
You can view properties and attributes of drawing data by using the Display
Manager.
To view properties and attributes in a drawing
1 In the Display Manager task pane, click the Tools icon and select Map
Properties.
The Properties palette opens showing all the information contained in
the object data of your map.
For more information, see Editing Object Class Data (page 673)
Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects
You can view the external data contained in your map by linking to an external
database, usually a common spreadsheet application.
To view external data linked to drawing objects
1 Open Explorer and drag and drop the database you want to view to the
Map Explorer task pane.
2 In the Map Explorer task pane, expand Link Templates and right-click
View Data.
The Data View window opens showing all the attribute data associated
with your map.
For more information on linking to an external database, see Overview of
Linking Database Records to Objects (page 316).
Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
Once you have assigned coordinate systems to your map, you can locate
specific coordinate points and measure the geodetic distance between points.
For example, you can determine the coordinates of a manhole or the centerline
of a new road.
728 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
For drawing objects in your map, there are additional coordinate geometry
commands you can use to get accurate geometric information about the
objects.
In addition, you can use AutoCAD commands, such as DIST, AREA,
PROPERTIES, and PERIMETER, to obtain information about drawing objects,
which can help you do useful calculations. For more information, refer to the
AutoCAD Help.
To measure and track coordinates
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Tracking Coordinates
As you move the cursor around in a drawing window, you can display the
cursor location in the coordinate system you choose.
For example, if your attached drawing uses one coordinate system and your
current drawing uses another, you can track the source drawing's coordinates
as you move the cursor around in the current drawing.
Track Coordinates pane
To track coordinates
1 In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤ Track Coordinates.
2 The Track Coordinates pane appears.
3 Click Select Coordinate System.
Tracking Coordinates | 729
4 In the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box, choose the coordinate
system to track.
5 Click OK.
The Track Coordinates pane displays the code and description of the
coordinate system.
6 To change the format of the displayed coordinates, right-click in the
Track Coordinates pane. Click Format Lat/Longs As D,M,S.
As you move the cursor over the drawing window, the X and Y text boxes
update the cursor's coordinates in the selected coordinate system.
Tips
■ If the X and Y text boxes remain empty as you move the cursor in the
drawing window, either there is no coordinate system assigned to the
current drawing or the cursor is in a region of the window that is not valid
for the specified coordinate system. You cannot track coordinates in layout
space.
■ To track coordinates using the coordinate system of a specific attached
drawing, in Map Explorer, right-click the attached drawing ➤ Click Track
Drawing's Coordinates. The tracker pane opens, preset to the specified
attached drawing's coordinate system. If Track Drawing's Coordinates is
not available, there is no coordinate system assigned to the attached
drawing.
Quick Reference
MAPTRACKCS
Tracks the coordinates of the cursor in any coordinate system
Menu Analyze ➤ Track Coordinates
Icon
Track Coordinates
Command Line MAPTRACKCS
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Track
Coordinates
730 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Measuring Geodetic Distance
You can measure the geodetic distance between points in your map. Geodetic
distance is different from simple straight line distance in that it takes into
account the curvature of the Earth.
So, the geodetic distance between any two points is longer than the straight
line distance between the same two points.
Measure geodetic distance between points in your map
To measure geodetic distance
1 Click Analyze menu ➤ Geodetic Distance.
2 At the prompt, specify the starting point by clicking in the map or typing
the coordinates of the point.
3 At the second prompt, specify the end point by clicking in the map or
typing the coordinates of the point.
The results of the calculation are displayed on the command line. If you
don’t see the command line, press Ctrl + 9 to display it.
Notes
■ If the map file does not have an assigned coordinate system, the result is
a simple straight line distance calculation.
■ For information about changing the units in which the distance is
displayed, see Tracking Coordinates (page 729).
Measuring Geodetic Distance | 731
Quick Reference
MAPDIST
Measures the geodetic distance between points
Menu Analyze ➤ Geodetic Distance
Icon
Geodetic Distance
Command Line MAPDIST
Dialog Box MAPDIST (page 1008)
Measuring Coordinate Geometry
Use the inquiry commands to extract geometric information from drawing
objects such as lines, curves, closed polylines, and polygons. This information
is useful if you want to verify the accuracy of your data, or if you want to send
the data to the field.
Note that the inquiry commands are specific to drawing objects. They don’t
work on features.
For information about setting Coordinate Geometry options, see Setting
Coordinate Geometry Options (page 181)
NOTE The COGO inquiry commands use the World Coordinate System (WCS)
and ignore current User Coordinate System (UCS) settings. Therefore, north is
always considered to point along the WCS positive Y axis, and inquiry results are
reported in WCS coordinates.
To measure coordinate geometry
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
732 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Adding Distances
You can calculate the total of several disjunct distances by selecting points in
your map, entering distances on the command line, or selecting numeric text,
such as measurements, in your map.
You can perform this operation only on drawing objects.
You are prompted to enter a number, specify a distance, or select text. Select
all the distances you want to add. You can select numeric text in your drawing,
click the start and end points of the distance you want to measure, or enter
the number directly on the command line. When you press Enter, Autodesk
Map 3D displays the total of all the distances.
Note that this command is specific to drawing objects. It does not work on
features.
To add distances
1 Click Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Add Distances.
2 Specify the first distance by doing one of the following:
■ Enter the distance on the command line.
■ Select two locations in the map.
■ Enter s. Select numeric text in the map, such as a measurement.
3 Enter as many additional distances as you want.
4 When you finish selecting distances, press Enter to view the total of the
distances.
The results of the calculation are displayed on the command line. If you
don’t see the command line, press Ctrl + 9 to display it.
Measuring Coordinate Geometry | 733
Quick Reference
MAPCGADIST
Adds the distances between points
Menu Analyze ➤ Inquiry ➤ Add Distances
Icon
Add Distances
Command Line MAPCGADIST
Displaying Continuous Distance
You can add and display the distance between one point and a number of
other points, or between a series of points. in a drawing.
You can perform this operation only on drawing objects.
The Base option measures the distance from The Continuous option measures the dis-
the starting point to each of the points you tance from the starting point to the next
select, like the spokes of a wheel. point and from that point to the next point,
in a continuous line.
Note that this command is specific to drawing objects. It does not work on
features.
TIP To add distances that are not continuous, see Adding Distances (page 733).
734 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To display the distance between points
1 Click Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Continuous Distance.
2 Select Base or Continuous.
■ Base: Always measures the distance from the first point you select to
each of the additional points you select.
■ Continuous: Measures the distance from one point to the next.
3 Select two points to display the distance between the points.
4 Select another point. If you selected Base, Autodesk Map 3D displays the
distance from first (or base) point to the new point. If you selected
Continuous, Autodesk Map 3D displays the distance from the last point
to the new point.
5 When you finish selecting points, press Enter to view the total of the
distances.
The results of the calculation are displayed on the command line. If you
don’t see the command line, press Ctrl + 9 to display it.
Quick Reference
MAPCGCDIST
Displays the distance between points
Menu Analyze ➤ Inquiry ➤ Continuous Distance
Icon
Continuous Distance
Command Line MAPCGCDIST
Displaying Angle Information
You can display the acute and obtuse angle between points or intersecting
lines in a drawing.
You can perform this operation only on drawing objects.
Measuring Coordinate Geometry | 735
To display angle information
1 Click Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Angle Information.
2 Select two lines, or enter p to specify points.
3 If you entered p, specify a starting point, a vertex, and an ending point.
The results of the calculation are displayed on the command line. If you
don’t see the command line, press Ctrl + 9 to display it.
Quick Reference
MAPCGANG
Displays the angle between lines or points
Menu Analyze ➤ Inquiry ➤ Angle Information
Icon
Angle Information
Command Line MAPCGANG
Displaying COGO Information for Lines and Arcs
You can display coordinate geometry for lines and arcs. This information
includes line and curve details, area, and coordinates.
You can perform this operation only on drawing objects.
To display COGO information for lines and arcs
1 Click Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Line and Arc Information.
2 Select the line or arc, or enter p to specify the points for a line.
3 If you entered p, specify a starting point and an ending point for the line.
The results of the calculation are displayed on the command line. If you
don’t see the command line, press Ctrl + 9 to display it.
736 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Quick Reference
MAPCGLIST
Displays coordinate geometry information for lines and arcs
Menu Analyze ➤ Inquiry ➤ Line and Arc Information
Icon
Line and Arc Information
Command Line MAPCGLIST
Displaying Slope
You can display the slope, grade, and horizontal distance between two points.
You can perform this operation only on drawing objects.
To display the slope between two points
1 Click Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ List Slope.
2 Select a line or an arc, or enter p to specify points.
3 If you entered p, specify a starting point and an ending point for the line.
The results of the calculation are displayed on the command line. If you
don’t see the command line, press Ctrl + 9 to display it.
Quick Reference
MAPCGSLIST
Displays the slope between points
Menu Analyze ➤ Inquiry ➤ List Slope
Icon
List Slope
Command Line MAPCGSLIST
Measuring Coordinate Geometry | 737
Creating Themes
With Autodesk Map 3D, you can create special kinds of styles called themes
that are used to vary the display of your data based on properties or attributes
of the data. For example, instead of just styling the lakes so they are all blue,
you can create a theme to vary the shade of blue based on the depth of the
lake.
You can create themes for the following type of layers:
■ Feature layers – Map layers from feature sources such as SDF or Oracle that
have been added using Data Connect.
■ Surface layers – Raster-based surfaces, such Digital Elevation Models (DEMs),
ESRI Grid files, and Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED) that have been
added using Data Connect.
■ Drawing layers – Map layers containing drawing objects from DWG files.
The methods for theming each type of layer are different, so it is important
to know what type of layer you are working with.
This section of the documentation describes how to theme feature layers and
drawing layers. For information about theming raster-based surfaces, see
Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect (page 771).
To create themes
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Overview of Creating Themes
A theme is a special kind of style that allows you to vary the display of your
data based on properties or attributes of the data, for example area, length,
pavement type, assessed value, temperature, or land use.
You can use themes to change colors, line types, symbols, text, or other
properties that can help you present map information and tell a story. Themes
738 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
can help make information more visible, illustrate how data is distributed,
make data easier to analyze and interpret, and reveal patterns.
For example, you can use darker colors for areas with more rainfall, a larger
dot to display cities with a larger population, or a wider line to draw roads
with high traffic volume.
A theme showing counties by area
You can create themes for the following type of layers:
■ Feature layers – Map layers from feature sources such as SDF or Oracle that
have been added using Data Connect.
■ Surface layers – Raster-based surfaces, such Digital Elevation Models (DEMs),
ESRI Grid files, and Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED) that have been
added using Data Connect.
■ Drawing layers – Map layers containing drawing objects from DWG files.
The methods for theming each type of layer are different, so it is important
to know what type of layer you are working with.
Regardless of the layer type, you can theme on specific values or a range of
values. For example, an agricultural theme might show different crops in
different colors. Each crop is a specific value. Temperature, however, can be
any number along a continuum. When you display this type of data, you
define ranges for the values. For example, you could divide temperature values
into three ranges: below 30, 30 to 60, and over 60.
Overview of Creating Themes | 739
You can add labels to a theme to label features or drawing objects. You can
also add a legend that lists the theme’s conditions and explains the colors,
symbols, line patterns, shadings and annotation used.
See also:
■ Workflows for Styling and Analyzing Data (page 62)
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data (page 436)
■ Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect (page 771)
■ Adding Labels to Features (page 407)
■ Adding a Legend (page 430)
■ Defining Scale Thresholds for Drawing Layers (page 424)
Theming Features
To theme features
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Creating Themes for Feature Layers
You can create a theme for feature layers, that is, layers from feature sources
such as SDF, SHP, Oracle Spatial, or ArcSDE. For more information, see
Accessing Geospatial Features (page 222).
You can vary the display of features on the feature layer based on properties
or attributes associated with the features.
For example, a typical theme for a point layer might display retail store
locations with a different symbol for each type of store, or a polygon layer
theme might display each land use classification with a different color or
shading.
740 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
A theme showing parcels by area
A theme for a feature layer consists of a collection of rules. Each rule specifies
a style and feature label for the features that meet the specified condition.
You can add a legend label to provide a description of a rule’s condition. As
a layer is drawn, each feature is compared to the rules in the order that they
are listed. The first rule for which the feature meets the condition is used to
specify the style and feature label for that feature. A default or empty condition
applies to all features and defines the style for features that do not meet any
of the preceding rules. A well-constructed theme contains only one default
rule and it is last in the list.
Create rules manually or use the theming tool to automate theming based on
a range of conditions. For more information, see Creating Themes
Automatically for Feature Layers (page 743).
See also:
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data (page 436)
■ Adding Labels to Features (page 407)
■ Adding a Legend (page 430)
■ Defining Scale Thresholds for Drawing Layers (page 424)
■ Creating Themes for Drawing Layers (page 749)
■ Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect (page 771)
Theming Features | 741
To create a theme for a feature layer
1 In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer. Click Edit Display Style.
For information about creating a new feature layer, see Accessing
Geospatial Features (page 222).
2 In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to theme.
For more information about scale ranges, see Defining Scale Thresholds
for Drawing Layers (page 424).
3 In the scale range style area, click the Condition grid cell.
4 Use the Filter dialog box Filter dialog box (page 1028) to specify the subset
of features to theme. Click OK.
5 In the scale range style area, click the Style grid cell.
The Style Point, Style Line, or Style Area dialog box is displayed depending
on the type of data associated with the layer.
6 Create point, line, and area styles for the theme.
For more information about defining styles, see Styling Point Features
(page 403), Styling Line Features (page 405), and Styling Polygons (page
406).
7 To add labels to features in the theme, in the scale range style area, click
the Feature Label grid cell.
For more information about creating feature labels, see Adding Labels to
Features (page 407).
8 To label the theme in the legend, enter the text in the Legend Label grid
cell.
9 Optionally, do one or more of the following:
■ To add a new rule to an existing theme, click Add Rule.
Define the rule as described in the preceding steps.
■ To copy and modify a selected rule, click Duplicate.
Modify the new rule as described in the preceding steps.
■ To delete the selected rule, click Delete.
■ To adjust the position of the selected rule in the list, click Move Up
and Move Down as needed.
After a rule applies to a feature, none of the rules that come after it
in the list are applied to the feature.
742 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Quick Reference
Theme Feature Layer in Display Manager
Creates a theme for a feature layer in Display Manager
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer. Select
Edit Display Style. In the Style Editor, click the Theme
button.
Dialog Box Theme dialog box
Creating Themes Automatically for Feature Layers
When creating a theme for a feature layer, you can use the theming tool to
create a theme automatically based on a range of conditions.
A theme showing roads by road type
See also:
■ Understanding Feature Data and Drawing Data (page 436)
■ Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect (page 771)
■ Adding a Legend (page 430)
■ Defining Scale Thresholds for Drawing Layers (page 424)
Theming Features | 743
■ Creating Themes for Drawing Layers (page 749)
■ Adding Labels to Features (page 407)
To create a theme for a feature layer automatically
1 In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer. Click Edit Display Style.
For information about creating a new feature layer, see Accessing
Geospatial Features (page 222).
2 In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to theme.
For more information about scale ranges, see Defining Scale Thresholds
for Drawing Layers (page 424).
3 In the scale range style area, click Theme to display the Theme dialog
box.
4 In the Theme dialog box, in the Rules area, specify the number of ranges
to create and whether new ranges replace existing ranges or are added
before or after existing ranges.
You can specify the number of ranges to create if Distribution method is
Equal, Quantile, or Jenks (Natural Breaks). Properties containing strings
use an Individual Values distribution that does not allow the number of
rules to be edited. Adjust the number of rules to control the coarseness
of the theme.
For more information about distribution methods, see Understanding
Distribution Methods for Feature Themes (page 746).
5 To analyze features based on values that fall into various numerical ranges,
do the following:
■ Select the Create A Range Of Conditions check box.
■ For Property, select the property on which to base the theme.
■ Specify the Minimum Value and Maximum Value for the range.
The first rule includes the Minimum Value and the last rule includes
the Maximum Value. Styles are interpolated across the range.
■ For Distribution, select a method.
If you clear the Create A Range Of Conditions check box, the theming
tool creates a set of ranges with interpolated styles and labels, but with
empty conditions. You can then fill in the conditions manually.
744 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
6 To interpolate styles across the range of conditions, do the following:
■ Select the Interpolate Styles Across The Range Of Conditions check
box.
■ For Style Ramp, click .
The Style Point, Style Line, or Style Area dialog box is displayed
depending on the type of data associated with the layer. An additional
column of controls is provided for defining the end-of-range style.
■ Use the From column to define the start of the range.
■ Use the To column to define the end of the range.
The first rule uses the From style and the last rule uses the To style. Styles
are interpolated across the range.
For more information about defining styles, see Styling Point Features
(page 403), Styling Line Features (page 405), and Styling Polygons (page
406).
If you clear the Interpolate Styles Across The Range Of Conditions check
box, the theming tool creates a range of conditions with blank styles.
Then, you can fill in the styles manually.
7 To add labels to features in the theme, do the following:
■ Select the Create Feature Labels For The Range Of Conditions check
box.
■ Click Label Ramp.
You can interpolate label size, text color, and rotation across the range
of conditions.
■ In the Style Label dialog box, use the From column to define the start
of the ramp. Use the To column to define the end of the ramp. The
first rule uses the From label style and the last rule uses the To label
style. Label styles are interpolated across the range.
For more information about creating feature labels, see Adding Labels
to Features (page 407).
8 To create legend labels for the theme, do the following:
■ Select the Create Legend Labels For The Range Of Conditions check
box.
■ For Legend Text, enter the text to appear next to each rule in the
legend.
Theming Features | 745
■ For Label Format, specify how to display the legend label.
If you theme a layer on a property that contained area information
and you used the label text Area:, the label formats might look like
the following examples:
<Label Text> <Min> to <Max>
Area: 100 to 200
<Label Text> <Min> - <Max>
Area: 100 - 200
<Min> <= <Label Text> <<Max>
100 <= Area < 200
Quick Reference
Theme Feature Layer in Display Manager
Creates a theme for a feature layer in Display Manager
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer. Select
Edit Display Style. In the Style Editor, click the Theme
button.
Dialog Box Theme dialog box
Understanding Distribution Methods for Feature
Themes
When you create a range of conditions for a feature theme, you must specify
the distribution method. The following methods are available:
Equal
The difference between the high and low values is the same for every range.
This method is easy to interpret and is useful for showing continuous data
such as rainfall.
746 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Standard Deviation
Features are placed in ranges based on how much their values vary from the
mean. Autodesk Map 3D calculates the mean and then adds or subtracts the
standard deviation to or from the mean to create the ranges.
Quantile
Each range contains an equal number of features. This method is useful for
showing data in which values are evenly distributed.
Jenks (Natural Breaks)
Ranges are based on natural groupings of data values. Features with similar
values are grouped together. This method shows the natural groupings in the
data.
Individual Values
Features are not grouped. This distribution is useful if values are not
continuous, there is a fixed number of values, and many features have the
same value.
Creating a Transparent Feature Theme
When you create a feature theme, you can choose to make it transparent so
that other map data shows through, for example, another theme or another
layer of map data.
The transparency option is available only when working with themes involving
a solid fill.
Theming Features | 747
Blue parcel theme made partially transparent so you can see the red planning theme
underneath
To create a transparent feature theme
1 In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer for which you want to
create a transparent feature theme. Click Edit Display Style.
Note that to use transparency, the feature theme will have to be one that
will use a solid fill, for example, a theme on parcel area or zoning areas.
2 Click the Theme button.
3 Click next to Style Ramp.
4 In the Style Area dialog box, for Foreground Transparency, specify a value
between 0 and 100, where 0 is completely solid and 100 is completely
transparent.
5 Click OK twice.
Quick Reference
Theme Feature Layer in Display Manager
Creates a theme for a feature layer in Display Manager
748 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer. Select
Edit Display Style. In the Style Editor, click the Theme
button.
Dialog Box Theme dialog box
Theming Drawing Data
To theme drawing data
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Creating Themes for Drawing Layers
You can create themes for drawing layers to vary the stylization of drawing
objects based on object properties or data associated with the objects.
For example, you can make parcels a darker blue depending on the assessed
property value.
Change the color of each parcel based on assessed property value.
You can add a legend that lists the theme’s conditions and explains the colors,
symbols, line patterns, shadings and annotation used.
For more information, see About Themes for Drawing Layers (page 753) and
See also:
■ Theming Features (page 740)
Theming Drawing Data | 749
■ Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect (page 771)
To create a theme for a drawing layer
1 In Display Manager right-click a drawing layer, and click Add Style ➤
Theme.
2 For information on creating a layer, see Accessing Drawing Objects (page
245).
3 In the Thematic Mapping dialog box, in the Theme Type list, choose the
type of theme you want to create.
■ A Set Of Specific Values — Select this option if the data has a few
distinct values, such as pipe material, land use, or pavement type.
■ A Ranges Of Numeric Values — Select this option if the data can be
any value along a continuum, such as property value, temperature,
or population. When you display this type of data, you define ranges
for the values.
4 Next to the Theme Type list, click Values to specify the data to use for
the theme.
5 In the Values dialog box, under Data Values, specify the data to use. For
Obtain From, click to choose from a a list of data sources.
6 If you want to ignore or exclude certain values in the data, specify them
in the Ignore box.
These values, while present in the data, may be inappropriate for use in
the theme. Examples include null or empty data values.
7 To normalize the data relative to some other data value, for Normalize
By, enter a value or an expression. Click to choose from a list of data
sources.
8 Click Read Data.
Autodesk Map 3D reads the values in the selected data source.
If there is no data, verify that there are objects in the layer. The Display
Manager does not work with civil objects or objects from attached
drawings that have been queried into the current drawing using a standard
Query. To use objects from attached drawings with the Display Manager,
create a Query layer.
750 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
9 If you are not working with ranges, select the values to include in your
map.
10 If you are creating a theme with ranges, under Data Ranges, choose how
to divide the values into ranges.
■ Group Values By — Select the method for calculating the distribution
of the data values.
■ Number — Specify how many ranges to create.
■ Format As — Specify the numeric precision.
■ Use Thousands Separator — Select this to add a punctuation mark to
values displayed in the legend.
■ Click Find Ranges.
11 Click OK to close the dialog box.
Theming Drawing Data | 751
12 Under Thematic Details, specify how you want to style objects in the
theme, and the text labels to use in the legend.
■ ■ In the column heading of the table, select the check boxes next
to the properties you want to stylize.
■ To hide unselected columns, select the Hide Unused Columns
check box.
■ Click one of the cells in a style column to edit the style for a
specific value.
■ Select a ramp from the Ramp list to apply a pre-built sequence of
styles, for example a set of color gradations, hatch patterns, or
linestyles.
■ Select Scale Ramp To Fit to divide the selected ramp sequence into
equal intervals according to the number of values. If you do not
select this option, the ramp styles are applied in sequence, up to
the number of values that you have.
■ Click one of the cells in the Legend column to edit the text that
will appear next to each value in the map legend.
■ To reverse the order of rows in the selected column, right-click a
column heading and click Flip. Flip is available for all columns
except Values and Legend.
■ To edit cells in the Value column and edit the number to change
the ranges. To redefine values, click the Values button.
13 Click Done.
The theme is added to your map.
14 To change the icon used in the Display Manager, select the layer, and
then click Display to open Properties palette. On the Display tab of the
Properties palette, select the thumbnail preview. For example, choose the
polygon icon for parcels or the arc icon for pipes.
15 To add a legend to your drawing, click Tools ➤ Create Legend. See .
To edit a theme for drawing data
1 In Display Manager, right-click the drawing theme you want to edit and
choose Edit Theme.
752 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Quick Reference
Theme Drawing Layer in Display Manager
Creates a theme for a drawing layer in Display Manager
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click
Add Style ➤ Theme.
Dialog Box Thematic Mapping dialog box
About Themes for Drawing Layers
Theme Types
The data used for a theme on a drawing layer can be specific values, such as
pipe material, land use, or pavement type, or a range of values, such as property
value, temperature, or population.
An agricultural theme might show different crops in different colors. Each
crop is a specific value. Temperature, however, can be any number along a
continuum. When you display this type of data, you define ranges for the
values. For example, you could divide temperature values into three ranges:
below 30, 30 to 60, and over 60.
Theme Styles
A theme for a drawing layer can be based on many types of data. It could be
based on a property of the objects, such as area or length, or it could be based
on data stored with the object, such as pipe diameters stored in object data
or parcel value stored in a linked external database.
If the data is a set of specific values, select which values you want. For example,
in an agricultural map, you may want to omit some crops.
Theming Drawing Data | 753
If the data is ranges of values, you can select how many ranges you want and
how to divide the data.
Theme Style Example
Alter color
Alter linetype
Alter lineweight
Alter plot style
Changes to plot styles appear only in pre-
views and in published drawings.
754 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Theme Style Example
Add hatch/fill
Add text
Alter linestyle
Alter block insertion
Theming Drawing Data | 755
Theme Style Example
Add annotation
Specifying Text Height
Scale and height values for fill patterns, text height, and symbol size vary
according to the plotting scale you intend to use. The following table shows
suitable text heights for different plot scales.
Plot Scale Required Text Height on Plot (Text Height)
1:2000 1 2000
0.5 1000
1:10000 1 10000
0.5 5000
Specifying Hatch Scale
For standard-scale hatch patterns (those that do not have an AR- prefix), the
density of the hatching varies according to the hatch scale and plot scale you
use.
Plot Scale Hatch Scale Result
1:2000 1 to 500 Solid
2000 Lines clearly visible
756 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Plot Scale Hatch Scale Result
15000 Sparse, occasional lines
20000 No hatch or one line only
1:10000 1 to 2500 Solid
10000 Lines clearly visible
75000 Sparse, occasional lines
100000 No hatch or one line only
You can use solid fills at any scale to fill an enclosed area.
Using too low a scale for hatch patterns can seriously impair results. For a
listing of standard hatch patterns, look up "standard libraries" in the help
index.
Scaling Blocks
Scale factors for blocks vary according to the plot scale and the size of the
block. For a map plotted at 1:2000, a unit block (size 1 unit by 1 unit) appears
clearly with a scale of 2000.
Assigning Line Width
To assign line width to circles, arcs, or lines, convert the objects to polylines
with the drawing cleanup tools. See Cleaning Up Drawing Data (page 475).
You can change the ranges, modify the stylization for a single item in the
theme, or change the legend text.
For stylizations, you can choose from pre-defined sets of stylizations, called
ramps.
Theming Drawing Data | 757
A ramp is a pre-built sequence of styles, such as a set of color gradations or a set of
line types.
The information needed to create the ramp is stored in a separate file in XML
format. Autodesk Map 3D supplies several ramp files that you can use.
Applying Annotation
To apply annotation to a theme for a drawing layer, you select the annotation
template you want to use. In addition, you can specify the insertion
information, such as insertion point, scale, rotation, linetype, and color.
You define the annotation templates in your map. They are stored as specially
named blocks within your drawing and define what kind of information you
want to be displayed in the annotation, as well as the layout of that
information.
Annotation templates can include textual values, such as values from object
data or object properties such as a lineweight, and graphics, such as images
and arrows.
Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
Autodesk Map 3D includes tools to help you view and analyze raster-based
3D surfaces, such as Digital Elevation Models (DEMs), ESRI Grid files, and
Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED).
For example, you can create contour maps to help you analyze 3D terrain, use
raster-based theming to analyze elevation, slope, and aspect, drape map data
over surfaces and view the data in 3D, and more.
To add a raster-based surface, you use Data Connect. For more information,
see Accessing Geospatial Features (page 222).
To analyze raster-based surfaces
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
758 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Overview of Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
After you add a raster-based surface to your map (such as a Digital Elevation
Model or ESRI Grid file), you can analyze it in the following ways:
Add contour lines (page 759) to a surface to make a contour map, also
referred to as a topographic map.
Drape 2D map data on 3D surfaces (page 762) to view all the data as a
3D texture map.
View, navigate, and walk or fly through (page 764) a 3D map to view
the map from different perspectives.
Use hillshading (page 769) to cast real-world shadows on a surface to
make it look more realistic and easier to analyze.
Change the vertical exaggeration (page 769) to control how extreme
the elevation changes appear.
Use theming and change colors (page 771) to analyze elevation, slope,
aspect, and more.
For information about how to add raster-based surfaces to your maps, see
Using Raster-Based Surfaces in Your Map (page 264).
Adding and Modifying Contour Lines
You can can add contour lines to a raster-based surface in your map to create
what is often referred to as a contour map or topographic map. You add
contour lines to surface layers in Display Manager.
With contour lines, each line connects points of equal elevation on the surface.
The lines can help you determine the elevation at a specific location on the
surface, help clarify and analyze the 3D surface terrain, and help with things
like navigation.
Overview of Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces | 759
Contour lines added to a DEM surface
When you create contour lines, Autodesk Map 3D creates new polyline or
polygon features, stores them in an SDF file, and adds them to your map as a
new layer in Display Manager.
You can edit and style the contour lines like you do any other feature. You
can also delete contour lines and recreate them.
When you add contour lines, you specify the following:
■ Name of the new contour layer
■ Contour elevation interval
■ Units (meters or feet) used to measure elevation
■ Major contour interval
■ Contour labels
■ Whether to create contours as polylines or polygons
■ File name of the SDF that will store the contour features
See also:
■ Using Raster-Based Surfaces in Your Map (page 264)
■ Draping Map Data Over 3D Surfaces (page 762)
■ Viewing Surfaces in 3D (page 764)
760 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To create contour lines
1 In Display Manager, right-click a surface layer, and select Create Contour
Layer.
For information about adding a surface layer, see Using Raster-Based
Surfaces in Your Map (page 264).
2 In the Autodesk Map Contour dialog box, enter a name for the new map
layer that will contain the contour lines.
3 In the Contour Elevation Interval list, select the difference in elevation
between contour elevation you want, for example 10, 20 or 50.
4 Select the units (meters or feet) used to measure the elevation (height)
in your surface.
Autodesk Map 3D attempts to get this data from the surface itself, but
you can change it if you need to.
5 In the Major Contour Every list, select the interval between major (bold)
contour lines.
6 If you want to label the major contour lines with the elevation they
represent, select the Label The Elevation check box.
7 For Create Contour As, select the type of feature you want to use when
creating contour lines. Choose polyline or polygon.
8 For Save Contours Into Filename, type a name for the new SDF file that
will store your contour line features.
9 Click OK.
The new contour line features are added to your map. They are placed on a
new layer using the name you specified and stored in an SDF file.
To edit the line styles and labels used for the contour lines
1 In Display Manager, right-click the contour layer, and click Edit Display
Style.
2 In the Style Editor, modify the line styles and labels, as you would for
other features. For more information, see Editing Features (page 445).
To change other settings for the contour lines (elevation interval, units, etc.)
1 In Display Manager, select the contour layer.
Adding and Modifying Contour Lines | 761
2 Click Remove.
To change settings such as elevation interval and units, you must remove
the contour layer and recreate it using the settings you want.
3 Create a new contour layer using the new settings you want.
To delete a layer of contour lines
1 In Display Manager, select the contour layer.
2 Click Remove.
Quick Reference
Create Contours
Creates contour lines for 3D raster-based surfaces
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click a surface layer, and
select Create Contour Layer.
Dialog Box Autodesk Map Contour dialog box
Draping Map Data Over 3D Surfaces
To drape 2D map data over a surface in your map, you simply switch to a 3D
view. Autodesk Map 3D automatically drapes 2D map data and displays
everything in 3D. The resulting 3D map is very realistic and is sometimes
referred to as a texture map.
For example, if you have a map with 2D raster satellite images, a 2D parcel
layer, and a 3D Digital Elevation Model (DEM), you can switch to 3D and
drape the satellite images and parcels over the DEM.
762 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
2D parcels and roads draped over a 3D DEM surface
Note that you cannot edit 2D data while it is draped in a 3D view. You need
to switch back to 2D.
See also:
■ Using Raster-Based Surfaces in Your Map (page 264)
■ Draping Map Data Over 3D Surfaces (page 762)
■ Viewing Surfaces in 3D (page 764)
To drape 2D map data over a 3D surface
1 In Display Manager, verify that you have a surface layer in your map.
For information about adding a surface layer, see Using Raster-Based
Surfaces in Your Map (page 264).
2 On the status bar, click to switch to 3D.
The 3D Navigation toolbar appears, and display driver acceleration is
turned on to enhance 3D display performance.
3 Use the 3D Navigation tools to move around. For more information, see
Viewing Surfaces in 3D (page 764).
4 To switch back to 2D, click on the status bar.
To switch between 2D and 3D
■ On the status bar, click to switch to 3D or to switch to 2D.
Quick Reference
Drape 2D Data Over a Surface
Switch to a 3D view and 2D data is automatically draped over surfaces in
your map
Icon
Switch to 3D
Draping Map Data Over 3D Surfaces | 763
Viewing Surfaces in 3D
When working with maps that include 3D data such as raster-based surfaces,
you'll often want to display different views in 3D so that you explore, examine,
and analyze the surface from different perspectives.
Use any of the following options to view your 3D map interactively:
■ Switch to 3D view—Displays the 3D Navigation toolbar, which contains
the commands you need to change the 3D view (for example 3D Orbit)
and turns on display driver acceleration to enhance 3D performance.
■ 3D Zoom—Simulates the effect of a camera's zoom lens by making objects
appear closer or farther away.
■ 3D Pan—Changes the view to match where you move the cursor.
■ 3D Orbit Commands—Moves the surface map around a target. For example,
3DORBIT, constrained orbit, and free orbit.
■ Swivel—Simulates panning with a camera in the direction that you drag.
■ Walk or Fly—Simulates walking or flying through a 3D model.
■ Motion Path Animation—Records and plays back a walk-through or
fly-through of a model to visually demonstrate a surface map.
■ Other AutoCAD commands—Allow you to view and navigate in 3D. For
example, you can use the VISUALSTYLES to hide or show lines and shade
3D data or Camera to place a camera so that you can manipulate and save
3D perspective views.
For more information about the above commands, refer to the AutoCAD Help.
TIP To improve the display of a surface after zooming in, use the Query to View
option. This resamples / requeries the data so it is as clear as possible, getting rid
of things like pixelation. For more information, see Viewing Raster Images (page
433).
See also:
■ Using Raster-Based Surfaces in Your Map (page 264)
■ Draping Map Data Over 3D Surfaces (page 762)
764 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
NOTE The following procedures are intended for maps that include 3D raster-based
surfaces, which have been added using Data Connect. See Using Raster-Based
Surfaces in Your Map (page 264).
To switch between 2D and 3D
■ On the status bar, click to switch to 3D or to switch to 2D.
To use 3D Zoom
1 On the 3D Navigation toolbar, click 3D Zoom .
You can open the 3D Navigation toolbar by right-clicking a gray area
near the upper toolbar area of the application window, and selecting
ACAD ➤ 3D Navigation.
2 Choose the zoom option you want to use:
■ Realtime - Zooms interactively. When the hand cursor appears, hold
down the button on your pointing device and drag vertically to zoom
in and out.
■ All - Zoom to the entire drawing
■ Extents - Display all objects as large as possible and still fit in the
current drawing area.
■ Window - Zoom by specifying a rectangular area you want to view.
■ Previous - zoom to the previous view
3 Press ENTER, press ESC, or right-click to exit.
To use 3D Pan
1 On the 3D Navigation toolbar, click 3D Pan .
2 When the hand cursor appears, hold down the button on your pointing
device as you move.
3 If you are using a wheel mouse, hold down the wheel button and move
the mouse.
Viewing Surfaces in 3D | 765
4 Press ENTER, press ESC, or right-click to exit.
To use 3D Orbit
1 Use one of the following 3D orbit options:
■ 3D Navigation toolbar ➤ 3D Constrained Orbit
■ 3D Navigation toolbar ➤ 3D Free Orbit
■ Enter the 3DORBIT command
2 Click and drag the cursor to rotate the view.
3 To exit 3D orbit, press ENTER or ESC, or click Exit on the shortcut menu.
To use walk through
1 Verify that the “step size”, or distance you move with each step, is large
enough for walking through a surface. Enter the STEPSIZE command and
make sure it is set to 80 - 1500 or more. The number you want to use may
depend on your zoom level.
2 On the 3D Navigation toolbar, click Walk Through .
3 A window appears describing the keyboard control you use for the walk
through. Using the arrow keys is one of the convenient options. Click
OK.
4 Wait briefly as the Position Locator palette appears. Review, change
settings as needed, and then minimize or close it.
5 Use the keyboard buttons to walk through your surface. For example, use
the up arrow key to move forward.
6 Press ENTER or ESC when you are done.
To change the Visual Style
1 Enter the VISUALSTYLES command.
766 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
2 In the Visual Styles Manager, double-click the sample image of the visual
style.
The selected visual style is applied to your surface.
For information about how to improve the display of surfaces after a zoom
operation (for example to get rid of pixelation), see Viewing Raster Images
(page 433).
For information about walk and fly mode, 3D swivel, motion path animation,
and other AutoCAD commands that can help you view data in 3D, please
refer to the AutoCAD Help.
Quick Reference
3DPAN
Starts the interactive 3D view and enables you to drag the view horizontally
and vertically
Icon
3D Pan
Command Line 3DPAN
3DZOOM
Zooms in and out on a view of your drawing
Icon
3D Zoom
Command Line 3DZOOM
3DORBIT
Controls the interactive viewing of objects in 3D
Icon
3D Constrined Orbit
Command Line 3DORBIT
3DFORBIT
Viewing Surfaces in 3D | 767
Controls the interactive viewing of objects in 3D, using an unconstrained
orbit
Icon
3D Free Orbit
Command Line 3DFORBIT
3DCORBIT
Starts an interactive 3D view and sets the objects into continuous motion
Icon
3D Continuous Orbit
Command Line 3DCORBIT
3DWALK
Interactively changes the view of a 3D drawing so that you appear to be
walking through the model
Icon
3D Walk
Command Line 3DWALK
3DSWIVEL
Changes the target of the view in the direction that you drag
Icon
3D Swivel
Command Line 3DSWIVEL
3DDISTANCE
Starts the interactive 3D view and makes objects appear closer or farther away
Icon
3D Adjust Distance
Command Line 3DDISTANCE
768 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Using Hillshading and Vertical Exaggeration
Hillshading adds shading to 3D surface layers by casting the sun's light across
a surface from the direction and angle you specify.
Hillshading produces a more realistic image and helps you better understand
the magnitude and relationships of the various elevation changes (that is, the
bumps and valleys) on the surface.
Surface with hillshading Surface without hillshading
Hillshading is on by default for each surface layer in your map, however, you
can choose to turn it off (or on again) at any time on a per layer basis.
You can change the sun settings that Autodesk Map 3D uses to apply
hillshading. These settings are used throughout Autodesk Map 3D and are
applied to all surface layers that have hillshading turned on.
You can also control the appearance of the elevation changes, making them
appear more or less extreme, using the vertical exaggeration setting. Increasing
the vertical exaggeration intensifies the hillshading, making the elevation
changes appear more extreme. The vertical exaggeration setting is apllied to
all surfaces you are viewing.
In addition to these settings, you can use AutoCAD commands to change the
appearance of surfaces. For example, you can use the VISUALSTYLES command
to display the surface in 3D Wireframe, 3D Hidden, Realistic, and Conceptual.
For more information, refer to the AutoCAD Help.
Using Hillshading and Vertical Exaggeration | 769
See also:
■ Using Raster-Based Surfaces in Your Map (page 264)
To specify hillshading settings
1 Verify that you are in the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace.
2 Click Setup menu ➤ Hillshade.
3 Specify the Direction and Angle of the sun you want to use for hillshading
by doing one of the following:
■ Enter the direction and angle of the sun manually:
■ For Direction Of Sun, specify the direction from which the light
should come from, for example, East or West. You can type a
direction value into the edit box, or drag the yellow disk in the
compass to the position you want.
■ For Angle Of Sun, specify how high in the sky the light is located,
such as near the horizon, directly overhead, or somewhere in
between. You can type an angle into the edit box, or drag the
yellow disk to specify an angle.
■ Click the Settings button to set the direction and angle of the sun
based on a date, time and location you specify in the Sun Properties
palette. To populate the Hillshade dialog box with the Sun Properties
settings, you return to the Hillshade dialog box and click Import.
4 Click OK.
To turn off or on hillshading
1 In Display Manager, right-click a surface layer, and click Edit Display
Style.
2 Do one of the following:
■ To turn off hillshading, set the Hillshade Band to 0.
■ To turn on hillshading, set the Hillshade Band to 1 and verify that
the Elevation Band is set to 1.
770 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To change the vertical exaggeration
■ In the status bar, for Exaggeration, select the value you want to use for
vertical exaggeration from the drop-down list. Choose Custom if you want
to specify a value that is not on the list.
Specify a higher number if you want to make the elevation changes appear
more extreme. Enter a lower number or a decimal if you want to make it
appear less extreme.
Quick Reference
MAPHILLSHADE
Specifies settings to use when shading 3D raster-based surfaces
Menu Map 3D for Geospatial workspace
➤ Setup ➤ Hillshade
Command Line MAPHILLSHADE
Dialog Box
Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect
You can create a theme to change the display of a surface based on height
(elevation), slope, or aspect (direction of slope).
Surface Theme Type Illustration
Height - Changes the display based on
elevation.
Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect | 771
Surface Theme Type Illustration
Slope - Changes the display based on
ground slope or steepness.
For example, you can use gray to show
areas with a slope of less than 10%.
Aspect - Varies the display based on the
direction of ground slope.
This can help you analyze the surface. For example, you can create a theme
on height to analyze the elevation data, a theme on slope to help you
determine which areas are flat enough for developing houses, or a theme on
aspect to help you find the best drainage routes.
See also:
■ Using Raster-Based Surfaces in Your Map (page 264)
■ Changing Colors in a Themed Surface (page 773)
■ Theming Features (page 740)
■ Using Hillshading and Vertical Exaggeration (page 769)
■ Adding a Legend (page 430)
■ Defining Scale Thresholds for Drawing Layers (page 424)
772 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To theme a surface to analyze height, slope or aspect
1 In Display Manager, right-click a surface layer, and select Edit Display
Style.
For information about adding a surface layer, see Using Raster-Based
Surfaces in Your Map (page 264).
2 In the Style Editor, under Scale Range, specify the scale threshold you
want to use. For more information, see see Defining Scale Thresholds for
Drawing Layers (page 424).
3 In the Band area, for Band 1, select Theme from the Style drop-down list.
4 In the Theme dialog box, select Create a Range of Conditions.
5 For Property select the property you want to theme on - Height, Slope,
or Aspect.
6 Specify the other theming options you want to use, for example the
palette to use. For more information, see Theme dialog box (page 1042).
7 In the Theme dialog box, click OK
8 In the Style Editor, click Apply.
Quick Reference
Theme Surface Layer in Display Manager
Creates a theme for a surface layer in Display Manager. You can theme on
height, slope, or aspect.
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click a surface layer. Select
Edit Display Style. In the Style Editor, in the Style list,
select Theme.
Dialog Box Theme dialog box
Changing Colors in a Themed Surface
After you have created a theme for a surface, you can change one or more
colors to make the image more realistic or to highlight a specific area or
characteristic of the surface to help with further analysis.
Changing Colors in a Themed Surface | 773
For example, you might want to change the color of the lowest elevation in
a canyon to blue to show that a river runs through it in the spring, or change
a group of low elevations to red to highlight an area susceptible to flooding.
Colors of lowest elevations changed to blue
For information about how to theme a surface, see Theming Surfaces to Analyze
Height, Slope, and Aspect (page 771).
To change colors in a themed surface
1 In Display Manager, right-click a surface layer, and select Edit Display
Style.
For information about adding a surface layer, see Using Raster-Based
Surfaces in Your Map (page 264).
2 In the Style Editor, click Band Detail.
3 Select the band you want to change.
For example, for a theme on height, you can select the first band to
change the color of the lowest elevation
4 Select the band for which you want to change the color, and choose a
new color.
5 Click All Bands.
6 Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Theme Feature Layer in Display Manager
Creates a theme for a feature layer in Display Manager
774 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer. Select
Edit Display Style. In the Style Editor, click the Theme
button.
Dialog Box Theme dialog box
Finding and Selecting Data
This section of the documentation describes how to find, filter, and query
features and drawing objects in your maps.
The methods you use for features and drawing objects are different.
To find and select features, you can use the Find filter in the Data Grid, Search
interface, or a Feature Source Query.
To find and select drawing objects, you can Quick Select, the Data View, or
drawing queries.
To find, filter, and query data
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Finding and Selecting Features
Autodesk Map 3D provides a few different ways to find, filter, and select just
the features you need to work with.
To find and select features
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Finding and Selecting Data | 775
Overview of Finding and Selecting Features
There are a few different techniques you can use to find and focus on a specific
subset of features you want to work with. With these techniques, you don't
have to manually review the entire set of data to find what you need.
■ Find filter—Use the Find filter in the Data Grid when you want a quick
and easy way to filter (limit) the number of records displayed in the Data
Grid to only those that match the specific criteria you specify. You can
use Find to filter a feature class using criteria based on a column of data.
In most cases, fewer records are displayed in the Data Grid after a Find
filter is applied. You can zoom to, select, save, or print the filtered results
in the map.
For example, you can use Find to find the rows of Road data that Type =
Major Road or Address = GROUSE DR, and then have those features
highlighted in the map.
■ Search—Use Search when you need a more comprehensive way to find
features in map. With Search, you can define attribute and spatial search
criteria, combine multiple criteria to create complex searches, and search
across multiple feature classes in your map. Features that meet your Search
criteria are selected in the map.
■ Filtering a Feature Layer—If you want to reduce the scope of a feature layer
in your map, you can edit the query that brings in the data. When you
edit the query, you use essentially the same interface as you do with Search,
defining the set of criteria to find and bring in just the data you want.
776 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
For example, if your map has an SDF layer containing all the parcels in
California and you want only the Parcels in San Francisco, you can edit
the query so that the layer contains only the parcels you want.
TIP Using the filter can help you improve performance when working with
large sets of feature data. You can filter data after you bring it into your map,
or you can cancel the Add Data operation while bringing it in and then use
edit query to apply a filter.
Finding and Filtering Data in the Data Grid
You can use the Find filter in the Data Grid to display only the features or
records you want to work with.
The first step in performing a Find is to identify the column whose values
determine whether a feature or record will be included in the results. The
second step is to specify the value or string you want to look for in the specified
column.
The records that match what you specify are selected in the Data Grid and
highlighted in your map.
For example, to find only the telephone poles with transformers, you would
specify a Find with PoleAttachments equal to Transformer; or to find only the
commercial districts in a city, you would specify a Find with LandUse equal
to Commercial.
Finding and Selecting Features | 777
Finding and selecting parcel features with a Street Name = Grouse Drive
Find can be used in conjunction with the Zoom To feature in the Data Grid
to zoom to the features in the map when results are returned.
To remove a Find filter, you simply perform another Find operation, or click
Remove Filter in the Data Grid.
If you need a more comprehensive way to find features in your map, you
should use Search. Search allows you to define more advanced criteria, combine
multiple criteria, and search across multiple feature classes in your map.
See also:
■ Overview of the Data Grid (page 723)
■
■ Exporting and Printing Data from the Data Grid (page 727)
To find a subset of data in the Data Grid
1 In Display Manager, select the feature layer in which you want to find
data.
For information about creating a new feature layer, see Accessing
Geospatial Features (page 222).
2 Click the Grid button.
3 In the Data Grid, verify the Data list is showing the type of data you want
to perform the Find on.
778 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
4 In the Find list, select the column whose values you want to search. For
example, City or Owner Name.
5 The label of the Find list changes to show your column selection.
6 In the Find box, type the value you want to look for.
For example, to find all parcels in the city of Bonn, type BONN. Note
that the string must exactly match the data in the column to be included
in the Find.
7 If you want to zoom to the features in your map, click the automatic
zoom button in the Data Grid.
8 Click the Apply Find Filter icon .
9 The features or records that match your Find criteria are displayed in the
Data Grid.
10 If you need to, select the rows in the Data Grid to see them highlighted
in your map. If automatic zoom is on, you will zoom to the selected
features.
To clear the Find filter and display all records
■ In the Data Grid, click the Clear Filter icon , or perform another
Find operation.
Quick Reference
(Data Grid) Find
Finds the specified data in the Data Grid
Menu In the Data Grid, use the Find list to select a column
whose values you want to search, and then type the
value you want to look for.
Finding and Selecting Features | 779
Searching For and Selecting Features
You can use the Search command in Autodesk Map 3D to find and select
features in your map based on their location or properties.
When you perform a Search, you create a set of search conditions (also referred
to as criteria or rules) that must be true for a feature to be found and selected.
For example, you can find just the roads in Shanghai within a circular area
you specify. To do this, you specify criteria that limits the results to road
features whose City field is "Shanghai" and within the a circle you define.
Example search with multiple criteria and multiple feature classes
You can define any number of search criteria. A Search can be simple, with
one criteria, or complex, with several criteria.
With Search, you can search the entire map (i.e., search across multiple feature
classes) and use more complicated expressions, such as "Greater than 1000".
Note: If you need a simple and easy way to find data in a single feature class
based on column data, you can use Find. For more information, see Finding
and Filtering Data in the Data Grid (page 777)
To search for and select features
1 Verify that you are in the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace.
2 Make sure you are connected to the feature source(s) for the feature
layer(s).
For more information, see Accessing Geospatial Features (page 222).
3 Click Edit menu ➤ Search.
If you have multiple feature sources, you may be prompted to select the
sources you want to search, then the Search dialog box (page 1099) displays.
780 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
4 In the Search dialog box, if you are creating a location condition, click
Zoom to zoom the drawing window to the extents of the selected feature
class.
5 Click Add and select a condition type:
■ Location Condition — Selects all features in a location you specify.
In the Location Condition dialog box (page 1107), specify a selection
type and define a location in your drawing. You can specify whether
to select features completely within the selection area, within or
crossing the selection area, or within a specified distance of the
selection area.
For example, use a location condition to find all manholes in one
section of town, or all parcels that touch a road, or all water pipes
within 100 meters of a road.
■ Property Condition — Selects all features that have the property value
you specify. In the Property Condition dialog box (page 1109), select a
property, an operator, and a value.
For example, to select all pipes with a diameter greater than 10, specify
Diameter > 10.
The Property list displays the properties available for this feature class.
For Value, click Select to display the Property Values dialog box where
you can choose from a list of the values in the feature source.
■ Filter Condition — Use the Feature Source Filter Language to write a
condition. In the Filter Condition dialog box (page 1100), write the
condition.
6 Optionally, create additional conditions.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPSEARCH
Searchs and selects features in your map based on the location and attribute
criteria you specify
Menu Map 3D for Geospatial workspace Edit ➤ Search
Icon
Search
Finding and Selecting Features | 781
Command Line MAPSEARCH
Task Pane In Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Search
Dialog Box Feature Source Query / Search dialog box (page 1099)
Filtering a Feature Layer
Filter a feature source layer so that only some of the features appear in your
map.
To filter the layer, define a query condition or a set of conditions that specify
which features you want. The procedure is similar to performing a search (page
780).
Edit the layer query so that only some features appear in your map
TIP Using the filter can help you improve performance when working with large
sets of feature data. You can filter data after you bring it into your map, or you
can cancel the Add Data operation while bringing it in and then use edit query to
apply a filter.
To filter a feature layer
1 Make sure you are connected to the feature source for the feature layer.
For more information, see Accessing Geospatial Features (page 222).
2 In the Display Manager, right-click the layer and click Edit Query.
3 The Feature Source Query dialog box (page 1099) displays.
4 If you are creating a location condition, click Zoom to zoom the drawing
window to the extents of the selected feature class.
782 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
5 Click Add and select a condition type:
■ Location Condition — Selects all features in a location you specify.
In the Location Condition dialog box (page 1107), specify a selection
type and define a location in your drawing. You can specify whether
to select features completely within the selection area, within or
crossing the selection area, or within a specified distance of the
selection area.
For example, use a location condition to find all manholes in one
section of town, or all parcels that touch a road, or all water pipes
within 100 meters of a road.
■ Property Condition — Selects all features that have the property value
you specify. In the Property Condition dialog box (page 1109), select a
property, an operator, and a value.
For example, to select all pipes with a diameter greater than 10, specify
Diameter > 10.
The Property list displays the properties available for this feature class.
For Value, click Select to display the Property Values dialog box where
you can choose from a list of the values in the feature source.
■ Filter Condition — Use the Feature Source Filter Language to write a
condition. In the Filter Condition dialog box (page 1100), write the
condition.
6 Optionally, create additional conditions.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Select Checked-Out Features
Selects features that have been checked out to edit
Menu In the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace: Edit ➤ Select
Checked-Out Features
Icon
Select Checked-Out Features
Command Line MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT
Task Pane In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer
Finding and Selecting Features | 783
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects
Autodesk Map 3D provides several tools that enable you to find and query in
drawing objects. You can use quick select to select drawing objects, use Data
View to find records and linked drawing objects, and run queries to retrieve
drawing objects and transform them if needed in the process.
To find and query drawing objects
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Using Quick Select to Select Drawing Objects
You can use Quick Select (QSELECT) to select drawing objects based on their
object properties (such as color), object types, or object classification. You can
also use Quick Select to exclude drawing objects from a selection set.
For example, you can select all of the red road objects in a drawing without
selecting any other object, or you can select all objects except the red roads.
When using Quick Select to select drawing objects based on color, linetype,
or lineweight, first consider whether these properties are set to BYLAYER in
the AutoCAD layer definition. For example, an object may appear red because
its color is set to BYLAYER and the layer color is red.
For more information, please refer to the AutoCAD Help.
To select drawing objects using Quick Select
1 Verify that you have drawing objects in your map.
The following example illustrates how to use Quick Select to select the
red objects in a drawing.
Enter the QSELECT command.
2 In the Quick Select dialog box, under Apply To, select Entire Drawing.
3 Under Object Type, select Multiple.
784 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
4 Under Properties, select Color.
5 Under Operator, select Equals.
6 Under Value, select Red.
7 Under How to Apply, select Include in New Selection Set.
8 Click OK.
All red objects in the drawing are selected and the Quick Select dialog
box closes. Objects that are set to BYLAYER and are red because the layer
color is red are not included in the selection set.
For more information about using Quick Select to select or exclude
drawing objects, please refer to the AutoCAD Help.
Finding Records in a Database Linked to Drawing
Objects
Using the Data View, you can find records in an attached database. If database
records are linked to objects in a drawing, you can highlight records linked
to objects you select.
Note that this functionality applies only to drawing objects. For information
about how to work with feature data, see Finding and Selecting Features (page
775).
You can find objects based on data in attached records. For more information
on finding objects, see Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data (page 255)
and SQL (page 814)
See also:
■ Defining Drawing Queries (page 800)
■ Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing Objects (page 819)
NOTE These procedures apply only to drawing objects. For information about
working with feature data, see Overview of the Data Grid (page 723).
To find records in a database linked to drawing objects
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 785
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Overview of Finding Records in a Linked Database
After you create a link between a record in the database table and an object
in a drawing, you can use the information in the database table to help you
analyze, select, and display objects in your drawing.
Example: Using data from a linked database table, you can find all pipes
installed before 1965.
See also:
■ Defining Drawing Queries (page 800)
■ Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing Objects (page 819)
Use database links to do the following:
■ To highlight drawing objects linked to a database record (page 790)
■ To highlight records linked to drawing objects (page 792)
■ To use a SQL filter in the Data View (page 795)
■ To use a spatial filter in the Data View (page 797)
NOTE These procedures apply only to drawing objects. For information about
working with feature data, see Highlighting Features Using the Data Grid (page
725).
Quick Reference
(Data View) AutoHighlight
When records are selected, automatically highlights objects in the drawing
linked to the records
786 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Menu In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Auto Highlight
(Data View) AutoZoom
When records are selected or deselected, automatically adjusts the zoom so
that the objects linked to the selected records fill the percent of the screen
specified by the Zoom Scale command
Menu In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Auto Zoom
(Data View) Link Records to Objects
Links the selected records to objects in your drawing
Menu In the Data View: Links ➤ Link Records To Objects
Icon
Link Records to Objects
(Data View) Zoom Scale
Specifies the percent of the drawing display that the selected objects will
occupy
Menu In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Zoom Scale
Dialog Box Zoom Scale dialog box (page 1082)
Finding a Database Record
Using the Data View, you can search for text strings in a database table. You
use the Data View mostly when working with drawing objects. For information
about working with feature data, see Selecting Objects Based on Attached Data
(page 255).
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 787
The entered text must match the record exactly.
To use Replace, the table must be open in Edit mode and AutoCommit must
be turned off.
To find a database record in the Data View
1 Open a database table in the Data View.
2 Position the cursor in the column you want to search.
3 In the Data View, click Edit menu ➤ Find or Edit menu ➤ Replace.
4 In the dialog box, enter the characters to find. For Replace, enter the
replacement text.
5 For Find, click Find Next.
For Replace, click Replace to replace this instance and find the next
instance. Click Replace All to replace all instances automatically.
788 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Quick Reference
(Data View) Find
Finds specified text
Menu In the Data View: Edit ➤ Find
Highlighting Drawing Objects Linked to a Database
Record
After you link database records to objects in a drawing, you can highlight
objects in the drawing that are linked to selected records in the database table.
Highlight parcels that are linked to selected records in a database table.
You can set the following options:
■ automatically highlight objects linked to the records you select
■ automatically zoom in on highlighted objects
■ automatically create a selection set of highlighted objects
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 789
NOTE Once you set AutoZoom, Zoom Scale, and AutoHighlight, these settings
stay in effect for every drawing until you change them.
To highlight drawing objects linked to a database record
1 Open a linked database table in the Data View.
2 In the Data View window, select a record.
3 In the Data View, click Highlight menu ➤ Highlight Objects.
NOTE This command is available only if you selected a link template for the
table.
Objects that are linked to the selected record are highlighted.
To clear the highlighting, enter regen on the Command line.
To set other Data View highlighting options
■ To dynamically highlight linked objects, click Highlight
menu ➤ AutoHighlight in the Data View. When you select a record in the
table, Autodesk Map 3D automatically highlights linked objects.
■ To dynamically zoom to linked objects, make sure AutoHighlight is on.
Click Highlight menu ➤ AutoZoom. When you select a record in the table,
Autodesk Map 3D zooms to linked objects. You can change the zoom scale
so that the linked objects take up more or less of the screen. To change
the zoom scale, click Highlight menu ➤ Zoom Scale and enter a value.
■ To dynamically add highlighted objects to the selection set, click Highlight
menu ➤ AutoSelect.
Quick Reference
(Data View) AutoHighlight
When records are selected, automatically highlights objects in the drawing
linked to the records
Menu In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Auto Highlight
(Data View) AutoZoom
790 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
When records are selected or deselected, automatically adjusts the zoom so
that the objects linked to the selected records fill the percent of the screen
specified by the Zoom Scale command
Menu In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Auto Zoom
(Data View) Link Records to Objects
Links the selected records to objects in your drawing
Menu In the Data View: Links ➤ Link Records To Objects
Icon
Link Records to Objects
(Data View) Zoom Scale
Specifies the percent of the drawing display that the selected objects will
occupy
Menu In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Zoom Scale
Dialog Box Zoom Scale dialog box (page 1082)
Highlighting Records Linked to a Selected Object
If objects in a drawing are linked to records in a database table, you can use
the Data View to see which records are linked to selected objects.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 791
When you select an object in the drawing, linked records are highlighted in the Data
View.
See also:
■ Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record Data (SQL Queries)
(page 794)
■ Finding Data View Records Based on Object Location (page 796)
To highlight records linked to drawing objects
1 Open a linked database table in the Data View.
2 In the Data View, click Highlight menu ➤ Highlight Records ➤ Select
Objects, or from the toolbar click .
3 Select the objects in your drawing. Press Enter.
4 Use the highlighted records toolbar to move to the first, previous, next,
or last highlighted record.
792 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
5 To show only highlighted records, click Highlight men ➤ Show
Highlighted Records Only
TIP To improve performance, create a filter (page 795) to display only relevant
records.
To clear the highlighting, click on the highlight toolbar.
To set the record highlight color
1 In the Data View, click Highlight menu ➤ Highlight Color, or double-click
the highlight color in the status bar.
2 In the Select Color dialog box, specify a color. Click OK.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Clear Highlight
Removes the highlighting from records in the table
Menu In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Highlight
Records ➤ Clear Highlight
Icon
Clear Highlight
(Data View) Highlight Color
Selects the color to use to highlight records with the Highlight Records
command
Menu In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Highlight Color
(Data View) Highlight Records
Highlights records that match objects you select in the drawing
Menu In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Highlight
Records ➤ Select Objects
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 793
Icon
Highlight Records
(Data View) Show Highlighted Records Only
Displays only the currently highlighted records
Menu In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Show Highlighted
Records Only
Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record
Data (SQL Queries)
Use a SQL filter in the Data View to display only records whose data matches
the conditions you specify. For example, view only records with a specific
street name or records where the property value is over a specific amount.
This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Filters can improve performance in scrolling through records or in highlighting
records.
Use a SQL filter to view only records whose data matches specified conditions.
NOTE You can also filter records based on the location of linked objects. If both
a SQL filter and a spatial filter are defined, the Data View displays only those records
that match both filters.
794 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
You can set an option to determine how many filters Autodesk Map 3D stores.
See Setting Data View Options (page 184).
See also:
■ Finding Data View Records Based on Object Location (page 796)
To use a SQL filter in the Data View
1 Open a database table in the Data View.
2 From the Records menu in the Data View, choose SQL Filter.
3 In the Table Filter dialog box (page 1079), define the condition for the filter.
To select from a list of conditions previously defined for this table, click
History and select the condition.
To define a new condition:
■ Under Where Condition, select the column to use as a filter.
■ Select an operator.
To use wild-card characters, select the LIKE operator. For example, to
list only those streets that begin with the letter C, select the LIKE
operator and enter C% in the Value box. Wild-card characters can be
used only with string values. For information on wild-card characters,
refer to the documentation for your database system software.
■ Enter a value or click… to select from the list of possible values.
■ After setting your criteria, click Add.
The conditions you set appear in the SQL Filter list.
4 To add additional conditions, select AND or OR. Create and add the new
condition.
5 Click OK.
The Data View displays only those records that match the filter.
To clear all filters, in the Data View, click Records menu ➤ Clear Filter.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Clear Filter
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 795
Eliminates all current filters and requeries the database
Menu In the Data View: Records ➤ Clear Filter
Icon
Clear Filter
(Data View) SQL Filter
Displays only records that match conditions you specify
Menu In the Data View: Records ➤ SQL Filter
Icon
SQL Filter
Dialog Box Table Filter dialog box (page 1079)
Finding Data View Records Based on Object
Location
Use a spatial filter to display only records that are linked to drawing objects
you select in the drawing.
796 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
When you apply a spatial filter, the Data View displays only those records that are
linked to selected objects in the drawing.
NOTE You can also filter records based on the data in the record. If both a SQL
filter and a spatial filter are defined, the Data View displays only those records that
match both filters.
See also:
■ Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record Data (SQL Queries)
(page 794)
NOTE The following procedure applies only to drawing objects. For information
about feature data, see Finding and Selecting Features (page 775). In addition, the
Spatial Filter command is available only if you have a selected a link template for
the table.
To use a spatial filter in the Data View
1 Open a database table in the Data View.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 797
2 In the Data View, click Records menu ➤ Spatial Filter, or from the toolbar,
click .
3 Select objects.
4 Click OK.
The Data View displays only those records that are linked to the selected
objects.
To clear all filters in the Data View, click Records menu ➤ Clear Filter.
See also:
■ To create a link template (page 319)
■ Linking Database Records to Objects (page 315)
■ Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record Data (SQL Queries)
(page 794)
Quick Reference
(Data View) Clear Filter
Eliminates all current filters and requeries the database
Menu In the Data View: Records ➤ Clear Filter
Icon
Clear Filter
(Data View) Spatial Filter
Displays only records attached to objects that you select
Menu In the Data View: Records ➤ Spatial Filter
Icon
Spatial Filter
798 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Querying Objects from Attached Drawings
To query objects from attached drawings
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Overview of Queries
Use queries to retrieve the drawing objects you need from attached drawings.
A query searches the active attached drawings, selects the objects that match
the conditions you specify, and copies the objects to the current drawing.
Only objects in the Model Tab (model space) are queried. Objects from the
Layout Tab (paper space) are ignored.
You can view and edit the objects, then save them to a new drawing or save
them back to their original drawing. See Editing and Saving Objects in Attached
Drawings (page 456).
Markup Objects
Because markup objects are not stored in the drawing file, you cannot query
these objects. To copy them from an attached drawing to the current drawing,
open the other drawing directly and copy the markup objects. Then paste
them into the current drawing.
To create a query to retrieve information from attached drawings
1 Open a drawing.
2 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click the Drawings folder.
Click Define/Modify Drawing Set.
3 Make sure the drawings you want to query are attached and active.
4 In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query, and then click Define.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 799
5 To zoom to the extents of all active drawings, click Zoom Ext in the
Define Query dialog box.
6 Choose a Query Type to .
7 If you want, define additional conditions.
8 If you want, .
9 Select a Query Mode to .
10 If you plan to use the query again, .
11 Click Execute Query.
You can view and edit the objects, then save them to a new file or save them
back to their original file.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Defining Drawing Queries
You can define queries to retrieve specific drawing objects or drawing
information.
NOTE These procedures apply only to drawing objects.
800 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To define drawing queries
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Overview of Defining Drawing Queries
When you define a query, you specify the criteria for selecting objects in one
or more drawings. You can use four types of criteria: location, property, data,
and SQL.
To define a query condition for a drawing query
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 In the Define Query dialog box (page 1203), select a Query Type to define
a condition for your query based on:
■ Location (page 804)— such as inside a window you define.
■ Property (page 806)— such as color, layer, or elevation.
■ Data (page 810)— information stored with the object
■ SQL (page 814)— information stored in external databases
3 To add conditions (page 817), choose And or Or, and choose a query type.
To group conditions, select the first and last condition in the group. Click
Group. Conditions inside the parentheses are evaluated first.
4 Select a Query Mode.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 801
5 Click Execute Query.
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Finding All Drawing Objects in a Specified Location
Location conditions retrieve drawing objects from a specified location in the
drawings.
Example: Find all roads within 100 meters of a power line or all parcels within
a specific section of the drawing.
802 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
In the following illustrations, the objects that are retrieved are highlighted.
Location Types
Bufferfence
Circle
Fence
Point
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 803
Location Types
Polygon
Window
All
To retrieve drawing objects based on their location
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 To zoom to the extents of all active drawings, click Zoom Ext.
3 Click Location.
4 In the Location Condition dialog box (page 1213), select a boundary and
a selection type.
5 Click Define<. Specify the boundary.
6 In the Define Query dialog box, select a query mode.
804 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
7 Click Execute Query.
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Finding All Drawing Objects Containing a Specific
Property
Property conditions retrieve drawing objects based on Autodesk Map 3D object
properties such as color, elevation, layer, or linetype
Example: Search for objects on a given layer or of a specified color.
You can use more than one object property in a query, but you must define
them one condition at a time.
Object Properties vs. Layer Properties
Some properties, such as Color or Linetype, are often specified BYLAYER, that
is, the attribute is set based on the value of the layer rather than the object
itself. These objects are not retrieved if you specify a particular color, for
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 805
instance, in the property query. Instead, you must specify BYLAYER in the
property query to retrieve these objects.
For example, querying objects with a DASHED linetype retrieves only objects
that have that explicit property, not objects that have that property because
they reside on a layer with a DASHED linetype.
If the current drawing does not have a matching layer, queried objects will
be displayed according to the characteristics of the layer in the attached
drawing. If the active drawing has a matching layer, the queried objects will
be displayed according to the characteristics of the layer in the current drawing.
Defining Numeric Range Property Queries
To define a numeric range property condition, combine condition statements
that define the upper and lower limit of the range. For example, to retrieve
objects with an elevation between 21.0 and 47.0, use the following condition
statements:
Property: ELEVATION > 21
AND Property: ELEVATION < 47
For information on creating multiple conditions and combining them in one
query, see Combining Drawing Query Conditions (page 815).
To retrieve drawing objects based on their properties
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 Click Property.
3 In the Property Condition dialog box (page 1218), select a property.
4 Select an operator.
5 Enter a value for the property.
To select from a list of available values, click Values. For example, if you
select the property "layer," clicking Values displays a list of all layers in
the active attached drawings.
You can use wild-card characters to enter values for the following
properties: Block Name, Color, Text Style, Object Type, Group, Layer,
Object Class, Linetype, and Plotstyle.
6 Click OK.
7 In the Define Query dialog box, select a query mode.
806 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
8 Click Execute Query.
Notes
■ If you query against Object Type and IMAGE is not listed even though you
have a raster image in an attached drawing, exit the query dialog boxes.
Go to the Map 3D for Drawings workspace. Click Setup menu ➤ Image
Management. In the Image Manager dialog box, click OK. Then define the
query again.
■ If the property query you define uses text values, you can set an option to
specify case-sensitive text. See Setting Query Options (DWG) (page 187).
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 807
Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific
Data
Data conditions retrieve drawing objects based on nongraphic information
associated with the objects.
808 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
If you store pipe diameter information in an object data table, you can use a data
condition to retrieve pipe objects based on the diameter information attached to each
pipe object. In this case, all pipes with a diameter of 8 or greater are retrieved. Move
your cursor over the image to see the results.
NOTE You cannot retrieve objects based on constant block attributes.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 809
See Also
■ You must define and attach the data to objects before you can use a data
condition. For more information see Editing Object Data (page 674), External
Databases (page 370), and Using Object Classification (page 662).
■ The Database Link option tests the link data stored on the object, not the
data in the database table. To retrieve objects based on data in the linked
database table, create a SQL condition (page 811).
To retrieve drawing objects based on their object data
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 Click Data.
3 In the Data Condition dialog box (page 1201), select the type of data to
query.
4 Specify the specific data to query.
■ For object class, select the object class of the objects to retrieve. Then,
under Properties, select the specific properties to query.
■ For object data, select the table and field to query.
Note that if two attached drawings have a table with the same name,
Autodesk Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first
drawing you activate.
■ For database link data, select the link template associated with the
objects you want to retrieve. Under Key Columns, select the key
column to query.
Because a query retrieves objects from attached drawings, only link
templates defined in your attached drawing are displayed in the list.
■ For block attributes, select the block to query. Under Attribute Tags,
select the attribute tag to query, or select * from the Blocks list to see
a list of all the attribute tags of all the blocks in the active drawing.
5 Specify the condition that the data must match by selecting an operator
and entering a value in the Value field.
For example, to find all values greater than 8, select the > operator and
enter 8 in the Value field.
For information on using wild cards, see Wildcard Characters (page 959).
810 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
6 Click OK.
7 In the Define Query dialog box, select a query mode.
8 Click Execute Query.
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific
SQL Information
A SQL condition checks information in an external database and retrieves
drawing objects that are linked to records that match the condition.
Example: If a database table stores information on supplier, owner, and cost
of furniture in a set of drawings, you can define a query to show all chairs
purchased from a specific supplier.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 811
812 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Use a query with a SQL condition to retrieve objects based on the value in a linked data
base record. In this example, all pads with a phase type of 'C' are retrieved. Move your
cursor over the image to see the results.
NOTE If you are retrieving objects from attached drawings, you must have the
same data base attached in both the attached drawing and the current drawing.
You must link SQL data to objects before you can use a SQL query. For more
information about connecting to external databases and linking records to
objects in your drawings, see .
Specifying a Value
The operator and the value define the condition that the value in the table
must match. For example, if you select the operator < (less than) and enter a
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 813
value of 5, the condition retrieves all objects linked to records in which the
value in the table is less than five.
■ The value must match the data type of the column. For example, if the
column requires a name, enter a text string.
■ Enclose string values in single quotes. If the string contains a single
quotation mark, precede the single quotation mark with a single quotation
mark.
■ For dates, use the format TIMESTAMP'YYYY-MM-DD 00:00:00', for example
"Date" > TIMESTAMP`1990-05-30 11:45:00'
Troubleshooting
Because a SQL condition relies on the ability to connect to a data source, the
condition will not work if any part of the connection is broken:
■ The query must specify a valid link template.
■ The data source must be attached and connected.
■ The data source must be in the same directory as when you connected to
it. (You must not have moved it after connecting.)
■ Links must exist between drawing objects and records in the specified data
source.
To retrieve drawing objects based on linked SQL data
1 Before you execute a query with a SQL condition, be sure the appropriate
data source is attached and connected.
2 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
3 Click SQL.
4 In the SQL Link Condition dialog box (page 1228), select the link template
for the table you want to search.
If you are querying attached drawings, the link template list includes
only link templates defined in the active attached drawings.
5 Create a SQL condition by selecting a column, an operator, and a value.
To type the condition, click Type Condition.
814 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To reuse a condition you defined previously, click History. Select the
condition.
6 Click Add Condition to add the condition to the Current SQL Condition
list.
7 To add more conditions, select And or Or and create another condition.
8 When you finish building the SQL condition, click OK.
9 In the Define Query dialog box, select a query mode.
10 Click Execute Query.
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Combining Drawing Query Conditions
You can combine query conditions when creating a query to retrieve drawing
objects.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 815
Example: Combine a property condition with a location condition to find all
utility poles within 100 meters of a road.
When you combine conditions, use Or to specify the union of the conditions,
use And to specify the intersection of the condition, use Not to exclude specific
objects from the query.
■ And — Finds objects only if both conditions are true. For example,
Property: LAYER = First Floor
AND Property: COLOR = BLUE
finds only blue objects on the First Floor layer.
■ Or — Finds objects if either condition is true. For example,
Property: LAYER = First Floor
OR Property: COLOR = BLUE
finds all objects on the First Floor layer (of any color) and all blue objects
on any layer.
■ And Not — Finds objects only if the first condition is true and the second
condition is false. For example,
Property: LAYER = First Floor
AND NOT Property: COLOR = BLUE
finds objects on the First Floor layer that are any color except blue.
■ Or Not — Finds objects if the first condition is true or the second condition
is false. For example,
Property: LAYER = First Floor
OR NOT Property: COLOR = BLUE
finds all objects on the First Floor layer (of any color) and all objects on
other layers that are not blue.
You can use Not by itself to retrieve all except a specific set of objects. For
example, the query definition, Not Property: Layer = Furniture retrieves all
objects except those on the Furniture layer.
If you use more than two or three conditions, it is a good idea to group the
conditions. Conditions inside the group are evaluated first.
If conditions are not grouped, Not conditions are evaluated first, then And,
and last Or.
816 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To combine query conditions in drawing queries
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 Choose a Query Type to .
3 In the Define Query dialog box (page 1203), under Query Type, select a
joining operator:
■ And — Finds objects only if both conditions are true.
■ Or — Finds objects if either condition is true.
■ And Not — Finds objects only if the first condition is true and the
second condition is false.
■ Or Not — Finds objects if either the first condition is true or the second
condition is false.
4 Choose a Query Type to define the next condition for your query.
5 To group conditions, select the first and last condition in the group. Click
Group. Conditions inside the parentheses are evaluated first.
6 Select a Query Mode.
7 Click Execute Query.
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 817
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Editing a Drawing Query Condition
When you edit a drawing query, you can modify a condition but you cannot
change its type (location, property, data, or SQL). If you want a different query
condition type, you must delete the existing condition and define a new one.
You can also change the joining operator (And, Or, Not) for a condition.
To edit a drawing query condition
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 To modify a saved query, in the Define Query dialog box (page 1203), click
Load. Select the query.
3 In the Define Query dialog box, under Current Query, select the query
condition you want to edit. Click Edit.
To change the joining operator, select the new joining operator before
you click Edit.
4 Make any changes.
For example, if you select a location condition and click Edit, the Location
Condition dialog box appears. Click Show to view or change the boundary
of the location condition and press Enter to return to the Location
Condition dialog box.
5 Click OK.
The revised query appears under Current Query.
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
818 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing
Objects
Use the property alteration feature to modify drawing objects as they are
retrieved by a query.
NOTE These procedures apply only to drawing objects.
To modify objects as they are retrieved by a query
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 819
Overview of Altering the Properties of Queried
Drawing Objects
Use the property alteration feature to modify the properties of queried drawing
objects as they are queried into the current drawing.
You can modify object properties such as color, linetype, or polyline width,
or add text.
Example: You have a set of city maps that show roads as black polylines of
the same width. You can plot a map for a contractor that shows the roads to
be repaired in red and roads to be inspected in blue. You can alter the width
of the polylines to show road widths. You can also add text to identify elements
of your drawing.
Property alteration involves the following three general steps:
■ Define a query that retrieves the objects you want to alter.
■ Create a property alteration definition that specifies how to alter the
retrieved objects.
■ Execute the query in Draw mode. You cannot use property alteration in
Preview or Report mode queries.
Autodesk Map 3D performs the query, applies the property alteration definition
to the queried objects, and displays the modified objects in the current
drawing.
To alter the properties of queried drawing objects
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 In the Define Query dialog box (page 1203), load or create a query.
3 Under Options, click Alter Properties.
4 In the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1226), select the property
to alter.
For example, to change the color of queried objects, select Color.
5 In the Expression area, specify how to alter the property.
■ To modify every queried object in the same way, select the new value
for the property.
820 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
For example, if you are altering the color of objects and you want to
change the color of all queried objects to red, click Values and select
Red.
■ To modify each object using a value that is stored in an associated
data source, select the data source, such as Property (page 824), Data
(page 826), or SQL (page 828), and specify the location of the data.
For example, if you store color values in an object data table, click
Data and select the table and column that contains the color values.
Use this method only if the data values stored in the data source
exactly specify the value to use. For example, to alter the color of
objects, the data source must specify a valid color value.
■ To modify each object based on other properties or on associated data,
select the data source and define a range table (page 830).
For example, if you store installation dates in an associated data source,
you can modify the color of objects based on their installation date.
To do this, first select the data source for the installation dates, then
define a range table that specifies which colors to use for each range
of installation dates.
■ You can add text to queried objects (page 834) or add a hatch pattern
to objects (page 838).
6 Click Add to add the property alteration to the Current Property
Alterations list.
7 When you finish defining the property alteration, click OK.
8 Make sure Alter Properties is selected when you execute the query.
9 Under Query Mode, select Draw. You cannot use property alteration in
Preview mode or Report mode.
10 Click Execute Query.
Autodesk Map 3D performs the query, applies the property alteration definition
to the queried objects, and displays the altered objects in the current drawing.
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 821
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Altering All Drawing Objects in the Same Way
A simple property alteration modifies all queried drawing objects in the same
way.
Here are some examples of using simple property alterations:
■ Add a hatch pattern to all water pipes older than fifty years.
■ Find every property lot touching a line that represents the path of the new
highway. Outline the lots in red and add a hatch pattern.
To alter all retrieved drawing objects in the same way
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 In the Define Query dialog box, load or create a query that retrieves the
objects you want to alter.
3 Under Options, click Alter Properties.
4 In the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1226), select the property
to alter.
5 In the Expression area, specify how to alter the property.
822 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
For example, to change the color of all queried object to red, enter either
red or 1 (the numerical equivalent of red), or click Values to select from
a list of colors.
6 Click Add to add the property alteration to the Current Property
Alterations list.
7 When you finish defining the property alteration, click OK.
8 Make sure Alter Properties is selected when you execute the query.
9 Under Query Mode, select Draw. You cannot use property alteration in
Preview mode or Report mode.
10 Click Execute Query.
See also:
■
■
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Altering Properties Using Object Properties
You can define a property alteration that modifies a property of queried
drawing objects based on another property of the objects.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 823
Example: If the layers in your attached drawings are named using numbers,
you could color objects based on the layer they are on. To do this, under Select
Property, select Color as the property to alter. In the expression area, click
Property and choose Layer as the new value to use for the color.
The property you specify in the Expression area must have a value that can
be used for the property you are altering. For example, if your layers are not
named using numbers but instead use names such as Roads and Pipes, the
example above would not work. (To create a modification based on these layer
names, use a range table, where you can specify that objects on the layer
named Roads be colored red, and objects on the layer named Pipes be colored
blue. For more information, see Creating a Range Table (page 830).)
You can also modify a property based on the same property. For example, to
double the scale of selected objects, select Scale in the Select Property area as
the property to change. In the Expression area, select Scale as the property to
base the change on and multiply it by two. The expression would look like
this:
(* x.scale 2)
Dot Variables
■ Use the .Dwgname dot variable to get the drawing name for a queried
object.
■ Use the .Elevation dot variable to get the Z-values for objects.
■ Use the .Height dot variable to get the text height for objects.
For a full listing of the dot variables that you can use for property alteration,
see Dot Variables (page 969).
See also:
■
■
To alter retrieved objects based on their properties
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 In the Define Query dialog box, load or create a query that retrieves the
objects you want to alter.
824 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
3 In the Define Query dialog box, click Alter Properties.
4 In the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1226), under Select Property,
select the property to change.
For example, if you have color-coded the objects in your drawing and
you now want to move objects to layers based on their color, you would
select Layer as the property to change.
5 In the Expression area, click Properties and select the property that you
want to base the change on.
In this example, we want to move objects based on their current color,
so select Color.
Click OK to close the Select Property dialog box.
6 Click Add to add the property alteration to the Current Property Alteration
list.
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 825
Altering Object Properties Using Object Data
You can define a property alteration that modifies queried drawing objects
based on data that is stored on the objects, such as object data, attribute data,
or link data.
NOTE The value stored on the object must be a valid value for the property that
you are altering. For example, if you have selected to alter the property Color, the
value stored on the object must be a valid color name or number. If the values do
not match, use a range table (page 830).
See also:
■
■
■
To alter the properties of drawing objects based on their object data
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 In the Define Query dialog box, load or create a query that retrieves the
objects you want to alter.
3 In the Define Query dialog box, click Alter Properties.
4 In the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1226), under Select Property,
select the property to change.
For example, if you store pipe diameters as object data, you can display
each pipe with a polyline width that matches the pipe diameter. In this
example, you would select Width as the property to change.
5 In the Expression area, click Data.
6 Select one of the following:
■ Attribute — Select a block attribute tag. This will appear in the
Expression box as @BlockTagName.
■ Database Link — Select a link template and key column. These will
appear in the Expression box as &KeyColumn@LinkTemplate.
■ Object Data — Select an object data table and field. These will appear
in the Expression box as :FIELD@TABLENAME.
826 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
7 Click OK.
8 Click Add.
The property alteration definition is displayed in the Current Property
Alterations list. When you execute the query with Alter Properties selected,
Autodesk Map 3D changes the selected property of queried objects based
on the value stored in the specified data field.
See also:
■
■
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data
You can define a property alteration that modifies queried drawing objects
based on data stored in a linked database.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 827
Using Property Alteration, parcels not zoned for residential are displayed with a magenta
solid fill, based on an external database record value.
For example, you could retrieve a set of pipes and display each pipe in a color
based on the pipe's diameter.
For information on creating and using a link template, see Linking Database
Records to Objects (page 315).
To alter retrieved drawing objects based on linked SQL data
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 In the Define Query dialog box, load or create a query that retrieves the
objects you want to alter.
3 In the Define Query dialog box, click Alter Properties.
4 In the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1226), under Select Property,
select the property to change.
For example, to modify the color of retrieved objects, select Color as the
property to change.
5 Click SQL.
6 Select a link template.
828 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
7 Select the external database column whose value you want to use as a
value in the expression.
8 Click OK.
The SQL column and link template are displayed under Expression in
the Set Property Alterations dialog box, preceded by an ampersand (&).
The link template is preceded by an at (@) symbol, for example,
&Diameter@PIPES.
You can also enter the SQL data variable directly in the Expression box.
9 Click Add.
The property alteration definition is added to the Current Property
Alterations list.
When you execute the query with Alter Properties selected, Autodesk
Map 3D changes the queried objects based on the value stored in the
external database.
For more information on connecting to and using external databases, see .
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 829
Creating a Range Table
A range table specifies a range of actions to take depending on the value of
the specified data or property.
■ You can change the color of drawing objects based on their elevation
■ If you have a street map and use object data to store information about
pavement quality, you can move each street to a layer that corresponds
to the pavement quality.
■ If you have a county map showing cities, and you use an external database
to store population data for each city, you can modify the block symbol
for each city based on its population size.
Click Creating a Range Table (Example) (page 831)to display an example of
creating a range table for a property alteration.
To create a range table
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 In the Define Query dialog box, click Alter Properties.
3 If you are creating a range table for a property alteration, in the Set
Property Alterations dialog box (page 1226), select the property to alter.
4 Move the cursor to the Expression box and specify the location of the
value on which to base the alteration.
Enter a dot variable, a field name, or other valid expression. For example,
to modify the color of an object based on its elevation, enter .ELEVATION
in the Expression box.
5 Click Range.
6 In the Define Range Table dialog box, click New to create a new range
table.
7 Enter a name for the range table and click OK.
8 In the Define Range Table dialog box, select an operator and a value for
the first condition.
These determines which objects fall in this range.
9 Specify the return value for the first condition.
830 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
The return value specifies how to modify the selected property. For
example, if you are modifying the color of an object based on its elevation,
enter the color in the Return Value box.
NOTE In the Expression Value box and Return Value box, you can enter only
simple expressions. You cannot enter compound expressions.
10 Click Add to add the condition to the Current Range Table Definition.
When you run the property alteration, each object that has the specified
expression value (for example, elevation > 200) will be modified according
to the specified return value (for example, it will be colored red).
11 Specify the remaining conditions.
12 Click OK to close the Set Property Alteration dialog box.
13 Make sure Alter Properties is selected.
14 Click Execute Query to retrieve the objects and alter them.
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Creating a Range Table (Example)
The following example creates a range table for a property alteration. To display
the procedure, click To create a range table (page 830).
To create a range table (example)
The example range table colors lots larger than 6000 red and lots 6000 or
smaller blue.
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 In the Define Query dialog box, click Property Alteration.
3 In the Property Alteration dialog box, select the property Color.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 831
4 In the Expression area, click Property and select Area. Click OK.
5 Click Ranges.
6 In the Define Range Table dialog box, click New.
7 Enter the name Color and click OK to close the New Range Table dialog
box.
8 Enter the description Color areas over 6000.
9 In the Condition area, choose the <= operator.
10 In the Expression Value area, enter 6000.
11 In the Return Value area, enter Blue.
12 Click Add.
13 In the Condition area, choose the > operator.
14 In the Expression Value area, leave the 6000 alone.
15 In the Return Value area, enter Red.
16 Click Add.
17 Click OK to close the Define Range Table dialog box.
18 Make sure the Color range table is selected.
19 Click Add to add the color property alteration to the Current Property
Alterations list.
20 Click OK to close the Set Property Alteration dialog box.
21 Make sure Alter Properties is selected.
22 Click Execute Query to retrieve the objects and alter them.
See also:
■
■
■
832 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Defining an Expression
Use Expression Evaluator (page 963) when you want Autodesk Map 3D to
evaluate drawing data from different sources, or to evaluate data that is
different for each object, such as object properties, block attributes, or object
data attached to the object.
To define an expression
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 In the Define Query dialog box, load or create a query.
3 Under Options, click Alter Properties.
4 In the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1226), select the property
to alter.
For example, to change the color of queried objects, select Color.
5 In the Expression area, enter an expression (page 963).
6 Click Add to add the property alteration to the Current Property
Alterations list.
7 When you finish defining the property alteration, click OK.
8 Make sure Alter Properties is selected when you execute the query.
9 Under Query Mode, select Draw. You cannot use property alteration in
Preview mode or Report mode.
10 Click Execute Query.
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 833
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Adding Text to Queried Drawing Objects
You can add text to queried objects during the property alteration process.
Example: For all retrieved pipes, print the pipe type and diameter.
You can control the text, text height, insertion point, justification, text style,
layer, color, and rotation for each text object.
Selected pipes are labeled with their length.
To add text to retrieved drawing objects
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
834 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
2 Create or load a query that will retrieve the objects you want to add text
to.
3 In the Define Query dialog box, click Alter Properties.
4 In the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1226), click Text.
5 In the Define Text dialog box (page 1210), specify the text.
Enter text in the Text Value box, or specify the data to use for the text
by clicking Expression. For example, click Expression and select Layer to
display the name of the layer on each object found by the query.
6 Set other text options, such as the size, location, color, layer, and rotation.
7 Click OK to close the Define Text dialog box.
8 Click OK to close the Property Alteration dialog box.
9 Make sure Alter Properties is selected.
10 Click Execute Query to retrieve the objects and alter them.
See also:
■ To define text location (page 615)
■
■
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 835
Modifying the Text Insertion Point for a Drawing
Object
The label point of a drawing object specifies the starting point for text added
during a query property alteration. The default label point is the centroid of
the object. You can redefine the label point using the Create ➤ Map Labelpoint
Location menu option, which is available in the Map 3D for Drawings
workspace.
Move the label point from its default location at the center of the arc to a different
location. Move your cursor over the image to see the results.
RELATED To use the label point, choose the .LABELPT dot variable in the Define
Text dialog box when you create the Property Alteration definition in the Define
Query dialog box. For more information, see Adding Text to Queried Drawing
Objects (page 834).
836 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To define the label point for a drawing object
1 In the Map 3D for Drawings workspace, click Create menu ➤ Map
Labelpoint Location.
2 Select the object.
3 Click the place on the object where you want the label point to be located.
To use this label point as the text insertion point during a property alteration
(page 834), choose LABELPT as the insert point.
Quick Reference
ADETEXTLOC
Redefines the default label point of an object for text
Menu Create ➤ Map Labelpoint Location
Icon
Map Labelpoint Location
Command Line ADETEXTLOC
Dialog Box ADETEXTLOC (Map Labelpoint Location command)
(page 1175)
Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch
Pattern
You can specify a hatch pattern to fill closed polylines and circles during the
property alteration process. This applies only to drawing objects.
Example: Create a query that retrieves all land parcels valued above $450,000
and displays them with a distinguishing pattern.
NOTE If you set the Create Associative Hatch Objects option on the Query tab
of the Autodesk Map Options dialog box, Autodesk Map 3D creates associative
hatch objects (page 188).
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 837
Closed polylines retrieved by a query are filled with a magenta solid hatch pattern.
To fill queried drawing objects with a hatch pattern
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 Create or load a query that will retrieve the objects you want to fill.
3 In the Define Query dialog box, click Alter Properties.
4 In the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1226), click Hatch.
5 In the Hatch Options dialog box (page 1212), enter a pattern name, click
Pattern to select a pattern from the set of hatch patterns, or click
Expression to select a data value specifies the hatch name (for example,
select a field in an object data table).
Autodesk Map 3D displays the selected hatch pattern. ISO hatch patterns
are not displayed.
If you do not enter a pattern, Autodesk Map 3D uses a fill that appears
solid.
6 Enter a scale, rotation, layer, and color for the hatch pattern.
7 Click OK to close the Hatch Options dialog box.
838 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Closed polylines and circles that are retrieved during the query are filled
with the specified hatch pattern.
8 Click OK to close the Property Alteration dialog box.
9 Make sure Alter Properties is selected.
10 Under Query Mode, select Draw.
11 Click Execute Query to retrieve the objects and alter them.
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Changing the Color of Blocks
When you use the Color option of the Set Property Alterations dialog box,
the colors of objects change to the color you specify. However, if the queried
objects include blocks whose color is set to BYLAYER, the objects in the block
retain their original color. To have them use the color you specify, change the
block color to BYBLOCK.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 839
To change the block color in your current drawing
1 Use the INSERT command to add another instance of the block.
2 Explode the new block.
3 On the Command line, enter chprop
Select objects: Select the objects in the exploded block
Enter property to change (Color/LAyer/LType/ltScale/LWeight/Thickness)?
C
Enter new color <varies>: BYBLOCK
Enter property to change (Color/LAyer/LType/ltScale/LWeight/Thickness)?
Press Enter
4 Redefine the block with the BLOCK command and select the objects in
the exploded block.
This procedure redefines all instances of the block. The blocks then show the
color you defined in the Set Property Alterations dialog box.
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Quick Reference
CHPROP
Changes the color, layer, linetype, linetype scale factor, lineweight, thickness,
and plot style of an object
Command Line CHPROP
Modifying a Property Alteration Definition
After you've run a query, you may decide to modify a property alteration
definition. Or you may want to create a new property alteration based on an
existing query.
840 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
After you modify the definition, you can save the changes to the current query,
or you can save the changes to a new query.
To modify a property alteration definition
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 In the Define Query dialog box, load the query to modify.
3 Click the Alter Properties button.
4 In the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1226), under Current
Property Alterations, select the property alteration definition to change.
5 Double-click the definition.
The value for the property alteration definition appears in the Expression
box and the appropriate property is selected.
6 Edit or insert a new value and click Update.
The revised property alteration definition appears under Current Property
Alterations. If you click Add instead of Update, the revised expression is
added to the existing expression in the list.
7 Click OK.
8 In the Define Query dialog box, click Save.
To save the changes to a new query, enter a new name and description.
Click OK.
9 In the Define Query dialog box, click OK to save your changes without
running the query.
See also:
■
■
■ To save a query (page 144)
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 841
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Executing Drawing Queries
After you define a query to retrieve drawing objects, you can execute it in
Preview, Draw, or Report mode.x
To execute a drawing query
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
See also:
Overview of Executing Queries
After you define a query to retrieve drawing objects, you can execute it in one
of three modes:
■ Preview mode — Displays the objects on screen, but does not retrieve them.
When you change the screen, the objects disappear.
Use Preview to test your query.
842 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■ Draw Mode — Retrieves objects (copies them into the current drawing).
You can manipulate and edit them, save them back to their attached
drawings, save them to the current drawing, or save them to a new drawing.
The objects are not changed in the attached drawings unless you save your
changes back to the attached drawings.
■ Report Mode — Writes specified information about the objects to a separate
file.
Once Autodesk Map 3D copies the objects that meet the query criteria into
the current drawing, it does not duplicate those objects if you run the query
again. If an object meets the criteria of more than one query, Autodesk Map
3D retrieves only one copy of that object. Therefore, you will never have
multiple copies of the same object in a drawing.
To select a query mode for retrieving drawing objects
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 Define or load a query.
3 Under Query Mode, select Preview (page 844), Draw (page 846), or Report
(page 933).
If you select Report mode, click Options to define a report template (page
935).
4 Click Execute Query.
See also:
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 843
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Running a Drawing Query in Preview Mode
Preview mode provides a quick preview of the drawing objects the query will
display in the current drawing. You can run a query in Preview mode and
check the objects the query produces. If there are too few or too many objects,
or objects are displayed in the wrong location, revise the query as necessary.
NOTE You can plot the results of a Preview query. If you assigned colors to
different pen widths in your plotter setup, plotting the results of a Preview query
recognizes those plotter assignments for different pen widths.
Queries in Preview mode show objects on layers that are locked; however,
Preview mode does not show objects on layers that are Off or Frozen. Although
you see many elements in the current drawing following a Preview query,
Autodesk Map 3D treats each set of objects as a single object from each
drawing. If you attempt to select several objects, Autodesk Map 3D reports
“one object found” for each of the attached drawings queried. The display of
objects is temporary and disappears when you redraw or regenerate. You can
zoom and pan to examine the queried objects, but you cannot edit them.
NOTE You can set the Query option Show Insertion Point Only to display blocks
as insertion points instead of entire objects for Preview queries. See .
When referencing blocks or images with the same name but with different
paths, a Preview query shows both blocks or images. In Draw mode, the
geometry or image displayed is based on the first definition processed.
To run a drawing query in Preview mode
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 Define or load a query.
3 Under Query Mode, select Preview.
4 Click Execute Query.
844 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To clear objects queried with Preview mode, use the REDRAW or REGEN
commands. You can also click Redraw < in the Define Query dialog box.
See also:
■
■
■
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Running a Drawing Query in Draw Mode
Draw mode retrieves drawing objects from attached drawings and copies them
into the current drawing. You can save the objects in your current drawing,
or you can edit the objects and save them back to the attached drawings. If
you decide to edit the queried objects and you have set object locking in
System Options, Autodesk Map 3D locks the individual objects so other users
cannot edit them.
Queries in Draw mode retrieve objects from layers that are Off, Locked, or
Frozen. Whether the objects remain on layers that are Off, Locked, or Frozen
when they are brought into the current drawing depends on the layers in the
current drawing: if the layers exist in the current drawing, the objects take on
the characteristics of the existing layers; if the layers do not exist, Autodesk
Map 3D creates new layers with the characteristics of the attached drawing
layers.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 845
Autodesk Map 3D preserves the status of objects on locked layers when it
copies them into the current drawing. When you retrieve objects that are on
locked layers you cannot save changes back to the attached drawing. If you
want to save changes back, open the attached drawing and unlock the layer
before performing the query.
Autodesk Map 3D does not place duplicate copies of objects in the current
drawing. Once an object is in the drawing, subsequent queries will not retrieve
that object again. See Sharing Attached Drawings (page 453)
NOTE In Draw mode, if text is queried into the current drawing and the font is
missing, Autodesk Map 3D substitutes another font. The font used is set by the
FONTALT system variable.
NOTE When referencing blocks or images with the same name but with different
paths, the geometry or image displayed is based on the first definition processed.
A Preview query displays both blocks or images.
To run a drawing query in Draw mode
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click Current Query, and
then click Define.
2 Define or load a query.
3 Under Query Mode, select Draw.
4 Click Execute Query.
Autodesk Map 3D copies the queried objects from the attached drawings to
the current drawing.
Autodesk Map 3D does not duplicate objects that have already been queried
into the current drawing.
See also:
■
■
■
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
846 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Improving Drawing Query Performance
You can improve the performance of a drawing query by creating an index
or by removing an assigned coordinate system.
NOTE The following apply only to drawing data.
To improve performance
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Creating a Drawing Index
To reduce the amount of time it takes to perform a drawing query, create an
index. Instead of searching all location, property, object data, or database links
to find matching data, Autodesk Map 3D searches only the relevant index.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 847
NOTE Whenever you open a drawing that includes database links, Autodesk Map
3D automatically creates a database link index and keeps it in memory. To save
this database index to the drawing, select the Store Links Index In Drawing File
option. To set this option, select AutoCAD Options from the Setup menu. Select
the System tab. This feature is especially useful when you edit your attached
drawings directly.
You can create the following kinds of index:
■ Location index — Divides drawings into regions. Autodesk Map 3D targets
just the regions included in the Location query.
■ Property index — Organizes object properties. Autodesk Map 3D targets
only the objects with the properties you specify.
■ SQL Links index — Organizes the drawing's link templates and key fields.
Autodesk Map 3D targets only the objects with the link templates and key
field values you specify.
■ EED index — Organizes Extended Entity Data (EED) attached to objects
in drawings created in AutoCAD Data Extension (ADE) 1.0. You cannot
create EED in the current release of Autodesk Map 3D.
■ Object Data index — Organizes object data. Autodesk Map 3D targets only
the objects with the object data you specify. After you generate an object
data index, a status message appears beside each indexed field name. The
status "Current" means that the object data index on that field is valid and
consistent with the attached object data. The status "Out-of-Date" means
that the object data index on that field is not consistent with the attached
object data. An index could become out-of-date if you modify objects
without first loading Autodesk Map 3D.
To create a drawing index
1 In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings. Click Maintenance.
2 In the Drawing Maintenance dialog box (page 1265), under Active Drawings,
select the drawings for which you want to create indexes.
If another user has activated the drawing, you cannot create an index for
it.
3 Click Drawing Index.
If the selected drawing does not have an index or the index is out of date,
the check box beside the index type under Generate Index is selected.
848 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
4 In the Index Maintenance dialog box, under Generate Index, select the
type of index to create.
To generate an object data index, click Object Data. Select the object data
table and fields. Click OK.
5 Click OK.
6 Click OK to confirm.
Autodesk Map 3D creates the type of index you specified for each of the
selected drawings.
7 Click Close.
NOTE When you create an index, you may receive a warning message that
Autodesk Map 3D cannot calculate object extents. This indicates that a
third-party application might have created the object and that the application
is not loaded or the object may not support the geometric extents
methodology of Autodesk Map 3D.
To remove a drawing index
1 In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings. Click Maintenance.
2 In the Drawing Maintenance dialog box, under Active Drawings, select
the drawings for which you want to remove indexes.
3 Click Drawing Index.
4 In the Index Maintenance dialog box, under Remove Index, select the
type of index to remove.
To remove an object data index, click Object Data. Select the object data
table and fields. Click OK.
5 Click OK to confirm.
Autodesk Map 3D removes the index you specified for each of the selected
drawings.
6 Click Close.
Quick Reference
ADEDWGMAINT
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 849
Removes locks from objects
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing Maintenance
Command Line ADEDWGMAINT
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Maintenance
Dialog Box Drawing Maintenance dialog box (page 1265)
Removing an Assigned Coordinate System
When you retrieve data from an attached drawing, the data is automatically
transformed if the attached drawing uses one coordinate system and the
current drawing uses a different system. When data is saved back to the
attached drawing, the data is automatically transformed to match the
coordinate system of the attached drawing.
Performing these transformations can decrease performance when querying
objects. To speed up querying, you can remove an assigned coordinate system.
To remove an assigned coordinate system
1 In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing, and then click Coordinate
System.
2 In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box, under Current
Drawing or under Source Drawings, replace the code with a period (.) in
the Code box.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Menu Setup ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Icon
Assign Coordinate System
Command Line ADESETCRDSYS
850 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Dialog Box Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box (page
1008)
Troubleshooting Drawing Queries
This section presents several issues that can arise when you retrieve blocks,
text, externally referenced drawings (xrefs), groups, and hatch patterns from
drawings. The following information helps you deal with these issues.
Block Queries in Preview Mode
In Preview mode, you can display a queried block as a block or simply as an
"X" that signifies the block's insertion point. On the Query tab of the Autodesk
Map Options dialog box under Options, select or deselect Show Preview Block
As Point Only. To set this and other query options, see .
Block Attributes and Property Queries
When performing Property queries, you can query using block attributes, but
not constant attributes. You can define constant attributes that have the same
value for every occurrence of the block that contains them. However, Property
queries do not recognize constant attributes. Instead, use the block name in
the query.
You can, however, specify invisible attributes. An invisible attribute is not
displayed or plotted but is stored in the drawing file. For detailed information
on attributes, look up attributes in the index of the online help.
Queries with Blocks of the Same Name
When queries reference blocks with the same name that lie in two different
attached drawings, a Draw query references the block definition first queried
into the current drawing; a Preview query references the block definition in
the attached drawing.
For example, if a Draw query retrieves a block named parcel1 (a rectangular
parcel) from drawing one, and then a block named parcel1 (a square parcel)
from drawing two, the current drawing displays the rectangular parcel. The
block definition for parcel1 is already in the current drawing. A Preview query
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 851
displays both the rectangular parcel and the square parcel. Preview queries
create temporary objects referenced from the attached drawings.
NOTE The same considerations apply when referencing raster images with the
same name but with different paths. A Preview query displays both images. A
Draw query, displays the image based on the first definition processed.
Queries and Raster Images
Raster images attached to drawings using the IMAGEATTACH or MAPIINSERT
commands are objects that are part of the drawing. When queried, raster
images behave like blocks. Raster images resulting from a paste operation, that
is, an OLE frame, are not recognized as objects in queries.
When a raster image is queried during a Preview query that includes a
coordinate conversion or transformation, the image is not displayed.
When a raster image is queried during a Draw query that includes a coordinate
conversion or transformation, the object is transformed like a block insert,
around the insertion point.
Blocks and Property Alteration (Color)
When using Property Alteration to change the color of retrieved blocks, the
color of the components of the attached drawing block must be BYBLOCK.
Otherwise, no matter what color change you specify for the Property Alteration,
the block retains its original colors when queried.
Blocks and Property Alteration (Scale)
To set the scale of all the blocks retrieved by the current query to a scale of 2,
use Property Alteration and set Scale to 2. This sets the scale of all queried
blocks to 2 no matter what their current scale is.
To scale all blocks retrieved by the current query by a factor of 2, use Property
Alteration and set Scale to (* .XSCALE 2). This multiplies the existing scale of
each queried block by a factor of 2. Make sure that you leave a space between
the * and .XSCALE 2.
Property Alteration (Scale and Rotate)
In the Property Alteration dialog box, the Scale option applies only to blocks,
the Rotate option applies only to text and blocks.
852 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Thickness,Width, and Property Queries
You can use a Property query to query on extruded polyline thickness using
the Thickness option in the Property Condition dialog box. You cannot query
on polyline width. Autodesk Map 3D supports queries on Thickness for the
following kinds of objects: line, arc, text, circle, point, solid, 2D polyline, light
weight polyline, trace, and shape.
Querying Drawings with Xrefs
When you query attached drawings that contain xrefs, Autodesk Map 3D does
not copy the objects in the xref drawing into the current drawing. Instead,
only the name of the xref drawing appears at the xref insertion point in the
current drawing. To query the xref drawing, attach the drawing separately.
NOTE Queries in Preview mode do not display the xref drawing name, but queries
in Draw mode do.
Retrieving Groups of Objects
When you retrieve a group of objects, Autodesk Map 3D treats them as separate
and independent objects and then restores the group when you save the
objects back to the attached drawings, even if you edit the objects in the group.
However, if you create a new object in the current drawing, you cannot
associate it with the group to be saved back to the attached drawing.
Retrieving Hatched Areas
By default, Autodesk Map 3D retrieves hatched areas, solid objects, and raster
images using the bounding box, not the insertion point. To change the default,
use the Reference Entire Bounding Area For Objects option on the Autodesk
Map Options dialog box.
If you hatch objects that are formed by retrieving objects from multiple
attached drawings, the hatch associativity is lost when you save back.
Associative hatching is designed to work in a single drawing environment.
We recommend against querying, editing, and saving back associative hatches.
In most cases, hatch associativity is not maintained.
To set options for drawing queries
■ Click Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options. Click the tab you want.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 853
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Topologies are defined by a set of drawing objects and their relationships.
(Features are not included in topologies.)
After you create a topology in a drawing, you can analyze it to get useful
information about the spatial relationships between drawing objects.
Before you can use the topology analysis tools, you must create a topology
and make sure it is loaded. See Creating Topologies (page 528) and Loading or
Unloading Topologies (page 591).
NOTE The procedures below apply only to drawing objects.
To analyze drawing topologies
■ Overview of Analyzing Data
■ Getting Information About Features and Objects
■ Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
■ Creating Themes
■ Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
■ Finding and Selecting Data
■ Analyzing Drawing Topologies
854 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies
After you have created a drawing topology, you can use it to analyze spatial
relationships between the drawing objects. You can:
■ Extract or create new information about a set of objects
■ Determine the distribution of an object, or objects, over a network or area
■ Manage relationships between objects
■ Analyze the location, proximity, and orientation of objects
■ Evaluate suitability and capability, estimate, predict, and interpret
■ Identify conditions at a geographic location, in a spatial area, or along a
linear network, and predict effects of future events on these items
Different topologies can contain information on different aspects of a map.
For example, a political map shows county lines or cities and towns. A
geological map shows soil types or contour lines. A social map might show
the locations of crimes or high-income areas.
Before you can analyze a topology, you must create the topology and make
sure it is loaded. See Creating Topologies (page 528) and Loading or Unloading
Topologies (page 591).
NOTE The procedures below apply only to drawing objects.
You can analyze drawing topologies in the following ways:
■ Perform a shortest path trace (page 859)
■ Perform a best route analysis (page 864)
■ Perform a flood trace (page 868)
■ Overlay two topologies (page 873)
■ Dissolve a topology (page 877)
■ Buffer a topology (page 880)
■ Query a topology (page 886)
■ Save a temporary topology (page 887)
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies | 855
Quick Reference
MAPANBUFFER
Creates a buffer around an existing topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Analyze ➤ Buffer
Icon
Buffer Topology
Command Line MAPANBUFFER
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Analysis ➤ Buffer
Dialog Box Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box (page
1336)
MAPANDISSOLVE
Removes the boundaries between polygons in a topology or the nodes
between links that share a specific attribute
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Analyze ➤ Dissolve
Icon
Dissolve Topology
Command Line MAPANDISSOLVE
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network or polygon
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Dissolve
Dialog Box Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box (page
1341)
MAPANOVERLAY
Overlays one topology with another, and creates a new topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Analyze ➤ Overlay
Icon
Overlay Topology
856 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Command Line MAPANOVERLAY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Analysis ➤ Overlay
Dialog Box Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box
(page 1341)
MAPANTOPONET
Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace)
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Analyze ➤ Network Analysis
Icon
Network Analyze
Command Line MAPANTOPONET
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis
Dialog Box Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog
box (page 1329)
MAPTOPOLOAD
Loads a topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Analyze ➤ More
Topology Options ➤ Load Topology
Icon
Load Topology
Command Line MAPTOPOLOAD
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Administration ➤ Load Topology
Dialog Box Topology Selection dialog box (page 1351)
MAPTOPOQUERY
Queries topologies
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Setup ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Topology Query
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies | 857
Icon
Query Topology
Command Line MAPTOPOQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Analysis ➤ Topology Query
Dialog Box Topology Query dialog box (page 1348)
Performing a Shortest Path Trace
Using a network topology, which is made up of drawing objects and their
relationship data, you can calculate the shortest path between two points in
a drawing or determine the optimal route based on values of direction and
resistance. This process is known as a shortestpath trace analysis.
In a drawing of a street network, for example, you might find the shortest
path between a fire station and a school.
Shortest path trace based on resistance (time taken to traverse a segment).
You can specify a resistance for any link (page 547) in the network. This
resistance specifies the difficulty in traversing the link. The default resistance
is the length of the link.
858 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
If a path has a total resistance lower than the Minimum Resistance value, the
path is ignored. Similarly, if a path has a total resistance greater than the
Maximum Resistance value, the path is ignored.
Using SQL Data in Expressions
If you specify an expression that uses SQL data, the Link Template list includes
only link templates for the drawing where the topology is loaded:
■ In the source drawing, if you loaded the topology from source drawings
■ In the current drawing, if you loaded the topology from the current
drawing.
Travel Time in Network Topologies
To carry out network path trace analysis on a road network based on time
rather than distance, assign a speed or speed limit to each link (page 547) using
an object data field or a field in a linked external database. You then set the
Link Direct Resistance property to an expression that uses this speed limit
data, for example:
(/ .length (* :speed@street_data 5280))
which divides the length of each link by the average speed per foot (where
5280 is the number of feet in a mile).
The resulting analysis shows the shortest route, in terms of time, not distance,
to get from the first point to the second.
See also:
■ Specifying the Direction for a Link (page 543)
■ Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node (page 547)
■ Expression Evaluator (page 963)
■ Expression dialog box (page 988)
To perform a shortest path trace
1 Verify that you have a network topology available and it is loaded. See
Creating Topologies (page 528) and To load a topology (page 591).
2 In Map Explorer under Current Drawing, right-click a network topology,
and then click Analysis ➤ Network Analysis.
Performing a Shortest Path Trace | 859
3 In the Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box (page 1329),
click Shortest Path. Click Next.
4 In the Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box, click
Start Point, and the click (Select Point) to select the starting point in
the map. Press Enter to return to the dialog box.
Autodesk Map 3D uses the node closest to the location you clicked as the
start point. The coordinates of the point are shown in the list.
5 Click End Point. To select the ending point, click (Select Point). Press
Enter to return to the dialog box.
Autodesk Map 3D uses the node closest to the location you clicked as the
end point.
6 Review the start and end points you have specified. The coordinates of
the points are shown in the list.
■ To double-check a point's location in the map, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Preview.
■ To delete a point so that you can define a new one, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Delete.
7 Click Next.
8 In the Network Topology Analysis - Direction and Resistance dialog box,
select limits to put on the trace. For direction and resistance, you can
enter a constant or an expression that references an object data field or
linked external database column. The expression will be evaluated for
each link. Click (Expression Builder) to select data from a list.
■ Link Direction — Specify a direction for the trace. If you leave the
box blank, bi-directional (0) is used.
■ Reverse — Select this option to use the reverse of the direction
indicated in the Link Direction box.
■ Link Direct Resistance — Specify the resistance to travel in the
direction that a link was created. If you leave the box blank, the length
of the line (.LENGTH) is used.
■ Link Reverse Resistance — Specify the resistance in the opposite
direction along a link. If you leave the box blank, the length of the
line (.LENGTH) is used.
860 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■ Node Resistance — Specify the resistance to cross the node, for
example, resistance for a valve in a pipe network, or a junction in a
road network. If you leave the box blank, zero (0) is used.
■ Maximum Resistance and Minimum Resistance — Any path that has
a total resistance below the minimum or above the maximum is
ignored.
For example, if you stored the average speed limit for a link (in miles per
hour) in an object data table called street_data, you could find the fastest
route between two points by entering the expression (/ .length (*
:speed@street_data 5280) which divides the length of each link by the
average speed per foot (where 5280 is the number of feet in a mile).
9 Click Next.
10 In the Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box, indicate whether
or not to view the results of the trace onscreen and whether to save the
trace results as a new topology.
■ To view your shortest path trace onscreen, select Highlight. Choose
a highlight color from the Color list.
You should use a highlight color that's different than the color of the
objects in your map.
■ To save the shortest path trace as a new topology, select Create
Topology. Enter a name and description for the new topology. The
new topology will be created on the existing objects.
11 Click Finish to perform the shortest path trace.
Quick Reference
MAPANTOPONET
Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace)
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Analyze ➤ Network Analysis
Icon
Network Analyze
Command Line MAPANTOPONET
Performing a Shortest Path Trace | 861
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis
Dialog Box Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog
box (page 1329)
Performing a Best Route Analysis
Using a network topology, which is made up of drawing objects and their
relationship data, you can calculate the best route from a starting point in the
drawing, to one or more visit points, and back to the starting point. Autodesk
Map 3D determines the optimal route based on values of direction and
resistance. For example, in a street network, you can find the best route to
travel when visiting several customer sites from your hotel.
If a path has a total resistance lower than the Minimum Resistance value, the
path is ignored. Similarly, if a path has a total resistance greater than the
Maximum Resistance value, the path is ignored.
Using SQL Data in Expressions
If you specify an expression that uses SQL data, the Link Template list includes
only link templates defined in the drawing where the topology is loaded —
in the source drawing, if you loaded the topology from source drawings; in
the current drawing, if you loaded the topology from the current drawing.
Also, be sure the appropriate data source is attached and connected in the
current drawing.
Travel Time in Network Topologies
To carry out a best route analysis on a road network based on time rather than
distance, assign a speed or speed limit to each link (page 547) using an object
data field or a field in a linked external database. You then set the Link Direct
Resistance property to an expression that uses this speed limit data, for
example:
(/ .length (* :speed@street_data 5280))
which divides the length of each link by the average speed per foot (where
5280 is the number of feet in a mile).
The resulting analysis shows the best route, in terms of time, not distance.
862 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Object Data Stored for a Best Route Topology
If you save the results of a best route analysis to a new topology, Autodesk
Map 3D adds topology information, stored as object data, on each element
that makes up the best route topology. The object data table contains
information about the order of the links visited and the resistance used to
calculate the best route. The object data table added is like the one shown in
the following table.
Topology Name Object Data Table Object Data Field
SAMPLE BR_SAMPLE Path Link Visit Order
Evaluated Link Forward Resistance
Evaluated Link Reverse Resistance
Evaluated Start Node Resistance
Evaluated End Node Resistance
Evaluated Link Direction
Displaying Visit Order Using Annotation
To display the order in which to visit points, you use Autodesk Map 3D's
annotation feature to label the best route with the object data described above.
For more information, see Attaching Annotation to Objects (page 657).
Editing a Best Route Topology
If you change the direction or resistance of an object in a best route topology,
the best route shown may no longer be the optimal route, and you should
recalculate the best route. For example, if you change the direction of a link
from bi-directional to forward or reverse, it may change the best route.
Note
The best route cannot be calculated if the network topology contains negative
resistance values or if all resistance values equal "0" (or use expressions that
evaluate to zero). In layman's terms, if all resistance values equal zero, every
Performing a Best Route Analysis | 863
possible route is as good as any other route, and there is no "best" route to
travel.
See also:
■ Renaming Topologies and Changing Their Descriptions (page 605)
■ Deleting Topologies (page 606)
To perform a best route analysis
1 Verify that you have a network topology available and it is loaded. See
Creating Topologies (page 528) and To load a topology (page 591).
2 In Map Explorer under Current Drawing, right-click a network topology,
and then click Analysis ➤ Network Analysis.
3 In the Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box (page 1329),
click Best Route. Click Next.
4 In the Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box, click
Start Point. Click Select Point to select the starting point in the
drawing. Press Enter to return to the dialog box.
Autodesk Map 3D uses the node closest to the location you clicked as the
start point. The coordinates of the point are shown in the list.
5 Click Visit Point. Click (Select Point).
6 In the drawing, click a point to visit during the best route analysis. It
doesn't matter which point you pick first, Autodesk Map 3D calculates
the order in which to visit the sites as part of the calculation.
Autodesk Map 3D uses the node closest to the location you clicked as the
visit point.
7 Do one of the following:
■ To accept the point and return to the dialog box, press Enter.
■ To discard the point and return to the dialog box, press Esc.
■ To accept the point and specify another point, right-click in the
drawing. Click Next Point.
864 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
8 In the dialog box, review the start points and visit points you have
specified.
■ To double-check a point's location in the map, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Preview.
■ To delete a point so that you can define a new one, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Delete.
■ To add another visit point, return to Step 5.
9 Click Next.
10 In the Network Topology Analysis - Direction and Resistance dialog box,
select limits to put on the analysis. For direction and resistance, enter a
constant or an expression that references an object data field or linked
external database column. The expression will be evaluated for each link.
Click (Expression Builder) to select data from a list.
■ Link Direction — Specifies a direction for the trace. If the box is blank,
bi-directional (0) is used.
■ Reverse — Uses the reverse of the direction indicated in the Link
Direction box.
■ Link Direct Resistance — Specifies the resistance to travel in the
direction that a link was created. If the box is blank, the length of the
line (.LENGTH) is used.
■ Link Reverse Resistance — Specifies the resistance in the opposite
direction along a link. If the box is blank, the length of the line
(.LENGTH) is used.
■ Node Resistance — Specifies the resistance to cross the node (for
example, resistance for a valve in a pipe network or a junction in a
road network). If the box is blank, zero (0) is used.
■ Maximum Resistance and Minimum Resistance — Any path that has
a total resistance below the minimum or above the maximum is
ignored.
For example, if you stored the average speed limit for a link (in miles per
hour) in an object data table called street_data, you could find the fastest
route between two points by entering the expression (/ .length (*
:speed@street_data 5280) which divides the length of each link by the
average speed per foot (where 5280 is the number of feet in a mile).
Performing a Best Route Analysis | 865
NOTE The best route cannot be calculated if the network topology contains
negative resistance values or if all resistance values equal "0" (or use
expressions that evaluate to zero). In layman's terms, if all resistance values
are all zero, every possible route is as good as any other route, and there is
no "best" route to travel.
11 Click Next.
12 In the Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box, indicate whether
or not to view the results of the trace onscreen and whether to save the
trace results as a new topology.
■ To view the best route analysis onscreen, select Highlight and choose
a highlight color.
Use a highlight color that is different from the color of the objects in
your map.
■ To save the results of the best route analysis as a new topology, select
Create Topology and enter a name and description for the new
topology.
Autodesk Map 3D adds topology information, stored as object data,
on each element that makes up the best route topology.
13 Click Finish to perform the best route analysis.
To display the order in which to visit points, use annotation to label the
best route with the object data stored on the best route topology objects.
For more information, see To insert annotation (page 657).
Quick Reference
MAPANTOPONET
Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace)
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Analyze ➤ Network Analysis
Icon
Network Analyze
Command Line MAPANTOPONET
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis
866 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Dialog Box Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog
box (page 1329)
Performing a Flood Trace
An analysis that looks out from a point in all directions is called a network
flood trace. You can perform a flood trace on a network topology, which is
made up of drawing objects and their relationship data.
You specify the point where the network starts and the maximum distance
the network can traverse. The analysis determines how many links and nodes
can be traveled before the accumulated resistance exceeds the specified
maximum resistance. For example, you might want to find all restaurants
within a 10-minute walk of a hotel.
If you specify an expression that uses SQL data, the Link Template list includes
only link templates for the drawing where the topology is loaded:
■ In the source drawing, if you loaded the topology from source drawings
■ In the current drawing, if you loaded the topology from the current
drawing.
Using Flood Trace to Test Network Integrity
You can use flood trace analysis to check the integrity of a network topology.
If some links are not flooded, the topology is incomplete; you can use the
map editing tools to correct the geometry, and then recreate the topology.
Travel Time in Network Topologies
To carry out network flood trace analysis on a road network based on time
rather than distance, assign a speed or speed limit to each link (page 547) using
an object data field or a field in a linked external database. You then set the
Link Direct Resistance parameter to an AutoLISP expression that uses this
speed limit data.
For example, to determine a flood trace analysis based on a maximum travel
time, start a flood trace, select the start point for the analysis, enter the
AutoLISP expression for the Link Direct Resistance, and specify the travel time
for Maximum Value. This analysis will show the streets that can be reached
from a start node within the specified period of time.
Performing a Flood Trace | 867
See also:
■ Specifying the Direction for a Link (page 543)
■ Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node (page 547)
■ Expression Evaluator (page 963)
■ Expression dialog box (page 988)
NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects.
To perform a flood trace
1 Verify that you have a network topology available and it is loaded. See
Creating Topologies (page 528) and To load a topology (page 591).
2 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click a network topology,
and then click Analysis ➤ Network Analysis.
3 In the Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box (page 1329),
click Flood Trace. Click Next.
4 In the Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box, click
Start Point. Click Select Point to select the starting point in the map.
Press Enter to return to the dialog box.
Autodesk Map 3D uses the node closest to the location you clicked as the
start point. The coordinates of the point are shown in the list.
5 Review the start point you have specified. The coordinates of the point
are shown in the list.
■ To double-check the point's location in the map, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Preview.
■ To delete the point so that you can define a new one, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Delete.
6 Click Next.
7 In the Network Topology Analysis - Direction and Resistance dialog box,
select limits to put on the trace. For direction and resistance, you can
enter a constant or an expression that references an object data field or
868 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
linked external database column. The expression will be evaluated for
each link. Click (Expression Builder) to select data from a list.
■ Link Direction — Specify a direction for the trace. If you leave the
box blank, bi-directional (0) is used.
■ Reverse — Select this option to use the reverse of the direction
indicated in the Link Direction box.
■ Link Direct Resistance — Specify the resistance to travel in the
direction that a link was created. If you leave the box blank, the length
of the line (.LENGTH) is used.
■ Link Reverse Resistance — Specify the resistance in the opposite
direction along a link. If you leave the box blank, the length of the
line (.LENGTH) is used.
■ Node Resistance — Specify the resistance to cross the node, for
example, resistance for a valve in a pipe network, or a junction in a
road network. If you leave the box blank, zero (0) is used.
■ Specify a maximum resistance for the trace. The analysis determines
how many links and nodes can be traveled before the accumulated
resistance exceeds the specified maximum resistance.
For example, to trace out to a maximum length of 5000, set the Link
Direct Resistance to .LENGTH and set the Maximum Resistance to 5000.
To trace out to the first node on each link, set the Link Direct Resistance
to 0, set the Node Resistance to 50 and set a Maximum Resistance of 45.
8 Click Next.
9 In the Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box, indicate whether
to view the results of the trace onscreen and whether save the flood trace
results as a new topology.
■ To view your flood trace onscreen, select Highlight. Select the highlight
color.
■ To save the flood path trace as a new topology, select Create Topology.
Enter a name and description for the new topology. The new topology
is created on the existing objects.
10 Click Finish to perform the flood trace.
Performing a Flood Trace | 869
Quick Reference
MAPANTOPONET
Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace)
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Analyze ➤ Network Analysis
Icon
Network Analyze
Command Line MAPANTOPONET
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network topology
➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis
Dialog Box Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog
box (page 1329)
Overlaying Two Topologies
A powerful form of analysis is possible when you overlay two or more
topologies. Topologies can be created only from drawing objects.
There are three types of overlay analysis:
■ Nodes with polygons
■ Networks with polygons
■ Polygons with polygons
To overlay topologies, both must be loaded into the current drawing. See To
load a topology (page 591).
Options for Overlaying Topologies
When you overlay two topologies, you choose the method in which the two
selected topologies interact. In some cases, the result varies according to which
topology is the source and which is the overlay.
870 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
NOTE All the overlay analysis operators change arcs into a series of line segments;
for example, a complete circle consists of 32 segments. In the examples shown
above, the result topology is a tessellated (or jagged) circle after overlay analysis.
This may affect properties of the result topology, and gives different values, such
as area and perimeter.
Intersect
Intersect operations combine topologies and keep only the common geometry.
Intersect acts like the Boolean AND operation. The results are the same
whichever topology is chosen as the first or second. Object data is combined
for the two operations.
Here are some examples of using Intersect:
■ Which parcels (polygons) fall within 100-year flood zones (polygons)?
Intersect shows only the flooded properties, not the whole property.
Overlaying Two Topologies | 871
■ Which crimes (nodes) fall within drug-free zones (polygons)?
■ Which stream sections (networks) fall within the building area (polygons)
and need to be examined for potential negative environmental impact?
Union
Union operations combine polygons with polygons and keep all geometry.
Union acts like the Boolean OR operation and can be used only with polygons.
For example, you can combine parcels with soils information for property
assessment. Use Union to maintain both sets of geometry together and pull
them apart as needed.
Identity
Identity operations work like Union on the source topology and like Intersect
on the overlay topology. Use Identity to combine nodes, links, or polygons
with polygons and keep all the input geometry. Identity creates one topology
with one link where the link is crossed by the overlay topology.
When Identity is used with the question, Which parcels (polygons) fall within
100-year flood zones (polygons)?, all the properties in the flood zones are
shown intact.
Erase
Erase operations use the overlay polygon topology like a mask and erase
everything in the source polygon topology that is covered by the overlay
topology.
Clip
Clip operations use the overlay polygon topology as a boundary. The parts of
the source polygons outside the overlay polygons are clipped and discarded.
You can use this option to show polygons within a boundary polygon, such
as a city or state boundary.
Paste
Paste operations paste the overlay polygon topology on top of the source
polygons. The source polygons not covered by the overlay remain. The Paste
option can be used only with polygons.
872 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Object Data in Overlay Analysis
You can copy selected object data and external database data from the source
and overlay topologies to a new object data table in the resulting topology.
You specify the name of the new object data table that will store the data in
the resulting topology. The object data table name should be a new name.
Data fields in the resulting topology look like this:
TOPONAME_FIELD
In addition to any fields you select, overlay analysis creates these object data
fields in the resulting topology.
Field Name Data
TOPOID Polygon Identification Number
TOPONAME1_ID Object ID in source topology (TOPON-
AME1 is name of Source)
TOPONAME2_ID Object ID in overlay topology (TOPON-
AME2 is name of Overlay)
TOPONAME1_PERCENTAREA Percentage area of parent polygon in
source topology
TOPONAME2_PERCENTAREA Percentage area of parent polygon in
overlay topology
To overlay two topologies
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click a topology that will
serve as the source topology, and then click Analysis ➤ Overlay.
2 NOTE Most of the overlay analysis types work only with polygon topologies.
For more information about those that work with node or network topologies,
see Overlaying Two Topologies (page 870).
Overlaying Two Topologies | 873
3 In the Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box (page 1341),
do the following:
■ Select the type of overlay analysis to perform:
■ Intersect — Only areas that appear in both the source and overlay
topologies are in the result topology.
■ Union — Areas that appear in either the source or the overlay
topologies are in the result topology.
■ Identity — The result topology includes areas that appear in the
source topology and areas in the overlay topology that are within
the source topology boundary.
■ Erase — The result topology includes areas that appear in the source
topology except where it is covered by the overlay topology. The
area covered by the overlay polygons is erased from the source
polygon area.
■ Clip — The result topology includes areas that appear in the source
topology except where they are outside the boundary of the overlay
topology. The source polygons are clipped to the outer boundary
of the overlay polygons.
■ Paste — The overlay topology is "pasted" on the source topology.
The result topology includes the overlay topology and any areas
of the source topology that extend beyond the boundaries of the
overlay topology.
■ Click Next.
4 In the Select Overlay Topology dialog box, do the following:
■ Select the polygon topology to use as the overlay topology.
■ Click Next.
5 In the Topology Overlay Analysis - New Topology dialog box, do the
following:
■ Select Highlight to highlight the resulting topology onscreen. Select
the highlight color.
■ Enter a name and description for the new topology, and specify the
layer to place it on.
■ Click Next.
874 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
6 In the Topology Overlay Analysis Dissolve - Output Attributes dialog box,
do the following if to copy data to the result topology:
■ For Source Attributes For New Topology, click (Expression Builder)
to select the data from the source topology that you want to include
in the resulting topology. You can include fields in an object data
table or columns in an external database.
■ For Overlay Attributes For New Topology, click (Expression
Builder) to select the data from the overlay topology that you want
to include in the resulting topology.
■ Enter a name and description for the object data table that will store
the data in the new topology.
Object data and external database records are attached to the centroids
of the result topology.
■ Click Next.
7 In the final dialog box, choose whether to create new nodes to complete
the resulting topology. If so, specify which a block to use:
■ To use a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
■ To select from a list of block definitions, click the down arrow.
■ To select a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select the file to
use.
8 For certain overlay operations, you also specify the block to use for
centroids.
9 Click Finish.
Quick Reference
MAPANOVERLAY
Overlays one topology with another, and creates a new topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Analyze ➤ Overlay
Overlaying Two Topologies | 875
Icon
Overlay Topology
Command Line MAPANOVERLAY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Analysis ➤ Overlay
Dialog Box Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box
(page 1341)
Dissolving a Composite Topology
If a topology contains many smaller polygons, you can create a new topology
by combining polygons that share the same data value in a specified field.
This field is called the dissolve field. The dissolve field can be an object data
field or a column in a linked external database.
Note that topologies can include drawing objects only.
Dissolving Polygons
When you dissolve a topology, Autodesk Map 3D checks each boundary
between polygons to see if the dissolve field value is the same for both. If so,
the boundary and one of the centroids are removed. All object fields except
for the dissolve and any new topology fields are removed.
If adjacent polygons do not contain the dissolve field, the boundary is not
dissolved and the resulting polygon has a blank value for that field.
876 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Dissolving Network Links
When you dissolve a network topology, Autodesk Map 3D checks nodes
between lines to see whether two lines intersect at a specified node and whether
the dissolve field is the same. If so, the node is removed, and the two links
are joined to form one link. All object fields except for the dissolve and any
new topology fields are removed as shown in the following illustration.
If adjacent lines do not contain the dissolve field, the node is not dissolved
and the resulting polyline has a blank value for that field.
To dissolve a composite topology
1 In Map Explorer right-click the topology to dissolve, and click Analysis
➤ Dissolve.
2 Note that topologies must be loaded before you can work with them. See
To load a topology (page 591).
3 In the Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box (page 1341), for Dissolve
By, specify the data element to use for the new topology. To select a field
from an object data table or a column from an external database, click
(Expression Builder).
Any two adjacent polygons or connected lines that have the same value
for the specified field or column are combined into a single polygon or
line.
NOTE When dissolving a topology, Autodesk Map 3D uses only data that
is attached or linked to the centroid of the polygon. It does not use data
attached to a polygon border.
Dissolving a Composite Topology | 877
4 In the Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box, select Highlight to
highlight the resulting topology onscreen. Specify the highlight color.
5 Enter a name and description for the new topology and specify the layer.
Click Next.
6 In the Topology Dissolve - Output Attributes dialog box, do the following:
■ Click (Expression Builder) to select the data to include in the
resulting topology. You can include fields in an object data table or
columns in an external database.
■ Enter a name and description for the object data table that will store
the data in the new topology.
NOTE If you do not want to populate an Object Data Table with the
dissolve information, select the last (empty) item in the list. Selecting this
empty item will not copy data from the dissolve topology.
■ Click Next.
7 In the final dialog box, indicate whether to create new nodes to complete
the resulting topology. If so, specify which a block to use:
■ To use a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
■ To select from a list of block definitions, click the down arrow.
■ To select a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select the file to
use.
If you are dissolving a polygon topology, you can also specify the block
to use for centroids.
8 Click Finish to dissolve the topology.
Quick Reference
MAPANDISSOLVE
Removes the boundaries between polygons in a topology or the nodes
between links that share a specific attribute
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace
➤ Analyze ➤ Dissolve
878 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Icon
Dissolve Topology
Command Line MAPANDISSOLVE
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a network or polygon
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Dissolve
Dialog Box Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box (page
1341)
Buffering a Topology
A buffer analysis identifies objects within a specified offset of elements in
node, network, and polygon topologies. A buffer is a zone that is drawn around
a topology. For example, you might specify a buffer on either side of a river
to show the extent of a flood plain.
Note that topologies can contain only drawing objects.
Use Buffer Analysis to show an area around an existing topology. In this case, the buffer
analysis of the power line network topology creates a new polygon topology.
For buffering, you create a new polygon topology from an existing node,
network, or polygon topology and specify a buffer offset.
Buffering a Topology | 879
The buffer offset can be:
■ A positive or negative numeric value
■ An expression
■ A value specified by object data
■ A value linked to an external database record
Note that you can use negative offset values for polygon topologies only. For
information on expressions, see Expression Evaluator (page 963).
TIP You can improve the performance of buffering operations by increasing the
RAM to more than the recommended amount, or by increasing the virtual memory
on your system. This is recommended if you are buffering large topologies.
To buffer a topology
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click a topology and click
Analysis ➤ Buffer.
2 In the Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box (page 1336), enter
the buffer distance. Click Next. The buffer extends the specified distance
from the objects.
The buffer offset can be any of the following:
■ Numeric value. To decrease the size of existing polygons, enter a
negative value.
■ An expression that evaluates to a numeric value.
■ A value in an object data table or a linked external database. Click
(Expression Builder) to select the table and field or the link
template and column from a list.
NOTE If you are creating a buffer around a polygon and want to use a
value in an object data table or an external database, the data must be
attached to the centroid of the polygon.
3 In the Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box, select Highlight to
highlight the resulting buffer topology onscreen. Specify a highlight color
that is different from the color of the objects.
880 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
4 Enter a name and description for the new topology and specify the layer
to place it on. Click Next.
NOTE If you specify a locked layer, Autodesk Map 3D can create the buffer
geometry but not the buffer topology.
5 In the Topology Buffer - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box,
specify the blocks to use for centroids and node in the resulting buffer
topology.
■ To use a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
■ To select from a list of block definitions, click the down arrow.
■ To select a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select the file.
6 Click Finish to create the buffer topology.
Quick Reference
MAPANBUFFER
Creates a buffer around an existing topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Analyze ➤ Buffer
Icon
Buffer Topology
Command Line MAPANBUFFER
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Analysis ➤ Buffer
Dialog Box Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box (page
1336)
Querying a Topology
Use a topology query to retrieve a loaded topology and its associated data
from the current drawing or an attached drawing. You can also query part of
a topology in a source drawing and work on that part of a topology without
having to retrieve all the objects that make up a topology.
Querying a Topology | 881
There are three differences between using standard queries and topology
queries:
■ Topology queries work with only one topology; standard queries work
with all objects in the attached drawings.
■ Because topology information is stored in object data, a Data condition
can be based on Area, Length, Perimeter, Direction, Direct Resistance, and
Reverse Resistance.
■ Property alterations work differently with polygon topologies.
Creating a Result Topology
When you use a topology query, you can hold the retrieved information in
the current drawing in three types of topology:
■ None — No information is added to the geometry in the current drawing.
■ Temporary — Information is retrieved and stored in memory as a topology
with a name preceded by an asterisk (*).
You cannot save back the temporary topology to the queried drawings.
However, you can save the temporary topology to make it permanent (page
887), or you can retain the topology in the current drawing.
■ Permanent — The query retrieves data and creates a topology in the current
drawing. You can save back this topology to the source drawings. The
topology name must not be preceded by an asterisk (*).
Location Queries
Location queries on network topology work in the same way as queries on
any other linear or point object.
Topology Data Retrieved by Location Query
Node Nodes
Network Links; also nodes if part of topology
Polygon Polygons if links or centroid selected; also
links or nodes if part of polygon topology
882 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Polygons are handled as true areas, not just as boundaries. In the example
following, the polygon area crosses through the query boundary so the whole
polygon is retrieved, although none of the objects that make up the polygon
intersect any part of the query boundary.
Point location queries also retrieve the polygon that includes the point.
Object Data Queries
Any topology object can be queried using object data, such as node, link, and
polygon identifiers; the "from" and "to" node information on links; the left
and right side information on links; polygons; and so on.
Topology queries can retrieve data such as areas, perimeters, numbers of links,
and more. For example, a query to retrieve objects with an area greater than
a specified value gives different results with the two query types:
■ A query defined with a standard Define Query retrieves closed polylines
with areas of the specified value.
■ A Define Topology Query retrieves all polygons with areas of the specified
value, whatever the objects making up the polygon (lines, arcs, or open
polylines) are.
Querying a Topology | 883
Property Alteration with Topology Queries
When you define a property alteration for topology objects, only specific
elements of the topology are altered, as shown in the following table.
Property Alteration Modified Objects
Block Name Nodes in node and network topologies Centroids in
polygon topology
Color Nodes, links, and centroids
Elevation Nodes, links, and centroids
Height Nodes in node and network topologies Centroids in
polygon topology
Layer Nodes, links, and centroids
Linetype Nodes, links, and centroids
Rotation Nodes in node and network topologies. Centroids in
polygon topology
Scale Nodes, links, and centroids
Text Style Nodes in node and network topologies Centroids in
polygon topology
Width Links
Text Value Nodes in node and network topologies Centroids in
polygon topology (text appears at the centroid label
point)
Thickness Links
Hatch Hatched polygons
884 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Saving and Using Queries
If you plan to use a query more than once, you can save it with the current
drawing in the Query Library or to an external file, and edit the query or reuse
it. The following table shows the options available with topology queries.
Description Menu choices available in the Map Command
3D for Drawings workspace
Save a query In the Define Query dialog box, click Save. ADEQUERY
See Saving a Query (page 144).
Run Query (internal) Click Edit menu ➤ DWG Topology Query. ADERUNQUERY
See Running a Saved Query (page 146).
Use the Query Li- Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Op- ADEQUERYLIB
brary tions ➤ Topology Query Library. See Set-
ting Up a Query Library (page 141).
Run External Query Click Edit menu ➤ More DWG Querying ADERUNXQUERY
Options ➤ Run External Topology Query.
Report Mode
In addition to the dot variables available using the standard Define Query
command, Define Topology Query has two extra dot variables.
■ .TOPONAME — Contains the topology name.
■ .TOPOTYPE — Contains the topology type: NODE, NETWORK, or
POLYGON.
Three of the dot variables give different results in topology queries.
■ .DRAWING — The drawing name that is the source of the geometry object
in the topology.
■ .AREA — The value of the AREA object data field for each polygon.
■ .PERIMETER — The value of the PERIMETER object data field for each
polygon.
Querying a Topology | 885
The Process Sub-Objects option in the Output Report Options dialog box
specifies the objects in a report.
Reported Data
Topology Type Process Sub-Objects Do not Process Sub-Objects
Node Nodes, objects, and object data Nodes
Network Links, start and end node data Links
Polygon Centroids, links, and nodes Centroids
To query a topology
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click a topology and then
click Analysis ➤ Topology Query.
2 In the Topology Query dialog box (page 1348), select the topology to query.
If the topology is not on the list, click Load and select the topology to
use.
3 Under Result Topology, specify how to save the results of the query:
■ None — Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, but no
topology data is created.
■ Temporary — Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and the
topology data is loaded into memory. This data is not saved to the
objects.
■ Permanent — Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and a
new topology is created.
If you create a temporary or permanent topology, specify a name and
description for the topology.
4 To load an existing query, click Load Query and select the query.
To define a new query, click Define Query and define the conditions for
the query.
To close the dialog box, but have Autodesk Map 3D remember your
selections, click OK.
886 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
5 When you click Define Query, the Define Query Dialog box opens. Its
operation and options are the same for topology and Autodesk Map 3D
queries, except for some options you have in the Property option in the
Query Type area. For more information, see .
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOQUERY
Queries topologies
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Setup ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Topology Query
Icon
Query Topology
Command Line MAPTOPOQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Analysis ➤ Topology Query
Dialog Box Topology Query dialog box (page 1348)
Saving a Temporary Topology
When you use a topology query, you can store the retrieved information in
a temporary topology. The topology name is preceded by an asterisk (*). To
save back the temporary topology to the queried drawings, first convert the
temporary topology to a permanent topology.
See also:
■ Querying a Topology (page 881)
To convert a temporary topology to a permanent topology
1 In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click the temporary
topology you want to convert, and then click Administration ➤ Rename.
A temporary topology has a name preceded by an asterisk (*).
Saving a Temporary Topology | 887
2 In the Rename Topology dialog box (page 1333), enter a new name for the
topology.
To create a permanent topology, do not start the topology name with an
asterisk (*). Also note that topology names can contain letters, numbers,
and the underscore, hyphen, and dollar characters. Names cannot include
spaces.
3 Optionally, enter a new description for the topology.
4 Click OK to rename the topology, making it a permanent topology.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOREN
Changes the name and description of a topology
Menu Map 3D for Drawings workspace ➤ Analyze ➤ More
Topology Options ➤ Rename
Command Line MAPTOPOREN
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a topology
➤ Administration ➤ Rename
Dialog Box Rename Topology dialog box (page 1333)
888 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Publishing and Sharing
Maps 9
In this chapter
■ Overview of Publishing and Sharing
■ Publishing Maps
■ Exporting
■ Sharing Styled Maps with Non
Autodesk Map 3D Users
■ Exporting and Printing Attribute
Data
889
Overview of Publishing and Sharing
There are several ways to output map data:
■ Publish the entire map to a printer/plotter (page 891) or to a file (page 890).
Both drawing objects and spatial data are published.
■ Publish the map as a static HTML file (page 896), for use as a web page.
■ Pack up the map file and all its dependent files (for example, Xrefs) into
a transmittal package (page 898), ensuring that the recipient has everything
required to work on the map.
■ Create a map book (page 900), which divides your map into a grid of tiles
and renders each tile on a separate page. Map books can be publised to a
plotter or a file.
■ Save all or some of the drawing objects in your map to DXF (an alternative
drawing file format) (page 924). Only DWG objects are saved. Spatial data
is ignored.
■ Export all or some of the drawing objects in your map to other file formats,
such as SDF, DGN, etc (page 916). Only DWG objects are exported. Spatial
objects are ignored.
■ Export one or more Display Manager layers to SDF format (page 927). This
allows you to package data that is ordinarily stored in a central data store,
such as an Oracle database, into a spatial data file. However, all connection
to the original data store is lost and changes you make to the SDF file will
not update the central data store.
■ Convert Display Manager styles to object properties (page 928) using a
linked output drawing. This allows you to share styled maps with users
who do not have Display Manager (for example, users of AutoCAD or a
previous version of Autodesk Map 3D).
■ Export or print data attached to drawing objects (page 930) or spatial objects
(page 932), or external data (page 930) linked to objects.
Publishing Maps
When you publish a map or map book, Autodesk Map 3D plots it and sends
it to an output format. For example, if you publish your map to a plotter, you
890 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
print a copy of the map. If you publish it to DWF, you create a file containing
the plotted map or map book.
Publish a Map to a Plotter
You can publish to a plotter for a printed copy. The steps for publishing to a
plotter are slightly different for a map and for a map book (page 914), but you
set plotting options the same way for both.
To publish to a plotter
1 Save the map.
2 Click File menu ➤ Plot.
3 Choose a printer or plotter and set any options needed. For information
about these options, see “To plot a drawing” in the AutoCAD Help.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPPLOT
Plots a set of maps with title blocks
Icon
Plot Map Set
Command Line MAPPLOT
Dialog Box Plot Map Set dialog box
Publish to DWF
DWF (Design Web Format™) is an open, secure file format developed by
Autodesk for sharing engineering design data. DWF files are highly compressed,
so they are small and fast to transmit and view.
Publish a Map to a Plotter | 891
When you publish to DWF, you create an electronic version of the map that
can be displayed using the Autodesk® DWF™ Viewer. This format can include
attribute data and graphical elements.
To create a multi-page DWF, create a map book (page 901). The steps for
publishing a map to DWF and publishing a map book to DWF (page 913) are
slightly different, but you set DWF publishing options the same way for both.
If your map has a coordinate system assigned to it, ProductName includes
that coordinate system for each sheet in the published DWF file.
To publish to DWF
■ Overview of Publishing and Sharing
■ Publishing Maps
■ Exporting
■ Sharing Styled Maps with Non Autodesk Map 3D Users
■ Exporting and Printing Attribute Data
Set DWF Publishing Options
Before publishing maps to DWF™, you can specify which data to include from
the following categories:
DWF Publishing Option Description
object data Data attached to drawing objects
classification data Information about drawing objects that have been
assigned to classes
GIS feature sources Spatial data objects
joins Data from records that have been joined to the data
for spatial data objects
linked records from an external Data from records or fields that have been linked to
database drawing object data
892 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
DWF Publishing Option Description
data table information Table type, table name, record ID, and the delimiter.
This is useful if your viewer doesn't automatically dis-
play this information.
For each category of data, you can choose the individual items to include
when you publish.
NOTE If your map has a coordinate system assigned to it, Autodesk Map 3D
includes that coordinate system for each sheet in the published DWF file, using
the property name "Coordinate System." You cannot choose this as a DWF
Publishing Option, and you cannot change the property name. If you turn off all
publishing options (by clearing the Publish Map Information box), the coordinate
system is not included in the publish operation.
See also:
■ Understanding Object Classification (page 662)
■
■
To set options for DWF
1 Click File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ DWF Publishing Options.
2 Check Publish Map Information.
3 Select the properties to include in the DWF.
■ To see specific properties, expand any categories that display a plus
sign.
■ Check an item with sub-items to select all its sub-items.
4 Click the file icon and specify the name and location of the file for the
exported properties.
You can reload these settings again later by clicking the folder icon.
5 Click OK.
Publish to DWF | 893
NOTE If you clear the Publish Map Information box, the options you checked
remain checked, but they are not included in the publish operation. When you
check Publish Map Information again, the options will be included.
Quick Reference
MAPDWFOPTIONS
Sets Autodesk Map options for publishing to DWF
Menu File ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ DWF Publishing
Options
Command Line MAPDWFOPTIONS
Publish a Map to DWF
Files in DWF format can be displayed using the Autodesk® DWF™ Viewer. For
product information and a download link for the Autodesk DWF Viewer, refer
to the Autodesk DWF Viewer page on the Autodesk website. This procedure
publishes a map to DWF. Use a different procedure to publish a map book to
DWF (page 913).
To publish a map to DWF
1 Display and set up the layout you plan to use for your publishing job.
A layout is an AutoCAD paper space environment where you can specify
the size of your sheet, add a title block, display multiple views, and create
dimensions and notes for your map. For more information about creating
or editing a layout, type “layout” or “paper space” on the Search tab of
the help.
2 Save the map.
3 Click File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish To DWF.
4 In the Publish dialog box, do any of the following:
■ For each item in the Sheets to Publish list, click in the Page Setup/3D
DWF field and choose or import a layout from the drop-down list.
Make sure the Status column shows no errors. To exclude a sheet from
the publish operation, right-click it and choose Remove.
894 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
NOTE By default, the model space view and the two default layout views
are included in the list. You can change the settings for the sheets that
are automatically included by clearing the check boxes under Include
When Adding Sheets. You can also save the current sheet list and reload
it for future publishing jobs.
■ To see the current publishing settings, click Publish Options. To set
DWF options for this map, scroll down to Map Options and click in
the field. To use your DWF Publishing settings, this field must be set
to “Include.” To view or change the settings (page 892), click the button
labeled “...”
■ Click the DWF option under Publish To.
■ Change any other publishing options as desired. For information
about these options, see the AutoCAD Help.
■ Click Publish.
5 In the Select DWF File dialog box, specify the name and location for the
DWF output and click Select.
6 Indicate whether to save the current sheet set for future publishing
operations.
The status area shows the progress of the publishing operation. When it is
complete, a pop-up message lists the details of the job, including any warnings
or errors that occurred.
Quick Reference
PUBLISH
Publishes a drawing to DWF format
Menu File ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish to DWF
Icon
Publish
Command Line PUBLISH
Publish to DWF | 895
Publish to PDF
Recipients of PDF files can view and print them using Adobe® Reader versions
5 or later. You can publish a single PDF file or multiple PDF files containing
separate layouts. For more information about publishing to PDF, see “PDF
Publishing” in the AutoCAD Help.
Publish to a Web Page
You can save your map in HTML format for display as a static web page. The
result is a “snapshot” of the map that cannot be edited in Autodesk Map 3D,
but can be viewed by any web browser.
You use a wizard to guide you through the publishing process. Once you have
created a web page with this wizard, you can update the information for the
web page if the map file changes.
For more information, see “Publish to Web” in the AutoCAD Help.
To publish a map as a web page
1 Save your map.
2 Click File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ AutoCAD Publish To Web.
3 Click Create New Web Page and click Next.
NOTE Once you create a web page with this wizard, you can choose Edit
Existing Web Page. You select the web page to edit, and then you can change
any of the settings for that web page and republish it.
4 Specify a name and location for the web page files.
■ Type a name for the web page (without any file name extension).
■ Specify the parent directory for the web page files by clicking the
button labeled “...” next to the default path. Choose or create a folder
for the files and click Open.
■ Type a description for the web page in the space provided.
■ Click Next.
5 Choose an image type.
896 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
As you select an image type from the drop-down list, the description
provides information for that option. The last one you select will be used.
For JPEG and PNG, you can specify an image size.
■ Review the image types and select the one you want.
■ Select an image size (if appropriate).
■ Click Next.
6 Choose a page template.
As you select a template from the list, the preview and description update
for that option.
■ Review the templates and select the one you want.
■ Click Next.
7 Choose a formatting theme for the web page.
As you select a theme from the drop-down list, the preview illustrates it.
■ Review the themes and select the one you want.
■ Click Next.
8 Choose whether to use i-drop™ or not and click Next.
The i-drop option lets you post copies of the DWG files that comprise
your map so viewers can access those files.
9 Choose the drawings for your web page.
■ Specify the map file for the web page by clicking the button labeled
“...” next to the default file name. Choose the file and click Open.
■ Choose a layout (model space or one of the layouts you’ve defined
for this map file).
■ Type a label and a description to annotate the image on the resulting
web page
■ Click Add.
If you need to change one of your entries, select it in the Image list,
make your changes in Image Settings, and click Update.
■ Click Next.
10 Click Next on the Generate Images page of the wizard to create the web
page.
Publish to a Web Page | 897
11 Preview and post the resulting web page.
■ Click Preview to see how the web page will look.
If you need to change anything, close the browser window in which
the preview appears and click Back to make your changes.
■ Click Post Now to post the web page.
Navigate to the location for the web page and click Save.
■ Click Send Email to create an email message that contains a link to
your web page.
12 Click Finish.
Using eTransmit
When you send a map file to another Autodesk Map 3D user, it is easy to omit
some of the dependent files needed to edit that map effectively. You can use
eTransmit to package all dependent files for a map and ensure that the recipient
has all the required information. Then you can email the resulting file to the
recipient, along with a report explaining how to use the files.
NOTE If your map includes data from a data store such as an Oracle database,
that data will be available to the recipient, even if the recipient does not have
access to that data store.
For more information, see “eTransmit” in the AutoCAD Help.
To use eTransmit
1 Save your map.
2 Click File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ AutoCAD eTransmit.
3 On the Files Tree tab, make sure all the desired files are checked.
By default, all files are checked. You can review the Files Table tab, which
shows the path, size, and date for each file to be sure the correct version
of each file is specified. Deselecting a file on one tab also deselects it on
the other tab.
4 Enter any notes to include with the transmittal package.
5 Specify a transmittal setup.
898 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
A transmittal setup specifies how to package the files, what format to
save them in, where to store the package file, and various options for the
eTransmit process.
■ To choose an existing setup file, select it in the list.
■ To create a new setup file or modify an existing one, click Transmittal
Setups and click New or Modify.
■ If you chose New, specify a name for the setup and an existing setup
to base it on.
■ Specify the settings for the setup. For more information on thse
settings, see “Modify eTransmit Dialog Box” in the AutoCAD Help.
6 Click View Report to see the information that will be sent with the
packaged files.
7 Click OK to create the transmittal file.
Publish to MapGuide
The MapGuide technology lets you publish map-related data on the web or
on an intranet. The MapGuide technology is available as Autodesk MapGuide
Enterprise 2007 and under an open source license. For more information, see
the Mapping & GIS Solutions page on the Autodesk website.
When you publish to MapGuide, all layers, layer definitions, dynamic labels,
queries, filters, and styles (including point, line, raster, and other styles) in
your map are published in the format that MapGuide needs.
If your map includes SHP or SDF layers, Autodesk Map 3D copies the source
files for those layers to the server. If your map includes layers that come from
a central database, Autodesk Map 3D includes pointers to the original data
stores. If your map includes layers composed of objects from drawing files,
Autodesk Map 3D copies those objects as high-fidelity DWF files.
NOTE
If you are using a previous release (Autodesk MapGuide version 6.5 or earlier),
you cannot use this command. Instead, export your map to SDF2 format (page
927) and send the resulting file to your MapGuide server.
Publish to MapGuide | 899
To publish a map for use with MapGuide
1 Save the map.
2 Click File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish To MapGuide.
3 In the Publish To MapGuide dialog box, specify the URL for the target
website. If the site requires a password, a Connect to Site dialog box
appears. Enter your user name and password.
4 Choose a folder for the published files.
5 Under Publishing Options, specify how to deal with files of the same
name that already exist in the target folder. You can choose to overwrite
the old files, make a new copy, or cancel the operation when such files
are encountered.
6 Click Publish. You can monitor the progress and result of the operation
in the status bar.
Quick Reference
MAPPUBLISHTOMAPGUIDE
Publish to the new MapGuide technology (Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise
2007 or MapGuide Open Source)
Menu File ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish to MapGuide
Command Line MAPPUBLISHTOMAPGUIDE
Publish Map Books
To publish map books
■ Overview of Publishing and Sharing
■ Publishing Maps
■ Exporting
■ Sharing Styled Maps with Non Autodesk Map 3D Users
■ Exporting and Printing Attribute Data
900 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Overview of Map Books
A map book divides your map into multiple “tiles” and displays each tile on
a separate page. Picture a grid overlaying your map. Each section of the grid
represents a tile. Once you create a map book, you can publish it to a plotter
or to DWF.
A map book is a special kind of AutoCAD sheet set. For more information
about AutoCAD sheet sets, type “create and manage a sheet set” on the Search
tab of the help.
To create a map book, you must first set up a map book template. You can
start with a sample template and adapt it to your needs. When the template
is complete, you generate the map book. You can update the original map at
any time and regenerate the map book without changing the template. The
new map book will reflect your changes.
Map book with tiles listed by row and column
You can create more than one map book for a map, but only one can be
current at a time.
Publish Map Books | 901
To create and publish a map book
1
2
3
4
5
Quick Reference
MAPBOOKCREATE
Create a map book to publish your data
Command Line MAPBOOKCREATE
Dialog Box Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog box (page 1140)
MAPBOOKCREATEFROMSETTINGS
Create a new map book from a previously saved map books settings file
Command Line MAPBOOKCREATEFROMSETTINGS
Dialog Box Select Map Book Settings dialog box
MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGS
Edit the settings of an existing map book
Command Line MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGS
Dialog Box Edit Map Book dialog box
MAPBOOKIMPORTPLOTSET
Import settings from a map plot set
Command Line MAPBOOKIMPORTPLOTSET
Dialog Box Select Plot Set to Convert dialog box (page 1143)
MAPBOOKPLACEHOLDER
Name the viewports and element placeholders in the layout template
902 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Command Line MAPBOOKPLACEHOLDER
Dialog Box Identify Map Book Template Placeholders dialog box
(page 1142)
MAPBOOKSAVESETTINGS
Save map book settings to an external file
Command Line MAPBOOKSAVESETTINGS
Dialog Box Save Map Book Settings dialog box
Setting Up a Map Book Template
Every map book requires a template that specifies printer settings (such as
paper size and the printer driver to use) and defines the size and position of
elements on the page (for example, the legend, title block, and map tile).
In your map book template, each element appears within a viewport, which
is similar to a frame on a web page. A viewport has a shape and a position on
the page, and you specify the type of information that appears within it. You
must include a main viewport in your map book template. Other viewports
are optional and can include the following:
■ Keyview viewport displays a thumbnail view of the entire area included in
the map book. You can create a simplified view of the mapped area to use
in this viewport, save that view to a separate drawing file, and then link
the viewport to that drawing. You can display a different linked file in this
viewport, instead of the thumbnail. For example, you can save a detail of
the map in a separate file and use the keyview viewport to display it as an
inset.
■ Legend viewport displays a legend. If you created a display legend for your
map, you can select it for this viewport, or you can select an area of your
map to use as a legend.
■ Adjacent arrows are triangular blocks at each edge of the tile that point to
and identify the adjacent tile. Each arrow has a property that specifies the
adjacent tile in that direction and displays the name of that tile within
the arrow. You can specify the text that appears within the arrowheads.
■ Title block displays a defined DWG block that includes title information,
such as your company or group name and the name of the map. Many
groups have standard title blocks to insert in this element. You can define
Publish Map Books | 903
certain attributes of the title block from within your template. Title blocks
defined in the sample templates include a frame that surrounds the entire
tile.
Once you define the map book template and save your map, you can publish
the map book to a plotter or to a DWF file.
Map book template
To set up a map book template
1 Open an existing map book template. Map book templates for a variety
of paper sizes are included in the Templates folder. Choose from 8.5x11,
8.5x14, 11x17, A3, or A4.
2 Do the following:
■ Right-click a layout tab and choose Rename. Type a new name for
this layout.
■ Right-click the renamed layout tab. Choose Page Setup Manager to
specify plotter and paper information.
904 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
NOTE This information will be used every time you publish your map
book to a plotter. You cannot change these settings at print time. For
more information about this dialog box, type “Page Setup Manager” in
the Search tab of the help.
3 Resize the viewports on the layout as needed:
■ To resize a viewport, click it to select it. Click and drag a corner grip.
■ If you don’t want to use one of the viewports that appear on the
template, select it and press the Delete key on your keyboard.
4 Customize the viewports on the template as desired:
■ Double-click the outside frame of the title block to change its attributes
or text properties. Items that display pound signs (###) are variables.
Right-click a variable to change its value.
■ Double-click an arrow block to change its text properties.
5 When the elements appear as you want them, you must
6 After identifying the placeholders, save the map file as a DWT (AutoCAD
Drawing Template) file.
NOTE You can also create a map book layout in an existing map, and use that
map as your map book template. Be sure to rename the layout tab that you plan
to use for map books. You can have multiple layout templates in a map.
Quick Reference
PAGESETUP
Displays the Page Setup Manager for a layout
Menu File ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Page Setup Manager
Command Line PAGESETUP
Publish Map Books | 905
Identifying Layout Placeholders
You must identify each element in your map book template as a placeholder
for a particular type of information. For example, you select the viewport
intended for the title and identify it as a title block placeholder.
To identify layout placeholders
1 Select the layout tab you defined for the map book.
2 In Map Book, click Tools ➤ Identify Template Placeholders.
3 Click an item in the Layout Placeholders list. For example, click Main
Viewport. Then click Select Placeholders.
4 In your layout, click the outline of the viewport to use for the item you
selected. For example, for the Main viewport, click the viewport that will
display the map tile.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each of the following elements in your layout:
■ Main viewport
■ Keyview viewport
■ Legend viewport
■ Adjacent arrow blocks
■ Title block
6 When you have identified all the elements, click Close.
Quick Reference
MAPBOOKPLACEHOLDER
Name the viewports and element placeholders in the layout template
Command Line MAPBOOKPLACEHOLDER
Dialog Box Identify Map Book Template Placeholders dialog box
(page 1142)
906 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Creating a Map Book
You can create a map book from a map you styled in Display Manager or from
objects in model space.
By default, the map book uses the current map in Display Manager, whether
you have saved it or not. If you specify the model space instead, the map book
will show the current contents of the model space. You can also choose a map
you saved in Display Manager.
NOTE After you create a map book, avoid renaming the map file because this
invalidates the sheet set representing the map book template. You will have to
rebuild the map book before you can publish the map book. See Rebuilding Map
Books (page 911).
To create a map book
1 In Map Book, click New ➤ Map Book.
2 In the Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog box (page 1140), select an
option under each of the following and enter the required information:
■ Source
■ Sheet Template
■ Tiling Scheme
■ Naming Scheme
■ Sheet Set
3 Optionally, you can select options under the following:
■ Key
■ Legend
4 Click Preview to see a preview of the tile outlines on the map.
5 Click Generate.
Quick Reference
MAPBOOKCREATE
Publish Map Books | 907
Create a map book to publish your data
Command Line MAPBOOKCREATE
Dialog Box Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog box (page 1140)
Importing Plot Map Sets
You can import settings from plot map sets that you created in previous releases
of the software.
To import a plot map set
1 Open the file that contains the plot map set.
2 In Map Book, click New ➤ Map Book From Plot Set.
3 Select the plot map set to convert. Click OK.
4 In the Create Map Book dialog box, edit the imported plot map set
information as desired. Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPBOOKIMPORTPLOTSET
Import settings from a map plot set
Command Line MAPBOOKIMPORTPLOTSET
Dialog Box Select Plot Set to Convert dialog box (page 1143)
Map Book Settings
To set map book settings
■ Overview of Publishing and Sharing
■ Publishing Maps
■ Exporting
■ Sharing Styled Maps with Non Autodesk Map 3D Users
■ Exporting and Printing Attribute Data
908 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Saving Map Book Settings
Map book settings are automatically saved in the map file as soon as you create
the map book. You can save these settings in a separate MBS (Map Book
Settings) file to use with other map books.
See also:
To save map book settings
1 In Map Book, select the map book whose settings you want to use.
2 Right-click the map book name. Click Save Settings.
3 Give the file a unique name.
4 Click Save.
Quick Reference
MAPBOOKSAVESETTINGS
Save map book settings to an external file
Command Line MAPBOOKSAVESETTINGS
Dialog Box Save Map Book Settings dialog box
Creating New Map Books from Saved Settings
If you saved the settings for a map book in a Map Book Settings file, you can
use those settings for a new map book.
See also:
To create a new map book from saved settings
1 In Map Book, click New ➤ Map Book From Settings.
Publish Map Books | 909
2 Navigate to a map book settings (MBS) file and open it.
3 In the Create Map Book dialog box, change the settings as desired.
4 Click Generate.
Quick Reference
MAPBOOKCREATEFROMSETTINGS
Create a new map book from a previously saved map books settings file
Command Line MAPBOOKCREATEFROMSETTINGS
Dialog Box Select Map Book Settings dialog box
Editing Map Book Settings
You can edit the settings of an existing map book.
To edit map book settings
1 In Map Book, select the map book whose settings you want to change.
2 Click Tools ➤ Edit Settings And Rebuild Map Book.
3 In the Edit Map Book dialog box, change the settings as desired.
4 Click Generate.
Quick Reference
MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGS
Edit the settings of an existing map book
Command Line MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGS
Dialog Box Edit Map Book dialog box
910 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Rebuilding Map Books
If you make changes to a map book template, you must rebuild the map book
to apply the changes.
To rebuild a map book
1 In Map Book, select the map book to rebuild.
2 Right-click the map book name and click Rebuild.
Viewing and Editing Map Books
You can view or edit individual tiles and their corresponding layouts.
To view and edit map books
■ Overview of Publishing and Sharing
■ Publishing Maps
■ Exporting
■ Sharing Styled Maps with Non Autodesk Map 3D Users
■ Exporting and Printing Attribute Data
Overview of Viewing and Editing Map Book Tiles
Map books divide a single map into a set of tiles and display each tile on a
separate map book page. You use a template to specify the layout of the pages.
You can view and change individual tiles or layouts for existing map books.
Viewing a Map Book
When you open a map containing one or more map books, none of the map
books is current until you select one. When you select a map book, you
automatically zoom to its extents and see the tile outlines. If the map book is
based on a display map, you will see the stylization associated with that display
map.
Publish Map Books | 911
To view a map book
■ In Map Book, select the map book to view from the Map Book list.
To hide all map books
■ In Map Book, select <None> from the Map Booklist.
NOTE If the map book is based on a display map, this will hide only the tile
outlines. To turn off stylization, use Display Manager.
Viewing Map Book or Tile Properties
You can view basic properties about map books or tiles. In the Map Book
Properties dialog box (page 1142), you can view the map’s name, scale,
orientation, coordinate system, and number of tiles. In the Tile Properties
dialog box (page 1142), you can view a tile’s name and the numbers of its
adjacent tiles.
NOTE The map book properties are strings, for use as field values in sheets. They
do not change the actual properties of the map book.
To view map book or tile properties
1 In Map Book, do one of the following:
■ Right-click the map book name.
■ Right-click a tile name.
2 Click Properties.
Viewing Tiles in Model Space
You can view selected tiles in model space.
To view a tile
■ In Map Book, right-click a tile name. Click Zoom Tile.
912 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
To view several tiles
■ Select multiple tile names. Right-click one of the selected tiles. Click Zoom
Tiles.
To view all tiles
■ Right-click the map book containing the tiles. Choose Zoom Tiles.
Viewing Layouts
You can view layouts for selected tiles, one at a time.
To view a layout
■ In Map Book, right-click a tile name. Click Zoom Layout.
Publishing Map Books
You can publish a map book to a DWF file for electronic distribution or to a
plotter for a printed map book based on the current plot settings.
To publish map books
■ Overview of Publishing and Sharing
■ Publishing Maps
■ Exporting
■ Sharing Styled Maps with Non Autodesk Map 3D Users
■ Exporting and Printing Attribute Data
Publish Map Books to DWF
The steps for publishing a map to DWF (page 894) and publishing a map book
to DWF are slightly different, but you set DWF Publishing Options the same
way for both.
To publish a map book to DWF
1 Save the map.
Publish Map Books | 913
2 Set DWF Publishing Options (page 892)
3 In Map Book, select the map book to publish.
4 Click Tools ➤ Publish To DWF.
5 In the Select DWF File dialog box, choose a name and location for the
DWF file and click Select.
Publish Map Books to a Plotter
You can publish to a plotter for a printed copy. The steps for publishing a map
to a plotter (page 891) and publishing a map book to a plotter are slightly
different. The plotter and plotting options are specified in your layout for this
map book, so the map book is sent to the plotter as soon as you choose the
command.
To publish a map book to a plotter
1 Save the map.
2 In Map Book, select the map book to publish.
3 Click Tools ➤ Publish To Plotter.
Managing Map Books and Tiles
To manage map books and tiles
■ Overview of Publishing and Sharing
■ Publishing Maps
■ Exporting
■ Sharing Styled Maps with Non Autodesk Map 3D Users
■ Exporting and Printing Attribute Data
Rename Map Books or Tiles
You can rename entire map books or individual tiles.
914 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
To rename a map book or tile
1 In Map Book, do one of the following:
■ Right-click the map book to rename.
■ Right-click the tile to rename.
2 Click Rename.
3 Type the new name.
4 Press Enter.
NOTE Renaming a tile does not rename its associated layout.
Delete Map Books or Tiles
You can delete tiles from a map book or delete the entire map book.
To delete a map book or tile
1 In Map Book, do one of the following:
■ Right-click the map book to delete.
■ Right-click the tile to delete.
2 Click Delete.
3 Click Yes.
WARNING You cannot undo the deletion.
Exporting
To export drawing objects
■ Overview of Publishing and Sharing
■ Publishing Maps
■ Exporting
■ Sharing Styled Maps with Non Autodesk Map 3D Users
■ Exporting and Printing Attribute Data
Exporting | 915
Overview of Exporting
You can share all or some of the drawing objects in your map with users of
other software programs by exporting to another format. You can print or
export attribute data separately. The Export command on the File menu affects
DWG objects only. Spatial data is ignored. However, you can export a Display
Manager layer (page 927) containing spatial data to SDF format.
When you export your drawing objects to other formats, you can export not
only the objects themselves, but also data associated with the objects. In
addition, Autodesk Map 3D can automatically perform a coordinate conversion
on the objects as they are exported.
During export, Autodesk Map 3D will copy objects from the active map to
the specified file or location. To export objects from a source DWG file, query
those objects into the active map before you begin the export.
Using Saved Settings
If you saved export settings (from Autodesk Map Release 4.5 or later), you can
reload those settings.
Selecting Drawing Objects
You can automatically select all drawing objects, or you can manually select
the ones you want. In addition, you can export drawing objects on selected
layers or in selected classes. You can also export drawing objects from a polygon
topology.
The status bar tells you how many objects are currently selected and how
many are filtered out. In addition, you can preview the objects that will be
exported.
Data
You can export data associated with drawing objects, including object data,
block attributes, linked external data, object properties, and topology data.
Choose the data you want on the Data tab of the Export dialog box.
When you export external data, two options are available:
■ If the external file format does not support external databases, export the
entire record associated with each linked object. The information from
the record is attached to the exported object as attribute data.
916 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
■ If the external file format supports external database files, export only the
key field.
Coordinate Conversion
If the active map has a coordinate system assigned to it, you can convert
objects from that coordinate system to a different coordinate system.
NOTE The settings specified in the UNITS command do not effect the export
process. The UNITS command affects only the way data is displayed; it does not
affect the coordinate values stored with the objects themselves.
Stylized Objects
Autodesk Map 3D exports original object properties regardless of any map
stylizations, except for text. Text entities created by text stylizations are
exported. To avoid exporting text entities, turn off any text stylization before
exporting your data. For more information, see Working with the Display
Manager (page 401). To export stylized objects, first save the stylizations to a
linked output drawing, then export the linked objects. See Sharing Styled
Maps with Non ProductName Users (page 928).
See also:
■ Exporting DWG Data as Autodesk MapGuide SDF 2 (page 925)
■ Importing Maps from Other Formats (page 332)
Before exporting your data, consider the following:
■ To export objects from source drawings, query those objects into the current
map.
■ To perform a coordinate transformation during export, be sure you have
assigned a coordinate system to the map.
To export drawing objects to other file formats
1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Vector Files.
2 In the Export Location dialog box, select the file format and location for
the exported files. For information on the file format choices, see
Supported Formats (page 337). Click OK.
Overview of Exporting | 917
3 In the Export dialog box (page 1119), specify how to export objects. To use
settings that you stored previously, click Load and select the profile
containing the settings.
4 On the Selection tab, specify the objects to export.
■ To filter the selection to export only objects on specific layers or in
specific classes, specify the layers and classes to include.
■ To export polygons from a polygon topology, select the topology.
■ To preview the objects that will be exported, click Preview.
5 On the Data tab, click Select Attributes and select the data to export with
the objects.
TIP If you are exporting data from an external database, you can export the
entire record from the database or just the key fields. Because the key field
values are stored in the map, choosing the key field (listed under Link
Templates) makes the export faster.
6 On the Options tab, select the options you want.
■ To perform a coordinate conversion, you must have a coordinate
system assigned to the map (page 123).
■ If you are exporting to DGN version 7 or 8, click Map Layers To DGN
Levels to map each layer in the current map to a level in the DGN
drawing. Click Map Layers To Levels to specify names for the DGN
levels. Closed polylines are always exported as polygons; they will be
shapes in the DGN v8 file. You cannot clear the Treat Closed Polylines
as Polygons check box.
■ Click Driver Options to set options specific to the export format you
specified. For information on driver options, see the following:
■ Arc/INFO Coverages (page 339)
■ ArcView ShapeFile (page 337)
■ GML (Geography Markup Language) (page 342)
■ MicroStation DGN Versions 7 and 8 (page 347)
■ MapInfo MIF/MID (page 344)
■ MapInfo TAB (page 346)
■ VML (Vector Markup Language) (page 354)
918 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
7 Click OK to begin the export process.
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports data from Autodesk Map to an external file format
Menu File ➤ Export ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Export Map File
Command Line MAPEXPORT
Dialog Box Export dialog box (page 1119)
Supported Objects
The following object types are exported:
■ Arc
■ Attribute Definition
■ Text
■ Block Reference (exports as point)
■ Circle
■ Ellipse
■ Face
■ Line
■ Line
■ MText
■ Point
■ Polygon
■ Polyline
Supported Objects | 919
■ 2dPolyline
■ 3dPolyline
■ Shape
■ Solid
■ Spline
■ Trace
■ Xref (exports as point)
The following object types are not exported:
■ Attribute
■ Body
■ Dimension
■ Gradient fill for polygon objects (MPolygons)
■ Hatch
■ Image
■ Leader
■ OleFrame
■ Ole2Frame
■ Proxy objects (from other applications)
■ Ray
■ Region
■ Viewport
■ Xline
See also:
■ Exporting (page 915)
920 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Supported Formats
The following formats are supported for export:
■ ArcView ShapeFile (page 337) (often referred to as an ESRI ShapeFile or ESRI
Shape)
■ Arc/INFO Coverages (page 339)
■ GML (Geography Markup Language) (page 342) (version 2)
■ MapInfo MIF/MID (page 344)
■ MapInfo TAB (page 346)
■ MicroStation DGN Versions 7 and 8 (page 347)
■ VML (Vector Markup Language) (page 354)
See also:
■ Exporting (page 915)
Exporting Text Enclosed in a Polyline
If your map includes text that is enclosed in a polyline, you can turn that text
into object data and export it as attribute data attached to the polyline.
See also:
■ Exporting (page 915)
To export text enclosed in a polyline as attribute data
1 Create an object data table (page 158) with one field.
2 Use the Generate Links (page 700) command to automatically attach data
to objects.
In the Generate Data Links dialog box (page 1182), select the Enclosed Text
option. This option links the text data to the polyline enclosing the text.
Under Data Links, select Create Object Data Records and select the name
of the table you created in step 1.
Supported Formats | 921
Click OK and select the objects you want. For each selected object,
Autodesk Map 3D will create a new record in the selected object data
table and fill the record with the enclosed text.
3 Use the Export command to export the polylines. On the Data tab of the
Import dialog box (page 1124), select the table you created in step 1. Select
any other export options you want and export the objects.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Menu Setup ➤ Define Object Data
Icon
Define Object Data
Command Line ADEDEFDATA
Dialog Box Define Object Data dialog box (page 1181)
ADEGENLINK
Automatically links objects to object data or external database records
Menu Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Generate
Links
Command Line ADEGENLINK
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click a link template
➤ Generate Links
Dialog Box Generate Data Links dialog box (page 1182)
MAPEXPORT
Exports data from Autodesk Map to an external file format
Menu File ➤ Export ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Export Map File
Command Line MAPEXPORT
922 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Dialog Box Export dialog box (page 1119)
Exporting Polygons from a Polygon Topology
Exporting polygons from a polygon topology is useful when you export data
to an external file format that supports polygons.
During this operation, you can create a group containing all the elements of
complex areas, such as islands. If the islands themselves have nested islands
or other polygons, these nested polygons will form a separate grouping
automatically, creating different levels of grouping. If two or more inner
polygons are not nested but share the same outer boundary, they will be
treated as one group.
See also:
■ Exporting (page 915)
■ Creating Closed Polylines from a Polygon Topology (page 589)
■ Converting Polylines to Polygons (page 644)
■ Converting Polygon Topology to Polygons (page 646)
To export polygons from a polygon topology
1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Vector Files.
2 In the Import dialog box (page 1124), select the topology to export.
All complete polygons in the selected topology are automatically selected.
3 Select Group Complex Polygons to group nested polygons into a single,
balanced polygon.
If you do not select the Group Complex Polygons option, Autodesk Map
3D will create a separate polygon for each centroid.
To create a single polygon from nested polygons, each nested polygon
must have a centroid. For example, if three polygons are nested one
within another, and the middle polygon does not have a centroid,
Autodesk Map 3D will create separate polygons for the inner polygon
and the outer polygon.
4 Set any other export options.
Exporting Polygons from a Polygon Topology | 923
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports data from Autodesk Map to an external file format
Menu File ➤ Export ➤ Vector Files
Icon
Export Map File
Command Line MAPEXPORT
Dialog Box Export dialog box (page 1119)
Saving Drawing Objects to a DXF File
You can create DXF files for use with previous versions of AutoCAD or with
the many other applications that support the DXF format.
NOTE All topology information, links to external databases, object data, and civil
objects are lost when you use this command.
To create a DXF file
1 Click File menu ➤ Save As.
2 Select a type of DXF from the Files of Type list.
3 Specify a name and location for the file and click Save.
Quick Reference
SAVEAS
Saves an unnamed drawing with a file name or renames the current drawing
Menu File ➤ Save As
Command Line SAVEAS
924 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Exporting DWG Data as Autodesk MapGuide SDF 2
Export drawing objects to SDF 2 format to use as a map layer in Autodesk
MapGuide version 6.5 and earlier.
NOTE This format is not readable by Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise 2007 or
MapGuide Open Source.
Along with the objects, you can export data attached to the objects (such as
object data, external data, attribute data, or properties) to use for the following
SDF fields:
■ SDF Name — the popup label
■ Key — the link to an external database
■ URL — the embedded Web link that jumps to another Web page
Export only one type of object — point, line, polygon, or annotation — to an
SDF file. The associated SIF file is a spatial index format (SIF) file.
Use the coordinate system set in Autodesk Map 3D or export the file using a
different global coordinate system. You can also define your own coordinate
system for the translation.
After creating the SDF 2 file, you can use Autodesk MapGuide Author and
Autodesk MapGuide Server to produce the files needed to create and deliver
Web-viewable maps.
For information about Autodesk MapGuide SDF 2 and SIF files, refer to the
Autodesk MapGuide SDF Loader Help.
See also:
■ Importing Maps from SDF 2 (page 374)
To export DWG data to Autodesk MapGuide SDF 2 format
1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Autodesk MapGuide.
2 In the Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box, select a file. Click Save.
3 On the Selection tab of the Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box (page
990), under SDF Type, specify the type of data to export:
■ Point — Points and inserts.
Exporting DWG Data as Autodesk MapGuide SDF 2 | 925
■ Line — Lines, arcs (segmented), polylines, and plines with bulges
(segmented).
■ Polygon — Closed polylines and circles.
■ Annotation — Text and mtext (mtext exports a single point object).
4 Specify how to select objects for the export.
5 On the Options tab of the SDF Export Options dialog box, under SDF
Description, type a description for the SDF file to which you're exporting
data.
6 Under Data Expressions, you can create expressions as follows:
■ Use the Key option to define an expression to act as the link between
the SDF file and a field in an external database.
■ Use the Name option to define an expression for the SDF Name field.
■ Use the URL option to define an expression to act as a URL (Uniform
Resource Locator).
To create an expression using data attached to the object, such as object
data, external data, attribute data, or property values, click… to select
from a list of available data and properties.
NOTE When exporting a map to SDF format, if you use an expression that
references a SQL value, the export process will require a large amount of
swap space. It may be necessary to partition your data into smaller sections.
7 Under Coordinate Conversion, select Convert To. To specify a coordinate
conversion as part of the file export, enter the coordinate system code.
8 Under Other, select Create Key Index File (KIF) to create a KIF file along
with the SDF file.
9 To save your settings as a profile, click Save.
10 Click OK to begin exporting the data.
Quick Reference
MAP2SDF
926 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Exports an SDF 2 format file for use with Autodesk MapGuide, versions 6.5
and earlier.
Menu File ➤ Export ➤ Autodesk MapGuide
Command Line MAP2SDF
Dialog Box Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box (page 990)
Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer
You can save or export information about geospatial layers in Display Manager
to separate files. Only geospatial features are saved or exported. Any DWG
objects are ignored.
If you use the export option, you can export one or more layers to a single
file. The resulting file contains geometry and attribute data, but no styling
data. The exported layers are saved in an SDF Version 3 file.
If you use the save option, you can save one layer at a time. When you save
a layer, you save its styling information and pointers to the data source that
defines its geometry and attributes. You can drag and drop saved layers into
any map to re-use them.
You cannot use a saved layer and an exported layer together because saved
layers point to the current data for the layer while exported layers contain a
“snapshot” of the data at the time they were exported, and these data
definitions may differ.
Using Exported Layers
You can use exported layers for any of the following:
■ As a map layer in Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise 2007 or MapGuide Open
Source
NOTE This format is not readable by Autodesk MapGuide version 6.5 or earlier.
■ To package the layer contents as a personal geospatial data store. The
resulting SDF file can be opened and edited in any application that supports
this format. However, once you export the layers, they lose their connection
to their original data store, and any changes you make will not be updated
in that data store.
Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer | 927
To export layers in SDF3 format
1 In Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Export Layer.
2 In the Select Layers dialog box, select the layers to export and click Select.
3 Specify a name and location for the file.
4 Click Save.
To save a layer’s styles and pointers to its data
1 In Display Manager, right-click the layer and choose Save Layer.
2 Specify a name and location for the file.
3 Click Save.
Sharing Styled Maps with Non Autodesk Map 3D
Users
To share styled maps with users who do not have Display Manager (for
example, users of AutoCAD or a previous version of Autodesk Map 3D), you
can convert Display Manager styles to object properties using a linked output
drawing.
WARNING If you have a large number of features in your map, this operation
could severely impact performance or produce a drawing too large to open. This
option is not intended for sharing large numbers of styled features.
To share a styled map
1 Build your map using only the features you plan to share.
For best performance, include the fewest features possible.
2 Style your feature and drawing layers as desired.
3 Display the map at the scale you want recipients to share.
4 In Display Manager, click Tools menu ➤ Show Thresholds to display
the Threshold list.
5 Next to the Threshold list, click the thin down arrow, and choose
Properties.
928 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
6 On the Display tab of the Properties palette, next to Linked, choose Yes.
7 Next to Output Drawing, click… and enter a name for the drawing.
8 In Display Manager, next to the Scales list, click the thin down arrow,
and choose Create Linked Drawing.
In the output drawing, styles are converted to object properties. The output
drawing can be viewed by previous versions of Autodesk Map 3D and by
AutoCAD. In addition, the output drawing can be used by the Sheet Set
Manager.
Exporting and Printing Attribute Data
To print and export attribute data
■ Overview of Publishing and Sharing
■ Publishing Maps
■ Exporting
■ Sharing Styled Maps with Non Autodesk Map 3D Users
■ Exporting and Printing Attribute Data
Overview of Exporting Attribute Data
You can export attribute data in the following ways:
■ From the Data Grid: Attribute data for geospatial features appears in the
Data Grid. You can export all or some of this data to a comma-separated
file, which you can then print from a supporting application.
■ From the Data View: Data you linked to drawing objects from an external
source appears in the Data View. You can print some or all of this data, or
you can copy and paste it into another application.
■ As a report: You can query objects in attached drawings to retrieve object
data and properties that match your criteria. You define a template to
specify which of that information to include in the resulting report, which
is written out to a comma-separated file.
Exporting and Printing Attribute Data | 929
Exporting from the Data Grid
Attribute data for geospatial features appears in the Data Grid. You can export
all or some of this data to a comma-separated file. Exported data is stored in
a comma-separated file for use in other applications, such as Microsoft®
Access™ or Excel™.
NOTE You can also copy cells from the Data Grid and paste them into a
spreadsheet program, such as Microsoft Excel.
To export from the Data Grid
1 In Map Explorer, expand the data source until you see the feature you
want and then right-click it and choose Show Data Window.
2 Select the type of data to display.
3 Select the rows representing the data to export.
4 In the Data Grid, click Options and Choose Export.
5 Specify a name and location for the comma-separated file, and click Save.
Printing from the Data View
Data you linked to drawing objects from an external source appears in the
Data View. You can print all or part of the active table. If you have filters in
effect, only the records that match the filter are printed. You can set print
options for margins, titles, grid lines, header, and footer.
NOTE You can also copy cells from the Data View and paste them into a
spreadsheet program, such as Microsoft Excel.
See also:
■ Linking Database Records to Objects (page 315)
■ Opening a Database Table (page 691)
■ Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record Data (SQL Queries)
(page 794)
■ Finding Data View Records Based on Object Location (page 796)
930 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
■ Freezing and Hiding Data View Columns (page 696)
You can print from a Data View table.
To print a database table
1 Open a database table in the Data View.
2 Specify print options, header, footer, or filters.
3 In the Data View, click File menu ➤ Print.
4 Click OK.
To set print options
1 In the Data View, click File menu ➤ Page Setup.
2 In the Page Setup dialog box (page 1074), select the print options you want.
Click OK.
To specify the header and footer
1 In the Data View, click File menu ➤ Header And Footer.
2 In the Header/Footer dialog box (page 1073), set options for headers and
footers. Click OK.
Printing from the Data View | 931
If you've applied a filter to the table, only the filtered records print. To apply
a filter, see Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record Data (SQL
Queries) (page 794) and Finding Data View Records Based on Object Location
(page 796)
Quick Reference
(Data View) Header and Footer
Specifies header and footer for printing in the Data View
Menu In the Data View: File ➤ Header and Footer
Dialog Box Header/Footer dialog box (page 1073)
(Data View) Page Setup
Sets the print options for Data View
Menu In the Data View: File ➤ Page Setup
Dialog Box Page Setup dialog box (page 1074)
(Data View) Print
Prints the current view of the database table
Menu In the Data View: File ➤ Print
Icon
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG)
To create a drawing object report
■ Overview of Publishing and Sharing
■ Publishing Maps
■ Exporting
■ Sharing Styled Maps with Non Autodesk Map 3D Users
■ Exporting and Printing Attribute Data
932 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Running a Query in Report Mode
You can run a special query on objects in attached drawings to retrieve
information about the object properties and object data. You can use Report
mode to save the results of the query to a comma-separated file, which you
can use in a spreadsheet program or database.
For example, you can create a list of pipes and their diameters (when the
diameters are stored in object data).
You use a report template to control the information that is included in the
report. Depending on your use of blocks, layers, object data, links to external
databases, block attributes, color, and other data, you can create various printed
reports.
NOTE
Queries in Report mode retrieve objects from layers that are Off or Frozen.
To run a query in Report mode
1 If you are not already using the Map 3D for Drawings workspace, click
View menu ➤ Menu/Toolbar Layout ➤ Map 3D for Drawings.
2 Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
3 Define or load a query.
4 Under Query Mode, select Report.
5 Click Options.
6 In the Output Report Options dialog box (page 1216), specify the
information to include in the report (page 935). Click OK.
7 Click Execute Query.
See also:
■
■
■
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) | 933
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
Creating a Report Template
Control the information that is included in a report query by defining a report
template.
For example, you can create a report that displays pipe lengths and diameters
by querying the feature class PIPES, and defining a report template that
includes the property LENGTH and an object data field that contains pipe
diameter information.
A template can include variables that represent:
■ object properties
■ feature classification
■ object data
■ topology information
■ SQL data in an external database table
■ block attributes
For a complete listing of variables you can use in a template, see Variables
(page 969).
934 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
TIP Objects that include several elements have multiple entries in the output file.
Use the .TYPE dot variable to identify such objects, and edit the output file to
remove duplicate references to the object.
The report template is saved when you save the query.
NOTE Report mode queries retrieve objects from layers that are Off or Frozen.
If you run a Report query, the report template specifies the information to
write to an external file.
To create a report template
1 If you are not already using the Map 3D for Drawings workspace, click
View menu ➤ Menu/Toolbar Layout ➤ Map 3D for Drawings.
2 Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
3 In the Define Query dialog box, under Query Mode, click Report.
4 Click Options.
5 In the Output Report Options dialog box (page 1216), specify the
information to include in the report.
Click Expression and select the item to include.
You can edit the expression box to add a calculation to the variable. For
example, you can edit an area dot variable to reflect the scale of a map.
6 To associate a range with the expression, select the range table name
from the Range list. To define a range table (page 830), click Ranges.
7 Click Add to add each expression to the Report Template list.
8 Select Process Sub-Objects to create a line in the report for each
component of an object, for example, polyline vertices or centroids, links,
and nodes in a polygon topology.
9 Select Apply Transformation to apply a transformation to the values
displayed report.
If you have used either a coordinate system transformation or a simple
transformation in the current map, you must select this option to apply
the transformation to the values in the report.
10 Specify a name and location for the output report file.
11 Click OK to close the dialog box.
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) | 935
See also:
■ To run a query in Report mode (page 933)
■
■
■
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Menu Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Icon
Define Query
Command Line ADEQUERY
Task Pane In Map Explorer, right-click Current Query ➤ Define
-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Dialog Box Define Query dialog box (page 1203)
936 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Reference Guide
This section provides comprehensive information about In this part
Autodesk Map 3D commands, expressions and variables, and ■ Command Reference
■ Expression Evaluator
the dialog boxes where many of the Autodesk Map 3D settings
■ Dialog Boxes
can be specified.
937
Command Reference
10
In this chapter
■ Mapping Commands
■ Discontinued Commands
■ MAPWSACTION
■ REFEDIT
■ Wildcard Characters
■ Improving Performance
939
Autodesk Map 3D adds its own unique mapping and spatial data management
commands to the AutoCAD command set. You get all the power and design
capabilities of AutoCAD plus the spatial context needed for mapping.
Commands can be accessed using a variety of methods:
■ Enter a command in the drawing area or on the command line.
■ Select the command from the menu.
■ Click the toolbar icon for the command.
■ Right-click an object in the drawing or an item in the Task Pane and select
the command from the shortcut menu
This section provides information about the mapping commands in Autodesk
Map 3D.
For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help.
To learn more about the various ways you can use a command, click the Quick
Reference tab of a help topic.
■ Mapping Commands
■ Discontinued Commands
■ MAPWSACTION
■ REFEDIT
■ Wildcard Characters
■ Improving Performance
Mapping Commands
Following is a list of mapping commands. Click a command name for
information about how to use it.
For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help.
Command Description
AD (page ?) Specifies a point based on angle and dis-
tance from a given point
ADEATTACHDATA (page ?) Attaches object data to objects
ADEDEFCRDSYS (page ?) Defines a global coordinate system
940 | Chapter 10 Command Reference
Command Description
ADEDEFDATA (page ?) Defines object data
Associates a document with an object
Defines key views for a drawing
Displays a document associated with an
object
ADEDRAWINGS (page ?) Manages the drawing set
ADEDWGMAINT (page 1265) Removes locks from objects
ADEDWGSTAT (page 1270) Displays drawing statistics
ADEEDITDATA (page ?) Edits attached object data
ADEFILLPOLYG (page ?) Fills a selected polygon
ADEGENLINK (page ?) Automatically links objects to object data
or external database records
Displays different amounts of drawing de-
tail at different zoom magnifications
ADEQUERY (page ?) Controls defining, modifying, saving,
loading, and executing a query
ADEQUERYLIB (page ?) Maintains the library of queries
ADEQVIEWDWGS (page ?) Performs a quick display of active drawings
ADEREMOBJS (page 1246) Removes objects from the save set so they
aren't saved to source drawings
Mapping Commands | 941
Command Description
ADERSHEET (page ?) Performs rubber sheeting on selected ob-
jects
ADERUNQUERY (page ?) Runs queries in the Query Library
ADERUNXQUERY (page ?) Runs externally saved queries
ADESAVEOBJS (page 1247) Saves objects in the save set back to source
drawings
ADESELOBJS (page 1246) Creates a set of objects to be saved to
source drawings
ADESETCRDSYS (page ?) Assigns a global coordinate system code
for the current drawing
ADESHOWOBJS (page 1247) Displays the objects in the save set
ADETEXTLOC (page ?) Redefines the default label point of an ob-
ject for text
ADETRANSFORM (page ?) Moves, scales, and rotates a set of objects
ADEWHOHASIT (page 1249) Displays the current owner of a selected
locked object
ADEZEXTENTS (page ?) Performs a ZOOM command to display
the extents of selected active drawings
ATTACHDEF (page ?) Changes the current object class definition
file
BD (page ?) Specifies a point based on bearing and
distance from a given point
CLASSIFY (page ?) Classifies existing objects
942 | Chapter 10 Command Reference
Command Description
DD (page ?) Specifies a point based on deflection and
distance from a given point
FEATUREDEF (page ?) Defines a new object class based on an
example in the current drawing
MAP2SDF (page ?) Exports an SDF 2 file for use with Autodesk
MapGuide 6.5 or earlier. Same as MAPEX-
PORTMAPGUIDE.
MAPABOUT Gives information about Autodesk Map 3D
MAPAL (page ?) Adds a link to a network topology
MAPAN (page ?) Adds a node to a topology
MAPANBUFFER (page ?) Creates a buffer around an existing topol-
ogy
MAPANDISSOLVE (page ?) Dissolves a topology into constituent
topologies
MAPANNDELETE (page ?) Deletes all annotation based on selected
template
MAPANNINSERT (page 985) Adds annotation to objects based on select-
ed annotation template
MAPANNREFRESH (page ?) Refreshes existing annotation
MAPANNTEMPLATE (page ?) Defines and modifies annotation templates
MAPANNTEXT (page ?) Creates and edits annotation text
MAPANNUPDATE (page ?) Updates existing annotation
Mapping Commands | 943
Command Description
MAPANOVERLAY (page ?) Overlays one topology with another, and
creates a new topology
MAPANTOPONET (page ?) Traces through a network topology
(shortest path trace, best route analysis, or
flood trace)
MAPAP (page ?) Adds a polygon to a polygon topology
MAPATTACHDB (page ?) Attaches a data source to a drawing
MAPBL (page ?) Breaks a link in a topology at a specified
point
MAPBREAK (page ?) Breaks objects along a selected or defined
boundary
MAPBROWSELINK (page ?) Opens a database table associated with a
specific link template to edit in the Data
View
MAPBROWSETBL (page ?) Opens a database table to edit in the Data
View
MAPCANCELCHECKOUT (page ?) Discards edits and unlocks the features in
the feature source. Edits are not discarded
if Update Edits Automatically is enabled
MAPCGADIST (page ?) Adds the distances between points
MAPCGANG (page ?) Displays the angle between lines or points
MAPCGAZBASE (page ?) Sets the azimuth base
MAPCGCDIST (page ?) Displays the distance between points
944 | Chapter 10 Command Reference
Command Description
MAPCGLIST (page ?) Displays coordinate geometry information
for lines and arcs
MAPCGSETUP (page ?) Specifies coordinate geometry settings
MAPCGSLIST (page ?) Displays the slope between points
MAPCHECKIN (page ?) Saves modified features back to their fea-
ture source and unlocks the features in the
feature source
MAPCHECKOUT (page ?) Makes feature available for editing and if
locking is available, sets locks on the source
MAPCLEAN (page ?) Performs drawing cleanup operations
MAPCLPLINE (page ?) Creates polylines from a polygon topology
MAPCONFIGDB (page ?) Configures the connection to an external
data source
MAPCONNECT (page ?) Connects to a feature source
MAPCONNECTDB (page ?) Connects to an attached data source
MAPCREATECENTROIDS (page ?) Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves
data to the centroid
MAPCREATEFEATUREFROMGEOMETRY Converts drawing objects to features to
(page ?) create new features.
MAPDATAGRID (page ?) Opens the Data Grid, which allows you to
view, edit and filter feature data
MAPDEFINELT (page ?) Defines a link template for a database table
Mapping Commands | 945
Command Description
MAPDELETELINKS (page ?) Deletes database links from objects
MAPDELETELT (page ?) Deletes a link template
MAPDETACHDB (page ?) Detaches a data source from a drawing
MAPDIGISETUP (page ?) Sets up user options for digitizing nodes
and linear objects
MAPDIGITIZE (page ?) Digitizes nodes and linear objects with
settings from mapdigisetup
MAPDISCONNECTDB (page ?) Disconnects an attached, connected
database
MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY (page 1023) Turns on and off the Display Library
palette.
MAPDISPLAYMANAGER (page 1023) Turns on and off the Display Manager.
MAPDIST (page ?) Measures the geodetic distance between
points
MAPDL (page ?) Deletes a link in a network topology.
MAPDN (page ?) Deletes a node in a topology.
MAPDP (page ?) Deletes a polygon from a polygon topolo-
gy.
MAPDOCKWSPACE (page 1253) Docks and undocks the Task Pane
MAPDVP (page ?) Divides a polygon in a polygon topology
by allowing you to add a link
946 | Chapter 10 Command Reference
Command Description
MAPDWFOPTIONS (page 892) Sets Autodesk Map 3D options for publish-
ing to DWF.
MAPEDITDIR (page ?) Edits direction of a link in a network
topology
MAPEDITRES1 (page ?) Edits direct resistance of a node or link in
a network topology
MAPEDITRES2 (page ?) Edits reverse resistance of a link in a net-
work topology
MAPEDITSETAUTO (page 444) Updates feature edits automatically.
Exports data from Autodesk Map 3D to an
external file format
MAPEXPORTMAPGUIDE (page ?) (Same Exports an SDF 2 file for use with Autodesk
as MAP2SDF) MapGuide 6.5 and earlier. Same as
MAP2SDF.
MAPEXTRACTFEATUREGEOMETRY (page Extracts the geometry from a feature to
?) use AutoCAD commands that are not
available for features.
MAPFEATUREEDIT (page 445) Edits a feature.
MAPHILLSHADE (page ?) Specifies the settings to use for shading 3D
raster-based surfaces
MAPIFRAME (page ?) Makes frames enclosing raster images, vis-
ible or invisible
MAPIINFO (page ?) View file, image, object property, and cor-
relation information about selected images
Mapping Commands | 947
Command Description
MAPIINSERT (page ?) Inserts a raster image
MAPIL (page ?) Inserts a link in a topology
MAPIMANAGE (page ?) View list of images in current drawing,
change drawing order, erase or zoom to
selected images
MAPIMPORT (page ?) Imports an external file format into Au-
todesk Map 3D
MAPIMPORTMAPGUIDE (page ?) (Same Imports an SDF 2 file from Autodesk
as MAPSDFIN) MapGuide 6.5 or earlier. Same as MAPS-
DFIN.
MAPIN (page ?) Inserts a node in a topology.
MAPIOPTIONS (page 192) Specify default image correlation settings,
display options, detach options, paths, and
memory settings
MAPJL (page ?) Joins two links in a topology
MAPLINESTRINGCREATE (page 1048) Creates a new LineString feature
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT (page 1049) Edits a LineString feature
MAPLINKEDIT (page ?) Edits a link in a network topology
MAPLINKMANAGER (page ?) Edits the link data attached to an object
MAPLINKUPD (page ?) Updates links in a network topology
MAPLOGIN (page ?) Log in as an Autodesk Map 3D user
948 | Chapter 10 Command Reference
Command Description
MAPMEL (page ?) Repositions an end point of a link in a net-
work topology
MAPML (page ?) Moves a link in a network topology
MAPMN (page ?) Moves a node in a node topology or moves
a node at the end of a link in network or
polygon topologies
MAPMP (page ?) Merges polygons in a polygon topology
MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE (page 1050) Creates a new MultiLineString feature
MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT (page 1051) Edits a MultiLineString feature
MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE (page 1052) Creates a new MultiPoint feature
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT (page 1052) Edits a MultiPoint feature
MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE (page 1053) Creates a new MultiPolygon feature
MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT (page 1054) Edits a MultiPolygon feature
MAPNODEDIT (page ?) Edits a node in a topology
MAPNOUPD (page ?) Updates nodes in a topology
MAPOD2ASE (page ?) Converts object data tables to linked exter-
nal database tables.
Sets Autodesk Map 3D options
Sets up the Oracle Spatial database for use
with Autodesk Map 3D
Mapping Commands | 949
Command Description
Connects to an Oracle Spatial database
schema
Disconnects from an Oracle Spatial
database schema
Displays information about who has an
object locked
Imports records from the Oracle database
schema into the drawing
Removes objects from the Oracle database
schema selection set
Selects and locks a set of objects in the
Oracle database schema
Highlights the objects currently in the Ora-
cle database schema selection set
Exports objects from the drawing to the
Oracle database schema
Plots a set of maps with title blocks
MAPPOINTCREATE (page 1055) Creates a new Point feature
MAPPOLYGONCREATE (page 1056) Creates a new Polygon feature
MAPPOLYGONEDIT (page 1057) Edits a polygon feature
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON (page ?) Converts closed polylines to polygons
MAPPOLYUPD (page ?) Updates a polygon topology
950 | Chapter 10 Command Reference
Command Description
MAPPROPSLT (page ?) Edits the database table name or location
in a link template
MAPPUBLISHTOMAPGUIDE (page ?) Publishes to the new MapGuide technolo-
gy (Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise 2007
or MapGuide Open Source)
MAPRL (page ?) Reverses a link in a network topology.
MAPRUNDBQUERY (page ?) Runs a database query and opens a
database table displaying the results of the
query in the Data View
MAPSDFIN (page ?) Imports an SDF format file from Autodesk
MapGuide
MAPSEARCH (page ?) Searches for and selects features in your
map, based on the location and attribute
criteria you specify
MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT (page ?) Highlights features in the drawing that are
from the selected feature source
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (page ?) Selects all classified objects
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (page ?) Selects all objects that have no classifica-
tion assigned to them
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (page ?) Selects all objects whose classification is
not defined in the object class definition
file
MAPSHOWGEOM (page ?) Highlights objects in the selected topology
MAPSHOWTOPO (page ?) Highlights and identifies topologies for the
selected object
Mapping Commands | 951
Command Description
MAPTHEMATIC (page 1280) Creates a thematic map
MAPTHEMOBJ (page 1282) Creates a thematic map based on drawing
objects
MAPTHEMTOPO (page 1288) Creates a thematic map based on topology
MAPTOPOAUDIT (page ?) Checks that a topology is complete and
contains no errors
MAPTOPOCOMP (page ?) Completes a network or polygon topology
MAPTOPOCREATE (page ?) Creates a new topology.
MAPTOPODEL (page ?) Removes topology data from objects, and
optionally deletes the objects
MAPTOPOLOAD (page ?) Loads a topology
MAPTOPOLOGY (page ?) Converts an existing polygon topology to
polygons
MAPTOPOQUERY (page ?) Queries topologies
MAPTOPORECR (page ?) Reestablishes a topology that was edited
with nontopology editing commands such
as STRETCH, PEDIT, and MOVE
MAPTOPOREN (page ?) Changes the name, description, or both
of a topology
MAPTOPOSTATS (page ?) Displays detailed information about a
topology
MAPTOPOUNLOAD (page ?) Unloads a topology
952 | Chapter 10 Command Reference
Command Description
MAPTRACKCS (page ?) Tracks the coordinates of the cursor in any
coordinate system
MAPTRIM (page ?) Trims objects to a set of edges
MAPUPDATEFEATUREGEOMETRY (page Merges new or existing drawing object
?) geometry with a feature.
MAPUSEMPOLYGON (page ?) Enables/disables use of mapping polygons
MAPUSERADMIN (page ?) Performs administrative functions
MAPVIEWLINK (page ?) Opens a database table associated with a
specific link template to view in the Data
View
MAPVIEWTBL (page ?) Opens a database table to view in the Data
View
MAPWORKOFFLINE (page 450) Disconnects you from feature sources and
caches all your feature data connections,
allowing you to work with a local copy of
your feature data.
MAPWORKONLINE (page 450) Reestablishes connections with your feature
sources so you are working live again and
can check in any changes.
MAPWSACTION (page 958) Indicates that a shortcut menu command
in the Task Pane has no link to an Autodesk
Map 3D command
Switches focus between the command line
and the Task Pane
MAPWSPACE (page ?) Shows or hides the Task Pane
Mapping Commands | 953
Command Description
Redisplays the Task Pane
MPEDIT (page ?) Edits polygons
MPFILL (page ?) Sets the default fill for polygons
MPOLYGON (page ?) Creates polygons
MPSPLIT (page ?) Splits an existing polygon object into two
new polygon objects
NEWDEF (page ?) Creates a new object class definition file
POLYDISPLAY (page ?) Changes the display of polygon edges and
fill
UNCLASSIFY (page ?) Removes classification from an object
ZD (page ?) Specifies a point based on azimuth and
distance from a given point
Changed or Replaced Commands
Some commands have been replaced or discontinued in this release. Some of
the commands still function, but they may not be available in future releases.
You should update any scripts you have to use new commands. For more
information, see Discontinued Commands (page 955).
Using Wildcard Characters with Commands
Most Autodesk Map 3D commands are wildcard character-enabled. For more
information, see Wildcard Characters (page 959).
■ REFEDIT (page 959)
954 | Chapter 10 Command Reference
Discontinued Commands
The following commands have been discontinued or replaced. Some may still
function in this release. However, you should update your scripts to use new
commands.
Category Discontinued Com- Notes
mand
Feature Data Objects FDOATTACH Discontinued. Not used any
(FDO) more.
FDOCONFIGURE Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOCONNECT Discontinued. New command
is MAPCONNECT.
FDODETACH Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDODISASSOCIATE Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDODISCONNECT Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOEDITSETADD Discontinued. New command
is MAPCHECKOUT.
FDOEDITSETREMOVE Discontinued. New command
is MAPCANCELCHECKOUT.
FDOEDITSETSAVE Discontinued. New command
is MAPCHECKIN.
FDOEDITSETSHOW Discontinued. New command
is MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT.
Discontinued Commands | 955
Category Discontinued Com- Notes
mand
FDOLOCKS Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOQUERY Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOREFRESH Discontinued
FDOSCHEMA Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOSHOWOWNER Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOSYSADMIN / SYSAD- Discontinued
MIN
General MAPSKINMAP Discontinued
Import Export (Release MAPIMPORT4 Discontinued
4)
MAPEXPORT4 Discontinued
Drawing Cleanup ADEDWGCLEAN Discontinued in Autodesk Map
6. New command is MAP-
CLEAN.
Oracle Spatial (Older ORACONNECT Discontinued. For information
Method) about the new way, see Using
Features from an Oracle Feature
Source (page 226).
ORADISCONNECT Discontinued
ORAERUPDATE Discontinued
956 | Chapter 10 Command Reference
Category Discontinued Com- Notes
mand
ORAEXPORT Discontinued
ORAIMPORT Discontinued
ORAINDEX Discontinued
ORAUPDATE Discontinued
Topology MAPBUFFER Discontinued. New command
is MAPANBUFFER
MAPCREATE Discontinued. New command
is MAPTOPOCREATE
MAPDISSOLVE Discontinued. New command
is MAPANDISSOLVE
MAPFLOOD Discontinued. New command
is MAPANTOPONET
MAPLINKADD Discontinued. New command
is MAPAL
MAPLINKDEL Discontinued. New command
is MAPDL
MAPLINKREV Discontinued. New command
is MAPRL
MAPNODADD Discontinued. New command
is MAPAN
MAPNODDEL Discontinued. New command
is MAPDN
Discontinued Commands | 957
Category Discontinued Com- Notes
mand
MAPNODINS Discontinued. New command
is MAPIN
MAPOVERLAY Discontinued. New command
is MAPANOVERLAY
MAPPOLYADD Discontinued. New command
is MAPAP
MAPPOLYDEL Discontinued. New command
is MAPDP
MAPTOPOADMIN Discontinued. There are several
new commands,for example,
MAPTOPOLOAD and MAP-
TOPODEL. For a complete list,
see Managing Topologies (page
590).
MAPTOPOEDIT Discontinued. There are several
new commands, for example,
MAPAN, MAPDL, and MAPMP.
For a complete list, see Editing
Topologies (page 549).
MAPTRACE Discontinued. New command
is MAPANTOPONET
MAPWSACTION
This text represents a shortcut menu command in the Task Pane that has no
link to an Autodesk Map 3D command. For example, some topology commands
that you choose from the shortcut menu in the Task Pane do not have
corresponding Autodesk Map 3D commands.
958 | Chapter 10 Command Reference
If you right-click in the drawing after completing such an action, you see
"Repeat MAPWSACTION" in the menu. If you click this item, nothing will
happen, by design. Likewise, if you right-click the command line, you see
MAPWSACTION as one of the Recent Commands, but clicking on it will do
nothing. The action that MAPWSACTION represents is not repeatable by
typing MAPWSACTION on the command line. You must repeat the action
from the Task Pane.
NOTE You cannot undo this operation using the UNDO command.
REFEDIT
Use the reference editing command to make modifications to Xrefs and blocks.
While in REFEDIT mode, the Task Pane and Data View are grayed-out and
some commands are unavailable. If you attempt to use one of these commands,
Autodesk Map 3D displays a message that the command is not allowed during
reference editing
Wildcard Characters
Most dialog boxes and command line entries support the following wildcard
characters.
These wildcard characters can be used in object data queries and property
queries. To use wildcard characters in SQL queries, refer to your database
software for a list of supported characters.
Wildcard Description
# (pound) Matches any numeric digit.
@ (at) Matches any alphabetic character.
. (period) Matches any nonalphanumeric character.
* (asterisk) or% (per- Matches any string, including the null string. It can be used
cent) at the beginning, middle, or end of a string.
? (question mark) Matches any single character.
REFEDIT | 959
Wildcard Description
~ (tilde) Matches anything but the next pattern.
[ ] (brackets) Matches any one of the characters enclosed.
[~ ] (tilde and brack- Matches any character not enclosed.
ets)
- (hyphen) Specifies a range for a single character when inside brackets.
' (reverse quote) Escape character; reads the next character literally.
, (comma) Enters a set when used between items.
NOTE Most Autodesk Map 3D commands are wildcard character-enabled. To
use a wildcard character as a literal character, precede the wildcard character with
a back quote (`). For example, if you have a layer named "Floor Plan #1," from
which you want to query some objects, type Floor Plan `#1 when you create the
query. If you select the name from a list box, the back quote is added automatically
to the text that appears in any corresponding edit box. The wildcard characters
for which this is valid include #, @, .(period), ~.
Improving Performance
You can improve performance in many areas by taking a few steps in advance.
For example, creating indexes can greatly speed up queries and save back.
The following table lists some of the steps you can take to improve
performance. For more information on an item, click the link.
Feature Layers
Filtering a Feature Layer You can filter a feature layer to reduce the number of features
(page 782) in the layer and improve performace. To apply a filter to a
layer, you right-click the layer and choose Edit Query. You
can filter data after you bring it into your map, or you can
960 | Chapter 10 Command Reference
Feature Layers
cancel the Add Data operation while bringing it in and apply
the filter then.
Query
To turn off a global co- Using the Autodesk Map 3D global coordinate systems re-
ordinate system (page quires many complex calculations and can decrease perfor-
125) mance for operations such as querying and saving back ob-
jects.
To create a drawing in- To reduce the amount of time it takes to perform a query,
dex (page 848) create an index. Instead of searching all locations, properties,
object data, or database links to find matching data, Autodesk
Map 3D searches only the relevant index. If you created index-
es in a previous release of Autodesk Map 3D, it may help to
recreate the indexes in this release to ensure that they include
any new features, such as color book names.
Raster Images
To hide an image (page When you hide an image, the image does not display on-
295) screen, nor does it plot. Only the image boundary displays
onscreen. Hiding images is a convenient way to speed re-
generation time. You can easily redisplay the image when
you are ready to plot.
To unload an image To conserve memory use and enhance performance, you
(page 296) can unload images that you do not currently need to view
and/or plot.
To configure memory for Because memory management can be an issue when
images (page 199) working with large images, you can configure the Raster
Extension for best performance. Specify the amount of
memory reserved for the image swap file. The higher the
Memory Limit, the less swapping to hard disk occurs and
the faster your images load and display. For best perfor-
mance, use a local drive for your temporary swap file.
Improving Performance | 961
Raster Images
To change the image Display your images in high quality or draft quality. High
display quality (page 194) quality dithers the pixels so that the areas between shading
appear more gradual. Draft quality can speed up the perfor-
mance of your system, but may reduce the quality of how
some color and gray scale images appear onscreen.
Topology
Buffering a Topology Improve the performance of buffering operations by increas-
ing the RAM to more than the recommended amount, or
by increasing the virtual memory on your system. This is
recommended if you are buffering large topologies.
DataView
To use a SQL filter in the Filter, or limit, the data displayed in the Data View. Filters
Data View (page 795) let you view only the records you want. This can improve
performance in scrolling through many records or in high-
lighting records.
Other
To erase short linear Using the Erase Short Objects cleanup action, you can locate
objects (page 505) any objects shorter than the specified tolerance and erase them.
This action reduces the number of unnecessary linear objects
and nodes in a map.
To simplify objects Simplifying linear objects reduces file size and improves perfor-
(page 521) mance but also reduces the resolution of the data.
To add objects to When modifying or working with a large number of objects, you
the save set and lock can enhance performance by adding the objects to the EditSet
the objects (page (locking them) prior to working with them.
464)
962 | Chapter 10 Command Reference
Expression Evaluator
11
In this chapter
■ Functions
■ Variables
■ Using Color in Expressions
■ Tips and Suggestions for the
Expression Evaluator
963
Use expressions and variables to define data based on other information in
your drawings or in external databases.
Most places where you can enter an expression, you can use the Expression
dialog box to select from a list of available variables. You can combine
expressions and variables to create complex expressions.
■ Functions
■ Variables
■ Using Color in Expressions
■ Tips and Suggestions for the Expression Evaluator
Functions
Expressions can include many types of functions.
See also:
■ Variables (page 969)
Arithmetic Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following arithmetic functions. The
words in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
Expression Description
(+ number number [number] ...) Returns the sum of all numbers.
(- number number [number] ...) Subtracts the second and following numbers from
the first and returns the difference.
(* number number [number] ...) Returns the product of all numbers.
(/ number number [number] ...) Divides the first number by the product of the remain-
ing numbers and returns the quotient.
(abs number) Returns the absolute value of the number.
964 | Chapter 11 Expression Evaluator
Expression Description
(atan num1 [num2] ) Returns the arctangent of the number expressed in
radians.
(cos angle) Returns the cosine of the angle expressed in radians.
(exp number) Returns the constant e (a real number) raised to a
specified power (the natural antilog).
(expt basepower) Returns a number raised to a specified power.
(fix number) Returns the conversion of a real number into the
nearest smaller integer.
(log number) Returns the natural log of a number as a real number.
(log10 number) Returns the base 10 logarithm for a number.
(sin angle) Returns the sine of an angle as a real number ex-
pressed in radians.
(sqrt number) Returns the square root of a number as a real num-
ber.
(tan angle) Returns the tangent of an angle, measured in radians.
String-Handling Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following string-handling functions.
The words in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
Expression Description
(strcase string [which] ) Returns a string where all alphabetic characters have
been converted to uppercase or lowercase.
String-Handling Functions | 965
Expression Description
(strcat string1 [string2] ...) Returns a string that is the concatenation of multiple
strings.
(strlen [string] ...) Returns an integer that is the number of characters
in a string.
(substr stringstart [length] ) Returns a substring of a string.
(chr integer) Returns the conversion of an integer representing an
ASCII character code into a single-character string.
(LPAD stringlength) ads the beginning of a string with spaces until the
string reaches the length specified.
(RPAD stringlength) ads the end of a string with spaces until the string
reaches the length specified.
(trim string [mode] ) Trims strings from the beginning, middle, or end of
a string based on the mode. Mode can be B (begin-
ning), M (middle), or E (end), or any combination.
If no mode is specified, BE is used.
Equality and Conditional Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following equality and conditional
functions. The words in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
Expression Description
(= numstr [numstr] ...) Returns T if all arguments are numerically equal, and
returns nil otherwise.
(/= numstr [numstr] ...) or (<> Returns T if the arguments are not numerically equal,
numstr [numstr] ...) and nil if the arguments are numerically equal.
966 | Chapter 11 Expression Evaluator
Expression Description
(< numstr [numstr] ...) Returns T if each argument is numerically less than
the argument to the right, and returns nil otherwise.
(<= numstr [numstr] ...) Returns T if each argument is numerically less than
or equal to the argument to the right, and returns
nil otherwise.
(> numstr [numstr] ...) Returns T if each argument is numerically greater
than the argument to the right, and returns nil oth-
erwise.
(>= numstr [numstr] ...) Returns T if each argument is numerically greater
than or equal to the argument to the right, and re-
turns nil otherwise.
(and expr ...) Returns the logical AND of a list of expressions.
(or expr ...) Returns the logical OR of a list of expressions.
Symbol-Handling Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following symbol-handling function.
The words in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
Expression Description
(not item) Verifies that the item evaluates to nil.
Symbol-Handling Functions | 967
Conversion Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following conversion functions. The
words in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
Expression Description
(angtos angle [mode [precision] ] Converts an angular value in radians into a string.
)
(ascii string) Returns the conversion of the first character of a
string into its ASCII character code (an integer).
(lwtof lineweight [metric] ) Converts the lineweight (first argument) to a real.
If the optional second argument is non-nil, returns
the lineweight as millimeters, otherwise returns it
as inches.
(rtos number [mode [precision] ] ) Converts a number into a string.
Other Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following other functions. The words
in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
Expression Description
entity .dotvariable Returns the value of the dot variable for the object as it
is stored in the drawing. If the object was queried from
a source drawing, returns the value for the object in the
source drawing, before any transformations are applied.
style .dotvariable Returns the value of the dot variable for the object as it
is stylized in the Display Manager.
PI Returns pi (approx. 3.1415926).
968 | Chapter 11 Expression Evaluator
Expression Description
(Range expression range_ta- Returns the value of the expression after it has been
ble) processed by the specified range table. The range table
must be defined in the current drawing.
(viewscale) Returns the current viewport scale, expressed as the
apparent size of a screen pixel in drawing units.
(viewtwist) Returns the current twist angle for the current viewport.
This is equivalent to the viewtwist system variable.
Variables
Expressions can include many types of variables and expressions.
See also:
■ Object Data Variables (page 973)
Dot Variables
Use dot variables to represent object properties. For example, use the .LENGTH
variable in a property alteration to have Autodesk Map 3D add text to all lines
specifying their length. In an output report, use the .TYPE variable to list the
type of objects in your report.
Expression Description
.ANGLE For most objects, returns the angle in the XY plane.
For ellipse objects, returns the angle of the major axis; for point
objects, returns the ECS rotation; for trace objects, returns the
angle between the middle points of the start and end edges;
for circle objects, returns the angle of the circle normal project-
ed plus PI/2 onto the WCSmdash;if no ECS, returns 0; for ob-
jects with 1 or 0 grip points, returns 0; for attdef, text, mtext,
insert, shape, and raster images objects, returns rotation.
Variables | 969
Expression Description
.AREA Area of a closed polyline or circle.
Topology queries only: Value of AREA object data field for each
polygon.
.BLOCKNAME Name of a block.
.BULGE Bulge factor for a polyline segment.
.CENTER Center point of an object's extents.
If the object is a polygon (a closed polyline), this coordinate is
always inside the closed area regardless of the area's dimension.
.CENTROID Center point of an object's extents; that is, the intersection of
the diagonals of its bounding rectangle.
.CLASSNAME Object class name.
.COLOR ACI color of an Autodesk Map 3D object.Color BYLAYER evalu-
ates as 256.Color BYBLOCK evaluates as 0.
.DWGNAME Name of the object's source drawing.
Topology queries only: Name of the geometry object's source
drawing.
.EANGLE Ending angle of an arc object, using radians, interpreted from
the coordinate space where the object exists.
.EHANDLE Handle of the queried object.
.ELEVATION Value for the Z coordinate.
.EWIDTH Ending width of a polyline. Does not adjust to the ending width
of individual polyline segments.
.HEIGHT Height of a text object.
970 | Chapter 11 Expression Evaluator
Expression Description
.LABELPT Location for text associated with an object.
.LAYER Layer of an object.
.LENGTH Length of a line, arc, polyline, or circle. Circle length is given
as the circle circumference.
.LINETYPE Linetype of an object.
.LINEWEIGHT Lineweight of an object.
.LOCKSTAT User responsible for the lock.
.PERIMETER Topology queries only: Value of PERIMETER object data field
for each polygon.
.PLOTSTYLE Plotstyle of an object.
.RADIUS Radius of a circle.
.ROTATION Rotation angle of a block or text, using radians.
.SANGLE Starting angle of an arc, using radians, interpreted from the
coordinate space where the object exists.
.SHAPENAME Name of an Autodesk Map 3D shape.
.SIZE Size of an Autodesk Map 3D shape.
.STRING Value of a string (can be the value of an attribute or text).
.STYLE Style of a text string or attribute.
.SWIDTH Starting width of a polyline.
Dot Variables | 971
Expression Description
.TAG All Autodesk Map 3D attribute tags for an object. Usually used
with .STRING to return an attribute tag and its string value
(that is, .TAG, .STRING).
.THICKNESS Autodesk Map 3D thickness of an object.
.TOPONAME Topology name (Topology queries only).
.TOPOTYPE Topology type: NODE, NETWORK, or POLYGON (Topology
queries only).
.TRUECOLOR True color or color book value of an Autodesk Map 3D object.
.TYPE Autodesk Map 3D object type.
.URL URL information linked to an object.
An object with no URL link returns nil.
NOTE An object can take only one URL. URL data can be en-
tered in the following formats:
http://servername/pathname/filename.dwg
ftp://servername/pathname/filename.dwg
file://drive/pathname/filename.dwg
.X1, .Y1, .Z1 Components of a line's starting point--X, Y, or Z.
.X2, .Y2, .Z2 Components of a line's ending point--X, Y, or Z.
.X3, .Y3, .Z3 Third definition point of a shape or three-dimensional face. If
used on any other object, returns nil.
.X4, .Y4, .Z4 Fourth definition point of a shape or three-dimensional face. If
used on any other object, returns nil.
.XSCALE Scale factor along the X axis, interpreted using the coordinate
space where the object exists.
972 | Chapter 11 Expression Evaluator
Expression Description
.YSCALE Scale factor along the Y axis, interpreted using the coordinate
space where the object exists.
.ZSCALE Scale factor along the Z axis, interpreted using the coordinate
space where the object exists.
All numeric return values are in decimals.
Object Data Variables
The syntax for using an object data variable in an expression is
:ObjectDataFieldName@ObjectDataTableName
For example, to retrieve the values in the Diameter field of the Pipes table,
enter :diameter@pipes.
Block Attribute Variables
The syntax for using a block attribute variable in an expression is
@BlockTagName
For example, the retrieve the values for the block attribute tag VALVETYPE,
enter @VALVETYPE.
SQL Variables and Expressions
The syntax for using a SQL variable in an expression is
&ColumnName@LinkTemplate
For example, to retrieve the values in the PRICE column in the table referenced
by the link template HOUSES, enter &PRICE@HOUSES.
To relate a second table to the table specified in the link template and return
a value from one of its fields, use this syntax
Object Data Variables | 973
&[ [ [catalog. ] schema. ] colname@LT [.lnka1, lnka2, ..., lnkaN [.lnkb1, lnkb2, ...,
lnkbN ] ]
The expression must be entered on one line.
■ The parameters preceding the @ symbol identify the related table. The LT
parameter identifies the primary table. If no schema or catalog is defined,
it is assumed the related table exists in the same schema as the primary
table.
■ The lnk parameter (or lnk1,lnk2,...,lnkN parameter list) identifies the
column name (or names) to reference for the relation if you are not using
the key or keys identified in the link template. If no lnk column is defined
it is assumed that the columns identified in the link template exist in both
tables and are referenced for the relation.
■ The lnka parameter (or lnka1,lnka2,...,lnkaN parameter list) identifies the
column name (or names) to use in the primary table.
■ The lnkb parameter (or lnkb1,lnkb2,...,lnkbN parameter list) identifies the
column name (or names) to use in the related table if the column name
(or names) to reference for the relation are not the same in both tables.
The number of lnka parameters and lnkb parameters must be the same.
SQL Expressions and SQL Statements
The expression:
&catalog.schema.table.colname
@linktemplate.lnka1,lnka2,...,lnkaN.lnkb1,lnkb2,...,lnkbN
is equivalent to the following SQL statement:
SELECT catalog.schema.table.colname FROM catalog.schema.table WHERE
lnka1 = lnkb1 AND lnka2 = lnkb2 AND ... AND lnkaN = lnkbN AND
linktemplatekey1 = linktemplatevalue1 AND linktemplatekey2 =
linktemplatevalue2 AND ... AND linktemplatekeyN = linktemplatevalueN
where lnka1,...,lnkaN are columns from the primary table, lnkb1,...,lnkbN are
columns from the secondary table, linktemplatekey1,...,linktemplatekeyN are
link template key columns from the primary table, and
linktemplatevalue1,...,linktemplatevalueN are the key column values obtained
from the object.
974 | Chapter 11 Expression Evaluator
Object Classification Variables
The syntax for using an object class property variable in an expression is
#ObjectClassName.Category.Property
For example, to retrieve the values in the Diameter field of the Pipes table in
the PipeRun object class, enter #Piperun.OD:Pipes.Diameter. To retrieve the
values in the layer property, which is in the General category, enter
#Piperun.General.Layer. To retrieve the values of the end node of the
LocalRoads topology in the Roads object class, enter
#Road.Topo:LocalRoads."end node". Use quotation marks so the space in the
name "end node" is interpreted correctly as part of the property name.
AutoLISP Variables
The syntax for using an AutoLISP variable is
!AutoLISPVariable
For example, to retrieve the values assigned to a variable defined as DIAMETER,
enter !DIAMETER.
EED Expressions
The syntax for using an EED expression is
$EEDFIELD@REGAPP (for string fields)
$#EEDFIELD@REGAPP (for numeric fields)
$&EEDFIELD@REGAPP (for SQL fields)
For example, to retrieve the values for the AGE field registed under the
application ADE, enter $#AGE@ADE.
Using Color in Expressions
When specifying color in an expresssion, you can use any of the following:
■ AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) number
Object Classification Variables | 975
■ RGB triplet
■ color book color
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI)
You can specify the color using an ACI color name (red, yellow, green, cyan,
blue, magenta and white), the ACI index number (0-256), BYLAYER (256), or
BYBLOCK (0).
Examples:
■ (ade_qrydefine '("" "" "" "Property" ("color" "=" "blue")""))
■ (ade_qrydefine '("" "" "" "Property" ("color" "=" "5")""))
■ (ade_altpdefine "color" "red")
■ (ade_altpdefine "color" "1")
RGB Triplet
An RGB triplet specifies the amount of red, green, and blue used to create the
color. The values represent the intensity of the red, green, and blue
components. The combination of these values can be manipulated to create
a wide range of colors. For each component, enter a value between 0 and 255.
To enter an RGB color, enter the value for each of the components separated
by commas. Enclose the three numbers in single quotation marks. For example,
enter the color Red as '255,0,0' and enter cyan as '0,255,255'.
Only the following operators are valid: = and < >.
Examples:
■ (ade_qrydefine '("" "" "" "Property" ("color" "=" "\"255,0,0\"" )""))
■ (ade_altpdefine "color" "255,0,0")
Color Book and Color Name
You can specify colors using third-party color books (such as Pantone) or
user-defined color books.
To specify a color book color, enter the name of the color book and the name
of the color separated by a comma. Enclose the entire string in single quotation
marks. For example, to specify the Pantone process coated cyan, enter
976 | Chapter 11 Expression Evaluator
'Pantone(R) process coated, PANTONE Process Cyan C'. When you enter the
color book and color name, be sure to type them exactly.
If you are unsure of the color name or color book name, display the Select
Color dialog box. On the Color Books tab, look at the name of the color book
and the color name.
For information on adding color books, click Help in the Color Books tab of
the Select Color dialog box.
Only the following operators are valid: = and < >.
Examples:
■ (ade_qrydefine '("" "" "" "Property" ("color" "=" "\"Pantone,Pantone 647
CVC\"")""))
■ (ade_altpdefine "color" "Pantone,Pantone 647 CVC")
Combining Colors
When you specify the range of valid colors, you can combine any of the color
specifications. Separate each color with a comma. In addition, for ACI colors,
you can specify a continuous range. For example:
1,5,[7,11],'255,128,64','Pantone(R) process coated, PANTONE Process Cyan C'
Tips and Suggestions for the Expression Evaluator
■ Not all operators are valid with all types of comparisons. When comparing
strings, If, =, /=, >=, <= are valid, but not <. No error results, but the accuracy
of the results can be affected.
■ For strings, the standard wild-card characters listed in Wildcard Characters
(page 959) are valid. For example, if the expression (IF (= .LAYER ELEC*)
EDISON) is placed in the condition, all objects in the query on layers
beginning with ELEC are displayed on the layer EDISON. In addition, the
operators = and /= are valid with wild cards.
■ For real numbers less than one, enter all decimal values with a leading
zero; that is, enter .001 as 0.001.
■ When nil is a possible parameter, Autodesk Map 3D uses zero.
■ The expression evaluator deals only in strings; it does not distinguish
between strings and numerics. The expression evaluator converts strings
Tips and Suggestions for the Expression Evaluator | 977
to their numeric values for math operations and converts the results back
to strings.
■ If you use variables set using AutoLISP, you must precede the variable with
an exclamation point (!).
■ To keep a space within a string, enclose the string in quotation marks. For
example, "this string" evaluates as one string, with a space between the
two words. Without the quotation marks, this string evaluates as two
separate strings. The expression evaluator ignores quotation marks.
■ You must enclose named objects with spaces in the name in parentheses
when used in evaluator functions. These objects include layers, blocks,
hatches, and linetypes.
■ The following expressions handle a maximum of three arguments: +, –, *,
/, AND, OR, STRCAT, =, and /=. All other expressions handle one or two
arguments. If you use +, –, *, or /, you must supply more than one
argument. For example, (+ 5 6) evaluates to 11; (+ 5 3 2) evaluates to 10.
■ An expression evaluates numbers with scientific notation in compound
simple expressions. For example, (+ 1e+001 1) evaluates to 11.0000; 1e+001
evaluates to 10.0.
■ Autodesk Map 3D evaluates pi only in compound expressions; the program
treats pi as a string in simple expressions. For example, (STRCAT pi "_%")
evaluates to 3.14%; pi by itself evaluates to "pi."
■ You can specify color (page 975) using ACI, True Color, or Color Book color
values.
978 | Chapter 11 Expression Evaluator
Dialog Boxes
In this part
■ Annotation Dialog Boxes
■ Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes
■ Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
■ Coordinate Systems Dialog Boxes
■ Data Grid Dialog Box
■ Digitizing Dialog Boxes
■ Display Manager Dialog Boxes
■ Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
■ External Databases Dialog Boxes
■ Object Classification Dialog Boxes
■ Data Connect Dialog Boxes
■ Import Export Dialog Boxes
■ Map Book Dialog Boxes
■ Object Data Dialog Boxes
■ Old Oracle Dialog Boxes
■ OSE Dialog Boxes
■ Other Dialog Boxes
■ Polygon Object Dialog Boxes
■ Query Dialog Boxes
■ Raster Image Dialog Boxes
■ Saving Objects Dialog Boxes
979
■ Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
■ Thematic Mapping Dialog Boxes
(Older Method)
■ Topology Dialog Boxes
■ Viewing Dialog Boxes
980 | Part 1 Dialog Boxes
Annotation Dialog Boxes
12
In this chapter
■ Annotation Delete Dialog Box
■ Annotation Refresh Dialog Box
■ Annotation Text dialog box
■ Annotation Update dialog box
■ Define Annotation Template dialog
box
■ Edit Expression dialog box
■ Insert Annotation dialog box
■ New Annotation Template Name
dialog box
981
Annotation Delete Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to select an annotation template from the list of available
templates.
Annotation Refresh Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to select an annotation template from the list of available
templates.
Annotation Text dialog box
Specify text elements for annotation templates, and set entity properties and
text options.
Attribute
Tag
Specifies a name for the annotation text object.
Value
Specifies the content of the annotation text. Click [...] to specify an
expression.
Object Properties
Layer
Selects the layer for the annotation text. Click [...] to specify an expression.
Color
Selects the color for the annotation text. Click [...] to specify an expression.
Lineweight
Selects the lineweight. Click [...] to specify an expression.
Text Options
Style
Selects the style for the annotation text. Click [...] to specify an expression.
Height
Specifies the default height of the annotation text. Click Select Point to pick
points in the drawing, or click [...] to specify an expression.
982 | Chapter 12 Annotation Dialog Boxes
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle to use when inserting annotation. Click Select
Point to pick points in the drawing, or click [...] to specify an expression.
NOTE Values you enter directly in this field are interpreted using the current
setting for the AUNITS system variable. However, if you enter an expression,
the resulting values are interpreted using radians. If necessary, you can modify
your expression to include a conversion from degrees to radians (divide the
degree value by 360/(2*pi)).
Justification
Specifies the justification for the annotation text. Click [...] to specify an
expression.
See also:
■ To define an annotation template (page 153)
■ To change an annotation template (page 155)
Annotation Update dialog box
Use this dialog box to select an annotation template from the list of available
templates.
Define Annotation Template dialog box
Define or change the text and graphic elements, default properties, and
insertion options of annotation templates.
Annotation Template
Template Name
Select an annotation template.
New
Creates a new annotation template.
Copy
Copies the selected annotation template with a new name.
Annotation Update dialog box | 983
Rename
Renames the selected annotation template.
Delete
Deletes the selected annotation template.
Default Properties
Layer
Selects a layer for the annotation. Click [...] to specify an expression.
Linetype
Selects a linetype. Click [...] to specify an expression.
Lineweight
Selects a lineweight for the annotation. Click [...] to specify an expression.
Color
Selects a color for the annotation. Click [...] to specify an expression.
Default Insertion Options
Insertion Point
Specifies the annotation insertion location based on the selected template.
Click Select Point to pick a point in the drawing, or click [...] to specify an
expression.
Scale
Specifies the scale to use when inserting annotation based on the selected
template. Click Select Point to pick points in the drawing, or click [...] to
specify an expression.
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle to use. Click Select Point to pick points in the
drawing, or click [...] to specify an expression.
NOTE Values you enter directly in this field are interpreted using the current
setting for the AUNITS system variable. However, if you enter an expression,
the resulting values are interpreted using radians. If necessary, you can modify
your expression to include a conversion from degrees to radians (divide the
degree value by 360/(2*pi)).
Edit Template Contents Specifies the contents of the selected annotation
template.
984 | Chapter 12 Annotation Dialog Boxes
See also:
■ Defining Annotation Templates (page 153)
■ Changing Annotation Templates (page 155)
■ Deleting Annotation Templates (page 156)
Edit Expression dialog box
Use this dialog box to create an expression.
You can type an expression, or click [...] to select from a list of variables in
your drawing.
See also:
■ Expression Evaluator (page 963)
Insert Annotation dialog box
Select an annotation template, and specify insert properties.
Annotation Templates Select an annotation template to use when inserting
annotation into your drawing.
Basic Expands or contracts the Insert Annotation dialog box. Click to specify
insertion information.
Insert Options
Insertion Point
Specifies the annotation insertion location. Click Select Point to pick a point
in the drawing, or click [...] to specify an expression.
Scale
Specifies the scale to use when inserting annotation based on the selected
template. Click Select Point to pick points in the drawing, or click [...] to
specify an expression.
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle to use when inserting annotation. Click Select
Point to pick points in the drawing, or click [...] to specify an expression.
Edit Expression dialog box | 985
NOTE Values you enter directly in this field are interpreted using the current
setting for the AUNITS system variable. However, if you enter an expression,
the resulting values are interpreted using radians. If necessary, you can modify
your expression to include a conversion from degrees to radians (divide the
degree value by 360/(2*pi)).
Insert Properties
Layer
Selects a layer for the annotation. Click [...] to specify an expression.
Linetype
Selects a linetype for the annotation. Click [...] to specify an expression.
Lineweight
Selects a lineweight for the annotation. Click [...] to specify an expression.
Color
Selects a color for the annotation. Click [...] to specify an expression.
Match Click to copy the insertion options and properties from an annotation
already in the drawing.
See also:
■ Attaching Annotation to Objects (page 657)
New Annotation Template Name dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify a name for an annotation template.
986 | Chapter 12 Annotation Dialog Boxes
Autodesk MapGuide
Dialog Boxes 13
In this chapter
■ Publish to MapGuide
■ Expression dialog box
■ Define New Object Data Field
dialog box
■ New Layer dialog box
■ Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog
box
■ SDF Import dialog box
987
Publish to MapGuide
Publish the current display map to Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise 2007 or
MapGuide Open Source, platforms that let you publish map-related data on
the web or on an intranet.
URL Specify the URL for the target website. If the site requires a password, a
Connect to Site dialog box appears. Enter your user name and password.
Publishing Options Specify how to deal with files of the same name that
already exist in the target folder. You can choose to overwrite the old files,
make a new copy, or cancel the operation when such files are encountered.
Folder Name Choose a folder for the published files.
See also:
■ Publish to MapGuide (page 899)
Expression dialog box
Use this dialog box to add a variable to an expression. Select an item from
this list and click OK to add the item to your expression.
For example, expand Object Data Tables to see the list of tables in the current
drawing. Expand again to see the list of fields in the table.
See also:
■ Expression Evaluator (page 963)
Define New Object Data Field dialog box
Use the Define New Object Data Field dialog box to create new fields in existing
object data tables when you are importing Autodesk MapGuide SDF 2 files
into Autodesk Map 3D.
Field Name Specifies a name for the new field.
The name cannot contain any spaces. It must start with an alphanumeric
character.
988 | Chapter 13 Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes
Type
Specifies the valid data type of the new field.
Integer
An integer between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647
Character
Any characters
Point
Three real numbers separated by commas representing the X, Y, and Z values
of a point
Real
A real number between -1.7E308 and 1.7E308
If you select Integer, numbers are rounded to the nearest whole number.
Description Specifies a description for the new field.
This description appears in the Object Data Fields list.
Default The value must match the data type you selected above.
Enter the value you will use most often when you assign this data field to an
object.
See also:
■ Importing Maps from SDF 2 (page 374)
New Layer dialog box
The new layer name may not contain any of the following characters.
<>/\:?*|,="`"
See also:
■ Importing Maps from SDF 2 (page 374)
■ To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines (page 581)
New Layer dialog box | 989
Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box
Use the Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box to specify settings for exporting
DWG data to Autodesk MapGuide SDF 2 files for use with Autodesk MapGuide
version 6.5 and earlier.
If you have previously saved your settings in this dialog box, you can click
Load to reload those settings. To save the current settings for use later or to
use in a script, click Save.
Selection Tab
SDF Type Select the type of data to export. Objects of other entity types will
be filtered out of the export. To export these other entity types, run the
Autodesk MapGuide Export feature again. Note that some objects in an
Autodesk Map 3D drawing may be exported as more than one entity type.
Select Objects Automatically Selects all objects of the specified type. If Filter
Selection By Layer is selected, only objects on the specified layers will be
selected.
Select Objects Manually Lets you individually select the objects to export.
To modify the selection set, click Select Objects or Quick Select. Selected objects
that do not match the filter will not be exported.
Filter Selection area Use the Filter Selection options to filter the selected
objects based on layer. Click Filter Selection By Layer and specify the layers
to include. Enter the names of the layers to include, or click the button to
select from a list of all layers in the drawing. Objects that are not on the
selected layers will be filtered out of the export. The status line shows how
many objects are selected and how many have been filtered out.
Preview Filtered Objects Preview the objects that will be exported. In the
preview, objects that will be exported are highlighted. To leave the preview
and return to this dialog, press ESC.
Options Tab
SDF Description Specifies a description for the SDF 2 file.
Data Expression
Enter expressions to specify the Key, Name, and URL fields for the SDF 2 file.
Key
Type an expression to specify the Key field, or click [...] to open the
Expression Builder dialog box, in which you can create an expression for
the Key field.
990 | Chapter 13 Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes
Name
Type an expression to specify the Name field, or click [...] to open the
Expression Builder dialog box, in which you can create an expression for
the Name field.
URL
Type an expression to specify the URL field, or click [...] to open the
Expression Builder dialog box, in which you can create an expression for
the URL field.
Coordinate Conversion To convert the exported objects to a different
coordinate system, check Convert To and enter the coordinate system code
for the export file or click Select Coordinate System to select one.
If this box is greyed, your current map does not have an assigned coordinate
system. You can cancel this dialog box, assign a coordinate system, and then
retry this operation.
Create Key Index File Creates a corresponding Key Index File (KIF) for the
SDF 2 file.
See also:
■ Exporting DWG Data as Autodesk MapGuide SDF 2 (page 925)
SDF Import dialog box
Use the SDF Import dialog box to specify settings for importing Autodesk
MapGuide SDF 2 files into Autodesk Map 3D.
Import Layer
Import to Layer
Imports SDF 2 data to a specified layer. Click New Layer to open the New
Layer dialog box, in which you can create a new layer for the imported SDF
2 data.
Data Elements
Assign to Object Data Table
Assigns Key, Name, and URL data from the SDF 2 file to an object data table
in the current drawing.
SDF Import dialog box | 991
Table
Specifies the object data table to which the SDF 2 data will be assigned.
Click New Table to open the Define New Object Data Table dialog box, in
which you can define a new object data table to hold the SDF 2 data.
Key
Specifies the field in the object data table to assign the SDF 2 Key data. Click
Create New Field to open the Define New Object Data Field dialog box, in
which you can define a new field in the object data table to hold the SDF
2 data.
Name
Specifies the field in the object data table to assign the SDF 2 Name data.
Click Create New Field to open the Define New Object Data Field dialog
box, in which you can define a new field in the object data table to hold
the SDF 2 data.
URL
Specifies the field in the object data table to assign the SDF 2 URL data.
Click Create New Field to open the Define New Object Data Field dialog
box, in which you can define a new field in the object data table to hold
the SDF 2 data.
Create Hyperlinks From URL Field
Creates hyperlinks from the URL expressions in the SDF 2 file.
Coordinate Conversion
Convert From
Specifies the coordinate system of the SDF 2 file. This function is only
available if the current drawing has an assigned coordinate system. Autodesk
Map 3D converts the data from the SDF 2 coordinate system to the active
drawing coordinate system. Click Select Coordinate System to open the
Select Global Coordinate System dialog box, in which you can select the
coordinate system of the SDF 2 file.
Import by Location
Define an Area to Import From the SDF File
Imports a specific area of the SDF 2 file.
X Min
Specifies the X coordinate of the lower left corner of the area to import.
Y Min
Specifies the Y coordinate of the lower left corner of the area to import.
992 | Chapter 13 Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes
X Max
Specifies the X coordinate of the upper right corner of the area to import.
Y Max
Specifies the Y coordinate of the upper right corner of the area to import.
Import Profile
Load
Loads previously saved SDF Import Profiles (SIP files) containing import
settings.
Save
Saves the current import settings as an SDF Import Profile (SIP file).
See also:
■ Importing Maps from SDF 2 (page 374)
SDF Import dialog box | 993
Cleaning Up Maps Dialog
Boxes 14
In this chapter
■ Cleanup Methods Page
■ Error Markers Page
■ Select Actions Page
■ Drawing Cleanup
■ Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog
box
■ Select Objects Page
995
Cleanup Methods Page
Specify what to do with the original objects after the cleanup process is
complete.
Cleanup Method
Modify Original Objects
The processed drawing will use the original layer and as much of the original
data as possible.
Retain Original Objects And Create New Objects
Keeps the original objects and puts the new objects on a layer you specify.
Delete Original Objects And Create New Objects
When you create new objects, existing object data and database links are
copied to the new objects.
Use Original Layer
Places new objects on the same layer as the source objects.
Create On Layer
Enter the name of a layer or click Select Layers to select from a list of layers.
If the layer does not exist, it will be created.
Convert Selected Objects Specify whether to convert lines, arcs, and 3D
polylines to 2D polylines, and convert circles to arcs as well as 2D polylines.
Use these conversion options in the following cases:
■ To use the results of the drawing cleanup operation in another program
that accepts only polylines.
■ To modify the line width of the arcs, circles, or lines so you can use them
in a thematic map. You can only assign line width to polylines.
When you convert arcs to polylines, the polyline is created using a true arc,
not a set of straight line segments.
When you convert a circle to a polyline, the polyline is created using two true
arcs, not a set of straight line segments.
Note If you use the Convert Selected Objects options to convert objects to
different entity types, classified objects may be modified so that they no longer
meet the feature class definition and will be unclassified. You must re-classify
them manually.
996 | Chapter 14 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
Other
Load
Loads a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings saved previously.
Save
Saves your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use.
Next
Displays the Error Markers Page (page 997). Available only if you selected
the Interactive option on the previous Select Actions page.
Finish
Performs the drawing cleanup operation using the current settings.
See also:
■ Converting Objects After Cleanup (page 485)
■ To save drawing cleanup settings as a profile (page 489)
Error Markers Page
Specify the marker shape and color for each cleanup action, specify the marker
size, and set options for erasing or maintaining markers before and after
cleanup.
This page is available only when you select Interactive on the Select Actions
page (page 998).
In Interactive mode, Autodesk Map 3D displays each error for you to accept
or reject the correction. You can place a markers at error locations to help you
find them more easily.
Parameters
Set options for removing markers before and after the drawing cleanup, and
specify the size of the markers, relative to the screen size.
Erase Markers When Cleanup Starts
Deletes markers from an earlier operation before placing new markers.
Deleting old markers prevents confusion. Clear this check box to display
both sets of markers.
Maintain Markers When Command Ends
Keeps markers in the drawing after the drawing cleanup operation.
Error Markers Page | 997
Marker Size
Specifies the marker size as a percent of the screen size. A value between
3% and 7% is usually suitable.
Blocks And Colors For each operation listed, select a marker shape and marker
color from the pull-down lists.
Other
Load
Loads a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings saved previously.
Save
Saves your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use.
Finish
Performs the drawing cleanup operation using the current settings and
displays a list of detected errors in the Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box
(page 1001). You can place markers, review errors, and decide whether or not
to make the suggested corrections.
See also:
■ Setting Up Markers for Interactive Mode (page 488)
■ Saving Cleanup Settings in a Profile (page 489)
Select Actions Page
Select the cleanup actions to perform, the parameters to use, and whether to
review errors in interactive mode or have Autodesk Map 3D automatically
correct errors.
Although you can perform several cleanup actions simultaneously, it is
recommended that you perform only one or a few actions at a time to make
it easier to track changes. And for Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines, it is
recommended that you run these by themselves (do NOT run them with other
actions).
Cleanup Actions list Displays a list of available cleanup actions. To perform
a cleanup action, add it to the Selected Actions list by selecting the in the
Cleanup Actions list and clicking Add. For more information about each
cleanup action, click one of the following links:
Delete Duplicates (page 501)
998 | Chapter 14 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
Erase Short Objects (page 504)
Break Crossing Objects (page 506)
Extend Undershoots (page 508)
Apparent Intersection (page 510)
Snap Clustered Nodes (page 512)
Dissolve Pseudo Nodes (page 515)
Erase Dangling Objects (page 517)
Simplify Objects (page 519)
Zero-Length Objects (page 522)
Weed Polylines (page 523)
Note When you perform cleanup actions that create a new object or break the
object into multiple segments (such as break crossing objects or extend
undershoots with the break target option), on data that has been classified,
the classification information remains with only the one segment that contains
the start point of the original object. You need to classify the other segments
manually.
Add Adds selected action(s) to the Selected Actions list.
Remove Removes selected action(s) from the Selected Actions list.
Selected Actions list Specifies the cleanup actions to perform. Actions are
performed in the order they appear in the list. Order is important and can
affect your results. Note that if you perform Simplify Objects and Weed
Polylines with other cleanup actions, Autodesk Map 3D automatically performs
Simplify and Weed first, regardless of their position in the list
Up arrow Moves the selected action up one position in the Selected Actions
list.
Down arrow Move the selected action down one position in the Selected
Actions list.
Cleanup Parameters Specify the cleanup parameters to use for the selected
action. Each action has it's own, unique set of parameters, so it is important
that you set up each action individually. To set parameters for an action, select
it in the Selected Actions list. Enter the settings to use.
Many of the cleanup actions use a tolerance value when detecting errors.
Tolerance is the radial search distance for locating geometric errors. You can
enter a tolerance value into the Tolerance box, or click Pick to specify a
tolerance by specifying a distance in the drawing area. For example, if you set
the tolerance to 5 units, two nodes within 10 units of each other are within
the tolerance and will be corrected.
Select Actions Page | 999
Some cleanup actions have different or additional parameters, and a few have
none at all. For detailed information about the cleanup parameters for a specific
cleanup action, click a cleanup action link above.
Options
Interactive
Specifies that you want to review errors and decide how to handle them.
For example, you can decide to correct the errors, place marker blocks on
them, or ignore them. To correct errors automatically, clear Interactive.
Note For Simplify Objects or Weed Polylines, Autodesk Map 3D changes
the map automatically, regardless of whether Interactive is selected.
Other
Load
Loads a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings saved previously.
Save
Saves your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use.
Next
Displays the Cleanup Methods page (page 996).
Finish
Performs the drawing cleanup operation using the current settings.
See also:
■ Setting Cleanup Options (page 482)
■ Saving Cleanup Settings in a Profile (page 489)
Drawing Cleanup
Drawing cleanup helps you improve the accuracy of your maps, correct
common map errors (resulting from surveying, digitizing, scanning errors, for
example), and remove unnecessary detail from complex maps. This is essential
when you need accurate and complete maps suitable for defining topologies,
performing map analyses, or plotting and presentations.
The Drawing cleanup interface is a sequence of pages designed to guide you
through the potentially complex task of specifying the set of objects to include
in a drawing cleanup operation, the objects to anchor, the cleanup actions to
1000 | Chapter 14 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
perform and the settings to use, how to treat the objects after cleanup, and
the error marker settings (for interactive mode only).
The Drawing Cleanup interface includes the following pages:
Select Objects Page (page 1003)
Select Actions Page (page 998)
Cleanup Methods Page (page 996)
Error Markers Page (page 997)
Other
Load
Loads a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings saved previously.
Save
Saves your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use.
Next
Displays the Select Actions Page (page 998).
Warning Do not use Drawing Cleanup to correct topologies; you might make
a topology invalid and not be able to recreate it. To edit topologies, use the
topology editing commands (page 549).
See also:
Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box
This dialog box displays the cleanup actions performed on the drawing and
the errors detected for each action. Use this dialog box to step through the
errors, review them in the map, decide whether to correct the errors, place
markers on errors that you want to review later. This dialog box is displayed
only if you select Interactive on the Drawing Cleanup - Cleanup Actions dialog
box. If you don't select Interactive, all errors are corrected automatically.
The Drawing Cleanup Errors are grouped in the following areas:
Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box | 1001
Cleanup Action
List of cleanup actions
Initially, the first cleanup action with detected errors is selected. The icons
next to the cleanup action show you what the error marker for that action
will look like (marker shape and color) if you mark errors in the map. Expand
a cleanup action to display the list of detected errors (Error 1 of...).
All cleanup actions performed, except Simplify Objects, are represented in
the Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box. When using Simplify Objects,
Autodesk Map 3D automatically simplifies the objects, even when you select
the Interactive option.
If you are cleaning up short objects, Autodesk Map 3D divides the detected
errors into three groups: Short Degenerate Objects, Short Line Objects, and
Short Polyline Objects so you can evaluate and correct these types of errors
separately. If you are cleaning up zero length objects, Autodesk Map 3D
divides the errors into two groups: Zero Length Line Objects and Zero Length
Polyline Objects.
To display the list of errors detected (Error 1 of...) for a cleanup action, click
the plus (+) next to the cleanup action's name.
To work with all errors for a cleanup action at once, verify that the action
you want is selected and choose any of the following:
■ To correct all errors for the selected action, click Fix All.
■ To mark all errors for the selected action with error markers, making
them easily visible in the map, click Mark All.
■ To skip all errors for the selected action without correcting them, remove
any error markers, and go to the next cleanup action in the list, click
Remove All.
■ To go to the next cleanup action in which errors are detected, without
correcting errors, click Next Action.
To step through the errors for a cleanup action one at a time, select its list
of errors (Error 1 of...), and then use any of the following:
■ To correct the selected error and go to the next error on the list, click
Fix.
■ To place an error marker on the selected error, click Mark.
■ To skip the current error without correcting it, remove any error marker,
and go to the next error in the list, click Remove.
■ To go to the next error on the list without correcting the selected error,
click Next.
1002 | Chapter 14 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
Zoom Settings
Zoom % box
Specifies the percent of the drawing display that highlighted objects will
occupy. For example, specify 100% to zoom the display to the extents of
the highlighted objects, specify < 100 to display more of the drawing outside
the highlighted objects, or specify 0 to maintain the current zoom level.
Auto Zoom
Automatically adjusts the zoom so that the selected error fills the percent
of the screen specified in the Zoom % box.
Zoom
Zooms to the selected error. This button is available only when you clear
Auto Zoom.
See also:
■ Setting Up Markers for Interactive Mode (page 488)
■ Using Interactive Mode to Review and Confirm Corrections (page 494)
Select Objects Page
Select the objects to include in the cleanup process and the objects to anchor.
If you have previously saved your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file,
click Load to reload those settings.
Objects To Include In Drawing Cleanup
Select objects to clean up. In general, you can clean up linear objects only
(lines, arcs, circles, and polylines), although a few cleanup actions also support
points, blocks, text, and mtext. Any unsupported object types are not cleaned
up.
Select All
Selects all objects.
Select Manually
Specifies that you want to select objects. To select the objects, first specify
any layer or feature class filters, and then click Objects To Be Included.
Select Objects Page | 1003
Layers
Limits (filters) the layers used for object selection. Objects that are not on
the selected layers will be filtered out during objection selection. The status
line shows how many objects are selected and how many have been filtered
out.
Enter the layer names, or click the button to select from a list. You can use
wild-card characters in the Layers box. To use all layers, enter an asterisk
(*).
Feature Classes
Limits (filters) object selection based on feature class. Objects that are not
in the selected feature classes will be filtered out. The status line shows how
many objects are selected and how many have been filtered out. You enter
feature classes the same way you enter layers.
If your map does not contain feature classes, feature class filter options are
grayed-out.
Select Objects To Be Included
Temporarily closes the Select Objects page so that you can select the set of
objects to include in the cleanup. Press Enter to return to the Select Objects
page.
Objects To Anchor In Drawing Cleanup
Select the objects to anchor. Anchored objects are used as reference points
during cleanup and are not altered or moved; objects being cleaned will be
moved towards anchored objects. You can anchor linear objects, points, blocks,
text, and mtext.
Select Objects To Be Anchored
Temporarily closes the Select Objects page so that you can select the objects
to anchor. Press Enter to return to the Select Objects page.
Layers
Limits (filters) the layers used when selecting anchored objects.
Feature classes
Limits (filters) object selection based feature class.
Other
Load
Loads a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings saved previously.
Save
Saves your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use.
1004 | Chapter 14 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
Next
Displays the Select Actions page (page 998).
See also:
■ Selecting and Anchoring Objects (page 479)
■ Saving Cleanup Settings in a Profile (page 489)
Select Objects Page | 1005
Coordinate Systems
Dialog Boxes 15
In this chapter
■ MAPDIST
■ Assign Global Coordinate System
dialog box
■ Select Drawings to Assign
Coordinate System dialog box
1007
MAPDIST
Use this command to measure the geodetic distance between points in your
map.
The geodetic distance is the actual distance along the ground, taking into
account the curvature of the Earth. For example, if you have a Mercator map
of the world, use this command to measure how many miles wide Greenland
is.
Note that this command is different from the DIST command, which measures
the simple Pythagorean distance between two points, not the underlying
physical distance. Because of map distortion (due to the chosen coordinate
system), the actual distance on the ground will be considerably different from
what's measured on the surface of the map.
When prompted, specify the first point and the second point, either by
entering the coordinates or by clicking the mouse. Autodesk Map 3D displays
the following information on the command line:
Distance The geodetic distance from the first point to the second point,
expressed in units of the current drawing's assigned coordinate system.
Azimuth The angle, expressed in degrees east of north, of the line from the
first point to the second point, measured at the first point.
Delta X, Delta Y These are the same as the DIST command.
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box
When you bring objects and features into the current drawing, Autodesk Map
3D checks whether the coordinate system assigned to the object or feature
matches that of the current drawing. If it does not, Autodesk Map 3D
transforms the object or feature to the current drawing coordinate system. If
you edit and save the object or feature back to its source, Autodesk Map 3D
transforms it back to its original coordinate system.
Remember to assign the coordinate systems before you bring objects or features
into the current drawing.
Current Drawing To assign a global coordinate system to the current drawing,
enter the code in the Code box, or click Select Coordinate System to select
from a list of available coordinate systems.
1008 | Chapter 15 Coordinate Systems Dialog Boxes
You cannot assign a coordinate system to the current drawing if it contains
any objects that have been queried from source drawings.
Source Drawings To assign a global coordinate system to attached drawings,
click Select Drawings and select the attached drawings. Enter the code for
these drawings in the Code box, or click Select Coordinate System to select
from a list of available coordinate systems. All the selected drawings are
assigned the specified code. To assign a different code to other source drawings,
use this command again.
You cannot assign a coordinate system to a source drawing if that drawing
currently has queried objects in the current drawing.
If you are using the Canadian National Transformation, you must copy the
data files to the Autodesk shared coordinate system directory.
NOTE For information on using custom coordinate systems you defined in a
previous release of Autodesk Map 3D, look up “coordinate systems, updating” in
the help index.
Coordinate system transformations may not work as expected on raster objects.
See also:
■ Assigning Coordinate Systems (page 77)
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate System dialog box
Select the file names of drawings to which you want to attach the coordinate
system, and click Add. You can change the drive or folder and continue to
add files to the Selected Drawings list. When you have added all the drawings
you want, click OK.
Look In Select a drive alias from the list. Autodesk Map 3D creates a drive
alias for drive C. You must create drive aliases for all other drives that you use.
If the drive or folder you want is not listed, click Create/Edit Aliases to
display the Drive Alias Administration dialog box where you define a new
drive alias.
To open a preview window that displays a preview of the selected drawing,
click Preview. In some instances, such as if a drawing is locked, the Preview
window is blank.
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate System dialog box | 1009
File List Lists all drawings in the current directory.
Filter Use wild-card characters to filter the display of file names. For example,
enter t* to view only file names starting with the letter t.
Add Add the selected drawing names to the Selected Drawings list.
Remove Remove the selected drawing names from the Selected Drawings list.
Selected Drawings To use these drawings, click OK.
See also:
■ To assign a coordinate system to a source drawing (page 121)
1010 | Chapter 15 Coordinate Systems Dialog Boxes
Data Grid Dialog Box
16
In this chapter
■ Data Grid dialog box
1011
Data Grid dialog box
Use this command to access the Data Grid dialog box from either the Display
Manager or Map Explorer Task Panes.
The data grid dialog box functions exactly like any commonly used database
spreadsheet.
■ Columns — Resize columns by dragging left or right.
Sort columns by clicking the column header. Arrow pointing up or down
indicates sort order.
■ Rows — Resize rows by dragging up or down.
The functionality described below applies only to features.
Data Select feature source or table data to view or edit.
Click this icon to automatically zoom to the selected rows.
Click this icon to automatically scroll to the current selection in your
map.
Options
■ Export—Exports the data from the selected row(s) to a text file (.csv).
■ Select All—Selects all rows in the data grid window.
■ Select None—Deselects all rows in the data grid window.
■ Zoom To—Zooms to the selected row.
■ Help—Opens the Data Grid help topic.
Find Select which column value to find from the drop down list.
Click this icon to filter the Find value selection.
Click this icon to filter data based on column values.
1012 | Chapter 16 Data Grid Dialog Box
This icon indicates a filter has been applied to the data grid window
based on the column value selected. If you double-click this icon, the original
data grid window will be restored.
Row counter In the status bar area of the data grid dialog box, there is a Row
field, where you can enter row numbers and the data grid will scroll
immediately to that data.
In addition, when you select rows of data, the corresponding row numbers
will appear in this field.
See also:
■ Finding, Filtering, and Selecting Features (page 775).
Data Grid dialog box | 1013
Digitizing Dialog Boxes
17
In this chapter
■ MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command)
■ Data to Attach dialog box
■ Digitize Setup dialog box
■ Link Template Data Entry dialog
box
■ Link Template Key Column Entry
dialog box
1015
MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command)
Use this command to digitize nodes and linear objects with settings from
MAPDIGISETUP.
Digitizing Nodes
Respond to the prompts:
Specify insertion point: Specify the location of the first nodes. Continue to
specify nodes. When you finish, press Enter.
Digitizing Linear Objects
Respond to the prompts:
From point: Specify the starting point of the linear object.
Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width/<Endpoint of line>: For
information on this prompt, look up PLINE command in the help index.
Continue to specify linear objects. When you finish, press Enter two times.
Digitizing Setup
The specified nodes or linear objects are digitized using the settings specified
in the Digitize Setup dialog box.
■ If you selected Attach Data in the Digitize Setup dialog box, enter the data
values for each digitized object.
■ If you selected Prompt For Label Point in the Digitize Setup dialog box,
specify a label point for each digitized object.
■ If you selected Prompt For Rotation in the Digitize Setup dialog box, enter
a rotation in degrees. (Use the UNITS command to view or change the
current direction.)
■ If you selected Prompt For Scale in the Digitize Setup dialog box, enter a
real number. For example, enter 2 to double the size of the block, or enter
.5 to halve the size of the block.
1016 | Chapter 17 Digitizing Dialog Boxes
Data to Attach dialog box
If you are attaching data to node or linear objects as they are digitized, select
the type of data and the source for the data.
Object Data Type Select Object Data to use data in an object data table in
the current drawing.
Select Database Link to use data in an external database.
Object Data Tables Name If you are using data from an object data table,
select the table.
Link Template If you are using data from an external database, select the link
template associated with that database.
To associate databases to link templates, use the MAPDEFINELT command (or
the Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT) (page 1071)).
Record Validation As Autodesk Map 3D digitizes your drawing, it prompts
you for the key value to associate with each object. Select the validation option
to use.
Validate Autodesk Map 3D checks the database for the key value you specify.
If it does not find a match, you are prompted for a new key value.
Validate And Create Autodesk Map 3D checks the database for the key value
you specify. If it does not find a match, it creates a new row in the database.
You will be prompted to enter information for all the columns in the new
row.
No Validation Autodesk Map 3D associates the specified key value with the
object whether or not the key value matches a row in the database.
NOTE To attach data to node or linear objects, make sure the Attach Data option
is selected on the Digitize Setup dialog box.
See also:
■ Attaching Object Data to an Object (page 698)
Digitize Setup dialog box
Use this dialog box to set options for digitizing nodes and linear objects.
Data to Attach dialog box | 1017
Object Type Select whether you are digitizing nodes (points or blocks) or
linear objects (polylines).
Attach Data Select this option to attach object data to the digitized objects.
Click Data To Attach to display the Data to Attach dialog box, where you can
select the data source and location.
When you digitize objects, you are prompted for the data for each object.
Prompt for Label Point Select this option to change the default location of
the label point for digitized objects. The label point determines the location
of text associated with the object during queries.
As the objects are digitized, you are prompted for the new label point.
Node Object Settings
Specify settings for the node objects that are created during the digitizing
process.
Create On Layer
Specify the layer for new node objects.
To select from a list of layers in the drawing set, click Layers. To create a
new layer, type the layer name in the box.
Block Name
Specify the block to reference when creating node objects.
To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks. To
use point objects, select ACAD_POINT.
Prompt for Rotation
Select this option to specify the rotation for each block as it is digitized.
If this option is not selected, objects are not rotated. ACAD_POINT objects
cannot be rotated.
Prompt for Scale
Select this option to specify the scale for each block as it is digitized.
If this option is not selected, the scale is set to 1. ACAD_POINT objects
cannot be scaled.
Object Snap to End
Snaps the location of the node object to the closest endpoint of an arc,
elliptical arc, line, mline, polyline segment or ray, or the closest corner of
a trace, solid, or 3D face.
For more information about the OSNAP command, see the AutoCAD help.
1018 | Chapter 17 Digitizing Dialog Boxes
Linear Object Settings
Specify settings for the linear objects that are created during the digitizing
process.
Create on Layer
Specify the layer for new linear objects.
To select from a list of layers in the drawing set, click Layers. To create a
new layer, type the layer name in the box.
Linetype
Specify the linetype to assign to the linear objects.
To select from a list of linetypes in the drawing set, click Linetypes.
Elevation
Select 3D to have the linear objects support three dimensions.
Width
Specify the width of the polyline for 2D linear objects.
You cannot specify a width for 3D linear objects.
Object Snap to Insert
Snaps the location of the new linear object to the insertion point of an
attribute, block, shape, or text.
For more information about the OSNAP command, see the AutoCAD help.
See also:
■ Setting Digitizing Specifications (page 116)
Link Template Data Entry dialog box
Use this dialog box to add information to your external database as you attach
external database information to digitized objects. This dialog box appears
only if you have selected the Validate and Create validation method.
The Link Template area lists the full path and table associated with the link
template.
■ To edit any value, highlight the value, type the new value in the Column
Value box, and press Enter to update the value. When you finish updating
values for the current object, click OK.
■ To attach no additional data to the current object, click Cancel.
Link Template Data Entry dialog box | 1019
See also:
■ Converting Object Data to a Linked Database Table (page 326)
Link Template Key Column Entry dialog box
Use this dialog box to review or modify the external data that is attached to
digitized objects.
The Link Template area lists the full path and table associated with the link
template. It also displays the current validation method.
■ To accept the displayed values, click OK.
■ To change any value, highlight the value, type the new value in the Key
Value box, and press Enter to update the value. When you finish updating
values for the current object, click OK.
■ To cancel the digitize operation, click Cancel.
See also:
■ Converting Object Data to a Linked Database Table (page 326)
1020 | Chapter 17 Digitizing Dialog Boxes
Display Manager Dialog
Boxes 18
In this chapter
■ MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY (Display
Library command)
■ MAPDISPLAYMANAGER (Display
Manager command)
■ Alter Block Insertion dialog box
■ Alter Line Format dialog box
■ Alter Linetype dialog box
■ Alter Lineweight dialog box
■ Alter Plotstyle dialog box
■ Autodesk Map Contour dialog box
■ Copy Scale dialog box
■ Define Hatch dialog box
■ Define Text dialog box
■ Filter (for theming) dialog box
■ Import Old Theme dialog box
■ New Scale dialog box
■ Number Expression dialog box
■ Range of Values dialog box
■ Select Display Element dialog box
■ Source Drawing Scope dialog box
1021
■ Style Band dialog box
■ Style Label dialog box
■ Style Line dialog box
■ Style Point dialog box
■ Style Area dialog box
■ Text Expression dialog box
■ Thematic Mapping dialog box
■ Thematic Values dialog box
■ Theme dialog box
1022 | Chapter 18 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY (Display Library command)
Use this command to turn on and off the display of the Display Library palette.
MAPDISPLAYMANAGER (Display Manager command)
Use this command to load a display map, update the display, or turn on and
off the stylization of maps.
Respond to the prompts:
Display Manager [?/Load/Update/Stylization/eXit] Do one of the following:
Enter ? to display the current settings for the Display Manager.
Enter l to load a display map.
Enter u to update the display of the current map.
Enter s to turn stylization on/off.
Enter x to exit the command.
Alter Block Insertion dialog box
Use the Alter Block Insertion dialog box to control how blocks are inserted
for a specific range of entities or for a specific value in a theme.
Name Select a block from those already defined in the current drawing or
click[...] to go to the Select Drawing File dialog box.
Layer Select a layer for the block, or click[...] to go to the Layer Properties
Manager dialog box.
Scale Specify the scale for the block. Use positive numbers. For example, 2
doubles the size, 0.5 halves it.
Angle Specify the angle to rotate the blocks.
See also:
■ Creating Themes for Drawing Layers (page 749)
MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY (Display Library command) | 1023
Alter Line Format dialog box
Use the Alter Line Format dialog box to control the line formatting for a
specific range of entities or for a specific value in a theme.
Linetype Select a line type to represent the data values or click to go to the
Select Linetype dialog box.
Layer Select a layer for the new lines, or click to go to the Layer Properties
Manager dialog box.
Width Specify the width of the polylines in the thematic map.
To assign line width to circles, arcs, or lines, convert the objects to polylines
with the drawing cleanup tools. See .
See also:
■ Creating Themes for Drawing Layers (page 749)
Alter Linetype dialog box
Select a linetype for a specific range of entities or for a specific value in a
theme.
See also:
■ Thematic Mapping dialog box (page 1040)
Alter Lineweight dialog box
Select a lineweight for a specific range of entities or for a specific value in a
theme.
See also:
■ Thematic Mapping dialog box (page 1040)
1024 | Chapter 18 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Alter Plotstyle dialog box
Select a plotstyle for a specific range of entities or for a specific value in a
theme from those already defined in the current drawing.
See also:
■ Thematic Mapping dialog box (page 1040)
Autodesk Map Contour dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to raster-based surface data brought into
Autodesk Map 3D using Data Connect.
Specifies the settings to use when creating new contour lines for a raster-based
surface.
The Autodesk Map Contour dialog box has the following options:
New Contour Layer Name Specifies the name for the new contour layer in
Display Manager.
Contour Elevation Interval Specifies the difference in elevation between
contour elevations, for example 10, 20 or 50.
Units Specifies the units (meters or feet) used to measure the elevation (height)
in your surface. Autodesk Map 3D attempts to get this data from the surface
itself, but you can change it if you need to.
Major Contour Every Specifies the difference in elevation between major
(bold) contour lines.
Label the Elevation Labels the contour lines with the elevation.
Create Contour As Specifies the type of feature to use when creating contour
lines. Either polyline or polygon.
Save Contours Into Filename Specifies the name of the SDF file that will
store the contour line features.
Related procedures:
■ Adding and Modifying Contour Lines (page 759)
Alter Plotstyle dialog box | 1025
Copy Scale dialog box
Use this dialog box to copy all the styles from an existing scale.
Define Hatch dialog box
Use the Define Hatch dialog box to control the addition of hatching for a
specific range of entities or for a specific value in a theme.
Pattern Select a hatch pattern from those already defined in the current
drawing or click to go to the Select Pattern dialog box.
Layer Select a layer for the new hatch, or click to go to the Layer Manager
dialog box.
Color Specify the color of the hatch or click to go to the Select Color dialog
box.
Scale Specify the scale for the hatch pattern. Use positive numbers. For
example, 2 doubles the size, 0.5 halves it.
Angle Specify the angle to rotate hatch created for the thematic map.
For standard-scale hatch patterns (those that do not have an AR- prefix), the
density of the hatching varies according to the hatch scale and plot scale you
use, as shown in the following table and figure
Plot Scale Hatch Scale Result
1:2000 1 to 500 Solid
2000 Lines clearly visible
15000 Sparse, occasional lines
20000 No hatch or one line only
1:10000 1 to 2500 Solid
10000 Lines clearly visible
1026 | Chapter 18 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Plot Scale Hatch Scale Result
75000 Sparse, occasional lines
100000 No hatch or one line only
You can use solid fills at any scale to fill an enclosed area.
See also:
■ Creating Themes for Drawing Layers (page 749)
Define Text dialog box
Use the Define Text dialog box to control the addition of text for a specific
range of entities or for a specific value in a theme.
Style Select a style for the text from those already defined in the current
drawing or click to go to the Text Style dialog box.
Layer Select a layer for the new text, or click to go to the Layer Manager dialog
box.
Insert Point Select the point on objects to create new text. The default is
labelpt.
Justification Select the justification (left, right, center, middle) for text created
for the thematic map. The default is center.
Color Specify the color of the text or click to go to the Select Color dialog
box.
Height Specify the height of the text.
Angle Specify the angle to rotate text created for the theme.
Scale and height values for fill patterns, text height, and symbol size vary
according to the plotting scale you intend to use. The following table shows
suitable text heights for different plot scales.
Plot Scale Required Text Height on Plot (Text Height)
1:2000 1 2000
Define Text dialog box | 1027
Plot Scale Required Text Height on Plot (Text Height)
0.5 1000
1:10000 1 10000
0.5 5000
See also:
■ Creating Themes for Drawing Layers (page 749)
Filter (for theming) dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to features.
Use a filter to select a subset of features for theming. For example, if you have
a layer that contains all US cities with a property called STATE, you might
create the following filter to display only cities in California: STATE = ‘CA’
The Filter dialog box has two modes: Builder and Advanced.
Builder Use the Filter dialog box in Builder mode. Create a condition or set
of conditions that are always valid. To add conditions, click New. To group
conditions, use the Group Selected Conditions and Ungroup Selected
Conditions buttons as needed.
Advanced Use the Filter dialog box in Advanced mode. Create conditions
directly in the editor or paste text from another source. You cannot move
from Advanced mode to Builder mode unless the conditions are valid. Click
Validate to verify the syntax of your filter.
Operation
To combine conditions, click And or Or. To precede the selected condition
with the Not boolean operator, click Not. Specify a property or expression,
condition, and value.
1028 | Chapter 18 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Property or Expression
Create a condition line using properties from the data or by building
expressions. To begin creating conditions, do one of the following:
■ Select Property and then select a property from the list.
■ Select Expression and click . Use the Number Expression dialog box
to build an expression. For more information, see Number Expression
dialog box (page 1030).
Condition and Value
When building conditions, select a relational operator and a value from each
list. To display available values for the selected property, click Get.
Import Old Theme dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to import a theme or an entire thematic map definition
from the old thematic wizard into the Display Manager.
Map Select the map definition.
Themes If you are importing a single theme, select the theme. The theme is
imported as an element in the current Display Manager map.
After you import a theme into the Display Manager, you can edit it:
■ To edit the query used to select objects for the element, select the element
in the Display Manager. In the Properties palette, under Element Source,
select the Query field and click[...].
■ To edit the theme style, right-click an element in the Display Manager.
Click Edit Theme.
New Scale dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a new scale.
Import Old Theme dialog box | 1029
Number Expression dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to features.
Use number expressions to specify values. You can generate a new numerical
value based on existing values. You can also include a number expression
within a text expression by placing it within parentheses. For example, you
might create a text expression that specifies a state name and population for
a label. To express the population in millions, you can apply a number
expression that divides the population value by 1,000,000.
For example, you might create a text and number expression that specifies
the following label text:
concat (State_Name, concat (': ', (Population/1000000)))
Where <State_Name> and <Population> are the values of these properties for
each feature. The label would display California: 33.
The Number Expression dialog box has two modes: Builder and Advanced.
Builder Use the Number Expression dialog box in Builder mode. Create a
condition or set of conditions that are always valid. To add conditions, click
New. To group conditions, use the Group Selected Conditions and Ungroup
Selected Conditions buttons as needed.
Advanced Use the Number Expression dialog box in Advanced mode. Create
conditions directly in the editor or paste text from another source. You cannot
move from Advanced mode to Builder mode unless the conditions are valid.
Click Validate to verify the syntax of your expression.
Spaces are ignored in Advanced mode except within the single quotes that
specify a constant.
Operation
Click a relational operator.
Property or Constant
Create an expression line using properties from the data or by specifying a
constant. Do one of the following:
■ Click Property and select a property from the list.
■ Click Constant and enter the value to use.
1030 | Chapter 18 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Range of Values dialog box
Use the Range of Values dialog box to specify the source of thematic data and
partition it into ranges.
Data Values area
Obtain From
Click… . In the Choose Data Expression dialog box, select the data source
from the lists under Properties, Link Templates, Blocks, or Object Data.
Ignore
Select data values to exclude from the thematic display. These values, while
present in the data, may be inappropriate for use in the thematic map.
Examples include null or empty data values.
Normalize By
Enter a value or an expression if you want to normalize the data values
relative to some other data value. Click… to display the Choose Data
Expression dialog box.
Read Data
Reads the data from the data source according to the expression you defined.
Data Ranges area
Group Value By
Select a method for partitioning data values.
Optimal The optimal method groups data values based upon a determination
of the natural breaks in the data. Because the calculations are iterative, this
method quite literally finds the optimal sets of values in a group based upon
the position of values upon a number line. It is most useful for complex
non-uniform distributions where calculation time is less important than
the accuracy of grouping. This is the default method.
Quantile Divides the data so that each range contains an equal number of
values. Also known as equal count, this method is most appropriate where
the data values are linear (equally distributed).
Equal Interval Divides the data into a specified number of groups from the
minimum value to the maximum. Also known as equal step, this method
has the disadvantage that it may over generalize the data and place too
many values in one range and too few in another.
Standard Deviation This method calculates how far data values differ from
the arithmetic mean. It is most effective when the data approximates a
normal distribution (bell-shaped curve). This is rarely the case with
geographical data, but is fairly common when considering demographic
Range of Values dialog box | 1031
data. Because of this curve preference, standard deviations are best used
with an even number of groups. Standard deviations are often used to
emphasize how far a specific value is above or below the mean value.
Number
Select the number of ranges to create.
Precision
Specify the numeric precision. This option rounds the values up or down
to the decimal point you specify. Rounding only affects the range value
calculations and resulting range divisions. It does not affect the actual data
values stored in the data source. For more information, see Notes About
Precision below.
Use Thousands Separator
Adds a punctuation mark to separate the thousands in values such as
population data.
Find Ranges
Divides the data into ranges according to the parameters you entered.
Ranges Area This area displays the data divided into ranges according to the
parameters you entered.
Notes About Precision
When numeric data is read into the Autodesk Map 3D as part of Thematic
Mapping, it is stored as an eight byte floating point number. You may fine-tune
the formatting of these numbers by selecting a decimal precision or integer
rounding up.
For instance, suppose you have a number that was originally entered into a
database or into an object data field with the value 12.34. This number could
be displayed in several ways depending upon the format specified. Formats
that contain a decimal point will generate the specified number of digits to
the right of the decimal point. Formats without a decimal point will round
up. The following table will make this more clear.
Format Explanation Ouput
.01 use two decimal points 12.34
.1 use one decimal point 12.4
1032 | Chapter 18 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Format Explanation Ouput
1 nearest whole number 13
10 nearest ten 20
100 nearest hundred 100
See also:
■ Thematic Mapping dialog box (page 1040)
Select Display Element dialog box
When you select an item, such as a layer or a object class, a new layer is added
to the Display Manager and all objects in that item are added to the new layer.
If you select multiple items, for example two layers, then multiple layers are
added to the Display Manager.
List of Items
Select the items whose objects you want to include in this element.
Feature Class
Lists all feature classes in the active Feature Definition file.
Layer
Lists all the layers in the current drawing. To select from layers in attached
drawings, create a property query (page 254).
Topology
Lists all topologies in the current drawing. If the selected topology is
unloaded when you view the display map, it will be loaded.
Image
Lists all images in the current drawing. If the selected image is unloaded
when you view the display map, it will be loaded.
Group Selection If you choose more than one item, you can select this option
to group all the new elements under one heading in the Display Manager.
When elements are grouped, you can easily turn off all the elements by turning
off the group.
Select Display Element dialog box | 1033
See also:
■ To select objects by object class (page 250)
■ To select objects by drawing layer (page 249)
■ To select objects by topology (page 258)
■ To add a raster image to the map (page 262)
Source Drawing Scope dialog box
To specify which drawings to include in the query
■ Click on a drawing to select it.
The icon is grayed out for unselected drawings.
■ If you select a nested drawing, its parent drawing is automatically selected.
■ If you deselect a parent drawing, all nested drawings are automatically
deselected.
■ You can select a parent drawing and deselect a child, but you cannot
deselect a parent and select a child.
■ If the drawing is attached using a drive alias, the drive alias name appears
in the file path.
See also:
■ Select objects based on object data or external (SQL) data (page 256)
■ To select objects based on their location (page 252)
■ To select objects based on their properties (page 254)
■ To create a drive alias (page 134)
Style Band dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to features.
1034 | Chapter 18 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Specify the first and last color you want to use to createa color ramp that will
be used to style or theme your feature data. Autodesk Map 3D will create a
color ramp that smoothly transitions from the first to last color.
Style Label dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to features.
Add and style labels for features.
Style checkbox Select the Style checkbox to turn on labels.
Property To Display Select a property or select Expression to use the Text
Expression dialog box to specify label text. For more information, see the Text
Expression dialog box (page 1039).
Font Select a font from the list.
Size Context Select Device Space to specify label widths and heights in screen
units. Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters.
Select Map Space to specify label widths and heights in Mapping Coordinate
System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards, Miles, Millimeters,
Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers.
Units Select the type of units to use.
Size Enter the text size or specify the size using a number expression.
For more information, see the Number Expression dialog box (page 1030).
Format To apply bold, italic, or underlining, click one or more of the Format
options.
Text Color Select a text color.
Background Style Select one of the following background styles:
■ Ghosted: Draws an opaque border around each character. Use Background
Color to specify a color for the outline.
■ Opaque: Draws a background behind the labels. They are displayed as
rectangles with text inside. Use Background Color to specify a color for
the rectangles.
■ Transparent: No background is applied to the labels, which are displayed
only as text on the map.
Style Label dialog box | 1035
Background Color For Ghosted and Opaque background styles, click a color
in the Background Color list.
Horizontal Alignment Horizontal alignment is available for point layers with
fixed labels instead of symbols.
Vertical Alignment Vertical alignment is available for labels on polyline
layers.
Select one of the available positions or select a layer property that contains
alignment information for each feature.
Rotation Do one of the following:
■ Enter the amount to rotate the text.
■ Click Any Angle. Specify the angle using the slider or enter an angle in the
box. Click OK.
■ Click Expression. Specify the rotation using a number expression. For more
information, see the Number Expression dialog box (page 1030).
NOTE Horizontal and vertical alignment settings are not available for area layers.
Only the vertical alignment setting is available for line layers. Horizontal and vertical
alignment settings are available for point layers that display fixed labels instead of
symbols. For more information, see Displaying Fixed Labels at Point Locations
(page 409).
Style Line dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to features.
Create styles for line geometry.
Apply Styles To The Line checkbox Select to apply styles to lines.
Create Composite Lines/Reset To Single Line Click to build up a composite
line style. Style the first line in the composite. Click New to add a new
component to the line. Style the new component as desired. Control the
position of the selected component in the overall composite line by clicking
the up and down arrows. Click Reset To Single Line to style a single line.
Units (Device Space) Select the type of units to measure line thickness. Lines
are specified in Device Space units.
1036 | Chapter 18 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Thickness Specify polyline thickness. Select 0 thickness to draw the line as
thinly as possible.
Color Select a color.
Pattern Select a pattern.
Style Point dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to features.
Use symbols to represent and display point features.
NOTE If precise placement of labels is important, you can display labels instead
of symbols at feature point locations. For more information, see Displaying Fixed
Labels at Point Locations (page 409). You can also specify whether other labels
should obscure symbols on this layer. For more information, see Allowing Labels
to Obscure Points (page 409).
Style A Point Symbol checkbox Select to apply styles to points.
Symbol Symbols are AutoCAD blocks stored in drawings. Click and
navigate to the drawing that contains the symbol you want to use.
Size Context Select Device Space to specify label widths and heights in screen
units. Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters.
Select Map Space to specify label widths and heights in Mapping Coordinate
System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards, Miles, Millimeters,
Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers.
Units Select the type of units to use.
Width Enter the symbol width or specify the width using a number expression.
For more information, see the Number Expression dialog box (page 1030).
Height Enter the symbol height or specify the height using a number
expression. For more information, see the Number Expression dialog box (page
1030).
Maintain Aspect Ratio checkbox To maintain width-to-height proportions
when you change the width or height of the symbol, select the Maintain
Aspect Ratio checkbox.
Style Point dialog box | 1037
Fill Color To override the fill color of the symbol, select a color. If you do not
specify an override, the default fill color from the symbol is used.
Edge Color To override the edge color of the symbol, select a color. If you do
not specify an override, the default edge color from the symbol is used.
Rotation Do one of the following:
■ Enter the amount to rotate the text.
■ Click Any Angle. Specify the angle using the slider or enter an angle in the
box. Click OK.
■ Click Expression. Specify the rotation using a number expression. For more
information, see the Number Expression dialog box (page 1030).
Style Area dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to features.
Create styles for polygon geometry.
Apply Fill To The Area
Apply Fill To The Area checkbox Select to fill polygons.
Fill Pattern Select Solid or a pattern.
Foreground Transparency For solid fills, specify Foreground Transparency if
desired.
Foreground Color Specify Foreground Color for solid or pattern fills.
Background Color For pattern fills, specify Background Color. If you do not
want a background color for the pattern, click Transparent.
NOTE In polygons with transparent backgrounds, the colors you see on the map
may differ from the colors displayed in the Preview frame because the Preview
frame uses a white background, which may differ from the color beneath the
transparent objects in your map.
Apply A Border To The Area
Apply A Border To The Area checkbox Select to apply a border to polygons.
Line Pattern Specify the pattern for the area border
1038 | Chapter 18 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Units (Device Space) Select the type of units to use to measure border
thickness.
Line Thickness Specify border thickness. Select 0 thickness to draw the border
as thinly as possible.
Line Color Specify border color.
Text Expression dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to features.
Use text expressions to specify feature label values. For example, you might
create a text expression that specifies the following label text:
<State_Name>: <Population>
Where <State_Name> and <Population> are the values of these properties for
each feature. For example, California: 33,871,648.
The Text Expression dialog box has two modes: Builder and Advanced.
Builder Use the Text Expression dialog box in Builder mode. Create a
component or set of components that are always valid. To add components,
click New.
Advanced Use the Text Expression dialog box in Advanced mode. Create
conditions directly in the editor or paste text from another source. You cannot
move from Advanced mode to Builder mode unless the conditions are valid.
Click Validate to verify the syntax of your expression.
To join multiple components in Advanced mode, use concat. For example:
concat(State_Name, concat(‘: ‘,Population))
Spaces are ignored in Advanced mode except within the single quotes that
specify a constant.
Property Click Property and select a property from the list.
Constant Click Constant and enter the value to use.
Number Expression Click Number Expression and click . Use the Number
Expression dialog box to create a number expression.For more information,
see Number Expression dialog box (page 1030).
Text Expression dialog box | 1039
Thematic Mapping dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the data you will use for the theme and the ways
in which you want to stylize the objects.
Data Values
Specify whether the data you will use for this theme is a set of distinct, specific
values, or whether it is a set of values that can be broken into ranges, and then
specify the data you want to use.
Theme Type Select one of the following:
■ A Set of Specific Values: Choose this option if each item in this element
has a distinct value. This option is appropriate for string and integer data.
Examples of distinct values are different types of pipe material or different
land use designations.
■ A Range of Numeric Values: Choose this option if the values can be grouped
into ranges. This is appropriate for numeric data only. Examples are
property values, temperature, or population.
Values Displays either the Thematic Values dialog box (page 1041) or the Range
of Values dialog box (page 1031) where you specify the data source to use for
the values and the specific values to use.
Thematic Details
Specify which properties you want to stylize and the stylizations for each
range or value in this theme.
Table Select ways to stylize the objects.
■ In the column heading, select the check boxes for the properties you want
to stylize.
■ Click one of the cells in a stylization column to edit the stylization for a
specific value.
■ Click one of the cells in the Legend column to edit the text that will appear
next to each value in the map legend.
■ To reverse the order of rows in the selected column, right-click a column
heading and click Flip. Flip is available for all columns except Values and
Legend.
1040 | Chapter 18 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
■ To change the value of a particular range, click one of the cells in the
Values column and edit the number. To redefine all of the values, click
the Values button.
Hide Unused Columns Hides any columns that are not selected.
Ramps Select from a list of pre-built stylization sequences, for example a set
of color gradations, hatch patterns, or linestyles.
Scale Ramp to Fit Divides the selected ramp sequence into equal intervals
according to the number of values. If you do not select this option, the ramp
styles are applied in sequence, up to the number of values that you have.
Thematic Values dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use the Thematic Values dialog box to specify the source of thematic data
and then select one or more discrete values from that data.
Data Values area
Obtain From
Click… . In the Choose Data Expression dialog box, select the source of the
data to use.
Ignore
Select data values to exclude from the thematic display. These values, while
present in the data, may be inappropriate for use in the thematic map.
Examples include null or empty data values.
Normalize By
Enter a value or an expression if you want to normalize the data values
relative to some other data value. Click… to display the Choose Data
Expression dialog box.
Read Data
Reads the data from the data source according to the expression you defined.
Select Specific Values area Shows the values read from the data source,
together with the number of occurrences (Count). Select the value(s) to appear
in the thematic map. To quickly select all the values, right-click and choose
Select All.
Thematic Values dialog box | 1041
See also:
■ Thematic Mapping dialog box (page 1040)
Theme dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to features.
Allows you to create a theme for a feature source layer, based on a range of
conditions. A theme consists of a collection of rules. Each rule specifies a style
and feature label for the features that meet the specified condition. You can
add a legend label to provide a description of a rule’s condition.
Rules
Specifies the number of ranges to create and how to handle any existing rules.
Create Rules
Enter the number of ranges to create and whether new ranges replace
existing ranges or are added before or after existing ranges.
You can specify the number of ranges to create if Distribution method is
Equal, Quantile, or Jenks (Natural Breaks). Properties containing strings use
an Individual Values distribution that does not allow the number of rules
to be edited. Adjust the number of rules to control the coarseness of the
theme. For more information about distribution methods, see Understanding
Distribution Methods.
Existing Rules
Specify whether new ranges replace existing rules (ranges) or are added
before or after existing rules.
Create A Range Of Conditions
Check the Create A Range Of Conditions check box to analyze features based
on values that fall into various numerical ranges. If you clear the Create A
Range Of Conditions check box, the theming tool creates a set of ranges with
interpolated styles and labels, but with empty conditions. You can then fill
in the conditions manually.
Property
Select the property on which to base the theme.
Minimum Value
Specify the minimum value for the range.
1042 | Chapter 18 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Maximum Value
Specify the maximum value for the range.
The first rule includes the Minimum Value and the last rule includes the
Maximum Value. Styles are interpolated across the range.
Distribution
Select a method. For more information, see Understanding Distribution
Methods
Interpolate Styles Across The Range Of Conditions
Check the Interpolate Styles Across The Range of conditions check box to
interpolate styles across the range of conditions. The first rule uses the From
style and the last rule uses the To style. Styles are interpolated across the range.
If you clear this box, the theming tool creates a range of conditions with blank
styles. Then, you can fill in the styles manually.
Choose of the following:
Style Ramp
Allows you to define a style ramp manually. Click . The Style Point,
Style Line, or Style Area dialog box is displayed depending on the type of
data associated with the layer. An additional column of controls is provided
for defining the end-of-range style.
Palette
Allows you to select from a list of predefined palettes.
Create Feature Labels For The Range Of Conditions
Select the Create Feature Labels For The Range Of Conditions check box to to
add labels to the features in your theme. The label is placed near the line,
point symbol, or polygon.
Label Ramp
Click to specify the property to display, font, size, format, color,
background style and color, alignment, and rotation of the label. For more
information, see the Style Label dialog box (page 1035).
Create Legend Labels For The Range Of Conditions
Check the Create Legend For The Range Of Conditions check box to label the
theme in the legend.
Label Text
Enter the text to appear next to each rule in the legend
Theme dialog box | 1043
Label Format
For Label Format, specify how to display the legend label.
If you theme a layer on a property that contained area information and you
used the label text Area:, the label formats might look like the following
examples:
<Label Text> <Min> to <Max>
Area: 100 to 200
<Label Text> <Min> - <Max>
Area: 100 - 200
<Min> <= <Label Text> <<Max>
100 <= Area < 200
1044 | Chapter 18 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
19
In this chapter
■ ADEFILLPOLYG (Fill Closed
Polyline command)
■ ADERSHEET (Rubber Sheet
command)
■ ADETRANSFORM (Transform
command)
■ MAPLINESTRINGCREATE
■ MAPLINESTRINGEDIT
■ MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE
■ MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT
■ MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE
■ MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT
■ MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE
■ MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT
■ MAPPOINTCREATE
■ MAPPOLYGONCREATE
■ MAPPOLYGONEDIT
■ Break Objects at Boundary dialog
box
■ Trim Objects at Boundary dialog
box
1045
ADEFILLPOLYG (Fill Closed Polyline command)
Use this command to fill a closed polyline with a color.
Respond to the prompts:
Select/<Layer>: Enter s to select individual objects, or l to fill all objects on
a layer.
Select objects/Layer to fill: Select the individual objects you want to fill, or
enter the name of a layer.
Color to fill <Bylayer>: Enter the name of a color, such as RED.
The selected closed polylines are filled with a solid hatch. To display text or
other objects on top of the hatch, use the DRAWORDER command.
You can set an option to determine whether the hatch object created by this
command is associative.
ADERSHEET (Rubber Sheet command)
Use rubber sheeting when attempting to get two or more different data sets
from different sources to align geographically: for example, when stretching
a new subdivision map into a preexisting parcel map.
WARNING Use rubber sheeting only when it is absolutely necessary because it
can severely compromise the accuracy of your data.
Respond to the prompts:
Base point 1: Specify a point.
Reference point 1: Specify the new location for the first point.
Base point 2: Specify another point. When you finish specifying points, press
Enter. Keep in mind that the more points you enter, the more accurate the
results will be.
Select objects by <Area>/Select: Enter a to select all objects in the polygon,
or enter s to select objects individually.
Objects wholly within the original polygon are modified to fit the new shape
and location of the polygon.
1046 | Chapter 19 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
ADETRANSFORM (Transform command)
Use this command to move, rotate, and scale a single object or a group of
objects. (To transform an entire source drawing while it is active, use the
transformation options in the Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1267).
Respond to the prompts:
Select/<Layer>: Enter S to select objects or enter L to choose all objects on a
layer.
Select objects: Use any AutoCAD selection method to select the objects you
want to transform. If you chose Layer, enter the names of the layers you want
to transform. You can use wild-card characters (page 959) such as * and ? to
select a set of layers.
First source point: Select a point in your drawing or enter the coordinates of
the point.
First destination point: Select a point in your drawing or enter the coordinates
of the point. Objects are translated the relative distance between the first
source point and this new point.
Second source point: Select a point in your drawing or enter the coordinates
of the point.
Second destination point: Select a point in your drawing or enter the
coordinates of the point.
Source and Destination Points
The difference between the first source point and the first destination point
is the offset for the selected objects.
ADETRANSFORM (Transform command) | 1047
The difference in angle between the two source points and the two destination
points is the rotation.
The ratio of the length between the two destination points to the length
between the two source points is the change in scale.
MAPLINESTRINGCREATE
NOTE This command applies only to features.
Use this command to create a new LineString feature on a layer that contains
LineString feature data.
The MAPLINESTRINGCREATE command is based on the PLINE command.
For more information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Specify start point: Specify a starting point for the LineString.
Specify next point or [Arc/Length/Undo]: Specify the next point or enter
an option.
Next Point
Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated.
Arc
Adds arc segments to the polyline.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo]:
Specify the endpoint of the arc or enter an option. If you have already
created one arc, you have the option to close the LineString. For more
information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn
tangent to that arc segment.
Specify length of line:
Specify a distance.
Undo
Removes the most recent segment added to the LineString.
1048 | Chapter 19 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT
NOTE This command applies only to features.
Use this command to edit a LineString feature.
The MAPLINESTRINGEDIT command is based on the PEDIT command. For
more information about the prompts, see PEDIT in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter an option [Close/Join/Edit vertex/Undo/eXit] <eXit>: Enter an option.
For more information about the prompts, see PEDIT in the AutoCAD Help.
Close
Creates the closing segment of the LineString, connecting the last segment
with the first. The LineString is considered open unless you close it using the
Close option. If the LineString is closed the first option is Open.
Open
Removes the closing segment of the polyline. The polyline is considered closed
unless you open it using the Open option. If the LineString is open the first
option is Closed.
Join
Joins two open LineStrings into one. The ends must be touching.
Select objects:
Select the two LineStrings to be joined.
Edit Vertex
Marks the first vertex of the LineString by drawing an X on the screen. If you
have specified a tangent direction for this vertex, an arrow is also drawn in
that direction.
Next/Previous/Insert/Move/eXit] <Next>:
Enter an option. For more information about the prompts, see PEDIT in
the AutoCAD Help.
Undo
Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the edit session.
Exit
Ends the MAPLINESTRINGEDIT command.
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT | 1049
MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE
NOTE This command applies only to features.
Use this command to create a new MultiLineString feature on a layer that
contains line feature data. A MultiLineString is a set of LineStrings that behave
as one feature. When you complete the first LineString you are prompted to
begin another one until you have created the set.
The MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE command is based on the PLINE
command. For more information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD
Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Specify start point Specify a starting point for the first LineString.
Specify next point or [Arc/Length/Undo] Specify the next point or enter
an option.
LineString/eXit <eXit>: Create another LineString or exit the command.
Next Point
Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated.
Arc
Adds arc segments to the polyline.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo]:
Specify the endpoint of the arc or enter an option. If you have already
created one arc, you have the option to close the LineString. For more
information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn
tangent to that arc segment.
Specify length of line:
Specify a distance.
Undo
Removes the most recent segment added to the LineString.
1050 | Chapter 19 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
LineString
Begins the MAPLINESTRINGCREATE command so you can create another
LineString.
Exit
Ends the MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE command.
MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT
NOTE This command applies only to features.
Use this command to edit a MultiLineString feature.
The MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT command is based on the PEDIT command.
For more information about the prompts, see PEDIT in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter an option [Add/Delete/Move/Edit/Undo/eXit] <eXit>: Enter an
option.
Add
Adds a new LineString to the MultiLineString. For more information, see
MAPLINESTRINGCREATE (page 1048).
Delete
Deletes a LineString from the MultiLineString.
Move
Moves a LineString in the MultiLineString.
Select Objects:
Select the object to move.
Specify base point:
Specify a base point for the Move operation.
Specify second point:
Specify the second point for the Move operation. The two points you specify
define a vector that indicates how far the selected LineStrings are to be
moved and in what direction.
MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT | 1051
Edit
Edits a LineString in the MultiLineString. For more information, see
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT (page 1049).
Undo
Undoes the last step in the MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT operation.
Exit
Ends the MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT operation.
MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE
NOTE This command applies only to features.
Use this command to create a new MultiPoint feature on a layer that contains
point feature data. A MultiPoint feature is a set of points that behave as one
feature. When you complete the first point you are prompted to begin another
one until you have created the set.
Respond to the prompts.
Specify a point: Specify the location of the new MultiPoint feature.
Specify a point or [Undo]: Specify the location of the next point or undo the
last point.
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT
NOTE This command applies only to features.
Use this command to edit a MultiPoint feature.
Respond to the prompts:
Add
Adds a new point to the MultiPoint feature. For more information, see
MAPPOINTCREATE (page 1055).
Delete
Deletes a point from the MultiPoint feature.
1052 | Chapter 19 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Move
Moves a point in the MultiPoint feature.
Select Objects:
Select the object to move.
Specify base point:
Specify a base point for the Move operation.
Specify second point:
Specify the second point for the Move operation. The two points you specify
define a vector that indicates how far the selected points are to be moved
and in what direction.
Undo
Undoes the last step in the MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT operation.
Exit
Ends the MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT operation.
MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE
NOTE This command applies only to features.
Use this command to create a new MultiPolygon feature on a layer that
contains polygon feature data. A MultiPolygon is a set of polygons that behave
as one feature. When you complete the first polygon you are prompted to
begin another one until you have created the set.
The MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE command is based on the PLINE command.
For more information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Specify start point: Specify a starting point for the MultiPolygon.
Specify next point or [Arc/Length/Undo]: Specify the next point or enter
an option.
Next Point
Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated.
Arc
Adds arc segments to the polygon.
MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE | 1053
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo]:
Specify the endpoint of the arc or enter an option. If you have already
created one arc, you have the option to close the polygon. For more
information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn
tangent to that arc segment.
Specify length of line:
Specify a distance.
Undo
Removes the most recent segment added to the polygon.
Ring
Creates a polygon inside a polygon. This is considered a hole. Additional rings
are islands. Repeats the MAPPOLYGONCREATE command.
Polygon
Begins the MAPPOLYGONCREATE command so you can create another
polygon.
Exit
Ends the MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE command.
MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT
NOTE This command applies only to features.
Use this command to edit a MultiPolygon feature.
The MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT command is based on the PEDIT command.
For more information about the prompts, see PEDIT in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter an option [Add/addRing/Delete/Move/Edit/Undo/eXit] <eXit>: Enter
an option.
1054 | Chapter 19 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Add
Adds a new polygon to the MultiPolygon. For more information, see
MAPPOLYGONCREATE (page 1056).
Addring
Creates a polygon inside a polygon. This is considered a hole. Additional rings
are islands. Specify the polygon to which you will add the ring. Repeats the
MAPPOLYGONCREATE command.
Delete
Deletes a polygon from the MultiPolygon.
Move
Moves a polygon in the MultiPolygon.
Select objects:
Select the polygon to move.
Specify base point:
Specify a base point for the Move operation.
Specify second point:
Specify the second point for the Move operation. The two points you specify
define a vector that indicates how far the selected polygons are to be moved
and in what direction.
Edit
Edits a polygon in the MultiPolygon. For more information, see
MAPPOLYGONEDIT (page 1057).
Undo
Undoes the last step in the MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT operation.
Exit
Ends the MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT operation.
MAPPOINTCREATE
NOTE This command applies only to features.
Use this command to create a new point feature on a layer that contains point
feature data.
MAPPOINTCREATE | 1055
Respond to the prompt.
Specify a point: Specify the location of the new point feature.
MAPPOLYGONCREATE
NOTE This command applies only to features.
Use this command to create a new polygon feature on a layer that contains
polygon feature data.
The MAPPOLYGONCREATE command is based on the PLINE command. For
more information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts.
Specify start point: Specify a starting point for the polygon.
Specify next point or [Arc/Length/Undo]: Specify the next point or enter
an option.
Next Point
Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated.
Arc
Adds arc segments to the polygon.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo]:
Specify the endpoint of the arc or enter an option. If you have already
created one arc, you have the option to close the polygon. For more
information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn
tangent to that arc segment.
Specify length of line:
Specify a distance.
Undo
Removes the most recent segment added to the polygon.
1056 | Chapter 19 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Ring
Creates a polygon inside a polygon. This is considered a hole. Additional rings
are islands. Repeats the MAPPOLYGONCREATE command.
Exit
Ends the MAPPOLYGONCREATE command.
MAPPOLYGONEDIT
NOTE This command applies only to features.
Use this command to edit a polygon feature.
The MAPPOLYGONEDIT command is based on the PEDIT command. For
more information about the prompts, see PEDIT in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter an option [Add/Delete/Move/Edit/Undo/eXit] <eXit>: Enter an
option.
Add
Adds an outer polygon or a ring or island to the selected polygon. For more
information, see MAPPOLYGONCREATE (page 1056).
Delete
Deletes the outermost polygon or rings or islands from the selected polygon.
Move
Moves the outermost polygon or rings or islands in the selected polygon.
Select objects:
Select the polygon to move.
Specify base point:
Specify a base point for the Move operation.
Specify second point:
Specify the second point for the Move operation. The two points you specify
define a vector that indicates how far the selected polygons are to be moved
and in what direction.
MAPPOLYGONEDIT | 1057
Edit
Edits a vertex on the outer ring or an island or hole. For more information,
see MAPLINESTRINGEDIT (page 1049).
Undo
Undoes the last step in the MAPPOLYGONEDIT operation.
Exit
Ends the MAPPOLYGONEDIT operation.
Break Objects at Boundary dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a clean map edge by cutting lines, 2D polylines,
arcs, and circles that cross a specified edge.
Before
After
Boundaries
Specify what to use as the boundary.
Use Save Back Extents Of Active Source Drawings
Use the save back extents specified in the current drawing's drawing settings.
You can change the save back extents in the Drawing Settings dialog box.
Choose Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set. In the Define/Modify Drawing
Set dialog box (page 1263), click Drawing Settings.
Select Boundaries
Use existing objects as the boundary. If you select this option, click Select
<. Select the objects to use.
1058 | Chapter 19 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Define Boundary
Use selected points to specify the boundary. If you select this option, click
Define <. Select points to delineate the boundary.
Objects to Break
Select the objects to break.
Select Automatically
Use all objects within or crossing the boundary.
Select Manually
Use only selected objects. If you select this option, click Select <. Select the
objects to break.
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects.
Filter On Layers
Only objects on the selected layers will be broken. Click Layers to select
from a list of all available layers in the current drawing.
Break Method
Select the objects to skip or object data to retain during a break operation.
Skip Topology Objects
Select this option to protect topology data. Any objects that have topology
data are not broken.
Retain Object Data
Select this option to save object data from the original object. The data is
duplicated on each new piece.
See also:
■ Breaking Objects at a Closed Boundary (page 617)
Trim Objects at Boundary dialog box
Use this dialog box to trim objects at a specified boundary, excluding either
what is inside the boundary (Trim Inside), or what is outside (Trim Outside).
Trim Objects at Boundary dialog box | 1059
The trimmed objects are created new in the current drawing and do not retain
links to their source drawings.
Trim Inside / Trim Outside
Given some drawing data...
And a trim boundary...
Trim Inside looks like this...
And Trim Outside like this...
Boundary
Specify what to use as the boundary.
Reference Last Query Boundary
Use the last spatial boundary that was referenced in a query.
Select Boundary
Use an existing object as the boundary. If you select this option, click Select
< and select the closed polyline or circle to use as the boundary.
1060 | Chapter 19 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Define Boundary
Use selected points to specify the boundary. If you select this option, click
Define < and select points to delineate the boundary. You must specify at
least three points, and the boundary cannot cross itself.
Objects to Trim
Select the objects to trim.
Select Automatically
Trim all objects within or crossing the boundary.
Select Manually
Trim only selected objects. If you select this option, click Select < and select
the objects to trim.
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects.
Filter On Layers
Only objects on the selected layers will be trimmed. Click Layers to select
from a list of all available layers in the current drawing.
If circle objects cross the selected boundary, they are converted to arcs before
they are trimmed.
Trim Method
Set rules for the trim operation.
Trim Inside/Outside Boundary
Specify whether to trim all objects inside the specified boundary and cut a
hole in the drawing, or whether to trim all objects outside the boundary
and create a neat border.
Skip Topology Objects
Select this option to protect topology data. Any objects that have topology
data are not trimmed.
Retain Object Data
Select this option to duplicate object data and external database links on
each piece of the trimmed object. If you do not select this option, the data
remains attached only to the original location.
Objects That Cannot be Trimmed
Specify what to do with objects that cannot be trimmed, such as text.
Trim Objects at Boundary dialog box | 1061
Ignore
Do not delete the objects.
Delete
Delete the objects.
Reference Insertion Point
Delete an object only if its insertion point is inside the area to be trimmed.
See also:
■ Trimming Objects at a Boundary (page 621)
1062 | Chapter 19 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
External Databases Dialog
Boxes 20
In this chapter
■ Associate Database Versions
dialog box
■ Column dialog box
■ Column Values dialog box
■ Configure Data Source dialog box
■ Connect Data Source dialog box
■ Convert Object Data to Database
Links dialog box
■ Define Link Template dialog box
(MAPOD2ASE)
■ Define Link Template dialog box
(MAPDEFINELT)
■ Detach Data Source dialog box
■ Disconnect Data Source dialog
box
■ Header/Footer dialog box
■ Link Template Properties dialog
box
■ Page Setup dialog box
■ Select Database Version dialog
box
1063
■ Select Existing Link Template
dialog box
■ Select Link Template dialog box
■ Select Link Templates dialog box
■ Select Query dialog box
■ Select Table dialog box
(MAPBROWSETBL)
■ Sort dialog box
■ Table Filter dialog box
■ Table Filter History dialog box
■ Table Properties dialog box
■ Zoom Scale dialog box
1064 | Chapter 20 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Associate Database Versions dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
You can associate a database file extension with the version of the database
software that you use to edit the file. When you drop a database file on the
Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, Autodesk Map 3D checks the file extension
and uses the specified version of the database software.
Always Prompt Each time you drop a database file onto the Map Explorer
tab, Autodesk Map 3D will prompt for the version of the database software to
use with the file.
Select this option if you use more than one type of database.
Always Use When you drop a database file onto the Map Explorer, Autodesk
Map 3D uses the specified version of the database software.
For example, if all your dBASE files are in dBASE III format, select the Always
Use option, and then select dBASE III from the list. If you have files in both
dBASE III and dBASE IV format, select the Always Prompt option under
dBASE/FoxPro.
For files created with Excel 95, select the Excel 7.0 driver.
See also:
■ To associate database versions with files extensions (page 186)
Column dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify column display options.
By default, your formatting changes are saved with the current drawing.
Whenever you open this table from this drawing, the table uses the saved
formatting. If you do not want to save the formatting, clear the Save Format
And Style Changes With Drawing option on the Data Source tab of the
Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254). If this option is cleared, Autodesk
Map 3D erases formatting information when you close a table. When you
detach a data source, Autodesk Map 3D erases formatting information for all
tables in that data source.
Associate Database Versions dialog box | 1065
If you modify table column order outside of the Data View, the Data View
formatting may no longer be correct. To clear the formatting for a single table,
close the table when the Save Format And Style Changes With Drawing option
is cleared. To clear the formatting for all tables in a data source, detach the
data source.
Use the Font tab to specify text options for the selected column.
Use this Interior Pattern tab to specify the background of cells in the selected
column.
Use the Borders tab to specify borders for the selected column.
Use Align tab to specify text alignment for the selected column.
Font tab
Font Select a font from the list of fonts installed on your system. Row height
adjusts automatically for the font size.
Outline Select a font style. Font styles available depend on the selected font.
Size Select a font size. Sizes available depend on the selected font.
Effects Select Strikeout to print hyphens through the text. Select Underline
to underline the text.
Text Color Select a color for the text.
Preview Preview how the font options will look.
Color tab
Interior Pattern Select a pattern. For no pattern, select the asterisks.
Foreground Specify the color for the foreground of the pattern. Be sure to
select a color that doesn't hide the text.
Background Specify the color for the background of the pattern. Be sure to
select a color that doesn't hide the text.
3D-Effect Select a 3D effect for the cell.
Preview Preview how the pattern and 3D effects will look.
Borders tab
Border Click in a box to select a border for the Left, Right, Top, or Bottom of
each cell in the column. The border uses the currently selected line type.
Type Click a line type to select it.
1066 | Chapter 20 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Color Select a color for the border.
Align tab
Horizontal Align text on the left of the cell, the right of the cell, or in the
horizontal center of the cell. Select Standard to right-align numeric fields and
left-align all other fields.
Vertical Align text with the top of the cell, the bottom of the cell, or in the
vertical center of the cell.
Wrap Text Allow text to wrap in the cell. If this option is not selected, text
that is too long is not displayed or printed.
Allow Enter Pressing Enter clears the cell. If this option is not selected, pressing
Enter moves to the next cell.
Auto Size Automatically adjust the column width to the longest value in the
column.
See also:
■ Changing the Look of the Data View (page 695)
Column Values dialog box
Scroll through the list, select the value you want, and click OK. The new value
is inserted into the Value field.
See also:
■ To use a SQL filter in the Data View (page 795)
Configure Data Source dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Enter a name for a new data source or select an existing data source from the
list.
Column Values dialog box | 1067
When you click OK, the Microsoft Windows Data Link Properties dialog box
appears, where you can define or modify a data link file for the data source.
If the data source you want is not listed, it may not be in the data sources
folder.
For more information on configuring a data source, refer to your Microsoft
Windows documentation.
NOTE If you modify a data source that is currently connected, the changes will
not take effect until you reconnect the data source.
See also:
■ To automatically configure a data source (page 166)
Connect Data Source dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Use this dialog box to select a data source to connect. The list includes data
sources that are attached to the current drawing but are currently disconnected.
Select the data sources you want. Click Connect.
If the data source you want is not listed, it may not be attached to this drawing.
See also:
■ To connect a data source (page 168)
■ Accessing Geospatial Features (page 222)
■ Viewing Attribute Data for Spatial Features (page 313)
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box
Use the Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box to
■ Take an object data table and create a database table with the same
structure. For each selected object, the object data is read and a new record
1068 | Chapter 20 External Databases Dialog Boxes
is created in the external database table. If an object has multiple records
from the object data table, multiple records are created in the external
database table. Also, a database link is generated linking the object to the
record in the new database table.
■ Use object data in your drawing that matches information in an external
database table and automatically create links based on the matched
information.
You can choose to leave the object data in the drawing or remove the object
data from the objects as each record is created.
NOTE Before you run this command, you must attach the data source to the
current drawing by clicking Data Source ➤ Attach in Map Explorer.
When you are finished with this dialog box, click Proceed.
Source Object Data Table
Select the object data table you want to convert or link. You can work with
object data tables defined in the current drawing. To work with object data
tables in attached drawings, you must open those drawings directly.
Name
Select the object data table from the list.
Remove Data From Objects Processed
Deletes the object data currently associated with the object.
Target Link Template
Select an option and then click Define to specify the link template.
Convert Object Data To Database
Converts object data to records in a database and links objects to the new
data.
Link Object Data To Database
Links objects with attached object data to records in a database table using
key fields.
Define
Displays a dialog box where you specify the link template to identify the
database table.
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box | 1069
Object Selection
Choose how you want to select objects, and whether you want to select all
objects or only objects on specific AutoCAD layers.
Select Automatically
Uses all objects unless Filter On Layers is selected.
Select Manually
Selects individual objects. To select objects, choose Select Manually and
click Select.
Filter On Layers
Specifies the AutoCAD layers on which to search. The default is all layers.
Click Layers to select from a list of AutoCAD layers in the current drawing.
See also:
■ To convert object data to a linked database table (page 326)
■ Automatically Linking Database Records to Objects (page 322)
■ To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane
external data:attachingdata s... (page 164)
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPOD2ASE)
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Use this dialog box to specify the table name for the new database table and
to define the link template that identifies the database table.
Data Source Select a data source from the list.
If you are connected to the data source, a check appears in the check box. If
you are not connected, click Connect.
Catalog/Schema Select a catalog and schema from the list.
These options are not required for all data sources.
Table Name Specify a unique name for the link template.
Key Columns Specify the columns to use as key columns.
1070 | Chapter 20 External Databases Dialog Boxes
To enter more than one column, separate names with a comma. To select
from a list of field names in the object data table, or to rename the fields, click
Select to display the Select Link Template Key dialog box (page 1149).
Link Template Specify a unique link template name.
See also:
■ To create a link template (page 319)
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT)
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
A link template specifies the location of the table and the columns to use as
key columns. If you use the same table and key columns for multiple drawings,
choose a consistent naming scheme for link templates.
Data Source list Lists the attached and connected data sources in the current
drawing. If you open the dialog box from an existing table, it lists the data
source for the table.
Table Name list Lists tables for the selected data source. If you open the dialog
from an existing table, it lists the table name.
Link Template box Lists link templates defined for the selected table. Enter
a new name.
Key Selection area Lists column names and data types for the columns in
the selected table. To select a column as a key column, click a box in the Key
column. The values in the key column are used to identify records in the table,
so select a column or set of columns that has a unique value for each record.
NOTE If the link template does not immediately appear on the Map Explorer tab
of the Task Pane, right-click on a blank space in the Map Explorer tab. Click Refresh.
See also:
■ To convert object data to a linked database table (page 326)
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT) | 1071
Detach Data Source dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
This list includes all data sources attached to the current drawing. Select the
data sources. Click Detach. The selected data sources are disconnected and
removed from the current drawing.
See also:
■ To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane (page
164)
Disconnect Data Source dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
This list includes data sources that are attached to the current drawing and
are currently connected. Select the data sources you want. Click Disconnect.
If the data source you want is not listed, it may not be attached to this drawing
or it may not be currently connected.
When you disconnect a data source, it remains attached to the current drawing.
See also:
■ To connect a data source (page 168)
1072 | Chapter 20 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Header/Footer dialog box
Select the Header or Footer tab and enter the text. You can also enter certain
variables.
Variable Replaced with at print time
$A Application name
$P Current page number
$N Total number of pages
$D Current date
To change the font, select the cell. Click Font. In the Font dialog box, select
the formatting options you want. Note that font formatting applies to all text
in a cell.
Distance to Frame
Dimensions are in cm if your Windows system-wide measurement system is
set to Metric, in inches if it is set to U.S. To view or set the measurement
system, from the Windows Control Panel choose Regional Settings ➤ Number
tab ➤ Measurement System.
Header
Specify the distance from the top margin to the bottom of the Header text.
Footer
Specify the distance from the bottom margin to the top of the Footer text.
First Page No.
Enter the starting page number.
Additional pages are numbered consecutively.
See also:
■ To print a database table (page 931)
Header/Footer dialog box | 1073
Link Template Properties dialog box
To change the width of the Column Name or Data Type columns, place the
cursor over the column divider. Click and drag the column to the desired
width.
See also:
■ To edit the database path in a link template (page 330)
Page Setup dialog box
Use the Page Setup dialog box to specify margins, headers, grid, print order,
and centering options.
Margins
Margin dimensions are in cm if your Windows system-wide measurement
system is set to Metric, in inches if it is set to U.S. To view or set the
measurement system, from the Windows Control Panel choose Regional
Settings ➤ Number tab ➤ Measurement System.
Left
Enter the distance from the left edge of the paper to the beginning of each
line.
Right
Enter the distance from the right edge of the paper to the end of the
printable area.
Top
Enter the distance from the top of the paper to the top of the first line.
Bottom
Enter the distance from the bottom of the paper to the bottom of the last
line.
Headers and Grid Lines
Row Headers
Print row headers.
Column Headers
Print column headers.
1074 | Chapter 20 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Print Frame
Print a frame around the table.
Vertical Lines
Print vertical lines between each column.
Horizontal Lines
Print horizontal lines between each row.
Only Black And White
Print using only black and white. Text that has a color assigned to it will
be printed using a pattern.
Page Order
If a table extends beyond the limits of a single page, it is divided into page-size
tiles. This setting governs the order of printing the tiles.
First Rows, Then Columns
Print tiles from left to right by rows, top row first.
First Columns, Then Rows
Print tiles from top to bottom by columns, left column first.
Center on Page
Vertical
Center the table between the specified top and bottom margins.
Horizontal
Center the table between the specified left and right margins.
See also:
■ To print a database table (page 931)
Select Database Version dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Select the database to use with this file from the list of available databases.
Select Database Version dialog box | 1075
Always Use This Database For Files Of This Type Select to use the selected
database version for all databases with this extension. You will not be prompted
again. To turn prompting back on, change the setting on the Data Source tab
of the Autodesk Map Options dialog box.
To specify default database versions for other extensions, use the Data Source
tab of the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254).
See also:
■ To set data source options (page 183)
Select Existing Link Template dialog box
Select the appropriate link template, specify the key fields in the object data
to use, and then select a database validation option. The list of link templates
include those available for the current drawing.
Link Template
Select a link template for the database table containing the data matching
your object data table. In the OD Column, specify the fields in the object data
table to use for key fields.
Database Validation
Select a validation option.
None
Create links without checking the database.
Record Must Exist
Create a link only where the text or attribute tag value matches an existing
record's key field value.
Create If New
Create a new record in the table if no existing record matches. If you choose
this option, you can use the grid below to map data from fields in the object
data table to non-key fields in the database.
See also:
■ To open a linked database table (page 320)
1076 | Chapter 20 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Select Link Template dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Select the appropriate data source and then select the link template. The lists
include the data sources and link templates available for the current drawing.
See also:
■ To open a linked database table (page 320)
Select Link Templates dialog box
If you are deleting links or link templates for selected objects, the list includes
link templates for records linked to the selected objects. Once you select the
link templates and click OK, link data associated with the selected link
templates is removed from the selected objects.
See also:
■ To delete links for a group of objects (page 329)
Select Query dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Select the appropriate data source and then select the query. A Data View
window displays the records that match the query.
NOTE You cannot edit the data resulting from a database query.
Data Source Lists data sources currently attached and connected to the current
drawing.
Query Lists the queries associated with the selected data source. These are
queries that were defined in the external database program.
Select Link Template dialog box | 1077
Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL)
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Select the appropriate data source and then select the table.
Data Source Lists data sources currently attached and connected to the current
drawing.
Table Lists tables in the selected data source.
See also:
■ To open a table using the Task Pane (page 691)
Sort dialog box
Before you begin sorting, note the following:
Records are sorted based on the value in the column selected in the Sort By
box. If multiple records have the same value in this column, those records are
further sorted by the column specified in the first Then By box.
If you don't specify a sort column, records are sorted in database order.
To sort the table by additional columns, use the remaining Then By lists.
You can sort up to five columns simultaneously. You cannot sort columns
that have binary or user-defined data types, and these columns do not appear
in the sort lists.
To clear all the lists, click Reset.
Sort By Lists the columns in the table. Click the down arrow and select the
column by which you want to sort the table. Columns with binary or
user-defined data types are not listed.
Ascending Sort from the beginning of the alphabet, the lowest number, or
the earliest date.
Descending Sort from the end of the alphabet, the highest number, or the
latest date.
1078 | Chapter 20 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Table Filter dialog box
Use this dialog box to select records from the database table.
When you apply the filter, the Data View searches the current database table
and displays only records that match the specified conditions.
To edit an existing condition, select the line in the SQL Filter list. Edit the
information in the Where Condition area. When you finish editing, click
Update.
To add a new line, select a joining operator (And/Or/Not). Select a column
and an operator and specify a value. When you finish, click Add.
SQL Filter area Displays the current filter. If lines in the filter have been
grouped, the group is indented.
Group Groups the selected conditions. Conditions in the group are evaluated
before other conditions.
Ungroup Deletes the parentheses from the selected line and from the matching
ending or beginning line of the group.
Delete Deletes the selected condition.
Clear All Deletes all conditions.
Where Condition area Use the Where Condition area to edit an existing
condition in the filter or to add a new condition.
And Specifies that both conditions must be met for the object to be included
in the query.
Or Specifies that either condition can be met for the object to be included in
the query.
Not And Not specifies that the first condition must be met and the second
condition must not be met for the object to be included in the query.
Or Not specifies that either the first condition can be met or the second
condition cannot be met for the object to be included in the query.
For the very first condition in the list, you do not specify And or Or, but you
can select Not.
Column Displays columns from the current table.
Table Filter dialog box | 1079
Operator Specifies how to test the values in the column.
Operator Description
= The value of the selected column is equal to the value you enter in
the Value box.
> The value of the selected column is greater than the value you enter
in the Value box.
>= The value of the selected column is greater than or equal to the
value you enter in the Value box.
< The value of the selected column is less than the value you enter
in the Value box.
<= The value of the selected column is less than or equal to the value
you enter in the Value box.
<> The value of the selected column is not equal to the value you enter
in the Value box.
IN The selected column is linked to the object and contains the speci-
fied value. If you specify multiple values, separate each value with
a comma. Enclose values in single quotes, for example, '1','2','3'.
IS NULL The selected column is linked to the object and is empty. Do not
enter a value in the Value box.
LIKE The selected column is linked to the object and contains part of
the value specified. Applies to string (character) data types only.
Use the percent sign (%) as a wild-card character in the Value box.
For information on the wild-card characters supported by your database system,
refer to the documentation for your database system software.
Value Specify the value you want to search for. To select from a list of existing
values in the column, click [...].
1080 | Chapter 20 External Databases Dialog Boxes
To use wild-card characters for string values, select the LIKE operator. For
example, type B% to find all values that begin with the letter B.
Add Add the condition line to the SQL Filter list.
Update Replace the selected condition in the SQL Filter list with the new
condition.
To use a filter you previously defined for this table, click History at the bottom
of the screen. Select the filter from the list.
See also:
■ To use a SQL filter in the Data View (page 795)
Table Filter History dialog box
This dialog box lists the filters you have previously defined for this table.
To use a filter, select it in the list and click OK, or double-click the filter. To
erase a filter, select it in the list and click Delete. To erase all filters, click Delete
All.
The maximum number of filters stored on this list is determined by the setting
for Number Of SQL Conditions To Keep In History List on the Current Drawing
tab of the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254).
See also:
■ To use a SQL filter in the Data View (page 795)
Table Properties dialog box
This dialog box lists information about the selected table or query.
To change the width of the Column Name or Column Type columns, place
the cursor over the column divider. Click and drag the column to the desired
width.
Name Displays the name of the selected table or query.
Structure Displays the column name and column type for each column.
Table Filter History dialog box | 1081
Zoom Scale dialog box
Specify the percent of the display area that highlighted objects will fill.
Specify 100% to zoom the display to the extents of the selected objects. Specify
a smaller number to display more of the drawing outside the highlighted
objects.
Specify 0% to maintain the current zoom level.
See also:
■ To highlight drawing objects linked to a database record (page 790)
1082 | Chapter 20 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Object Classification
Dialog Boxes 21
In this chapter
■ MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select
Classified Objects command)
■ MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED
(Select Unclassified Objects
command)
■ MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (Select
Undefined Objects command)
■ Attach Object Class Definition File
dialog box
■ Classified Property List dialog box
■ Classify dialog box
■ Classify Objects dialog box
■ Color Range Editor dialog box
■ Define Object Classification dialog
box
■ Layer Range Editor dialog box
■ Linetype Range Editor dialog box
■ Lineweight Range Editor dialog
box
■ New Object Class Definition File
dialog box
■ New Property dialog box
1083
■ Plotstyle Range Editor dialog box
1084 | Chapter 21 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects
command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to select all objects that have been classified with specific
object classes.
Respond to the prompts:
Select objects Do one of the following:
■ Press Enter to select all classified objects.
■ Enter the name of the object class whose objects you want to select. You
can use wildcards to select multiple object classes. For example, enter r*
to specify all object classes whose name begins with "r". For more
information on using wildcards, see Wildcard Characters (page 959).
Objects classified with the specified object classes are selected.
See also:
■ To select objects based on their object class (page 675)
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (Select Unclassified Objects
command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to select all objects that have not been classified.
Unclassified objects are selected.
See also:
■ To select objects based on their object class (page 675)
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects command) | 1085
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (Select Undefined Objects
command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to select all objects that have been classified, but whose
object class definition is not included in the object class definition file attached
to the drawing.
This can happen if you classify the objects using one object class definition
file, and then attach a different object class definition file that does not include
a definition for this object class.
Undefined objects are selected.
See also:
■ To select objects based on their object class (page 675)
Attach Object Class Definition File dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
The object class definition file includes the set of object classes you will use
with this drawing.
NOTE If the FILEDIA variable is set to 0, then this dialog box is not displayed and
you can type the name of the file that you want to insert on the command line.
For more information, see the AutoCAD help.
Look In Select the drive and folder that contains the object class definition
file.
File Name Type or select the name of the object class definition file.
Files Of Type Leave this set to Object Definition File.
See also:
■ To attach an object class definition file (page 677)
■ Using Object Classification (page 662)
1086 | Chapter 21 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
Classified Property List dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
You can review all the properties included in this object class definition and
the settings for those properties.
To change any settings, return to the Define Object Classification dialog box
and select the property you want to edit.
See also:
■ To define an object class (page 100)
Classify dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Assign an object class to selected objects.
Classification Name Lists the object classes and the object types to which
they can be assigned. Select the object class you want to assign to the objects.
Include Objects... Classifies objects even if their property values do not meet
the classification rules for this object. Property values that are out of range
will be reset to the default value for the property. If you clear this option,
objects with out-of-range values are not classified.
Exclude Objects... Does not classify objects that have another object class
already assigned. If you clear this option, the existing object class is removed
and the new one is assigned.
See also:
■ To assign an object class to an existing object (page 672)
■ To create a new drawing object (page 670)
Classify Objects dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Classified Property List dialog box | 1087
Apply the specified object class to the selected objects.
Include Objects... Classifies objects even if their property values do not meet
the classification rules for this object class. If you clear this option, objects
with out-of-range values are not classified.
Exclude Objects... Does not classify objects that have another object class
already assigned. If you clear this option, the existing object class is removed
and the new one is assigned.
See also:
■ To assign an object class to an existing object (page 672)
■ To create a new drawing object (page 670)
Color Range Editor dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Specify which colors to allow for this object class. Click Add below the List
Of Colors following your selection.
All colors listed in the List Of Colors are valid colors for this object class.
Color Range
Allow Any Color
Accepts any color as valid for this object class.
Add A Specific Color
Adds a specific color to the List Of Colors.
In the Color list, select the color to include, or choose Select Color to display
the Select Color dialog box, where you can select an index color, a true
color, or a color book color.
Add A Range Of Colors
Adds a range of colors to the List Of Colors.
In the First Color list, select the color at the beginning of the range. In the
Last Color list, select the color at the end of the range.
All colors whose index color number falls between the two selected colors
are considered valid for this object class.
1088 | Chapter 21 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
List Of Colors
Lists the colors currently included in the object class.
■ To delete a color from the list, select the color and click Remove.
■ To add a color to the list, choose Add A Specific Color or Add A Range
Of Colors, and select the colors you want to add.
■ To modify a color in the list, select the color in the list, choose Add A
Specific Color or Add A Range Of Colors, and select the colors you want
to add. Click Update.
See also:
■ To specify a default value and a range for a property (page 105)
Define Object Classification dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create a new object class definition or edit an existing
definition.
The new object class definition is added to the current object class definition
file. Users can use these object class definitions to create objects that
automatically have the properties you define in this dialog box.
Class Name Specifies the name for the object class. The name can include
spaces, and is not case sensitive.
Description Specifies the description for the object class.
Based On Specifies that this object class will be based on an existing object
class definition. All of the settings for the base object class are automatically
included in this object class definition, and if you modify the base class, the
modifications are included in this object class definition. You can add
additional settings to this object class definition.
To select a base class, the base class must have the same create method as the
class you are defining.
Use As Base Object Classification Only Specifies that the current class can
be used only as a base class. You will not be able to create an object using this
object class.
The dialog box has the following tabs:
Define Object Classification dialog box | 1089
Applies To (page 1090)
Properties List (page 1090)
Class Settings (page 1092)
Feature Source Settings (page 1092)
Applies To
Object Types Specifies the object types that may be tagged with this definition.
Available object types are determined by the base class, if there is one, and
the selected example objects.
TIP Select the most specific object type that applies to all objects in this object
class. For example, if all the objects will be circles, select AcDbCircle.
Properties List
Available Properties Specifies the properties that will apply to all objects
created with this object class. Available properties are based on the objects
selected in the drawing, the base class, if one is selected, and the object types
selected on the Applies To tab.
(Note that if no properties appear, you need to first select an object type on
the Applies To tab.)
Select a check box to include the property in the object class. Highlight a
property to view or change its attribute values.
If this object class is based on another object class, you cannot clear a check
box for a property that is assigned in the "based on" class.
Property Attributes
Specifies the settings for each property.
To change the value for Type, Range, Default, Visible, or Read Only, click on
the value.
Type
For properties that you've created, set the data type. Specify Integer, Real,
Text String, 3D Point, or Yes/No. For other properties, the type is set
automatically and can't be changed. (For information on creating a new
property, see New Property (page 1092) below.)
Range
Specify the allowable values for this property. This allowable range is used
in the following situations:
■ When users classify an existing object with this object class definition.
1090 | Chapter 21 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
■ When users use the Object Class tab of the Properties palette to edit
property values for an object classified with this object class definition.
In each case, the value for the property must fall within this range.
For many properties, such as color, lineweight, line type, plot style, and
layer, you can select from a list of available values. To display the list, click
on the value you want to change. Click [...] to display a dialog where you
can specify the range.
When specifying the range values, keep these points in mind:
■ To enter a list of values for the range, separate each value with a comma,
for example, 15,25,35, or Paved,Gravel,Dirt. To enter a continuous range,
use square brackets around the first and last value, for example, [2,8].
■ When specifying integers, you can specify values between -2147483628
and +2147483627 (32-bit signed integer).
■ To specify a lineweight, enter the decimals as integers. For example, to
specify a lineweight of 0.13, enter 13.
■ To delete a range, enter two dashes ( "--" ).
Default
The default is used when an object has a value assigned that is out of the
range. This can happen if the value is assigned before the object is classified
or if the object is edited outside the Object Class tab. As soon as the object
is selected when the Object Class tab is active, the value will be reset to the
default.
When specifying the default for properties such as color, lineweight, line
type, plot style, and layer, you can select from a list of available values. To
display the list, click on the value you want to change. Click the down
arrow to display a list of available value, or click [...] to see additional choices.
Visible
Specify whether the property should appear on the Object Class tab of the
Properties palette. You may want to turn visibility off if you want a property
set to a single value that users can't edit. In this case, set both the range and
the default to the same value.
Read Only
Controls whether the property of a classified object is editable on the Object
Class tab. If this is set to Yes, the value is displayed in gray.
To view attribute settings for all selected properties, click Show List.
Define Object Classification dialog box | 1091
New Property Displays the New Property dialog box (page 1095), where you
can add a new property to the Available Properties list.
The new property appears in the Properties palette and can be edited in the
same way as other properties.
Show List Displays the Classified Property List dialog box (page 1087), which
lists all the selected properties and their attribute settings. This is a convenient
way to check your properties before you save the definition.
Class Settings
Show Object Class In Map Explorer Displays the object class name in Map
Explorer. When this option is cleared, this object class name is hidden in Map
Explorer.
Class Icon
Selects the bitmap to use for this object class in Map Explorer.
Be sure the location you specify is available to everyone who will use this
object class definition file. If you store the object class definition file on the
network, it's a good idea to store the bitmaps in the same location.
Use Standard Icon
Displays the standard icon for the object class in Map Explorer. When this
option is cleared, you can choose the icon you want to display.
Create Method Specifies the object to create when creating a new object in
this object class. You can select only objects that are appropriate for the object
type you selected on the Applies To tab.
Select None if you don't want to specify a create method for this object class.
This is useful for base classes, where each subclass may specify a different
create method.
In the Geometric Settings table, specify any additional parameters to set when
creating objects in this object class.
Feature Source Settings
Specify how to treat linked data when you add an object to a feature source.
Move my linked data to Feature Source When you add an object with linked
data to a feature source, the data from the linked data source is copied to the
feature source.
Keep my data linked in Feature Source When you add an object with linked
data to a feature source, the link is copied to the feature source.
1092 | Chapter 21 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
See also:
■
■ To define an object class (page 100)
■ To attach an object class definition file (page 677)
Layer Range Editor dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify which AutoCAD layers to allow for this object
class.
You can choose from a list of all AutoCAD layers in the current drawing.
Layer Range
Allow Any Layer
Accepts any AutoCAD layer as valid for this object class.
Choose Specific Layers
Accepts only specific AutoCAD layers for this object class. In the Layer list,
select the AutoCAD layers to include.
See also:
■ To specify a default value and a range for a property (page 105)
Linetype Range Editor dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify which linetypes to allow for this object class.
You can choose from a list of all linetypes in the current drawing.
Linetype Range
Allow Any Linetype
Accepts any linetype as valid for this object class.
Layer Range Editor dialog box | 1093
Choose Specific Linetypes
Accepts only specific linetypes for this object class. In the Linetype list,
select the linetypes to include.
See also:
■ To specify a default value and a range for a property (page 105)
Lineweight Range Editor dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify which lineweights to allow for this object class.
Lineweight Range
Allow Any Lineweight
Accepts any lineweight as valid for this object class.
Choose Specific Lineweights
Accepts only specific lineweights for this object class. In the Lineweight
list, select the lineweights to include.
See also:
■ To specify a default value and a range for a property (page 105)
New Object Class Definition File dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
The object class definition file includes information on how to create each of
the object classes you've defined. Only definitions in the object class definition
file attached to a drawing can be assigned to objects in the drawing or used
to create new objects.
NOTE To create a new object class definition file, you must have Alter Object
Class privileges (page 70).
Look In Select the drive and folder where you want to store the object class
definition file.
1094 | Chapter 21 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
File Name Type a name for the new object class definition file.
Files Of Type Leave this set to Object Definition File.
NOTE If the FILEDIA variable is set to 0, then this dialog box is not displayed and
you can type the name of the object class definition file that you want to create
on the command line. For more information, see the AutoCAD help.
See also:
■ To create a new object classification file (page 108)
■ Setting Up Object Classification (page 96)
New Property dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create a new property for the object class.
Property Heading Category Specify a category for the new property.
Property Name Specify a name for the new property.
When you close this dialog box, the new property will appear in the Properties
List of the Define Object Classification dialog box. If you add this new property
to the current object class definition file, the property will appear on the
Object Class tab of the Properties palette.
See also:
■ To define an object class (page 100)
Plotstyle Range Editor dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify which plotstyles to allow for this object class.
You can choose from a list of all plotstyles in the current drawing.
New Property dialog box | 1095
Plotstyle Range
Allow Any Plotstyle
Accepts any plotstyle as valid for this object class.
Choose Specific Plotstyles
Accepts only specific plotstyles for this object class. In the plotstyle list,
select the plotstyles to include.
See also:
■ To specify a default value and a range for a property (page 105)
1096 | Chapter 21 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
Data Connect Dialog
Boxes 22
In this chapter
■ Feature Information dialog box
■ Feature Source Scope
■ Feature Source Administration
dialog box
■ Feature Source Connection dialog
box
■ Feature Source Query / Search
dialog box
■ Filter Condition dialog box
(Feature Sources)
■ Location Condition dialog box
(Feature Source Query)
■ Property Condition dialog box
(Feature Source Query)
■ Property Values dialog box
(Feature Source Query)
■ Save Features dialog box
■ Save Version dialog box
■ View Query Statement dialog box
1097
Feature Information dialog box
Displays feature information for the selected object, including feature source,
schema, key value, and the current lock status.
Feature Source Scope
Select the feature sources and classes to include in this query or search.
For example, to limit the query or search to one class, select only that class.
Related procedures:
■ Filtering a Feature Source Layer (page 243)
■ Searching For and Selecting Features (page 780)
Feature Source Administration dialog box
View and release feature source locks.
Feature Source Select the feature source whose locks you want to review.
Feature Locks Lists locked objects in the selected feature source.
To release a lock, select the object in the list and click Release Selected.
You can release locks only if you have appropriate rights in the feature source.
NOTE This dialog does not display objects in the edit set for the current drawing.
To remove locks for these objects, remove the objects from the edit set.
■ Locking Objects (page 224)
Feature Source Connection dialog box
Connect to an attached feature source.
Feature Source Select a feature source to connect. The lists displays feature
sources attached to the current drawing.
1098 | Chapter 22 Data Connect Dialog Boxes
TIP If the feature source you want is not listed, click Define and attach it to the
current drawing.
Properties In the Value column, enter any connection information required
to connect to the selected feature source. Press Enter.
If you do not know the values to enter, contact your database administrator.
■ Adding Features Sources to your Drawing (page 227)
Feature Source Query / Search dialog box
Define the conditions you need to retrieve or find the features you want from
the feature source.
Query Conditions
Use the buttons in this area to define conditions for your query or search.
NOTE Some buttons are available only when you have a feature or condition
selected.
Query Allows you to save the current query to a file, or load a previously saved
query.
New (only available for Search) Adds a feature source to the search.
Add Define a new condition for the selected feature. Select one of the
following:
■ Location—Select or find objects based on their location. For example, select
all items within a specified boundary. See Filtering a Layer (page 243).
■ Property—Select or find objects based on a property stored in the feature
source. For example, if you store lot area in your feature source, you could
select all lots larger than an area you specify. See Property Condition dialog
box (Feature Source Query) (page 1109).
■ Filter—Select or find objects by defining a condition. See Filter Condition
dialog box (Feature Sources) (page 1100).
Edit Edit the selected condition.
Delete Delete the selected condition.
Zoom Zoom to the extents of the selected feature source.
Feature Source Query / Search dialog box | 1099
Location For the selected location condition, display the location extents in
the drawing window.
Common For the selected condition, select all similar conditions.
Click Edit to edit all the selected conditions at once.
View Display the query or search in the View Query Statement dialog box
(page 1112).
Query window
This section displays the conditions for this query or search.
See also:
■ Filtering a Feature Source Layer (page 243)
■ Searching For and Selecting Features (page 780)
Filter Condition dialog box (Feature Sources)
Use this dialog box to write or edit filter condition for a feature source query.
Use filter conditions to select a set of features from a feature source based on
the features' properties and attributes. All features satisfying the condition are
selected. For example, you can select all the 4-lane roads from a Roads feature
class, or all parcels owned by someone named Smith.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D does not check that you've specified valid feature classes
or feature class properties.
Examples of Feature Source Filter Conditions
To select... Use this filter condition...
All roads with 4 lanes Lanes = 4
All Pipes have at least one pipe with a sta- Pipes.state = 'Leaky'
tus of Leaky
All parcels owned by someone with a name state = "existing"" and owner like
containing the text Smith '%Smith%'
1100 | Chapter 22 Data Connect Dialog Boxes
To select... Use this filter condition...
All parcels affected by or encroached upon state in ('affected', 'encroached')
by a change
All features within the specified polygon geometry INSIDE geomfromtext('POLY-
GON XYZ ((1 1 0, 10 1 0, 10 10 0, 1 10
0, 1 1 0))')
All roads with lanes that have a NULL value Roads.lanes NULL
All roads with more than 2 lanes, and are Roads.lanes > 2 and geometry withindis-
within 2 (miles/kilometers) from point tance GeomFromText('POINT XYZ (0.0 0.0
(0,0,0). 0.0)') 2.0
All features with color = 256 AcadColor = 256
All features on the Roads Layer and the AcadLayer in ('Roads Layer', 'Buildings
Buildings Layer Layer')
All features on the Roads Layer and with a AcadLayer = 'Roads Layer' and AcadLength
length greater than 5 >5
Feature Source Filter Language
The rules for entering filter expressions are described in the following sections
using BNF notation. For more information, see
http://cui.unige.ch/db-research/Enseignement/analyseinfo/AboutBNF.html
Filter Condition dialog box (Feature Sources) | 1101
<Filter> ::= '(' Filter ')'
| <LogicalOperator>
| <SearchCondition>
<LogicalOperator> ::= <BinaryLogicalOperator>
| <UnaryLogicalOperator>
<BinaryLogicalOperator> ::= <Filter> <BinaryLogicalOperations>
<Filter>
<SearchCondition> ::= <InCondition>
| <ComparisonCondition>
| <GeometricCondition>
| <NullCondition>
<InCondition> ::= <Identifier> IN '(' ValueExpressionCollection
')'
<ValueExpressionCollection> ::= <ValueExpression>
| <ValueExpressionCollection> ',' <ValueExpression>
<ComparisonCondition> ::= <Expression> <ComparisonOperations>
<Expression>
<GeometricCondition> ::= <DistanceCondition>
| <SpatialCondition>
<DistanceCondition> ::=
<Identifier> <DistanceOperations> <Expression> <distance>
<NullCondition> ::= <Identifier> NULL
<SpatialCondition> ::=
<Identifier> <SpatialOperations> <Expression>
<UnaryLogicalOperator> ::= NOT <Filter>
<BinaryLogicalOperations> ::= AND | OR
<ComparisionOperations> ::=
= // EqualTo (EQ)
<> // NotEqualTo (NE)
> // GreaterThan (GT)
1102 | Chapter 22 Data Connect Dialog Boxes
>= // GreaterThanOrEqualTo (GE)
< // LessThan (LT)
<= // LessThanOrEqualTo (LE)
LIKE // Like
<DistanceOperations> ::= BEYOND | WITHINDISTANCE
<distance> ::= DOUBLE | INTEGER
<SpatialOperations> ::= CONTAINS | CROSSES | DISJOINT | EQUALS |
INTERSECTS | OVERLAPS | TOUCHES | WITHIN | COVEREDBY | INSIDE
<Expression> ::= '(' Expression ')'
| <UnaryExpression>
| <BinaryExpression>
| <Function>
| <Identifier>
| <ValueExpression>
<BinaryExpression> ::=
<Expression> '+' <Expression>
| <Expression> '-' <Expression>
| <Expression> '*' <Expression>
| <Expression> '/' <Expression>
<DataValue> ::=
TRUE
| FALSE
| DATETIME
| DOUBLE
| INTEGER
| STRING
| BLOB
| CLOB
| NULL
<Function> ::= <Identifier> '(' <ExpressionCollection> ')'
<ExpressionCollection> ::=
| <Expression>
| <ExpressionCollection> ',' <Expression>
<GeometryValue> ::= GEOMFROMTEXT '(' STRING ')'
Filter Condition dialog box (Feature Sources) | 1103
<Identifier> ::= IDENTIFIER
<ValueExpression> ::= <LiteralValue> | <Parameter>;
<LiteralValue> ::= <GeometryValue> | <DataValue>
<Parameter> ::= PARAMETER | ':'STRING
<UnaryExpression> ::= '-' <Expression>
Reserved Keywords
The following keywords are reserved. They cannot be used as identifiers or
function names:
AND BEYOND COMPARE ONTAINS COVEREDBY CROSSES DATE DISJOINT DISTANCE
EQUALS FALSE GeomFromText IN INSIDE INTERSECTS LIKE NOT NULL OR
OVERLAPS RELATE SPATIAL TIME TIMESTAMP TOUCHES TRUE WITHIN
WITHINDISTANCE
Data Types
IDENTIFIER
An identifier can be any alphanumeric sequence of characters other than a
keyword. Identifiers can be enclosed in double quotes to allow special
characters or white space. If you need to include a double quote character
inside an identifier you can double the character: "abc ""xx"" def".
PARAMETER
Parameters are defined by a colon followed by alphanumeric characters. The
feature source filter language extends SQL to allow for a literal string to follow
the colon to allow special characters or white space: :'enter name'.
STRING
Strings are literal constants enclosed in single quotes. The language also
supports curly quotes. If you need to include a single quote character inside
a string you can double the character: 'aaa ''xx'' bbb'.
INTEGER
Integers allow only decimal characters with an optional unary minus sign:
(-){[0-9]}. The unary plus is not supported.
DOUBLE
1104 | Chapter 22 Data Connect Dialog Boxes
Floating point numbers have a decimal point. They can be signed, -, and they
can include an exponent, e{[0-9]}. Note if an integer is out of range it is
converted to a floating point. Examples:
-3.4 123456789012345671.2e13
DATETIME
Date and time are parsed using the standard SQL literal strings:
DATE 'YYYY-MM-DD' TIME 'HH:MM:SS[.sss]' TIMESTAMP 'YYYY-MM-DD
HH:MM:SS[.sss]'
For example:
DATE '1971-12-24' TIMESTAMP '2003-10-23 11:00:02'
Note BLOB and CLOB are not supported. If you need binary input, use
parameters.
Operators
The following operators are special characters common to SQL and most
programming languages.
Binary:
+ Add - Subtract * Multiply / Divide
NOTE For compatibility with SQL string concatenation, Add may also be defined
using ||.
Unary:
- Negate
Comparison:
= Equal To (EQ) <> Not Equal To (NE) > Greater Than (GT) >= Greater Than
Or EqualTo (GE) < Less Than (LT) <= Less Than Or Equal To (LE)
Operator precedence from highest to lowest:
Negate, NOT Multiply, Divide Add, Subtract EQ, NE, GT, GE, LT, LE AND OR
Special characters used in ExpressionCollections and ValueExpressions to
define function arguments and IN conditions:
( Left Parenthesis , Comma ) Right Parenthesis
The colon, :, is used in defining parameters and the dot, ., can be included in
real numbers and identifiers.
Filter Condition dialog box (Feature Sources) | 1105
Geometry Values
Geometry values are handled using a function call GeomFromText('AWKT
string') as would typically be done in an SQL query.
The Open GIS Consortium, Inc. in the document OpenGIS Simple Features
Specification For SQLRevision 1.1 OpenGIS Project Document 99-049 Release Date:
May 5, 1999 defines the WKT grammar. The Autodesk extension to WKT,
referred to as AWKT, is a superset of WKT. That is, you can enter WKT as valid
AWKT text strings. Dimensionality is optional and defaults to XY so that it is
backward compatible. The grammar definition for AWKT is
<Awkt> ::= POINT <Dimensionality> <PointEntity> | LINESTRING
<Dimensionality> <LineString> | POLYGON <Dimensionality> <Polygon> |
CURVESTRING <Dimensionality> <CurveString> | CURVEPOLYGON
<Dimensionality> <CurvePolygon> | MULTIPOINT <Dimensionality>
<MultiPoint> | MULTILINESTRING <Dimensionality> <MultiLineString> |
MULTIPOLYGON <Dimensionality> <MultiPolygon> | MULTICURVESTRING
<Dimensionality> <MultiCurveString> | MULTICURVEPOLYGON
<Dimensionality> <MultiCurvePolygon> | GEOMETRYCOLLECTION
<GeometryCollection> <PointEntity> ::= '(' <Point> ')' <LineString> ::= '('
<PointCollection> ')' <Polygon> ::= '(' <LineStringCollection> ')' <MultiPoint>
::= '(' <PointCollection> ')' <MultiLineString> ::= '(' <LineStringCollection> ')'
<MultiPolygon> ::= '(' <PolygonCollection> ')' <GeometryCollection : '('
<AwktCollection> ')' <CurveString> ::= '(' <Point> '(' <CurveSegmentCollection>
')' ')' <CurvePolygon> ::= '(' <CurveStringCollection> ')' <MultiCurveString>
::= '(' <CurveStringCollection> ')' <MultiCurvePolygon> ::= '('
<CurvePolygonCollection> ')' <Dimensionality> ::= // default to XY | XY | XYZ
| XYM | XYZM <Point> ::= DOUBLE DOUBLE | DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE |
DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE DOUBLE <PointCollection> ::= <Point> |
<PointCollection ',' <Point> <LineStringCollection> ::= <LineString> |
<LineStringCollection> ',' <LineString> <PolygonCollection> ::= <Polygon> |
<PolygonCollection> ',' <Polygon> <AwktCollection> ::= <Awkt> |
<AwktCollection> ',' <Awkt> <CurveSegment> ::= CIRCULARARCSEGMENT
'(' <Point> ',' <Point> ')' | LINESTRINGSEGMENT '(' <PointCollection> ')'
<CurveSegmentCollection> ::= <CurveSegment> | <CurveSegmentCollection>
',' <CurveSegment> <CurveStringCollection> ::= <CurveString> |
<CurveStringCollection> ',' <CurveString> <CurvePolygonCollection> ::=
<CurvePolygon> | <CurvePolygonCollection> ',' <CurvePolygon>
The only other token type is DOUBLE representing a double precision floating
point values. Integer (non-decimal point) input is converted to DOUBLE in
the lexical analyzer.
Examples of the Autodesk extensions include
1106 | Chapter 22 Data Connect Dialog Boxes
POINT XY (10 11) // equivalent to POINT (10 11)
POINT XYZ (10 11 12)
POINT XYM (10 11 1.2)
POINT XYZM (10 11 12 1.2)
GEOMETRYCOLLECTION ( POINT xyz (10 11 12), POINT XYM (30 20 1.8),
LINESTRING XYZM(1 2 3 4, 3 5 15, 3 20 20))
CURVESTRING (0 0 ( LINESTRINGSEGMENT (10 10, 20 20, 30 40))))
CURVESTRING (0 0 ( CIRCULARARCSEGMENT (11 11, 12 12),
LINESTRINGSEGMENT (10 10, 20 20, 30 40)))
CURVESTRING (0 0 ( ARC (11 11, 12 12), LINESTRINGSEGMENT (10 10, 20
20, 30 40)))
CURVESTRING XYZ (0 0 0 ( LINESTRINGSEGMENT (10 10 1, 20 20 1, 30 40
1)))
MULTICURVESTRING ( (0 0 (LINESTRINGSEGMENT (10 10, 20 20, 30 40))),
(0 0 (ARC (11 11, 12 12), LINESTRINGSEGMENT (10 10, 20 20, 30 40))))
CURVEPOLYGON ( (0 0 (LINESTRINGSEGMENT (10 10, 10 20, 20 20), ARC
(20 15, 10 10))), (0 0 (ARC (11 11, 12 12), LINESTRINGSEGMENT (10
10, 20 20, 40 40, 90 90))))
MULTICURVEPOLYGON ( ((0 0 (LINESTRINGSEGMENT (10 10, 10 20, 20 20),
ARC (20 15, 10 10))), (0 0 (ARC (11 11, 12 12), LINESTRINGSEGMENT
(10 10, 20 20, 40 40, 90 90)))), ((0 0 (LINESTRINGSEGMENT (10 10,
10 20, 20 20), ARC (20 15, 10 10))), (0 0 (ARC (11 11, 12 12),
LINESTRINGSEGMENT (10 10, 20 20, 40 40, 90 90)))))
Additional Notes
You can paste filter conditions from other sources into this dialog box, however
pasting the contents of the View Query Statement list box will result in an
invalid filter condition.
■ Working With the Display Manager (page 401)
Location Condition dialog box (Feature Source Query)
Select objects in the feature source based on their location.
Location Condition dialog box (Feature Source Query) | 1107
And/Or Select one:
■ And—This condition and the preceding condition must both be true for
the object to be selected.
■ Or—Either this condition or the preceding condition must be true for the
object to be selected.
Boundary Type
Circle
Returns all objects in a defined circle.
Select a selection type. Click Define < to define the circle.
Center point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the center of the circle, or select
the point.
Radius Enter a number in the current unit.
Fence
Returns all objects that cross a defined line.
Select a selection type. Click Define < to define the fence.
A fence does not need to be closed and can cross itself.
First Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the first point of the fence, or select
the point.
Next Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the next point of the fence, or select
the point. Press Enter when done entering points.
Point
Returns all areas that surround a selected point.
Click Define < to select the point.
Coordinates of Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the point, or select the
point.
Polygon
Returns all objects in a defined polygon.
The polygon can be any shape, but cannot cross or touch itself. If you don't
close the polygon, Autodesk Map 3D connects the final point to the first
point to create a closed polygon.
Select a selection type. Click Define < to define the polygon.
First Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the first point of the polygon, or
select the point.
Next Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the next point of the polygon, or
select the point. Press Enter when done entering points.
Rectangle
Returns all objects in a specified rectangle.
1108 | Chapter 22 Data Connect Dialog Boxes
Select a selection type. Click Define < to define the rectangle.
First Corner Enter the X,Y coordinates of the first corner of the rectangle,
or select the point.
Other Corner Enter the X,Y coordinates of the opposite corner of the
rectangle, or select the point.
Selection Type
Inside
Finds only objects that are completely within the boundary.
Crossing
Finds objects that are completely within or crossing the boundary.
Define Hides the dialog box so that you can draw the boundary in the drawing.
Show Displays the area of the location condition in the drawing.
■ Working With the Display Manager (page 401)
Property Condition dialog box (Feature Source Query)
Select objects based on the values of one or more properties defined for the
selected feature.
And/Or Select one:
■ And—This condition and the preceding condition must both be true for
the object to be selected.
■ Or—Either this condition or the preceding condition must be true for the
object to be selected.
Property Select the property from a list of properties in the feature source.
Operator Select an operator:
Operator Condition is true if...
> The value for the feature is greater than
the specified value.
< The value for the feature is less than the
specified value.
Property Condition dialog box (Feature Source Query) | 1109
Operator Condition is true if...
= The value for feature is equal to the speci-
fied value.
>= The value for the feature is greater than or
equal to the specified value.
<= The value for the feature is less than or
equal to the specified value.
<> The value for the feature does not equal
the specified value.
IS NULL The feature does not have a value for this
property.
IS NOT NULL The feature has a value for this property.
LIKE (Only available with text strings)
IN The value for the feature is in the list of
values
NOT IN The value for the feature is not in the list
of values
Value Enter a value. Click Select to display the Property Values dialog box
(Feature Source Query) (page 1111), where you can select from a list of values
in the feature source. Select is not available if you selected multiple features.
You can also use the following filter wildcards for the search:
Wildcard Description
% Matches any string of zero or more characters.
_ Matches any one character.
1110 | Chapter 22 Data Connect Dialog Boxes
Wildcard Description
[] Matches any one character within the specified range [a-f] or set
[abcdef].
[^] Matches any one character not within the specified range [^a-f] or
set [^abcdef].
■ Working With the Display Manager (page 401)
Property Values dialog box (Feature Source Query)
Select values for the property.
Select Values Select the value to populate the Value field in the Property
Values dialog box (Feature Source Query) (page 1111). Click OK.
The list displays all the values for the selected property in the selected feature
source.
■ Working With the Display Manager (page 401)
Save Features dialog box
Save modified features back to their feature source.
Objects in the edit set are saved back to their feature source.
If you right-clicked a single feature source and clicked Save, only objects in
the edit set for the selected feature source are saved. If you right-clicked the
Feature Sources node, all objects in the edit set are saved back to their feature
source.
Status Lists the number of objects that will be saved to the feature source.
Click Show to highlight the objects in the drawing.
Save Queried Features Saves edited objects back to the feature source.
Clear this check box if you want to save only newly created objects to the
feature source.
Save Newly Created Features Saves new objects to the feature source.
Property Values dialog box (Feature Source Query) | 1111
TIP If the status does not list your newly created objects, be sure you have added
the objects to the edit set for this feature source.
Clear this check box if you want to save only objects that were queried in
from the feature source.
■ To enter and edit object data (page 697)
■ Overview of Feature Sources (page 223)
■ Working with Features (page 436)
Save Version dialog box
Specify how to handle changed objects when the object has been changed in
both the parent and the child version.
Favor Changes in the Parent Version Keep the object in the parent version
and discard changes in the child version.
Favor Changes in the Child Version Overwrite the object in the parent
version with the changes from the child version.
Quit without Saving the Version Stop the Save operation.
You can then determine which version of the objects you want to keep and
modify the child version so it contains only changes you want.
Related procedures:
■ Managing Versions (page 451)
View Query Statement dialog box
This dialog displays the feature source filter statement.
Query Statement The syntax here is not SQL, but syntax that is compliant
with the FDO API. It is based on a logical data model, which uses class.property
values. For more information, refer to the Autodesk Map 3D API
documentation.
■ Working With the Display Manager (page 401)
1112 | Chapter 22 Data Connect Dialog Boxes
Import Export Dialog
Boxes 23
In this chapter
■ Attribute Data dialog box
■ Block Mapping dialog box
■ Conflict Resolution dialog box
■ Coordinate System Translation
dialog box
■ Define Link Template dialog box
(MAPIMPORT4)
■ Export dialog box
■ Feature Class Attribute Mapping
dialog box
■ Import dialog box
■ Import Data Options dialog box
■ Layer Mapping dialog box
■ Layer Mapping dialog box
■ Layers to DGN Levels dialog box
■ Link Template to Export dialog
box
■ Map Data Elements to Block
Name dialog box
■ Map Data Elements to Layers
dialog box
1113
■ Map Data Elements to SQL dialog
box
■ Map Export dialog box
■ Map Export Options dialog box
■ Map Import dialog box
■ New Layer dialog box
■ Object Data Table dialog box
(Export)
■ Object Data Table dialog box
(Import)
■ Object Data/External Database
Mapping dialog box
■ Point Mapping dialog box
■ Select dialog box
■ Select Feature Classes dialog box
■ Select Table Dialog Box
(MAPIMPORT)
■ Select Table Dialog Box
(MAPIMPORT)
1114 | Chapter 23 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Attribute Data dialog box
For the selected layer (sometimes called a theme, level, or file), specify the
attribute data you want to import.
To import data, select Create Object Data, enter a name for the object data
table or select an existing object data table. Click Select Fields and choose the
fields that you want to import.
Do Not Import Attribute Data Data attached to the objects in the source
drawing is not imported.
Create Object Data
Data attached to the objects in the source drawing is imported into an object
data table.
Object Data Table To Use
Select an object data table or enter a name for a new object data table. A
table name can include the following characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, $ and _. It
cannot include spaces. It must start with an alphanumeric character.
If you enter a new object data table name, by default Autodesk Map 3D
creates a new object data table with fields that match the fields you're
importing. To change these defaults, click Select Fields and select the fields
to import and specify names for the object data fields.
When the data is imported, it will be converted to the following object data
types:
■ Integer32, Integer16, and Boolean data types are converted to the Integer
data type. For Boolean data, false is converted to 0 and true is converted
to 1.
■ Float, Double, and Decimal data types are converted to the Real data
type.
■ Char and Date data types are converted to the Character data type.
If you select an existing object data table, by default incoming fields are
imported into object data fields with the same name. If no object data field
exists with the same name, the incoming field is not imported. To change
these defaults, click Select Fields and select the fields to import and specify
names for the object data fields.
Incoming data is converted to the data type of the matching object data
field. If this conversion fails, Autodesk Map 3D uses 0 for integers, 0.0 for
real numbers, and "" for characters.
Attribute Data dialog box | 1115
Select Fields
Click this button to select the fields from the source drawing that you want
to import.
Add Unique Key Field
Select this option to have Autodesk Map 3D automatically create a field
with a unique entry for each imported object. You can edit the name for
the field.
The unique ID numbers increment within a single Autodesk Map 3D session,
but restart when you restart Autodesk Map 3D. If you want the unique key
to extend across a number of files you are importing, be sure to import all
the files in the same Autodesk Map 3D session.
Add To Database Table
Data attached to the objects in the source drawing is appended to an external
database table, and the links to the data are imported with the objects. Select
the link template to use. You can also specify that only the link data be
imported.
If no link templates are defined in the current drawing, the option is not
available.
Link Template
Select a link template from the list.
Select Fields
Selects fields to import from the source drawing. If you select only key fields,
these fields will be imported as link data, and the database table will not
be updated.
Create Link Only
Select this option to import link data only. Links will be maintained from
the imported objects to their appropriate row in the table, but no changes
will be made to the database table.
If you import only the key field, this option is automatically selected.
See also:
■ To specify the data to import (page 363)
1116 | Chapter 23 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Block Mapping dialog box
This dialog box lists all values in the import file for the specified Control Data
Element and the block name they are mapped to.
Conflict Resolution dialog box
You use the Conflict Resolution dialog box to resolve conflicts found between
the attribute data mapping defined in the Data and Feature Class columns for
an input layer.
When you map incoming attribute data to data fields in the Map drawing
using both the Data and Feature Class column, you may inadvertently map
two different incoming data fields to the same target data field in the Map
drawing.
Autodesk Map 3D considers this a conflict. Before proceeding with the import,
you must resolve all conflicts by deciding which incoming attribute should
be stored in the Map data field.
For example, Autodesk Map 3D would find a conflict if a feature class definition
was set up so that a Map object data field called Wire_Data stored an imported
attribute Voltage, and the Data column was set up so that the same Wire_Data
object data field would store another imported attribute EMF. Since you cannot
store two data values in one target field, Autodesk Map 3D displays the Conflict
Resolution dialog box so that you can specify which of incoming data value
you want to use.
Conflicts Detected For Input Layer <Layer Name> Indicates that conflicts
between the attribute mapping specified in the Data and Feature Class columns
have been found for the specified layer.
Conflict List
Lists the data mapping conflicts that must be resolved before proceeding with
the import. You resolve conflicts by deciding which of the incoming attributes
(the one defined in the Feature Class or the one specified in the Data column)
should be stored in the Map data field.
Class Input Field
Displays the incoming attribute data as defined by the feature class. Click
in this column to indicate that you want to use the value specified by the
Feature Class definition.
Block Mapping dialog box | 1117
Data Input Field
Displays the incoming attribute data as defined in the Data column. Click
in this column to indicate that you want to use the value specified by the
Data column.
Target
Displays the target attribute data field in the Map drawing. The syntax used
for the Target field is
CATEGORY:TABLE.FIELD
Where
CATEGORY Type of data, for example "OD" for object
data, or "LT" for link template (linked exter-
nal database).
TABLE Object data table name or database table
name.
FIELD Data field name.
Use Class Resolves all conflicts using the Class Input Field definitions.
Use Data Resolves all conflicts using the Data Input Field definitions.
OK Accept the current settings and return to the Import dialog box.
Coordinate System Translation dialog box
Use this dialog box to convert the file from one coordinate system to another.
If the coordinate system you want is not listed in any category, you can create
a new coordinate system using the ADEDEFCRDSYS command. (You must
cancel the current command before you start the ADEDEFCRDSYS command.)
Input Settings area From the Coordinate System list, select the coordinate
system code for the existing file. This list displays all codes in the selected
category. To display the codes for a different category, select the new category
from the Category list.
Output Settings area From the Coordinate System list, select the coordinate
system code you want for the new file. This list displays all codes in the selected
category. To display the codes for a different category, select the new category
from the Category list.
1118 | Chapter 23 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPIMPORT4)
Use this dialog box to define a new link template.
OK When you click OK, a link template is created for the table using the key
columns in the Key Selection Area that have been set to On.
Table Specification Area Select a data source, catalog, and schema. Enter the
name of a table. To select from a list of table names, click List.
Link Template Area Enter a name for the link template. Link template names
can be up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
Key Selection Area Specify a key column by selecting the column and clicking
On.
Export dialog box
Select the objects to export, and specify export options.
If you have previously saved your settings in this dialog box, you can click
Load to reload those settings. To save the current settings for use later or to
use in a script, click Save.
The dialog box has the following tabs: Selection Tab (page 1119)Data Tab (page
1120)Options Tab (page 1121)
Selection Tab
Specify the objects to export.
Object Type For some formats, you must select the object type you want to
export. Objects of other types will be filtered out of the export. To export these
other object types, run the Export feature again. Note that some objects in an
Autodesk Map 3D drawing may be exported as more than one type.
Select Objects To Export
Select the objects that you want to export.
Select All
Selects all objects.
Select Manually
Lets you individually select the objects to export. To modify the selection
set, click Select Objects or Quick Select.
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) | 1119
Filter Selection area
Filters the selected objects based on layer or feature class. To apply a filter,
enter the names of the layers or feature classes you want to include, or click
the button to select from a list. Objects that are not on the selected layers
and in the selected feature classes will be filtered out of the export. The
status line shows how many objects are selected and how many have been
filtered out.
Select Polygon Topology To Export
Name
Select the polygon topology to export. All the polygons in the selected
topology will be converted to polygon objects and exported.
These objects are in addition to any objects selected above.
Group Complex Polygons
Groups nested polygons into a single balanced polygon. Each nested polygon
must have a centroid.
If you do not select this option, Autodesk Map 3D will create separate
polygons, one for each centroid.
Preview Filtered Selection Preview the objects that will be exported. In the
preview, objects that will be exported are highlighted. To leave the preview
and return to this dialog, press ESC.
Data Tab
Data
To include data with the exported objects, select the data fields to export. The
selected fields appear in the table. You can also enter an expression.
Select Attributes
Displays the Select Attributes dialog box, where you can select properties,
object properties, topology information, feature class information, or fields
from link template data, object data, or block attributes.
TIP To export only the key values, select the fields in the Link Templates section.
Since the key values are stored in the drawing as link data, selecting only key
fields improves performance.
Source Field
Lists the data you've selected to export. Click Select Attributes to select
additional data, or enter an expression.
1120 | Chapter 23 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Output Field
Enter a name for the field in the output file. Output field names can use
any alpha-numeric character and the underscore symbol ("_").
Create Unique Key Field Creates a unique value for each exported object.
You can specify a name for this field.
The unique ID numbers increment within a single Autodesk Map 3D session,
but restart when you restart Autodesk Map 3D. If you want the unique key to
extend across a number of files you are exporting, be sure to export all the
files in the same Autodesk Map 3D session.
Options Tab
Coordinate Conversion To convert the exported objects to a different
coordinate system, check Convert To. Enter the coordinate system code for
the export file or click Select Coordinate System to select one from a list.
If the Convert To box is grayed, your current drawing does not have a
coordinate system assigned to it. You can cancel this dialog box, assign a
coordinate system to the current drawing, and then re-click File menu
➤ Export ➤ Vector Files.
Other
Treat Closed Polylines as Polygons
Exports closed polylines as polygons. If this check box is not selected, only
polygon objects will be exported as polygons.
NOTE If you are exporting a polygon topology that includes closed polylines
and those closed polylines are part of the selection set, selecting this check box
may create duplicate polygons in the exported file.
Map Layers to DGN Levels
Maps layers in the map to DGN levels if you are exporting to a DGN version
7 or 8 format. For DGN version 7, the default is to map layers to level
numbers. For DGN version 8, the default is to map layers to level names
using the same name as the layer. Click Driver Options to specify options
for the version of DGN you specified.
File Name Prefix
Creates a folder of shape files using this prefix, appended by each object
type name.
This field appears only if you have modified the MapExport.ini file to include
all object types when exporting DWG objects to SHP format. DWG objects
can contain multiple geometry types, while SHP files contain only one. To
export all object types in one export operation, open MapExport.ini and,
Export dialog box | 1121
under the [SHAPE] entry, set EntTpes to All. This will remove the object
type options and display the File Name Prefix field.
Driver Options For some formats, you can click Driver Options to specify
additional options. For formats without additional driver options, this button
is grayed. For more information about the options for a particular format, see
Supported Formats (page 337).
Additional Notes
■ Autodesk Map 3D exports original object properties regardless of any map
stylizations, except for some text. Text entities created by text stylizations
are exported. To avoid exporting text entities, turn off any text stylization
before exporting your data. To export stylized drawing objects, first save
the stylizations to a linked output drawing, and then export the linked
objects. You can export stylized feature layers using Display Manager. For
more information, see Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer (page
927).
■ Settings saved with the MAPEXPORT command from version 4.0 or earlier
of Autodesk Map 3D cannot be loaded in this dialog box.
See also:
■ To export drawing objects to other file formats (page 917)
Feature Class Attribute Mapping dialog box
Specify how you want to map the attribute data from the incoming file to the
feature class definitions in the Autodesk Map 3D drawing.
To map incoming attribute data to a feature class, follow these steps:
1 Select a feature class in the Select A Feature Class list.
2 Review the Input Fields list, which displays the incoming attribute data
fields that are available to be mapped to Target Fields in the feature class
definition.
3 For each Input Field you want to map, click the down-arrow under Target
Fields, and select a target field in the feature class definition.
1122 | Chapter 23 Import Export Dialog Boxes
4 Continue mapping as many of the Target Fields as possible. When there
are no more target fields in the Target Fields list, you've mapped them
all.
If you do not map a target field, the default feature class value will be
used.
5 Click OK to close the Feature Class Attribute Mapping dialog box.
Select A Feature Class Displays the feature classes defined in the Autodesk
Map 3D drawing.
Input Fields Displays the incoming attribute data fields that are available to
be mapped to Target Fields in the feature class definition.
Target Fields Lists the attributes in the selected feature class that require
mapping. You should map as many Target Fields as possible.
After you map a target field, it no longer appears in the Target Fields list, so
when there are no more target fields in the Target Fields list, you've mapped
them all. This ensures that each target field is mapped to only one incoming
data field.
If you don't map a target field, the default feature class value will be used.
The syntax used for the Target field is
CATEGORY:TABLE.FIELD
Where
CATEGORY Type of data, for example "OD" for object
data, or "LT" for link template (linked exter-
nal database).
TABLE Object data table name or database table
name.
FIELD Data field name.
OK Use the current settings and return to the Import dialog box.
Cancel Close the dialog box, cancel any settings made, and return to the
Import dialog box.
See also:
■ To import maps from other programs (page 333)
Feature Class Attribute Mapping dialog box | 1123
■ To assign an object class to an input layer (page 359)
Import dialog box
Specify options and settings for imported files.
In the table, you can specify properties for each input layer (sometimes called
a schema, level, or file).
To import an input layer, select the check box next to its name. To change
other settings for an input layer, click in the field you want to change. Click
the down arrow to choose from a list of choices, or click [...] to for additional
choices.
To sort on a specific column, right-click the column heading. Click Sort
Ascending or Sort Descending.
To copy the contents of a field, right-click in the field. Click Copy. Right-click
in the target field. Click one of the Paste options. To copy the contents of a
field to all other layers, right-click in the field. Click one of the Paste To All
Layers options. Note that when pasting into Feature Class fields, the feature
class name and data mappings are pasted separately, and if data mapping
conflicts are detected, the pasted data mappings options will not be available.
Current Drawing Coordinate System Displays the global coordinate system
for the current drawing. To change this coordinate system, or to assign a
coordinate system, click Assign Global Coordinate System.
Driver Options For some import formats, you can click Driver Options to
specify additional options. Some formats do not have any additional driver
options. For more information about the options for a particular format, see
Supported Formats (page 337).
NOTE If you import from DGN Version 8, there may be more than one model in
the drawing. If so, you will see input layers reflecting each one. Each model
corresponds roughly to a model space in Autodesk Map 3D (for example, Layout
1 or Layout 2). The input layers will be named using the syntax
ModelName_LevelNumber, ModelName_LevelName, or
ModelName_GeometryType, depending on the settings you choose in Driver
Options.
Be sure to set driver options before you modify the table. Changing driver
options may reset some of the settings in the table.
1124 | Chapter 23 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Spatial Filter
Specify the area into which you want import data.
None
Place no area limit on the incoming file and import the entire incoming
file.
Current Display
Limits the import to the area shown in the current drawing window.
Define Window
Limits the import to a rectangular area you define in the drawing. Click
Select. Drag your cursor from right to left to define the area. Objects that
the rectangular window encloses or crosses will be imported. Notes:
■ Autodesk Map 3D does not display a preview of the incoming data.
■ If the coordinate system assigned to the Map drawing differs from the
coordinate system specified in the Coordinate System column, Autodesk
Map 3D will perform a reverse transformation to determine the correct
coordinate space (area) for the incoming data.
Import Properties Table
Input Layer
Lists all layers (sometimes called schema, levels, or files) for the selected file
or folder. Select the check box next to an input layer name to import objects
from that layer.
Drawing Layer
Specifies the target layer in the current drawing. Objects will be imported
to the selected layer. Select an existing layer or create a new layer. To use
layer names stored in data, click [...]. Select the data field.
Feature Class
Specifies the name of the feature class to use for the incoming data. For
example, objects on an incoming Shapefile input layer can be classified and
included in the "LAND USE" feature class in Map.
Click the down-arrow to select from a list of valid feature classes. Click [...]
to specify the incoming data attributes you want to use to populate the
feature class definition. This process is referred to as attribute mapping. If
you don't map the attributes, Autodesk Map 3D populates the feature class
with the default feature class values.
NOTE This column is available only if you have feature classes defined in your
Map drawing. For more information about setting up feature classes, see .
Import dialog box | 1125
Input Coordinate System
Displays the coordinate system of the incoming layer. Objects will be
converted from input coordinate system to the coordinate system assigned
to the current drawing. Click [...] to specify the coordinate system code for
the incoming objects.
NOTE This column is available only if you've assigned a coordinate system to
the current drawing. To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing,
click Assign Global Coordinate System under Current Drawing Coordinate
System.
Data
Displays the name of the object data table or link template to use for
incoming data. Click [...] to specify a name for the table and select the
incoming fields you want to include in the object data table.
Note that data is imported only if it is associated with an imported object.
If no imported objects are associated with the incoming data, the table is
not created.
Points
Lists the block to use for point objects. Select ACAD_POINT or a block name
from the list. To create text or get block names from incoming data, click
[...] and select the data field.
Saved Profiles To save your settings as a profile, click Save. To use settings
that you've previously saved, click Load. You can use your saved setting to
help automate scripts.
NOTE Settings saved with the MAPIMPORT command in version 4.0 or earlier
of Autodesk Map 3D cannot be loaded in this dialog box.
Import Polygons As Closed Polylines Specifies that you want to import
polygons as closed polylines, which is useful if you plan to use the polygons
in a polygon topology. If this option is not selected, polygons are imported
as polygon objects. To change the default state of this option, use the
MAPUSEMPOLYGON command.
Use Class Defaults For Out Of Range Values Specifies that you want to use
feature class default values for incoming data values that are not within the
specified feature class range. Choosing this option ensures that the incoming
data will be accurately classified, but may require Autodesk Map 3D to modify
some of the incoming data values.
1126 | Chapter 23 Import Export Dialog Boxes
See also:
■ To import maps from other programs (page 333)
■ To specify an area to import (page 356)
■ To specify an AutoCAD layer during import (page 357)
■ To assign an object class to an input layer (page 359)
■ To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing (page 123)
■ To specify the data to import (page 363)
■ To specify how to import points (page 365)
Import Data Options dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify how objects and data in the import file are
imported into Autodesk Map 3D.
Proceed Click Proceed to convert the selected file.
OK Click OK to close the dialog box but keep the current import options.
Import Graphics Area
Perform Coordinate Conversion
To convert the file from one coordinate system to another, select Perform
Coordinate Conversion. Click Define to display the Coordinate System
Translation dialog box.
Map Data Element To Layers
Select this option to use the attribute data in the import file to determine
the target layer for the Autodesk Map 3D objects that are created.
Click Layers to display the Map Data Elements to Layers dialog box, where
you can map the values for a selected data element to specific layers in the
output file.
Map Data Element To Block Name
Select this option to use the attribute data in the import file to determine
the target block name for point and polygon centroid objects that are
created.
Click Blocks to display the Map Data Elements to Block Name dialog box,
where you can map the values for a selected data element to specific block
names in the output file.
Import Data Options dialog box | 1127
Import Data Elements Area
Ignore Data Elements
Select this option to ignore attribute data in the import file (other than data
that is used in the layer and block name mapping above).
Select this option if you do not want to convert the attribute data to object
data or create links to SQL tables. Only the graphical objects in the file will
be converted.
Map Data Elements To Object Data
Select this option to convert the attribute data in the import file to object
data.
Click Data to display the Object Data Table dialog box, where you can select
the name of an existing object data table or create a new one.
Map Data Elements To SQL Table
Select this option to use the attribute data in the import file to create links
to existing SQL tables or to create new tables.
Click SQL to display the Map Data Elements to SQL dialog box, where you
can map specific data elements to specific columns in an external database.
Options Area
Load
Use import settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Layer Mapping dialog box
This dialog box lists all values in the import file for the specified Control Data
Element and the layer they are mapped to.
Layer Mapping dialog box
For the selected layer (sometimes called a schema, level, or file) in the incoming
file, specify a target layer in the current drawing.
Create on Existing Layer Puts incoming objects on an existing layer in the
drawing. Click the down arrow to select the layer.
1128 | Chapter 23 Import Export Dialog Boxes
If you assigned the incoming layer to a Feature Class with a layer property,
the default is the layer specified in the feature class.
Create on New Layer Puts incoming objects on a new layer. Enter a name
for the new layer.
Use Data Field For Layer Name Puts incoming objects on a layer based on
data attached to the objects. Click the down arrow and select the field to use
for layer names. For each object, Autodesk Map 3D will read the value in the
specified field and put the object on a layer with the same name. If the layer
does not exist, it will be created. If an object does not have a value in the
specified field, it will go on Layer 0.
Autodesk Map 3D uses only the first 255 characters of the value in the field.
If the incoming file has field values that are longer, you may want to change
the value before you import the file.
NOTE If a conflict between the layer specified by the Drawing Layer setting and
a Feature Class with a layer property is found, Autodesk Map 3D uses the Drawing
Layer setting, with the exception of when Drawing Layer is set to <None>, then
the Feature Class setting is used.
See also:
■ To specify an AutoCAD layer during import (page 357)
Layers to DGN Levels dialog box
For each layer in the current drawing, specify a name for the corresponding
level in the exported DGN file.
To change a DGN level name, click in the DGN Level field you want to change
and enter a new name. Names can be numbers or strings.
See also:
■ Exporting (page 915)
Link Template to Export dialog box
Select the link template to use in the export operation.
Layers to DGN Levels dialog box | 1129
If you select the Map SQL Data To Data Element option, the data from the
referenced table will be exported.
If you select the Map Database Link To Data Element option, the key column
value that links the object to the table will be exported.
Map Data Elements to Block Name dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify which data element to use for determining the
block for points or polygon centroids.
When the file is converted, the value of the selected data element for each
object determines the block to use.
To map a value to a block name, select the value in the Values Available list
and select a block from the Target Block Name list. Click >>.
Control Data Element area Select the data element to use to determine the
target block.
Values Available list Displays all the values in the import file for the selected
data element.
Target Block Name area Select a block name. To load a block, click Load.
>> Move the selected values from the Values Available list to the Values
Assigned list for the selected block name.
<< Remove the selected values from the selected block name and return them
to the Values Available list.
Values Assigned list Displays the values assigned to the current block name.
Auto Block Assign each value to a block name of the same name.
List Display the Block Mapping dialog box, which lists the block name
assignment for each value in the selected data element.
Map Data Elements to Layers dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the data element to use when determining the
target layer for objects.
When the file is converted, the value of the selected data element for each
object will determine its layer.
1130 | Chapter 23 Import Export Dialog Boxes
To map a value to a layer, select the value in the Values Available list and
select a layer from the Target Layer list. Click >>.
Control Data Element area Select the data element to use to determine the
target layer.
Values Available list Displays all the values in the import file for the selected
data element.
Target Layer area Select a layer. To create a new layer, click New.
>> Move the selected values from the Values Available list to the Values
Assigned list for the selected layer.
<< Remove the selected values from the selected layer and return them to the
Values Available list.
Values Assigned list Displays the values assigned to the current layer.
Auto Layer Assign each value to a layer of the same name. If a layer does not
exist, one will be created.
List Display the Layer Mapping dialog box, which lists the layer assignment
for each value in the selected data element.
Map Data Elements to SQL dialog box
Use this dialog box to map data elements in the import file to specific columns
in external database tables.
Database Link Method area Specify whether to link objects to an existing
database table or to create a new database table and link objects to the new
table.
When the file is imported, each object in the import file is linked to the record
in the external database table with the matching key column value. Or a new
table is created using the values from the data elements, and links are created
to the new table.
To link a data element to a key value, select the data element in the Import
Data Elements list and select the key value in the Link Template list. Click >>.
Import Data Elements area Displays all data elements in the import file.
Link Template area Select a link Template from the list.
To create a new link template, click Define to display the Define Link Template
dialog box.
Map Data Elements to SQL dialog box | 1131
>> Link the selected import data element to the selected key in the link
template.
<< Remove the selected link from the Link Template list and return the data
element to the Import Data Elements list.
Map Export dialog box
Use this dialog box to export data from Autodesk Map 3D to an external file
format.
Proceed When you have set options, click Proceed to display the Map Export
Options dialog box, where you can specify how to export graphics and data.
OK Click OK to close the dialog box but keep the current import options.
Export File area
Format
Select the format to export to.
Name
Enter a name and location for the new file or directory.
If you are not sure of the location, click Browse to view existing files and
directories. If you are creating a coverage, the parent directory for the new
directory must be a "workspace" directory, containing only other coverage
directories, and the new directory must be empty of all files. The default
coverage format is UNIX ArcInfo. If the workspace directory contains an
existing PC ArcInfo coverage, the new coverage will be in PC ArcInfo format.
File Type area Select the file type for the information you are exporting. This
option is not necessary for all file formats.
Object Selection area
Select Automatically
Use all objects on the specified layers and of the specified file type.
Select Manually
Select individual objects. Click Select < to select objects.
Objects will be filtered for the specified layers and file type.
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects.
1132 | Chapter 23 Import Export Dialog Boxes
If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored.
Filter On Layers
Specify the layers to search. The default is all layers. To select from a list of
layers in the current drawing, click Layers.
Map Export Options dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify how objects and data in the current drawing
are exported.
Proceed Click Proceed to export to the selected file format.
OK Click OK to close the dialog box but keep the current export options.
Export Geometry area Select Perform Coordinate Conversion to convert the
objects from one coordinate system to another. Click Define to display the
Coordinate System Translation dialog box.
Export Object Properties area
Map Layer Name To Data Element
Transfer the layer name for each object to the specified data element name
in the export file.
Map Block Name To Data Element
Transfer the block name for each object to the specified data element name
in the export file.
Map Linetype To Data Element
Transfer the linetype name for each object to the specified data element in
the export file.
Export Data Elements area
No Data Mapping
Export only graphical objects. No data is exported.
Map Object Data To Data Element
Export object data for each object.
Click Data to display the Object Data Table dialog box where you can select
the object data table to export.
Map SQL Data To Data Element
Export data from an external database that is linked to the objects.
Map Export Options dialog box | 1133
Click SQL to display the Link Template to Export dialog box, where you
can select the link template that defines the external table.
Map Database Link To Data Element
Export information about the database link. This option exports the key
column value that links the object to the table.
Click Link to display the Link Template to Export dialog box, where you
can select the link template that defines the external table.
Options area
Load
Use export settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save your current export settings so you can use them again.
Map Import dialog box
Use this dialog box to translate an external map file into Autodesk Map 3D
format. You can translate the coordinate system, specify layer and block
locations for objects, and translate existing data to either object data format
or SQL tables.
You can import coverages in both UNIX ArcInfo and PC ArcInfo format. If
you are importing a coverage, you must have the coverage subdirectory and
the associated INFO subdirectory before using the MAPIMPORT4 command.
To set a text size for coverages, set the TEXTSIZE variable before using the
MAPIMPORT4 command.
NOTE If a SHP file is located on a read-only drive or directory, you cannot import
the file if the name contains any of the following characters: pound sign (#),
exclamation point (!), comma (,), or accent grave (`). To import the file, either
rename the file or move it to a directory to which you have write access.
When you have set options, click Proceed to display the Import Data Options
dialog box, where you can specify how to import graphics and data.
Click OK to close the dialog box but keep the current import options.
Format Select the format of the file to import.
Name Enter the name of the existing file or coverage.
If you are not sure of the name or location, click Browse to view existing file
names and directories.
1134 | Chapter 23 Import Export Dialog Boxes
New Layer dialog box
Specify a name for the new layer.
New layers are created with color number 7 and the CONTINUOUS linetype.
Object Data Table dialog box (Export)
Select the object data table whose data you want to export. Click the down
arrow to select from a list of object data tables in the current drawing.
You can select only one object data table. To export data from multiple tables,
repeat the export command for each table.
Object Data Table dialog box (Import)
Use this dialog box to select the object data table you will import data into.
To create a table, exit the import operation and use the ADEDEFDATA
command.
During the import operation, data elements in the import file are transferred
to a matching field name.
Table box Displays the target object data table name. If you enter a value in
this box that does not reference an existing object data table, Map creates a
new table that includes all data elements in the import file.
Tables Display a list of all defined object data tables in the current drawing.
Selecting an existing table populates only fields whose names exactly match
the name of a data element.
Object Data/External Database Mapping dialog box
Use the Object Data Mapping dialog box and the External Database Mapping
dialog box to specify which fields from the incoming file should be mapped
to fields in an object data table or external database.
Input Fields Select the fields from the incoming file you want to import.
New Layer dialog box | 1135
Target Fields Select the field in the object data table or external database to
which you want to import each field.
■ If you are importing to an external database:
To select a Target Field, click in the box. Click the down arrow to select
from a list of existing fields.
If you selected Create Link Only in the Attribute Data dialog box, or if you
select only the key field in this dialog box, Autodesk Map 3D will import
the key field as link data and will not modify the external database.
■ If you are importing to an object data table:
To import into an existing field in the table, click in the box. Click the
down arrow to select from a list of existing fields.
To import into a new field, type the name of the new field in the box.
To change a target field, click in the box and select or type the field you
want.
See also:
■ To specify the data to import (page 363)
Point Mapping dialog box
For the selected layer (sometimes called a schema, level, or file), specify how
to import points.
Create As Points Converts points as points. Points are imported using
ACAD_POINT.
Create As Text From Data Converts points as text. Select the data field in
the incoming file that contains the value to use for the text. If an object does
not have a value in the selected data field, the point will be imported using
ACAD_POINT.
Text will use the text style for the current drawing. To change the text style
for the current drawing, click Text Style and select the style you want.
Create As Blocks Converts points as blocks. Select the block to use.
Get Block Name From Data Converts points as blocks and uses a block name
stored in attribute data. Select the data field in the incoming file that contains
the value to use for the block name. If the block does not exist, then the point
will be imported using ACAD_POINT.
1136 | Chapter 23 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Get Attribute Values From Fields Imports attribute values attached to the
incoming points. If an attribute name on the block that is being created
matches a field name on the incoming point, the data for that attribute will
be imported with the point. This option is available only if you select either
Create As Blocks or Get Block Name From Data.
See also:
■ To specify how to import points (page 365)
Select dialog box
■ To select an item, click on the item.
■ To select a group of items, click on the first one. Hold down the Shift key
while you click on the last one.
■ To select additional items, hold down the Ctrl key while you click on each
item.
When you finish selecting items, click OK.
Select Feature Classes dialog box
Select the feature classes you want by clicking on them.
When you finish selecting feature classes, click OK.
Select Table Dialog Box (MAPIMPORT)
Select an object data table from the list of all object data tables in the current
drawing.
Select Table Dialog Box (MAPIMPORT)
Select a database table from the list of all tables in the data source.
Select dialog box | 1137
Map Book Dialog Boxes
24
In this chapter
■ Create Map Book/Edit Map Book
dialog box
■ Identify Map Book Template
Placeholders dialog box
■ Map Book Properties dialog box
■ Tile Properties dialog box
■ Select Plot Set to Convert dialog
box
■ Map Information dialog box
■ Publish to Autodesk MapGuide
■ Plot Map Set dialog boxes
1139
Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog box
Specify the data to use to create or edit a map book. Expand a node in the left
pane of the dialog box to specify the necessary information on the right.
Source node Create a map book from a display or model space. If your map
contains drawing objects, you can specify Model Space to include all the
objects, or Map Display to include only objects you’ve added in Display
Manager.
■ Select Map Display to publish a display map that you created in the Display
Manager.
■ Select Model Space to publish objects in model space.
Sheet Template node Click the heading Sheet Template to specify a template
file and layout to use. Indicate whether to include a title block and adjacent
sheet links. (You can include these only if you defined placeholders for them.)
If you include a title block, specify its name. If it isn’t in the list, use the ellipsis
button (...) and find it. If you include adjacent sheet links, specify the name
of the file that represents the adjacent sheet.
By default, the scale factor is 1, meaning a scale ratio of 1:1.
Tiling Scheme node Select the way to specify the area to publish. Click the
heading Tiling Scheme to specify further information.
■ By Area calculates the number of tiles based on the map scale and the size
of the main viewport in the layout template. Specify a layer for the grid
that forms the tile in your map book. If you defined a grid layer, choose
it in the list. Otherwise, type a name for a new layer to contain the grid.
Click Select area to tile and draw a rectangle for the area to include in the
map book.
■ By Number calculates the number of tiles based on the map scale, the size
of the main viewport in the layout template, and the specified number of
rows and columns. Specify the upper left corner and how many columns
and rows to create. Be sure to preview the map book to see how much of
the map is included when you use this tiling scheme.
■ Custom generates the tiles from the closed polylines you select. Click Select
Tiles and define the tiles. If you have already defined the tiles in a separate
layer, you can use the layer manager to turn off other layers and
window-select the tiles on your grid layer.
1140 | Chapter 24 Map Book Dialog Boxes
Naming Scheme node Select the way to name the tiles.
■ Columns And Rows names each tile with a column indicator and a row
indicator, for example, A1.
■ Grid Sequential numbers the first tile with a digit and augments each
subsequent tile number by the increment you choose. Specify which order
to go in and the increment between tile numbers.
■ Sequential is designed for custom tiling schemes and numbers only the
tiles you specified in your custom tiling scheme. Specify which order to
go in and the increment between tile numbers.
■ Data Driven lets you choose an expression for your naming scheme based
on data in the map.
Key node If you defined a keyview viewport, choose what to display in it. If
you choose External Reference, specify the file to display in this viewport. If
you specify Layers, specify which layers will appear in the keyview thumbnail.
If you created a new grid layer under Tiling Scheme that you want to use in
the Key node, you must click the layer icon at the top of the dialog box and
type that name in the list.
If you specify Layers, choose a small subset of layers that help the viewer
identify a specific area of the map. Too many layers will result in a crowded
and hard-to-read thumbnail. This step is optional.
Legend node Specify the source for a legend. If you created a display legend
in Display Manager, choose Map Display. To use an area of your map as a
legend, click Select Modelspace Bounds and select that area. This step is
optional.
Sheet Set node Specify whether to create a new sheet set for this map book
or to make it a subset of an existing sheet set.
Map book sheet sets are based on AutoCAD sheet sets. For more information
about AutoCAD sheet sets, type “create and manage a sheet set” on the Search
tab of the help.
See also:
■
■
Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog box | 1141
Identify Map Book Template Placeholders dialog box
Specify the viewport and element placeholders in the sheet template layout.
Layout Placeholders Select the viewport or element to identify.
Select button In your layout, select the viewport or element that corresponds
to the item you selected in the Layout Placeholders list.
See also:
■ Identifying Layout Placeholders (page 906)
Map Book Properties dialog box
View basic properties of a map book.
NOTE Except for the name, these properties are strings used as field values in
sheets. They do not change the actual properties of the map book. For example,
if you change a property in this dialog box, the corresponding map book property
does not change. However, if your layout template contains a text element with
a field that references the property you changed, that text element will change.
Name Identifies the map book name.
Scale Identifies the scale used for the selected map book.
Orientation Identifies the rotation orientation of the selected map book.
Coordinate System Identifies the coordinate system, if one was specified.
Tile Count Indicates the number of tiles in the selected map book.
See also:
■ Viewing Map Book or Tiles Properties (page 912)
Tile Properties dialog box
View basic properties of a map book tile.
1142 | Chapter 24 Map Book Dialog Boxes
NOTE These properties are strings used as field values in sheets. They do not
change the actual properties of the tile. For example, if you change a property in
this dialog box, the corresponding tile property does not change. However, if your
layout template contains a text element with a field that references the property
you changed, that text element will change.
Name Identifies the tile name.
Adjacent Tiles Identifies all tiles that are immediately adjacent to the selected
tile.
See also:
■ Viewing Map Book or Tile Properties (page 912)
Select Plot Set to Convert dialog box
Select a plot map set that you want to convert to a map book.
Map Information dialog box
Specify the types of information to include when publishing to DWF™.
Publish Map Information Specifies that the checked items in the list are
included in the publish operation. If you clear the Publish Map Information
box, the options remain checked, but they are not included in the publish
operation.Check Publish Map Information again to include them.
Properties tree Categories listed here vary, depending on the contents of your
map. Expand a category to see its layers, and expand a layer to see its objects.
If you select an item with sub-items, all the sub-items are automatically
checked.
File icon Specify the file for the properties.
Folder icon Find a saved properties file to load.
NOTE If you assigned a coordinate system to your map, it is always included for
each sheet in your published DWF file, unless you clear the Export Map Properties
check box.
Select Plot Set to Convert dialog box | 1143
See also:
■ Set DWF Publishing Options (page 892)
Publish to Autodesk MapGuide
Publish the current display map to Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise 2007, a
platform that lets you publish map-related data on the web or on an intranet.
URL Specify the URL for the target website. If the site requires a password, a
Connect to Site dialog box appears. Enter your user name and password.
Publishing Options Specify how to deal with files of the same name that
already exist in the target folder. You can choose to overwrite the old files,
make a new copy, or cancel the operation when such files are encountered.
Folder Name Choose a folder for the published files.
See also:
■ Publish to MapGuide (page 899)
Plot Map Set dialog boxes
The Plot Map Set functionality has been replaced with the Map Books feature.
While yo can continue to use your existing map plot sets, we recommend that
you import your plot sets in to Map Book. For more information, see Importing
Plot Map Sets (page 908) and Publish Map Books (page 900).
1144 | Chapter 24 Map Book Dialog Boxes
Object Data Dialog Boxes
25
In this chapter
■ Attach Object Data dialog box
■ Attach/Detach Object Data dialog
box
■ Edit Object Data dialog box
■ Rename Table dialog box
■ Select Link Template Key dialog
box
1145
Attach Object Data dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing
objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use with a
feature source.
The Object Data Field area lists the fields in the table and the values for those
fields.
■ To change any value, highlight the value, type the new value in the Value
box, and press Enter. When you finish updating values, click OK.
See also:
■ To attach data to an object (page 698)
Attach/Detach Object Data dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing
objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use with a
feature source.
Use this dialog box to add data to an object data table and attach that data to
an object, or to detach existing data from an object.
Table Lists all the tables in the current drawing. Select the table containing
the data fields to attach.
Object Data Field Lists all the data fields in the selected table and the current
value for each field.
Note that if two attached drawings have a table with the same name, Autodesk
Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate.
To change the value to attach, highlight the field and type a new value in the
Value box.
Value Displays the default value for the selected field.
To specify a different value, type a new value in the box.
Attach to Objects < Returns to your map, where you can select the objects
to attach the data to.
1146 | Chapter 25 Object Data Dialog Boxes
Detach from Objects Returns to your map, where you can select the objects
to detach.
All data from the selected table is removed from the objects.
Overwrite Overwrites any existing values for this table with the new values.
If the box is not selected, the object will have two values assigned for the data
fields in the table.
Select the box when you want only one set of values attached to the object,
as when specifying a pipe diameter or a desk height. Deselect the box if you
want the object to have multiple sets of values assigned to it, as when
specifying software installed on a computer or types of plants in a landscape
section.
Define Displays the Define Object Data dialog box, where you can create new
tables or modify existing tables.
To attach data to an object, select a table and review or change the default
values. Click Attach To Objects <. When you finish selecting objects in your
drawing, Autodesk Map 3D creates a record for each object and attaches the
records to the objects.
If you selected Overwrite, the new record replaces any existing record from
this table. If you don't select Overwrite, the object can have more than one
record from the table.
To detach data, select a table. Click Detach From Objects. When you return
to your map, select all the objects you want to detach the data from.
See also:
■ To attach data to an object (page 698)
Edit Object Data dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing
objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use with a
feature source.
This dialog box displays the object data for the selected object.
■ To view data from a different table, select the table from the list.
■ To view data for a different object, click Select Object <.
Edit Object Data dialog box | 1147
■ To change a value, enter a new value in the box and press Enter. You must
have Edit Drawing privileges to edit object data. See User Administration
dialog box (page 1274)
Table Lists all tables that have data attached to the selected object.
Select a table to view or edit.
Object Data Field/Value Displays the field values for the selected object.
If the object has more than one record from the selected table, use Next, Prior,
First, and Last to view the other records.
Nested Data Determines whether the values displayed are for the nested
object, or only for its parent object.
■ If the box is selected, the Object Data Field/Value list shows information
for just the selected object.
■ If the box is not selected, the Object Data Field/Value list shows information
for the parent object. If the object has more than one parent object, select
one from the list.
Value Displays the current value for the selected field.
To change the value, enter a new value in the box and press Enter.
Select Object < To view and edit data for another object, click Select Object
< , and select a new object.
Insert Record Attach a new record from this table to the object. The record
contains the current values for each field.
Delete Record Remove the record from the object.
See also:
■ To modify an object data table (page 159)
Rename Table dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing
objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use with a
feature source.
Rename the selected table.
1148 | Chapter 25 Object Data Dialog Boxes
The table name cannot include spaces.
Before you rename a table:
■ All source drawings that use the table should be attached and active.
If a drawing is not attached and active, the table will not be renamed for
that drawing.
■ Do not perform a Draw mode query.
If you have already performed a Draw mode query since you opened the
current drawing, you must save the objects back to their source drawings
or close the current drawing and reopen it.
If you change a table name, be sure to update any queries that reference the
table.
See also:
■ To modify an object data table (page 159)
Select Link Template Key dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing
objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use with a
feature source.
Use this dialog box to select the fields from the current object data table to
use as key fields in the database table.
Method area Select the method for setting key fields.
Reference Existing Fields Use existing fields as key fields.
If you select this option, select the fields to use in the Existing Fields area.
Generate Key Field Create a new field to use as the key field.
If you select this option, specify a name for the field in the Generate Key area.
When the database table is created, this field will contain a unique number
for each record.
Existing Fields area If you select Reference Existing Fields, select the fields
to use as key fields.
■ To specify a key field, select the field and click On.
■ To deselect a key field, select the field and click Off.
Select Link Template Key dialog box | 1149
■ To change the name of a field, select the field, type a new name in the
Rename box. Click Rename.
Generate Key area If you select Generate Key Field, specify a name for the
new field. The name must be different from other fields in the table.
See also:
■ To open a linked database table (page 320)
1150 | Chapter 25 Object Data Dialog Boxes
Old Oracle Dialog Boxes
26
In this chapter
■ Column Values dialog box
■ Display Property Condition dialog
box
■ Export Autodesk Map Objects to
Oracle Schema dialog box
■ Feature Definition Conflict dialog
box
■ Import Oracle Records Into Map
dialog box
■ Load Import Settings dialog box
■ Location Condition dialog box
■ New Feature Definition File dialog
box
■ Oracle Spatial Indexing dialog box
■ Save Import Settings dialog box
■ SQL Condition dialog box
■ Update Erased Objects in Oracle
Spatial Schema dialog box
■ Update Selected Objects in Oracle
Spatial Schema dialog box
1151
Column Values dialog box
Select the display property value to use for your query. For example, select
the name of a layer or an entity type. Click OK.
Display Property Condition dialog box
Use the Display Property Condition dialog box to select a set of objects in the
drawing for import.
Property Definition Select the Property Type, the Operator, and the Value.
Click… to see a list of available values, for example, the list of layers.
Export Autodesk Map Objects to Oracle Schema dialog
box
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for exporting drawing objects to an Oracle database.
Use the Export Map Objects to Oracle dialog box to export all objects in the
drawing, select a set of objects, or filter objects based on layers. You can also
choose to export block attributes, object data, and links to external databases.
Oracle Service and Schema
Connect
Connect to the Oracle service.
Object Selection Parameters
Select Automatically
Select all the objects in the drawing for export.
Select Manually
Select a set of objects for export. Click Select and make your selection using
any of the standard Map object-selection methods.
Filter Selected Objects
Click Layers and select the layers to export. Click OK.
1152 | Chapter 26 Old Oracle Dialog Boxes
Attributes to Export Select the types of data to export: block attributes, object
data, and links to external databases. Clear the check boxes for any type of
data that you do not want to export.
Erase Exported Objects
Erase Objects Exported From Drawing
Select this option to delete all objects that are successfully exported to the
Oracle database.
Feature Definition Conflict dialog box
If you are importing drawing objects that were exported to the schema,
conflicts may arise with existing definition tables, such as layer names, blocks,
or object data tables. For example, a conflict will occur if you have deleted a
field from an object data definition in the drawing since the last import. The
import stops and a list of the conflicts is displayed. You should resolve the
conflicts by deciding whether the definition in the drawing or the schema is
correct:
■ If the definition in the drawing is correct, click Continue.
■ If the definition in the schema is correct, click Cancel, make the necessary
changes to the definitions in the drawing, and then import again.
Import Oracle Records Into Map dialog box
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for importing records from an Oracle database.
Use the Import Oracle Records Into Map dialog box to import objects from
Oracle using a query based on Location or Display Properties, or by defining
an SQL condition.
Oracle Service and Schema
Connect
Connect to the Oracle service.
Condition Definitions
Condition Definitions List
Shows the condition that you have built using the selection options below.
Feature Definition Conflict dialog box | 1153
Edit
Opens the appropriate edit condition dialog box for the selected condition.
Delete
Deletes the selected condition.
Clear All
Clears the Condition Definitions area.
Define Condition
And
Specifies that both conditions must be met for the object to be imported.
Or
Specifies that either condition can be met for the object to be imported.
Location
Select a set of records to import based on the location of objects. In the
Location Condition dialog box, select the Boundary Type and the Selection
Type. Click Define and then draw the boundary in the drawing.
Display Properties
Select records based on properties such as layer or block name. In the Display
Property Condition dialog box, select the Property Type, the Operator, and
the Value. Click… to see a list of available values, for example, the list of
layers.
SQL
Write or paste a SQL query. In the SQL Condition dialog box, enter the
condition statement. Click OK.
Zoom Metadata Extents Zoom to the extents of all the drawings stored in
the schema.
View SQL Statement Translate the defined conditions to an SQL statement.
The statement appears in a separate list box.
Import Settings
Save
Save this import condition in the drawing for future use. In the Save Import
Settings dialog box, enter a name and a description for the saved query.
Load
View a list of any import settings already saved in the drawing.
1154 | Chapter 26 Old Oracle Dialog Boxes
Load Import Settings dialog box
Use the Load Import Settings dialog box to select import settings from a list
of settings already saved in the drawing.
Import Settings List Select the name of the import settings to use. The
description of the import settings appears. Click Load to bring the saved
settings into the Condition Definitions area of the Import Records dialog box.
Location Condition dialog box
Use the Location Condition dialog box to select a set of objects for import.
Location Definition Select the Boundary Type and the Selection Type for the
location query.
Define < Click Define and then draw the boundary in the drawing.
Show View the last-defined condition in the drawing. The boundary of the
area appears as a dashed red line.
New Feature Definition File dialog box
Use the New Feature Definition File dialog box to create a new feature
definition file.
The feature definition file includes information on how to create each of the
feature classes you've defined. Only definitions in the feature definition file
attached to a drawing can be assigned to objects in the drawing or used to
create new features.
NOTE To create a new feature definition file, you must have To add a new user
(page 70).
Look In Select the drive and folder where you want to store the feature
definition file.
File Name Type a name for the new feature definition file.
Files Of Type Leave this set to Feature Definition File.
Load Import Settings dialog box | 1155
NOTE If the FILEDIA variable is set to 0, then this dialog box is not displayed and
you can type the name of the feature definition file to create on the command
line.
See also:
■ To create a new object classification file (page 108)
■ Setting Up Object Classification (page 96)
Oracle Spatial Indexing dialog box
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for creating a spatial index in an Oracle database.
Use the Oracle Spatial Indexing dialog box to to define a spatial index for your
drawing data. You must define an index before you can import records from
Oracle into Map.
You must be the owner of the schema before you can create an index for it
or modiify its metadata. If you are not the owner of the schema that you are
connected to, none of the controls in the Spatial Indexing dialog box are
available.
Metadeta Extents
Compute Extents
Finds the extents of all the drawings contained in the schema. The
coordinates of the extents appear in the Min and Max XYZ text-entry fields.
If you prefer, you can enter the extents yourself by typing coordinate values
in these fields.
Update Metadata
Updates the database with the extents of the drawing data. (Metadata means
"information about the data." )
Indexing Parameters
Calculate
Calculates the optimal value for the tiling and displays the result as a number
in the Tilling Level text-entry field. If you prefer to use your own value, or
if you want to experiment, you can enter a number in the Tiling Level field.
1156 | Chapter 26 Old Oracle Dialog Boxes
Save Import Settings dialog box
Use the Save Import Settings dialog box to save an import condition in the
drawing for future use.
Name Enter a name for your saved settings, or select one of the saved settings
from the list to overwrite it.
Description Enter an optional description for these import settings.
SQL Condition dialog box
You can write SQL or paste SQL from another application, such as SQL+,
during the process of building an import condition.
Enter the condition (or paste the condition portion of a statement; do not paste
the complete statement) and then click OK.
When you click OK, the SQL is added to the Condition Definitions area of
the Import Records dialog box.
Update Erased Objects in Oracle Spatial Schema dialog
box
Use the Update Erased Objects In Oracle Spatial Schema dialog box to update
the records for objects that you have imported into Map and then deleted.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for updating erased objects in an Oracle database.
Update Erased Records Clear this check box if you do not want to delete
records in Oracle for the erased objects in the drawing.
Update Selected Objects in Oracle Spatial Schema dialog
box
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for updating selected objects in an Oracle database.
Save Import Settings dialog box | 1157
Use the Update Selected Objects in Oracle Spatial Schema dialog box to update
the records for objects that you have imported into Map and then edited.
Update Status
Update Imported Records
Clear this check box if you do not want to update the objects.
Add New Records
Clear this check box if you do not want to append records for the new
objects.
Erase Selected Objects from Drawing Select this option to delete all objects
that are successfully updated in the Oracle database.
1158 | Chapter 26 Old Oracle Dialog Boxes
OSE Dialog Boxes
27
In this chapter
■ Attribute Selection dialog box
(OSE)
■ Attribute Value Condition dialog
box (OSE)
■ Column Values dialog box (OSE)
■ Discard Edit Information and
Locks dialog box (OSE)
■ Discard Edit Information dialog
box (OSE)
■ Export Autodesk Map Objects to
Oracle dialog box (OSE)
■ Import Oracle Records Into Map
dialog box (OSE)
■ Location Condition dialog box
(OSE)
■ Lock Management dialog box
(OSE)
■ Oracle Spatial Connection dialog
box (OSE)
■ Save Settings dialog box (OSE)
■ Schema Adminstration dialog box
(OSE)
■ Select Feature Tables dialog box
(OSE)
■ Select Features dialog box (OSE)
1159
■ Select Features to Create Indexes
dialog box (OSE)
■ Select Features to Drop Indexes
dialog box (OSE)
■ Select Features to Update Extents
dialog box (OSE)
■ Select Layers dialog box (OSE)
■ Select Schema for Connection
dialog box (OSE)
■ SQL Condition dialog box (OSE)
■ Unsaved Feature Definitions dialog
box (OSE)
■ View SQL Statement dialog box
(OSE)
1160 | Chapter 27 OSE Dialog Boxes
Attribute Selection dialog box (OSE)
You can select block attributes, object data tables, and link templates by
identifier, and rename the resulting Oracle column names.
Attributes In Current Drawing Select an attribute and click Add to add it to
the feature table in the Oracle database.
Attributes in Feature Table Select an attribute and click Remove to remove
it from the feature table in the Oracle database.
Oracle Column Click the column name and enter text to rename the column
(no spaces).
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Attribute Value Condition dialog box (OSE)
Use the Attribute Value Condition dialog box to select records based on the
values of one or more attributes in the feature table.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Attribute Definition Select an attribute based on the type of data you want
to import.
Column Select the column in the feature table from which you want to import.
Operator Select an operator:
>
<
=
>=
<=
<>
IS NULL
IS NOT NULL
Attribute Selection dialog box (OSE) | 1161
LIKE (Only available with text strings)
IN (Select from multiple records)
NOT IN (Select only from records not in the list)
Value Enter any value. Click [...] to display the Column Values dialog box
(OSE) (page 1162), where you can select one of the values for the attribute column
you specified. You can also enter these SQL wildcards:
Wildcard Description
% Matches any string of zero or more characters.
_ Matches any one character.
Column Values dialog box (OSE)
Use the Column Values dialog box to select a value for the attribute column
that you selected.
Select Values Select the value for the Value field in the Attribute Value
Condition dialog box (OSE) (page 1161). Click OK.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Discard Edit Information and Locks dialog box (OSE)
This warning message appears if you attempt to change service or schema
from within a drawing that contains edited and locked objects.
You will lose any changes that you may have made to those objects and also
any locks on those records in the database. If this is what you want to do,
click Continue. If you want to keep the changes, click Cancel. Export the
edited objects with the Update option.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
1162 | Chapter 27 OSE Dialog Boxes
Discard Edit Information dialog box (OSE)
This warning message appears if you attempt to change service or schema
from within a drawing that contains edited objects.
You will lose any changes that you may have made to those objects. If this is
what you want to do, click Continue. To keep the changes, click Cancel. Export
the edited objects with the Update option.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Export Autodesk Map Objects to Oracle dialog box (OSE)
Use the Export Map Objects To Oracle dialog box to export all objects in the
drawing, select a set of objects, or filter objects based on layers. You can also
choose to export block attributes, object data, and links to external databases.
Oracle Service And Schema Shows the connected service and schema.
Connect Displays the Oracle Spatial Connection dialog box (OSE) (page 1166),
where you can connect to an Oracle service and schema.
Feature Tables To Export Shows how many feature tables are currently
enabled for export and the total number of available feature tables.
Select Features Displays the Select Schema for Connection dialog box (OSE)
(page 1171), where you can select the feature tables to enable for export.
New Object Selection
Export New Objects To Database Select this option to export objects that
are new (that is, objects that have not been previously exported, and which
do not already exist in the Oracle database).
Select Automatically Select this option to export all the new objects in the
drawing except those that are frozen or locked.
Select Manually Select this option to make a selection of objects in the
drawing. Click Select. Select the objects to export.
Update Schema With EditSet The EditSet is the save set of locked and edited
imported objects. These are the objects that you have edited or erased, which
are ready to be exported to the database.
Discard Edit Information dialog box (OSE) | 1163
Update Edited And Erased Records Select this option to export both edited
and erased objects to the database. Clear this option if you do not want to
update the records for these objects.
Remove Exported Objects and Attributes from Drawing Select this option
to delete the exported objects from the drawing. You should erase the objects
unless you have a very good reason for not doing so. Not erasing the exported
objects greatly increases the risk of duplicating objects. Erasing exported objects
also means that you can easily see if any objects selected for export were
rejected and remain in the drawing because they have conflicting definitions
or other problems.
Import Oracle Records Into Map dialog box (OSE)
Use the Import Oracle Records Into Map dialog box to import objects from
Oracle using a query based on Location or Display Properties, or by defining
an SQL condition.
Oracle Service And Schema Shows the connected service and schema.
Connect Displays the Oracle Spatial Connection dialog box (OSE) (page 1166),
where you can connect to an Oracle service and schema.
Define Condition Use this area to define both the list of features to import
and the import condition.
Select Features Select the feature tables to be included in the condition
definitions. Right-click any feature table in the list to display the Select All
option.
Zoom Feature Extents Zoom to the extents of the objects in the feature tables.
Location Select a set of records to import, based on the location of objects in
the drawing. In the Location Condition dialog box (OSE) (page 1165), select the
Boundary Type and the Selection Type. Click Define and then draw the
boundary in the drawing.
Attributes Select records based on the values of one or more attributes in the
feature table. In the Attribute Value Condition dialog box (OSE) (page 1161),
select the Column, the Operator, and the Value to specify the attribute(s).
SQL Select records based on an SQL query. In the SQL Condition dialog box
(OSE) (page 1171), type or paste an SQL condition statement.
1164 | Chapter 27 OSE Dialog Boxes
And/Or And specifies that both conditions must be met for the object to be
imported. Or specifies that either condition can be met for the object to be
imported.
Import Settings Use this area to manage current and saved import settings.
Name Select one of the saved settings files from the list to apply the settings
to this session.
Save Displays the Save Settings dialog box (OSE) (page 1167)
View SQL Statement Translates the defined conditions to an SQL statement,
and shows the statement in the View SQL Statement dialog box (OSE) (page
1172).
Condition Definitions This area displays the condition definitions in a tree
form. You can select one of the conditions and edit or delete it.
Edit Opens the appropriate edit condition dialog box for the selected
condition.
Delete Deletes the selected condition.
Clear All Clears the Condition Definitions area.
Show If a location condition is selected, displays the area of a location
condition in the drawing.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Location Condition dialog box (OSE)
Use the Location Condition dialog box to select a set of objects for import.
Location Definition
Boundary Type Select the Boundary Type (rectangle, circle, fence, etc.).
Selection Type Select the Selection Type (crossing or inside).
Define Hides the dialog box so that you can draw the boundary in the drawing.
Show Displays the area of the location condition in the drawing.
Location Condition dialog box (OSE) | 1165
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Lock Management dialog box (OSE)
Use the Lock Management dialog box to view the current locks and delete
them if you have the appropriate permissions.
Lock Summary Shows the locks and displays the login name of the user who
has locked the objects.
Delete Locks Without User Names Clears locks left over by a system crash
or other interruption.
Delete Selected Lock Deletes the currently selected lock.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Oracle Spatial Connection dialog box (OSE)
Use the Oracle Spatial Connection dialog box to connect to an Oracle service
and choose a schema.
Oracle Connection
User Name Enter the user name assigned by your database administrator.
Password Enter your password. If you do not know your password, contact
your database administrator.
Service Enter the name of the database service to connect to. You can select
a service from the list if you have connected to the service before from within
Autodesk Map 3D.
Connect Connect to the Oracle service. If the connection is successful, the
list of available schemas is displayed in the Schema Selection box.
Schema Selection Lists the last five selected schemas. The most recently
accessed schema is at the top of the list, the least recently accessed is at the
bottom of the list. Select the schema to use. Click Select. If the schema does
not appear in this list, click Browse All.
1166 | Chapter 27 OSE Dialog Boxes
Validate The Schema Validate your schema to ensure it is correct and
complete. If you are sure your schema is correct, you can save time by
unchecking this option.
Browse All Displays the Select Schema for Connection dialog box (OSE) (page
1171), where you can select the schema to connect to.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Save Settings dialog box (OSE)
Use the Save Settings dialog box to save the current settings in the Import
Oracle Records Into Map dialog box (OSE) (page 1164) to a table in the schema,
so that you can reuse them.
Name Enter a name for the settings. Click Save.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Schema Adminstration dialog box (OSE)
Use the Schema Administration dialog box to map features to layers and to
manage indexes.
NOTE If you plan to share this Oracle database with users using Autodesk Map
6, create the feature tables using Autodesk Map 6. Autodesk Map 6 and later
release of Autodesk Map can use feature tables created by Autodesk Map 6.
However, Autodesk Map 6 cannot use tables created by later releases of Autodesk
Map.
Oracle Service And Schema Shows the connected service and schema.
Connect Displays the Oracle Spatial Connection dialog box (OSE) (page 1166),
where you can connect to an Oracle service and schema.
Feature Name And Properties Use this grid to create and edit feature
definitions.
Save Settings dialog box (OSE) | 1167
Feature Click the feature name cell to edit it. You can edit the definitions that
have not yet been used to create an Oracle feature table. Feature definitions
with existing, corresponding tables are grayed out and cannot be edited or
deleted. To add a new feature definition, click the blank row at the bottom.
Table Name of the table to be created in Oracle. You can change this name.
SRID The coordinate system ID. To maintain coordinate system information,
enter a valid coordinate system ID. For a list of valid IDs, refer to the Oracle
MDSYS.CS_SRS table. For additional information on using and defining SRIDs,
refer to your Oracle Spatial User Guide.
Layers Enter the name of a layer or click [...] to see the list of available layers.
Set Attributes Displays the Attribute Selection dialog box (OSE) (page 1161)
where you can select attributes for inclusion in the currently selected feature.
Delete Deletes the selected feature. To select a feature, click the left column.
Maintain Feature Definitions
Save Feature Metadata Saves the feature definition information you have
entered and creates metadata tables in the Oracle schema. Note that if you
change a feature's name or delete a feature, these actions take place
immediately and do not require that you click Save Feature Metadata.
Create Feature Tables Takes the contents of the metadata tables and creates
the Oracle tables and columns.
Locking Controls the locking behavior for the current schema.
Enable Schema Locking Select this option to turn on locking for the current
schema. Clear it to disable locking.
Manage Locks Displays the Lock Management dialog box (OSE) (page 1166)
which lists the current locks, and allows you to delete them if you have the
appropriate permissions.
Schema Management Use this area to administer indexes and extents.
Drop Indexes Displays the Select Features to Drop Indexes dialog box (OSE)
(page 1170) where you can specify the features for which you want to delete
indexes.
Create Indexes Displays the Select Features to Create Indexes dialog box (OSE)
(page 1169) where you can specify the features for which you want to create
indexes.
1168 | Chapter 27 OSE Dialog Boxes
Update Extents Displays the Select Features dialog box (OSE) (page 1169) where
you can specify the features that determine the extents of the area to be
indexed.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Select Feature Tables dialog box (OSE)
Use the Select Feature Tables dialog box to specify the feature tables to enable
for export.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Select Feature Select the features to enable for export.
Right-click any feature table in the list to display the Select All option.
Select Features dialog box (OSE)
Use the Select Features To Update Extents dialog box to specify the features
that determine the extents of the area to be indexed.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Select Features Select the features to determine the extents.
Right-click any feature in the list to display the following options: Select All,
Clear All.
Select Features to Create Indexes dialog box (OSE)
Use this dialog box to to create spatial indexes for selected features. A spatial
index references a particular item of data to a specific location in the drawing.
You must create spatial indexes before you can use a location query to import
objects from the Oracle database.
Select Feature Tables dialog box (OSE) | 1169
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Select Features Select the features for which to create a spatial index.
Right-click any feature in the list to display the following options: Select All,
Clear All.
A new R-tree spatial index will be created for each selected feature, replacing
the old index, if there was one.
Select Features to Drop Indexes dialog box (OSE)
Use this dialog box to remove the indexes for selected features.
Dropping indexes can speed up export. However, you will need to recreate
the indexes later if you want to import using a location condition or if you
add a new object outside of the existing index area.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Select Features Select the features for which you want to remove the spatial
index.
Right-click any feature in the list to display the following options: Select All,
Clear All.
Select Features to Update Extents dialog box (OSE)
Use the Select Features To Update Extents dialog box to specify the features
that determine the extents of the area to be indexed.
This will replace the current extents with the extents of the selected features.
You can continue, but you may have to wait for Autodesk Map 3D to
recalculate the indexes for the new extents. To keep the existing extents, click
Cancel.
If you are managing the USER_SDO_GEOM_METADATA view yourself, for
example, by using an 'area of interest' extents, you should not use the Update
Extents option because it overwrites the values in
USER_SDO_GEOM_METADATA.
1170 | Chapter 27 OSE Dialog Boxes
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Select Features Select the features to determine the extents.
Right-click any feature in the list to display the following options: Select All,
Clear All.
Select Layers dialog box (OSE)
Use the Select Layers dialog box to specify the layers that make up the currently
selected feature.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Layers Select the layers to include in the feature. The layers are sorted in
ascending order. Layers already selected by other feature definitions are
excluded from this list.
Right-click any layer in the list to display the following options: Select All,
Clear All.
Select Schema for Connection dialog box (OSE)
Use the Select Schema For Connection dialog box to choose a schema from
the list of those available to you.
Available Schemas Lists all the schemas available to you. Select the schema
to connect to. Click Select.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
SQL Condition dialog box (OSE)
Use the SQL Condition dialog box to write SQL or to paste SQL from another
application, such as SQL+, during the process of building an import condition.
Select Layers dialog box (OSE) | 1171
Enter the condition (or paste the condition portion of a statement; do not paste
the complete statement) and click OK.
When you click OK, the SQL is added to the Condition Definitions area of
the Import Records dialog box.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
Unsaved Feature Definitions dialog box (OSE)
This warning message appears because you have made changes to feature
definitions and are trying to close the Schema Administration dialog box
without saving them.
You can continue, but you will lose those changes. To keep the changes, click
Cancel and then click Save Feature Metadata.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
View SQL Statement dialog box (OSE)
This dialog shows the SQL statement.
SQL Statement Displays the SQL statement. You can copy the text of the
statement, but you cannot edit it or paste text into it.
NOTE Autodesk Map 3D offers a new way of using data from an Oracle database.
See Using Features from an Oracle Feature Source (page 226). However the Oracle
Spatial (OSE) method is still supported.
1172 | Chapter 27 OSE Dialog Boxes
Other Dialog Boxes
28
In this chapter
■ ADETEXTLOC (Map Labelpoint
Location command)
■ Autodesk Map Messages dialog
box
■ Browse/Search dialog box
■ Create Centroids dialog box
■ Data Expression dialog box
■ Define New Object Data Table
dialog box
■ Define Object Data dialog box
■ Generate Data Links dialog box
■ New Layer dialog box
■ Select Block dialog box
■ Select Blocks dialog box
■ Select Data dialog box - Query
■ Select dialog box
■ Select Drawings to Attach dialog
box
■ Select Features dialog box
■ Select Layer dialog box
■ Select Layers dialog box
■ Select Property dialog box
1173
■ Select SQL Column dialog box
■ SQL Expression dialog box
1174 | Chapter 28 Other Dialog Boxes
ADETEXTLOC (Map Labelpoint Location command)
Use this command to specify a new label point for an object.
An object's label point is used as the reference point when you add text to an
object during property alteration. By default, the label point is the centroid
of the object. Use this command to specify a different label point.
Respond to the prompts:
Select object: Use any object selection method.
Pick new text location <X,Y>: Enter new X and Y coordinates, separated by
a comma.
To use this label point when inserting text during a property alteration, choose
LABELPT from the Insert Point list in the Define Text dialog box.
Autodesk Map Messages dialog box
This dialog box displays information and error messages. Use the scroll bars
to view other messages.
To view additional information about a message, select the message and click
Advanced >>.
Advanced information includes the following:
Message Diagnostics Displays additional information about the selected error
condition, and the error code for the condition.
Statement Details Displays additional information about errors in SQL
statement syntax or expression syntax.
Browse/Search dialog box
Use this dialog box to display preview images of drawings, open drawings,
and search for files. Use the browser to search for files across multiple
directories on a single drive or on multiple drives.
The Browse tab displays small bitmap images of drawings in the specified
directory. You can sort the preview images by file type.
ADETEXTLOC (Map Labelpoint Location command) | 1175
Browse tab
File Name Displays the name of the currently selected drawing.
Directories Displays the names of the directories on the current drive.
Drives Displays the names of the available drives.
List Files of Type Specifies file types to browse for, including drawing files
(DWG), drawing interchange format files (DXF), and drawing template files
(DWT).
Size Changes the size of the preview images. The options are Small, Medium,
and Large.
Network Displays the Map Network Drive dialog box (a Windows system
window) for connecting to networked drives
Search tab
Files Displays a list of files that meet the search criteria.
Search Pattern Specifies a pattern to search for in file name, based on file
type. For example, you can enter floor* to search for all files that begin with
"floor" and are of the file type specified.
This option handles wild-card characters in the following way: if the search
string does not contain path separators, the search attempts to match either
the full path or just the file name portion of the path.
File Types Specifies the type of file through which AutoCAD searches.
Date Filter
Controls whether AutoCAD searches forward or backward from the specified
time or date.
Time
Specifies the time from which AutoCAD searches forward or backward.
Date
Specifies the date from which AutoCAD searches. The specified date must
be 1/1/80 or later
Search Location
Specifies which drives and paths AutoCAD searches.
Drive
Lists all currently attached drives.
1176 | Chapter 28 Other Dialog Boxes
All Drives
Lists all local hard drives, including removable and network drives.
Path
Lists directories.
Open Opens the selected file.
Search Begins searching for the named file according to the search location
information. Changes to Stop Search once the search begins.
Create Centroids dialog box
Use the Create Centroids dialog box to create centroids in the middle of
selected closed polylines or polygons, and move any object data or SQL link
data from the closed object to the centroid.
When you use this feature, Autodesk Map 3D checks that the selected polygons
and closed polylines are clean; that is, that the lines do not intersect each
other, and that the closed object has an area greater than 0. Centroids are
created with a Z value of 0.
If the closed object has holes, the centroid will be placed in the center of the
enclosed area, regardless of whether it falls within a hole or not. For a 'figure
eight' polygon, Autodesk Map 3D will create one centroid.
Create Centroids In
Select the polylines or polygons for which you want to create centroids.
All Closed Objects
Create centroids for all polygons and closed polylines.
Selected Only
Create centroids only for selected polygons and polylines. Click Select
Objects or Quick Select to select the polylines and polygons.
Creation Options
Specify where to create the centroids and what point or block to use for
centroids.
Create on Layer
Specify the layer for the new centroids. Click the down arrow to select from
a list of layers in the drawing. If the layer you want is not listed, it may be
Create Centroids dialog box | 1177
frozen or locked. To create the centroids on a new layer, click Create On
Layer.
Create Using
To create centriods as points, select ACAD_POINT. To create centroids using
an existing block, click the down arrow and select the name of the block.
See also:
■ To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines (page 581)
Data Expression dialog box
Select a data location.
Attribute To use data in an attribute, select Attribute. Select the attribute from
the Attributes list. To view attributes in a different block, select the block from
the Blocks list.
Object Data To use data in an object data table, select Object Data. Select the
field from the Object Data Fields list. To view fields in a different table, select
the table from the Tables list.
Database Link To use data in link data stored on an object, select Database
Link. Select the column from the Key Columns list. To view columns in a
different link template, select the link template from the list.
Define New Object Data Table dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a new object data table or to modify an existing
table.
■ To add a data field, enter a new Field Name in the Field Definition section.
Enter the information for the new data field. When you finish, click Add.
■ To edit an existing field, select it from the Object Data Fields list. Edit the
information in the Field Definition section. When you finish, click Update.
Table Name If you are modifying an existing table, the name of the table
appears in the box.
If you are creating a new table, enter a name for the table. A table name cannot
include spaces. It must start with an alphanumeric character.
1178 | Chapter 28 Other Dialog Boxes
NOTE Do not use a table name that is already used in another drawing, unless
this table will have the same field definitions as that table. If two source drawings
have tables with the same name but different definitions, Autodesk Map 3D uses
the table definition in the first drawing that is activated, and data from the second
table is not available.
Object Data Fields Use the Object Data Fields area to select a data field to
update or to delete a field.
The Object Data Fields list displays all data fields in the selected table.
Note that if two source drawings have a table with the same name, Autodesk
Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate.
■ To edit a data field, select its name in the list. Information about the field
appears in the Field Definition section. Change any information. Click
Update.
■ To delete a field, select its name in the list. Click Delete.
■ To delete all the fields in the list, click Delete All.
Field Definition
Use the Field Definition area to change information about an existing field
or to specify information for a new field.
To change information about an existing field, select its name in the Object
Data Fields list. Information about the field appears in the Field Definition
area. Change any information. Click Update.
To add a new field, enter a new name in the Field Name box. Enter information
about the field. Click Add.
NOTE Before you add a field to an existing object data table, be sure all drawings
that use this table are attached and active. Objects in active drawings are
automatically updated to include the new field and are assigned the default value
for the field. If an object that uses this table is not in an active drawing when the
table is modified, the data attached to the object is not modified.
Field Name
Enter a name for the data field.
The name cannot contain any spaces. It must start with an alphanumeric
character.
Type
Select a data type.
Define New Object Data Table dialog box | 1179
Integer
An integer between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647
Character
Any characters, up to 132 characters
Point
Three real numbers separated by commas representing the X, Y, and Z values
of a point
Real
A real number between -1.7E308 and 1.7E308
If you select Integer, numbers are rounded to the nearest whole number.
Description
Enter a description for the data field.
This description appears in the Object Data Fields list.
Default
Specify a default value for the data field.
The value must match the data type you selected above.
Enter the value you will use most often when you assign this data field to
an object.
Before you modify a table
■ All source drawings that use the table should be attached and active.
If a drawing is not attached and active, the table definition will not be
updated for that drawing. If two source drawings have tables with the
same name but different definitions, this operation affects the table
definition in the first drawing that is activated, and data from the second
table is not available.
■ Do not perform a Draw mode query.
If you have already performed a Draw mode query since you opened
the current drawing, you must save the objects back to their source
drawings or close the current drawing and reopen it.
You can modify newly defined tables until you perform a save operation
(either saving objects back to source drawings or saving the current drawing).
Once you perform a save operation, the table can be modified only by a
Superuser. Use the User Login dialog box (page 1276) command to log in as a
Superuser, or contact your system administrator.
1180 | Chapter 28 Other Dialog Boxes
See also:
■ To create an object data table (page 158)
Define Object Data dialog box
Use this dialog box to create object data tables and data fields. Object data
tables store information about the objects in your drawings.
Create an object data table by entering a name for the table and defining the
fields in the table.
Table list Lists all tables in the current drawing.
To view the object data fields in a table, select the table name from the list.
Object Data Fields Lists the fields in the selected table.
Note that if two source drawings have a table with the same name, Autodesk
Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate.
To view Field Definition information for a field, select the field.
Field Definition
Displays the values for the selected field.
Field Name
displays the name of the field.
Data Type
displays the type of information that can be entered in the field.
Description
displays the description assigned to the field.
Default
displays the default value assigned to the field.
To change any values, click Modify.
New Table Display the Define Object Data Table dialog box, where you can
create a new table and define new object data fields.
Modify Display the Modify Object Data Table dialog box, where you can
modify the selected table and define or delete object data fields.
You can modify newly defined tables until you perform a save operation
(either saving objects back to source drawings or saving the current drawing).
Once you perform a save operation, the table can be modified only by a
Define Object Data dialog box | 1181
Superuser. Use the MAPLOGIN command to log in as a Superuser, or contact
your system administrator.
Rename Display the Rename Table dialog box, where you can enter a new
name for the selected table.
NOTE If you rename a table, be sure to update any queries that call that table.
Delete Delete the selected table.
NOTE If any data from this table is attached to objects, the data is deleted from
those objects when you remove the table.
Before you delete a table
■ All source drawings that use the table should be attached and active.
If a drawing is not attached and active, the object data from the table is
not removed from that drawing.
■ Do not perform a Draw mode query.
If you have already performed a Draw mode query since you opened the
current drawing, you must save the objects back to their source drawings or
close the current drawing and reopen it.
This dialog box displays information about the tables in your drawing.
Some of the tables on this list contain information that Autodesk Map 3D
needs. If you select one of these needed tables, you cannot change the
information or remove or rename the table. You can view the information.
See also:
■ To create an object data table (page 158)
Generate Data Links dialog box
If you have text in your drawing that matches information in a table, use this
dialog to automatically create links based on the matched information. You
can create links to an external database table or to an object data table stored
with the current drawing.
Select a linkage type. Set options for that type. After you click OK, you are
prompted to select the blocks, text, enclosed blocks, or enclosed text.
1182 | Chapter 28 Other Dialog Boxes
NOTE You cannot create links to objects on layers that are locked, frozen, or
turned off.
Block If you are creating links to blocks or enclosed blocks, select the name
of the block.
Keys and Tags For each key field in the link template, select a tag from the
block attribute. You can assign a tag to only one key field. (If you are creating
links to enclosed text, skip this step.)
Use Insertion Point as Label Point Select to use the insertion point of the
text or block as the default label point for the object.
Table/Link Template Select the table or the link template for the database
table containing the matching data. The complete record is linked to the
object.
■ If you link data from blocks or enclosed blocks to an object data table, the
attribute data is linked only if attribute tags match field names in the table.
■ If you link data from blocks or enclosed blocks to an external table, use
the Data Links area to specify which attribute tags correspond to the key
fields.
■ If you link data to text or enclosed text, you must select a table with only
one field or a link template with only one key field. The remaining controls
are grouped in the following areas:
Data Links
Specify whether you are linking to object data or an external database.
Create Object Data Records
Create records in an object data table stored with the current drawing. These
new records are attached to the objects.
Create Database Links
Create links to an external database table. Select a Database Validation
option to specify whether to link only to existing records or to create new
records.
Linkage Type
Select a linkage type.
After you click OK, you are prompted to select the blocks, text, enclosed blocks,
or enclosed text.
Generate Data Links dialog box | 1183
Blocks
Create links from block attribute data. The links are created on the blocks
themselves.
Text
Create links from text. The link data is stored on the text object.
Enclosed Blocks
Create links from block attribute data. The links are created on the polyline
that encloses the block. Blocks that are not enclosed by a polyline are not
linked.
Enclosed Text
Create links from text that lies within a closed polyline. The links are created
on the closed polyline that encloses the text. Text that is not enclosed by
a polyline is not linked.
Database Validation
If you are creating links to an external table, select a validation option.
None
Create links without checking the database.
Link Must Exist
Create a link only where the text or attribute tag value matches an existing
record's key field value. If you are creating links to an Excel spreadsheet,
the selected link template must point to a named range and not to a
worksheet.
Create If New
Create a new record in the table if no existing record matches. The new
record will have the key field values filled in, but other fields will be blank.
See also:
■ To automatically attach data to objects (page 700)
■ To automatically link records to objects using text or block attribute data
(page 324)
New Layer dialog box
The new layer name may not contain any of the following characters.
1184 | Chapter 28 Other Dialog Boxes
<>/\:?*|,="`"
See also:
■ To import SDF 2 files (page 375)
■ To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines (page 581)
Select Block dialog box
Click on the block to select it.
Click OK.
Select Blocks dialog box
Select the blocks you want by clicking on them.
When you finish selecting blocks, click OK.
Select Data dialog box - Query
This dialog box lists data in the current drawing. Select the type of data to
include:
Attribute The Attribute Tags list displays the attributes for the current block.
To see the attribute tags for a different block, select the block from the Block
list.
Object Data The Object Data Fields list displays the data fields for the current
table. To see the fields for a different table, select the table from the Table list.
Note that if two source drawings have a table with the same name, Autodesk
Map 3D uses only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate.
Database Link The Key Columns list displays the key columns for the current
link template. To see the key columns for a different link template, select the
link template from the link template list.
Select the data value and click OK.
Select Block dialog box | 1185
See also:
■ To overlay two topologies (page 873)
Select dialog box
Select from the list of available values.
Some types of values are available only if they are in an active drawing.
See also:
■ To retrieve drawing objects based on their properties (page 806)
■ To select an image by pressing Shift + left-click (page 300)
■ To overlay two topologies (page 873)
Select Drawings to Attach dialog box
Use this dialog box to add source drawings to your current drawing set.
Select the file names of drawings to attach. Click Add. You can change the
drive or folder and continue to add files to the Selected Drawings list. When
you finish, click OK.
Look In Select a drive alias from the list. Autodesk Map 3D creates a drive
alias for drive C. You must create drive aliases for all other drives that you use.
If the drive or folder you want is not listed, click Create/Edit Aliases to
display the Drive Alias Administration dialog box where you define a new
drive alias.
To open a preview window that displays a preview of the selected drawing,
click Preview. In some instances, such as if a drawing is locked, the Preview
window is blank.
File List Lists all drawings in the current directory.
Filter Use wild-card characters to filter the display of file names. For example,
enter t* to view only file names starting with the letter t.
Add Add the selected drawing names to the Selected Drawings list.
1186 | Chapter 28 Other Dialog Boxes
Remove Remove the selected drawing names from the Selected Drawings list.
Selected Drawings To use these drawings, click OK.
You must have Alter Drawing Set privileges to attach and detach drawings.
Change privileges using the User Administration dialog box (page 1274).
See also:
■ Attaching Drawings (page 128)
Select Features dialog box
Select the features you want by clicking on them.
When you finish selecting features, click OK.
Select Layer dialog box
Select the layer you want by clicking on it.
Click OK.
Select Layers dialog box
Select the layers you want by clicking on them.
Select Property dialog box
Select the property and click OK.
See also:
■ To alter retrieved objects based on their properties (page 824)
Select Features dialog box | 1187
Select SQL Column dialog box
To see the columns for a different link template, select the link template from
the list.
Select the column you want and click OK.
SQL Expression dialog box
Select a column in an external database.
To see columns from a different database table, select the link template for
the table from the Link Templates list.
In most cases, the Link Template list includes only link templates for active
source drawings. If the link template you want is not listed, be sure it is defined
in the source drawing, and the appropriate data source is attached and
connected.
If you are using a command that involves topology, the Link Template list
includes only link templates for the drawing where the topology is loaded. If
you loaded the topology from source drawings, the list displays link templates
defined in the source drawing; if you loaded the topology from the current
drawing, the list displays link templates in the current drawing.
1188 | Chapter 28 Other Dialog Boxes
Polygon Object Dialog
Boxes 29
In this chapter
■ MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON
(Convert Polylines to Polygons
command)
■ MAPUSEMPOLYGON
■ MPEDIT (Edit Polygon command)
■ MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command)
■ Create Polygons From Topology
dialog box
■ Polygon Fill Properties dialog box
1189
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON (Convert Polylines to
Polygons command)
Use this command to convert an existing closed polyline to a polygon.
Respond to the prompts:
Select objects: Select the polylines to convert. Press Enter.
Each closed polyline in the selection set is converted into a polygon. If the
polyline belongs to a group, only the first (outermost) polyline in the group
is converted. Other polylines in the group are copied into the polygon as
additional boundaries. The polygon is automatically rebalanced.
When objects are converted to polygons, they use the default color or hatch
set by the To change the default setting for importing polygons (page 652).
MAPUSEMPOLYGON
Use this command to change the default setting for how polygon are imported.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter new value for MAPUSEMPOLYGON: Do one of the following:
■ Enter ON to turn on the use of mpolygons. Polygons imported into
Autodesk Map 3D are created using the polygon object.
■ Enter OFF to turn off the use of mpolygons. Polygons imported into
Autodesk Map 3D are creating using the polyline object.
See also:
■ To change the default setting for importing polygons (page 652)
MPEDIT (Edit Polygon command)
Use this command to modify a polygon object.
You can add, delete, and move polygon boundaries, edit nodes, convert a
boundary to an object, change a boundary type, change the fill color or pattern,
and rebalance the polygon.
1190 | Chapter 29 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes
Respond to the prompts:
Select polygon: Use any object selection method.
Enter an option [Add/Delete/Move/Edit/disConnect/Boundary
type/Fill/Rebalance/eXit]: Enter the letter of the option you want.
Add
Enter a to add a boundary to the polygon. Respond to the prompt:
Select new boundary:
Select the object to use as the new boundary. The object can be a polygon,
rectangle, circle, or another mpolygon.
The new boundary is added to the polygon.
Delete
Enter d to delete a boundary from the polygon. Respond to the prompt:
Select boundary:
Select the boundary to delete from the current polygon. If it is a complex
polygon, you can select additional boundaries. When you finish, press
Enter.
The selected boundaries are deleted from the polygon. Enter r to rebalance
the polygon.
Move
Enter m to move a boundary. Respond to the prompts:
Select boundary:
Select the boundary to move. If it is a complex polygon, you can select
additional boundaries. When you finish selecting boundaries, press Enter.
Select Basepoint or displacement:
Select the starting point for the move.
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>:
Select the ending point for the move.
The selected boundaries are moved according to the distance and direction
between the basepoint and the second point of displacement.
Edit
Enter e to edit a boundary. Respond to the prompts:
Select boundary:
Select the boundary to edit.
MPEDIT (Edit Polygon command) | 1191
Enter a node editing option [Next/Previous/Remove/Insert/Move/eXit]:
Enter the letter of the option you want.
■ Enter n to move to the next node.
■ Enter p to move to the previous node.
■ Enter r to remove the current node. You cannot remove a node if the
resulting new line would cross another boundary in the current polygon.
■ Enter i to insert a node before the current node. Note that you cannot
insert a node if the resulting new line would cross another boundary in
the current polygon.
■ Enter m to move the current node. You cannot move a node so that the
current boundary crosses another boundary in the current polygon.
■ Enter x to exit node-editing mode.
disConnect
Enter c to disconnect a boundary from the polygon, but preserve the boundary
object. Respond to the prompt:
Select boundary:
Select the boundary to disconnect.
The boundary is deleted from the polygon, but remains in the drawing as
a polyline or circle object.
If you disconnect a boundary that has nested boundaries, all the nested
boundaries are also disconnected.
Boundary type
Enter b to change the boundary type for a boundary. Respond to the prompts:
Select boundary:
Select the boundary whose type you want to change.
Enter boundary type [Outer/Inner/Annotation] <Outer>:
Enter o to make the selected boundary an outer boundary, enter i to the
make it an inner boundary, or enter a to make it an annotation boundary.
Annotation boundaries behave the same as inner boundaries, but have no
effect on area calculations.
Fill Enter f to change the fill for the polygon. This displays the Polygon Fill
Properties dialog box (page 1195), where you can select a hatch pattern or a
gradient fill.
1192 | Chapter 29 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes
Rebalance Enter r to rebalance the polygon. The polygon is rebalanced so the
nesting order follows an alternating outer/inner/outer order.
Undo Enter u to undo the last action.
eXit Enter x to exit the mpedit command.
MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command)
Use this command to split an existing polygon object into two new polygon
objects. The original polygon object is deleted.
You can draw a new line to split the polygon, or you can selecting an existing
line.
The existing polygon is split into two new polygons.
If the polygon has internal boundaries, your split line must not cross one of
the internal boundaries, nor can it touch one of the vertices of an internal
boundary.
This split is allowed. This split is not allowed because it This split is not allowed because
crosses an internal boundary. it touches one of the vertices of
the internal boundary.
MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command) | 1193
You can choose to copy data from the original mpolygon to the two new
mpolygons, or you can delete the data.
Respond to the prompts:
Select the mpolygon to split: Use any object selection method.
Would you like to Draw or Select the line for split? [Draw/Select]: Enter
the letter of the option you want.
Draw
Enter d to draw the line. Respond to the prompts:
Specify start point or [eXit] <eXit>:
Select the starting point for the divider line.
Specify next point or [Arc/Undo]:
Do one of the following:
■ Select the next point for the divider line.
■ Enter a to draw an arc. For more information on drawing arcs, see the
AutoCAD help.
■ Enter u to undo the last action.
When you finish drawing the line, press Enter.
Select
Enter s to select an existing polyline to use as the dividing line. Respond to
the prompts:
Select objects:
Select the polyline you want. When you finish selecting polylines, press
Enter.
Would you like to copy data from the original mpolygon to the split mpolygons?
[Yes/No]:
Do one of the following:
■ Enter y to copy object data or external database links from the original
mpolygon to both of the new mpolygons.
■ Enter n to delete the data.
See also:
■ To split a polygon object (page 643)
1194 | Chapter 29 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes
Create Polygons From Topology dialog box
You can create polygons directly from a polygon topology.
Name Select the topology to convert. Click Load Topology to select and load
the topology if you need to.
Layer Select the layer on which you want to place the converted polygon(s).
Click Layer Settings to create a new layer and set its properties.
Group Complex Polygons Create a single polygon from nested polygons in
the topology.
Copy Object Data From Centroid Copy object data from the topology
polygons to the new polygon objects.
Copy Database Links From Centroid Copy database links from the polygons
to the new mpolygon objects.
See also:
■ To convert a polygon topology to polygons (page 648)
Polygon Fill Properties dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the fill color and pattern to use for polygon
objects. You can choose from a variety of colors including true colors and
colors from imported color books. You can also define the pattern type, pattern
properties, and attributes for hatch, solid, and gradient fill.
The dialog box has the following tabs:
The Hatch tab defines the appearance of the hatch pattern (or solid color) to
be used to fill polygons.
The Gradient tab defines the appearance of the gradient fill to be used to fill
polygons.
Hatch tab
Pattern Type Sets the pattern type. Choose one of the following:
■ Predefined — Specifies a predefined pattern.
■ User Defined — Creates a pattern of lines based on the current linetype in
your drawing.
Create Polygons From Topology dialog box | 1195
■ Custom — Specifies a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT file that
you have added to the search path.
Pattern Name Lists the available predefined patterns. Autodesk Map 3D stores
the selected pattern in the HPNAME system variable. The Pattern option is
available only if you set Type to Predefined. Click [...] to display preview images
for all predefined patterns at once.
Angle Specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the
current UCS.
Scale Expands or contracts a predefined or custom pattern.
Relative To Paper Space Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units.
Using this option, you can easily display hatch patterns at a scale that is
appropriate for your layout. This option is available only from a layout.
Fill Color Click the down arrow to select from a list of colors. To choose from
a greater variety of colors, including true colors and colors from imported
color books, choose the Select Color Option.
Gradient tab
One Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between darker shades
and lighter tints of one color.
Two Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors.
Color Swatch Specifies the color for the gradient fill. Click [...] to display the
Select Color dialog box, where you can select an AutoCAD Index color, true
color, or color book color.
Shade and Tint Slider Specifies the tint (the selected color mixed with white)
or shade (the selected color mixed with black) of a color to be used for a
gradient fill of one color.
Centered Specifies a gradient configuration that is symmetrical. If this option
is not selected, the gradient fill is shifted up and to the left, creating the illusion
of a light source to the left of the object.
Angle Specifies the angle of the gradient fill. The specified angle is relative to
the current UCS.
Gradient Patterns Select one of the nine fixed patterns for gradient fills.
For more information on setting hatch options, see the AutoCAD help.
1196 | Chapter 29 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes
See also:
■ To add boundaries (page 638)
Polygon Fill Properties dialog box | 1197
Query Dialog Boxes
30
NOTE Query functionality applies only to drawing objects. In this chapter
■ Alternate Font dialog box
■ Change Category dialog box
■ Data Condition dialog box
■ Define New Category dialog box
■ Define Query dialog box
■ Define Range Table dialog box
■ Define Text dialog box
■ Hatch Options dialog box
■ Load Internal Query dialog box
■ Location Condition dialog box
■ New Range Table dialog box
■ Output Report Options dialog box
■ Property Condition dialog box
■ Query Library Administration
dialog box
■ Rename Category dialog box
■ Rename Range Table dialog box
■ Run Library Query dialog box
■ Save Current Query dialog box
■ Set Property Alterations dialog
box
■ SQL Condition History dialog box
1199
■ SQL Link Condition dialog box
■ Type SQL Condition dialog box
1200 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
Alternate Font dialog box
The font specified for a queried drawing object cannot be found. Select an
alternate font to use.
Change Category dialog box
Current Category displays the name of the category the query is currently
assigned to. (If you are changing the category for multiple queries, this area
may be blank.)
Select a category from the New Category list, and click OK. The query is
reassigned to the new category.
You can assign a query to only one category.
See also:
■ Using Query Library Categories (page 148)
Data Condition dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create or modify a data condition in a query.
A data condition searches data that you have attached to drawing objects.
Object Class / Object Properties / Database Link / Object Data / Attribute
options Select the data to query.
■ To search data associated with a object class, select Object Class. Select an
object class from the Class list. Select the property.
To search all subclasses of the selected object class, select Include Subclasses.
If this option is not selected, only data in objects tagged with the selected
object class is searched.
■ To search data stored in custom objects, select Object Properties. When
selected, you can choose from a list of all object types and properties
defined either in all source drawings or in the current drawing, depending
on whether the source or current drawing is queried.
Alternate Font dialog box | 1201
To search all subclasses of the selected object type and/or property, select
Include Subclasses. If this checkbox is cleared, the query will be limited.
It is recommended the user select Include Subclasses when running an
Object Properties query.
■ To search data in link data stored on an object, select Database Link. Select
the link template from the Link Templates list. Select the key column. Note
that this option searches only the link data stored on objects. To search
the database table, use an SQL condition.
■ To search data in an object data table, select Object Data. Select a table
from the Tables list. Select the object data field.
Note that if two source drawings have a table with the same name, Autodesk
Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate.
■ To search data in a block attribute, select Attribute. Select a block from the
Blocks list. Select the attribute tag.
NOTE The lists you select from (for example the Link Templates list and the Object
Data list) display only the information available in the source(s) you are querying.
For example, if you are querying database links in your source (attached) drawings,
the Link Templates list will display only the link templates in your source drawings.
Operator list Select an operator from the list.
Operator Description
= The value of the selected property or data is equal to the
value you enter the Value box.
> The value of the selected property or data is greater than
the value you enter the Value box.
>= The value of the selected property or data is greater than
or equal to the value you enter the Value box.
< The value of the selected property or data is less than the
value you enter the value box.
<= The value of the selected property or data is less than or
equal to the value you enter the value box.
1202 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
Operator Description
<> The value of the selected property or data is not equal to
the value you enter the Value box.
NOTE If you are querying database link data, only the = (equals) operator is
available.
Value box Specify the value to search for. You can use Wildcard Characters
(page 959).
To enter a value that includes a comma, such as an RGB color or a Colorbook
color, enclose the value in double quotes, for example, "255,255,255" or
"PANTONE(R) process coated,PANTONE Process Cyan C".
See also:
■ To retrieve drawing objects based on their object data (page 810)
Define New Category dialog box
Enter a new name in the New Category Name box. Click OK. Category names
cannot contain any spaces.
See also:
■ To add a category to the query library (page 149)
Define Query dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to define, modify, save, load, or execute queries.
The dialog box settings reflect the properties of the current query. If you
change a setting, you modify the current query. If you load a query from the
query library or from a file, you replace the current query.
Note the difference between pressing Execute Query and pressing OK:
Execute Query Saves dialog box settings and executes the current query.
Define New Category dialog box | 1203
OK Saves dialog box settings without executing. You also use this button if
you are creating an element for the Display Manager.
NOTE You can set several query options. See the Query tab of the Autodesk Map
Options dialog box (page 1254).
Current query
This area shows the conditions in your current query. You can edit, group, or
delete the conditions.
Current query list
Displays all conditions in the current query. If conditions have been
grouped, the group is indented and enclosed within parentheses. (Conditions
in a group are evaluated before conditions outside the group.)
■ To edit a condition, select it. Click Edit.
■ To group conditions, select the first and last condition that you want
in the group. Click Group.
■ To delete a condition, select it. Click Delete.
Edit
Edit the selected condition.
If you select more than one condition, Edit is unavailable.
You can also edit a condition by double-clicking it in the list.
Group
Group the selected conditions.
When you run the query, conditions inside the group are evaluated before
conditions outside the group.
The easiest way to specify a group is to select the first and last conditions
in the group and click Group. All conditions between the first and the last
selected conditions are included in the group and enclosed within
parentheses.
You can nest groups.
Ungroup
Ungroup the selected group.
To ungroup conditions, select the first or last condition in the group. Click
Ungroup.
Delete
Deletes the selected query condition.
1204 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
Clear Query
Delete all conditions in the list.
Clearing the query does not remove settings from the Set Property
Alterations dialog box or from the Output Report Options dialog box.
Query type
Use this area to create conditions for your query.
And/Or/Not options
Determines how the condition is combined with other conditions.
And specifies that both conditions must be met for the object to be included
in the query.
Or specifies that either condition can be met for the object to be included
in the query.
And Not specifies that the first condition must be met and the second
condition must not be met for the object to be included in the query.
Or Not specifies that either the first conditions can be met or the second
condition cannot be met for the object to be included in the query.
Location
Display the Location Condition dialog box (page 1213), where you can define
a condition based on the location of the object in relation to points you
specify.
For example, search for all objects that fall inside a circle or that cross a
line.
Property
Display the Property Condition dialog box (page 1218), where you can define
a condition based on the object's properties.
For example, search for all objects on a specified layer, all objects of a certain
color, or all text in a certain text style.
Data
Display the Data Condition dialog box (page 1201), where you can define a
condition based on object data attached to an object.
For example, if you attach a field named Pipe Diameter to several objects,
you can search for all objects where that field has a value of 10" or more.
For more information on defining and attaching data, see .
SQL
Display the SQL Link Condition dialog box (page 1228), where you can define
a condition based on the external data linked to an object.
For example, if you are trying to determine the best location for a new park
and you have linked data from a table containing information about the
Define Query dialog box | 1205
households, you can search for all parcels where the household has young
children.
NOTE Before you execute a query with a SQL condition, be sure the appropriate
data source is attached and connected.
Query mode
In this area, specify the type of query to run. Note that if you are creating an
element for the Display Manager, Draw is the only available option.
Preview
Preview the objects that match the query conditions, but don't actually pull
the objects into the current drawing.
When you redraw the screen, the objects will be gone. Property alterations
do not appear in a Preview mode query.
Draw
Get the objects that match the query and bring them into the current
drawing. If you are creating an element for the Display Manager, gets the
objects and adds them to the element.
If a property alteration has been defined, objects are modified as they are
copied into the current drawing.
You must have Draw Query privileges to perform a draw query. See To add
a new user (page 70).
Report
Execute the query and save the results in a report file.
To specify a template for the report, click Options to display the Output
Report Options dialog box (page 1216).
Property alterations are not reflected in the report.
Options
Display the Output Report Options dialog box (page 1216), where you specify
a template for the report. The Options button is available only if Report
query mode is selected.
NOTE For topology queries, the Options button is available with both Draw
and Report query modes.
Options
The Options area includes buttons for setting property alterations, saving the
query so you can execute it later, loading a query you've previously saved,
redrawing the screen, or setting options.
1206 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
If you are creating a element for a display map, not all of the options are
available.
Alter Properties check box
Determines whether the query executes the property alteration. If this is
not selected, property alterations are ignored when you execute the query.
Alter Properties button
Display the Set Property Alterations dialog box (page 1226), where you specify
how to modify objects that are found by the query.
Save
Display the Save Current Query dialog box (page 1224), where you save the
current query so you can run it later.
Load
Display the Load Internal Query dialog box (page 1213), where you load a
query that you've previously saved.
Redraw <
Redraw the screen to clear any previews.
Zoom Ext <
Display the Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box (page 1358), where you select
any active drawings in your drawing set. Autodesk Map 3D then zooms the
screen to the extents of the selected drawings.
Drawings
Display the Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box (page 1263), where you
can change which drawings are attached to the current drawing, and which
drawings are active for queries.
More
Display the Query tab of the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254),
where you change query options such as whether searches are case sensitive
and whether to preview text as an insertion point.
See also:
■ To create a query to retrieve information from attached drawings (page
799)
■
■ To query a topology (page 886)
Define Query dialog box | 1207
Define Range Table dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create, rename, or delete range tables.
A range table specifies a range of actions to take depending on the actual value
of object data or properties associated with drawing objects.
■ For property alteration, specify different alterations for a property
depending on the value of the property. For example, you could specify
that all buildings under two stories be colored blue, all buildings two stories
to ten stories be colored green, and all buildings above ten stories be colored
red.
■ For an output report, specify different actions to take depending on the
value of the data. For example, you could specify that if a lot is valued at
less than $10,000, report the value in the Land Value A column of your
database; if the lot is valued at over $10,000, report the value in the Land
Value B column.
You can create range tables and save them with the current drawing to use
again.
Range Table area Use this area to select an existing table, rename a table,
create a new table, or delete a table.
Range Table list Lists all tables in the current drawing.
To view tables, click the down arrow. Select the table you want.
Rename Display the Rename Range Table dialog box (page 1223), where you
can specify a new name for the current range table.
New Display the New Range Table dialog box, where you can save the current
table definitions to a new range table.
Remove Remove the current range table.
Be careful not to delete a range table used by your queries.
Current Range Table Definition area Use this area to view, edit, or delete
rows in the range table.
Current Range Table Definition list Displays all rows in the current range
table.
To edit or delete a row, select the row and click Edit or Delete.
1208 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
Edit Copy the selected row to the Condition section of the dialog box, where
you can modify it.
When you finish modifying the condition, click Add To List to update the
row in the Current Range Table Definition list.
Delete Delete the selected row.
Clear List Delete all rows from the current range table.
Expressions in the Current Range Table Definition list are evaluated from top
to bottom, that is, in the order you enter them. As soon as one condition is
evaluated as TRUE, Autodesk Map 3D stops evaluating, ignores the remaining
expressions, and returns the value associated with the TRUE condition in the
range table.
For example, assume you enter the following expressions:
If < 0 Return: Low
If < 15 Return: Medium
If < 30 Return: High
If < 45 Return: Very High
With a value of 20, the first condition evaluates to FALSE because 20 is not
less than 0. The second condition also evaluates to FALSE since 20 is not less
than 15. However, the third condition evaluates to TRUE since 20 is less than
30, and the value returned by the range table is High. The last condition,
although TRUE, is ignored.
Condition area Use this area to edit an existing row, or to create a new one.
■ To edit an existing row, select the row in the Current Range Table
Definition list and click Edit. When you finish, click Update.
■ To create a new condition, select an operator, specify an expression and a
return value, and click Add.
Operator list Select an operator from the list.
Operator Description
= The value of the selected property or data is equal to the value
you enter the Value box.
> The value of the selected property or data is greater than the
value you enter the Value box.
Define Range Table dialog box | 1209
Operator Description
>= The value of the selected property or data is greater than or equal
to the value you enter the Value box.
< The value of the selected property or data is less than the value
you enter the value box.
<= The value of the selected property or data is less than or equal to
the value you enter the value box.
/= The value of the selected property or data is not equal to the
value you enter the Value box.
OTHERWISE Specify the action to take none of the preceding conditions are
met.If you include an OTHERWISE condition, it must be at the
end of the list.
Expression Value box Enter a simple expression.
If an object matches the value of this expression, the object is affected by the
return value.
Return Value box Specify a return value for this condition.
The return value specifies what happens if the object matches the expression.
Enter a value or a simple expression. Do not enter a compound expression.
Add Add the current condition to the Current Range Table Definition list.
Update Update the selected condition in the Current Range Table Definition
list with the current condition.
See also:
■ To create a range table (page 830)
Define Text dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify text to add to all drawing objects found by the
query.
1210 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
Text Value Specify the text to add.
You can enter the text, or choose a variable by clicking Expression.
■ If you enter text in the box, that text is added to each object.
■ If you choose a variable, the text for each object is based on the value of
the variable.
For example, if you choose the property Elevation, the elevation is added as
text to each retrieved object.
If select a field from an object data table, the value in that field is added to
each object. If an object does not have a record attached from the selected
table, no text is added to the object.
Text Height Specify a text height.
If none is specified, text uses the Autodesk Map 3D default text height.
Insert Point
Specify an insertion point for the text.
Centroid
Insert text at the centroid of the object.
Labelpt
Insert text at the label point of the object.
The default location for the label point is the centroid of the object. To
change the location of the label point, use the ADETEXTLOC command.
Justification Specify the justification for the text. The list displays options
for center, middle, and right, or combinations of these with top (T), middle
(M), and bottom (B).
Text Style Enter a text style, or click Styles to select from a list of styles in the
active drawings.
Layer Enter a layer for the text, or click Layers to select from a list of layers
in the active drawings. If you enter a new layer name, the layer is created. To
easily hide or delete text, insert it on its own layer.
Color Specify a color for the text.
Enter a color name, or click Color Palette to select a color.
Rotation Enter a rotation value. Enter 0 for no rotation.
For example, enter 90 to rotate objects 90 degrees in the current direction.
(Use the DDUNITS command to view or change the current direction.)
Define Text dialog box | 1211
For each option, enter a value in the box, enter an expression or variable, or
select a value. For information on expressions and variables, see Expression
Evaluator (page 963).
See also:
■ Defining the Text Insertion Point (page 614)
■ To add text to retrieved drawing objects (page 834)
Hatch Options dialog box
Add a hatch pattern to drawing objects found by the query.
Pattern Enter a hatch pattern, or click Patterns to select from a list of hatch
patterns defined in the active drawings, or click Expression to use an expression
to specify the hatch pattern. If you leave the box empty, Autodesk Map 3D
uses a solid fill.
The box displays the selected hatch option. ISO hatch patterns are not
displayed.
Scale Specify a scale for the pattern. A small scale creates a smaller pattern
and takes longer to display and print.
Rotation Enter the rotation. Enter 0 for no rotation.
For example, enter 90 to rotate objects 90 degrees in the current direction.
(Use the DDUNITS command to view or change the current direction.)
Layer Enter a layer for the hatch, or click Layers to select from a list of layers
in the active drawings. If you enter a new layer name, the layer is created.
To easily hide or delete the hatch, insert it on its own layer.
Color Specify a color for the hatch.
Enter a color name, or click Color Palette, and select a color.
For each option, enter a value in the box or enter an expression or variable.
For example, to use a hatch pattern specified in the Hatch field of the Design
object data table, enter :hatch@design. For information on expressions and
variables, see Expression Evaluator (page 963).
You can set an option to determine whether the hatch object created by this
command is associative. See the Query tab of the Autodesk Map Options dialog
box (page 1254) and To have hatch created by property alteration be associative
(page 189).
1212 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
NOTE Use the DRAWORDER command to have objects appear on top of the
hatch.
See also:
■ To fill queried drawing objects with a hatch pattern (page 838)
Load Internal Query dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to load a previously saved query.
The definition of the loaded query appears in the Define Query dialog box.
Depending on the options you specified when you saved the query, it may
change the active drawings or load property alteration settings. You can modify
the query or click Execute Query to execute the query.
Category list Select a category to save your query in.
Use categories to organize queries. (When you run a query, you first select a
category, and then see all the queries in that category.)
If you have only a few queries, you can save them all in the same category.
Queries list Lists all the queries assigned to the selected category.
To load a query, choose it from the list. Click OK.
Selected Query display Displays the name and description of the selected
query.
See also:
■ Using a Query Library (page 149)
■ To edit a query saved with the current drawing (page 150)
Location Condition dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create or modify a location condition in a query.
Load Internal Query dialog box | 1213
A location condition finds drawing objects based on location relative to a
specified boundary. You can specify whether objects must be completely inside
the boundary or have any part inside the boundary.
For blocks or text objects, you can specify if their location is determined by
their insertion point or their bounding box. For hatch, solid, and raster objects,
you can specify if their location is determined by their area or their boundary.
See the Query tab of the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254).
Location Coordinates Displays the coordinates for the current location
condition.
Define < Displays your current drawing, where you can specify the points to
define the boundary.
Show < Shows the boundary of the condition you are editing.
To change the colors used to display the boundaries, use the Query tab on the
Autodesk Map Options dialog box.
Boundary Type
Select a boundary type.
All
Returns all objects in the active drawings.
Buffer Fence
Returns all objects within a specified distance from a fence.
Select a selection type. Click Define < to define the fence and the distance.
First Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the first point of the buffer fence,
or select the point.
Next Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the next point of the buffer fence,
or select the point. Press Enter when done entering points.
Bufferfence Width Enter the width of the buffer fence in the current unit.
Circle
Returns all objects in a defined circle.
Select a selection type. Click Define < to define the circle.
Center point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the center of the circle, or select
the point.
Radius Enter a number in the current unit.
Fence
Returns all objects that cross a defined line.
Select a selection type. Click Define < to define the fence.
A fence does not need to be closed and can cross itself.
1214 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
First Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the first point of the fence, or select
the point.
Next Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the next point of the fence, or select
the point. Press Enter when done entering points.
Point
Returns all areas that surround a selected point.
Click Define < to select the point.
Coordinates of Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the point, or select the
point.
Polygon
Returns all objects in a defined polygon.
The polygon can be any shape, but cannot cross or touch itself. If you don't
close the polygon, Autodesk Map 3D connects the final point to the first
point to create a closed polygon.
Select a selection type. Click Define < to define the polygon.
First Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the first point of the polygon, or
select the point.
Next Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the next point of the polygon, or
select the point. Press Enter when done entering points.
Polyline
Returns all objects that cross an existing polyline.
Select a selection type, select a polyline mode. Click Define < to select the
polyline.
Select Polyline Select a polyline, line, or arc. If you selected the Polygon
polyline mode, you can select only a polyline.
Bufferfence Width Enter the width of the buffer fence in the current unit.
(This prompt appears only if you select the Buffer Fence polyline mode.)
Window
Returns all objects in a specified window.
Select a selection type. Click Define < to define the window.
First Corner Enter the X,Y coordinates of the first corner of the window, or
select the point.
Other Corner Enter the X,Y coordinates of the opposite corner of the
window, or select the point.
Selection Type
Inside
Select to find only objects that are completely within the boundary.
Location Condition dialog box | 1215
Crossing
Select to find objects that are completely within or crossing the boundary.
NOTE When you perform location queries close to blocks or text objects, be
aware that the bounding box for these objects can extend significantly beyond
the extents of the objects. You can set an option to retrieve objects based on
their bounding box or their insertion point. See Autodesk Map Options dialog
box (page 1254).
Polyline Mode
If you select a polyline boundary, select the mode to define the polyline border.
Polygon
Closes the polyline to create a polygon. If the polyline contains arcs,
Autodesk Map 3D connects the ends of the arcs with a straight line.
Fence
Returns all objects that cross the polyline.
Buffer Fence
Returns all objects within a specified distance from the polyline.
See also:
■ To retrieve drawing objects based on their location (page 804)
■ To edit a drawing query condition (page 818)
New Range Table dialog box
Enter a name for the new range table.
See also:
■ To create a range table (page 830)
Output Report Options dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Reports will include
information about drawing objects only.
1216 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
Use this dialog box to specify the name for your report file, and to define a
template for the file.
An output report lists information about drawing objects that were found by
a query of an attached drawing file. This information can include properties
(such as layer, color, or object type), data attached to the object, or data linked
to the object from an external database. You set up expressions to limit the
objects found to those that match specific criteria. For example, you can create
a query that finds all structures larger than a certain size, and then prints a
report listing the object type and size. You can also include information from
sub-objects.
To specify which information you want in the report, create a template.
Report Template area
Report Template list Lists all expressions in the current template. New
expressions are added to the bottom of the list, unless an expression in the
list is selected, and then the new expression is added above that expression.
Edit Select an expression in the Report Template list and click Edit to copy
it to the Expression box, where you can modify it. When you finish modifying
the expression, click Update.
Delete Select an expression in the Report Template list and click Delete to
remove it.
Clear List Erases the entire report template.
Expression area Use this area to create a new expression or to modify an
existing one.
Expression box Enter an expression to add to the template or edit an existing
expression. To create an expression, specify the variable that represents the
information to include in the report and click Add.
To select from a list of available variables, click Expression.
Expression Displays the Expression dialog box (page 988), which lists all
drawing object properties, object classes, object data, and external data in the
drawing you are querying.
Range list Displays the current range table.
To see a list of all range tables defined in the drawing you are querying, click
the down arrow.
Ranges Displays the Define Range Table dialog box (page 1208), where you can
create a new range table.
Output Report Options dialog box | 1217
Add Adds the current expression to the Report Template list.
Update Updates the edited expression in the Report Template list.
Output File Name area Lists the path and file name for the report.
Type a path and file name or click Browse to choose one.
Unless you specify otherwise, the file name extension is .txt. The output file
is in text format regardless of the file name extension you use.
Process Sub-Objects If this option is not selected, the output report contains
information about the selected object, but not its component parts.
For example, select this option to print information for all points in a polygon.
If the option is not selected, the output report will contain information for
only the first point.
The following table shows the information included in a topology query,
depending on whether you select Process Sub-Objects or not.
Topology type Not selected Selected
Node topology Nodes Nodes, objects, and object data
Network topology Links Links, start and end node data
Polygon topology Centroids Centroids, links, and nodes
Apply Transformation If objects from the drawing you are querying have
been transformed using a coordinate system transformation or a simple offset,
scale, or rotate transformation, check this option to have the report query
evaluate the transformed objects.
If this option is not selected, the report query evaluates only the untransformed
objects in the drawing.
See also:
■ To create a report template (page 935)
Property Condition dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create or modify a property condition in a query.
1218 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
A property condition finds drawing objects based on a property, such as color,
layer, length, or text style.
Select Property Area Specify the property to search for.
Area Returns objects based on their area.
Area only works on circles, ellipses, polylines, splines, regions, and solids. It
does not work on objects created from line segments. For example, Area will
not work on a rectangle created of four separate lines.
Block Name Returns objects based on their block name.
To select from a list of block names in the active drawings, click Values.
Color Returns objects based on their color.
To select a color, click Values.
Elevation Returns objects based on their elevation.
Elevation is the Z value from the XY plane where the object is defined.
Object Type Returns objects based on their type.
To select from a list of types in the active drawings, click Values.
If an object type, does not appear on the list, it may be a custom object. To
add a custom object to the list, run a command that will load the object's dbx.
NOTE To specify a polyline object type, enter 2Dpolyline or 3Dpolyline.
Group Returns objects based on the groups they are members of.
To select from a list of groups in the active drawings, click Values.
The group is not maintained in the current drawing.
Layer Returns objects based on their layer.
To select from a list of layers in the active drawings, click Values.
Length Returns objects based on their length.
Linetype Returns objects based on their linetype.
To select from a list of linetypes, click Values.
If the linetype is not loaded in the current drawing, the objects will appear
with a CONTINUOUS linetype.
Text Style Returns objects based on their text style.
To select from a list of text styles, click Values.
Text Value Returns objects based on their text value.
Property Condition dialog box | 1219
To set an option for case-sensitive match for text values, use the Query tab of
the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254).
Thickness Returns objects based on their thickness.
Thickness is the distance an object is extruded above or below its elevation.
Object Class Returns objects based on their object classification.
To select from a list of object classes, click Values.
Select Include Subclasses to return all objects tagged with the selected object
class and all objects tagged with any subclasses of the selected object class. If
the option is not selected, the query returns only objects tagged with the
selected object class.
Lineweight Returns objects based on their lineweight.
To select from a list of lineweights, click Values.
Plotstyle Returns objects based on their plot style.
To select from a list of plot styles, click Values.
Operator list Select an operator from the list.
= The value of the selected property or data is equal to the value you enter
the Value box.
> The value of the selected property or data is greater than the value you
enter the Value box.
>= The value of the selected property or data is greater than or equal to
the value you enter the Value box.
< The value of the selected property or data is less than the value you
enter the value box.
<= The value of the selected property or data is less than or equal to the
value you enter the value box.
<> The value of the selected property or data is not equal to the value you
enter the Value box.
If you have selected Layer, Object Classname, or Plotstyle as the property, =
(equal) is the only available operator.
1220 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
Value box Specify the value to find.
To specify more than one value, separate each value with a comma. The query
will find objects that match any of the values.
You can use wild-card characters for: Block Name, Object Type, Group, Layer,
Linetype, and Text Style.
To select values from a list, click Values.
Values Display a list of values defined for the property in any of the active
drawings attached to this drawing.
Select the values you want from the list.
NOTE For topology queries, some of the options are different. For more
information on querying a topology, see To query a topology (page 886).
See also:
■ To retrieve drawing objects based on their properties (page 806)
Query Library Administration dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to rename, create, or delete query categories, to move a
query from one category to another, to change a query description, to attach
queries from external files, or to delete queries you no longer use.
Category
Use this area to select, rename, create, or delete a category.
Category list
Lists all query categories in the current drawing.
Select the category you want. The Available Queries list updates to show all
queries in the selected category.
Rename
Display the Rename Category dialog box (page 1223), where you rename the
current category.
New
Display the Define New Category dialog box (page 1203), where you create a
new category.
Query Library Administration dialog box | 1221
Remove
Delete the current category.
You can remove a category only if it has no queries assigned to it. To delete
a category that still has queries in it, you must first delete the queries or
assign them to new categories (by clicking Category).
Available Queries
Use this area to delete queries or assign them to new categories.
Available Queries list
Lists all queries in the current category.
To view additional queries, select a different category from the Category
list.
Delete
Delete the selected queries.
Select All
Highlight all queries in the list.
Clear All
Remove the highlighting from all queries in the list.
Category
Display the Change Category dialog box, where you move the query to a
different category.
A query can be assigned to only one category.
Selected Query
Use this area to add an external query to the current drawing, or to view
information about the selected query in the Available Queries list.
To add an external query, select External from the Query Type list. (You may
need to erase the query Name box first.) Specify the path and file name for
the external query in the File Name box. Once the external query is found,
you can modify its name or description. Click Add to add the query to the
current category.
To modify information about an existing query, select it in the Available
Queries list and change any information you want. When you finish, click
Update. To assign a query to more than one category, copy the query by
selecting it in the Available Queries list. Enter a new name for the query, click
Add and assign the new query to a different category.
Name box
Specify a name for the query.
1222 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
A query name must be unique in the current drawing.
Description box
Specify a query description.
File Name box
If the query is external, specify the path and file name for the file where
the query is stored.
Query Type list
Specify internal (the query is stored with the current drawing) or external
(the query is saved in a separate file).
Add
Add the query to the Available Queries list for the current category.
Update
Update the existing query in the Available Queries list.
See also:
■ Using a Query Library (page 149)
Rename Category dialog box
The Current Category Name area displays the current name of the category.
Enter a new name and click OK. Category names cannot contain any spaces.
All queries assigned to the previous category name are assigned to the new
name. The old category name no longer exists.
See also:
■ To add a category to the query library (page 149)
Rename Range Table dialog box
The Current Range Table Name area shows the current name for the range
table.
Enter a new name in the New Range Table Name box.
Rename Category dialog box | 1223
NOTE If you have any queries that use the current table name, edit those queries
to use the new table name.
See also:
■ To create a range table (page 830)
Run Library Query dialog box
Select a query from the query library. Click Run Query. To view queries from
a different category, select the category from the Category list.
You can run queries that have been saved with the current drawing or external
queries that have been added to the library.
Category list Select a category to save your query in.
Use categories to organize queries. (When you run a query, you first select a
category, and then see all the queries in that category.)
If you have only a few queries, you can save them all in the same category.
Queries list Lists all the queries assigned to the selected category.
To load a query, choose it from the list. Click OK.
Selected Query display Displays the name and description of the selected
query.
See also:
■ To run a query from the Query Library (page 146)
Save Current Query dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to save your current query. Once a query is saved, you can
run it again later.
Category List Select a category to save your query in.
Use categories to organize queries. (When you run a query, you first select a
category, and then see all the queries in that category.)
If you have only a few queries, you can save them all in the same category.
1224 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
New Category Display the Define New Category dialog box where you can
create a new query category.
Name Enter a name for the query. Query names cannot contain any spaces.
Each query name must be unique.
Description Enter a description for the query. Use a description that will help
you remember the query when you look for it later.
Save to External File Select this box to save the query to an external file
instead of in the current drawing.
Specify a name for the file.
If you want the query description to appear in the current drawing query
library, select Keep Reference In Library.
File name Specify a name for the external file where you want to save the
query. To select a different directory, click [...].
Each external query must be saved in a separate file.
Keep Reference In Library If you save the query to an external file, use this
check box to list the query description along with other queries in this
drawing's query library.
Save List of Active Drawings If this box is selected, the saved query specifies
which drawings in the drawing set will be active when the query is executed.
If the box is not selected, the query searches whatever drawings are active
when you execute the query.
Save Location Coordinates If this box is selected, the coordinates for any
location conditions are saved with the query.
If the box is not selected, you will need to specify the coordinates when you
execute the query.
Save Alter Properties If this box is selected, property alteration specified in
the Set Property Alterations dialog box are saved with the query.
If the box is not selected, the property alterations are not saved with the query.
Auto Execute If this box is selected, when you run the saved query, it is
automatically executed.
If the box is not selected, the query is loaded as the active query, but is not
executed until you click Execute Query in the Define Query dialog box.
If you save the query to an external file and do not keep a reference in the
current drawing library, you do not need to provide a name or description for
the query.
Save Current Query dialog box | 1225
See also:
■ To save a query (page 144)
Set Property Alterations dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify how drawing objects found in a query will be
modified as they are brought into the current drawing.
You can alter object properties such as color, layer, block name, or thickness,
or you can add text to objects. In addition, you can create a range table that
modifies objects in different ways based on where they fall in a range of values.
Property alteration is a fast way to modify a group of objects. For example,
make objects stand out in their source drawings by adding color or hatch,
move a group of objects to a new layer, or add informational text.
NOTE To have a property alteration take effect, execute a Draw mode query.
Property alterations do not work in Preview or Report mode queries.
To save property alterations back to source drawings, add the objects to the
save set.
Current Property Alterations list Lists all expressions in the property
alteration list.
Edit Copy the selected expression to the expression section of the dialog box,
where you can modify it.
Delete Delete the selected expression.
Clear List Remove all expressions from the Current Property Alterations list.
Select Property area Use this area to select the property to alter.
To change the color of retrieved blocks, the color of the components of the
source drawing block must be BYBLOCK. Otherwise, the block retains its
original colors.
Color alterations on a bitonal raster image affect both the image and the
boundary. On multiple color raster images, the alteration affects only the
boundary.
Properties Select the property to alter.
1226 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
Text Display the Define Text dialog box, where you specify text to add, and
its height, insertion point, justification, text style, layer, color, and rotation.
Hatch Display the Hatch Options dialog box, where you specify the hatch
to add.
Expression area Use this area to create or modify an expression that defines
how you want to alter a property on objects that are found by the query.
To modify an existing expression, select it in the Current Property Alterations
list. Click Edit. When you finish modifying the expression, click Update.
To create a new expression, enter the expression in the Expression box. Use
the Values, Property, Data, and SQL s to help you create the expression. When
you are done, click Add.
Each expression must list the property you want to modify, and how the
property should be modified. To modify objects based on where they fall in
a range of values, select an existing range table from the Range list, or create
a new table using the Ranges.
Expression box Enter the expression to add to the Current Property Alterations
list.
Range list Displays the current range table.
To see a list of all range tables defined in the current drawing, click the down
arrow.
Ranges Displays the Define Range Table dialog box (page 1208), where you can
create a new range table.
Add Adds the current expression to the Current Property Alterations list.
Update Updates the edited expression in the Current Property Alterations
list.
Values For the property selected in the Select Property area, displays all values
in the active drawings.
Expression Displays the Expression dialog box (page 988), which lists all
properties, object data fields, and SQL link template fields in the active source
drawings.
See also:
Set Property Alterations dialog box | 1227
SQL Condition History dialog box
This dialog box lists the SQL conditions specified in this drawing. Each line
includes the link template and the condition.
To copy a condition from this list to your current SQL query, select the
condition. Click OK.
Clear History Remove all SQL conditions from the list.
To specify a maximum length for this list, use the Data Source tab of the
Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254).
See also:
■ To retrieve drawing objects based on linked SQL data (page 814)
SQL Link Condition dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create or modify an SQL condition in a query.
An SQL condition searches for objects based on data in an external database.
(Use the Map Database commands to link external data to objects.)
NOTE Before you execute a query with an SQL condition, be sure the appropriate
data source is attached and connected.
To create an SQL condition, specify the link template. Specify the column to
check and the value for the column.
Build an SQL condition using this dialog box, or type a condition by choosing
Type It.
Current SQL Condition area (SQL Link Condition)
This area displays the current SQL condition. You can add, delete, or edit any
line in the condition.
Current SQL Condition list
Displays the current SQL condition.
If lines in the condition have been grouped, the group is indented. (Lines
in a group are evaluated before lines outside the group.)
1228 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
Edit
Copy the selected line to the Condition section so you can edit it.
Group
Group the selected lines.
Select the first and last lines that you want in the group. Click Group.
When you run the query, lines inside the group are evaluated before the
rest of the condition.
Ungroup
Delete the parentheses from the selected line and from the matching ending
or beginning line of the group.
Delete
Remove the selected line from the condition.
Clear All
Remove all lines from the current SQL condition.
Condition area (SQL Link Condition)
Use this area to edit an existing line in the condition or to add new lines.
To edit an existing line, select the line in the Current SQL Condition list. Edit
the information in the Condition area. Click Update.
To add a new line, select the operator (And/Or/Not). Select a column and an
operator and specify a value. Click Add Condition.
And/Or/Not options
Determines how the condition is combined with other conditions.
And specifies that both conditions must be met for the object to be included
in the query.
Or specifies that either condition can be met for the object to be included
in the query.
And Not specifies that the first condition must be met and the second
condition must not be met for the object to be included in the query.
Or Not specifies that either the first conditions can be met or the second
condition cannot be met for the object to be included in the query.
Column list
Select a column from the list.
The list displays columns from the current table.
SQL Link Condition dialog box | 1229
Operator list
Select an operator from the list.
Operator Description
= The value of the selected property or data is equal to the value
you enter in the Value box.
> The value of the selected property or data is greater than the
value you enter in the Value box.
>= The value of the selected property or data is greater than or equal
to the value you enter in the Value box.
< The value of the selected property or data is less than the value
you enter in the Value box.
<= The value of the selected property or data is less than or equal to
the value you enter in the Value box.
<> The value of the selected property or data is not equal to the
value you enter in the Value box.
IN The value of the selected property or data matches any of the
values you enter in the Value box. When you use the IN operator,
you must enclose each value in single quotation marks, separate
the values with commas, and enclose the entire list in parentheses,
for example, ('1','2','3').
IS NULL The value of the selected property or data is empty. Do not enter
a value in the Value box.
LIKE The value of the selected property or data contains the value you
enter in the Value box. Applies to string (character) data types
only. Use the percent sign (%) as a wild-card character. For exam-
ple, to retrieve all objects that have a value starting with B, choose
the LIKE operator and enter B% in the Value box. For information
on the wild-card characters supported by your database system,
refer to the documentation for your database system software.
1230 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
Value box
Specify the value to search for.
The value must match the data type of the column.
If the string you want to use contains a single quotation mark, you must
precede the single quotation mark with another single quotation mark.
For dates, use the format TIMESTAMP'YYYY-MM-DD 00:00:00', for example,
TIMESTAMP'1993-06-20 11:24:00'.
To use wild-card characters with string values, use the LIKE operator. For
example, to retrieve all objects that have a value starting with B, choose the
LIKE operator and enter B%. Refer to the documentation for your database
software to see which wild-card characters are supported.
Add Condition
Add the condition line to the Current SQL Condition list.
The new line is added to the bottom of the list. If any line in the list is
selected, the new line is added above it.
Update
Update the selected condition in the Current SQL Condition list.
Other Controls
Link template list
Select the link template that specifies the table containing the data to use
for this query condition.
This list displays only the link templates available in the source(s) you are
querying. For example, if you are querying source (attached) drawings, the
list will display only the link templates in your source drawings. If you are
querying the current drawing, the list will display only the link templates
in the current drawing.
You can query only one link template in an SQL condition. To query a
different link template, create a new SQL condition.
History
Display the SQL Condition History dialog box (page 1228), where you select
from a list of SQL conditions you've previously added.
Type It
Display the Type SQL Condition dialog box (page 1232), where you type your
SQL condition.
See also:
■ To retrieve drawing objects based on linked SQL data (page 814)
SQL Link Condition dialog box | 1231
Type SQL Condition dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
If you are familiar with SQL, you can create or modify a SQL condition.
History To modify a condition you've used previously, select it in from the
list. The condition is copied to the Enter SQL Condition area, where you can
modify it.
Link Template Select the link template that specifies the table to use with
this condition. The SQL condition tests information linked from this table to
the queried objects. Because queries apply only to objects in active source
drawing, this list displays only link templates in your source drawings.
Enter SQL Condition To create a new condition, type it in the box.
SQL Condition Syntax
SQL has a strict grammatical structure and syntax. Here are some rules to
follow when you define SQL statements.
■ Character values (data type CHAR) must be enclosed in single quotation
marks ('XXX').
■ If the column has a data type of string or data, enclose the column name
in double quotes. If the column has a numeric data type, do not enclose
the column name in double quotes.
■ Database values are case sensitive, but field (column) names are not.
■ Do not end each statement with a semicolon (;) as in standard SQL syntax.
■ For dates, use the format TIMESTAMP'YYYY-MM-DD 00:00:00'. For example:
"DATE">TIMESTAMP'1993-06-20 11:24:00'
■ Do not use Autodesk Map 3D or DOS wild cards such as * or ? as part of
column values or names.
■ Do not use SQL keywords as identifiers. Examples of keywords are SQL
commands and data types such as CHAR, GROUP, SQL, TABLE, USER,
SECTION, BY, and CURRENT. Examples of identifiers are table and column
names. For example, if you try to create a table with a column name of
CURRENT, Autodesk Map 3D displays an error message.
1232 | Chapter 30 Query Dialog Boxes
Autodesk Map 3D supports standard SQL syntax as formally defined in the
ANSI X3.135-1989 SQL standard.
See also:
■ To retrieve drawing objects based on linked SQL data (page 814)
Type SQL Condition dialog box | 1233
Raster Image Dialog
Boxes 31
In this chapter
■ MAPIFRAME (Image Frame
command)
■ Image Correlation dialog box
■ Image Information dialog box
■ Image Management dialog box
■ Image Management Layout dialog
box
■ Image Select dialog box
■ Insert Image dialog box
■ Raster Extension Options dialog
box
■ Transparency Color dialog box
1235
MAPIFRAME (Image Frame command)
Use this command to turn on or off the display of frames.
Image Correlation dialog box
Use the Image Correlation dialog box to correlate an image within the drawing
when you insert it. The Source tab displays correlation information from the
selected correlation source. The Insertion tab shows how these settings apply
to the current drawing.
Correlation Source list You can select a correlation source for the image from
this list. For example, if a resource or world file exists for the image, then it is
displayed in this list.
Insertion Point area Contains the insertion point (X, Y, and Z coordinates)
for the lower-left corner of the image frame. On the Source tab, this
information is in the units specified in the Units area at the bottom of the
tab. On the Insertion tab, this information is in current drawing units.
Rotation box Contains the amount of rotation in current drawing angle units
for the image. This value uses the lower-left corner as the base point.
Scale box Contains a scale factor for the image. A scale factor > 1 enlarges the
image, while a scale factor
For example, to make the image twice as large, type 2 in the Scale box.
Density box Displays the dots (or pixels) per unit for the image.
Units list Select the units for the insertion point and density from this list.
For example, if your image was scanned at 300 dpi, then select Inches as the
unit.
Apply Click Apply to secure the changes you have made to the insertion
point, rotation, scale, and frame color.
Pick < Click Pick (on the Insertion tab) to draw a frame for the image. For
more information, see To manually adjust the image frame during insertion
(page 281).
Frame Color box Displays the current color for the image frame and for the
foreground of a bitonal image. Usually, this is the current Autodesk Map 3D
color. However, when you insert a bitonal image, Autodesk Map 3D first looks
for the foreground color in the image header file or in a resource file. If it
1236 | Chapter 31 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
cannot find the color information, then the foreground color defaults to the
current Autodesk Map 3D color. To change the color, click Select (on the
Insertion tab).
See also:
■ To insert a raster image (page 276)
■ To correlate an image during insertion (page 280)
Image Information dialog box
You can view data about the selected images in your drawing.
File area Displays the image name, where the image is stored, the file type,
size, and date that it was created and modified.
Image area Displays the image density, depth, width, height, and color type.
Object area Displays the linetype and layer of the image frame.
Correlation area Displays the insertion point, scale, and rotation of the
selected image.
NOTE If you select more than one image, and the information varies for different
images, then varies is displayed.
See also:
■ To display the Image Management dialog box (page 288)
Image Management dialog box
The Image Management dialog box displays the names of the images that are
inserted into the drawing, the current display order, and other image
information. Each image that is in your drawing, even if it is unnamed or a
copy, is listed in this dialog box. To indicate copies, the dialog box numbers
them in the following format: imagename:1, imagename:2.
The images are listed in display order. The image at the top of the list is
displayed on top and drawn last. You can modify the image display order by
clicking an image name and dragging it up or down in the list.
Image Information dialog box | 1237
Image The name of the image file.
File The full path name for the image file.
Layer The layer on which the image is located.
Created The date that the file was created.
Density Dots per inch that the image was scanned at. Synonymous with
resolution.
Depth Every pixel of an image has information associated with it that defines
its color. The amount of information stored with each pixel is referred to as
depth. The more information that is stored with each bit, the greater the
number of colors that can be represented.
Type The format type of the image.
Visible The display status of the image.
Last Modified The date that the image was last modified.
File Size The file size of the image in bytes.
Layout Click Layout to display the Image Management Layout dialog box
(page 1238), where you can determine which topic columns are displayed and
in what order they are displayed in the Image Management dialog box.
To view additional information about an image, select the image and
right-click. Click Information to display the Image Information dialog box.
NOTE You can change the size and position of this dialog box. Any changes you
make will be retained in future sessions.
See also:
■ To display the Image Management dialog box (page 288)
■ Managing Raster Images (page 287)
Image Management Layout dialog box
You can control which topic columns are displayed and the order in which
they are displayed.
1238 | Chapter 31 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
Image Topics list Select or clear the check box next to a topic to display or
remove that topic column. You can also change the order of the topic columns
by dragging a selected topic up or down.
Description area Provides a brief description of the selected topic in the Image
Topics list.
See also:
■ Managing Raster Images (page 287)
Image Select dialog box
You can select images by placing your cursor over them and pressing Shift +
left-click. If you select more than one image, the Image Select dialog box is
displayed.
List of images Lists each image that you have inserted into the drawing. Each
image that is currently selected is highlighted. Click an image name to select
or deselect it.
Select All Click to select all the images in your drawing.
Select None Click to remove all selected images from the selection set.
Insert Image dialog box
You can select one or more images to insert into a drawing. You can view
information about an image and preview the image before you insert it.
NOTE If the FILEDIA variable is set to 0, then this dialog box is not displayed and
you can type the name of the image to insert on the command line.
Look In Select the drive and folder (or directory) that contains the image.
File Name Type or select the name of the image or images to insert.
Files Of Type From the list of available image formats, select the type of file
that you want to display in the list.
Show Frame(s) Only Select this option to insert only a frame placeholder for
the image. The image is not loaded into memory and not displayed. This is
useful if you are inserting a group of images and don't want to wait for each
Image Select dialog box | 1239
image to display. To display the image later, use the IMAGE command, or
select the image frame and right-click. Click Image ➤ Show Image.
If this option is not selected, the image is loaded into memory and displayed
as it is inserted.
Modify Correlation Select this option to display the Image Correlation dialog
box (page 1236) when you click Open. The Image Correlation dialog box lets
you review and modify the correlation settings for the image. This option is
not available if multiple images are selected. If you do not select this option,
the image is inserted using its default correlation settings. Default settings are
determined by searching for correlation data in the following order.
1 World file
2 Resource file (.res extension)
3 Tab files (.tab extension)
4 Image file
5 Defaults set in the Raster Extension Options dialog box
Information >> Click this to display information about the image file and
preview the image.
See also:
■ To insert a raster image (page 276)
Raster Extension Options dialog box
You can configure raster image options using the following tabs:
Paths
Use the Paths tab to set the directory for resource files. Resource files store
information about an image’s insertion point, scale, rotation, and density.
Resource files have the same base name as the raster image with an .res
extension.
Resource File Directory The directory where Autodesk Map 3D searches for
resource files. Click [...] to locate a directory. Note that this directory applies
only to resource (.res) files and not to other correlation sources.
When you insert an image, Autodesk Map 3D looks in the Resource File
Directory path to see if there is a resource file associated with the image. If it
1240 | Chapter 31 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
locates a resource file, then you can select this file as the source of correlation
information. If you leave the resource file path blank, then Autodesk Map 3D
searches the directory or directories from where the images were inserted.
Use Resource File Directory Before Using Image Directory Informs Autodesk
Map 3D to search for resource files in the resource file directory before
searching the image path stored in the drawing.
General
Use the General tab to set how frames are displayed, the display quality of
images, image detach options, and the Shift + left-click setting.
Display Preferences
Image Frame list
Use this list to specify how Autodesk Map 3D displays the image frames in
your drawing. You can hide the frames by selecting Frames Off, you can
have the frames appear in front of the images by selecting Frame Drawn
Above Image, or you can have the frames drawn behind the images by
selecting Frame Drawn Below Image.
Display Quality High
This option dithers the pixels onscreen so that the changes between shades
and colors appears more gradual. This setting is recommended for color
and grayscale images.
Display Quality Draft option
This option does not dither the pixels. This setting is recommended for
bitonal images.
Image Detach Preferences
Ask Before Detach
Select this option to be prompted to detach an image if there are no more
frames in the drawing that reference the image.
Always Detach
Select this option if you want Autodesk Map 3D to automatically detach
an image when you erase the image frames.
Never Detach
Select this option if you want Autodesk Map 3D to keep the image attached,
even if you erase the frames.
Raster Extension Options dialog box | 1241
Shift + Left Click
Shift + Left Click Image Select
Select to be able to select images by placing your cursor over them and
clicking the left mouse button while pressing Shift. This feature is very
useful when you are zoomed in to the image and you cannot see the image
frame.
Image Defaults
Use the Image Defaults tab to set correlation defaults. Most images have
correlation data that is stored in the image file header, or in a resource file,
World file, or tab file. However, some images may not have any correlation
data. For those cases, you can specify default correlation data. In addition, if
the correlation source does not include information on the scale or the density,
Autodesk Map 3D uses the default values on this tab when inserting the image.
TIP Setting the correlation defaults can save you time if you have multiple images
that require the same insertion point, scale, rotation, and density.
Insertion Values
X
Enter the default Autodesk Map 3D X coordinate to define the lower-left
corner of images.
Y
Enter the default Autodesk Map 3D Y coordinate to define the lower-left
corner of images.
Z
Enter the default Autodesk Map 3D Z coordinate to define the lower-left
corner of images.
Rotation
Enter a default rotation for images.
Scale
Enter a default numeric scaling factor for images.
For example, to make the image twice as large, type 2 in the Scale box.
Density
Density
Type a default density (or resolution) for images. You should set the this
value to the most common density value at which your images are scanned.
1242 | Chapter 31 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
Insertion Point and Density Units list
Select the default insertion point and density units for the images. For
example, a common North American scanning resolution is 300 dpi (300
dots per inch). To set this value as your default density, type 300 in the
Density edit box and select inches as the Units. If you insert images that
have density value and density unit information stored in the correlation
source, then these defaults are not used.
For an illustration of how to set the density value and units for an image,
see Setting Image Density (page 283).
Memory
Use the Memory tab to specify the amount of memory (RAM) that Autodesk
Map 3D can use for images before using a temporary swap file. You can also
define the location of the temporary swap file.
Temporary File Location
Temporary File Location
The location to use for your temporary swap file. Click [...] to locate a drive
and directory. Autodesk Map 3D uses this temporary swap file when the
memory limit has been exceeded.
NOTE You must close and restart Autodesk Map 3D for these settings to take
effect.
RAM Settings
Physical RAM
This value is the amount of physical RAM in your system.
Memory Limit
The amount of RAM that Autodesk Map 3D will use before creating a swap
file.
NOTE Increasing the default amount may degrade your system’s performance.
Be sure to leave enough RAM for your operating system and other applications.
Default
Click to restore the memory setting to the default RAM amount, 25% of
the total physical memory.
MB, KB, and Bytes
The units (megabytes, kilobytes, or bytes) used for defining the Memory
Limit.
Raster Extension Options dialog box | 1243
See also:
■ Setting Raster Image Options (page 192)
Transparency Color dialog box
Click Select and pick a color on the image. When transparency is turned on,
the selected color is transparent.
Setting transparency color is available only if the image is loaded and the
Raster Extension is loaded. To load the image, select the image and right-click.
Click Image ➤ Show Image. To load the Raster Extension, choose a Raster
Extension command, for example, Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
NOTE The transparency color is stored in the drawing as an Autodesk Map 3D
custom object. If you send the drawing to other users, they can see the
transparency color only by opening the drawing in Autodesk Map 3D or Autodesk
Raster Design. If they open the drawing in AutoCAD, they see a message that
AutoCAD cannot reference the custom object and will not display the transparent
color.
See also:
■ To make an image transparent (page 306)
1244 | Chapter 31 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
Saving Objects Dialog
Boxes 32
In this chapter
■ ADEREMOBJS (Remove Objects
from Save Set command)
■ ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for
Save Back command)
■ ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects
in Save Set command)
■ Save Objects to Source Drawings
dialog box
■ Who Has It Information dialog box
1245
ADEREMOBJS (Remove Objects from Save Set command)
Use this command to unlock selected locked objects in the current drawing
and remove them from the save set.
Respond to the prompts:
Erased/<Select>: Enter e to remove all objects that have been erased from the
current drawing. Enter s or press Enter to select individual objects.
Select objects: Use an object selection method to select the objects to unlock
and remove from the save set. Press Enter when you finish.
Press Enter to confirm.
Objects that are locked in their source drawings are unlocked so that other
users can edit them. They are removed from the list to be saved back to source
drawings.
Any changes made to the objects in the current drawing still exist in the
drawing. To save these changes to a new file, use the Save As command on
the File menu.
Objects that were erased from the current drawing remain erased from the
drawing, but they will not be erased from source drawings.
ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command)
Use this command to add objects the save set and lock the objects.
If object locking is on, adding an object to the save set locks the object to
prevent anyone else from editing it while you are using it. When an object is
locked, other users can view it, but they cannot edit it.
Respond to the prompts:
Add objects to save set: Select/<allNew>: Enter s to individually select objects,
or press Enter to add all objects created since opening the current drawing.
Select objects: Use an object selection method.
If you plan to edit more than one object, lock them all at the start of your
editing session. That way, no other users can modify or lock them before you
get to them.
1246 | Chapter 32 Saving Objects Dialog Boxes
If an object is on a locked layer in the source drawing, you cannot add it to
the save set. If you are working in paper space, you cannot add objects to the
save set.
Objects in the save set are saved to source drawings when you use the Save
Objects to Source Drawings dialog box (page 1247) command.
ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command)
Use this command to highlight all objects in the current drawing that are
marked to be saved to source drawings.
To remove the highlighting, press Enter.
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box
Save the objects that are currently in the save set back to source drawings.
If you are saving new objects, specify the source drawings to save objects to
and the method used to save objects. Queried objects are saved back to their
original layer in their original source drawing.
You must have Edit Drawing privileges to save objects to source drawings. See
the User Administration dialog box (page 1274).
Status area Lists the number of queried objects and the number of newly
created objects that are in the save set.
Save Queried Objects Select this option to save queried objects to source
drawings. Queried objects are saved back to their original layer in their original
source drawing.
If you have redefined a block, layer, or text style definition and you want to
save the new definition, be sure the option to save the definition is selected
on the Save Back tab of the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254).
Save Newly Created Objects Select this option to save objects created in the
current drawing to source drawings.
Under Save Order For Newly Created Objects, specify the source drawings to
save objects to and the method used to save objects.
Save Order for Newly Created Objects
Specify the method to use when saving objects created in the current drawing.
Objects are saved by the first method that applies to them.
ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command) | 1247
Area
Saves objects to the first source drawing in the list within whose boundary
they lie. This is useful for tiled drawings. This method does not save objects
outside the boundary of the source drawings.
You can specify the drawing boundary by setting save back extents in the
Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1267). If no save back extents are set, the
drawing extents are used as the boundary. If an object lies partially outside
the save back extents, the drawing extents are modified to include the
object, but the save back extents are not changed.
Layer
Saves objects to the first source drawing in the list that includes a layer of
the same name as the layer the object is on in the current drawing. This is
useful for stacked drawings. This method does not save objects on layers in
the current drawing that have no corresponding layer in the source drawings.
Selective
Prompts you to choose which objects to save and which drawings to save
them in. Objects are saved to the same layer as they are on in the current
drawing. If the source drawing does not have a layer of the same name, one
is created. This method applies to all objects, so you cannot specify other
save back methods after this one.
Drawings to Save New Objects to list Specify which drawings to save objects
to. If you use the Selective method, Autodesk Map 3D prompts for the objects
to save to each selected drawing.
Select All Highlight all drawings in the list.
Clear All Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list.
Filter Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If the
parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is not
displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box (page 1266), you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
See also:
■ Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings (page 456)
1248 | Chapter 32 Saving Objects Dialog Boxes
Who Has It Information dialog box
This dialog box displays information on who has an object locked, what source
drawing and current drawing it comes from, and the date and time it was
locked.
See also:
■ To find out who has an object locked (page 455)
Who Has It Information dialog box | 1249
Setting Map Options
Dialog Boxes 33
In this chapter
■ MAPABOUT (About Autodesk
Map 3D command)
■ MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task
Pane command)
■ MAPWSFOCUS
■ MAPWSPACE (Task Pane
command)
■ MAPWSREFRESH
■ Autodesk Map Hillshade dialog
box
■ Autodesk Map Options dialog box
■ Coordinate Geometry Setup
dialog box
■ Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog
box
■ Drawing Maintenance dialog box
■ Drawing Set Display Filter dialog
box
■ Drawing Settings dialog box
■ Drawing Statistics dialog box
■ Drive Alias Administration dialog
box
1251
■ Generate Object Data Index dialog
box
■ Index Maintenance dialog box
■ Remove Object Data Index dialog
box
■ Select Alias dialog box
■ Undefined Alias Referenced dialog
box
■ User Administration dialog box
■ User Information dialog box
■ User Login dialog box
1252 | Chapter 33 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
MAPABOUT (About Autodesk Map 3D command)
Use this command to display the About Autodesk Map 3D screen, which shows
the version number and date of Autodesk Map 3D.
MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command)
Use this command to dock or undock the Task Pane.
MAPWSFOCUS
Use this command to set the keyboard or mouse focus to the Task Pane. You
can also set the focus by clicking in the Task Pane.
To return the focus to the command line, press ESC or click in the command
line area. Whenever you return to Autodesk Map 3D after using another
application, the focus is reset to the command line.
MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command)
Use this command to hide or show the Task Pane.
MAPWSREFRESH
Use this command to refresh the Task Pane. This is sometimes necessary if
Map Explorer does not reflect your recent changes to the drawing or if the
icons in the Display Manager need to be refreshed.
Autodesk Map Hillshade dialog box
Specifies the settings to use to apply shading to raster-based surfaces in
Autodesk Map 3D.
The Autodesk Map - Hillshade dialog box includes the following options:
MAPABOUT (About Autodesk Map 3D command) | 1253
Direction Of Sun Specifies the direction from which the light should come
from, for example, East or West. You can type a direction value into the edit
box, drag the yellow disk in the compass to the position you want, or use the
Settings button.
Angle Of Sun Specifies high in the sky the light is located, such as near the
horizon, directly overhead, or somewhere in between. You can type an angle
into the edit box, drag the yellow disk to specify an angle, or use the Setting
button.
Date, Time, and Location Allows you to specify sun settings using date, time
and location. Click Settings to go to the Sun Properties palette, where you
specify these values. To populate the Hillshade dialog box with the settings
from Sun Properites, you return to the Hillshade dialog box and click Import.
Related procedures:
■ Using Hillshading and Vertical Exaggeration (page 769)
Autodesk Map Options dialog box
You can define options for the Task Pane, drawings, queries, save options,
data sources, coordinate systems, and the system.
TaskPane (page 1254)
Current Drawing (page ?)
Query (page 1257)
Save Back (page 1259)
Data Source (page 1259)
Multi-User (page 1260)
System (page 1261)
Coordinate Systems tab (page 1262)
TaskPane
Specify Task Pane options.
1254 | Chapter 33 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Map Explorer Categories To Display
Select the categories to display in Map Explorer. When you turn off the
display of the category, all functionality associated with the category is still
available.
TIP To reduce screen clutter, turn off the display of categories you don’t use.
These settings are user-specific and will affect any drawing that you open.
These settings will take effect the next time you start Autodesk Map 3D.
Show Task Pane on startup
If the Task Pane is hidden, you can display it by entering mapwspace at the
command prompt.
Show Properties Palette on startup
If the Properties palette, is hidden, you can display it by entering properties
at the command prompt.
Current Drawing
Specify options for attached drawings, coordinate transformations, and
drawing-specific data sources.
Activate Attached Drawings Specifies the default active/inactive status for
drawings you attach to the current drawing and whether the active status is
saved with the current drawing.
Coordinate Transformation Adjustments
Specifies how you want Autodesk Map 3D to perform coordinate
transformations.
Adjust Sizes And Scales - For Changes In Units
Specifies whether the units used in the coordinate system of an attached
drawing are scaled to the units used in the coordinate system of the current
drawing.
For example, if an attached drawing uses meters and the current drawing
uses U.S. Survey Feet, you can scale text and blocks so that their size or scale
measures in feet rather than meters.
If you don't set the For Changes In Units option, Autodesk Map 3D doesn't
size or scale text and block objects. In that case, a block that is five meters
long in an attached drawing will be five feet long when you bring it into
the current drawing.
Do not change this setting after you bring objects into the current drawing,
or you may introduce unintended changes to text and blocks when you
save them back to their source drawings.
Autodesk Map Options dialog box | 1255
Adjust Sizes And Scales - For Map Distortion
Adjusts the size and scale of text and blocks to correct for map distortion
introduced when you represent a spherical object (earth) in a Cartesian
coordinate system.
For example, two objects, located at the northern and southern extremes
of a map, of equal length in coordinate system X will remain the same
length when transformed to coordinate system Y.
If you don't select this option, the two objects will be scaled to different
lengths in coordinate system Y according to the relative map distortion (or
grid scale factor).
This option is not available if For Changes In Units under Adjust Sizes And
Scales is not selected.
Adjust Rotations - For Map Distortion
Adjusts the angle of text and blocks to correct for map distortion due to the
convergence angle (the deviation of the Y axis of a Cartesian coordinate
system from true north).
Adjust Rotations - For Zero-Rotation Objects
Specifies that text and blocks that have a rotation value of zero in the source
drawing are adjusted to correct distortion due to the convergence angle
(the deviation of the Y axis of a Cartesian coordinate system from true
north).
If you set this option, Autodesk Map 3D calculates the convergence angle
for text and blocks with a zero rotation value. If you don't set this option,
Autodesk Map 3D does not rotate text and blocks with a zero rotation value
even if there is a convergence angle.
This option is not available if For Map Distortion under Adjust Rotations
is not selected.
Adjust Elevations
Adjusts the elevation (Z axis) of objects when you select For Changes In
Units and For Map Distortion under Adjust Sizes and Scales.
Data Source Options
Specifies drawing-specific data source options.
Number Of SQL Conditions To Keep In History List
Specifies the maximum number of SQL conditions that are stored in the
SQL Condition History dialog box and in the Table Filter History dialog
box. Once the history list is full, the oldest, or first added, condition is
removed from the list to make room for a new condition. If memory is
limited on your system, keep this number low.
1256 | Chapter 33 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Query
Query Options
Use the Query tab to specify query options and default settings for queries.
Save Current Query With Drawing
Saves the current query definition with the current drawing, even if you
have not saved the query. When you next open this drawing, the query
loads as the current query definition.
Use Case Sensitivity When Matching Text Values
Specifies whether text values in Property Condition queries must match
the case used in the query definition.
Create Selection Set From Queried Objects
Specifies whether the selection set contains the items retrieved by the query.
To use this selection set when editing, enter p (to use the previous selection
set) when prompted to select objects. (Note that as soon as you select other
objects, Autodesk Map 3D clears this selection set and replaces it with your
new selection.)
If your query finds a large number of objects, this feature can take time. If
you do not need to put the objects into a selection set, clear this check box
to save time during queries.
Create Associative Hatch Objects
Specifies whether Autodesk Map 3D creates associative hatch objects for
hatch objects created by the ADEFILLPOLYG, ADEQUERY (using alter
properties), MAPTOPOQUERY, and MAPTHEMATIC (using fill) commands.
If this box is not selected, hatch objects created by these commands are
nonassociative hatch objects.
Preview Queries
Specifies options to use when displaying blocks and raster images in Preview
Query mode.
Show Insertion Point Only
Specifies whether to show only the insertion point of inserted blocks in a
Preview query and not the objects. An insertion point is represented as an
X.
Show Image Clipping Boundary Only
Specifies whether a Preview query displays only the clipping boundary of
raster images.
Autodesk Map Options dialog box | 1257
Preview Definitions From
Specifies the location to use for definitions of layers, linetypes, blocks, etc.
when running a query in Preview mode.
Select Current to speed up the preview, though some items may not display
exactly as they will when the query is executed in Draw mode.
Location Queries
Specifies options to use when creating Location queries.
Boundary Color For And/Or Conditions
Specifies the boundary color for And and Or conditions when you edit a
Location query and click Show.
Boundary Color For Not Conditions
Specifies the boundary color for Not conditions when you edit a Location
query and click Show.
Reference Entire Bounding Area For Objects
Specifies whether Location queries reference the entire bounding area of
hatch, solid, and raster objects or only the bounding edge. (The bounding
edge for raster objects is the clipping boundary.)
When you select this option, a hatch boundary is treated as an area. If the
query location is on any part of the hatch object, even if it touches only a
hatch boundary, the whole hatch object (the hatch and the hatch boundary)
is included in the selection.
When you clear this option, the hatch boundary is treated as an edge. The
query location must intersect or enclose the boundary edge of the hatch
object to include the object in the selection. If the query selects only the
space inside the hatch area, but not the hatch boundary, the hatch object
(the hatch and the hatch boundary) is not selected.
This setting affects the ADEQUERY, MAPTOPOQUERY, and MAPTHEMATIC
commands.
Determine Block Locations Using
Specifies whether Autodesk Map 3D uses the block's insertion point or its
bounding box as its location to determine whether a block meets a Location
condition.
Determine Text Locations Using
Specifies whether Autodesk Map 3D uses the text's insertion point or its
bounding box as its location to determine whether text meets a Location
condition.
1258 | Chapter 33 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Default Joining Operator
Specifies the default joining operator to use in the Define Query dialog box.
And
Specifies that both conditions must be met for the object to be included in
the query.
Or
Specifies that either condition can be met for the object to be included in
the query.
Save Back
Use the Save Back tab to specify options for saving queried objects back to
attached drawings.
Save Set
Specifies options for adding objects to the save set.
Save Back To Source Drawings
Specifies the behavior of objects when you save them back to their source
drawings.
Redefine Block Definitions On Save Back
Saves changes to block definitions back to attached drawings.
Redefine Layer Definitions On Save Back
Saves changes to layer definitions back to attached drawings.
Redefine Text Style Definitions On Save Back
Saves changes to text style definitions back to attached drawings.
Create History File Of Changes
Creates a file of all changes made to each source drawing. The history file
has the same name as the source drawing file, but has the extension .hst.
Create Backup File Of Source Drawing
Creates a back up file of attached drawings before saving changes. Backup
drawing files have the extension .bak.
Data Source
Display Of Multiple Tables
Use the Data Source tab to specify options for Data View behavior, data source
path name display, and database file associations. These settings apply to
attribute tables
Autodesk Map Options dialog box | 1259
Specifies the number of Data Views to use when displaying tables.
Show Each Table In A Separate Data View
Opens a new Data View window for each open table. Move between tables
by clicking on the window you want.
Show All Tables In One Data View
Opens only one Data View window. When you open a new table, the
previous table is automatically closed.
Data Views
Specifies the behavior of the Data View.
Open In Read-Only Mode
Opens the Data View in read-only mode. When this option is selected, you
cannot edit data in the Data View.
Save Format And Style Changes With Drawing
Saves all formatting changes, such as column width, font, color, or borders,
that you make in the Data View.
Keep On Top
Specifies whether the Data View window remains on top of all other
windows, even when it is not the active window.
Associate Database Versions With File Extensions Click Associate to display
the Associate Database Versions dialog box where you specify the database
version to use for each database file extension. When you drop a database file
on the Map Explorer tab, Autodesk Map 3D checks the file extension and uses
the specified version of the database software.
Default Provider For Microsoft Access Databases Select the default driver
to use when you drop an MDB file onto the Map Explorer tab.
Multi-User
Multi-User Options
Use the Multi-User tab to specify options for user login and object locking.
You must have Superuser privileges to modify multi-user options.
Specifies options that apply to all users in a multi-user environment.
Force User Login
Requires users to log in before using Autodesk Map 3D.
1260 | Chapter 33 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Enable Object Locking
Locks objects that are selected for the save set. If an object is locked, other
Autodesk Map 3D users can view it, but cannot edit it.
If an AutoCAD user does not have Autodesk Map 3D, they cannot open a
drawing that an Autodesk Map 3D user has open.
You cannot disable object locking while drawings are active.
System
Log File Options
Use the System tab to specify system settings.
Log files keep track of error messages and other Autodesk Map 3D system
messages. If the log file is active, it is updated each time you use Autodesk
Map 3D. To save space on your disk, you can delete or archive the log file and
start a new one.
Log File Active
Stores error messages and other Autodesk Map 3D system messages in the
log file.
Log File Name
Specifies a name for the log file. Click Browse to search through existing
names or to change the drive or directory. If you don't specify a name,
Autodesk Map 3D creates the acadmap.log file in the current directory.
Message Level
Specifies which kind of error messages to store in the log file.
Number Of Drawings Loaded In Memory At Once Specifies the number of
drawings that Autodesk Map 3D can have open in memory at the same time.
This number does not limit the number of active drawings. Autodesk Map 3D
opens and closes files in memory as it needs them.
If your system has a lot of memory, you can enter a larger number (up to 200)
to make queries go faster.
Default Query File Directory Specifies the default directory for queries saved
to external files.
Default Cache File Directory Specifies the default directory where your cache
files are stored. Click Clear Cache to enhance performance of Autodesk Map
3D.
Autodesk Map Options dialog box | 1261
Coordinate Systems tab
Coordinate System Definitions Stored In Drawing
Specifies the program behavior when opening drawings that contain coordinate
system definitions.
Ignore Definitions
Specifies that the program will ignore coordinate system definitions when
opening drawing files.
Prompt User To Add Definitions to Dictionaries
Specifies that the program will prompt you for action when opening drawing
files that contain coordinate system definitions.
Automatically Add Definitions To Dictionary
Specifies that, when opening drawing files that contain coordinate system
definitions, the program will automatically add the coordinate system
definitions from the drawing file to your coordinate system dictionary.
Geodetic Distance
Units For Display
Specifies the units to use to display geodetic distances.
See also:
■ Assigning Coordinate Systems (page 124)
Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify settings to use with the Coordinate Geometry
features.
Set North Direction
Direction From Y Axis If North on your map is not on the Y axis, specify
the direction from the Y axis to North on your map. Enter a number that
represents the angular distance measured clockwise from the Y axis.
Note that this option sets the ANGBASE system variable.
Azimuth Measurements
Define Bearings Relative To North Select this option if bearings in
your map are relative to North.
1262 | Chapter 33 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Define Bearings Relative to South Select this option if bearings in your
map are relative to South. This is most often the case for maps of the
southern hemisphere.
Elevation Settings
Prompt For 3D Data Input Select this option to have Autodesk Map
always prompt for 3D data, such as elevation, grade, or slope. If this option
is not selected, all elevations are assumed to be 0.
For more information, see Setting Coordinate Geometry Options (page 181)
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box
Use this dialog to define or modify the drawing set for the current drawing.
Attach drawings that you will use with the current drawing. Activate only
those drawings you want to search for the current query.
In addition, you can change drawing settings such as description, simple
transformation, or save back extents.
Autodesk Map 3D stores the changes you make to the drawing set with the
current drawing. The next time you open this drawing, your new settings will
be in effect.
Attached Drawings list Lists all drawings attached to the current drawing.
The first column specifies if the drawing is active. Only active drawings are
searched during queries.
■ Yes indicates the drawing is active.
■ Locked indicates the drawing is inactive, and you have locks on objects in
the drawing.
■ No indicates the drawing is inactive.
If the drawing has a description assigned to it, that description appears in the
list instead of the file name. For information on how to assign a description
to a drawing, see Drawing Settings Dialog Box.
Activate Activate all selected drawings.
Queries search only active drawings; they do not search inactive drawings.
Deactivate Deactivate all selected drawings.
Queries do not search deactivated drawings. Queries search only active
drawings.
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box | 1263
If you deactivate a drawing that contains objects you've locked, the status of
the drawing changes to Locked.
Select All Highlight all drawings in the list.
Clear All Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list.
Drawing Settings Display the Drawing Settings dialog box (page 1267), where
you can change the drawing description, simple transformation settings, or
save back extents.
Show Nested When selected, the Attached Drawings list displays nested
drawings attached to active drawings. Nested drawings attached to inactive
drawings are not displayed.
If a drawing has nested drawings, a plus sign (+) appears before the drawing
name.
A nested drawing is a drawing that is not attached directly to the current
drawing, but is attached to a drawing in the drawing set.
When not selected, only top-level drawings appear in the Attached Drawings
list.
Filter Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If the
parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is not
displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box (page 1266), you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
Attach Display the Select Drawings to Attach dialog box (page 1186), where you
can attach additional source drawings to the current drawing.
To attach drawings to a source drawing, first use the Open command on the
File menu to open the source drawing, and then attach the drawings.
Detach Detach the selected drawings from the current drawing.
If you detach a parent drawing, all nested drawings attached to that drawing
are also detached.
See also:
■ Attaching Drawings (page 128)
1264 | Chapter 33 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Drawing Maintenance dialog box
Use this dialog box to remove locks from drawings and create drawing indexes.
Use the options in the Active Drawings area to see which drawings currently
have locks.
Use the options in the Locks area to see which users have objects locked, and
to remove those locks. This feature is particularly useful if a user's system goes
down while objects are locked.
To display information in the Locks area, click User List.
Active Drawings
Use this area to see which drawings currently have locks.
Active Drawings list
Lists all attached active drawings for the current drawing.
■ To display information about locked objects in a drawing, select the
drawing in the list. Click User List. The area at the bottom of the screen
updates to show the names of users who have locks on objects in the
drawing, and the number of objects they have locked.
■ To update indexes for a drawing, select the drawing in the list. Click
Drawing Index.
Select All
Highlight all drawings in the list.
Clear All
Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list.
Filter
Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If
the parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is
not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box (page 1266), you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
Drawings Index
Displays the Index Maintenance dialog box (page 1272), where you can specify
which types of indexes to create for the selected drawings.
Drawing Maintenance dialog box | 1265
User List
Update the display of users that have locks on objects in source drawings.
Locks
Use this area to see which users have objects locked, and to remove those
locks. This feature is particularly useful if a user's system goes down while
objects are locked.
To display information in this area, click User List.
User Name list
Lists all users who have locks on objects in the selected drawings. The
Number Of Objects Locked column shows how many locked objects each
user has.
To update this list, select an active drawing. Click User List.
Select All
Highlight all drawings in the list.
Clear All
Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list.
Remove Locks
Unlock objects locked by the selected users. Be careful not to unlock objects
that other users are currently editing, as this may cause work to be lost.
Only Superusers can remove locks for other users.
See also:
■ To create a drawing index (page 848)
■ To release all locked objects (page 456)
Drawing Set Display Filter dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify separate filters for file names and for descriptions.
Filters can include wild-card characters:
Asterisk (*) can represent any set of letters.
Question mark (?) can represent any single letter.
For example, if you enter *\ch* in the file name filter field, the drawing list
displays all file names that start with the letters ch in all directories.
1266 | Chapter 33 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
To display drawings in a specific directory, enter the path to that directory.
For example, enter c:\office1\* to view all drawings in the office1 directory.
When specifying drives, use the drive aliases assigned in the Drive Alias
Administration dialog box (page 1271)
Nested drawings are also filtered. If the parent drawing is filtered out, none
of its nested drawings appear in the list. If the parent drawing appears in the
list, the filter applies to the nested drawings.
To display all drawings, enter *\*.dwg in the File Name box. To display all
descriptions, enter * in the Description box.
Drawing Settings dialog box
In this dialog box, you can change the drawing description, specify simple
transformation settings, or define save back extents.
To change a drawing's settings, select the drawing in the list. Enter the new
information in the fields in the dialog box. When you finish, click Apply. You
can then select a new drawing.
Specify the transformation of objects in the source drawing as they are brought
into the current drawing. Autodesk Map 3D stores this information with the
current drawing. The source drawing does not change. This feature is useful
if you want to overlay drawings or tile them.
Active Drawings list Select the drawing to change.
This list displays all the active drawings in the drawing set. If a coordinate
system code is assigned to the drawing, that code is displayed in the left
column.
Filter Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If the
parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is not
displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box (page 1266), you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
Drawing Description box Enter a new description for the selected drawing.
Descriptions make it easy for you to remember what is in a drawing. If a
description is assigned to the drawing, it appears in the drawing list instead
of the file name.
Drawing Settings dialog box | 1267
Simple Transformation area
Specify the transformation of objects in the source drawing as they are brought
into the current drawing. Autodesk Map 3D stores this information with the
current drawing. The source drawing does not change. This feature is useful
if you want to overlay drawings or tile them.
If the document has a coordinate system code assigned to it, you cannot use
the simple transformation section.
When objects are saved back to their source drawings, their original scale,
offset, and rotation are restored. To permanently transform an object, use the
ADETRANSFORM (Transform command) (page 1047) command.
Simple Transformation
Turn the simple transformation settings on and off.
When not selected, the settings are not used.
If the document has a global coordinate system code assigned to it, you
cannot use the simple transformation option.
Simple transformations let you tile, scale, or overlay drawings.
Scale box
Specify the change in scale of objects from the source drawing to the current
drawing.
Enter a real number. For example, enter 2 to double the size of objects, or
enter .5 to halve the size of objects.
Rotation box
Specify the rotation of objects from the source drawing to the current
drawing.
1268 | Chapter 33 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Enter an angle. For example, enter 90 to rotate objects 90 degrees in the
current direction. (To view or change the current direction, open the source
drawing and use the DDUNITS command.)
Offset (X,Y) box
Specify the offset of objects from the source drawing to the current drawing.
Enter two real numbers (one for X and one for Y), separated by a comma.
For example, enter 5,-4 to offset objects 5 units to the right and 4 units
down. (To view or change the current unit, open the source drawing and
use the DDUNITS command.)
If you specify save back extents for the drawing, those extents are also offset.
Pick <
Display the drawing, where you can specify points to determine the scale,
rotation, and offset.
■ The difference between the old base point and the new base point is the
offset for objects in the source drawing.
■ The difference in angle between the two old points and the two new
points is the rotation. 0,0 is the base point for the rotation.
■ The ratio of the length between the two new points to the length
between the two old points is the change in scale.
Save Back Extents area
Specify the area that is saved back to the source drawing. By specifying save
back extents, you can prevent boundaries from expanding and intruding on
the boundaries of adjacent drawings. These save back extents are stored with
the source drawing.
Save Back Extents list
Displays the coordinates of the current save back extents.
Define <
Display your drawing, where you can select points to specify the save back
extents.
NOTE This displays the current window. To view or change the extents for the
entire drawing, zoom to drawing extents before starting this command. To
zoom drawing extents, from the menu bar choose View ➤ Extents.
Show <
Display the current save back extents in the current drawing. Save back
extents are indicated by a dotted line.
Drawing Settings dialog box | 1269
NOTE This shows only the extents displayed in the current window. To view
the extents for the entire drawing, zoom to drawing extents before starting this
command. To zoom drawing extents, from the menu bar choose View ➤ Extents.
Reset
Reset the values to the original drawing extents adjusted for simple
transformations.
The default save back extents are the extents of the source drawing adjusted
for simple transformation.
See also:
■ Modifying Attached Drawing Settings (page 136)
Drawing Statistics dialog box
This dialog box displays information about the active source drawings in the
current drawing.
Select the drawings you want information about. Click an information button.
Autodesk Map 3D searches the selected source drawings and displays the
information in the box at the bottom of the screen.
Active Drawings list Lists all the active attached drawings in the current
drawing.
■ Use the Select All to select all drawings.
■ Use the Clear All to remove the highlighting from all items.
■ Use the Filter to filter the list of drawings.
Filter Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If the
parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is not
displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box (page 1266), you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
Object Counts Displays the number and type of objects in the source drawing.
1270 | Chapter 33 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Symbol Tables Displays symbol tables and their values for each of the selected
drawings. Symbol tables include Blocks, Layers, Linetypes, Text Styles, and
Regapps, which are registered applications that contain xdata (extended data)
within the drawing.
Object Data For the selected drawings, this displays
■ Link Templates
■ Object Data tables
■ Attributes
Feature Classes Displays feature classes used in the selected drawings and
the number of features in each feature class.
See also:
■ To view information about attached drawings (page 141)
Drive Alias Administration dialog box
Autodesk Map 3D creates a drive alias for drive C. You must create drive aliases
for all other drives that you use.
Drive aliases are useful as typing shortcuts or as a reminder of what drawings
are contained in the directory. In addition, they make it easy for multiple
users to share drawings.
The alias you assign appears in the Drive list whenever you select drawings.
To modify an existing drive alias, select it in the list, enter a new Actual Path,
and click Update.
To create a new drive alias, enter a new Drive Alias, enter an Actual Path, and
click Add.
Drive List Lists aliases you've created.
Drive Alias box Enter the alias to use.
The name must be unique, use only alphanumeric characters (including
hyphen and underscore), contain no spaces or colons, and start with a
character.
Actual Path box Enter the path, including drive or server name and directories.
If you are not sure of the drive or directory, click Browse.
Drive Alias Administration dialog box | 1271
Note that xrefs and raster objects use their assigned paths and are not affected
by drive aliases.
See also:
■ To create a drive alias (page 134)
Generate Object Data Index dialog box
In the Object Data Tables list, select a table. In the Fields list, select the object
data fields to include in the index.
If a table has fields selected for the index, the table is checked in the list.
See also:
■ To create a drawing index (page 848)
Index Maintenance dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify which types of indexes to create for the selected
source drawings. Indexes speed up queries, but they add to the size of your
source drawings. If size is an issue, create indexes for just the types of queries
you perform most often. For example, if you mostly perform queries based
on location, create just a location index.
■ To create an index, select the check box for the type of index you want.
To create an object data index, click Object Data. At the Generate Object
Data Index dialog box (page 1272) select the tables and fields to index.
To improve the performance of object data and SQL queries, create object
data and SQL indexes for all drawings in the data set, even if they don't
contain object data or SQL link information.
■ To remove an existing index, select the check box for that type of index.
To remove an object data index, click Object Data. At the Remove Object
Data Index dialog box (page 1273) select the tables and fields to remove from
the index.
Removing an index reduces the size of the drawing, and reduces the time
it takes to save the drawing.
1272 | Chapter 33 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Because indexes are saved in the source drawing, you can create indexes only
if the drawing is not in a read-only directory and you have Edit Drawing
privileges. See User Administration dialog box (page 1274).
Once you create an index, Autodesk Map 3D automatically updates the index
each time you change the drawing and save the changes back. However, you
will need to recreate the index in the following circumstances:
■ If you notice that queries are taking longer. Over time, automatic updates
can cause degeneration of an index. It is a good idea to periodically use
this command to recreate the indexes.
■ If you modify a drawing with AutoCAD or with Autodesk Map 3D when
the drawing is not attached, you need to use this command to recreate the
indexes.
NOTE To check if a source drawing has an index created, select the drawing in
the Drawing Maintenance dialog box. Click Drawing Index to display the Index
Maintenance dialog box. If the source drawing contains a usable index, the check
box for that index is not selected. If the drawing does not contain an index, or if
the index is out of date, the check box for the index is selected.
See also:
■ To create a drawing index (page 848)
Remove Object Data Index dialog box
In the Object Data Tables list, select a table. In the Fields list, select the object
data fields to remove from the index.
If a table has fields selected to be removed from the index, the table is checked
in the list.
See also:
■ To create a drawing index (page 848)
Remove Object Data Index dialog box | 1273
Select Alias dialog box
More than one alias is associated with the path to the file you selected. Select
the alias to use with this drawing.
Undefined Alias Referenced dialog box
The drawing you are activating or attaching has an alias assigned to it that is
not defined.
■ To attach this drawing without defining an alias, click Skip. You cannot
activate the drawing until you define a path for the alias. To define the
alias later, see To create a drive alias (page 134).
■ To define a path for the alias now, click Define <.
See also:
■ To create a drive alias (page 134)
User Administration dialog box
Add or delete users or modify user settings:
■ To add a user, enter information in the User Profile section. Click Add.
■ To delete a user, select the name and click Delete.
■ To modify a user, select the name and change information in the User
Profile section. Click Update.
User List Lists all users set up for Autodesk Map 3D.
Login Name box Specify the login name for the user.
■ Each login name must be unique.
■ Login names are not case-sensitive.
■ The login name cannot contain spaces or any of the following characters.
"/\[];:|=,+?<>
1274 | Chapter 33 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Password box Specify the password for the user.
■ Passwords are case-sensitive.
■ Passwords cannot contain spaces.
For a new user, you might want to set the password to PASSWORD and have
the user change it to something they can remember.
To be effective, passwords should have a combination of letters and numbers,
and a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters.
Privileges
Select privileges for the user.
Superuser
Select this option to let the user perform user administration tasks, set
system options, and perform any other Autodesk Map 3D operation.
Alter Drawing Set
Select this option to let the user attach and detach drawings. If this option
is not selected, the user can activate and deactivate drawings, but cannot
attach and detach them.
Alter Feature Class
Select this option to let the user define and edit feature class definitions. If
this option is not selected, users can only assign feature classes and change
the current feature definition file.
Edit Drawing
Select this option to let the user edit objects and save them back to source
drawings. If this option is not selected, the user can edit objects but cannot
save them back to source drawings.
Draw Query
Select this option to let the user execute Draw mode queries, which copy
objects into the current drawing. If this option is not selected, users can do
Preview and Report mode queries only.
See also:
■ To add a new user (page 70)
User Administration dialog box | 1275
User Information dialog box
This dialog box displays information about the current Autodesk Map 3D user.
To change your privileges, see your system administrator.
Login Name Displays the name used to log in to Autodesk Map 3D.
Privileges
Displays the privileges of the current user.
Superuser
User can perform user administration tasks, set system options, and perform
any other Autodesk Map 3D operation.
Alter Drawing Set
User can attach and detach drawings. If this option is not selected, the user
can activate and deactivate drawings, but cannot attach and detach them.
Alter Feature Class
User can define and edit feature class definitions. If this option is not
selected, users can only assign feature classes and change the current feature
definition file.
Edit Drawing
User can edit objects and save them back to source drawings. If this option
is not selected, the user can edit objects but cannot save them back to source
drawings.
Draw Query
User can execute Draw mode queries, which copy objects into the current
drawing. If this option is not selected, users can do Preview and Report
mode queries only.
User Login dialog box
Log in to Autodesk Map 3D on this computer. If you do not know your login
name or password, check with your system administrator.
Some actions, such as modifying object data tables and removing locks for
other users, require Superuser access. To log in as a Superuser, enter the login
name Superuser. Enter the password SUPERUSER. In offices where the system
administrator reserves the Superuser login name, contact your system
1276 | Chapter 33 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
administrator to gain access to object data tables, object locks, or system
options.
If user login is not required, you can log in at any time, even if you did not
log in at the beginning of your current Autodesk Map 3D session. For example,
you can log in under your own name, or as a different user, while working in
a drawing with active source drawings.
See also:
■ To log in to ProductName (page 118)
User Login dialog box | 1277
Thematic Mapping Dialog
Boxes (Older Method) 34
In this chapter
■ MAPTHEMATIC (Thematic
Mapping command)
■ Add Thematic Range dialog box
■ Edit Thematic Range dialog box
■ Insert Thematic Range dialog box
■ Object Thematic Mapping dialog
box
■ Property Expression dialog box
■ Select Linetype dialog box
■ Select Pattern dialog box
■ Select Style dialog box
■ Thematic Display Options dialog
box
■ Thematic Legend Design dialog
box
■ Topology Thematic Mapping dialog
box
1279
MAPTHEMATIC (Thematic Mapping command)
Use this command to create a thematic map that uses color, fill, line format,
symbols, or text to display information about objects or topology.
Respond to the prompt:
Enter thematic source (Object/Topology)<T>: Enter o to create a thematic
map based on objects or enter t to create a thematic map based on topology.
For information on thematic maps based on objects, see Object Thematic
Mapping dialog box (page 1282).
For information on thematic maps based on topology, see Topology Thematic
Mapping dialog box (page 1288).
Add Thematic Range dialog box
Use the following steps to add a range to the bottom of the Distribution list.
1 Select the first line in the list.
2 Enter a value for the display property, or click Select.
3 Specify any additional values for the display property.
For example, if you are modifying the line format, specify the linetype,
width, and color for objects that fall within this range.
4 In the list, select Value.
5 Enter the value for the range. Objects fall within the range if their
thematic expression value matches this value.
For a continuous range, enter the maximum value for the range.
For a discrete range, enter the exact value for the range, or click Select.
6 In the list, select Desc.
7 Enter a description for this range, like Small, Medium, and Large, or
Sandy, Gravel, and Swamp. If you use a legend in your thematic map,
this description becomes the label for this range.
8 Click OK.
1280 | Chapter 34 Thematic Mapping Dialog Boxes (Older Method)
Edit Thematic Range dialog box
Use this dialog box to modify a range in the Thematic Display Options dialog
box.
1 Select the line to modify. The current value is transferred to the Edit Value
box.
2 Enter the new information, or click Select to select from a list of values.
3 Press Enter to update the line, or select a new line to modify.
4 When you finish, click OK.
Insert Thematic Range dialog box
You can insert a range above the selected range in the Distribution list in the
Thematic Display Options dialog box.
1 Select the first line in the list.
2 Enter a value for the display property, or select from a list of values.
3 Select any additional values for the display property, such as linetype,
width, and color for objects that fall within this range.
4 In the list, select Value.
5 Enter the value for the range. Objects fall within the range if their
thematic expression value matches this value.
For a continuous range, enter the maximum value for the range.
For a discrete range, enter the exact value for the range, or select from a
list of values.
6 In the list, select Desc.
7 Enter a description for this range, such as Small, Medium, and Large, or
Sandy, Gravel, and Swamp. If you use a legend in your thematic map,
this value becomes the label for this range.
8 Click OK.
The new range is inserted above the selected range in the Distribution list in
the Thematic Display Options dialog box.
Edit Thematic Range dialog box | 1281
Object Thematic Mapping dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a thematic map that uses color, fill, line format,
symbols, or text to display information about objects
Specify the objects to modify, the data to use, and the properties to use to
display the data.
Because this command modifies objects as they are retrieved by the query,
the objects must be in source drawings and must not be already queried into
the current drawing.
Objects of Interest
Specify the objects to modify.
If more than one option is selected, the objects must meet all the selected
criteria. For example, if you select both Limit To Location and Limit To Layers,
the objects must be on the specified layer and within the specified location.
Limit To Location
Finds objects only if they are in a specified location. To define the location,
click Define.
Limit To Layers
Finds objects only if they are on selected layers. To select layers, click Layers.
Limit To Blocks
Finds objects only if they are in selected blocks. To select blocks, click Blocks.
Thematic Expression
Specify the data to use when determining how to alter the objects.
Expression
Click Expression to display the Expression dialog box (page 988), where you
can select the property, object data, or external data to use.
NOTE The Link Template list includes only link templates for active source
drawings. If the link template you want is not listed, be sure it is defined in the
source drawing. In addition, be sure the appropriate data source is attached
and connected in the current drawing.
Display Parameters
Specify how to alter the objects.
1282 | Chapter 34 Thematic Mapping Dialog Boxes (Older Method)
Display Property box
Select how to display the data. You can display ranges of data using different
colors, fills, line formats, symbols (blocks), or text.
You can set an option to determine whether the fill is an associative hatch
object. See the Query tab of the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page
1254).
Range Division options
Specify whether the data is discrete or continuous.
Select Continuous for numerical data that can include any value in a
continuous range. Click Define to specify how to divide the range. For
example, you could divide property values into five continuous groups:
low, medium-low, medium, medium-high, and high.
Select Discrete for numerical values that are not continuous or for character
values. Click Define to specify the possible values.
Define
Display the Thematic Display Options dialog box, where you can specify
the property alteration for each range (for continuous data) or for each
possible value (for discrete data).
Only objects that fall into one of the defined ranges will be modified. If an
object is included in the thematic map, but it does not have data or
properties that fall into one of the ranges you define, the object will appear
in the map but will not be altered.
Options
Load
Load an existing query.
If the query includes statements not supported by thematic queries, those
statements are skipped.
Save
Save the current thematic query definition.
If the query definition includes legend information, save the query as an
external query. Internal queries do not retain legend information.
Property Expression dialog box
Select a property.
Topology properties are not available when you do object thematic mapping.
Property Expression dialog box | 1283
You cannot query using constant attributes. Instead, use the block name in
the query.
Topology Property
Area
For polygon topologies, modify objects based on the area of the polygon.
Length
For network topologies, modify objects based on their length.
Perimeter
For polygon topologies, modify objects based on the perimeter of the
polygon.
Direction
For network topologies, modify objects based on their direction.
Direct Resistance
For network topologies, modify objects based on their direct resistance.
Reverse Resistance
For network topologies, modify objects based on their reverse resistance.
Object Property
Area
Modify objects based on their area.
Area only works on circles, ellipses, polylines, splines, regions, and solids.
It does not work on objects created from line segments. For example, Area
will not work on a rectangle created of four separate lines.
Block Name
Modify objects based on their block name.
Color
Modify objects based on their color.
Elevation
Modify objects based on their elevation.
Elevation is the Z value from the XY plane where the object is defined.
Object Type
Modify objects based on their type.
Group
Modify objects based on the groups they are members of.
1284 | Chapter 34 Thematic Mapping Dialog Boxes (Older Method)
Layer
Modify objects based on their layer.
Length
Modify objects based on their length.
Linetype
Modify objects based on their linetype.
Text Style
Modify objects based on their text style.
Text Value
Modify objects based on their text value.
Thickness
Modify objects based on their thickness.
Thickness is the distance an object is extruded above or below its elevation.
Select Linetype dialog box
Select the linetype.
Click OK.
Select Pattern dialog box
Select the pattern.
Click OK.
Select Style dialog box
Select the style.
Click OK.
Thematic Display Options dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify how to modify objects for thematic maps.
Select Linetype dialog box | 1285
Display Property Shows the object properties that will be modified in the
thematic map.
Thematic Expression Shows the property or data to use to determine how
to modify the display property.
Number Of Ranges Shows the number of ranges you have defined.
Distribution list
Displays information about each defined range.
Range column
Range number.
The next set of columns specify how the display property should be modified
for objects that fall in the range.
Value column
Range value. This value determines whether objects fall in this range. For
continuous values, a value falls in the range if it is less than or equal to the
range value. For discrete values, a value falls in the range if it equals the
range value.
NOTE If you create ranges that do not include all possible values, objects whose
values do not fall into a specified range will not be modified. For example, if
your final range has a value of 50,000, any objects with a value of over 50,000
will not be modified. To be sure that the highest value is included in the final
range, specify a value that is higher than the highest value associated with an
object.
Desc column
Description of the range. This description appears in the legend.
Edit Display the Edit Thematic Range dialog box (page 1281), where you can
modify the current range.
Insert Display the Insert Thematic Range dialog box (page 1281), where you
define a new range that is added above the selected range.
Add Display the Add Thematic Range dialog box (page 1280), where you define
a new range that is added to the bottom of the list.
Delete Delete the selected range.
Legend Display the Thematic Legend Design dialog box (page 1287), where you
design a legend for the thematic map.
1286 | Chapter 34 Thematic Mapping Dialog Boxes (Older Method)
Thematic Legend Design dialog box
Use this dialog box to add a legend to a thematic map.
Create Legend Creates a legend for the thematic modifications. Otherwise,
no legend is created.
Create On Layer box Specify the layer on which the legend should be created.
Enter a new layer in the box or click Layers to select from a list of layers in
the active drawings.
Insertion Point area Specify the X and Y coordinates for the legend, or click
Pick < to select the insert point.
Display Order area Select whether the ranges are displayed in ascending order
(lowest to highest) or descending order, based on the range numbers.
Symbols area
Specify settings for the symbols in the legend.
Boxed Symbols
Draws frames around symbols.
Size X and Size Y
Determine the width and height of symbols.
Offset
Symbol offset: the vertical distance between symbols.
Labels area
Specify the text Size and text Style for label text.
Offset
Label offset: the horizontal distance between the symbol and the
accompanying text label.
Thematic Legend Design dialog box | 1287
Topology Thematic Mapping dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a thematic map that uses color, fill, line format,
symbols, or text to display information about a topology.
You can use any topology that can be loaded into the current, open drawing.
The topology can be stored entirely in the current drawing, or it can loaded
from attached, source drawings.
Objects of Interest Specify the objects to modify.
Topology Name Select the topology containing the objects to modify. If the
topology is not loaded, click Load and load it.
Limit To Location Finds objects only if they are in a specified location. To
define the location, click Define.
If you select Limit To Location, the objects must be in the specified topology
and within the specified location.
Thematic Expression Select the data to use to determine the modification.
This can be data stored in an object data table, or stored in an external
database, or based on the properties of the object.
Expression Click the Expression to display the Expression dialog box (page
988), where you can select the property or data to use.
NOTE The Link Template list includes only link templates for active source
drawings. If the link template you want is not listed, be sure it is defined in the
source drawing. In addition, be sure the appropriate data source is attached and
connected in the current drawing.
Display Parameters Specify the property to alter, and specify the ways to alter
the property.
1288 | Chapter 34 Thematic Mapping Dialog Boxes (Older Method)
Display Property box Select how o display the data. You can display ranges
of data using different colors, fills, line formats, symbols (blocks), or text.
You can set an option to determine whether the fill is an associative hatch
object. See the Query tab of the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254).
Range Division options Specify whether the data is discrete or continuous.
Select Continuous for numerical data that can include any value in a
continuous range. Click Define to specify how to divide the range. For example,
you could divide property values into five continuous groups: low,
medium-low, medium, medium-high, and high. Select Discrete for numerical
values that are not continuous or for character values. Click Define to specify
the possible values.
Define Display the Thematic Display Options dialog box (page 1285), where
you can specify the property alteration for each range (for continuous data)
or for each possible value (for discrete data).
Only objects that fall into one of the defined ranges will be modified. If an
object is included in the thematic map, but it does not have data or properties
that fall into one of the ranges you define, the object will appear in the map
but will not be altered.
Options Load an existing thematic query or save the current query.
Load Load an existing query.
If the query includes statements not supported by thematic queries, those
statements are skipped.
Save Save the current thematic query definition.
If the query definition includes legend information, save the query as an
external query. Internal queries do not retain legend information.
Topology Thematic Mapping dialog box | 1289
Topology Dialog Boxes
35
NOTE Topology functionality applies only to drawing In this chapter
objects. ■ MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction
command)
■ MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct
Resistance command)
■ MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse
Resistance command)
■ MAPLINKADD (Add Topology
Link command)
■ MAPLINKDEL (Delete Topology
Link command)
■ MAPLINKEDIT (Edit Topology
Link command)
■ MAPLINKREV (Reverse Direction
of Topology Link command)
■ MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology
Link command)
■ MAPNODADD (Add Topology
Node command)
■ MAPNODDEL (Delete Topology
Node command)
■ MAPNODEDIT (Edit Topology
Node command)
■ MAPNODINS (Insert Topology
Node command)
1291
■ MAPNODUPD (Update Topology
Node command)
■ MAPPOLYADD (Add Topology
Polygon command)
■ MAPPOLYDEL (Delete Topology
Polygon command)
■ MAPPOLYUPD (Update Topology
Polygon command)
■ Autodesk Map Confirmation dialog
box - MAPTOPOADMIN Delete
■ Autodesk Map Confirmation dialog
box - MAPTOPOEDIT
■ Autodesk Map Confirmation dialog
box - MAPTOPOADMIN Rename
■ Centroid Objects dialog box
■ Create Closed Polylines dialog box
■ Create Network Topology -
Create New Nodes dialog box
■ Create Network Topology - Select
Links dialog box
■ Create Network Topology - Select
Nodes dialog box
■ Create Node Topology - Select
Nodes dialog box
■ Create Polygon Topology - Create
New Centroids dialog box
■ Create Polygon Topology - Create
New Nodes dialog box
■ Create Polygon Topology - Select
Centroids dialog box
■ Create Polygon Topology - Select
Links dialog box
■ Create Polygon Topology - Select
Nodes dialog box
1292 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
■ Create Polygon Topology - Set
Error Markers dialog box
■ Create Topology - Select
Topology dialog box
■ Create Topology Warning dialog
box
■ Delete Topology dialog box
■ Edit Direct Resistance dialog box
■ Edit Direction dialog box
■ Edit Reverse Resistance dialog box
■ Edit Topology dialog box
■ Link Objects dialog box
■ Load Topology Conflict dialog box
■ Load Topology dialog box
■ Load Topology From Source
Drawing dialog box
■ Network Topology Analysis -
Choose Locations dialog box
■ Network Topology Analysis -
Output dialog box
■ Network Topology Analysis -
Resistance and Direction dialog
box
■ Network Topology Analysis -
Select Method dialog box
■ Node Objects dialog box -
Network and Polygon Topologies)
■ Node Objects dialog box (Node
topology)
■ Rename Topology dialog box
■ Select Data dialog box - Topology
Overlay
■ Topology Buffer - Create New
Centroids and Nodes dialog box
| 1293
■ Topology Buffer - New Topology
dialog box
■ Topology Buffer - Set Buffer
Distance dialog box
■ Topology Dissolve - Create New
Centroids and Nodes dialog box
■ Topology Dissolve - Create Nodes
dialog box
■ Topology Dissolve - New
Topology dialog box
■ Topology Dissolve - Object Data
dialog box
■ Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter
dialog box
■ Topology Overlay Analysis -
Analysis Type dialog box
■ Topology Overlay Analysis -
Create New Centroids and Nodes
dialog box
■ Topology Overlay Analysis -
Create Nodes dialog box
■ Topology Overlay Analysis - New
Topology dialog box
■ Topology Overlay Analysis -
Output Attributes dialog box
■ Topology Overlay Analysis - Select
Overlay Topology dialog box
■ Topology Query dialog box
■ Topology Query Result dialog box
■ Topology Selection dialog box
■ Topology Statistics dialog box
1294 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to edit the direction of a selected linear object in an existing
topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
for which you want to modify direction. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select objects: Use any selection method to select the objects.
Enter new value (Bi-directional/From->To/To->From)<B>: Enter B for
bi-directional, F for From->To, or T for To->From.
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to edit the direct resistance of a selected link or node in
an existing topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology
information.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
for which you want to modify resistance. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Edit resistance of (Links/Nodes) <L>: Enter L for Links or N for Nodes.
Select objects: Use any selection method to select the objects.
Enter new direct resistance <1.000>: Enter a new value.
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command) | 1295
Use this command to edit the reverse resistance of a selected link an existing
topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
for which you want to modify resistance. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select objects: Use any selection method to select the objects.
Enter new reverse resistance <1.000>: Enter a new value.
MAPLINKADD (Add Topology Link command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for adding a link to a topology. The new command is MAPAL.
Use this command to add a link to an existing network or polygon topology
while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
to add the link to. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Enter first point: Enter the coordinates for the first point of the line, or select
the point.
Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width/<Endpoint of line>: For
information about this prompt, see the PLINE command in the AutoCAD
help.
You can use MAPLINKADD to add a link in three ways:
■ In space (connecting no existing nodes). Two new nodes are created at the
link endpoints in space.
■ From one existing node to a point in space. A new node is created at the
end point in space.
■ From one existing node to another existing node.
1296 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
A topology must have a node at the end points of all link objects. This node
is part of the topology data structure and is assigned a topology ID. However,
a node can be implicit (referenced in the topology data structure) or explicit
(a physical object in the drawing). Use the MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node
command) (page 1299) or MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node command) (page
1300) command to create a new node.
When you add a link to a topology, Autodesk Map 3D creates a node when
necessary. If the link joins two existing nodes, no new nodes are created.
Remember these features of nodes and links:
■ A node can reference many links.
■ A link can reference only two nodes.
■ Only one node can exist at a specific point.
If the new link splits an existing area in a polygon topology into two areas,
Autodesk Map 3D creates a new centroid and updates the existing centroid.
MAPLINKDEL (Delete Topology Link command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for deleting a link in a network topology. The new command is
MAPDL.
Use this command to delete a link from an existing network or polygon
topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
to delete the link from. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select object: Use any selection method to select the object to delete.
MAPLINKEDIT (Edit Topology Link command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
MAPLINKDEL (Delete Topology Link command) | 1297
Use this command to edit a link in an existing network or polygon topology
while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
to modify. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select link to edit: Select the object using any selection method.
For information about the prompts, see the PEDIT command in the AutoCAD
help.
You cannot delete the first or last vertex of a polyline.
MAPLINKREV (Reverse Direction of Topology Link
command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for reversing a link in a network topology. The new command is
MAPRL.
Use this command to reverse the direction of a link in an existing network
topology while maintaining the topology information.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
to modify. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select link to edit: Use any selection method to select the object whose
direction you want to reverse.
MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology Link command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When you modify a link using standard editing commands, the topology
information associated with the link is not updated. Use this command to
have the topology relationship information on the link updated. (If you
modified the link using an Autodesk Map 3D topology command, such as
1298 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
MAPLINKEDIT, the topology information was automatically updated and you
do not need to use this command.)
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
to modify. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select link to update: Use any selection method to select the object to update.
MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for adding a node to a topology. The new command is MAPAN.
Use this command to add a an existing block or point to a topology while
maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
to add the node to. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select block or point to add: Select an existing block or point.
You can use this operation to create a new block object at the location of an
existing implicit node. MAPNODADD prompts you to select the new block
or point object.
You cannot add a new node to a topology with this command. To insert a
node on an existing link, use the MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node
command) (page 1300) command.
MAPNODDEL (Delete Topology Node command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for deleting a node in a topology. The new command is MAPDN.
Use this command to delete a node from an existing topology while
maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node command) | 1299
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
to delete the node from. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select node to delete: Use any selection method to select the node to delete.
If the node has only one link, choose whether to delete the dangling link.
If the node has two links, the two links are combined. Choose which set of
object data to preserve.
You cannot delete a node that has more than two links.
MAPNODEDIT (Edit Topology Node command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to move a node in an existing topology while maintaining
the integrity of the topology information.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
to modify. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select node to update: Use any selection method to select the object to edit.
Specify new insertion point: Enter the coordinates of a point or select a point
onscreen. If a node already exists in the new location, you are prompted to
delete one of the nodes.
The node is moved to the new location, and all associated links move their
endpoints.
MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for inserting a node in a topology. The new command is MAPIN.
Use this command to insert a node on an existing link while maintaining the
integrity of the topology information.
1300 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
to modify. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Specify insertion point: Enter the coordinates of a point or select a point on
the screen. If any block definitions exist in the drawing, you are prompted
for a block to reference. The default block name is the last block name
referenced in the drawing.
To add a node at the end of a dangling link, or to add a node not on a link,
use the MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node command) (page 1299) command.
MAPNODUPD (Update Topology Node command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When you modify a node using standard editing commands, the topology
data associated with the node is not updated. Use this command to have the
topology relationship data on the node updated. (If you modified the node
using an Autodesk Map 3D topology command, such as MAPNODEDIT, the
topology data was updated automatically and you do not need to use this
command.)
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
to modify. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select node to update: Use any selection method to select the object to update.
MAPPOLYADD (Add Topology Polygon command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for adding a polygon to a polygon topology. The new command
is MAPAP.
Use this command to add a centroid in an existing topology while maintaining
the integrity of the topology information.
Respond to the prompts:
MAPNODUPD (Update Topology Node command) | 1301
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
to modify. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select objects: Enter the coordinates of a point or select a point on screen.
The point must be in a defined area that does not currently contain a centroid.
MAPPOLYDEL (Delete Topology Polygon command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for deleting a polygon from a polygon topology. The new command
is MAPDP.
Use this command to delete a polygon from an existing topology while
maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
to modify. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select objects: Use any selection method to select the centroid of the polygon
to delete.
MAPPOLYUPD (Update Topology Polygon command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When you modify a polygon using standard editing commands, the topology
data associated with the polygon is not updated. Use this command to have
the topology data on the polygon updated. (If you modified the polygon using
an Autodesk Map 3D topology command, such as MAPPOLYADD, Autodesk
Map 3D updated the topology for you.)
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>: Enter the name of the topology
to modify. To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select object: Use any selection method to select the centroid of the polygon
to update.
1302 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Autodesk Map Confirmation dialog box -
MAPTOPOADMIN Delete
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
If you select Delete Topology Objects, the referenced objects are deleted from
the current drawing, if either of the following conditions exist:
■ It was loaded from the source and all objects were created when loaded.
■ It was loaded from the current drawing.
Autodesk Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOEDIT
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
The object you are modifying is referenced by more than one topology. If you
modify the object in the selected topology, the other topologies may be invalid.
You must To update a topology (page 584) the other topologies.
Autodesk Map Confirmation dialog box -
MAPTOPOADMIN Rename
Before you rename a topology:
■ Attach all source drawings that are referenced by the topology. If the source
drawings are not attached, you could corrupt your data set.
■ Load the topology. The topology needs to be completely represented, either
in source files or in the current drawing.
■ You cannot rename a topology if there are any queried objects in the
current drawing. You must save all queried objects back to their source
drawings or detach them from their source drawings before you can rename
any topology.
■ Be sure the Create Backup File Of Source Drawing option is not selected
on the Save Back tab of the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254).
Autodesk Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOADMIN Delete | 1303
You cannot undo this rename operation using the UNDO command.
Centroid Objects dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When you create a topology, use this dialog box to select the centroids to
include in the topology. Centroid information is stored as object data and
saved with the map. Each centroid is given a unique ID number, which is
automatically processed whenever you use a topology command.
Object Selection
Select Automatically / Manually options
■ Select Automatically selects all objects that meet the object type and
filter criteria.
■ Select Manually lets you manually select objects for the topology. Click
Select < to select objects.
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects. If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored.
Layer Filters box
Specify which layers to search for objects to be used for the topology. Enter
an asterisk (*) to search all layers. To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
Block Filters box
Specify which blocks to search for objects to be used for the topology.
■ To search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*).
■ To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks.
■ To select point objects, enter ACAD_POINT.
Object Creation
Create on Layer box
If new nodes or centroids are created, specify on which layer they should
be placed. To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
1304 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Create Using box
If new nodes or centriods are created, specify what block to use to create
them.
■ To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks.
■ To create nodes or centroids as a point, leave the box blank or enter
ACAD_POINT.
See also:
■ Creating a Topology (page 528)
Create Closed Polylines dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Create polylines from a polygon topology.
Topology Name
Name box
Select the topology you want.
The list displays topologies loaded from the current drawing. If the topology
you want is not listed, click Load and load it.
Type
Displays the type of the selected topology.
Description
Displays the description of the selected topology.
Number of Polygons Referenced
Displays the number of polygons referenced by the selected topology. If
the topology is loaded as partial, this is the number of polygons in the
partial subset.
How to Close
Create on Layer box
Specify a layer for the new plines.
Click Layers to select from a list of layers in the current drawing or enter a
new layer name.
Create Closed Polylines dialog box | 1305
Group Complex Polygons
Select this option to group all closed plines that make up the original
complex topology polygon. A complex polygon is one that includes islands.
If the islands themselves have nested islands or other polygons, these nested
polygons will form a separate grouping automatically, creating different
levels of grouping. If two or more inner polygons are not nested but share
the same outer boundary, they will be treated as one group.
Copy Object Data from Centroid to Pline
Select this option to copy object data from the centroid to the closed pline
that is created.
Object data on islands are copied to the outer polygon edge.
Copy Database Links from Centroid to Pline check box
Select this option to copy database links from the centroid to the closed
pline that is created.
Database links on islands are copied to the outer polygon edge.
See also:
■ To create closed polylines from a polygon topology (page 590)
Create Network Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When creating a network topology, you can create node objects at the endpoint
of links.
Create New Nodes Specify whether or not to create nodes in the current
object to complete the topology. (Nodes are optional.)
Layer If new nodes are created, you can specify a new layer or click the down
arrow to select from a list of layers in the drawing set.
Point Object for Node Creation If new nodes are created, specify what block
to use to create them.
■ To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down
arrow and select from the list.
■ To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse, and select
the file you want to use. Selecting this file will insert the entire DWG as a
single block.
1306 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
■ To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Cancel Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name
for the topology and click Finish.
See also:
■ To create a network topology (page 535)
Create Network Topology - Select Links dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
To create a network topology, select the links to include in the topology. You
can select all links in the map or select them manually. You can also filter
(restrict) link selection to a subset of links, in which you include only the links
that are on specified layers and in specified object classes.
Link information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each link
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select All Include all links that meet the filter criteria.
Select Manually Include only the links that you manually select in the map.
Click Select Objects to select the links. Only links that meet the filter criteria
will be selected.
Layers Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) link selection to a subset of
links, in which you include only the links that are on the specified layers. This
filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers, enter an
asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Object Classes Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) link selection
to a subset of links, in which you include only the links that are in the specified
object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select
Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box
blank.
Create Network Topology - Select Links dialog box | 1307
Cancel Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next Click to display the Create Network Topology - Select Nodes dialog box
(page 1308).
Finish Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name
for the topology and click Finish.
See also:
■ To create a network topology (page 535)
Create Network Topology - Select Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
To create a network topology, select the nodes to include in the topology.
Nodes are useful when performing some types of analysis.
You can select all nodes in the map or select them manually. You can also
filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of nodes, in which you include only
the nodes that are on specified layers, are of specified block types, or in
specified object classes.
Node information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each node
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select All Include all nodes that meet the filter criteria.
Select Manually Include only the nodes that you manually select in the map.
Click Select Objects to select the nodes. Only nodes that meet the filter criteria
will be selected.
Layers Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of
nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are on the specified layers.
This filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers, enter an
asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Block Names Specify which blocks to search for nodes to be used in the
topology. To search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. To
select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Select Blocks.
To select point objects, select ACAD_POINT from the list.
1308 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Object Classes Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) node selection
to a subset of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are in the
specified object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click
Select Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the
box blank.
Cancel Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next Click to display the Create Network Topology - Create New Nodes dialog
box (page 1306).
Finish Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name
for the topology and click Finish.
See also:
■ To create a network topology (page 535)
Create Node Topology - Select Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
To create a node topology, select the nodes to include. You can select all nodes
in the map or select them manually. You can also filter (restrict) node selection
to a subset of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are on specified
layers, are of specified block types, or in specified object classes.
Node information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each node
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select All Include all nodes that meet the filter criteria.
Select Manually Include only the nodes that you manually select in the map.
Click the Select Objects to select the nodes. Only nodes that meet the filter
criteria will be selected.
Layers Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of
nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are on the specified layers.
This filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers, enter an
asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Create Node Topology - Select Nodes dialog box | 1309
Block Names Specify which blocks to search for nodes to be used in the
topology. To search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. To
select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Select Blocks.
To select point objects, select ACAD_POINT from the list.
Object Classes Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) node selection
to a subset of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are in the
specified object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click
Select Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the
box blank.
Cancel Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name
for the topology and click Finish.
See also:
■ To create a node topology (page 532)
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Centroids dialog
box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Create centroids for any areas that are missing centroids and specify the layer
and block to use for the new centroids.
If you do not select the Create Missing Centroids option, and an area is missing
a centroid, you are notified that the topology has not been created. The areas
that are missing centroids are marked or highlighted using the error markers
you specify in the Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box
(page 1315).
Create Missing Centroids Creates centroids where needed.
Layer Specify the layer on which to place the new centroids. Enter a layer
name or click the down arrow to select from a list of layers in the drawing set.
If a layer you want is not listed, it may be frozen or locked.
1310 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Point Object for Centroid Creation Specify the block to use to represent the
new centroids. To create centroids using an existing block, click the down
arrow and select the name of the block from the list. To use a point instead
of a block, select ACAD_POINT. To use a block saved as a DWG file, click
Browse, and select the file.
Cancel Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog
box (page 1315).
Finish Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name
for the topology and click Finish.
See also:
■ To create a polygon topology (page 540)
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When creating a polygon topology, you need to specify whether to have
Autodesk Map 3D create explicit node objects at the endpoints of links. If so,
specify the layer on which to place the new nodes and the block to use to
create the nodes.
Create New Nodes Specify whether nodes that are not present in the current
object selection should be created to complete the topology. (Explicit nodes
are optional.)
Layer If new nodes are created, specify on which layer they should be placed.
You can specify a new layer or click the down arrow to select from a list of
layers in the drawing set.
Point Object for Node Creation If new nodes are created, specify what block
to use to create them.
■ To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down
arrow and select from the list.
■ To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse, and select
the file you want to use. Selecting this file will insert the entire DWG as a
single block.
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box | 1311
■ To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Cancel Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog
box (page 1312).
Finish Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name
for the topology and click Finish.
See also:
■ To create a polygon topology (page 540)
Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Each polygon in a polygon topology has a centroid, which is a point or block
element within the polygon, and contains information about the area it
encloses. Centroid information is stored as object data and saved with the
map. Each centroid is given a unique ID number, which is automatically
processed whenever you use a topology command.
Use this dialog box to select the point and block objects to use as centroids
for the polygons.
You can select all point or block elements in the map or select them manually.
You can also filter (restrict) object selection to a subset of objects, in which
you include only the objects that are on specified layers, are of specified block
types, or in specified object classes.
Select All Use all point or block objects that meet the filter criteria as centroids.
Select Manually Include only the point or block objects that you manually
select in the map. Click Select Objects to select the objects. Only objects that
meet the filter criteria will be selected.
Layers Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) object selection to a subset
of objects, in which you include only the objects that are on the specified
layers. This filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects.
To select from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers,
enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
1312 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Block Names Specify the point or block objects to use to filter object selection.
To use all points and blocks, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. To
select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Select Blocks.
To select point objects, select ACAD_POINT.
Object Classes Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) object selection
to a subset of objects, in which you include only the objects that are in the
specified object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click
Select Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the
box blank.
Cancel Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Create New Centroids
dialog box (page 1310).
Finish Create the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available
after you enter a valid, unique name for the topology.
See also:
■ To create a polygon topology (page 540)
Create Polygon Topology - Select Links dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Every area forms a polygon; and each polygon in a polygon topology consists
of a set of links. When you create polygon topology, use this dialog box to
select the links to include in the topology.
You can select all links in the map or select them manually. You can also filter
(restrict) link selection to a subset of links, in which you include only the links
that are on specified layers and in specified object classes.
Link information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each link
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select All Include all links that meet the filter criteria.
Select Manually Include only the links that you manually select in the map.
Click the Select Objects to select the links. Only links that meet the filter
criteria will be selected.
Create Polygon Topology - Select Links dialog box | 1313
Layers Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) link selection to a subset of
links, in which you include only the links that are on the specified layers. This
filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers, enter an
asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Object Classes Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) link selection
to a subset of links, in which you include only the links that are in the specified
object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select
Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box
blank.
Cancel Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Select Nodes dialog box
(page 1314).
Finish Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name
for the topology and click Finish.
See also:
■ To create a polygon topology (page 540)
Create Polygon Topology - Select Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When you create a polygon topology, use this dialog box to select the nodes
you want to be part of the topology. Nodes are useful when performing some
types of analysis.
You can select all nodes in the map or select them manually. You can also
filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of nodes, in which you include only
the nodes that are on specified layers, are of specified block types, or in
specified object classes.
Node information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each node
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select All Include all nodes that meet the filter criteria.
1314 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Select Manually Include only the nodes that you manually select in the map.
Click the Select Objects to select the nodes. Only nodes that meet the filter
criteria will be selected.
Layers Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of
nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are on the specified layers.
This filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers, enter an
asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Block Names Specify which blocks to search for nodes to be used in the
topology. To search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. To
select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Select Blocks.
To select point objects, select ACAD_POINT from the list.
Object Classes Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) node selection
to a subset of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are in the
specified object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click
Select Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the
box blank.
Cancel Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog
box (page 1311).
Finish Create the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available
after you enter a valid, unique name for the topology.
See also:
■ To create a polygon topology (page 540)
Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify how to mark errors in your polygon topology.
If you mark errors with blocks, specify the size, shape, and color of the marker
blocks.
Autodesk Map 3D automatically checks for missing centroids and intersections.
These are considered serious errors and if detected, prevent topology creation.
Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box | 1315
You can choose whether you want Map to check for other potential problems,
including duplicate objects, incomplete areas, and sliver polygons.
Marker Parameters
Specify whether or not to highlight errors and/or mark them with blocks. Also
specify the marker size.
Highlight Errors
Highlight errors in red (nodes or centroids are highlighted with a red X).
To remove the highlighting, use the REDRAW, REGEN, or SAVE command.
Mark Errors With Blocks
Mark errors with blocks of the shape and color you specify below. To remove
a marker block, select it and then press Delete.
Marker Size
Specify the marker size as a percent of the screen size. A value between 3%
and 7% is usually suitable.
Missing Centroids Mark each area with a missing centroid with a block of
the shape and color you specify. This option is disabled if you selected the
Create Missing Centroids option on the previous dialog box.
Intersections Mark each duplicate object with a block of the shape and color
you specify.
Duplicate Centroids Select the check box to mark each area in the drawing
with more than one centroid. If you don't select the check box, Autodesk Map
3D creates a topology even if an area contains more than one point object
which qualifies to be a centroid. The topology data is added to only one of
the centroid objects.
Incomplete Areas Select the check box to detect links that are not part of a
closed area. If you don't select this option, Autodesk Map 3D ignores links
that are not part of a closed area and they do not receive any topology data.
Highlight Sliver Polygons Select the check box to check for sliver polygons
and mark their centroids with red Xs. Sliver polygons are long, thin polygons,
which can occur if data is digitized or drawn inaccurately. Map will create
your topology regardless of the sliver polygons, but you should check that
your data is accurate.
Cancel Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
1316 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Finish Create the topology using the current settings.
See also:
■ To create a polygon topology (page 540)
Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the type of topology to create and to specify the
topology name and description.
Before you create network or polygon topologies, you should clean up your
map to make sure it doesn't have certain types of errors. Node topologies do
not usually require cleanup. To clean up a map, click Modify menu ➤ Drawing
Cleanup, or use the MAPCLEAN command. For more information, see .
Topology Type Select the type of topology to create: node, network, or
polygon.
■ Node topologies involve independent points. Some examples of node
topologies are street lights, city-maintained trees, or drill holes for core
samples.Cleaning Up Maps (page 477)
■ Network topologies involve linear objects, and can have nodes where linear
objects connect. In addition, linear objects can have direction or resistance.
Some examples of network topologies are a water distribution network, a
river network, or a street network.
Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box | 1317
■ Polygon topologies involve polygons that define areas. Some examples of
polygon topologies are city blocks, land parcels, and political boundaries.
Topology Name Enter a unique name for the topology. Names can contain
letters, numbers, and the underscore, hyphen, and dollar characters. Always
use unique names for a topology; topologies with the same name may become
corrupt if you insert one drawing with a topology into another.
Topology Description Enter a description for the topology. Providing a
description can help you and other users identify the topology more easily.
Cancel Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back Disabled because this is the first dialog box in the list.
Next Display the next dialog box. This varies, depending on the type of
topology you are creating.
Finish Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name
for the topology and click Finish.
See also:
■ Creating a Topology (page 528)
1318 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Create Topology Warning dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
This dialog box warns you that you have selected 25,000 links for your
topology. Creating a topology of this size may take longer to create.
■ To continue creating the topology, click OK.
■ To return to the previous dialog box without creating a topology, click
Cancel.
If you don't want to see this warning again, select Do Not Warn Me Before
Creating A Large Topology.
Delete Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When you delete a topology, the topology relationship data is automatically
deleted from objects referenced by the selected topology.
Select Delete Geometry to delete the referenced objects from the current
drawing.
You can delete a topology under the following conditions:
■ It was loaded from source and all objects were created at load.
■ It was loaded from the current drawing and completed.
See also:
■ Managing Topologies (page 590)
Edit Direct Resistance dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Edit the direct resistance of a selected link or node in an existing topology
while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
Create Topology Warning dialog box | 1319
Value box Displays the direct resistance for the object. Enter a new value and
click OK.
The value must be numeric.
See also:
■ To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology (page 547)
Edit Direction dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Edit the direction of a selected linear object in an existing topology while
maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
Direction box Select the direction for the link from the list and click OK. You
can choose Bi-Directional, From -> To , or To -> From.
See also:
■ To specify the direction for a link (page 546)
Edit Reverse Resistance dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to edit the reverse resistance of the selected link in an
existing topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
Value box Displays the reverse resistance for the object. Enter a new value
and click OK.
The value must be numeric.
See also:
■ To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology (page 547)
1320 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Edit Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for editing geometry, direction, and resistance in a topology. There
are several new commands for editing topologies, such as MAPAN, MAPDL,
MAPMP. For a complete list, see Editing Topologies (page 549).
Use this dialog box to modify objects in a topology without damaging the
topology relationship data. If you modified objects using standard editing
commands, use the Update option to correct the topology relationship data
for that object.
Topology Name area Select a topology from the list of loaded topologies.
When you modify the selected object, the topology data for that object will
be updated in the selected topology.
NOTE If the object is referenced by more than one topology, you will need to
use the update option to modify the other topologies.
If the topology you want is not loaded, click Load.
Object Type Select the object type to edit. Object options are unavailable if
they do not match the topology type you are choosing.
Edit Operation Specify the edit operation to perform on the selected object
type.
Click OK to perform the specified operation and make your selections.
To cancel the topology edit operation, click Close.
Link Objects Polygon Objects Node Objects
MAPLINKEDIT (Edit Topology Link MAPPOLYDEL (Delete Topology MAPNODEDIT (Edit Topology
command) (page 1297) Polygon command) (page 1302) Node command) (page 1300)
MAPLINKADD (Add Topology Link MAPPOLYADD (Add Topology MAPNODADD (Add Topology
command) (page 1296) Polygon command) (page 1301) Node command) (page 1299)
MAPLINKDEL (Delete Topology MAPPOLYUPD (Update Topolo- MAPNODINS (Insert Topology
Link command) (page 1297) gy Polygon command) (page Node command) (page 1300)
1302)
Edit Topology dialog box | 1321
Link Objects Polygon Objects Node Objects
MAPLINKREV (Reverse Direction MAPNODDEL (Delete Topology
of Topology Link command) (page Node command) (page 1299)
1298)
MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology MAPNODUPD (Update Topology
Link command) (page 1298) Node command) (page 1301)
MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction com- MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resis-
mand) (page 1295) tance command) (page 1295)
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resis-
tance command) (page 1295)
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resis-
tance command) (page 1295)
See also:
■ Editing Topologies (page 549)
Link Objects dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When you create a topology, use this dialog box to select the links to include
in the topology. Link information is stored as object data and saved with the
map. Each link is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed
whenever you use a topology command.
Select Automatically/Manually options
■ Select Automatically selects all objects that meet the object type and filter
criteria.
■ Select Manually lets you manually select objects for the topology. Click
Select < to select objects.
1322 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Filter Selected Objects If this option is selected, only objects that are on the
specified layers or blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic
and manual selection of objects.
If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored.
Layer Filters box Specify which layers to search for objects to be used for the
topology.
Enter an asterisk (*) to search all layers.
To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
See also:
■ Creating Topologies (page 528)
Load Topology Conflict dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
This dialog box is displayed when Autodesk Map 3D detects duplicate topology
names in a source drawing and the current drawing. Load the topology from
either the source drawing or the current drawing.
Click OK.
Load Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to load a topology.
Topology Location options Select whether to load a topology that is in a
source drawing or in the current drawing.
Name Select the topology to load. If the list does not display the topology
you want, be sure you have selected the correct in the Topology Location area.
The list of topology names comes from the object data tables. These tables
may exist in the current drawing but the topology objects may only exist in
the source drawings.
Type Displays the type of the selected topology.
Description Displays the description of the selected topology.
Load Topology Conflict dialog box | 1323
Create Topology Objects When Loaded If the selected topology is from a
source drawing, select this check box to copy the topology objects into the
current drawing as the topology is loaded. If this option is not selected, the
objects are loaded but are not copied into the current drawing.
Select Topology Objects For Save Back Select this option to add objects in
the current drawing to the save back set if they are referenced by the selected
topology.
Audit Geometry Of Topology Objects Select this option to verify that objects
for the selected topology are geometrically correct. Any objects that are not
correct are highlighted.
Complete Existing Topology Objects If the selected topology is from the
current drawing, select this option to complete any incomplete objects in the
topology.
Use this option to ensure that the objects in the current drawing are available
for topology editing. Map queries all the objects from the source drawings
that are required to create a self-contained subset of the topology objects.
Load Topology From Source Drawing dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When loading a topology from a source drawing, this dialog appears, allowing
you to set the following options.
Topology Objects
Create Topology Objects When Loaded
If the selected topology is from a source drawing, select this check box to
copy the topology objects into the current drawing as the topology is loaded.
If this option is not selected, the objects are loaded but are not copied into
the current drawing.
Select Topology Objects For Save Back
Select this option to add objects in the current drawing to the save back set
if they are referenced by the selected topology. This means that the objects
will be saved back to their source drawings and replace the original objects.
1324 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Topology Verification
Audit Geometry of Topology Objects
Select this option to verify that objects for the selected topology are
geometrically correct. Any objects that are not correct are highlighted.
Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the locations to use for your network analysis.
When you choose points, Autodesk Map 3D locates the closest node to the
point you select.
■ Shortest path — Specify a starting point and ending point.
■ Best route — Specify a starting point and one or more visit points.
■ Flood trace — Specify a start point only.
Start Point Select a start point. Click Select Point to select a point in the map.
Press Enter to return to this dialog box. All three forms of network analysis
require a start point.
Visit Point Select one or more visit points for best route analysis. Click Select
Point to select points in the map. While in the map, click a point to select it.
Accept the point, cancel the selected point, or select additional points:
■ To accept the point and return to the dialog box, press Enter, or right-click
and click Enter.
■ To discard the point and return to the dialog box, press ESC, or right-click
and click Cancel.
■ To accept the point and specify another point, right-click. Click Next Point.
End Point Selects an end point for a shortest path analysis. Click Select Point
to select a point in the map. Press Enter to return to this dialog box.
List of Locations The points you specify are displayed in the list.
■ To see the location of a point in the map, select the coordinates in the list.
Click Preview.
■ To remove a point from the list, select the coordinates. Click Delete.
Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box | 1325
Load Use settings that you previously saved.
Save Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the network analysis.
Back Display the previous dialog box.
Next Display the Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction dialog
box (page 1327).
Finish Perform the network analysis using the current settings. For a shortest
path trace, the Finish is available after you select a start point and an end
point. For a flood trace, the Finish is available after you select a start point.
See also:
■ To perform a shortest path trace (page 859)
■ To perform a best route analysis (page 864)
■ To perform a flood trace (page 868)
Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to view the results of the network analysis onscreen. You
also specify a name and description for the new topology.
Highlight Show the results of the analysis on screen using the color specified
in the Color.
Color Select the color you want to use to highlight the results of the analysis
in the map. To clear the color when you finish viewing the results in the map,
click View menu ➤ Redraw.
Create Topology Create a new topology using the results of the analysis.
Name Enter a unique name for the new topology. Topology names can contain
letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters.
Description Enter a description for the new topology.
Load Use settings that you previously saved.
Save Save the current settings so you can use them again.
1326 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the network analysis.
Back Display the previous dialog box.
Next Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish Perform the network analysis using the current settings. For a shortest
path trace, the Finish is available after you select a start point and an end
point. For best route analysis, the Finish is available after you select a start
point and at least one visit point. For a flood trace, the Finish is available after
you select a start point.
See also:
■ To perform a shortest path trace (page 859)
■ To perform a best route analysis (page 864)
■ To perform a flood trace (page 868)
Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction
dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify how to determine resistance for links and nodes
and to specify how to determine the direction of link objects for the network
analysis.
Direction Specify how to determine the direction of link objects for the
analysis.
Link Direction Enter a value or enter the location of the data to use to
determine the direction of the links. To select the location of the data from a
list, click Expression Builder. Select the data to use. You can also enter any
valid expression. See Expression Evaluator (page 963). If you leave the box
blank, bi-directional (0) is used.
If the expression evaluates to... Link Direction is...
0 or a character Bi-directional>
A positive number The physical direction
Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction dialog box | 1327
If the expression evaluates to... Link Direction is...
A negative number The reverse of the physical direction
Reverse Select this option to use the reverse of the direction indicated in the
Link Direction field.
Resistance Specify how to determine resistance for links and nodes. Enter the
location of the data to use to determine the direct resistance and reverse
resistance of link objects and the resistance of nodes. To use values in an object
data table or external database, click Expression Builder. Select the data to use.
You can also enter any valid expression.
■ Link Direct Resistance — Specify the resistance to travel in the direction
that a link was created. If you leave the box blank, the length of the line
(.LENGTH) is used.
■ Link Reverse Resistance — Specify the resistance in the opposite direction
along a link. If you leave the box blank, the length of the line (.LENGTH)
is used.
■ Node Resistance — Specify the resistance to cross the node, for example,
resistance for a valve in a pipe network, or a junction in a road network.
If you leave the box blank, zero (0) is used.
■ Specify a minimum and maximum resistance for the trace.
TIP The best route cannot be be calculated if the network topology contains
negative resistance values or if all resistance values equal zero (or use expressions
that evaluate to zero). If all resistance values equal zero, every route is as good as
another, and there is no "best route."
Load Use settings that you previously saved.
Save Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the network analysis.
Back Display the previous dialog box.
Next Click to display the Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box
(page 1326).
Finish Perform the network analysis using the current settings.
1328 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
See also:
■ To perform a shortest path trace (page 859)
■ To perform a best route analysis (page 864)
■ To perform a flood trace (page 868)
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the type of network analysis to perform.
Shortest Path Calculates the optimal route between two nodes. For example,
you could find the shortest distance between an accident site and a hospital.
A path trace between the start and end points must have a total resistance of
more than the minimum and less than the maximum.
Best Route Finds the optimal route from a start point, to one or more
intermediate points, and back to the start point. The distance between nodes
takes into consideration the direction and resistance of intermediate links and
nodes.
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box | 1329
Flood Trace Shows all possible routes from a chosen node, summing the
resistance value of each link and node it travels through. The path stops when
the sum reaches the maximum resistance set for the trace. For example, you
could create a flood trace of a fifteen-minute travel time from a start point by
referencing street length and speed limit.
Load Use settings that you previously saved.
Save Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the network analysis.
Back Disabled because this is the first dialog box in the list.
Next Click to display the Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations
dialog box (page 1325).
Finish Perform the network analysis using the current settings. For a shortest
path trace, the Finish is available after you select a start point and an end
point. For best route analysis, the Finish is available after you select a start
point and at least one visit point. For a flood trace, the Finish is available after
you select a start point.
See also:
■ To perform a shortest path trace (page 859)
■ To perform a best route analysis (page 864)
■ To perform a flood trace (page 868)
1330 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Node Objects dialog box - Network and Polygon
Topologies)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When you create a topology, use this dialog box to select the nodes to include
in the topology. Node information is stored as object data and saved with the
map. Each node is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed
whenever you use a topology command.
Select Automatically/Manually options
■ Select Automatically selects all objects that meet the object type and filter
criteria.
■ Select Manually lets you manually select objects for the topology. Click
Select < to select objects.
Filter Selected Objects If this option is selected, only objects that are on the
specified layers or blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic
and manual selection of objects.
If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored.
Layer Filters box Specify which layers to search for objects to be used for the
topology.
Enter an asterisk (*) to search all layers.
To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
Block Filters box Specify which blocks to search for objects to be used for the
topology.
■ To search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*).
■ To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks.
■ To select point objects, enter ACAD_POINT.
Create Node Objects Specify whether nodes that are not present in the current
object selection should be created to complete the topology. (Nodes are
optional.)
Create on Layer box If new nodes or centroids are created, specify on which
layer they should be placed.
To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
Node Objects dialog box - Network and Polygon Topologies) | 1331
Create Using box If new nodes or centriods are created, specify what block
to use to create them.
■ To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks.
■ To create nodes or centroids as a point, leave the box blank or enter
ACAD_POINT.
See also:
■ Creating Topologies (page 528)
Node Objects dialog box (Node topology)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When you create a topology, use this dialog box to select the nodes to include
in the topology. Node information is stored as object data and saved with the
map. Each node is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed
whenever you use a topology command.
Select Automatically/Manually options
■ Select Automatically selects all objects that meet the object type and filter
criteria.
■ Select Manually lets you manually select objects for the topology. Click
Select < to select objects.
Filter Selected Objects If this option is selected, only objects that are on the
specified layers or blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic
and manual selection of objects.
If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored.
Layer Filters box Specify which layers to search for objects to be used for the
topology.
Enter an asterisk (*) to search all layers.
To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
Block Filters box Specify which blocks to search for objects to be used for the
topology.
■ To search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*).
■ To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks.
1332 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
■ To select point objects, enter ACAD_POINT.
See also:
■ Creating Topologies (page 528)
Rename Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Before you rename a topology, check the following:
■ Attach all source drawings that are referenced by the topology. If the source
drawings are not attached, you could corrupt your data set.
■ Make sure the topology is loaded. The topology needs to be completely
represented, either in source files or in the current drawing.
■ You cannot rename a topology if there are any queried objects in the
current drawing. You must save all queried objects back to their source
drawings or detach them from their source drawings before you can rename
any topology.
■ Be sure the Create Backup File Of Source Drawing option is not selected
on the Save Back tab of the Autodesk Map Options dialog box (page 1254).
■ You cannot undo this rename operation using the UNDO command.
New Name Enter a new name for the topology. Names can contain letters,
numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters. Names cannot contain
spaces.
New Description Enter a description for the topology.
See also:
■ Managing Topologies (page 590)
Select Data dialog box - Topology Overlay
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Rename Topology dialog box | 1333
Use this dialog box to select the data to attach to the result topology when
performing a topology overlay. The selected fields and columns are
incorporated into a new object data table that is attached to the result topology.
Source Data Area Select fields and columns. You can combine data from
different tables.
To select a field from an object data table, select the Object Data option, and
then select the table from the list. In the Available Fields/Columns list, select
the fields to use. Click >>.
To select a column from an external database, select the SQL Data option, and
then select the link template from the list. In the Available Fields/Columns
list, select the columns to use. Click >>.
The Link Template list includes only link templates for the drawing where
the topology is loaded. That is, if you loaded the topology from source
drawings, the list displays link templates defined in the source drawing; if you
loaded the topology from the current drawing, the list displays link templates
in the current drawing. In addition, be sure the appropriate data source is
attached and connected in the current drawing.
Destination Data Area Specify a table name and description for the new
object data table that will be created for the result topology.
A table name cannot include spaces. It must start with an alphanumeric
character. The table name must be unique.
Available Fields/Columns List Lists the fields in the selected object data table
or the selected external database.
To add fields or columns to the new object data table, select them from the
list. Click >>.
Selected Fields/Columns List Lists the fields that will be created in the new
object data table. This table can include values from more than one object
data table and external database.
See also:
■ To overlay two topologies (page 873)
Topology Buffer - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog
box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
1334 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
You can specify the block to use to create nodes and centroids in the resulting
buffer topology.
Point Object for Centroid Creation Specify the block used to represent
centroids.
■ To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click the down
arrow.
■ To create centroids from a block saved as a DWG file, click [...] and select
the file to use.
■ To create centroids as a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
Point Object for Node Creation Specify the block used to represent nodes.
■ To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click the down
arrow.
■ To create nodes from a block saved as a DWG file, click [...] and select the
file you want to use.
■ To create nodes as a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
Finish Creates the buffer using the current settings after you specify the buffer
distance and enter a valid topology name.
See also:
■ To buffer a topology (page 880)
Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify settings for viewing the resulting buffer topology
onscreen. You can also specify the name, description, and layer for the new
topology.
Highlight Show the results of the analysis on screen using the color specified
in the Color.
Color Select the color you want to use to highlight the results of the analysis
in the map. To clear the color when you finish viewing the results in the map,
click View menu ➤ Redraw.
Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box | 1335
Name Enter a unique name for the new topology. Topology names can contain
letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters.
Description Enter a description for the new topology.
Layer Specify a layer for the new topology. To select from a list of layers in
the current drawing, click the down arrow. To create a new layer, type the
name in the box.
NOTE Do not specify a locked layer. If you do, Autodesk Map 3D can complete
only part of the buffer process (it can create the buffer geometry but not the buffer
topology). To use a locked layer, unlock it first.
Cancel Close the dialog box without creating a buffer.
Back Display the previous dialog box.
Next Click to display the Topology Buffer - Create New Centroids and Nodes
dialog box (page 1334).
Finish Creates the buffer using the current settings. The Finish is available
after you specify the buffer distance and enter a valid topology name.
See also:
■ To buffer a topology (page 880)
Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
A buffer is a zone that is drawn around a topology. Using a buffer, you can
easily identify objects within a specified offset of elements in node, network,
and polygon topologies.
You can specify the buffer distance, which is the distance from the object to
the buffer. The buffer will extend the specified distance from the objects. You
can enter a number, an expression, a field in an object data table, or an external
database.
Buffer Distance Enter distance from the object to the buffer. The buffer will
extend the specified distance from the objects. To create a buffer inside an
1336 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
existing polygon, enter a negative value for the buffer offset. The buffer offset
can be any of the following:
■ Numeric value. To decrease the size of existing polygons, enter a negative
value.
■ An expression that evaluates to a numeric value. For information on valid
expressions, see Expression Evaluator Functions and Variables.
■ A value in an object data table. Click Expression Builder to select the table
and field.
■ A value in an external database. Click Expression Builder to select the link
template and column.
Note If you are creating a buffer around a polygon and want to use a value
in an object data table or an external database, the data must be attached
to the centroid of the polygon.
Expression Builder Click to select a field in an object data table or an external
database from a list of available data.
Next Click to display the Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box (page
1335).
Finish Creates the buffer using the current settings after you specify the buffer
distance and enter a valid topology name.
See also:
■ To buffer a topology (page 880)
Topology Dissolve - Create New Centroids and Nodes
dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the block to use to create nodes and centroids
in the resulting dissolve topology.
Point Object for Centroid Creation Specify the block used to represent
centroids.
■ To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click the down
arrow.
Topology Dissolve - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box | 1337
■ To create centroids from a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select
the file to use.
■ To create centroids a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
Point Object for Node Creation Specify the block used to represent nodes.
■ To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click the down
arrow.
■ To create nodes from a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select the
file to use.
■ To create nodes as a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the dissolve.
Back Display the previous dialog box.
Next Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available
after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
See also:
■ To dissolve a composite topology (page 877)
Topology Dissolve - Create Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify whether or not to create new nodes at the
endpoints of links where they are missing in the resulting dissolve topology.
If so, you specify the block to use to create the nodes.
Create New Nodes For Topology Select this check box to create new nodes
as needed at the endpoints of links in the resulting topology. This is optional,
but can be useful if you are going to analyze the resulting topology later on.
Point Object for Node Creation Specify the block used to represent nodes.
■ To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down
arrow and select a block from the list.
1338 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
■ To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select the
file to use. This inserts the entire DWG as a single block.
■ To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the dissolve.
Back Display the previous dialog box.
Next Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available
after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
See also:
■ To dissolve a composite topology (page 877)
Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify settings for viewing the resulting dissolve
topology onscreen. You can also specify the name, description, and layer for
the new topology.
Highlight Show the results of the analysis on screen using the color specified
in the Color.
Color Select the color you want to use to highlight the results of the analysis
in the map. To clear the color when you finish viewing the results in the map,
click View menu ➤ Redraw.
Name Enter a unique name for the new topology. Topology names can contain
letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters.
Description Enter a description for the new topology.
Layer Specify a layer for the new topology. To select from a list of layers in
the current drawing, click the down arrow. To create a new layer, type the
name in the box.
Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the dissolve.
Back Display the previous dialog box.
Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box | 1339
Next Click to display the Topology Dissolve - Object Data dialog box (page
1340).
Finish Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available
after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
See also:
■ To dissolve a composite topology (page 877)
Topology Dissolve - Object Data dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
The dissolve operation starts with a single item and "joins" all adjacent objects
that share the same value for this item. The resulting topology data includes
only the field used to perform the dissolve.
For example, you could perform a dissolve operation on a map of zip code
boundaries that reference a county name as a data field. Dissolving the zip
codes by county results in the county boundaries as a geometry. The result
data holds the county name.
The result table is the object data table that will store the dissolve field data
(county name). The result field is the field in the result table that will store
the dissolve data (county name). The user can reference an existing OD table
or define a new one.
The dissolve field can be an object data variable or any expression. Specify a
table and field or define a new table to hold the resulting data.
Object Data Table Select an object data table from the list of tables in the
current drawing.
Object Data Field Select a field from the list of fields in the selected table. To
add a new field, click Define.
Define Click to add a new object data field.
Finish Dissolves the topology using the current settings after you specify the
dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
See also:
■ To dissolve a composite topology (page 877)
1340 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When you perform a dissolve, you create a new topology by combining
polygons that share the same data value in a specified field. This field is called
the dissolve field. The dissolve field can be an object data field or a column
in a linked external database. Use this dialog box to select the data on which
to base the dissolve.
Dissolve By Select the data on which to base the dissolve. This is often referred
to as the dissolve field.
■ To use object data or data in an external data base, click Expression Builder.
Select the data to use.
Note that the Dissolve command uses only data that is attached or linked
to the centroid of the polygon. It does not use data attached to a polygon
border.
■ You can also enter any valid expression. See Expression Evaluator (page
963).
Any two adjacent polygons or connected lines that have the same value for
this field are combined into a single polygon or line.
Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the dissolve.
Back Disabled because this is the first dialog box in the list.
Next Click to display the Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box (page
1339).
Finish Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available
after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
See also:
■ Dissolving a Composite Topology (page 876)
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box | 1341
Use this dialog box to select the type of overlay analysis to perform: Intersect,
Union, Identity, Erase, Clip, or Paste. For a description of each of these options,
see To overlay two topologies (page 873).
To overlay topologies, both must be loaded into the current drawing. To load
topologies from the current drawing or from attached source drawings, click
Analyze ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Load Topology.
Overlay Analysis Operations Select an overlay operation:
■ Intersect – Only areas that appear in both the source and overlay topologies
are in the result topology.
Source Overlay Result
■ Union – Areas that appear in either the source or the overlay topologies
are in the result topology.
Source Overlay Result
■ Identity – The result topology includes areas that appear in the source
topology and areas in the overlay topology that are within the source
topology boundary.
Source Overlay Result
■ Erase – The result topology includes areas that appear in the source topology
except where it is covered by the overlay topology. The area covered by
the overlay topology is erased from the source topology area.
1342 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Source Overlay Result
■ Clip – The result topology includes areas that appear in the source topology
except where they are outside the boundary of the overlay topology. The
source topology is clipped to the outer boundary of the overlay topology.
Source Overlay Result
■ Paste – The overlay topology is "pasted" on the source topology. The result
topology includes the overlay topology and any areas of the source topology
that extend beyond the boundaries of the overlay topology.
Source Overlay Result
Load Use settings that you previously saved.
Save Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay analysis.
Back Disabled because this is the first dialog box in the list.
Next Click to display the Topology Overlay Analysis - Select Overlay Topology
dialog box (page 1348).
Finish Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology name
for the resulting topology.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box | 1343
See also:
■ To overlay two topologies (page 873)
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create New Centroids and
Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the block to use to create nodes and centroids
in the resulting overlay topology.
Point Object for Centroid Creation Specify the block used to represent
centroids.
■ To create centroids using using a block defined in the drawing set, click
the down arrow and select a block from the list.
■ To create centroids using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select
the file to use. This inserts the entire DWG as a single block.
■ To create centroids as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Point Object for Node Creation Specify the block used to represent nodes.
■ To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down
arrow and select a block from the list.
■ To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select the
file to use. This inserts the entire DWG as a single block.
■ To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Load Use settings that you previously saved.
Save Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay.
Back Display the previous dialog box.
Next Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology name
for the resulting topology.
1344 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
See also:
■ To overlay two topologies (page 873)
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify whether or not to create new nodes at the
endpoints of links where they are missing in the resulting overlay topology.
If so, you specify the block to use to create the nodes.
Create New Nodes For Topology Select this check box to create new nodes
as needed at the endpoints of links in the resulting topology. This is optional,
but can be useful if you are going to analyze the resulting topology later on.
Point Object for Node Creation Specify the block used to represent nodes.
■ To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down
arrow and select a block from the list.
■ To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select the
file to use. This inserts the entire DWG as a single block.
■ To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Load Use settings that you previously saved.
Save Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay.
Back Display the previous dialog box.
Next Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology name
for the resulting topology.
See also:
■ To overlay two topologies (page 873)
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create Nodes dialog box | 1345
Topology Overlay Analysis - New Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify settings for viewing the resulting overlay topology
onscreen. You can also specify the name, description, and layer for the new
topology.
Highlight Show the results of the analysis on screen using the color specified
in the Color.
Color Select the color you want to use to highlight the results of the analysis
in the map. To clear the color when you finish viewing the results in the map,
click View menu ➤ Redraw.
Name Enter a unique name for the new topology. Topology names can contain
letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters.
Description Enter a description for the new topology.
Layer Specify a layer for the new topology. To select from a list of layers in
the current drawing, click the down arrow. To create a new layer, type the
name in the box.
Load Use settings that you previously saved.
Save Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay.
Back Display the previous dialog box.
Next Click to display the Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Attributes dialog
box (page 1347)
Finish Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology name
for the resulting topology.
See also:
■ To overlay two topologies (page 873)
1346 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Attributes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the data to attach to the result topology when
performing a topology overlay. The selected fields and columns are
incorporated into a new object data table that is attached to the result topology.
Source Attributes for New Topology To copy data from the source topology
to the result topology, click Expression Builder. In the Expression Chooser
dialog box, select the object data fields or external database columns to copy.
Overlay Attributes for New Topology To copy data from the overlay topology
to the result topology, click Expression Builder. In the Expression Chooser
dialog box, select the object data fields or external database columns to copy.
Expression Builder s Click to display the Expression Chooser dialog box,
where you can select the data to include in the resulting topology.
New Object Data Table Name Enter a name for the object data table that
will store the data in the new topology. The Table Name should be a new
name.
New Table Description Enter a description for the new object data table in
the resulting topology.
Load Use settings that you previously saved.
Save Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay.
Back Display the previous dialog box.
Next Click to display the next dialog box. Next is disabled if your source
topology is a node topology.
Finish Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology name
for the resulting topology.
See also:
■ To overlay two topologies (page 873)
Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Attributes dialog box | 1347
Topology Overlay Analysis - Select Overlay Topology dialog
box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the polygon topology to use as the overlay
topology.
Polygon Topology to Overlay Select the polygon topology to use as the
overlay topology.
Load Use settings that you previously saved.
Save Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay.
Back Display the previous dialog box.
Next Click to display the Topology Overlay Analysis - New Topology dialog
box (page 1346).
Finish Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology name
for the resulting topology.
See also:
■ To overlay two topologies (page 873)
Topology Query dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Execute topology relationship queries using the following tools.
Query Topology area Select the topology to query.
If the topology is not loaded, click Load and select the topology you want.
Result Topology area
Select a result topology type.
1348 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
None
Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, but no topology data is
created.
Temporary
Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and the topology data is
loaded into memory. This data is not saved to the objects.
You can use a temporary topology with the following commands: Buffer,
Dissolve, Overlay, Trace, Unload, Rename, Statistics, and Delete. You cannot
edit a temporary topology.
As soon as you close the current drawing, the temporary topology is removed
from memory.
If you decide to save a temporary topology, chooseAnalyze ➤ More Topology
Options ➤ Rename. Specify a name without an asterisk.
Permanent
Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and a new topology is created.
If you create a temporary or permanent topology, specify a name and
description for the topology.
Topology names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore and
hyphen characters. For temporary topologies, the name must begin with
an asterisk (*).
Define Query Display the Define Query dialog box (page 1203), where you can
create a query by defining conditions.
The dialog box you use for a topology query is the same as for a standard
query using the ADEQUERY command, except for the Property option in the
Query Type area.
Load Query Display the Load Internal Query dialog box (page 1213), where you
can select an existing query to load.
When you choose Define Topology Query, you use the same dialog boxes as
you do for a standard query. The dialog box options are the same for topology
queries and standard queries using the ADEQUERY command, except for
choices in the Property option in the Query Type area.
Topology and standard queries differ in the following ways:
■ Topology queries work with only one topology, while standard queries
work with all objects in the attached drawings. Use a topology query when
working only with topologies, or when to select one topology or query.
Topology Query dialog box | 1349
■ You can base topology property queries on polygon values of Area, Length,
Perimeter, and Direction. Linear objects also have predefined object data
for Direct Resistance and Direction.
■ Property alterations work differently with polygon topologies.
■ For Report mode, additional dot variables, .TOPONAME, and .TOPOTYPE,
are available for topology queries. The dot variables .DRAWING, AREA,
and .PERIMETER yield different results in topology queries.
See also:
■ To query a topology (page 886)
Topology Query Result dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Specify the type of topology to create with the queried objects. If you create
a temporary or permanent topology, specify a name and description for the
topology.
Topology names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen
characters. For temporary topologies, the name must begin with an asterisk
(*).
None Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, but no topology data is
created.
Temporary Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and the topology
data is loaded into memory. This data is not saved to the objects.
You can use a temporary topology with the following commands: Buffer,
Dissolve, Overlay, Trace, Unload, Rename, Statistics, and Delete. You cannot
edit a temporary topology.
As soon as you close the current drawing, the temporary topology is removed
from memory.
If you decide to save a temporary topology, chooseAnalyze ➤ More Topology
Options ➤ Rename. Specify a name without an asterisk.
Permanent Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and a new topology
is created.
1350 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
See also:
■ To query a topology (page 886)
Topology Selection dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
To select a topology, click on it. Click OK.
If the topology you want is not listed, check the following:
■ If you are selecting a topology to rename, unload, view statistics, audit,
etc., it may not be listed because it has not been loaded yet. To load the
topology, click Analyze ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Load Topology.
■ If you are selecting a topology to load, it may not be listed because it's
already loaded.
Topology Statistics dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
View information about the selected topology.
Selected Topology area
Name
Displays the name of the current topology.
Description
Displays the description of the topology.
Type
Displays the type of topology. Topologies can be Node, Network, or Polygon.
Extents area This area displays the coordinates of the lower-left corner and
upper-right corner of the bounding rectangle for the selected topology.
Object Counts area This area displays the total number of nodes, links, and
polygons in the selected topology.
Topology Selection dialog box | 1351
Details area This area displays area and perimeter information for polygon
topologies, and length information for network topologies. It does not apply
to node topologies.
Perimeter is the sum of all of the edges in a polygon topology (not just the
outer edge of the topology).
Variance is the average of the squares of any given area, perimeter, or length
minus the square of the average.
Deviation is the square root of variance.
See also:
■ To view topology statistics (page 598)
1352 | Chapter 35 Topology Dialog Boxes
Viewing Dialog Boxes
36
In this chapter
■ Define Document View dialog box
■ Define Key View dialog box
■ Document View dialog box
■ Key View dialog box
■ Quick View Drawings dialog box
■ Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box
1353
Define Document View dialog box
You can define a document view to view external documents attached to an
object.
To create a new document view, enter a new name in the Name field. Specify
the location of the document name, the document type, and the application
to use to display the document, and click Add.
To modify an existing document view, select it in the list. Enter new
information in the Document View Definition section, and click Update.
Document view definitions are stored in the current drawing and not in the
source drawings.
Document View Definitions Displays the document views defined in this
drawing.
To modify a view, select it and edit the information that appears in the
Document View Definition section.
Delete Delete the selected document view definition.
NOTE If you have associated documents that use this view, be sure to define a
new view for those documents.
Delete All Delete all document views in the list.
NOTE If you have associated documents that use these views, be sure to define
new views for those documents.
Name Enter a name for a new document view.
Names cannot contain spaces.
Description Enter a description for the document view.
Expression Enter information on where to find the name of the document
associated with an object:
■ If the name of the associated document is stored in an object data table,
click Expression and select the table and field that contains the document
name.
When you attach a record from this object data table to an object, the
document listed in the specified field will be associated with the object.
■ If the name of the associated document is stored in an external database,
click Expression and select the link template and column.
1354 | Chapter 36 Viewing Dialog Boxes
When you attach a record from this database to an object, the document
listed in the specified column will be associated with the object.
■ If the name of the associated document is stored elsewhere, for example,
by giving the document the same name as the layer the object is on, enter
an expression that specifies the location of the document name. For
information on valid expressions, see Expression Evaluator (page 963).
■ You can type the name of a specific file. This file is then associated with
every object.
Directory Enter the directory where documents for this view are stored.
If you are unsure of the location, click [...] to locate the directory.
Ext Enter the three-letter file extension for documents using this view.
For example, if you are creating a view for Word documents, enter doc. If the
data attached to an object specifies a file name and extension, the extension
in this field is ignored. If the data attached to the object does not specify the
extension, Autodesk Map 3D uses the extension in the field when searching
for the document.
Command Line Enter the command to run the associated application.
For example, if you are creating a view for a Word document, enter the path
and file name for the Word program file.
If you are unsure of the location, click [...] to search your directories and locate
the application file.
Launch Method Select a launch method.
■ Select Default if the application specified for Command Line is a Windows
application.
■ Select User if the application specified for Command Line is an ARX
application. Enter the name of the viewing function. The function must
be defined in the ARX application and made available through the use of
acedDefun( ). Autodesk Map 3D uses acedInvoke( ) to access the
user-defined function. For more information about acedDefun( ),
acedInvoke( ), or on how to create ARX applications, refer to the AutoCAD
Object ARX online help.
If you are unsure, select Default.
Define Document View dialog box | 1355
Define Key View dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify which layers are displayed at different key view
zoom levels. For example, you can display fewer layers when zoomed out, but
display complete details when zoomed in.
To add a new condition, enter a drawing window width and specify the layers
to display at that width. Click the Layers to select from a list of the layers in
the active drawings. When you finish, click Add.
To modify an existing condition, select the condition to modify and click
Edit. Add or delete layers. When you finish, click Update.
Key views are saved with the current drawing and apply to layers in the current
drawing and all active drawings.
Current Key View Definition List Display the drawing window width
conditions defined in this drawing.
Edit Copy the selected condition to the bottom of the screen, where you can
change the width and add or remove layers.
Delete Delete the selected condition.
Clear List Delete all conditions.
Width > box Enter the width to define.
The width is the distance across the drawing window as measured in drawing
units. The more you zoom in, the smaller this number is.
TIP Before you use the ADEDEFKEYVIEW command, use the DISTANCE command
to measure the width of the window at the zoom magnifications you want to
define.
Show Only These Layers box Specify the layers to display when the drawing
window displays a greater width than specified in the Width > box. Separate
layer names with a comma.
Click the Layers to select from a list of layers in the active drawings. You can
use wild-card characters to specify a set of layers.
Layers Display a list of layers in the active drawings. Select the layers to
display at the specified window width.
Whenever the number of drawing units displayed in the drawing window
becomes greater than a defined key view condition, Autodesk Map 3D displays
the layers specified for that condition.
1356 | Chapter 36 Viewing Dialog Boxes
When you use key views, Autodesk Map 3D previews the specified layers from
source drawings. Objects already in the current drawing are not affected by
key views.
Document View dialog box
More than one document is associated with the object you selected. Select
the document type you want from the list. Click View.
Select Document View list Lists the document types for this object. Select a
document type. Click View to start the associated application and view the
associated document.
Select Object Select a new object and view its associated documents.
View View the document associated with the selected document type.
Key View dialog box
Select a zoom level or pan the current zoom. Autodesk Map 3D previews
objects from source drawings for only the key view layers specified for the
selected magnification. Objects already in the current drawing are not affected
by key views.
Zoom Window Zoom to a window that you specify onscreen, showing only
the key layers for that magnification.
Zoom Previous Zoom to the previous view, showing only the key layers for
that magnification.
Zoom Extents Zoom to the extents of all active drawings, showing only the
key layers for that magnification.
Zoom Out Zoom out .8x, showing only the key layers for that magnification.
Pan
Pan the current view using one of these methods:
Displacement
At the first prompt, specify the displacement. At the second prompt, press
Enter. The drawing moves by the amount you specified.
Document View dialog box | 1357
Points
At the first prompt, specify a point. At the second prompt, specify a new
point. The drawing moves so the first point is moved to the location of the
second point.
Redisplay View the selected layers for the current magnification.
Quick View Drawings dialog box
Select drawings to include in the Quick View.
Quick View displays all objects in the selected active source drawings. You
can zoom and pan, but you cannot edit the objects. When you regenerate or
redraw, the objects are cleared from the current drawing.
Select Active Drawings to Quick View
Lists all active drawings attached to the current drawing. Click on the drawing
to view. Use Select All and Clear All to quickly highlight or remove highlighting
from all drawings in the list.
Filters
Turns the current drawing filter on or off. When the filter is on, only
drawings that match the filter are displayed. If the parent drawing of a
nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is not displayed, even if it
matches the filter.
Filters
Displays the Drawing Set Display Filter dialog box, where you can create or
change the filters for file names and descriptions.
Zoom to the Extents of Selected Drawings Zoom the current drawing to the
extents of the selected source drawings.
Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box
Select the drawings you want. Click OK. The display zooms to the extents of
the selected drawings. Drawing extents are the bounds of the area occupied
by objects.
Select Active Drawings to Zoom list Lists all active drawings attached to the
current drawing.
Select the drawings to use to define the extents.
1358 | Chapter 36 Viewing Dialog Boxes
Select All Highlight all drawings in the list.
Clear All Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list.
Filter Select Filter to turn the current drawing filter on or off.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If the
parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is not
displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box (page 1266), you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box | 1359
Programming Interfaces
37
1361
Learn how to use the Autodesk Map 3D Application Programming Interfaces
(APIs), including ObjectARX, ObjectARX Managed Wrappers (.NET), ActiveX,
and AutoLISP.
For more information, click Help menu > Additional Resources > Autodesk
Map 3D Developer Help.
1362 | Chapter 37 Programming Interfaces
Glossary
.LAYER file A layer definition file. In Autodesk Map or MapGuide, a file that
saves all of the information needed to recreate a layer, that is, the references
to the source data and the styles that have been applied to it.
adjacent sheet block An annotation block used to indicate adjacent tiles.
annotation Text and graphics used to dynamically label objects in a drawing.
annotation definition A specially created block definition containing
attributes with Map Expression assigned to the attribute properties. Used with
drawing data.
as-built Data that depicts the final installed configuration (physical or
functional). As-built data incorporates any field markups on the original
construction drawings.
as-designed Data that depicts the original plan for construction or installation,
for example, the design for a new electric service or a new pipe installation.
aspect Direction of ground slope.
attributes or attribute data Tabular data that describes the characteristics of
a feature or drawing object, for example, the number of lanes and
pavement-type belonging to a road. For features, attributes can be stored with
the geometry, or stored in a database and joined to feature data. For drawing
objects, attributes are stored in a database and linked to selected drawing
objects. See also feature, property, block attribute, external data and object
data.
AutoCAD layer A layer in AutoCAD. An AutoCAD layer differs from the map
layers you create in Display Manager, which are referred to as layers, drawing
layers, feature layers, or surface layers.
Autodesk MapGuide Studio The MapGuide component that handles all
aspects of collecting and preparing geospatial data for distribution on the
Internet (except customcoding).
1363 | Glossary
azimuth A clockwise angle measured from a reference meridian. Also known
as north azimuth. It can range from 0 to 360 degrees. A negative azimuth is
converted to a clockwise value.
bearing An angle measured from North or South, whichever is nearest, with
the added designation of East or West. The angle is always less than 90 degrees
(PI/2 radians or 100 grads) and is usually referenced by a quadrant number.
best route analysis Calculates the shortest path or optimal route from a start
point in a drawing, one or more intermediate points, and back to the start
point. For example, the best route to follow on a street map when visiting
multiple customer sites.
blocks In AutoCAD or Autodesk Map, compound objects that have been saved
for reuse in the drawing or in multiple drawings, for example, a North arrow.
In Autodesk MapGuide Studio, blocks are converted into symbols when they
are loaded. See also symbol.
buffer A zone drawn around a drawing topology with a specified offset.
buffer fence A fence, or line, at a specified distance from a center line. Used
to define a selection boundary.
bulge For contours that contain curves, the bulge value is a maximum
mid-ordinate distance along a polyline curve. If the mid-ordinate distance is
longer than specified, then points are added to better define the shape of the
curve.
The bulge factor can add more vertices to a polyline curve, making it appear
more curve-like. The smaller the value, the more vertices are added.
Cartesian coordinate system A coordinate system defined using three
perpendicular axes (X, Y, and Z) to specify locations in three-dimensional
space. Compare with spherical coordinate system.
cartographic coordinate system A coordinate system that is referenced
directly to an ellipsoid. Compare with geodetic coordinate system.
CD Browser See Media Browser.
centroid A point or block that is part of a polygon in a drawing topology.
The centroid holds information about the polygons area and perimeter.
class See feature class and object class.
clustered nodes Nodes within a specified tolerance of one another.
COGO Short for Coordinate Geometry.
1364 | Glossary
column A specific category of information in a table, such as Address or
Diameter, also called a field. See also table.
conformal projection, conformality Conformal projections maintain local
angles. A map projection is conformal when the scale is the same in every
direction at any point. Meridians and parallels intersect at right angles; the
shape of small areas and angles with very short sides are preserved. Most larger
area sizes are distorted.
conic projection A map projection in which the earths surface is drawn as it
would appear if projected on a cone wrapped around the earth. The Lambert
Conformal Conic is often used for maps of the continental United States,
France, and other countries.
constraint In a database, a restriction specified for a certain feature class,
which is validated when a new feature is added to that class. For example, a
"minor road" feature class may have a constraint that specifies that the speed
attribute must always be 25, 30, or 50 miles per hour.
continuous data Data that can fall anywhere in a broad range. When creating
a theme, continuous data is usually organized into smaller ranges that show
data trends. For example, property value is continuous data that can be placed
into the ranges 0 to $50,000, $50,000 to $100,000, and over $100,000, with
each range displayed in a different color. Compare with discrete data.
contour lines A line that connects points of the same elevation or value
relative to a specified reference datum. The lines can help you determine the
elevation at a specific location on a surface, help clarify and analyze the 3D
surface terrain, and help with things like navigation.
control points Locations with established latitude and longitude, and often
elevation, used for accuracy and precise location of maps. A system of geodetic
control points covers the entire United States. Similar systems exist for all
countries, such as Bench Marks and Trigonometry Points in the United
Kingdom. See also monuments.
coordinate system See global coordinate system.
credentials The user ID and password needed to connect to a database.
cylindrical projection A map projection, in which the earths surface is drawn
as it would appear if projected on a cylinder wrapped around the earth in a
north-south direction. Compare with transverse cylindrical projection. See
also Mercator projection and conic projection.
dangle A link or line, one end of which lacks a connection to another link or
node.
1365 | Glossary
Data Grid In Autodesk Map, the FDO-based grid that allows you to view and
edit attributes of selected map features, perform searches, and work with
selection sets.
data provider Used by the Feature Data Objects (FDO) feature to connect to
geospatial data such as Oracle Spatial.
data source A UDL (universal data link) file that points to a collection of data
and provides information on how to access the data.
data store In FDO, a collection of feature classes contained in a single data
storage location. The data store consists of an integrated set of objects, which
are modeled by classes or feature classes defined within one or more schemas.
Data stores can be either file-based, such as SDF, or a database, such as Oracle
Spatial. See also FDO provider.
database query A set of conditions for specifying the selection of records from
a database. External database queries, also called joins and views, are created
using your database software and can be run from the Map Explorer tab of
the Task Pane. See also map query.
datum A mathematical model that provides a smooth approximation of the
earths surface. Each datum includes both an ellipsoid, which specifies the size
and shape of the earth, and a base point for latitude and longitude. If two
maps use different datums, points on the map may not line up. Also called a
geodetic coordinate system.
DEM Digital Elevation Model. A file that contains a representation of surface
terrain. The surface is stored as a grid in which each cell can have any one of
several different meanings, such as elevation, color, density, and so on.
digitize To convert existing data from paper maps, aerial photos, or raster
images into digital form by tracing the maps on a digitizer. Object locations
are recorded as X,Y coordinates.
discrete data Data that falls into explicit categories. For thematic maps, each
value is displayed differently. For example, an agricultural thematic map might
show each crop in a different color. Compare with continuous data.
display information A description of the appearance of a drawing object:
includes items such as layer, color, hatch pattern, and line type.
Display Manager Applies custom styles to selected features and objects. To
view the Display Manager task pane, select Display Manager from the list at
the top of the Task Pane.
1366 | Glossary
Display Manager layer A set of objects in the Display Manager. The set could
be all the objects on a layer or in a feature class, or objects that share a certain
property. Each layer can be stylized or themed individually.
display properties Same as display information.
dissolve To remove the boundaries that exist between polygons sharing a
specific attribute.
dither To use a pattern of solid dots to simulate more colors than are actually
available when displaying images.
dot variable Variable that refers to an object property. It consists of a period
(.) followed by the variable name for that property. Dot variables can be entered
in expressions used for building a template file for Report mode queries and
for property alteration. See also query and expression.
draping The process of overlaying a set of features or a raster image on a
surface so that the features or the image reflect the underlying terrain.
drawing layer A layer in Display Manager that contains drawing objects from
a DWG file. See also AutoCAD layer, feature layer, layer, surface layer.
drawing objects Objects that exist in a drawing file (DWG) or come from an
attached drawing. Compare to features.
drawing set The set of source drawings attached to a drawing.
drawing source In Autodesk Map, a drawing source is a drawing (DWG) file
and also its associated information, such as attached drawing files,
drawing-based feature classes, linked template data, and topologies. In Autodesk
MapGuide Studio, one of the two types of resources created by loading
file-based data. Drawing sources are stored in the repository in DWF format
and retain any styles or themes already applied to the source data. Compare
with feature source.
drive alias The mechanism that points to the folder where attached DWG
files are stored.
DTED Digital Terrain Elevation Data.
duplicate objects Objects that share the same start and end points. Object
types that can be considered duplicate include linear objects, points, blocks,
text, and mtext.
DWF Design Web Format. An Autodesk file format for sharing 2D, 3D, and
spatially-enabled design data. DWF files are easy to publish and view on the
Web.
1367 | Glossary
DWG Drawing file. The Autodesk file format for storing 2D, 3D, and
spatially-enabled design data.
edge matching A map cleanup function that allows for distortion between
adjacent maps, and produces a true match of drawing objects at the edges of
maps.
EditSet When users decide to lock objects in Oracle Spatial, those objects are
immediately locked. Edits of locked objects are put into an EditSet. You can
then update the database, which updates the locked records with the contents
of the EditSet.
element (Display Manager) See Display Manager layer.
element (Oracle Spatial database) The basic building block of an Oracle
Spatial geometry (Oracle Spatial database). The supported spatial element
types are points, line strings, and polygons. For example, elements might
model water wells (point clusters), roads (line strings), and county boundaries
(polygons).
elevation The vertical distance from a datum to a point or object on the
Earth's surface. The datum is generally considered to be at sea level. Equivalent
to the Z coordinate in an XYZ coordinate system.
ellipsoid An approximation of the earths shape that does not account for
variations caused by the nonuniform density of the earth. Synonymous with
spheroid. See also geoid.
equal area A map projection in which every part, as well as the whole, has
the same area as the corresponding part on the earth, at the same reduced
scale. No flat map can be equal area and represent true shape.
equidistant projections Projections showing true distances only from the
center of the projection or along a special set of lines. No flat map can be both
equidistant and equal area.
exaggeration See vertical exaggeration.
expression An automatic calculation used to specify values for URL, tooltip,
and feature labels. For example, you might create a text expression that
specifies a state name and population for a label. To express the population
in millions, you might apply a number expression that divides the population
value by 1,000,000.
expression evaluator The mechanism that analyzes the statement you enter
in the Expression box in the Output Report Options dialog box or the Property
Alteration dialog box.
1368 | Glossary
external data Attribute data linked to a drawing object but contained in a
database apart from the drawing file. See also attribute data and object
data.
FDO Feature Data Objects. An Autodesk software standard and general purpose
API for accessing features and geospatial data regardless of the underlying data
store. See also feature, feature class.
FDO provider An implementation of the FDO API that provides access to data
in a particular data store, such as an Oracle or ArcSDE database, or to a
file-based data store, such as SDF or SHP.
feature class For feature data, a schema element that describes a type of
real-world object. It includes a class name and property definitions. Commonly
used to refer to a set of features of a particular class, for example, the feature
class "roads" or the feature class "hydrants." See also FDO, property, schema.
Feature Data Objects See FDO.
feature layer A layer in Display Manager containing features from a feature
source such as SDF, ESRI SHP, or ArcSDE. Feature layers are brought in using
Data Connect. See also AutoCAD layer, drawing layer, layer, surface layer.
feature source In Autodesk Map, a feature source is any source of feature data
that has been connected by means of FDO. In Autodesk MapGuide Studio,
one of the two types of resources created either by loading file-based data or
by connecting to a spatial database. Feature sources are stored in the repository
either in SDF 3 format or as database connections and contain raw geometry
only. Compare with drawing source.
feature(s) An abstraction of a natural or man-made real world object. A spatial
feature has one or more geometric properties. For example, a road feature
might be represented by a line, and a hydrant might be represented by a point.
A non-spatial feature does not have geometry, but can be related to a spatial
feature that does. For example, a road feature may contain a sidewalk feature
that is defined as not containing any geometry. In Autodesk Map 3D, features
are accessed and added to maps using Data Connect (FDO). See also attributes,
FDO. Compare to drawing objects.
field A specific category of information in a data file, such as Address or
Diameter. Also called a column. See also table.
filtered record A record that matches the conditions of an SQL filter or spatial
filter and is therefore available for selection.
1369 | Glossary
flood trace For a network topology in a drawing, a trace that begins at a
specified point and traces out in all directions for a specified distance or
resistance.
generalization A method of reducing the number of vertices in the source
data by a specific percentage.
geo-referenced image An image that references real-world coordinates in its
correlation source. Example: Geo-referenced images include GeoSPOT, GeoTIFF,
and images that use world files as their correlation source.
geodetic coordinate system A coordinate system that is referenced directly
to a datum. Compare with cartographic coordinate system.
geographic analysis Analytical techniques that identify existing conditions
of a geographic location, a spatial area, or a linear network, as well as predict
the effects of certain future events on these features.
geographic data Information about geographic features. See feature(s).
geoid An ellipsoid with a highly irregular surface used to describe the shape
of the earth. See also ellipsoid.
geometry (Oracle Spatial database) The representation of a spatial feature,
modeled as an ordered set of primitive elements.
geometry mapping The process of transforming the geometry elements of
Autodesk Map 3D objects to Oracle Spatial geometry, and transforming the
geometry elements of the records back to Autodesk Map 3D objects.
GeoTIFF A type of tagged image file format (TIFF) that supports
geo-referencing information.
GIS (Geographic Information System) A computerized decision support
system that integrates geographic data, attribute data, and other spatially
referenced data. A GIS is used to capture, store, retrieve, analyze, and display
spatial data.
global coordinate system A method that converts the earths spherical
coordinates representing latitude and longitude into an Autodesk Map 3D
drawings Cartesian coordinate system, and accounts for the curvature of the
earths surface with a projection. A coordinate system is usually defined by a
projection, an ellipsoid definition, a datum definition, one or more standard
parallels, and a central meridian.
grid surface See surface.
hatch A regular pattern used to fill an area with a series of cross-angled lines.
1370 | Glossary
hillshading The addition of shading to a surface to suggest
three-dimensionality, shadow, or degrees of light and dark. Hillshading adds
shading by casting the sun's light across a surface from the direction and angle
you specify.
intersection (expression) Two or more conditions joined with the logical
operator And. An item is selected only if the item meets all specified conditions.
Compare with union.
intersection (geometry) The location where one line, surface, or solid crosses
another so as to have one or more points in common.
JPG2000 An advanced raster image format from Joint Photographics Expert
Group, featuring options for lossless compression, wavelet compression,
incremental decompression, and support for up to 48-bit color.
key column One or more columns in a table whose values are used to uniquely
identify a record. To provide useful links, a key column should contain a
unique value for each record. Also called a key field.
key value A value stored on an object that specifies that value to match in
the key field of a table.
key view In a map book, an overview of the entire map with the current tile
boundaries displayed.
label Text placed on or near a map feature that describes or identifies it.
latitude The first part of a spherical coordinate system used to record positions
on the earths surface. Latitude indicates the angular distance north or south
of the equator. See also longitude.
layer A resource that references a feature source or a drawing source. The layer
contains styling and theming information, and optionally a collection of scale
ranges. You add a layer to your map using Display Manager. Specific types of
layers are drawing layers, feature layers, and surface layers.
layout template In a map book, a named composition of viewports and
annotation in paperspace. It includes the intended paper size and output scale
for plotting and publishing. See also map book template.
LIDAR LIght Detection And Ranging. A remote-sensing method that can be
used to generate an image of a surface.
link (external databases) The connection between a drawing object and its
related database data. The link data is stored on the linked drawing object and
contains the name of the link template and the key value used to identify the
associated record in the linked table. An object may have more than one link.
1371 | Glossary
link (geometry) An element of geometry that connects nodes. In a polygon
topology, a link defines a polygon edge. Links can contain vertices and true
arcs, and can be represented as a line, polyline, or arc. See also node.
link template A data structure that contains the path information to a database
table and specifies one or more key fields in that table.
lock To make all or part of a disk file read-only so that it cannot be modified
by other users on a network. Object locking applies to objects that are being
edited by another user. File locking applies to entire files, for example when
an AutoCAD user wants to open a file while the file is in Autodesk Map 3D
editing mode.
logical operator A symbol such as And, Or, Not, =, >, >=, <, and <= used to
define logical relationships.
long transaction A single atomic unit of changes to a data store. A long
transaction allows an operation in a database, such as an edit/update, to be
tracked over an indefinite period of time, for example during the process of
creating and updating a design in the database.
longitude The second part of a spherical coordinate system used to record
positions on the earths surface. Longitude measures angular distance east or
west of the prime meridian, which runs through Greenwich, England. See
also latitude.
main viewport The viewport that represents a map tile in a sheet. See also
viewport (paper space).
map A collection of layers displayed within a consistent coordinate system
and extents. See also layer.
Map Book A publishing option that divides a map into tiles and formats them
into pages with a legend and an index/key. To view the Map Book task, select
Map Book from the list at the top of the Task Pane.
map book template A special type of sheet template used by a map book to
generate sheets. The map tiles are generated based on the layout and viewport
placeholder properties.
Map Explorer Manages your mapping resources. To view the Map Explorer
task, select Map Explorer from the list at the top of the Task Pane.
map file A set of map presentations, consisting of Display Manager elements,
that can be stored in a DWG file.
1372 | Glossary
map projection A systematic representation of a spherical body, such as the
earth, in a flat (planar) surface. Each map projection has specific properties
that make it suitable for specific mapping needs.
map query A set of conditions that specify the selection of drawing objects
from source drawings. Conditions in a Map query can be based on the location
or properties of an object or on data stored in the drawing or in a linked
database table. See also topology query and database query.
map tile A specific region of a map (model space view) for use on an individual
sheet.
MapGuide A software platform for distributing spatial data over the Internet
or on an intranet. Exists in two versions: Open Source (supported by the
community) and Enterprise (supported by Autodesk).
(www.mapserverfoundation.org)
MapGuide Server The MapGuide component that hosts the MapGuide
services and responds to requests from client applications through TCP/IP
protocol.
MapGuide Viewer (DWF Viewer) The version of the MapGuide Viewer
component that is based on a Microsoft ActiveX Control and has full support
for the DWF format. It works with the Microsoft Internet Explorer browser
only.
MapGuide Viewer (HTML viewer) The version of the MapGuide Viewer
component that does not need a download (also known as "zero-client viewer").
It works with Microsoft Internet Explorer, running on Windows, or with
Internet Explorer or Firefox on other operating systems, such as MacOS or
Linux.
Media Browser The program that appears when you insert the product CD
and provides access to installation instructions and other information.
Mercator projection A map projection, designed by Gerhardus Mercator, in
which the earths surface is drawn as it would appear if projected on a cylinder
wrapped around the earth. See also cylindrical projection.
meridian A great circle passing through both poles, corresponding to a line
of longitude.
metadata Additional descriptive information about data, such as the data
source, extents, and degree of accuracy.
monuments Features with known coordinates, used to establish accurate and
precise location on a map. See also control points.
1373 | Glossary
mpolygon A polygon object. A polygon differs from a closed polyline in that
it stores information about its inner and outer boundaries.
naming scheme The method of determining an individual map tile name.
Examples include column/row, sequential, and data driven.
network analysis, network flood trace See flood trace.
network topology A description of the spatial relationship between linear
drawing objects (links and, sometimes, nodes). For example, a network
topology can represent pipelines, streets, electrical transmission lines, and
rivers.
node A single point or a link end point or intersection in a topology. A node
can be represented as a block or point object.
node topology A description of the spatial relationship between geographic
point objects in a drawing. Examples of node topologies include point sources
of pollution and road signs.
normalizing In a theme, the scaling of data values relative to another data
value. A common example is adjusting the thematic value based on the area,
length, or perimeter of the entity.
object class All the drawing objects that have been created using a specific
object class definition. Use object classification to organize objects in your
drawing based on the real-world features they represent, such as roads. Object
classes allow you to create new objects that automatically have the appropriate
properties and values for objects in your drawing. See also feature class.
object class definition A definition of how to create a classified drawing
object in a drawing. An object class definition can include information about
the object type, default properties of the object, or default data that should
be attached to the object.
object data Attribute data attached to an object and stored in the drawing
file. Compare with external data.
OGC Open Geospatial Consortium. A non-profit, international, voluntary
consensus standards organization that leads the development of standards for
geospatial and location based services. (www.opengeospatial.org)
Oracle schema See schema.
Oracle Spatial (OSE) feature An earlier version of the Feature Data Objects
(FDO) feature, used to store maps in Oracle Spatial. See Feature Data Objects
(FDO).
1374 | Glossary
OSGeo Open Source Geospatial Foundation. A foundation created to support
and build the highest-quality open source geospatial software. The foundation's
goal is to encourage the use and collaborative development of community-led
projects. (www.osgeo.org)
overlay To create a new topology by combining elements of two distinct
topologies. At least one of the original topologies must be a polygon topology.
package In MapGuide, a compressed file that can speed up the process of
loading data onto the server. Large source-data files can be zipped up in this
file format and saved to a network location or copied to a CD.
parallel A degree of latitude that circles the earth parallel to the Equator.
path trace For a network topology, a trace begins at a specified point, finds
the shortest distance to another point and is based on resistance (the length
by default).
placeholder Specifies location and size of elements (viewports, scale bar, north
arrow, legend) in a map sheet.
plot template block An AutoCAD block that contains plotting information
such as title page text, plot layouts, legend, and other map annotations.
polygon A polygon is a closed area that stores information about its inner
and outer boundaries, and about other polygons nested within it or grouped
with it. In a polygon topology, the polygon can be enclosed by any lines or
arcs in the drawing. In addition, Autodesk Map 3D supports a polygon object,
sometimes called an mpolygon or mapping polygon.
polygon topology A description of the spatial relationship between geographic
area features. Polygon topologies contain geometric links, nodes, and centroids.
Examples of polygon topologies are land use and land cover maps, political
boundaries, parcels, and soil types.
prime meridian The line of longitude drawn through Greenwich, England,
used as the origin for longitude measurements.
profile User-defined settings specific to a given drawing.
property For feature data, a single attribute of a class. A class is described by
one or more property definitions. For example, a Road feature class may have
properties called Name, NumberLanes, or Location. See also attributes, feature
class.
property alteration definition The definition of properties you want to
change during a query.
1375 | Glossary
property data Values associated with a geographic object, such as river depth,
road width, or pipe diameter. In Autodesk Map 3D, these items are represented
as block attributes, values in object data tables, or values in a linked external
database.
pseudo node An unnecessary node in a geometric link. A pseudo node can
be used to store information about geographic point location or to represent
change from one link to another.
publish To generate output from a map book.
purge To remove all unused object definitions from an open drawing.
query A set of executable statements that retrieve specific objects. For example,
a layer-based query that displays only the objects on the layers that contain
state and district boundaries. See map query, topology query, database query,
and thematic query.
Query Library The set of queries saved in a drawing. You can add, delete, and
modify queries in the Query Library.
ramp A sequence of display properties used to render a theme; for example,
a sequence of colors, linestyles, or hatch patterns.
range of values In a theme, a segment of data along a continuum, such as
property value, temperature, or population.
raster Images containing individual dots (called pixels or cells) with color
values, arranged in a rectangular, evenly spaced array. Aerial photographs and
satellite images are examples of raster images used in mapping. Compare with
vector.
raster-based surface layer See surface layer.
reference point For a symbol, the point that controls the position of a symbol
over a feature in a map. The default reference point is the center of the symbol.
registration The preparation of a map for digitizing by calibrating a digitizing
table to convert an analog source to a digital file. See digitize.
resistance Resistance is a measure of how hard it is to travel a link. The default
measure of resistance is the length of the link. You can set the resistance to
be related to what the link represents, such as pipe diameter or traffic speed.
resolution In a raster image, the density of pixels-per-inch (ppi) or
dots-per-inch.
1376 | Glossary
rubber sheeting An editing method, used only when necessary, that attempts
to correct errors by stretching a map to fit known control points or
monuments.
rule (for feature themes) A feature theme consists of a collection of rules.
Each rule specifies a style and feature label for the features that meet the
specified condition. You can add a legend label to provide a description of a
rule's condition. As a layer is drawn, each feature is compared to the rules in
the order that they are listed. The first rule for which the feature meets the
condition is used to specify the style and feature label for that feature.
save set Objects that have been created or modified in the current drawing
and are marked to be saved back to source drawings.
scale The ratio of the distance on a paper map to the distance on the ground.
If a paper map has a scale of 1:100,000 (also represented as 1/100000), then
a distance of 1 unit on the paper map corresponds to 100,000 units on the
ground. On a digital map, scale represents the scale of the map from which
the digital map was derived.
scale threshold You can define different stylizations at different scale
thresholds. For example, turn on the display of road names only when the
drawing scale factor is below 1:5000.
schema The definition of multiple feature classes and the relationships between
them. A schema is the logical description of the data types used to model
real-world objects, and does not reference the actual data instances (a particular
road or land parcel). Rather, it is metadata. See also feature class.
SDF Spatial Database File. The proprietary Autodesk file format that contains
the spatial data (such as roads, cities, and countries) used in maps. See SDF 3,
SDF 2.
SDF 2 The previous version of the SDF file format. It was the native file format
for Autodesk MapGuide (the last release was Autodesk MapGuide 6.5). Each
SDF 2 file generally contained one feature or type of data, for example points,
lines, polygons, or text.
SDF 3 The current version of the SDF format. It is the native format for
MapGuide Enterprise and MapGuide Open Source and is new in Map 3D 2007.
Each SDF 3 file can contain multiple feature classes or types of data stored in
tables with attributes and geometry.
service An Oracle database.
shading See hillshading.
1377 | Glossary
sheet An individual named object in a sheet set that can be published.
References a layout. In a DWF file, a plot layout containing a specific view of
the original data.
sheet set A named collection of sheets and subsets for publishing.
sheet subset A named collection of sheets within a sheet set. An individual
sheet can only be a member of a single subset.
sheet template A drawing file that defines a title block and a layout for use
in sheets. Can be specified for sheet sets and sheet subsets.
shortest path trace See path trace.
site The collection of servers that process MapGuide requests.
site server In a site, the server that contains the resource repository.
slope A method of reporting surface inclination as a ratio that expresses the
horizontal distance in which the elevation changes by one linear unit. For
example, if the ground rises 3 units over a horizontal distance of 15 linear
units (meters or feet), the slope is 5:1 (5 to 1).
source drawing A drawing file attached to another drawing. The set of all
source drawings attached to a drawing is called the drawing set. Use a Map
query to retrieve selected objects from multiple source drawings.
spatial A generic term used to reference the mathematical concept of
n-dimensional data.
spatial analysis The process of understanding, extracting, or creating
information about a set of objects. Spatial analysis includes techniques used
to determine the distribution of objects over a network or area, and the
relationships between those objects. The location of, proximity to, and
orientation of objects can be analyzed with spatial analysis. It is useful for
evaluating suitability and capability, for estimating and predicting, and for
interpreting.
spatial context The general metadata or parameters within which the
geometry for a collection of features resides. In particular, the spatial context
includes the definition of the coordinate system, spheroid parameters, units,
spatial extents, and so on for a collection of geometries owned by features.
spatial data Information about the location and shape of geographic features,
and the relationships between those features. See also feature(s).
spatial database A database containing information indexed by location.
Spatial Database Format See SDF.
1378 | Glossary
spatial filter A selection of objects that specify which records to display in
the active table or query. When a spatial filter is active, the Data View displays
only those records linked to selected objects. Compare with SQL filter.
spatial index An index created in an Oracle Spatial database by dividing the
extents of the drawings in the database into rectangular tiles. Autodesk Map
3D uses the index to locate the geometry to be imported.
spherical coordinate system A coordinate system measured on the surface
of a sphere and expressed as angular distances. Compare with Cartesian
coordinate system.
spheroid See ellipsoid.
SQL filter A series of SQL expressions that specify which records to select in
the active table or query. When an SQL filter is active, the Data View displays
only those records that match the filter criteria. Compare with spatial filter.
style Settings that specify how to display the features or drawing objects in
a Map Display layer. For example, a polygon style that makes parcel polygons
50% transparent and which appears at a scale of 1:50000. One or more styles
can be applied to a single element.
style library Use the style library to store the styles you use frequently. You
can drag and drop these styles onto any element in any other display map.
styling The process of assigning display characteristics (such as line color, line
pattern, fill color, fill pattern, and so on) to a feature (points, polylines,
polygons). See also theming.
stylization Visually or textually changing the display of drawing objects
according to the assigned styles, rather than displaying them with their native
object properties. See also style.
superuser A user who controls user IDs, passwords, and access to sensitive
procedures.
supplementing distance The maximum distance between 3D polyline vertices.
If the distance between vertices is greater than specified, then points will be
added along the 3D polyline in equal increments that are less than or equal
to the supplementing distance.
supplementing factors Add vertices along 3D polylines that are long and
contain few vertices. The supplementing distance is the maximum distance
between vertices. If the distance between vertices is greater than specified,
then points will be added along the 3D polyline in equal increments that are
less than or equal to the supplementing distance. The smaller the distance,
the greater the number of supplemented points.
1379 | Glossary
surface A network of elevation data. Autodesk Map 3D supports raster-based
grid surfaces, such as DEM, DTED, and ESRI Grid. In these types of surfaces,
the points of a surface are connected into a grid, which are then used to
interpolate contours, and to generate profiles and cross-sections. A surface
represents the ground condition at a particular time or event.
surface layer A layer in Display Manager containing a raster-based surface
such as a Digital Terrain Model (DEM), an ESRI Grid file, or Digital Terrain
Elevation Data (DTED). A surface layer is brought in using Data Connect. See
also feature layer, drawing layer, AutoCAD layer.
symbol A bitmap or vector image that is used to represent a point.
symbol table A term referring to the storage of named objects, including
linetypes, layers, text styles, and blocks.
table A set of data arranged in records (rows) and fields (columns). When a
table is displayed in a grid, records display in horizontal rows and fields display
in vertical columns. Each field value in the table displays in a cell.
Task Pane Autodesk Map 3D window provides the tools you need to
accomplish your main mapping tasks - creating, displaying, styling, analyzing,
and publishing maps. The Task Pane contains tasks: Map Explorer, Display
Manager, and Map Book. Map Explorer enables you to manage the resources
you will use to create your maps. Display Manager provides tools to create
maps, and create styles and themes. WIth Map Book, you can print, publish
and share maps. You can resize the Task Pane palette and place it where you
want.
template file A file that formats another file, such as a text file for saving
information from queried objects. See also dot variable, query, and link.
thematic map See theme.
theme A theme is a special kind of style used to vary the stylization based
on some property of the objects. For example, instead of just coloring the
lakes blue, you could vary the shade of blue based on the depth of the lake.
Instead of just altering the line width of the roads, you could vary the line
width based on traffic flow.
theming The process of styling features according to an attribute value. See
also styling.
tiling scheme The method of breaking a large map into multiple smaller tiles.
Options include by area, by number, and custom.
tolerance A radius around a node or linear object used to search for drawing
errors.
1380 | Glossary
tolerance (drawing cleanup) The minimum distance allowed between linear
objects or nodes during drawing cleanup. If two linear objects or nodes are
separated by a distance less than the tolerance, Autodesk Map 3D corrects the
error.
topology A set of geometric relationships between drawing objects, including
links, nodes, and centroids. Topology describes how lines, nodes, and polygons
connect and relate to each other, and forms the basis for advanced GIS
functions such as network tracing, spatial analysis, buffer analysis, overlay
analysis, and dissolving a polygon topology.
topology query An extension to a Map query that applies to a loaded topology.
See also Map query and thematic query.
transparent command A command started while another is in progress.
Precede transparent commands with an apostrophe.
transverse cylindrical projection A map projection, in which the earths
surface is drawn as it would appear if projected on a cylinder wrapped around
the earth in an east-west direction. Compare with cylindrical projection.
UDL (Universal Data Link) File with.udl extension that includes the name
and location of the database table and the software used to create the file.
Windows uses a UDL file to identify a data source. Using the information in
this file, programs such as Autodesk Map 3D can view and update data from
external databases.
undershoot Two or more lines within a specified tolerance of each other that
do not meet.
union Two or more conditions joined with the logical operator Or. An item
is selected only if the item meets at least one of the specified criteria. Compare
with intersection (expression).
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) projection A specific implementation
of the Mercator projection, designed for use around the world. See also
Mercator projection.
vector A mathematical calculation of an object with precise direction and
length. Vector data is stored as X,Y coordinates that form points, lines, and
areas. Compare with raster.
versioning A database function that allows multiple copies of a spatial dataset
to be stored and tracked by date of creation, data of change, and so on.
vertical exaggeration An increase of vertical scale relative to horizontal scale,
used to make elevation changes easier to differentiate.
1381 | Glossary
viewport (paper space) A view of modelspace from a layout.
wavelet A multiple resolution image file compressed using a lossy compression
that enables large graphics to load much faster due to the reduction in file
size. Wavelet compression is based on a mathematical algorithm in which
graphic images can be reduced to a small fraction of their original size.
weeding The removal of points along a selected 3D polyline, which may
represent a contour. The weeding factors determine the amount of points
removed. You can use weeding to reduce the amount of point information
taken from the contours that may not be necessary to generate an accurate
surface.
weeding factors You can use the weeding factor settings to reduce redundant
points along 3D polylines by ignoring vertices that are close together or along
a straight line. A larger distance and deflection angle will weed a greater
number of points. Distance is an absolute measure and the angle is measured
in degrees. The larger the distance value, the greater the number of weeded
points. The weeding factors must be less than the supplementing factors.
A point is weeded by calculating its location in relation to the vertices before
and after it. If the length between these three points is less than the weeding
length value, and the deflection angle is less than the weeding angle value,
then the middle point will not be added to the contour data file.
WFS Web Feature Service. A web service based on the specification defined
by the OGC. Acts as a source of feature data.
WMS Web Map Service. A web service based on the specification defined by
the OGC. Produces an image (for example, a PNG or JPG image) of geospatial
data.
workspace Contains the commands and tools for specific tasks. The Map 3D
For Geospatial workspace is tailored to working with spatial features while
Map 3D For Drawings is optimized for working with drawing objects.
To change your workspace, click View menu ➤ Menu/Toolbar Layout. Click
a workspace.
zoom To change the display magnification so that it focuses on progressively
smaller areas (when you zoom in) or larger areas (when you zoom out) of an
image.
zoom extents To magnify a drawing based on its extents so that the view
shows the largest possible view of all spatial objects.
1382 | Glossary
Index
.DDF files (SDTS format) 353 3DCORBIT command 37
importing 353 3DDISTANCE command 37
.DGN files 347 3DDWF command 37
importing and exporting 347 3DDWFPUBLISH command 37
.DWK files 176, 453, 455 3DFACE command 37
.E00 files 339 3DFLY command 37
importing and exporting 339 3DFORBIT command 37
.GML files 342 3DMESH command 37
importing and exporting 342 3DMOVE command 37
.INI files 134, 191 3DORBIT command 37
.LABELPT variable 615 3DORBITCTR command 37
.MIF files 344 3DPAN command 37
importing and exporting 344 3DPOLY command 37
.SDF files 925 3DROTATE command 37
.SHP files 236, 337 3DSIN command 37
converting to drawing objects 236 3DSOUT command 37
importing and exporting 337 3DSWIVEL command 37
importing vs. adding 236 3DWALK command 37
using as a data source 236 3DZOOM command 37
.SIF files 925
.SYS files 191
.TAB files 346
A
importing and exporting 346 ABOUT command 37
.VML files 354 acadmap.ini file 134, 191
exporting 354 acadmap.sys file 191
.VPF files 355 ACADPUBLISH command 895
importing 355 ACADSAVEAS command 924
accessing data 336
2D 266, 763 contrast with importing 336
draping over 3D surfaces 763 ACISIN command 37
rasters 266 ACISOUT command 37
2D view 763 activating source drawings 133
3D 762, 765 ADCCLOSE command 37
orbit options 765 ADCENTER command 37
viewing 762, 765 ADCNAVIGATE command 37
3D command 37 adding 131, 227, 229, 231, 233, 236,
3D view 763 238–239, 242, 264, 266–267, 275,
3DALIGN command 37 464, 474, 574, 576, 578, 615,
3DARRAY command 37 638, 657, 693, 733, 834
3DCLIP command 37 2D rasters to maps 266
3DCONFIG command 37 annotation 657
1383 | Index
ArcSDE feature data 229 ADEGENLINK command 325, 701, 922,
database records 693 1182
digital elevation models to ADEQUERY command 800, 802, 822,
maps 264 844, 934, 936, 1203
digital terrain elevation data to ADEQUERYLIB command 148, 150,
maps 264 1221
distances 733 ADEQVIEWDWGS command 461, 1358
drawing objects to save set 464 ADEREMOBJS command 471, 1246
drawings to the current map 131 ADERSHEET command 614, 1046
ESRI grid files to maps 264 ADERUNQUERY command 147, 1224
ESRI SHP data 236 ADERUNXQUERY command 147
linear objects to topology 576 ADESAVEOBJS command 462, 466, 468,
maps from WMS 267 1247
Microsoft Access data 239 ADESELOBJS command 464, 1246
MySQL feature data 233 ADESETCRDSYS command 122–123,
nodes to topology 574 851, 1008
objects to save set 474 ADESHOWOBJS command 465, 1247
ODBC feature data 239 ADETEXTLOC command 616, 1175
Oracle feature data 227 ADETRANSFORM command 612, 1047
polygon boundaries 638 ADEWHOHASIT command 455
polygons to topology 578 ADEZEXTENTS command 459, 1358
raster images 275 adjacent arrows 903
raster images to maps 264 for map books 903
raster-based surfaces to maps 264 adjusting 138, 302–303, 307
SDF feature data 238 drawing location 138
SHP feature data 236 image brightness 303
SQL Server feature data 231 image location 302, 307
surfaces to maps 264 administering topologies 597
text to objects 615, 834 affine transformation 113
Web Feature Service data 242 aliases for drives 134
WFS feature data 242 ALIGN command 37
ADEATTACHDATA command 699, 1146 aligning 128–129, 138, 280, 302, 307,
ADEDEFCRDSYS command 77 611, 613, 706
ADEDEFDATA command 159, 922, 1181 attached drawings 129
ADEDEFDOCVIEW command 1354, digitized maps 706
1357 drawings 138
ADEDEFKEYVIEW command 1356–1357 maps 128
ADEDRAWINGS command 130, 132, objects 611, 613
1263 raster images 280, 302, 307
ADEDWGCLEAN command alignment 138, 280, 302, 307, 695, 706
(discontinued) 955 changing in Data View 695
ADEDWGMAINT command 456, 850, of digitized maps 706
1265 of raster images 280, 302, 307
ADEDWGSTAT command 141, 1270 of source drawings 138
ADEEDITDATA command 703, 1147 Alter Linetype dialog box 1024
ADEFILLPOLYG command 617, 1046 Alter Lineweight dialog box 1024
1384 | Index
Alter Plotstyle dialog box 1025 arcs 485, 736
altering object properties 820 converting to polylines 485
Alternate Font dialog box 1201 displaying COGO information
AMECONVERT command 37 for 736
anchoring 479 ArcSDE 229
objects for cleanup 479 adding feature data 229
AND query operator 817 data stores 229
angle information 736 using as a data source 229
displaying 736 ArcView ShapeFile 207, 333, 337, 916
ANGLE variable 969 exporting 207, 916
ANIPATH command 37 exporting as folder 207
annotation 417, 657 importing 333
adding to display elements 417 importing as folder 207
Annotation 152–153, 155–156, 654– importing single select 207
655, 657–661, 753 overview 337
adding for drawing layers 753 area 139, 356, 467, 806, 824
applying for drawing layer altering objects based on 824
themes 753 finding objects by 806
changing templates 155 limiting for import 356
defining templates 153 saving objects to 467
deleting 661 specifying save back extents 139
deleting references to templates 156 AREA command 37
deleting templates 156 AREA variable 969
inserting 657 areas 406
refreshing 659 styling 406
templates 152 arithmetic functions 964
templates from xrefs 152 ARRAY command 37
updating 660 ARX command 37
Annotation Delete Dialog Box 982 aspect 773
Annotation Refresh dialog box 982 theming surfaces for 773
Annotation Text dialog box 982 aspect ratio 281
Annotation Update dialog box 983 checking for images 281
APERTURE command 37 Assign Global Coordinate System Dialog
apparent intersection 482, 488, 512 Box 1008
marking for cleanup 488 ASSIST command 37
selecting 482 ASSISTCLOSE command 37
tolerance for extending 482 Associate Database Versions dialog
APPLOAD command 37 box 1065
ARC command 37 associative hatch 189
Arc/INFO Coverages 207, 333, 339, 916 Attach Object Class Definition File dialog
exporting 207, 916 box 1086
importing 333 Attach Object Data dialog box 1146
overview 339 Attach/Detach Object Data dialog
ARCHIVE command 37 box 1146
ArcInfo Coverages 207, 333, 916 ATTACHDEF 1086
ATTACHDEF command 678
1385 | Index
attaching 131, 147, 164, 216, 275, 316, auditing topology 602
615, 698–700, 834 Australian coordinate systems 91
data 216 changes 91
data sources 164 grid data files 91
data to drawings 164 AutoCAD commands 445, 448
data to objects 316, 698–700 editing features 448
drawings to the current map 131 editing features with 445
external data 164, 316 AutoCAD eTransmit 898
object data 698–700 AutoCAD Help 38
queries to the current drawing 147 viewing 38
raster images 275 AutoCAD layers 357
text to objects 615, 834 importing 357
ATTACHURL command 37 AutoCAD Publish to Web 896
ATTDEF command 37 AutoCommitting changes in the Data
ATTDISP command 37 View 693
ATTEDIT command 37 Autodesk digital animation files 272
ATTEXT command 37 using in maps 272
ATTREDEF command 37 Autodesk DWF Viewer 891, 894
attribute data 216, 256, 324, 363, 365, Autodesk Map 24–25, 27, 31, 72, 93, 118
370, 372, 700, 810, 826, 853, about menus and toolbars 25
916, 921, 929 about the command interface 31
altering objects based on 826 about the Task Pane 27
and queries 853 coordinate system files 93
displaying as text 372 customizing 72
exporting 916, 929 logging in as Superuser 118
exporting text enclosed in a new work environment 24
polyline 921 user privileges 118
finding objects by 810 Autodesk Map Confirmation dialog
importing 363, 365, 370 box 1303
methods for attaching 216 Autodesk Map Contour dialog box 1025
reports 929 Autodesk Map Messages dialog box 1175
stylizing objects by 256 Autodesk Map Options dialog box 1254
using to link data to objects 324, Autodesk MapGuide 375
700 importing from 375
Attribute Data dialog box 1115 Autodesk MapGuide 6.5 and earlier 925
Attribute Selection dialog box exporting to 925
(OSE) 1161 Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise 2007 900
Attribute Value Condition dialog box publishing to 900
(OSE) 1161 Autodesk Raster Design 272, 280
attributes 324, 700, 810, 853 AutoLISP variables 975
and queries 853 automatic drawing cleanup 491
finding objects by 810 automatic save file 468
using to link data to objects 324, autox.sv$ file 468
700 azimuth base 181
ATTSYNC command 37 setting to South 181
AUDIT command 37
1386 | Index
B finding objects by 806
block names, 806
BACKGROUND command 37 block queries 851
background for images 306 and property queries 851
making transparent 306 in preview mode 851
backup files 474 BLOCKICON command 37
BACTION command 37 BLOCKNAME variable 969
BACTIONSET command 37 blocks 116, 173, 324, 365, 418, 472,
BACTIONTOOL command 37 474, 700, 753, 820, 840, 851, 853
balancing polygon boundaries 630 adjusting for map distortion 173
BASE command 37 altering name using queries 820
base object classes 103 andproperty alteration 851
base or abstract classes (inheritance) 387 changing for display elements 418
setting in schema 387 exploding 472
BASSOCIATE command 37 importing 365
BATTMAN command 37 linking automatically to
BATTORDER command 37 records 324, 700
BAUTHORPALETTE command 37 options 173
BAUTHORPALETTECLOSE command 37 querying 853
BCLOSE command 37 redefining on save back 474
BCYCLEORDER command 37 saving to source drawings 472
BEDIT command 37 scaling for drawing layer
best route analysis 862, 864 themes 753
performing 864 specifying color 840
BGRIPSET command 37 specifying for digitized nodes 116
BHATCH command 37 theming for drawing layers 753
BIL files 272 units 173
using in maps 272 BLOOKUPTABLE command 37
bitonal images 272, 280, 301, 303, 306, BMP files 272
309 using in maps 272
changing foreground color 280, 309 BMPOUT command 37
displaying frames 301 boundaries 467, 619, 622, 638, 652, 804
fade 303 breaking objects at 619
inserting 272 changing for polygons 638
making transparent 306 displaying for polygons 652
BLIPMODE command 37 query location 804
block attributes 324, 700, 810, 853, 973 saving objects by 467
and queries 853 trimming objects at 622
finding objects by 810 boundaries (polygon) 630
using to link data to objects 324, balancing 630
700 inner 630
variables 973 outer 630
BLOCK command 37 Boundary Break command 619
block name 824 BOUNDARY command 37
block names 806, 824 BOX command 37
altering objects based on 824 BPARAMETER command 37
1387 | Index
BREAK command 37 cells (in database) 693
Break Objects at Boundary dialog editing 693
box 1058 CENTER variable 969
breaking crossing linear objects 507 central meridian 119
breaking objects at boundaries 619 Centroid Objects dialog box 1304
BREP commandBVSHOW command 37 CENTROID variable 969
brightness 303, 418 centroids 367, 369, 540, 581, 615, 651
changing for display elements 418 creating for polygons 369, 540,
raster images 303 581, 651
Browse/Search dialog box 1175 importing data to 367
BROWSER command 37 moving data to 367, 581
BSAVE command 37 moving label point 615
BSAVEAS command 37 CG4 files 272
bufferfence boundary for query using in maps 272
location 804 CHAMFER command 37
buffering topology 880 Change Category dialog box 1201
improving performance 880 CHANGE command 37
BULGE variable 969 checking in features 441
Bulk Copy 380, 395 checking out features 442–443
copying data from one feature source cancelling 443
to another 395 CHECKSTANDARDS command 37
copying foreign schemas 395 Chooser dialog box 988
overview 380 CHPROP command 37
Bursa/Wolfe conversion method 79 CHSPACE command 37
BVHIDE command 37 CIRCLE command 37
BVSTATE command 37 circles 485, 804
boundary for query location 804
converting to 2D polylines 485
C Civil 3D 376, 378
caching 450 exporting data to SHP files 378
CAL command 37 objects supported 376
CAL files 272 Classified Property List dialog box 1087
using in maps 272 CLASSIFY command 673
calibrating maps 113 Classify dialog box 1087
calibration options 111 Classify Objects dialog box 1088
CALS files 272 classifying objects 670, 672, 675
using in maps 272 cleaning maps 477
CAMERA command 37 CLEANSCREENOFF command 37
Canadian National Transformation 92 CLEANSCREENON command 37
cancelling check out for features 443 cleanup 476–477, 479, 482, 485, 488–
Cartesian coordinate system 113, 119, 491, 494, 497, 500, 512
173 anchoring objects for 479
categories 81, 85, 149 apparent intersection 512
for coordinate systems 81, 85 cleanup actions 497
for queries 149 correcting errors 490
correcting errors automatically 491
1388 | Index
displaying markers 494 making transparent 306
elevation for new objects 485 restoring default 72
fixing errors interactively 494 setting feature default 975
for topology 497 theming for drawing layers 753
layers for new objects 485 using to modify thematic
markers 488 objects 820
order of actions 482 Column dialog box 1065
order of operations 497 Column Values dialog box 1067
overview 476 Column Values dialog box (OSE) 1162
overview of options 497 columns (in database tables) 319, 695–
profiles 489–490 696, 788
reviewing errors before formatting in Data View 695
correcting 494 freezing in Data View 696
selecting actions 482, 500 hiding in Data View 696
selecting objects for 479 key columns for link templates 319
tolerance for 482 making narrower in Data View 695
Cleanup Methods page 996 searching in Data View 788
clearing Data View formatting 695 combining maps 131
Clipboard (Windows) 693 command line 31, 286
copying data to 693 in Autodesk Map 31
clipping 312 inserting images 286
raster images 312 COMMANDLINE command 37
CLOSE command 37 COMMANDLINEHIDE command 37
CLOSEALL command 37 commands 940, 955, 959
closed polylines 369, 590, 923 blocked during refedit 959
creating centroids 369 changed from previous releases 940
creating from polygons 590 committing changes in the Data
creating from polygons during View 693
export 923 COMPILE command 37
clustered nodes 482, 488, 514 complete topology 602
marking for cleanup 488 complex linear objects 488, 521
tolerance for deleting 482 marking for cleanup 488
color coding thematic maps 820 simplifying 521
COLOR command 37 composite topology 877
Color Range Editor dialog box 1088 dissolving 877
COLOR variable 969 Computer Aided Acquisition files 272
colors 72, 116, 306, 418, 695, 753, 806, using in maps 272
820, 824, 840, 975 conditional functions 966
altering objects based on 824 conditions 243, 260
altering using queries 820 for filtering feature layers 243
changing for blocks 840 to select objects for display
changing for display elements 418 elements 260
changing in Data View 695 conditions for filters 1100
digitizing 116 creating for feature source
finding objects by 806 queries 1100
list of 975
1389 | Index
conditions for queries 801–802, 804, elevation for new objects 485
806, 810, 814, 817–818 layers for new objects 485
block attribute conditions 810 line width for new objects 485
combining 817 object data to database table 326
data conditions 810 polygons to polylines 590
editing 818 polygons to polylines during
link data conditions 810 export 923
location conditions 804 polylines to polygons 645
object data conditions 810 CONVERTOLDLIGHTS command 37
overview 802 CONVERTOLDMATERIALS command 37
precedence 817 CONVERTPSTYLES command 37
property conditions 806 CONVTOSOLID command 37
SQL conditions 814 CONVTOSURFACE command 37
CONE command 37 coordinate conversion 361, 916
configuration dialog boxes 167 during export 916
viewing 167 during import 361
Configure Data Source dialog box 1067 Coordinate Filters (command modifier)
configuring 110, 167 command 37
data sources 167 coordinate geometry 181, 732, 736
digitizers 110 displaying information for lines and
Conflict Resolution dialog bo 1117 arcs 736
conformal projections 119 measuring 732
Connect Data Source dialog box 1068 options 181, 732
connecting data sources 168 coordinate systems 76–77, 79–82, 85–
constraints 387 87, 91–93, 119, 121, 123–126,
setting in schema 387 173, 180, 224, 361, 629, 729,
continuous distances 735 731, 850, 916
base option 735 and feature sources 224
contour lines 507, 521, 705–706, 759 assigning to drawings 123
about 759 assigning to source drawings 121
and Drawing Cleanup 507 basing on datum 77
digitizing 705–706 basing on ellipsoid 77
simplifying 521 categories 81, 85
contrast 303 changes to Australian 91
raster images 303 creating 76
control points for digitizing 706 datum shift issues for North American
conversion functions 968 users 92
CONVERT command 37 defining 77
Convert Object Data to Database Links defining a datum 79
dialog box 1068 defining an ellipsoid 80
CONVERTCTB command 37 deleting 82
converting 326, 333, 485, 590, 645, 916, digitizing points 629
923 files 93
drawing objects after cleanup 485 for current drawing 119
drawings from other formats 333 for source drawings 119
drawings to other formats 916 GDC files 87
1390 | Index
geodetic 124 corridor to buffer topology 880
grid data catalog (GDC) files 87 Coverages 207, 333, 339, 916
grid data files 86 exporting 207, 916
latitude and longitude 77 importing 333
measuring geodetic distance 731 overview 339
modifying 82 create 1048, 1050, 1052–1053, 1055–
options 173, 180 1056
overview 119 linestring feature 1048
removing from drawings 125, 850 multilinestring feature 1050
specifying for export 916 multipoint feature 1052
specifying for import 361 multipolygon feature 1053
tracking coordinates 729 point feature 1055
transformation options 180 polygon feature 1056
transforming for a drawing 126 Create Centroids dialog box 1177
viewing for source drawing 126 Create Classified Object command 671
coordinate transformation 119, 121, 180 Create Closed Polylines dialog box 1305
options 180 Create Map Book dialog box 1140
overview 119 Create Network Topology Create New
coordinates 269, 275, 280, 307, 629, Nodes dialog box 1306
728–729 Create Network Topology Select Links
digitizing 629 dialog box 1307
for raster images 280, 307 Create Network Topology Select Nodes
inserting images to 275 dialog box 1308
specifying for raster images 269 Create Node Topology Select Nodes dialog
tracking 729 box 1309
COPY command 37 Create Polygon Topology Create New
Copy Scale dialog box 1026 Centroids dialog box 1310
COPYBASE command 37 Create Polygon Topology Create New
COPYCLIP command 37 Nodes dialog box 1311
COPYHIST command 37 Create Polygon Topology Select Centroids
copying 395 dialog box 1312
data from one feature source to Create Polygon Topology Select Links
another 395 dialog box 1313
COPYLINK command 37 Create Polygon Topology Select Nodes
COPYTOLAYER command 37 dialog box 1314
correcting topology 602 Create Polygon Topology Set Error Markers
correlation 281 dialog box 1315
for raster images 281 Create Polygons From Topology dialog
correlation settings 197, 276, 278, 280, box 1195
307 Create Topology Select Topology dialog
changing after insertion 307 box 1317
changing during insertion 280 Create Topology Warning dialog
setting defaults 197 box 1319
correlation source 192, 278, 280
resource files 192
selecting for raster images 280
1391 | Index
creating 76, 79–81, 220, 384, 438–440, coordinate system 180
530, 532, 535, 540, 635, 651, coordinate transformation 173
670, 742, 744, 848 data source 173, 186
automatic themes for feature Data View 185
layers 744 database 173, 183, 186
centroids 651 digitizing 116
coordinate system categories 81 drawing origin 138
coordinate systems 76 drawing settings 173
datums 79 export 207
drawing objects 670 log file 178
ellipsoids 80 mapexport.ini 207
feature classes in schemas 384 multi-user settings 176
linestring features 440 overview 169
maps 220 queries 187
multilinestring features 440 raster images 192
multipoint features 438 save back settings 474
multipolygon features 439 saving options 191
point features 438 system settings 178
polygon features 439 Task Pane 170
polygons 635 workspaces 72
properties in schemas 384 CUTCLIP command 37
query indexes 848 CYLINDER command 37
schemas in feature sources 384
themes for feature layers 742
topology 530, 532, 535, 540
D
criteria for queries 804 dangling nodes 488, 518
crossing linear objects 488, 507 marking for cleanup 488
breaking 507 dangling objects 482
marking for cleanup 488 tolerance for deleting 482
CSUPDATE utility 76 DASHBOARD command 37
CUI command 37 DASHBOARDCLOSE command 37
CUIEXPORT command 37 data 36, 116, 159, 164, 167, 216, 256,
CUIIMPORT command 37 316, 326, 363, 370, 372, 380,
CUILOAD command 37 395, 532, 535, 540, 597, 687,
CUIUNLOAD command 37 693, 698–700, 702, 715, 718,
CUSTOMIZE command 37 790, 792, 795, 797, 810, 814,
customizing 72, 116, 138, 168–170, 173, 826, 828, 877, 916
176, 178, 180, 183, 185–187, 191– altering objects based on 826, 828
192, 207, 474, 790 attaching data sources 164
Autodesk Map 72, 169, 191 attaching external data 164
automatically connecting data attaching multiple records 699
sources 168 attaching object data 698
automatically highlighting linked attaching object data
objects 790 automatically 700
automatically zooming to linked attaching to maps 216
objects 790 attaching to objects 164, 316, 698
1392 | Index
attaching while digitizing 116, 715, finding a subset of data 778
718 using to find features 777
configuring data sources 167 using to highlight areas in map 725
converting 326 using to remove highlighting in
copying from one feature source to map 726
another 395 using to zoom to a view 726
Data View 687 viewing data for all feature
default database versions 164 classes 725
displaying as text 372 viewing data for features 314
editing external data 693 viewing feature class data 725
editing object data 702 Data Source Name (DSN) 164, 167, 239
exporting 916 creating in Windows XP 239
filtering 795, 797 data sources 164, 166–168, 173, 181,
finding objects by 810, 814 183, 186, 238, 319
for network topology 535 attaching 164
for node topology 532 configuring acoordinate
for polygon topology 540 geometry 181
importing 363, 370 configuring automatically 166
importing and attaching 216 configuring manually 166
linking to objects 316, 698 connecting 168
managing 380 connecting automatically 168
methods for attaching 216 default database versions 164, 186
modifying object data tables 159 detaching 164
samples included with Autodesk disconnecting 168
Map 36 key columns 319
saving changes 693 options 173, 183, 186
stylizing objects by 256 SDF 238
using in queries 810 UDL (Universal Data Link) file
using to dissolve topology 877 for 164
viewing for drawing objects 792 viewing configuration dialog
viewing for topology 597 boxes 167
viewing linked drawing objects 790 Data to Attach dialog box 1017
viewing with Data View 687 data types 363, 370
data conditions for queries 810, 818 importing 363, 370
editing 818 Data View 185, 319–320, 322, 330, 687,
Data Connect 224, 380–381 691, 693, 695–696, 728, 785–786,
creating feature sources 380–381 788, 790, 792, 794–795, 797,
Data Expression dialog box 1178 814, 929–931
Data Grid 314, 445–446, 723–727, 777– adding records 693
778, 929–930 and SQL queries 794
exporting data from 929 clearing customizations 695
about 723 copying data to Windows
displaying 724 Clipboard 693
docking 724 customizing 695–696
editing features with 445–446 deleting records 693
exporting from 727, 930 displaying hidden columns 696
1393 | Index
editing records 693 default version 186
filtering 795, 797 deleting records 693
finding records 788 detaching 164
formatting columns 695 disconnecting 168
freezing columns 696 displaying data as text 372
hiding columns 696 editing 693
highlighting linked objects 790 external database 687
highlighting linked records 792 filtering 795, 797
link templates 319–320, 330 finding objects by 814
linking records to objects 322 highlighting linked drawing
navigating 687 objects 790
opening tables 691 highlighting linked records 792
options 185 importing links 370
overview 687 key columns 319
printing data from 929 link templates 319–320, 330
printing tables 930–931 linking records to objects 316, 322,
running a database query 691 324
saving changes 693 linking to while digitizing 718
saving customizations 695 navigating 687
scrolling 792 opening in Data View 691
spatial filter 797 opening linked 320
SQL filter 795 printing from Data View 930–931
unfreezing columns 696 querying 691
using database links 785–786, 790, saving changes 693
792, 795, 797, 814 saving customizations 695
using SQL queries 795 searching 788
viewing external data in 728 UDL (Universal Data Link) file
viewing linked drawing objects 790 for 164, 167
viewing linked records 792 using database links 785–786
viewing tables 691 viewing 687
zooming to linked drawing viewing linked drawing objects 790
objects 790 viewing linked records 792
database link index 848 database users 397
database queries 691 setting up 397
running 691 databases 161, 164, 167–168, 186, 216,
database tables 164, 167–168, 186, 316, 316, 322, 324, 326, 397, 687,
319–320, 322, 324, 330, 370, 693, 718, 728, 785–786, 788,
372, 687, 691, 693, 695–696, 790, 792, 795, 797, 814, 828
718, 785–786, 788, 790, 792, adding records 693
795, 797, 814, 828, 930–931 altering objects based on 828
adding records 693 attaching to drawing 164
altering objects based on 828 attaching to maps 161
attaching to drawing 164 configuring 167
clearing customizations 695 connecting 168
connecting 168 converting from object data 326
customizing 695–696 default version 186
1394 | Index
deleting records 693 dBASE 164, 166, 186
detaching 164 attaching data source 166
disconnecting 168 attaching database to drawing 164
editing 693 setting default version 186
filtering 795, 797 using database from 164
finding objects by 814 DBCCLOSE command 37
highlighting linked drawing DBCONNECT command 37
objects 790 DBF files 164, 186
highlighting linked records 792 attaching to drawing 164
linking records to objects 316, 322, setting default version 186
324 DBLIST command 37
linking to while digitizing 718 DDEDIT command 37
methods for attaching data 216 DDPTYPE command 37
saving changes 693 DDVPOINT command 37
searching 788 default values for object data fields 158
setting up users 397 defaults 105, 164
UDL (Universal Data Link) file database versions 164
for 164, 167 for object classes 105
users 397 Define Annotation Template dialog
using database links 785–786 box 983
version 164 Define Document View dialog box 1354
viewing 687 Define Hatch dialog box 1026
viewing information in Data Define Key View dialog box 1356
View 728 Define Link Template dialog box 1070–
viewing linked objects 790 1071
viewing linked records 792 Define New Object Data Field dialog
DATAVIEWHEADERANDFOOTER box 988
command 932 Define New Object Data Table dialog
DATAVIEWPAGESSETUP command 932 box 1178
DATAVIEWPRINT command 932 Define Object Classification dialog
date information 814 box 1089
finding objects by 814 Define Object Data dialog box 1181
dates in SQL conditions 814 Define Query dialog box 1203
datum (for coordinate system) 76, 79, Define Range Table dialog box 1208
83, 91–92, 124 Define Text dialog box 1027, 1210
changes to Australian 91 Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog
defining 79 box 1263
deleting 83 defining 77, 79–80, 99, 615
geodetic coordinate systems 124 coordinate systems 77
modifying 83 datums 79
shift issues 92 ellipsoids 80
datum transformation changes in object classes 99
Australia 91 text insertion point 615
DB files 164, 186 defining object classes 100
attaching to drawing 164 DELAY command 37
setting default version 186 Delete Topology dialog box 1319
1395 | Index
deleting 82–85, 125, 159, 328, 392, 582, changing the seed file for a single
590, 606, 661, 693 file 347
annotation 661 exporting 207
coordinate system assignment 125 exporting to 916
coordinate system categories 85 importing 333
coordinate systems 82 overview 347
database links 328 seed file for 347
database records 693 units of measurement 207
datums 83 dialog boxes 959, 982–983, 985–986,
ellipsoids 84 988–991, 996–998, 1000–1001,
feature classes in schemas 392 1003, 1008–1009, 1017, 1019–
links (linear objects) 582 1020, 1023–1031, 1033–1041,
nodes 582 1058, 1060, 1065, 1067–1068,
object data tables 159 1070–1079, 1081–1082, 1086–
polygons 582 1089, 1093–1095, 1098–1100,
properties in schemas 392 1107, 1109, 1111–1112, 1115,
schemas in feature sources 392 1117, 1119, 1122, 1124, 1128–
topology 590, 606 1129, 1135–1137, 1140, 1142–
density 268–269, 283, 285, 820 1144, 1146–1147, 1149, 1155,
and raster images 268 1175, 1177–1178, 1181–1182,
for images 283 1184–1188, 1201, 1203, 1208,
for images that are 1210, 1212–1213, 1216–1217,
georeferenced 283 1221, 1223–1224, 1226, 1228,
for images that are not 1232, 1236–1240, 1244, 1247,
georeferenced 283 1254, 1263, 1265–1267, 1270–
showing with thematic maps 820 1274, 1276, 1280–1283, 1285,
specifying for raster images 269 1287–1288, 1303–1315, 1317,
ssetting for raster images 285 1319–1320, 1322–1327, 1329,
descriptions 136, 158 1331–1342, 1344–1348, 1350–
for object data fields 158 1351, 1354, 1356–1358
for source drawings 136 Thematic Mapping 1040
parameters 136 Add Thematic Range 1280
Design Web Format 891, 894 Alter Block Insertion 1023
publishing maps to 891, 894 Alter Line Format 1024
Detach Data Source dialog box 1072 Alter Linetype 1024
detaching 164, 195, 298, 464 Alter Lineweight 1024
data sources 164 Alter Plotstyle 1025
drawings 464 Alternate Font 1201
raster images 195, 298 Annotation Delete 982
DETACHURL command 37 Annotation Refresh 982
deviation for map calibration 113 Annotation Text 982
DGN files 207, 333, 347, 916 Annotation Update 983
changing export default to imperial Assign Global Coordinate
units 207 System 1008
changing the default seed file 207, Associate Database Versions 1065
347
1396 | Index
Attach Object Class Definition Create Polygon Topology Select
File 1086 Nodes 1314
Attach Object Data 1146 Create Polygon Topology Set Error
Attach/Detach Object Data 1146 Markers 1315
Attribute Data 1115 Create Topology Select
Autodesk Map Confirmation 1303 Topology 1317
Autodesk Map Messages 1175 Create Topology Warning 1319
Autodesk Map Options 1254 Data Expression 1178
Break Objects at Boundary 1058 Data to Attach 1017
Browse/Search 1175 Define Annotation Template 983
Centroid Objects 1304 Define Document View 1354
Change Category 1201 Define Hatch 1026
Chooser 988 Define Key View 1356
Classified Property List 1087 Define Link Template 1070–1071
Classify 1087 Define New Object Data Field 988
Classify Objects 1088 Define New Object Data Table 1178
Cleanup Methods page 996 Define Object Classification 1089
Color Range Editor 1088 Define Object Data 1181
Column 1065 Define Query 1203
Column Values 1067 Define Range Table 1208
Configure Data Source 1067 Define Text 1027, 1210
Conflict Resolution 1117 Define/Modify Drawing Set 1263
Connect Data Source 1068 Delete Topology 1319
Convert Object Data to Database Detach Data Source 1072
Links 1068 Digitize Setup 1017
Copy Scale 1026 Disconnect Data Source 1072
Create Centroids 1177 Document View 1357
Create Closed Polylines 1305 Drawing Cleanup 1000
Create Map Book 1140 Drawing Cleanup Errors 1001
Create Network Topology Create New Drawing Maintenance 1265
Nodes 1306 Drawing Set Display Filter 1266
Create Network Topology Select Drawing Settings 1267
Links 1307 Drawing Statistics 1270
Create Network Topology Select Drive Alias Administration 1271
Nodes 1308 Edit Direct Resistance 1319
Create Node Topology Select Edit Direction 1320
Nodes 1309 Edit Expression 985
Create Polygon Topology Create New Edit Object Data 1147
Centroids 1310 Edit Reverse Resistance 1320
Create Polygon Topology Create New Edit Thematic Range 1281
Nodes 1311 Error Markers page 997
Create Polygon Topology Select Export 1119
Centoids 1312 Expression 988
Create Polygon Topology Select External Database Mapping 1135
Links 1313 Feature Class Attribute
Mapping 1122
1397 | Index
Feature Information 1098 Network Topology Analysis
Feature Source Adminstration 1098 Output 1326
Feature Source Connection 1098 Network Topology Analysis Resistance
Feature Source Query 1099 and Direction 1327
Feature Source Scope 1098 Network Topology Analysis Select
Filter (for theming) 1028 Method 1329
Filter Condition 1100 New Annotation Template
Generate Data Links 1182 Name 986
Generate Object Data Index 1272 New Category 1203
Hatch Options 1212 New Feature Definition File 1155
Header/Footer 1073 New Layer 989, 1184
Identify Map Book Layout New Object Class Definition
Placeholders 1142 File 1094
Image Correlation 1236 New Property 1095
Image Information 1237 New Range Table 1216
Image Management 1237 New Scale 1029
Image Management Layout 1238 Node Objects 1331–1332
Image Select 1239 Number Expression 1030
Import 1124 Object Data Mapping 1135
Import Data Mapping 1135 Object Thematic Mapping 1282
Import Old Theme 1029 Output Report Options 1217
Index Maintenance 1272 Page Setup 1074
Insert Annotation 985 Plotstyle Range Editor 1095
Insert Image 1239 Point Mapping 1136
Insert Thematic Range 1281 Property Expression 1283
Key View 1357 Property Value Condition (feature
Layer Mapping 1128 source query) 1109
Layer Range Editor 1093 Property Values (feature source
Layers to DGN Levels 1129 query) 1111
Linetype Range Editor 1093 Publish to MapGuide 988, 1144
Lineweight Range Editor 1094 Query Library Administration 1221
Link Objects 1322 Quick View Drawings 1358
Link Template Data Entry 1019 Range of Values 1031
Link Template Key Column Raster Extension Options 1240
Entry 1020 Remove Object Data Index 1273
Link Template Properties 1074 Rename Category 1223
Load Internal Query 1213 Rename Range Table 1223
Load Topology 1323 Rename Table 1149
Load Topology Conflict 1323 Rename Topology 1333
Load Topology From Source Run Library Query 1224
Drawing 1324 Save Current Query 1224
Location Condition (feature source Save Features 1111
query) 1107 Save Objects to Source
Map Book Properties 1142–1143 Drawings 1247
Network Topology Analysis Choose Save Version 1112
Locations 1325 SDF Export 990
1398 | Index
SDF Import 991 Table Filter 1079
Select 1137, 1186 Table Filter History 1081
Select Actions page 998 Table Properties 1081
Select Alias 1274 Text Expression 1039
Select Block 1185 Thematic Display Options 1285
Select Blocks 1185 Thematic Legend Design 1287
Select Data 1185, 1334 Thematic Values 1041
Select Database Version 1075 Tile Properties 1142
Select Display Element 1033 Topology Buffer Create New Centroids
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate and Nodes 1335
System 1009 Topology Buffer New
Select Drawings to Attach 1186 Topology 1335
Select Existing Link Template 1076 Topology Buffer Set Buffer
Select Feature Classes 1137 Distance 1336
Select Feature Classes (Display Topology Dissolve Create New
Manager) 1033 Centroids and Nodes 1337
Select Features 1187 Topology Dissolve Create
Select Images (Display Nodes 1338
Manager) 1033 Topology Dissolve New
Select Layer 1187 Topology 1339
Select Layers 1187 Topology Dissolve Object Data 1340
Select Layers (Display Topology Dissolve Set
Manager) 1033 Parameter 1341
Select Linetype 1285 Topology Overlay Analysis Analysis
Select Link Template 1077 Type 1342
Select Link Template Key 1149 Topology Overlay Analysis Create
Select Link Templates 1077 New Centroids and
Select Objects page 1003 Nodes 1344
Select Pattern 1285 Topology Overlay Analysis Create
Select Plot Set to Convert 1143 Nodes 1345
Select Property 1187 Topology Overlay Analysis New
Select Query 1077 Topology 1346
Select SQL Column 1188 Topology Overlay Analysis Output
Select Style 1285 Attributes 1347
Select Table 1078 Topology Overlay Analysis Select
Select Topologies (Display Overlay Topology 1348
Manager) 1033 Topology Query 1348
Set Property Alterations 1226 Topology Query Result 1350
Sort 1078 Topology Selection 1351
Source Drawing Scope 1034 Topology Statistics 1351
SQL Condition History 1228 Topology Thematic Mapping 1288
SQL Expression 1188 Transparency Color 1244
Style Label 1035 Trim Objects at Boundary 1060
Style Lines 1036 Type SQL Condition 1232
Style Point 1037 Undefined Alias Referenced 1274
Style Points 1038 User Administration 1274
1399 | Index
User Information 1276 DIMALIGNED command 37
User Login 1276 DIMANGULAR command 37
using wild-card characters 959 DIMARC command 37
View Query Statement 1112 DIMBASELINE command 37
Zoom Drawing Extents 1358 DIMCENTER command 37
Zoom Scale 1082 DIMCONTINUE command 37
dialog boxes, 982–983, 985–986, 996– DIMDIAMETER command 37
998, 1000–1001, 1003, 1306– DIMDISASSOCIATE command 37
1315, 1317, 1319, 1325–1327, DIMEDIT command 37
1329, 1335–1342, 1344–1348, dimensions 472
1350–1351 saving to source drawings 472
DIB files 272 DIMJOGGED command 37
using in maps 272 DIMLINEAR command 37
digital elevation models 264, 759, 761, DIMORDINATE command 37
763, 770, 774 DIMOVERRIDE command 37
adding contour lines 761 DIMRADIUS command 37
adding to maps 264 DIMREASSOCIATE command 37
applying hillshading 770 DIMREGEN command 37
applying vertical exaggeration 770 DIMSTYLE command 37
changing theme colors 774 DIMTEDIT command 37
draping vector data on 763 Direct Distance Entry (command modifier)
overview of analysis 759 command 37
digital terrain elevation data 264 direction for links 546, 570
adding to maps 264 directories 134, 178, 192
Digitize Setup dialog box 1017 drive aliases for 134
digitizers 110 for external queries 178
configuring 110 for resource files 192
digitizing 109–110, 113, 116, 477, 629, disabling polygons 652
705–706, 712, 715, 718 Disconnect Data Source dialog box 1072
attaching external data 718 disconnecting data sources 168
attaching object data 715 discontinuous map edges 628
calibrating 113 Display Manager 170, 245, 262, 400–
correcting errors 477 401, 411, 413, 418, 420–422, 424–
layers 116 425, 429, 431, 927–928
maps 109, 705–706, 712 adding images 262
options 116 combining styles 420
overview 705–706 controlling display order 429
registering maps 113 creating styles 418
setting up 109 displaying 401
tablet 109 displaying tab 170
tablets 109 draw order 245
tips 706, 712 exporting layers 927–928
using coordinates 629 exporting layers in SDF format 927
width 116 legend 431
digitizing tablet 110 Map Base 245
DIM and DIM1 command 37 modifying styles 421
1400 | Index
order of objects 245 database tables 687, 691
overview 400 drawing objects linked to data 790
quick chart 413 maps 460
saving layers 927–928 object data as text 372
scale threshold 425 object data records 702
selecting drawing objects 245 object locks 455
sharing maps 928 objects in save set 465
Style Library 422, 424 raster image frames 301
stylizing elements 411 raster image information 288
using 413 raster images 194, 272, 304
using layers in MapGuide 2007 927 save back extents 139
display order 291, 429 selected records in table 795, 797
controlling in the Display source drawing information 141
Manager 429 topology data 597
for raster images 291 topology statistics 598
display quality of raster images 194, 304 dissolving 516, 877
display styles 418, 420–422, 424–426, pseudo nodes 516
428–429, 431 topology 877
combining 420 DIST command 37
controlling display order 429 distances 731, 733–735, 859, 864, 868,
creating 418 880
legend 431 adding 733
modifying 421 buffering a topology by 880
modifying for scale thresholds 425– continuous 734–735
426 finding shortest 859, 864
referencing 424 measuring geodetic distance 731
saving 422 tracing in topology 859, 864, 868
viewing at all scales 428 DISTANTLIGHT command 37
Display tab (Display Manager) 28, 170, distortion in maps 173, 613, 628
413 distribution methods 746–747
about 28 equal 746
displaying 170 individual values 746–747
using 413 Jenks (natural breaks) 746
displaying 139, 141, 167, 194, 272, 288, quantile 746
301, 304, 372, 429, 455, 460, standard deviation 746
465, 597–598, 687, 691, 696, DIVIDE command 37
702, 736, 790, 792, 795, 797 dividing 643
angle information 736 polygons 643
attribute data as text 372 DNF format (Ordinance Survey of Great
COGO information for lines and Britain GML) 333, 342
arcs 736 about 342
configuration dialog boxes 167 importing 333
controlling draw order 429 Document View dialog box 1357
data as text 372 DONUT command 37
data linked to drawing objects 792 dot queries 823
Data View columns 696
1401 | Index
dot variables 615, 969 drawing data 216, 436
LABELPT 615 combining with feature data 216
draft quality raster image display 194 understanding 436
dragging drawings onto the Task drawing file formats 216
Pane 131 methods for attaching data 216
DRAGMODE command 37 drawing layers 357, 416, 749–750, 753
Draw mode queries 842–843, 846 and themes 749, 753
draw order 221, 245, 429 creating themes for 750
and layer organization 221 specifying during import 357
changing 221 styling 416
in Display Manager 245 theming 753
Drawing Ceanup 497 Drawing Maintenance dialog box 1265
cleanup actions 497 drawing objects 100, 135, 141, 189, 216,
Drawing Cleanup 476–477, 479, 482, 245, 249–250, 252, 254, 256,
485, 488–491, 494, 497, 500, 258, 260, 316, 322, 324, 326,
512, 514, 516, 518, 526, 996– 328, 333, 436, 440, 449, 453,
998, 1003 455–456, 460, 462, 464–470, 474,
anchoring objects for 479 479, 485, 503, 512, 540, 549,
apparent intersection 512 584, 594, 611, 613, 615, 617,
Cleanup Methods page 996 619, 622, 624, 670, 672, 674–
clustered nodes 514 675, 698–700, 702, 705–706, 715,
correcting errors automatically 491 718, 784–786, 790, 792, 794–795,
correction methods 490 797, 799, 801, 804–806, 811,
dangling nodes 518 814, 817–818, 820, 822–824, 826,
elevation for new objects 485 828, 833–834, 837–838, 842–843,
Error Markers page 997 851, 855, 916–917, 924, 933
fixing errors interactively 494 about 436
for topology 497 adding hatch during a query 838
layers for new objects 485 adding text during a query 834
markers 488 adding to save sets 464
order of actions 482 altering based on queries 820, 822,
order of operations 497 824, 826, 828
overview 476 altering properties 823
overview of options 497 anchoring for cleanup 479
profiles 489–490 and SQL queries 794
pseudo nodes 516 associative hatch 189
reviewing errors before attaching external data while
correcting 494 digitizing 718
Select Actions page 998 attaching multiple records 699
Select Objects page 1003 attaching object data
selecting actions 482, 500 automatically 700
selecting objects for 479 attaching object data manually 698
tolerance for 482 attaching object data while
using 477 digitizing 715
weeding 3D polylines 526 breaking 619
Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box 1001 centroids 540
1402 | Index
classified properties 674 methods for attaching data 216
classifying 100, 670, 672, 675 moving 611, 613
combining query conditions 817 object properties and layer
converting after cleanup 485 properties 805
converting to features 440 querying 799
counting 141 removing from save set 470
creating using object classes 670 retrieving by groups 851
defining expressions for 833 retrieving during queries 843
defining label point 837 retrieving hatched areas 851
deleting duplicates 503 rotating 611, 613
digitizing 705–706 rubber sheeting 613
displaying thematically 820 saving 456
editing 624 saving as DXF 924
editing for topology 549 saving to drawing 468
editing in source drawings 135, 462 saving to new drawings 469
editing object class data 674 saving to source drawings 466–467
editing object data 702 scaling 611, 613
editing query conditions 818 selecting 245
erasing on save back 474 selecting by properties 784
executing queries 842 selecting for cleanup 479
exporting 916 selecting with object
exporting to other file formats 917 classification 675
extending to apparent SQL conditions 811
intersection 512 styling by object class 250
filling 617 stylizing by attribute data 256
filtering records by 797 stylizing by layer 249
filtering with SQL queries 795 stylizing by location 252
finding by location 804 stylizing by multiple conditions 260
finding by property 806 stylizing by property 254
finding with queries 799, 801 stylizing by topology 258
grips 624 text insertion point 615
highlighted by data 790 transforming 611
highlighting linked records 792 trimming 622
highlighting locked objects 465 updating for topology 584
highlighting topology 594 using database links 785–786, 790,
identifying topology 594 792, 797, 814
importing 333 using Quick Select 784
linked to records 785–786, 790 using topologies 855
linking to a database using object viewing all in source drawings 460
data 324 viewing by data 790
linking to external database viewing linked records 792
records 316, 322, 324, 326, viewing locked objects 465
328 viewing locks 455
listing for queries 933 zooming to by data 790
locking 453, 464 drawing origin 138
merging with existing features 449 modifying for source drawings 138
1403 | Index
drawing set 70, 128, 130–131, 133, 136, creating query indexes 848
173 descriptions 136
activating drawings 133 detaching 464
adding drawings 131 detaching data sources 164
creating 130 digitizing 705–706
modifying settings 136 disconnecting data sources 168
options 173 distortion 173, 613, 628
overview 128 drawing set 128
privileges 70 drive aliases for 134
Drawing Set Display Filter dialog editing 462, 477, 608
box 1266 enlargements 620
Drawing Settings dialog box 1267 extents 139
Drawing Statistics dialog box 1270 global coordinate systems 121, 123,
DRAWINGRECOVERY command 37 126
DRAWINGRECOVERYHIDE importing 333
command 37 indexing 848
drawings 20, 70, 121, 123, 125–126, link templates 319, 330
128–131, 133–136, 138–139, 141, locking 453
147, 164, 168, 173, 191, 319, matching drawing edges 628
330, 333, 453, 455–456, 458, nested 130, 133
460, 462, 464, 466–469, 474, offset for source drawings 138
477, 528, 608, 613, 619–620, opening source drawings 135
622, 628, 705–706, 799, 801, options 173, 191
848, 850, 928 privileges 70
activating 133 querying 801
activating automatically 173 Quick View 460
adding queries 147 removing coordinate system
aligning 129, 138 assignment 125, 850
and xrefs 130 retrieving objects from 799
assigning coordinate system 121, rotating source drawings 138
123 rubber sheeting 613
attaching data sources 164 save back extents 139, 467
attaching databases 164 saving 464
attaching drawings 131 saving objects to 456, 466–469
attaching to the current saving queried objects 456
drawing 131 saving, Display Manager 928
backup files 474 scaling source drawings 138
breaking objects at boundaries 619– settings 136
620 sharing 134, 453, 464
cleaning 477 stretching 613
connecting data sources 168 tiles 467
connecting data sources tiling 129
automatically 168 topology 528
coordinate systems 121, 123, 126 transforming 138
creating from existing drawings 456 transforming coordinate system 126
creating new 469 trimming objects at boundaries 622
1404 | Index
updating 466 DWGNAME variable 969
viewing 460 DWGPROPS command 37
viewing coordinate systems 126 DWK files 176, 453, 455
viewing information 141 DXBIN command 37
viewing locks 455 DXF 924
zooming to extents 458 saving drawing objects as 924
DRAWORDER command 37 DXF files 374, 924
Drive Alias Administration dialog exporting 924
box 1271 importing 374
drive aliases 134 Dynamic Input 31
creating 134 in Autodesk Map 31
name parameters 134
driver options 337, 339, 342, 344, 346–
347, 353, 355
E
ArcView Shape files 337 E00 339
DGN version 7 and 8 347 EANGLE variable 969
ESRI Arc/Info Coverages 339 EATTEDIT command 37
GML files 342 EATTEXT command 37
MapInfo MIF/MID files 344 ECW files 265–266, 272
MapInfo TAB files 346 adding to maps 266
SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard) using in maps 272
files 353 EDGE command 37
VPF (Vector Product Format) edges 619, 622, 628, 652
files 355 breaking objects at 619
drivers 164, 183, 333 displaying for polygons 652
default 183 matching 628
options 333 trimming objects at 622
supported 164 EDGESURF command 37
DSETTINGS command 37 edit 1049, 1051–1052, 1054, 1057
DSN (Data Source Name) 164, 167, 239 linestring feature 1049
creating in Windows XP 239 multilinestring feature 1051
DSVIEWER command 37 multipoint feature 1052
duplicate objects 482, 488, 503 multipolygon feature 1054
deleting 503 polygon feature 1057
marking for cleanup 488 Edit Direct Resistance dialog box 1319
tolerance for deleting 482 Edit Direction dialog box 1320
duplicates 503 Edit Expression dialog box 985
deleting with Drawing Cleanup 503 Edit Object Data dialog box 1147
DVIEW command 37 Edit Reverse Resistance dialog box 1320
DWF 891, 893–894 editing 70, 82–85, 136, 150, 159, 328,
publishing maps to 891, 894 330, 387, 446, 462, 477, 549,
publishing to 891, 894 557, 560, 564, 587, 608, 624,
setting publishing options 893 638, 674, 693, 702, 818, 820, 841
DWFADJUST command 37 attached drawings 462
DWFATTACH command 37 coordinate system categories 85
DWFCLIP command 37 coordinate systems 82
1405 | Index
data 693, 702 selecting by multiple conditions 260
database link data 328 selecting by property 254
datums 83 selecting by topology 258
drawing descriptions 136 viewing styles at all scales 428
ellipsoids 84 ELEV command 37
external data 693 elevation 485, 806, 820, 824
feature classes in schemas 387 altering objects based on 824
features with Data Grid 446 altering using queries 820
linear objects 560 finding objects by 806
link template path 330 for objects created during
maps 477, 608 conversion 485
nodes 557 ELEVATION variable 969
object class data 674 ELLIPSE command 37
object data 702 ellipsoid 80, 84
object data records 702 defining 80
object data tables 159 deleting 84
objects in source drawings 462 modifying 84
partial topology 587 enclosed blocks and text 700
polygons 564, 638 automatically linking to object
privileges 70 data 700
properties in schemas 387 Enhanced Compressed Wavelet
property alteration definition 841 files 265–266
queried objects 820 adding to maps 266
queries 150 enlargement 620
query conditions 818 creating 620
schemas in feature sources 387 equal distribution 746
source drawings 462 equality functions 966
tools 608 ER Mapper files 272
topology 549, 587 using in maps 272
using grips 624 ERASE command 37
EED expressions 975 erasing 195, 297, 469, 518
EED index 848 dangling nodes 518
EHANDLE variable 969 raster images 195, 297
elements (Display Manager) 245, 249, saved back objects 469
252, 254, 256, 258, 260, 418, Error Markers page 997
420–421, 426, 428–429 errors 477, 490, 494, 608
changing styles for scale cleaning up 477
thresholds 426 correcting during Drawing
combining styles 420 Cleanup 490
controlling display order 429 correcting interactively 494
creating styles 418 displaying markers 494
modifying styles 421 editing 608
selecting 245 reviewing during Drawing
selecting by attribute data 256 Cleanup 494
selecting by layer 249
selecting by location 252
1406 | Index
ESRI Arc/Info Coverages 207, 333, 339, layers from Display Manager 927–
916 928
exporting 207, 916 MapGuide SDF 2 files 925
importing 333 MapInfo MIF/MID 207, 344, 916
overview 339 MapInfo TAB 346, 916
ESRI grid files 264, 759, 761 MicroStation DGN 207, 347, 916
adding contour lines 761 MicroStation DGN (changing default
adding to maps 264 to imperial units) 207
overview of analysis 759 object data 916
ESRI SHP 236 overview 916
adding feature data 236 polygons 923
converting to drawing objects 236 procedure overview 917
eTransmit 898 queries 147
ETRANSMIT command 37 schemas 385
EWIDTH variable 969 SDF 2 files 925
exaggeration 769–770 SDTS 353
applying to surfaces 770 segmenting lines 207
Excel 164, 186 setting object properties 207
attaching spreadsheet to supported formats 921
drawing 164 supported object types 919
setting default version 186 text enclosed in a polyline 921
explicit nodes 873 VML 354
EXPLODE command 37 VML (Vector Markup Language) 916
exploding 472 VPF 355
blocks 472 EXPORTTOAUTOCAD command 37
Export Autodesk Map Objects to Oracle Expression dialog box 988
dialog box (OSE) 1163 expression evaluator 964–969, 973, 975
EXPORT command 37 expressions 833, 964, 975
Export dialog box 1119 EED expressions 975
exporting 147, 201, 207, 337, 339, 342, expression evaluator 964
344, 346–347, 353–355, 385, 727, EXTEND command 37
916–917, 919, 921, 923–925, 927– extending 488, 509, 512
930 to apparent intersection 512
and profiles 201 undershoots 509
Arc/INFO Coverages 207, 339, 916 undershoots 488
ArcView ShapeFile 207, 337, 916 extents 139, 458, 467
attribute data 916, 929 saving objects by 467
coordinate conversion 916 setting save back extents 139
DXF files 924 zooming to for drawings 458
E00 339 external data 116, 164, 167–168, 183,
external data 916 185–186, 256, 316, 322, 324,
from Data Grid 727, 930 326, 328, 363, 370, 693, 718,
GML 342 728, 785–786, 790, 792, 795,
GML (Geography Markup 797, 814, 828, 834, 877, 916, 933
Language) 916 adding text to queried objects 834
ini file for 207 altering objects based on 828
1407 | Index
attaching 164 FDOCONFIGURE command
attaching while digitizing 116, 718 (discontinued) 955
committing changes 693 FDOCONNECT command
configuring 167 (discontinued) 955
connecting 168 FDODETACH command
connecting automatically 168 (discontinued) 955
converting from object data 326 FDODISASSOCIATE command
default database versions 164 (discontinued) 955
detaching 164 FDODISCONNECT command
disconnecting 168 (discontinued) 955
editing records 693 FDOEDITSETADD command
exporting 916 (discontinued) 955
finding objects by 814 FDOEDITSETREMOVE command
importing 363 (discontinued) 955
importing linked objects 370 FDOEDITSETSAVE command
linking to objects 316, 322, 324, (discontinued) 955
326, 328 FDOEDITSETSHOW command
options 183, 185–186 (discontinued) 955
printing using report queries 933 FDOLOCKS command 1098
saving changes 693 FDOLOCKS command
stylizing objects by 256 (discontinued) 955
using database links 785–786, 790, FDOSCHEMA command
792, 795, 797 (discontinued) 955
using to dissolve topology 877 FDOSHOWOWNER command 1098
viewing in Data View 728 FdoUserManager utility 397
External Database Mapping dialog Feature Class Attribute Mapping dialog
box 1135 box 1122
external queries 147, 178 feature classes 384, 387, 392–393, 820
adding to library 147 creating in schemas 384
default directory 178 deleting in schemas 392
EXTERNALREFERENCES command 37 editing in schemas 387
EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE setting physical configuration 387
command 37 undoing schema changes 393
extracting feature geometry 448 feature data 216, 436, 451
EXTRUDE command 37 combining with drawing data 216
understanding 436
versioning 451
F Feature Information dialog box 1098
fade 303, 418 feature source 725
changing for display elements 418 viewing data for one 725
raster images 303 Feature Source Adminstration dialog
false origins 77 box 1098
FDO developer help 38 Feature Source Connection dialog
FDOATTACH command box 1098
(discontinued) 955 feature source layers 402, 742
creating themes for 742
1408 | Index
defining scale ranges 402 creating and editing 436
Feature Source Query dialog box 1099 creating from geometry 437, 440
Feature Source Scope dialog box 1098 creating linestring 440
feature sources 216, 223–224, 226, 229, creating multipoint 438
231, 233, 236, 238–239, 242–243, creating multipolygon 439
381, 395, 445, 725–726 creating multistring 440
accessing 224 creating new 437
and coordinate systems 224 creating point 438
and locking 223 creating polygon 439
and persistent locking 223 editing 445
and schema editing 223 editing commands 446
and versioning 223 editing in multiuser
ArcSDE 229 environment 444
copying from one to another 395 editing offline 450
creating 381 editing with AutoCAD
ESRI SHP 236 commands 448
filtering layers 243 editing with Data Grid 446
highlighting in map 725 filtering by conditions 782
methods for attaching data 216 finding 776
Microsoft Access 239 finding subset with Data Grid 778
MySQL 233 finding with Data Grid 777
ODBC 239 searching for 780
Oracle 226 selecting 776
overview 223 styling 401
removing highlighting in map 726 updating automatically 445
SDF 238 updating geometry 449
ShapeFile 236 versioning 451
SHP 236 viewing with Data Grid 314
SQL Server 231 fence boundary for query location 804
updating automatically 445 FGDC standard 380
viewing data for all 725 about 380
Web Feature Service 242 FIELD command 37
WFS 242 fields (in records) 158–159, 363, 370,
feature styles 410–411 372, 693, 810, 814, 916
loading 411 adding to tables 159
saving 410 copying to Windows Clipboard 693
FEATUREDEF command 102, 104, 106, creating for object data 158
1089 displaying as text 372
features 314, 395, 401, 436–446, 448– editing 693
451, 776–778, 780, 782 exporting with objects 916
and locking 444 finding objects by 810, 814
cancelling check out 443 importing 363, 370
checking in 441 modifying for object data 159
checking out 442 file conversion 333, 916
copying from one feature source to from other programs 333
another 395 to other programs 916
1409 | Index
file formats 272, 375, 925 fixed screen area 110
for raster files 272 FLATSHOT command 37
raster image files 272 FLC files 272
SDF 1 or 2 files 375 using in maps 272
SDF 2 files 925 FLI files 272
SIF files 925 using in maps 272
file sharing 453 floating screen area 110
file-based data sources 216 flood trace analysis 868
methods for attaching data 216 fly through for surfaces 765
files 86–87, 333, 677, 933 FOG command 37
for query results 933 folders 134
grid data 86 drive aliases for 134
grid data catalog (GDC) 87 fonts 207, 695
importing 333 changing in Data View 695
object class definition 677 setting for export/import 207
fill 617, 635, 638, 652, 838 formats 921
adding to closed polylines 617 supported for map export 921
adding to queried objects 838 formatting 695
changing default for polygons 638 Data View columns 695
changing in polygons 638 FoxPro 164, 186
default for polygons 652 attaching database to drawing 164
gradient for polygons 635 setting default version 186
specifying for polygons 635 using database from 164
FILL command 37 frame color 269
FILLET command 37 specifying for raster images 269
Filter (for theming) dialog box 1028 frames for raster images 193, 268, 281,
FILTER command 37 299, 301, 309
Filter Condition dialog box 1100 adjusting at insertion 281
filter conditions 782, 1100 color 268
creating for feature source display options 193
queries 1100 hiding 301
for features in maps 782 modifying properties 309
for importing from feature freezing Data View columns 696
sources 1100 FROM (command modifier)
filtering 243 command 37
feature source layers 243 functions 964–968
filters 795, 797, 1100 arithmetic 964
defining feature source conditional functions 966
conditions 1100 conversion functions 968
for importing from feature equality functions 966
sources 1100 other 968
spatial 797 string-handling functions 965
SQL 795 symbol-handling functions 967
FIND command 37
finding 776
features 776
1410 | Index
G GP4 files 272
using in maps 272
GDC files 87 GPS data 239
Generate Data Links dialog box 1182 accessing via ODBC 239
Generate Object Data Index dialog grade 737
box 1272 displaying 737
geodetic coordinate systems 124 GRADIENT command 37
determining 124 gradient fills 635, 652
geodetic distance 731 for polygons 635, 652
measuring 731 GRAPHSCR command 37
geographic analysis 855 GRID command 37
GEOGRAPHICLOCATION command 37 grid data catalog (GDC) files 87
Geography Markup Language grid data files 86, 88, 91
(GML) 333, 342, 385, 916 for Australia 91
exporting 342, 916 for New Zealand 91
exporting as schema 385 for the United States 88
exporting Ordinance Survey of Great grips 624
Britain GML v2 342 GROUP command 37
importing 333, 342 grouping layers 221
importing as schema 385 groups 474, 806, 824, 853
importing DNF format 342 altering objects based on 824
importing Ordinance Survey of Great finding objects by 806
Britain GML v2 342 querying 853
overview 342 removing on save back 474
geometry 440, 446, 449
creating features from 440
editing for features 446
H
updating for features 449 hatch 189, 418, 472, 617, 652, 753, 838,
georeferencing information 272 853
geospatial features 930 adding to closed polylines 617
exporting data for 930 adding to display elements 418
GeoSpot files 272 adding to queried objects 838
using in maps 272 associative 189
GeoTIFF files 272 boundaries when saving 472
using in maps 272 default for polygons 652
global coordinate systems 77 displaying for polygons 652
GML (Geography Markup issues with querying 189, 853
Language) 333, 342, 385 saving to source drawings 472
exporting 342 scaling for drawing layer
exporting as schema 385 themes 753
importing 333, 342 theming for drawing layers 753
importing as schema 385 HATCH command 37
importing Ordinance Survey of Great Hatch Options dialog box 1212
Britain GML v2 342 HATCHEDIT command 37
overview 342 Header/Footer dialog box 1073
GOTOURL command 37
1411 | Index
height 820 Image Information dialog box 1237
altering using queries 820 Image Management dialog box 1237
HEIGHT variable 969 Image Management Layout dialog
HELIX command 37 box 1238
help 40 Image Select dialog box 1239
printing 40 Image Systems Gray Scale files 272
HELP command 37 using in maps 272
HIDE command 37 Image Systems Group 4 files 272
hiding 295, 696 using in maps 272
Data View columns 696 IMAGEADJUST command 37
raster images 295 IMAGEATTACH command 37
hierarchy of object class definitions 103 IMAGECLIP command 37
high quality raster image display 194 IMAGEFRAME command 37
highlighting 465, 725–726, 790, 792 IMAGEQUALITY command 37
adding to features in maps 725 images 262, 286
data in Data Grid 726 adding to display maps 262
linked drawing objects inserting at command line 286
automatically 790 imperial units 207
linked objects 790 for exported MicroStation DGN
linked records 792 files 207
locked objects 465 implicit nodes 873
removing from features in maps 726 IMPORT command 37
hillshading 769–770 Import Data Mapping dialog box 1135
applying to surfaces 770 Import dialog box 1124
HLSETTINGS command 37 Import Old Theme dialog box 1029
holes 638 Import Oracle Records Into Map dialog
adding to polygons 638 box (OSE) 1164
horizontal distance 737 importing 147, 164, 201, 207, 332–333,
displaying 737 336–337, 339, 342, 344, 346–347,
HYPERLINK command 37 353–357, 359, 361, 363, 365,
HYPERLINKOPTIONS command 37 370, 372, 374–375, 385
hyperlinks 375, 925 and profiles 201
exporting to SDF 2 files 925 Arc/INFO Coverages 333, 339
importing from SDF files 375 ArcView ShapeFile 333, 337
ArcView ShapeFile as folder 207
area 356
I assigning object classes 359
ID command 37 attribute data 363, 365, 370, 372
Identify Map Book Layout Placeholders AutoCAD layers 357
dialog box 1142 blocks 365
IG4 files 272 contrast with accessing 336
using in maps 272 coordinate conversion during 361
IGS files 272 copying settings 333
using in maps 272 data 363, 370, 372
IMAGE command 37 databases 164
Image Correlation dialog box 1236
1412 | Index
DNF format (Ordinance Survey of importing data 216
Great Britain GML compare with attaching data 216
v2) 333, 342 IMPRINT command 37
driver options 333 IN operator in SQL conditions 814
DXF files 374 incomplete topology 602
E00 339 Index Maintenance dialog box 1272
external data 333, 363, 370, 372 indexes 848
file based 207 creating for drawings 848
folder based 207 individual values distribution 746–747
GML 342 information 141, 158, 288, 598, 933,
GML (Geography Markup 935
Language) 333 printing using report queries 933,
ini file for 207 935
layers 357 specifying type for tables 158
limiting area 356 viewing for raster images 288
MapGuide files 375 viewing for source drawings 141
MapInfo MIF/MID 333, 344 viewing for topology 598
MapInfo MIF/MID as folder 207 inheritance (base or abstract classes) 387
MapInfo TAB 333, 346 setting in schema 387
MapInfo TAB as folder 207 ini files 207
MicroStation DGN 333, 347 for import/export 207
MIF/MID files as folder 207 inner boundaries 630
multi select files 207 Insert Annotation dialog box 985
object data 363, 370, 372 INSERT command 37
overview 332–333 Insert Image dialog box 1239
points 365 inserting 275, 693
queries 147 database records 693
schemas 385 raster images 275
SDF 1 or 2 files 375 insertion point 268–269, 280, 307, 615
SDSFIE schemas 385 for raster images 280, 307
SDTS 353 for text 615
SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer specifying for raster images 269
Standard) 333 using to specify image location 268
setting object properties 207 INSERTOBJ command 37
ShapeFile as folder 207 insets 620
single select files 207 creating 620
spatial filter 356 integers 363, 370
TAB files as folder 207 importing 363, 370
Vector Product Format (VPF) as INTERFERE command 37
folder 207 internal queries 146, 843
VML 354 executing 146, 843
VPF 355 international coordinate systems 119
VPF (Vector Product Format) 333 INTERSECT command 37
VPF (Vector Product Format) as intersecting lines 736
folder 207 displaying acute angles 736
displaying obtuse angles 736
1413 | Index
intersection 512 Key View dialog box 1357
extend to apparent 512 keyview viewport 903
irregular map edges 628 for map books 903
IS NULL operator in SQL conditions 814
islands 540, 630, 638, 645, 648
adding to polygons 638
L
converting to polygons 648 label point 116, 615, 714, 837
creating from grouped polylines 645 changing 615
creating in polygons 630 defining for drawing objects 837
for topology 540 specifying while digitizing 116, 714
rebalancing 638 labeling features 407
within boundaries 540 labeling points 410
islands (in topology) 590, 602, 923 LABELPT variable 615, 969
islands (within boundaries) 590, 602, labels 407, 409–410, 615
923 allowing to obscure points 409
for topology 590, 602, 923 insertion point 615
ISOPLANE command 37 on features 407
on points 410
J Lambert Conformal Conic
projection 119
Jenks distribution 746 languages 1100
Jet provider for Microsoft Access 164 feature source filter syntax 1100
JFIF files 272 latitude 113
using in maps 272 when digitizing 113
JOGSECTION command 37 LAYCUR command 37
JOIN command 37 LAYDEL command 37
joining maps 628 LAYER command 37
joining operators in queries 817–818 Layer Mapping dialog box 1128
changing 818 Layer Range Editor dialog box 1093
precedence 817 LAYER variable 969
Joint Photographic Experts Group LAYERP command 37
files 265–266 LAYERPMODE command 37
adding to maps 266 layers 116, 221, 249–250, 333, 357, 474,
JPEG2K files 265–266 806, 820, 824, 916, 959
adding to maps 266 altering objects based on 824
JPG files 265–266, 272 altering using queries 820
adding to maps 266 and styles 221
using in maps 272 changing display order 221
JPGOUT command 37 exporting 916
justification 207 finding objects by 806
setting for export/import 207 grouping 221
JUSTIFYTEXT command 37 importing 333
names during import 357
organizing 221
K organizing in maps 221
key columns for link templates 319 redefining on save back 474
1414 | Index
selecting by object class 250 LIMITS command 37
specifying during import 357 LINE command 37
specifying for digitized objects 116 line width 485, 753
stylizing objects by 249 assigning for drawing layer
thumbnail styles for 221 themes 753
using wild-card characters 959 for objects created during
Layers to DGN Levels dialog box 1129 cleanup 485
LAYFRZ command 37 linear objects 207, 477, 482, 488, 503,
LAYISO command 37 505, 507, 509, 512, 518, 521–
LAYLCK command 37 522, 535, 546–547, 560, 570–571,
LAYMCH command 37 576, 582, 584, 706, 712, 877
LAYMCUR command 37 adding 576
LAYMRG command 37 breaking 507
LAYOFF command 37 changing direction 570
LAYON command 37 changing resistance 571
LAYOUT command 37 cleaning up 477
LAYOUTWIZARD command 37 dangling 518
LAYTHW command 37 deleting duplicates 503
LAYTRANS command 37 digitizing 706, 712
LAYULK command 37 dissolving 877
LAYUNISO command 37 editing 560
LAYVPI command 37 erasing 505
LAYWALK command 37 extending to apparent
LDF files 410–411 intersection 512
loading 411 extending undershoots 509
saving 410 marking for cleanup 488
LEADER command 37 removing from topology 582
legend viewport 903 segmenting during export 207
for map books 903 simplifying 521
legends for thematic maps 431 specifying direction 546
length 806, 824 specifying resistance 547
altering objects based on 824 tolerance for deleting duplicates 482
finding objects by 806 topology 535
LENGTH variable 969 updating for topology 584
LENGTHEN command 37 zero-length 522
levels 333 lines 116, 405, 516, 521–522, 526–527,
importing 333 736
libraries 422, 424 displaying COGO information
of display styles 422, 424 for 736
library for queries 142, 146 dissolving pseudo nodes 516
LIDAR data 239 simplifying 521
accessing via ODBC 239 specifying linetypes when
LIGHT command 37 digitizing 116
LIGHTLIST command 37 styling 405
LIGHTLISTCLOSE command 37 weeding 3D 526–527
LIKE operator in SQL conditions 814 zero-length 522
1415 | Index
linestring feature 1048–1049 link templates 318–320, 330
create 1048 about 318
edit 1049 creating 319
linestring features 440 deleting 330
creating 440 editing path to 330
linestyles 753 opening database tables 320
theming for drawing layers 753 linked drawings (Display Manager) 928
LINETYPE command 37 linking 164, 316, 322, 324, 326, 328,
Linetype Range Editor dialog box 1093 698, 718
LINETYPE variable 969 data sources to drawings 164
linetypes 116, 207, 418, 753, 806, 820, objects to a database using object
824 data 324
altering objects based on 824 records to objects 316, 322, 324,
altering using queries 820 326, 328, 698, 718
changing for display elements 418 links (database) 316, 322, 324, 326, 328,
digitizing 116 370, 372, 718, 785–786, 790,
finding objects by 806 792, 795, 797, 814, 828
setting for export/import 207 altering objects based on 828
specifying for digitized objects 116 creating to external database
theming for drawing layers 753 records 316, 322, 324, 326,
Lineweight Range Editor dialog 328, 718
box 1094 deleting 328
lineweights 207, 333, 418, 753, 806 displaying as text 372
changing for display elements 418 editing 328
finding objects by 806 filtering 795, 797
for imported lines 333 finding objects by 814
setting for export/import 207 importing 370
theming for drawing layers 753 overview 785–786
lining up 138, 280, 302, 307, 706 using 785–786, 790, 792, 795, 797
digitized maps 706 viewing linked drawing objects 790
drawings 138 viewing linked records 792
raster images 280, 302, 307 links (linear objects) 477, 488, 503, 505,
link data 316, 328, 370, 826 507, 509, 512, 518, 521–522,
altering objects based on 826 535, 546–547, 560, 570–571, 576,
deleting 328 582, 584, 706, 712, 877
editing 328 adding 576
importing 370 breaking 507
overview 316 changing direction 570
link index 848 changing resistance 571
Link Objects dialog box 1322 cleaning up 477
Link Template Data Entry dialog dangling 518
box 1019 deleting 503
Link Template Key Column Entry dialog digitizing 706, 712
box 1020 dissolving 877
Link Template Properties dialog editing 560
box 1074 erasing 505
1416 | Index
extending to apparent locking 223, 387
intersection 512 enabling in schema 387
extending undershoots 509 for feature sources 223
marking for cleanup 488 locking drawings 453
removing from topology 582 locking features 444
simplifying 521 locking objects 453, 455–456, 464–465,
specifying direction 546 470, 474
specifying resistance 547 overview 453
topology 535 releasing locks 456
updating for topology 584 removing locks 470
zero-length 522 removing locks on save back 474
LIST command 37 viewing lock owners 455
LIVESECTION command 37 viewing locked objects 465
LizardTech files 272 LOCKSTAT variable 969
using in maps 272 LOFT command 37
LOAD command 37 log file options 178
Load Internal Query dialog box 1213 LOGFILEOFF command 37
Load Topology Conflict dialog box 1323 LOGFILEON command 37
Load Topology dialog box 1323 logging in 118, 176
Load Topology From Source Drawing forcing 176
dialog box 1324 Logistics Support files 272
loading 150, 385, 411, 590–591 using in maps 272
feature styles 411 long transactions (versioning) 387
queries 150 longitude 113
schemas 385 when digitizing 113
topologies 591 lots 643
topology 590 spliting 643
location 138, 252, 302, 307, 330, 615 LSEDIT command 37
for label point 615 LSLIB command 37
for raster images 302, 307 LSNEW command 37
for source drawings 138 LTSCALE command 37
link templates 330 LWEIGHT command 37
origin 138
stylizing objects by 252
Location Condition dialog box (feature
M
source query) 1107 managing 380, 451
Location Condition dialog box data 380
(OSE) 1165 versions of data 451
location conditions for queries 804, 818 Map 3D 33
editing 818 switching to Map Classic 33
location index 848 Map Base (Display Manager) 245
Lock Management dialog box Map Book Properties dialog box 1142–
(OSE) 1166 1143
locked objects 453, 455 Map Book tab 29
viewing lock owners 455 about 29
1417 | Index
map books 901–904, 906–915 MAPANTOPONET command 856, 861,
adjacent arrows 903 866, 870
creating 907 MAPATTACHDB command 164
creating from saved settings 909 MAPBL command 561
deleting 915 MAPBOOKCREATE command 902, 908
editing 911 MAPBOOKCREATEFROMSETTINGS
editing settings 910 command 902, 910
hiding 912 MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGS
importing plot map sets 908 command 902, 910
keyview viewport 903 MAPBOOKIMPORTPLOTSET
layout placeholders 906 command 902, 908
legend viewport 903 MAPBOOKPLACEHOLDER
MBS files 909 command 903, 906
overview 901–902 MAPBOOKSAVESETTINGS
publishing 913 command 903, 909
publishing to DWF 913 MAPBREAK command 620, 1058
publishing to plotter 914 MAPBROWSELINK command 691
rebuilding 911 MAPBROWSETBL command 692, 1078
renaming 915 MAPBUFFER command
saving settings 909 (discontinued) 955
setting up templates 903–904 MAPCLEAN command 478
sheet templates 904 MAPCLPLINE command 1305
viewing 911–912 MAPCONFIGDB command 168, 1067
viewing layouts 913 MAPCONNECTDB command 169, 1068
viewing properties 912 MAPCREATE command
viewing tiles 912 (discontinued) 955
Map Classic 33 MAPCREATECENTROIDS
about the documentation 33 command 581, 651
switching to Map 3D 33 MAPDATAGRID 446
map distortion 173, 613 MAPDATAGRID command 1012
Map Explorer tab 27 MAPDEFINELT command 320, 1070–
about 27 1071, 1077
map objects 916–917 MAPDeleteLINKS command 1077
exporting 916–917 MAPDELETELINKS command 329
map projection 76 MAPDELETELT command 331
map scale 433 MAPDETACHDB command 165, 1072
setting 433 MAPDIGISETUP command 117, 1017
MAP2SDF command 927 MAPDIGITIZE command 116, 715, 1016
MAPABOUT command 1253 setting options 116
MAPAL command 577 MAPDISCONNECTDB command 169,
MAPAN command 574 1072
MAPANBUFFER command 881 MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY command 1023
MAPANDISSOLVE command 878 MAPDISPLAYMANAGER command 1023
MAPANNINSERT command 982–983, MAPDISSOLVE command
985 (discontinued) 955
MAPANOVERLAY command 875 MAPDIST command 732, 1008
1418 | Index
MAPDL command 583 MAPLINESTRINGCREATE
MAPDN command 583 command 1048
MAPDOCKWSPACE command 1253 MAPLINESTRINGEDIT 446
MAPDP command 583 MAPLINESTRINGEDIT command 1049
MAPDVP command 565 MAPLINKADD command
MAPDWFOPTIONS command 894 (discontinued) 955, 1296
MAPEDITDIR command 546, 570, 1295, MAPLINKDEL command
1320 (discontinued) 955, 1297
MAPEDITRES1 command 1295, 1319 MAPLINKEDIT command 1298
MAPEDITRES2 command 1296, 1320 MAPLINKMANAGER command 329
MAPEXPORT command 919, 923, 1119 MAPLINKREV command
mapexport.ini 207 (discontinued) 955, 1298
MAPFLOOD command MAPLINKUPD command 585, 1299
(discontinued) 955 MAPLOGIN command 118, 1276
MapGuide 375 MAPML command 563
importing from 375 MAPMN command 558
MapGuide 6.5 and earlier 925 MAPMP command 565
exporting to 925 MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE
MapGuide Enterprise 2007 900 command 1050
publishing to 900 MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT
MapGuide Open Source 900 command 1051
publishing to 900 MAPMULTILINESTRNGEDIT 446
MAPIFRAME command 302, 1236 MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE
MAPIINFO command 289, 1237 command 1052
MAPIINSERT command 275, 1236, 1239 MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT 446
MAPIL command 577 MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT command 1052
MAPIMANAGE command 289, 291, MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE
294, 1237–1238 command 1053
MAPIMPORT command 336, 1124 MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT 446
mapimport.ini 207 MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT
MAPIN command 575 command 1054
MapInfo MIF/MID 207, 333, 344, 916 MAPNODADD command
exporting 207, 916 (discontinued) 955, 1299
importing 333 MAPNODDEL command
importing as folder 207 (discontinued) 955, 1299
importing single select 207 MAPNODEDIT 1300
overview 344 MAPNODINS command
MapInfo TAB 207, 333, 346, 916 (discontinued) 955, 1300
exporting 346, 916 MAPNODUPD command 585, 1301
importing 333, 346 MAPOD2ASE command 325–326, 328,
importing as folder 207 1068, 1076
importing single select 207 MAPOPTIONS command 169, 171, 175,
overview 346 177, 179, 181, 184–185, 187–188,
MAPIOPTIONS command 194, 1240 192, 475, 1254
MAPJL command 562 MAPOSEADMIN command 1167
MAPOSEREAD command 1164
1419 | Index
MAPOSEWRITE command 1163 matching edges 628
MAPOVERLAY command options 169
(discontinued) 955 organizing layers 221
MAPPLOT command 891 packaging with eTransmit 898
MAPPOINTCREATE command 1055 previewing 460
MAPPOLYADD command printing overview 890
(discontinued) 955, 1301 publishing 890
MAPPOLYDEL command publishing as web pages 896
(discontinued) 955, 1302 publishing in HTML format 896
MAPPOLYGONCREATE command 1056 publishing overview 890
MAPPOLYGONEDIT 446 publishing to Autodesk MapGuide
MAPPOLYGONEDIT command 1057 Enterprise 2007 900
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON publishing to MapGuide Open
command 646, 1190 Source 900
MAPPOLYUPD command 585, 1302 publishing to plotter 891
MAPPROPSLT command 331, 1074 Quick View 460
MAPPUBLISHTOMAPGUIDE registering 113
command 900 samples included with Autodesk
MAPRL command 563, 570 Map 36
MAPRUNDBQUERY command 692, scale 138
1077 sharing 928
maps 36, 113, 119, 121, 123, 126, 128, styling 400
131, 138, 164, 169, 173, 220– thematic 820
221, 320, 333, 400, 460, 469, tiling 628
477, 528, 608, 613, 619–620, topology 528
622, 628, 705–706, 820, 890–891, transforming 138
896, 898, 900, 928 transforming coordinate system 126
aligning 138 trimming objects at boundaries 622
assigning coordinate system 121, viewing 460
123 MAPSDFIN command 376
attaching databases 164 MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED command 676
attaching drawings 128, 131 MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED command
breaking objects at boundaries 619– 1085
620 MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED
changing layer display order 221 command 677
cleaning 477 MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED command
coordinate system 119 1085
creating 220 MAPSELECTUNDEFINED command 677
creating new 469 MAPSELECTUNDEFINED command
digitizing 705–706 1086
distortion 173, 613, 628 MAPSHOWGEOM
editing 608 command,MAPSHOWTOPO
enlargements 620 command 595
importing 333 MAPTHEMATIC command 1280, 1282
insets 620 MAPTHEMTOPO command 1288
link templates 320
1420 | Index
MAPTOPOADMIN command measuring 728, 731–732, 735
(discontinued) 955 continuous distances 735
MAPTOPOAUDIT coordinate geometry 732
command,MAPTOPOCOMP coordinates 728
command,MAPTOPORECR geodetic distance 731
command 602 memory 199, 296
MAPTOPODEL command 607 optimizing for raster images 199
MAPTOPOEDIT command removing images from 296
(discontinued) 955, 1321 MENU command 37
MAPTOPOLOAD command 592 MENULOAD command 37
MAPTOPOLOGYTOPOLYGONS menus 25, 72
command 649, 1195 customizing 72
MAPTOPOQUERY command 887, 1348 in Autodesk Map 25
MAPTOPOREN command 606 MENUUNLOAD command 37
MAPTOPOSTATS command 599 Mercator projection 119
MAPTRACE command Microsoft Access 166, 239
(discontinued) 955 adding feature data 239
MAPTRACKCS command 730 attaching data source 166
MAPTRIM command 623, 1060 data stores 239
MAPUSEMPOLYGON command 654, using as a data source 239
1190 Microsoft Excel 164, 166, 186
MAPUSERADMIN command 71, 1274 attaching data source 166
MAPVIEWLINK command 692, 1149 attaching spreadsheet to
MAPVIEWTBL command 692 drawing 164
MAPWSACTION command 958 setting default version 186
MAPWSFOCUS command 1253 Microsoft Jet 4.0 provider 164
MAPWSPACE command 1253 Microsoft Visual FoxPro 164, 186
MAPWSREFRESH command 1253 attaching database to drawing 164
markers 488, 494 setting default version 186
for Drawing Cleanup 488, 494 using database from 164
MARKUP command 37 Microstation DGN 207
MARKUPCLOSE command 37 units of measurement 207
MASSPROP command 37 MicroStation DGN 207, 333, 347, 916
MATCHCELL command 37 changing export default to imperial
matching 613, 628 units 207
map edges 628 changing the default seed file 207
maps 613 exporting 207
MATCHPROP command 37 exporting to 916
MATERIALATTACH command 37 importing 333
MATERIALMAP command 37 overview 347
MATERIALS command 37 seed file for 347
MATERIALSCLOSE command 37 MIF/MID files 207, 333, 344, 916
MATLIB command 37 exporting 207, 916
maximum speed for links and nodes 547 importing 333
MEASURE command 37 importing as folder 207
importing single select 207
1421 | Index
overview 344 edit 1051
MIL files 272 multilinestring features 440
using in maps 272 creating 440
MINSERT command 37 MULTIPLE command 37
MIRROR command 37 multiple user options 169, 176, 191
MIRROR3D command 37 multipoint feature 1052
MLEDIT command 37 create 1052
MLINE command 37 edit 1052
MLSTYLE command 37 multipoint features 438
MODEL command 37 creating 438
model space 799 multipolygon feature 1053–1054
queries in 799 create 1053
modes for executing queries 843 edit 1054
modifying 82–85, 159, 702 multipolygon features 439
coordinate system categories 85 creating 439
coordinate systems 82 multiuser environment 444
datums 83 and editing 444
ellipsoids 84 MVIEW command 37
object data records 702 MVSETUP command 37
object data tables 159 MySQL 233
monuments for digitizing 706 adding feature data 233
motion path animation 765 data stores 233
surfaces 765 using as a data source 233
MOVE command 37
moving 302, 615
raster images 302
N
text insertion point 615 naming 158, 292
MPEDIT command 642, 1190 object data tables 158
MPFILL command 642, 654 raster images 292
MPOLYGON command 637 natural breaks distribution 746
MPSPLIT command 644, 1193 navigating 687
MREDO command 37 Data View 687
MrSID files 265–266, 272 nested drawings 130, 133
adding to maps 266 activating 133
using in maps 272 NETLOAD command 37
MSLIDE command 37 network flood trace analysis 868
MSPACE command 37 network topology 534–535, 546–547,
MTEDIT command 37 549, 570–571, 706, 712, 859,
MTEXT command 37 864, 868
MTP (command modifier) command 37 about 534
multi-page DWF 891 best route analysis 864
Multi-Resolution Seamless Image Database changing resistance 571
files 265–266 creating 535
adding to maps 266 digitizing objects for 706, 712
multilinestring feature 1050–1051 editing 549
create 1050 editing link direction 570
1422 | Index
finding best routes 864 block to use for 116
finding routes 859, 868 changing appearance 567
shortest path 859 changing resistance 571
specifying link direction 546 clustered 514
specifying resistance 547 dangling 518
testing integrity 868 digitizing 116, 706, 712
tracing 859, 868 digitizing by coordinates 629
travel time 859, 864, 868 dissolving 516
Network Topology Analysis Choose editing 557
Locations dialog box 1325 explicit 873
Network Topology Analysis Output dialog generalizing lines 521
box 1326 implicit 873
Network Topology Analysis Resistance and importing 365
Direction dialog box 1327 marking for cleanup 488
Network Topology Analysis Select Method pseudo 516
dialog box 1329 query location 804
New Annotation Template Name dialog removing from topology 582
box 986 repositioning 560
New Category dialog box 1203 shortest distance between 859
NEW command 37 simplifying lines 521
New Feature Definition File dialog snapping clusters 488, 514
box 1155 specifying resistance 547
New Layer dialog box 989, 1184 tolerance for deleting clusters 482
New Object Definition File dialog tracing between 859, 864
box 1094 tracing from 868
New Property dialog box 1095 updating for topology 584
New Range Table dialog box 1216 weeding 521
New Scale dialog box 1029 North American datum shift issues 92
New Zealand grid data files 91 NOT query operator 817
NEWDEF command 109, 1094, 1155 Number Expression dialog box 1030
NEWSHEETSET command 37 numbers 158
Node Objects dialog box 1331–1332 specifying type for tables 158
node topology 531–532, 706, 712 numeric ranges 805
about 531 for queries 805
creating 532 numeric ranges in property queries 806
digitizing objects for 706, 712
nodes (Map Explorer) 170
displaying 170
O
nodes (Task Pane) 170 object class definitions 677
nodes (topology) 116, 365, 482, 488, Object Class tab (Properties palette) 662
514, 516, 518, 521, 532, 547, object classes 99–100, 102–105, 107–
557, 560, 567, 571, 574, 582, 108, 250, 359, 674, 677, 806,
584, 629, 706, 712, 804, 859, 820, 834
864, 868, 873 adding text to queried objects 834
adding 574 assigning during import 359
best route 864 attaching definition files 677
1423 | Index
defining 99–100, 103 exporting 916
defining range of values 105 exporting text enclosed in a
editing data 674 polyline 921
files 108 finding objects by 810
finding objects by 806 for network topology 535
hierarchies 102–103 for node topology 532
modifying definitions 107 for polygon topology 540, 698
range of allowable values 104 importing 363, 370
renaming 100 linking automatically to records 324
setting property ranges 105 listing tables in source drawings 141
styling objects by 250 modifying tables 159
using to modify thematic moving to polygon centroids 367,
objects 820 581
object classification 70, 97–98, 100, 103, printing using report queries 933
105, 107–108, 662, 667, 670, stylizing objects by 256
672, 674–675, 677, 975 table names 158
assigning to drawing objects 672 using to dissolve topology 877
attaching a definition file 677 using to link data 324
creating files 108 variables 973
creating objects using 670, 674 viewing for topology 597
defining objects 100, 103, 105 viewing in Properties palette 728
files 108 Object Data Mapping dialog box 1135
modifying definitions 107 object locking 176, 453, 455–456
overview 97, 662 enabling 176
privileges 70 overview 453
selecting objects using 675 releasing locks 456
setting up 98 turning on 453
variables 975 viewing lock owners 455
object data 116, 141, 158–159, 256, 324, Object Snaps (command modifier)
326, 363, 367, 370, 372, 532, command 37
535, 540, 581, 597, 698–700, Object Thematic Mapping dialog
702, 715, 728, 810, 826, 834, box 1282
848, 877, 916, 921, 933, 973 object type 806, 824
adding text to queried objects 834 altering objects based on 824
altering objects based on 826 finding objects by 806
attaching automatically to objects 795
objects 700 using database links 795
attaching multiple records 699 objects (AutoCAD) 712
attaching to objects 698 digitizing 712
attaching to polygons 698 ODBC 239
attaching while digitizing 116, 715 adding feature data 239
converting to external data 326 creating Data Source Name for 239
creating index 848 data stores 239
creating tables 158 using as a data source 239
displaying as text 372 ODBC-compliant databases 164
editing 702
1424 | Index
offline 450 drawing rotation 138
editing features 450 drawing scale 138
offset 138 for coordinate geometry 181
for source drawings 138 log file 178
OFFSET command 37 multi-user 176
OGC Basic Web Map Service 267 overview 169
using with maps 267 queries 187
OLELINKS command 37 raster images 192
OLESCALE command 37 save back 474
online 450 save back extents 139
returning 450 saving 191
OOPS command 37 saving for Drawing Cleanup 489–
OPEN command 37 490
OPENDWFMARKUP command 37 saving for topology 604
opening 135, 320, 691 setting while attaching
attached drawings 135 drawings 131
database tables 691 system 178
linked database tables 320 Task Pane 170
source drawings 135 transformation 138
OPENSHEETSET command 37 OPTIONS command 37
operators 814, 817–818 OR query operator 817
AND 817 Oracle 164, 167, 226–227
for queries 817–818 adding feature data 227
for SQL conditions 814 attaching database to drawing 164
joining 817–818 configuring 167
NOT 817 data stores 227
OR 817 using as a data source 226
options 116, 131, 138–139, 168–170, using database from 164
173, 176, 178, 180–181, 183, 185– Oracle Spatial Connection dialog box
187, 191–192, 474, 489–490, 604, (OSE) 1166
790 ORACONNECT command
acadmap.ini file 191 (discontinued) 955
acadmap.sys file 191 ORADISCONNECT command
Autodesk Map 169, 191 (discontinued) 955
automatically connecting data ORAERUPDATE command
sources 168 (discontinued) 955, 1157
automatically zooming to linked ORAEXPORT command
drawing objects 790 (discontinued) 955, 1152
coordinate system 180 ORAIMPORT command
coordinate transformation 173 (discontinued) 955, 1152–
data source 173, 186 1153, 1155, 1157
Data View 185 ORAINDEX command
database 183 (discontinued) 955, 1156
digitizing 116 ORAUPDATE command
drawing 173 (discontinued) 1158
drawing origin 138
1425 | Index
orbiting 765 path trace analysis 859
surfaces in 3D 765 paths 330
Organization view 221 for link templates 330
and draw order 221 PCINWIZARD command 37
origin 138 PCT files 272
modifying for source drawings 138 using in maps 272
ORTHO command 37 PCX files 272
orthogonal transformation 113 using in maps 272
OSNAP command 37 PEDIT command 37
outer boundaries 630 performance 960
output files (Display Manager) 928 improving 960
Output Report Options dialog box 1217 performance optimization 125, 295,
output reports for queries 933, 935 450, 847–848, 850
overlay topology 873 for queries 125, 847–848
overlaying images 306 hiding raster images 295
overposting 409 PERIMETER variable 969
overshoots 482, 518 persistent locking 223, 444
tolerance for deleting 482 for feature sources 223
PFACE command 37
photographs 262
P adding to display maps 262
Page Setup dialog box 1074 physical configuration 387
PAGESETUP command 37, 905 setting for feature classes 387
PAN command 37 setting for properties 387
panning 765 PICT files 272
surfaces in 3D 765 using in maps 272
paper space 528, 799 pipes 535, 546–547, 570–571, 868
and topology 528 changing direction 570
queries in 799 changing resistance 571
Paradox 164, 186 creating network topology 535
attaching database to drawing 164 specifying direction 546
setting default version 186 specifying resistance 547
using database from 164 tracing in topology 868
parcels 540, 643 placement of raster images 280, 307
creating polygon topology for 540 PLAN command 37
spliting 643 PLANESURF command 37
PARTIALOAD command 37 PLINE command 37
PARTIALOPEN command 37 PLOT command 37
passwords 70, 118 plot styles 753, 806
default 118 finding objects by 806
for users 70 theming for drawing layers 753
PASTEASHYPERLINK command 37 PLOTSTAMP command 37
PASTEBLOCK command 37 PLOTSTYLE command 37
PASTECLIP command 37 Plotstyle Range Editor dialog box 1095
PASTEORIG command 37 PLOTTERMANAGER command 37
PASTESPEC command 37
1426 | Index
plotters 891 marking for cleanup 488
publishing maps to 891 pseudo nodes 516
PNG files 265–266, 272 removing from topology 582
adding to maps 266 simplifying lines 521
using in maps 272 specifying resistance 547
PNGOUT command 37 tolerance for deleting clusters 482
point boundary for query location 804 updating for topology 584
POINT command 37 weeding 521
point data 239 POLYDISPLAY command 654
accessing via ODBC 239 polygon boundary for query
point feature 1055 location 804
create 1055 POLYGON command 37
point features 438 polygon feature 1056–1057
creating 438 create 1056
Point Mapping dialog box 1136 edit 1057
POINTLIGHT command 37 polygon features 439
points 403, 736–737 creating 439
displaying angles between 736 Polygon Fill Properties dialog box 1195
displaying grade between 737 polygon topology 538, 540, 706, 712,
displaying horizontal distance 873, 923
between 737 about 538
displaying slope between 737 creating 540
styling 403 digitizing objects for 706, 712
points (geometric) 365, 629, 804 exporting 923
boundary for query location 804 overlaying 873
digitizing by coordinates 629 polygons 367, 369, 540, 542, 564, 578,
importing 365 581–582, 584, 590, 602, 630,
query location 804 635, 638, 643, 645, 648, 651–
points (nodes) 365, 477, 482, 488, 514, 652, 698, 804, 806, 877, 880,
516, 518, 521, 532, 547, 557, 916, 923
567, 571, 574, 582, 584, 629, adding 578
706, 712, 873 adding boundaries 638
adding to topology 574 attaching object data 698
changing appearance 567 boundaries 630
changing resistance 571 boundary for query location 804
cleaning up 477 changing fill 638
clustered 514 converting polylines to 645
dangling 518 converting to polylines 590
digitizing 706, 712 converting to polylines during
digitizing by coordinates 629 export 923
dissolving 516 converting topology to 648
editing in topology 557 creating 635
explicit 873 creating centroids 369, 651
generalizing lines 521 creating centroids for 540, 581
implicit 873 creating from links or nodes 880
importing 365 default fill 652
1427 | Index
diplaying edges 652 Portable Network Graphic files 265–266,
disabling 652 272
dissolving 877 adding to maps 266
editing 564, 638 using in maps 272
exporting 923 PRESSPULL command 37
exporting polylines as 916 PREVIEW command 37
finding objects by 806 Preview mode queries 842–844
gradient fill 652 previewing 146, 460, 843–844
importing 367 drawings 460
incomplete 602 queries 146, 843–844
overview 630 source drawings 460
query location 804 previous release formats (of Autodesk
rebalancing 638 Map) 928
removing from topology 582 sharing display maps 928
slivers 542 previous releases of AutoCAD 466
splitting 643 updating source drawings 466
updating for topology 584 primary key (indentifier properties) 387
polyline segments 521–522, 527 setting in schema 387
simplifying 521 printing 890, 930–931, 933
weeding 3D 527 Data View tables 930–931
zero-length 522 overvew for maps 890
polylines 116, 485, 516, 521–523, 526– query reports 933
527, 560, 590, 602, 617, 645, privileges for users 70
916, 921, 923 profiles 201, 489–490, 604
adding and removing vertices 523 Drawing Cleanup 489–490
converting 3D to 2D 485 for import/export 201
converting objects to 485 topology 604
converting to polygons 645 Project Files Search Path 293
creating from polygons 590 setting for raster images 293
creating from polygons during projecting 512
export 923 to apparent intersection 512
dissolving pseudo nodes 516 projections 119
editing in topology 560 overview 119
exporting as polygons 916 projective transformation 113
exporting text enclosed in 921 properties 254, 309, 384, 387, 392–393,
filling 617 806, 824
incomplete 602 altering objects based on 824
simplifying 521 creating in schemas 384
specifying linetypes when deleting in schemas 392
digitizing 116 editing in schemas 387
weeding 3D 526–527 finding objects by 806
zero-length 522 modifying for raster images 309
POLYSOLID command 37 setting indentifier (primary key) in
population in thematic maps 820 schema 387
setting physical configuration 387
stylizing objects by 254
1428 | Index
undoing schema changes 393 Q
PROPERTIES command 37, 662, 674
object class 662 QCCLOSE command 37
Object Class tab 662 QDIM command 37
Properties palette 674, 722, 728 QLEADER command 37
and Display Manager 722 QNEW command 37
Object Class tab 674 QSAVE command 37
viewing drawing attribute in 728 QSELECT command 37
PROPERTIESCLOSE command 37 QTEXT command 37
property alteration 615, 820, 822, 824, quality of raster images 194, 304
826, 828, 834, 838, 841, 851, 886 quantile distribution 746
adding hatch to objects 838 queries 70, 125, 142, 144, 146–147, 149–
adding text to objects 834 150, 178, 187, 243, 260, 466,
and topology queries 886 587, 691, 799, 801, 804–806, 810–
based on external data 828 811, 814, 817–818, 820, 822,
based on object data 826 824, 826, 828, 834, 838, 841–
based on object properties 824 844, 846–848, 850–851, 853, 886,
modifying 841 933, 935, 959, 964
overview 820 adding hatch to retrieved
text insertion point 615 objects 838
property conditions for queries 806, 818 adding text to retrieved objects 834
editing 818 altering properties of retrieved
Property Expression dialog box 1283 objects 820, 822, 824, 826,
property index 848 828
Property Value Condition dialog box and numeric ranges 805
(feature source query) 1109 and raster images 851
Property Values dialog box (feature source block attribute conditions 810
query) 1111 boundary for 804
providers for database drivers 164 categories 149
PSETUPIN command 37 combining conditions 817
pseudo nodes 488, 516 creating indexes for 848
marking for cleanup 488 data conditions 810
PSPACE command 37 database 691
PUBLISH command 37 default directory 178
Publish to MapGuide 900 defining 801
Publish to MapGuide dialog box 988, Draw mode 842–843, 846
1144 drawings with xrefs 851
Publish to Web 896 editing after saving 150
publishing 890–891, 893 editing conditions 818
maps 890 executing 842
maps to plotters 891 external 144, 147
options for DWF 893 for feature sources 243
overview for maps 890 improving performance 125, 847–
PUBLISHTOWEB command 37 848, 850
PURGE command 37 issues with groups 853
PYRAMID command 37 issues with hatch 853
1429 | Index
library 142, 146 Query To View 433
link data conditions 810 using to display raster images 433
loading 150 Quick Select 784
location conditions 804 for drawing objects 784
model space 799 using for drawing objects 784
modes 843 Quick View 460
modifying property alterations 841 Quick View Drawings dialog box 1358
object data conditions 810 QUICKCALC command 37
options 187 QUIT command 37
overview 799 quotation mark 814
paper space 799 in SQL conditions 814
precedence of conditions 817
Preview mode 842–844
previewing 844
R
privileges 70 RADIUS variable 969
problem solving 853 Range of Values dialog box 1031
property conditions 806 range table 830
Report mode 842–843, 933, 935 creating 830
rerunning 146 ranges 105, 806
running 933 finding objects using 806
saving 144 for object classes 105
saving objects back to source raster data 433
drawings 466 displaying 433
selecting drawing objects for display Raster Design 268, 272
elements 260 using to specify location 268
selecting mode 843 Raster Extension 192, 276
specifying SQL values 811 options 192
SQL conditions 814 using to insert images 276
topology 587, 886 Raster Extension Options dialog
using expressions 964 box 1240
using wild-card characters 959 raster feature sources 433
with blocks of same name 851 displaying 433
writing results to file 933 raster images 192–197, 199, 216, 261–
queries (of databases) 691 262, 264, 269, 272, 275–276,
viewing in Data View 691 278, 280, 285–288, 291–304, 306–
query library 142, 144, 146–147, 149 307, 309, 312, 759, 761
adding external queries 147 adding contour lines 761
categories 149 adding to display maps 262
overview 142 adding to maps 261, 264
running stored queries 146 aligning 280, 307
saving queries 144 alignment 302, 307
using 142 and REGEN 276
Query Library Administration dialog bitonal 272
box 1221 bitonal frames 301
Query to View 765 brightness 303
changing correlation 307
1430 | Index
clipping 312 raster-based surfaces 261, 264
contrast 303 adding to maps 261, 264
coordinates 307 RAY command 37
correlating 276, 278, 280 records (database records) 116, 158,
correlation defaults 197 316, 322, 324, 326, 328, 363,
detaching 195, 298 370, 372, 693, 698–700, 702,
display order 291 715, 718, 785–786, 788, 790,
display quality 194, 304 792, 795, 797, 810, 814, 828,
displaying frames 193, 301 916, 931
erasing 297 adding to Data View 693
fade 303 altering objects based on 828
file formats 272 attaching automatically to
frames 299 objects 700
hiding 295 attaching more than one 699
hiding frames 301 attaching to objects 316, 698
inserting 275–276 attaching while digitizing 116, 715,
inserting from the command 718
line 286 committing changes 693
inserting manually 269 copying to Windows Clipboard 693
making transparent 306 deleting from Data View 693
managing 287 displaying as text 372
memory use 199 editing in Data View 693
methods for attaching data 216 editing in object data 702
modifying 299 exporting with objects 916
modifying properties 309 filtering 795, 797
naming 292 finding in Data View 788
options 192 finding objects by 810, 814
overview of analysis 759 highlighting for drawing
performance improvements 304 objects 792
renaming 292 highlighting linked drawing
resource file directory 192 objects 790
rotating 280, 307 importing 363, 370
scaling 280, 307 linking automatically to objects 324
search paths 293 linking to objects 316, 322, 324,
selecting 196, 300 326, 328, 698
setting density 285 object data 158
setting insertion point 269 printing 931
storing 294 saving changes 693
supported formats 272 scrolling through 792
transparency 306 searching in Data view 788
unloading 296 using database links 785–786, 790,
using Project Files Search Path 293 792, 795, 797, 814
viewing information 288 viewing for drawing objects 792
viewing information for 276 viewing linked drawing objects 790
zooming to 294 zooming to linked drawing
objects 790
1431 | Index
RECOVER command 37 REPLAY command 37
RECTANG command 37 Report mode queries 842–843, 933, 935
REDEFINE command 37 reports 886, 929, 933, 935
REDO command 37 and topology queries 886
REDRAW command 37 creating during a query 933, 935
REDRAWALL command 37 for attribute data 929
redrawing the screen 294, 304, 460 template for 935
after Quick View 460 RESETBLOCK command 37
improving performance 294, 304 residual for map calibration 113
raster images and 304 resistance 547, 557, 560, 571, 859, 864,
REFCLOSE command 37 868
REFEDIT command 37, 959 editing 557, 560
commands blocked during 959 for links and nodes 547, 571
REFSET command 37 using in best route 864
REGEN command 37 using in flood trace 868
REGENALL command 37 using in path trace 859
REGENAUTO command 37 resource files directory 192
REGION command 37 result topology 887
registering maps 113 saving 887
REINIT command 37 RESUME command 37
relational database tables 239 reusing 927
defining feature classes for 239 layers from Display Manager 927
releasing object locks 456 REVCLOUD command 37
Remove Object Data Index dialog REVOLVE command 37
box 1273 REVSURF command 37
removing 125 RGB color system 207
coordinate system assignment 125 importing objects using 207
Rename Category dialog box 1223 rights 70
RENAME command 37 RLC files 272
Rename Range Table dialog box 1223 using in maps 272
Rename Table dialog box 1149 RLE files 272
Rename Topology dialog box 1333 using in maps 272
renaming 159, 590, 606 RMAT command 37
object data fields 159 RMS error 113
object data tables 159 roads 535, 546–547, 570–571, 868
topologies 606 changing direction 570
topology 590 changing resistance 571
RENDER command 37 creating network topology 535
RENDERCROP command 37 specifying direction 546
RENDERENVIRONMENT command 37 specifying resistance 547
RENDERPRESETS command 37 tracing in topology 868
RENDERWIN command 37 ROTATE command 37
RENDSCR command 37 ROTATE3D command 37
replacing database table data 693, 788 rotating 138, 280, 307, 611, 613
replacing text 693, 788 drawings 138
in Data View 693, 788 objects 611, 613
1432 | Index
raster images 280, 307 problem solving 472
rotation 268, 281, 714, 820 removing objects from 470
adjusting at image insertion 281 saving objects to source
altering using queries 820 drawings 466–467
altering while digitizing 714 turning off prompt 474
using to specify image location 268 viewing objects in 465
ROTATION variable 969 Save Settings dialog box (OSE) 1167
routes 859, 864, 868 Save Version dialog box 1112
determining best with topology 864 SAVEAS command 37
determining with topology 859 SAVEIMG command 37
finding best 864 saving 144, 385, 456, 466–469, 599,
finding shortest 859 693, 695, 887, 927–928
finding with topology 868 changes in the Data View 693
RPREF command 37 Data View formatting 695
RPREFCLOSE command 37 drawing objects 456
RSCRIPT command 37 drawings 456
RST files 272 layers from Display Manager 927–
using in maps 272 928
rubber sheeting 613 objects to drawing 468
RULESURF command 37 objects to new drawing 469
Run Library Query dialog box 1224 objects to source drawings 466–467
queries 144
schemas 385
S topology 599, 887
sample data 36 saving drawings 456, 464, 472, 474
included with Autodesk Map 36 exploded blocks 472
SANGLE variable 969 new objects 464
save back 466, 472, 474, 850 options 474
improving performance 850 problem solving 472
options 474 saving feature styles 410
problem solving 472 scale 268–269, 433
save back extents 139, 467 and raster images 268
resetting 139 setting 433
saving objects by 467 setting for map 433
viewing 139 specifying for raster images 269
SAVE command 37 SCALE command 37
Save Current Query dialog box 1224 scale factors 138, 173, 280, 307, 611,
Save Features dialog box 1111 714, 790, 820
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog altering using queries 820
box 1247 altering while digitizing 714
save sets 453, 456, 464–467, 470, 472, for raster images 280, 307
474 for source drawings 138
adding objects automatically 474 for text 173
adding objects to 464 for zooming in Data View 790
object locking 453 scaling objects by 611
options 474
1433 | Index
scale ranges 402 setting physical configuration 387
defining for feature source undoing schema changes 393
layers 402 viewing schemas 386
understanding 402 screen pointing area 110
scale reduction factor 77 SCRIPT command 37
scale thresholds (Display Manager) 425– scrolling Data View 792
426, 428 SDF 238
creating 426 adding feature data 238
modifying 426 SDF 1 or 2 files 375
viewing all styles 428 importing 375
SCALELISTEDIT command 37 SDF 2 files 925
SCALETEXT command 37 exporting 925
scaling 138, 611, 613 SDF Export dialog box 990
drawings 138 SDF files 381, 925
objects 611, 613 creating 381
schema 333, 384–387, 392–393, 395 exporting 925
backing up 385 SDF Import dialog box 991
copying foreign 395 SDSFIE standard 380, 385
creating in feature sources 384 about 380
deleting 392 importing schemas 385
editing 387 SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer
exporting with Schema Editor 385 Standard) 333, 353
importing 333 importing 333
importing with Schema Editor 385 seams at map edges 628
undoing changes to 393 search paths (for support files) 293
viewing 386 raster image paths 293
Schema Adminstration dialog box searching 780
(OSE) 1167 for features 780
schema editing 223 SECTION command 37
for feature sources 223 SECTIONPLANE command 37
Schema Editor 380, 384–387, 392–393 sections of maps 138
backing up schemas 385 SECURITYOPTIONS command 37
creating schemas 384 seed file 207, 347
deleting schemas 392 changing default for exporting DGN
editing schemas 387 files 207
enabling locking 387 for DGN files 347
enabling long transactions segmentation of lines during export 207
(versioning) 387 Select Actions page 998
exporting schemas 385 Select Alias dialog box 1274
importing schemas 385 Select Block dialog box 1185
overview 380 Select Blocks dialog box 1185
setting base or abstract classes SELECT command 37
(inheritance) 387 Select Data dialog box 1185, 1334
setting constraints 387 Select Database Version dialog box 1075
setting indentifier properties (primary Select dialog box 1137, 1186
key) 387 Select Display Element dialog box 1033
1434 | Index
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate records 788, 792, 795, 797
System dialog box 1009 Selection Modes (command modifier)
Select Drawings to Attach dialog command 37
box 1186 Set Property Alterations dialog box 1226
Select Existing Link Template dialog SETIDROPHANDLER command 37
box 1076 setting 433
Select Feature Classes dialog box 1137 map scale 433
Select Feature Classes dialog box (Display SETUV command 37
Manager) 1033 SETVAR command 37
Select Feature Tables dialog box Seven Parameter Transformation
(OSE) 1169 conversion method 79
Select Features dialog box 1187 SHADEMODE command 37
Select Features dialog box (OSE) 1169 SHAPE command 37
Select Images dialog box (Display ShapeFile 207, 236, 333, 337, 916
Manager) 1033 adding feature data 236
Select Layer dialog box 1187 converting to drawing objects 236
Select Layers dialog box 1187 exporting 207, 916
Select Layers dialog box (Display exporting as folder 207
Manager) 1033 importing 333
Select Layers dialog box (OSE) 1171 importing as folder 207
Select Linetype dialog box 1285 importing single select 207
Select Link Template dialog box 1077 importing vs. adding.SHP files 236
Select Link Template Key dialog overview 337
box 1149 SHAPENAME variable 969
Select Link Templates dialog box 1077 sharing drawings 453, 464
Select Objects page 1003 SHEETSET command 37
Select Pattern dialog box 1285 SHEETSETHIDE command 37
Select Plot Set to Convert dialog SHELL command 37
box 1143 short linear objects 482, 488, 505
Select Property dialog box 1187 erasing 505
Select Query dialog box 1077 marking for cleanup 488
Select Schema for Connection dialog box tolerance for deleting 482
(OSE) 1171 shortest path trace 859
Select SQL Column dialog box 1188 Show Foreign Data Stores 227, 231, 233
Select statement 814 Show Who Has It command 455
Select Style dialog box 1285 SHOWMAT command 37
Select Table dialog box 1078 SHP files 236, 378, 381
Select Topologies dialog box (Display adding feature data 236
Manager) 1033 creating 381
selecting 196, 479, 675, 776, 788, 790, exporting from Civil 3D 378
792, 795, 797 SID files 272
classified objects 675 using in maps 272
drawing objects based on data 790 SIF files 925
features 776 exporting 925
objects for cleanup 479 SIGVALIDATE command 37
raster images 196 simple transformation 138
1435 | Index
simplifying linear objects 521 save back extents 139, 467
SIZE variable 969 saving objects to 456, 466–467
SKETCH command 37 saving topology to 599
SLICE command 37 scaling 138
sliver polygons 542 settings 136
slope 737, 773 symbol table information 141
displaying 737 tiled 128, 467
theming surfaces for 773 transforming 138
SNAP command 37 viewing 460
snapping nodes 488, 514 viewing coordinate systems 126
marking for cleanup 488 viewing information 141
SOLDRAW command 37 zooming to extents 458
SOLID command 37 SPACETRANS command 37
solid fill 617 spatial analysis 855
adding to closed polylines 617 Spatial Data Transfer Standard 353
SOLIDEDIT command 37 Spatial Data Transfer Standard files 333
SOLPROF command 37 importing 333
SOLVIEW command 37 spatial filters 356, 797
Sort dialog box 1078 during import 356
Source Drawing Scope dialog box 1034 speed 547, 571
source drawings 121, 126, 128, 131, for links and nodes 547, 571
133–136, 138–139, 141, 453, 456, speed of image display 304
458, 460, 462, 466–467, 474, SPELL command 37
549, 599, 628, 799, 801, 848 SPHERE command 37
activating 133 SPLINE command 37
aligning 138 SPLINEDIT commandSPOTLIGHT
assigning coordinate system 121 command 37
attaching to the current splitting 643
drawing 131 polygons 643
backup files 474 SPOT files 272
coordinate systems 121 using in maps 272
creating query indexes 848 SQL 811
descriptions 136 values in queries 811
drive aliases for 134 SQL Condition dialog box (OSE) 1171
editing 462 SQL Condition History dialog box 1228
editing topology 549 SQL conditions 173, 256, 814, 818
global coordinate systems 121 editing 818
indexing 848 maximum number in history
locking 453 list 173
mapping edges 628 selecting drawing objects by 256
offset 138 troubleshooting 814
opening 135 SQL Expression dialog box 1188
querying 801 SQL filters 795
Quick View 460 SQL links index 848
retrieving objects from 799, 801 SQL queries 794–795
rotating 138 using 795
1436 | Index
SQL Server 164, 167, 231 for display elements 418, 420–422
adding feature data 231 modifying 420
and long transactions 231 overview 411
attaching database to drawing 164 referencing 423
configuring 167 saving in the library 422
data stores 231 symbolization 417
using as a data source 231 STYLESMANAGER command 37
using database from 164 styling 400–401, 403, 406, 416
SQL variables 973 areas 406
standard deviation 113, 746 drawing layers 416
map calibration 113 features 401
standards 380, 385 maps 400
FGDC 380 points 403
importing SDSFIE schemas 385 styling lines 405
SDSFIE 380 stylization 411, 417, 419–420, 422–423
STANDARDS command 37 combining 419
startup 24 creating 417
new work environment 24 modifying 420
state plane coordinate systems 119 overview 411
statistics 141, 288, 598, 933, 935 referencing 423
for raster images 288 saving in the library 422
for source drawings 141 SUBTRACT command 37
for topology 598 SUNPROPERTIES command 37
printing using report queries 933, SUNPROPERTIESCLOSE command 37
935 Superuser 70, 118, 159, 176, 453, 456
STATS command 37 default password 118
STATUS command 37 forcing user login 176
STLOUT command 37 logging in as 118
storing queries 142 modifying object data tables 159
STRETCH command 37 privileges 70
stretching drawings 613 releasing locked objects 456
STRING variable 969 setting up 70
string-handling functions 965 setting user options 176
strings in SQL condition 814 turning on object locking 453
STYLE command 37 supplementing 526–527
Style Label dialog box 1035 3D polylines 526–527
Style Library 422, 424 surfaces 261–262, 264, 759, 761, 763,
Style Lines dialog box 1036 765, 769–770, 773–774
Style Point dialog box 1037 adding contour lines 761
Style Points dialog box 1038 adding to maps 261–262, 264
STYLE variable 969 applying hillshading 770
styled maps 400 applying vertical exaggeration 770
styles 221, 411, 417–423 changing theme colors 774
and layers 221 draping 2D data on 763
combining 419 fly through 765
creating 417 hillshading 769
1437 | Index
motion path animation 765 695–696, 718, 785–786, 788, 790,
orbiting 765 792, 795, 797, 814, 931
overview of analysis 759 adding records 693
panning 765 attaching to drawing 164
swiveling 765 connecting 168
theming to display height, slope, or converting from object data 326
aspect 773 customizing display 695–696
vertical exaggeration 769 deleting link templates 330
viewing in 3D 765 deleting links 328
walk through 765 deleting records 693
zooming in 3D 765 detaching 164
survey points 239 disconnecting 168
accessing via ODBC 239 editing 693
SWEEP command 37 editing database path 330
SWIDTH variable 969 editing link data 328
swiveling surfaces in 3D 765 filtering records 795, 797
symbol tables 131, 141 finding objects by 814
storing in the current drawing 131 key columns 319
viewing for source drawings 141 link templates 319
symbol-handling functions 967 linking records to objects 316, 322,
symbolization 417 324
symbols 403, 417 linking to while digitizing 718
adding to point layers 403 navigating 687
to represent display elements 417 opening 320
syntax for feature source filters 1100 opening in Data View 691
SYSWINDOWS command 37 options 185
printing 931
querying 691
T saving changes 693
TAB files 207, 333, 346, 916 searching 788
exporting 346, 916 UDL (Universal Data Link) file
importing 333, 346 for 164, 167
importing as folder 207 using database links 785–786
importing single select 207 viewing 687
overview 346 viewing linked objects 790
TABLE command 37 viewing linked records 792
Table Filter dialog box 1079 tables (object data) 158–159, 326, 363,
Table Filter History dialog box 1081 370, 372, 532, 535, 540, 597,
Table Properties dialog box 1081 698–700, 702, 715, 916
TABLEDIT command 37 adding fields 159
TABLEEXPORT command 37 adding records 699
tables (database tables) 164, 167–168, attaching records to objects 698,
185, 316, 319–320, 322, 324, 700
326, 328, 330, 687, 691, 693, converting to database tables 326
creating 158
creating while digitizing 715
1438 | Index
deleting 159 finding objects by 806
displaying data as text 372 height for drawing layer themes 753
editing 159 importing points as 365
exporting 916 insertion point 615
for network topology 535 label point 615
for node topology 532 linking automatically to records 324
for polygon topology 540 options 173
importing 363, 370 specifying type for tables 158
modifying fields 159 units 173
renaming 159 TEXT command 37
viewing for topology 597 Text Expression dialog box 1039
viewing records 702 text styles 365, 474, 806, 820, 824
TABLESTYLE command 37 altering objects based on 824
TABLET command 37 altering using queries 820
tablet for digitizing 109–110 finding objects by 806
TABSURF command 37 for imported text 365
TAG variable 969 redefining on save back 474
Tagged Image File Format files 265–266, TEXTSCR command 37
272 TEXTTOFRONT command 37
adding to maps 266 texture maps 762
using in maps 272 TGA files 272
TARGA files 272 inserting images into maps 272
using in maps 272 Thematic Mapping dialog box 1040
Task Pane 27, 30, 170, 183, 400 thematic maps 262, 431, 820
about 27 adding images 262
data source options 183 legend 431
Display Manager overview 400 Thematic Values dialog box 1041
hiding 30 themes 738, 742, 744, 746, 748–750,
options 170 753, 771, 774
refreshing 30 automatic 744
TASKBAR command 37 based on height, slope, or
templates 659–661, 904, 935 aspect 771
and annotation 659–661 by layer type 738
for map books 904 changing colors for 774
for query reports 935 creating automatically 744
temporary topology 887 creating for drawing layers 750
saving 887 creating for feature layers 742
text 158, 173, 324, 365, 372, 418, 615, distribution methods 746
753, 806, 820, 824, 834 for drawing layers 749, 753
adding for drawing layers 753 using for analysis 738
adding to display elements 418 using transparency 748
adding to queried objects 834 THICKEN command 37
adjusting for map distortion 173 thickness 806, 820, 824
altering objects based on 824 altering objects based on 824
altering using queries 820 altering using queries 820
displaying data as 372 finding objects by 806
1439 | Index
THICKNESS variable 969 buffering performance 880
TIFF files 265–266, 272 changing appearance of nodes 567
adding to maps 266 clustered nodes 514
inserting into maps 272 combining 873
TIFOUT command 37 completing 602
Tile Properties dialog box 1142 converting to polygons 648
tiled drawings 467, 628 correcting 602
matching edges 628 creating 530, 532, 535, 540, 546–
saving back to 467 547
time 859, 864, 868 creating centroids for
tracing in topology 859, 864, 868 polygons 367, 540, 581
TIME command 37 deleting 590, 606
TINSERT command 37 deleting objects 549
TOLERANCE command 37 digitizing objects for 706, 712
tolerance for Drawing Cleanup 482 dissolving 877
TOOLBAR command 37 dissolving composite 876
toolbars 25, 72 dividing polygons 564
customizing 72 editing 549, 557, 560, 564, 570–571
in Autodesk Map 25 editing and deleting profiles 604
TOOLPALETTES command 37 editing partial 587
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE command 37 errors 602
topographic map 759 exporting 923
topology 258, 367, 497, 514, 516, 528, flood trace analysis 868
530, 532, 535, 540, 542, 546– highlighting objects 594
547, 549, 557, 560, 564, 567, islands 602
570–571, 574, 576, 578, 581–582, left-right relationships 540
584, 587, 590–591, 594, 597–599, links 535
602, 604, 606, 645, 648, 706, loading 590–591
712, 855, 859, 862, 864, 868, managing 590
870, 873, 876–877, 880, 886–887, merging polygons 564
923 network 535
adding linear objects 576 node 532
adding links 549 object data in overlay analysis 870
adding nodes 549, 574 object data stored for best route 862
adding polygons 549, 578 overlaying 873
administration 590 overview 528
analyzing 855 polygon 540
and clip operations 870 pseudo nodes 516
and Drawing Cleanup 497 querying 587, 886
and erase operations 870 removing objects 582
and identity 870 renaming 590, 606
and paste operations 870 result 887
and union operations 870 saving 887
auditing 602 saving and loading profiles 604
best route analysis 864 saving to source drawings 599
buffering 880 sliver polygons 542
1440 | Index
splitting polygons 564 trace analysis 859, 864, 868
statistics 598 best route analysis 864
stylizing drawing objects by 258 TRACE command 37
temporary 887 tracing routes 868
unloading 591 TRACKING (command modifier)
updating 584 command 37
using for shortest path trace 859 tracking coordinates 728–729
viewing object data 597 transactions 387
Topology Buffer Create New Centroids and long (versioning) 387
Nodes dialog box 1335 transformation changes in Australia 91
Topology Buffer New Topology dialog transformation types when
box 1335 digitizing 113
Topology Buffer Set Buffer Distance dialog transforming 138, 173, 180, 611
box 1336 coordinates 173, 180
topology cleanup 604 entire source drawing 138
profiles 604 single objects 611
Topology Dissolve Create New Centroids transparency 306, 747
and Nodesa dialog box 1337 and themes 747
Topology Dissolve Create Nodes dialog changing transparent color 306
box 1338 turning on or off 306
Topology Dissolve New Topology dialog Transparency Color dialog box 1244
box 1339 TRANSPARENCY command 37
Topology Dissolve Object Data dialog Transverse Mercator projection 119
box 1340 travel time in network topology 859,
Topology Dissolve Set Parameter dialog 864, 868
box 1341 TRAYSETTINGS command 37
Topology Overlay Analysis Analysis Type TREESTAT command 37
dialog box 1342 TRIM command 37
Topology Overlay Analysis Create New Trim Objects at Boundary dialog
Centroids and Nodes dialog box 1060
box 1344 trimming objects 622
Topology Overlay Analysis Create Nodes True Colors 207
dialog box 1345 importing objects using 207
Topology Overlay Analysis Output TrueVision image files 272
Attributes dialog box 1347 using in maps 272
Topology Overlay Analysis Select Overlay tutorials 36
Topology dialog box 1348 Type SQL Condition dialog box 1232
Topology Overlay Analysiss New Topology TYPE variable 969
dialog box 1346
Topology Query dialog box 1348
Topology Query Result dialog box 1350
U
Topology Selection dialog box 1351 U command 37
Topology Statistics dialog box 1351 UCS command 37
TOPONAME variable 969 UCSICON command 37
TOPOTYPE variable 969 UCSMAN command 37
TORUS command 37
1441 | Index
UDL (Universal Data Link) file 164, 167 upgrading AutoCAD 466
default database version 164 updating source drawings 466
default directory 164 URL variable 969
editing 167 URLs 375, 925
overview 164 exporting to SDF 2 files 925
viewing dialog boxes 167 importing from SDF files 375
UNCLASSIFY command 673 User Administration dialog box 1274
UNDEFINE command 37 User Coordinate System (UCS) 732
Undefined Alias Referenced dialog User Information dialog box 1276
box 1274 user interface 72
undershoots 482, 488, 509 customizing 72
extending 509 User Login dialog box 1276
marking for cleanup 488 users 70, 397
tolerance for extending 482 setting up 70
UNDO command 37 setting up database 397
undoing 393 valid usernames 70
feature class changes in
schemas 393
property changes in schemas 393
V
schema changes in feature variables 615, 964, 969, 973, 975
sources 393 AutoLISP variables 975
unfreezing Data View columns 696 block attributes 973
UNION command 37 dot variables 969
United States grid data files 88 LABELPT 615
units 173, 283 object class properties 975
default 173 object data 973
for image density 283 SQL variables 973
UNITS command 37 VBAIDE command 37
units of measurement 173, 207 VBALOAD command 37
converting for text 173 VBAMAN command 37
default for exporting DGN files 207 VBARUN command 37
Universal Transverse Mercator VBASTMT command 37
System 119 VBAUNLOAD command 37
unloading 296, 591 vector data 763
raster images 296 draping on 3D surfaces 763
topologies 591 Vector Markup Language 354
unlocking objects 456, 470 Vector Markup Language files 916
unused groups 474 exporting 916
removing on save back 474 Vector Product Format (VPF) 207, 355
UPDATEFIELD command 37 exporting 355
UPDATETHUMBSNOW command 37 importing 355
updating features automatically 445, importing as folder 207
450 importing single select 207
turning off 450 overview 355
updating topology 584 Vector Product Format files 333
importing 333
1442 | Index
versioning 223, 451 VML (Vector Markup Language) 354,
for feature data 451 916
for feature sources 223 exporting 916
versioning (long transactions) 387 VPCLIP command 37
vertical exaggeration 769 VPF (Vector Product Format 355
VIEW command 37 importing 355
View Query Statement dialog box 1112 VPF (Vector Product Format) 207, 333,
View SQL Statement dialog box 355
(OSE) 1172 exporting 355
viewing 126, 139, 141, 167, 194, 275, importing 333
288, 301, 304, 386, 455, 460, importing as folder 207
465, 597–598, 687, 702, 765, importing single select 207
790, 792, 795, 797 overview 355
configuration dialog boxes 167 VPLAYER command 37
coordinate system assignment 126 VPMAX command 37
data linked to drawing objects 792 VPMIN command 37
database tables 687 VPOINT command 37
drawing objects linked to data 790 VPORTS command 37
drawings 460 VSCURRENT command 37
in 3D 765 VSLIDE command 37
maps 460 VSSAVE command 37
object data records 702 VTOPTIONS command 37
object locks 455
objects in save set 465
Quick View 460
W
raster image frames 301 walk through for surfaces 765
raster image information 288 WALKFLYSETTINGS command 37
raster images 194, 275, 304 watersheds 540
save back extents 139 creating polygon topology for 540
schemas 386 wavelet files (ECW) 272
selected records in table 795, 797 using in maps 272
source drawing information 141 WBLOCK command 37
source drawings 460 Web Feature Service 242
statistics for source drawings 141 adding feature data 242
topology data 597 Web Map Service 267
topology statistics 598 using with maps 267
using Quick View 460 web pages 354
VIEWPLOTDETAILS command 37 exporting to 354
VIEWRES command 37 WEDGE command 37
Visual FoxPro 164, 186 weeding 523, 526–527
attaching database to drawing 164 3D polylines 526–527
setting default version 186 bulge 523
using database from 164 defined 523
VISUALSTYLES command 37 supplementing factors 523
VISUALSTYLESCLOSE command 37 weeding lines 521
VLISP command 37
1443 | Index
wells 532 XEDGES command 37
creating topology for 532 XLINE command 37
WFS 242 XLS files 164, 186
adding feature data 242 attaching to drawing 164
using as a data source 242 setting default version 186
WHOHAS command 37 XMI files 385
width 116, 820, 880 importing as schemas 385
altering using queries 820 XML files 108, 385
digitizing 116 exporting schemas as 385
for buffer corridor 880 for object class definitions 108
wild-card characters 959 importing as schemas 385
using in dialog boxes 959 XOPEN command 37
window boundary for query XPLODE command 37
location 804 XREF command 37
windows 804 xrefs 130, 853
boundary for query location 804 and drawings 130
finding all objects in 804 querying 853
query location 804 XSCALE variable 969
WIPEOUT command 37 xx 1117–1119, 1127, 1129–1135, 1137
WMFIN command 37
WMFOPTS command 37
WMFOUT command 37
Y
WMS 267 YSCALE variable 969
using with maps 267
WMS rasters 261
adding to maps 261 Z
work environment 24, 33
Autodesk Map 24 zero-length objects 522
switching in Autodesk Map 33 identifying and removing 522
working offline 450 zero-length onjects 522
WORKSPACE command 37 ZOOM command 37
workspaces 33, 72 Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box 1358
creating 72 Zoom Scale dialog box 1082
in Autodesk Map 72 zoom scale factor 790
switching between 72 for Data View 790
switching between Map 3D and Map Zoom To Extents 433
Classic 33 using with raster feature sources 433
World Coordinate System (WCS) 732 zooming 294, 428, 458, 726, 765, 790
WSSAVE command 37 Display Manager 428
WSSETTINGS command 37 surfaces in 3D 765
to drawing extents 458
to drawing objects linked to selected
X data 790
to raster images 294
XATTACH command 37 using Data Grid 726
XBIND command 37 ZSCALE variable 969
XCLIP command 37
1444 | Index
You might also like
- P&id, Isometric, Gad, Engineering DrawingsNo ratings yetP&id, Isometric, Gad, Engineering Drawings10 pages
- Preproduction Blueprint - How To - Alex GaluzinNo ratings yetPreproduction Blueprint - How To - Alex Galuzin355 pages
- Learning Hatching For Pen-And-Ink Illustration ofNo ratings yetLearning Hatching For Pen-And-Ink Illustration of18 pages
- Presentation - 11198 - REVITalize Bridge Design100% (1)Presentation - 11198 - REVITalize Bridge Design38 pages
- Provi What'S New in Version 6.0: 1 GeneralNo ratings yetProvi What'S New in Version 6.0: 1 General32 pages
- 3D Brilliance-The Art of Lighting and Rendering in MayaNo ratings yet3D Brilliance-The Art of Lighting and Rendering in Maya17 pages
- microCT SKYSCAN 1273 Brochure DOC-B76-EXS014 HighNo ratings yetmicroCT SKYSCAN 1273 Brochure DOC-B76-EXS014 High12 pages
- Graphics Programming Using Opengl: Vinod Pathangay Ph. D. Scholar Visualization and Perception Lab Iit MadrasNo ratings yetGraphics Programming Using Opengl: Vinod Pathangay Ph. D. Scholar Visualization and Perception Lab Iit Madras27 pages
- Boussinesq Formulae For The Vertical Stress IncrementNo ratings yetBoussinesq Formulae For The Vertical Stress Increment2 pages
- 8ebc0ff5 3419 4f4f B6ad Acc1bcf8f1db - classPresentationCI125444HowtoConnectAutoCADCivil3DwithRevitNo ratings yet8ebc0ff5 3419 4f4f B6ad Acc1bcf8f1db - classPresentationCI125444HowtoConnectAutoCADCivil3DwithRevit2 pages
- AutoCad Map 3D 2008 - .NET Developer's GuideNo ratings yetAutoCad Map 3D 2008 - .NET Developer's Guide96 pages
- Nightdrake A Free Short Story by Lara AdrianNo ratings yetNightdrake A Free Short Story by Lara Adrian32 pages
- Altoire Hibiscus-Grafting Trandafir JaponezNo ratings yetAltoire Hibiscus-Grafting Trandafir Japonez10 pages
- Objectarx Developer'S Guide: Autocad Map 3D 2008No ratings yetObjectarx Developer'S Guide: Autocad Map 3D 2008196 pages
- Class Handout CI124118 MEP Modeling Made Easy With Dynamo Cesare Caoduro 2No ratings yetClass Handout CI124118 MEP Modeling Made Easy With Dynamo Cesare Caoduro 229 pages
- Best Practices For Working With Large Data Sets: Autocad Civil 3D 2008No ratings yetBest Practices For Working With Large Data Sets: Autocad Civil 3D 200832 pages
- Modelarea Bazinelor Hidrografice in Civil 3D - Watershed ModelingNo ratings yetModelarea Bazinelor Hidrografice in Civil 3D - Watershed Modeling12 pages
- Autodesk Raster Design 2006 Getting Started GuideNo ratings yetAutodesk Raster Design 2006 Getting Started Guide122 pages
- AutoCAD 2020: A Problem - Solving Approach, Basic and Intermediate, 26th EditionFrom EverandAutoCAD 2020: A Problem - Solving Approach, Basic and Intermediate, 26th EditionNo ratings yet
- Autodesk 3ds Max 2017 for Beginners: A Tutorial Approach, 17th EditionFrom EverandAutodesk 3ds Max 2017 for Beginners: A Tutorial Approach, 17th EditionNo ratings yet
- Learning SOLIDWORKS 2019: A Project Based Approach, 3rd EditionFrom EverandLearning SOLIDWORKS 2019: A Project Based Approach, 3rd EditionNo ratings yet
- AutoCAD 2016: A Problem-Solving Approach, 3D and AdvancedFrom EverandAutoCAD 2016: A Problem-Solving Approach, 3D and AdvancedNo ratings yet
